m ^ „ ^

\ Z CO — f> — (/) _

)NiAN~lNSTITUTION NOIinillSNI NIVINOSHlllMS S3 I ava 9 H^LI B R AR I ES^SMITHSONIAN INSTITUT

C/)

o
z

Hiiws'^s3 i avy a n^ LI B rar i Es'^SMiTHsoNiAN_iNSTiTUTiON^NoiiniiiSNi_NviNOSHiiiMs|^'s3 i ava

ONlAN~'lNSTITUTION NI0liniliSNIl|l!NVIN0SHillMS^S3 I ava 9 H^LI B RAR I ES^SMITHSONIAN^INSTITUT

Hims'^ss I ava 9 n~Li B rar I es^smithsonian iNSTiTUTiON%oiinniSNt^NViNOSHiiws^S3 1 ava

r?^/-

ONlAN^INSTITUTlON*^NOIiniIiSNI_NIVINOSHilWS S3 I a Va 9 n_LI B RAR 1 ES SMITHS0NIANJNST1TU1

;Hiiws^s3l a va 9 n"'Li b rar i es^smithson!An"'institution NoiiniiiSNi"'NviNOSHims S3 1 avi

^ Z \iUii-' j^ Z tfl £ O) . _

50NIAN~INSTITUTI0N NOIinillSNI NVINOSHIIWS S3 I aVa 8 H^LI B RAR I ES^SMITHSONIAN INSTITU
SHimS*^S3 I ava 9 n^ LI B RAR I ES^SMITHSONIAN JNSTITUTI0N^N0linillSNI_NVINOSHllWS^S3 I av!
S0NlAN:;iNSTITUTl0N^N0liniIlSNi;;^NVIN0SHllWS^S3iava9n^LIBRARIES^SMITHS0NIAN^INSTITU

,« Z — {/> ± to _ ^

iSHimS S3iava9n~LIBRARiES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOIinillSNI NVIN0SHiiWS^S3 1 av;

,„ i ^# i ^^ 8 if... Jl) i ^^ s mi^ s (li ill 8

nillSNINVINOSHilWS S3 1 avy an LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOIinillSNI NVINOS

o

!AR I ES SMITHSONIAN_INSTITUTlON N0linillSNI_NVIN0SHillMs'^S3 I a VU 8 11^ LI B RAR I Es'^SMITHS

u^4

''VDC,

-lillSNI~^NVINOSHimS S3 I d VH 8 n~'LI B R AR I ES^SMITHSONlAN~'lNSTITUTION^NOIini!iSNl"'NVINOS
__,,,^ \2 ' ^ r~ H r~ z —

(^ - M — ? c/) — E t/)

ARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOIiniliSNI NVINOSHillMS SSiaVdail LIBRARIES SMITHS

"' — ZtCO Z CO "^

^

UliSNI_NVmOSHilWs|^S3 I a VH a n\| B RAR I Es'^SMITHSONIAN JNSTITUTION '^NOIiflillSNI^NVmOS

2 -J Z -J Z J z

ARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOIifllllSNI NVINOSHilWS S3iavaan LIBRARIES SMITHS
"^ *" , ^ z r- 2- r- z

'>!

niiiSNi~NviNOSHiiws S3 1 a vd 3 n~Li B R AR I es'^smithsonian'institution"' '^°'-'-'^^'^s'^'~^^"^°s

libraries SMITHS(

V)

r i '^f» t ^% i

-to Z </J^, Z C/5- —

AR I ES^SMITHSONlAN_INSTITUTION^NOIiniIlSNI_NVINOSHiIWS S3 I ava 8 !!_

o

UliSNl||^NVINOSHillMs"'s3iavaan~^LIBRARIES^SMITHSON7AN~'lNSTITUTION NOIiniliSNI~'NVINOSI

00 ± CO Z j„ £ CO

ARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOIiniliSNI NVINOSHIIWS S3iavaan LIBRARIES SMITHS(

^ Z » W Z '" 2" - CO

UllSNI NVINOSHIIIAIS S'^IMVMPn iinoADirc cii;iiTucnMi am imctiti irinNr

NOIiniliSNI NVINOSh

T.

^o^

-^jfc-

voLUT^ni: XI 1 1 ,

1,049,348 - 1,083,045.
Jfinuary 7, 1913, - December 30, 1913.

Aylsworth, J. *,

H n It

Bab son & Ifeug,

It HI!

Bliss, D.M,
Burke, A. L.
Butler, C.C,

Carlson, C. G,
Catucci, P.

N II

N n

It H

N n
N n
M n

Condon, E. T,
Constabel, A.
Cook, -v. H.
Cunnius, A. '\,

De La ^^ue, ^.,
Dennison, '■. N.

II II M

Diehl, A. C.
Dyer, F. L.,

H H ti

N H tl

Edison, T

A,

M

» II

H II

J,

1,

,060,

,577 -

1<

,062,

,57i^ -

1,

,074,

,080 -

1.

,076,

,621 '

1,

,076,

,741"

1.

,065,

,212 -

ll

,0B1,

,719 -

ll

,077,

,593 '

1.

,059,

,345 -

1.

,059,

,346 -

1.

,C61,

,729 -

1,

,067,

,405 -

1.

,077,

,973 ^

1.

,080,

,953 '

1.

,080,

,954 -

1.

,080,

,328 '

1.

,073,

,961 '

1.

062,

,224 -

1.

054,

,395 -

1.

051,

489 ^

1.

060,

235 -

1.

060,

672 -

1.

073,

408 -

1.

054,

096 -

1.

075,

771 -

1.

081,

37 4 ^

1»

050,

355 -

1,

052,

656 -

1,

055,

621 -

1.

056,

517 -

MAY 15 1950

Edison, T, A.

^tafering, J. H.
"'inerson, G. !<!,
aneraon. V. H.
janerr.on & iJ^nwaring,
TCnglish, J. C,

n

n

>•

N

ii

n

N

H M

n

-'liiglisli 2: Johnson.

1,078,
1,078,
1,078,
1,060,
1,068,
1,050,
1,055,
1,049,
1,054,
1,067.
1.071.
1,071.
1,072.
1.07b,

264 "

265 '

266 -
541 -
231 -
932 ^
525 -
348 '
062 -
905 --
033 -
610 -
854 '
208 -

Pilsa, A.
Jromholz. R.

1,068,877 -
1,075,700 '

TIaines, J.H.J,
M. Haug & Bab son, /4.6.

Hayes, A.
" »i

H H

N n

H II

Hibbnrd, C. L.
Hodges, W. J.
Ho Bier, J.
Houlston, F. W,

1,079,

1.074,

1,076,

1,061,

1.061,

1.061,

1,071,

1.071.

1,070,

1,069.

1,063,

1,069,

123 ^

C80 '''
621 ■
07 (. -

071 t

072 -
667
668
959 -
784 ^
262 ^
642 ^

Joluison,

Johiison & ISm'lish

H

Jones

R. H,

Jordan, S. G,

1.060.550 -
1.068,591 -
1,071,055"
1,072,054 -
1,075,288 -^
1.058,754^

1.060.551 ^

Kenyon, C. S,

Kinney, F. f-. (Dec'd.)

ivitsee, I.

1,059,939
1.071,436
1,074,873

-2-

Lindotrorn, C. 1.067.530

Luciano. A, 1,080,0:59 -

l,07:i,477^
1,07 7,536-

Lumiere, L, l,07:i.47 7

Macdonnld. T. H. 1,054,359 -

" " " 1.037,933 -

" " " 1,071,067 -

" " " 1,070,419 -

Maiiwari n^ k I'Ime rson , 1 , 05r> , 5P. 5 -

Meling, G. 1,072*346 -

Mertx. 0. K. 1,06Z-.821--

Wilier, H. G. 1,050,743 ""

" "' '• 1,063.823-

,,. " " " 1,076,385 ■

killer, W. H. 1,068,441-

Mitchell, H. G. M. 1,077.361^

Owen, J. W. 1.080,924

Possona, M. A, 1,069,464^

•' " " 1,078,460 -

Preezter, H, 1,069,578 -

^ / " 1,076,643 ■

Pudumjee, F, D. 1,051,513-

Quade, H. ^V, 1,060,209

Hnbbitt, J. A. 1,064,931-

'^^"'^s. G. 1,061,124 -^

Rawles. '.V. H, 1,080,231 --

Hinehnrt, B. L, 1,071,089--

Hoever, J. 1,049,923 --

" " 1,072,873 -

Hoot, C. II. 1,061, 963 ^

Huge^les, P. J3. 1,061,408 ^

Sabine, '7;. G. 1,065,808

SchuLoacher, J. 1,082,709

Sciiwer, A, 1,058,911

Gr-iith, B, H. 1,060,955

1,062,369

II II

-3-

Thiel, 0. 1,072.529 "^

Thormeyer, F. ?!:, 1,063,086 "^

Weber, P. 1,056^475^

" " 1,058,284 *-

" " 1,081,352 ^

'Uckes, C, S, 1,059,418-

Young, VV. \«/. 1,061,211

Zackey, W. W. 1,067,569

" •* " 1,033,045

-4-

J. C. ENGLISH.

TONE ARM FOE TALKING MACHINES.

APPLICATION PILED MAE. 24, 1911.

1,049,348.

Patented Jan. 7, 1913.

2 SHEETS-SHEET 1,

^JCZy^.J.

^^

INVENTOR

(7bA/7 C.S^/7-g/j^h

WITNESSES

BY

ATTORNEY

COLUMBIA PLANOORAPH CO., WASHINOTON, D. C.

1,049,348.

J. C. ENGLISH.

TONE AKM FOR TALKING MACHINES.

APPLICATION FILED. MAE. 24, 1911.

Patented Jan. 7, 1913.

2 SHEETS-SHEET 2.

J^t^. <3.

INVENTOR

ATTORNEY

CO.. WASHINGTON. D. «:

tINITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

JOHN C. ENGLISH, OF CAMDEN, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR TO VICTOR TAlKING
MACHINE COMPANY, A CORPORATION OF NEW JERSEY.

TONE-ARM FOR TALKING-MACHINES.

1,049,348.

Specification of letters Patent. Patented Jan. 7, 1913.

Application filed March 24, 1911. Serial No. 616,667.

To all whom it may concern:

Be it known that I, John C. English, a
citizen of the United States, and a resident
of Camden, in the county of Camden and
5 State of New Jersey, have invented certain
new and useful Improvements in Tone-
Arms for Talking -Machines, whereof the
following is a specification, reference being
had to the accompanying drawings.

10 This invention particularly relates to the

means for connecting a sound reproducer

with the swinging tone arm of a talking

machine.

The principal objects of this invention

15 are, to provide a simple and efficient mount-
ing for connecting the tone arm and sound
reproducer, which is cooperative with said
arm when said reproducer is in operative
position to afford a smooth, uninterrupted.

20 continuous conduit for the free passage of
sound waves; and to provide a compact
structure which when in inoperative posi-
tion may be inclosed in a minimum space.
Further objects of this invention are to

25 provide such a pivoted connection between
said tone arm and sound reproducer as to
permit the free movement of said repro-
ducer relative to said arm, effected by pos-
sible slight irregularities in the record disk,

30 and to permit the movement of said repro-
ducer from said record to its inoperative
position; to provide means carried by said
arm to support said reproducer in an ap-
proximately operative position, independ-

35 ently of the turn-table of said talking ma-
chine; to provide means to support said
sound reproducer in its inoperative position
at the side of said arm, and extending below
the top thereof; and to provide means to au-

40 tomatically close said conduit when said
sound reproducer is disposed in its inopera-
tive position.

The form of the invention hereinafter
described provides a hollow tapered tone

45 arm suitably mounted to swing on a sub-
stantially vertical axis, and having its free
end curved laterally and terminating in a
flanged collar, to which is pivoted a simi-
lar flanged collar on the tubular mounting,

50 upon the free end of which the sound re-
producer is removably attached. The flange
of the mounting is provided with a lug or
hook operative to engage suitably disposed
lugs on the flange of said arm, and respec-

tively arranged to support the sound repro- 55
ducer in approximately operative position,
and in its inoperative position.

This invention further includes all of the
various novel features of construction and
arrangement hereinafter more definitely 60
specified.

In the accompanying drawings. Figure 1
is a fragmentai-y sectional elevation of a
talking machine, showing the tone arm car-
rjdng a sound reproducer in operative re- 65
lation to a sound record disk; Fig. 2 is a
fragmentary plan sectional view of the
structure shown in Fig. 1; Fig. 3 is a side
elevation al view of said tone arm support-
ing the reproducer in an approximately op- 70
erative position, independently of the sound
record disk; Fig. 4 is a fragmentary view
similar to Fig. 3, but showing the sound
reproducer inverted to its inoperative po-
sition; Fig. 5 is a plan view of the structure 75
as shown in Fig. 4, exclusive of the casing;
and Fig. 6 is a perspective view of the sound
reproducer mounting per se.

In said figures, the tone arm 7 is mounted
to swing in a plane substantially parallel 80
with the turn-table 8, upon the trunnions 9
and 10, which are respectively supported in
bearings 11 and 12 in a well-known manner.
Said tone arm 7 is preferably tapered
throughout its extent and has its free end 85
14 curved laterally, and terminating in a
flanged collar 15, which is provided with a
boss 16, having a threaded aperture 17 dis-
posed at one side of the end of the tone arm,
arranged to receive the pivot pin 18, upon 90
which the sound reproducer mounting 20 is
swiveled. Said mounting 20 is preferably
provided with a flanged collar 21, which is
similar to collar 15 on the tone arm 7, and
which is provided with a boss 22 having an 95
aperture 23 through which the pivot pin 18
extends.

As best shown in Figs. 1, 3 and 4, the
flanges 15 and 21 each have an imperforate
extension, eccentric to tlie respective open- 100
ings therethrough, and the flange 15 is pro-
vided with suitably disposed })eripheral lugs
25 and 26, which are respectively provided
with projections 27 and 28, extending from
the face of said plate and arranged to be en- 105
gaged by a peripheral hook or lug 30 on the
flange 21.

As best shown in Figs. 4 and 5, the pro-

^

1,049,348

jection 27 is arranged to support the sound
reproducer 32 in its inoperative position,
spaced from the side of the intermediate por-
tion of the tone arm 7 and in close proxim-
5 ity to the turn-table 8, so as to be supported
substantially below the upward extension of
the tone arm support, the axis of said sound
reproducer 32 being disposed substantially
in a plane with the axis of the straight in-

20 termediate portion of the tone arm 7. The
projection 28 is arranged to support said
sound reproducer 32 in an approximately
operative position, independently of a sound
record disk 31, or its supporting turn-table

15 8, as shown in Fig. 3.

The sound reproducer 32 may be suitably
connected in removable relation with the
mounting 20 in any well-known manner ; for
instance, by the usual means including the

20 bayonet slot 33, as best shown in Fig. 6, which
is cooperative with the projecting pin 34, as
shown in Fig. 3.

As best shown in Fig. 2, the conduit
formed by the cooperation of the sound re-

25 producer mounting 20 with the tone arm 7,
when in registry, provides a smooth, regu-
lar passageway, substantially in the form
of an ogee curve, free from pockets or other
eddy-producing obstructions.

30 Referring again to Fig. 2, it will be seen
that by the construction contemplated, the
sound reproducer 32, when inverted to its
inoperative position, may be swung to such
a lateral position with respect to the tone

35 arm 7, that its upwardly extending extremi-
ties are substantially below or on a level
with the supporting members of said tone
arm. Thus it will be seen that the mecha-
nism may be inclosed in a smaller space

40 than when the sound reproducer rests upon
the tone arm when in its inoperative posi-
tion. Therefore, it will also be obvious that
the lid or cover 35 may be disposed in closer
relation to the turn-table 8 of the machine

45 than in machines heretofore constructed,
whereby the height of the machine may be
materially reduced.

Referring to Figs. 4 and 5, it will be
noted that the conduit formed by the co-

50 operation of the mounting 20 and the tone
arm 7 is closed by the imperforate eccentric
portions of the respective flanges 15 and 23,
when the sound reproducer is disposed in
its inoperative position, so as to prevent

66 the entrance of dust into said conduit.

It is not desired to limit this invention to
the precise details of construction and ar-
rangement herein set forth, as it is obvious
that various modifications may be made

60 therein without departing from the essen-
tial features of the invention as defined in
the appended claims.

Having thus described my invention, I
claim :

65 1. The combination with a hollow tone arm

having an open longitudinally curved free
end, of an elongated tubular mounting for a
sound reproducer, arranged to swing into
and out of alinement with said curved free
end, and cooperative therewith to form a ^q
continuous smooth conduit for uninter-
ruptedly conveying sound waves.

2. The combination with a tone arm hav-
ing a laterally directed free end, of a sound
box mounting pivoted for oscillation rel- yg
atively to said end on a laterally disposed
axis, said mounting being arranged to oscil-
late into and out of registry with said end,
and having means to close said end when
out of, registry. g^

3. The combination with a tone arm
mounted to swing on a vertical axis and
having a laterally curved free end termi-
nating in a flange, of a curved mounting
for a sound reproducer, provided with a 35
similar flange, means to pivotally connect
said flanges whereby the axes of said arm
and mounting are arranged to register when
said sound reproducer is disposed in oper-
ative position, and are thrown out of regis- 90
try when said sound reproducer is disposed

in an inoperative position.

4. The combination with a tone arin
mounted to swing on a vertical axis, and
having a laterally curved free end terminat- 95
ing in an eccentric flange, of a curved
mounting for a sound reproducer provided
with a flange, means to pivotally connect
said flanges, the axes of said arm and mount-
ing being arranged to register when said io(
sound reproducer is disposed in operative
position, and being thrown out of registry
when said sound reproducer is disposed m
inoperative position, and said flanges being
arranged to open and close the conduit 101
formed by said arm and mounting.

5. The combination with a tone arm
mounted to swing on a vertical axis, and
having a laterally curved free end terminat-
ing in an eccentric flange, of a curved m
mounting for a sound reproducer, compris-
ing a hollow sound conve3^er provided with

a similar flange, means to pivotally connect
said flanges, whereby the axes of said arm
and mounting are maintained in registry m
when said sound reproducer is disposed in
operative position, and are thrown out of
registry when said sound reproducer is dis-
posed in an inoperative position, the eccen-
tric portions of said flanges being operative 121
to automatically close the conduit formed in
said arm and mounting.

6. The combination with a tone arm hav-
ing a laterally curved free end terminating

in an eccentric flange, of a curved mounting i2j
for a sound reproducer, comprising a hol-
low sound conveyer, provided Avith a simi-
lar flange, and cooperative with said arm to
form a continuous, uninterrupted conduit
when in registry therewith, the flanges on 131

l,04d,348

said arm and mounting being respectively
operative to close said conduit when in in-
operative position.

7. A tone arm comprising relatively mov-
5 able sections abutted in alinement when in

operative position, each terminating in op-
posed eccentric flanges, means pivotally
connecting said flanges and forming an axis
upon which one of said sections may oscil-
10 late, the eccentric portions of said flanges
being resjDectively operative to close the
opening in the opposed flange when said
sections are in inoi^erative position.

8. The combination with a hollow tone
15 arm terminating in a transverse flange pro-
vided with a projection, of a hollow mount-
ing for a sound reproducer, comprising a
sound conveyer cooperative with said arm
to form a sound conduit, and terminating in

20 a flange opposed to the flange on said arm,
and having a projection arranged to engage
the projection on the flange of said arm to
support the sound reproducer in an inopera-
tive position at the side of and below the top

25 of said arm, said flanges being utilized to
close said conduit.

9. The combination with a tone arm hav-
ing a laterally curved free end, terminating
in a flange having projections, of a curved

30 mounting for a sound reproducer, compris-
ing a tubular sound conve3'^er, cooperative
with said arm to form a sound conduit, and
having a flange opposed to the flange on said
arm, and provided with a projection opera-

35 tive to engage the respective projections on
the flange on said arm, to support said
sound reproducer in an approximately op-
erative position, .and in an inoperative posi-
tion.

40 10. The combination with a tone arm hav-
ing a laterally curved free end terminating
in an eccentric flange having projections, of
a curved mounting for a sound reproducer
comprising a tubular sound conveyer pro-

46 vided with an eccentric flange, having a pro-
jection operative to engage the respective
projections on the flange on said arm, and a
pivotal connection engaging said flanges,
whereby said mounting may oscillate into

60 and out of alinement with the end of said
arm, the projection on the flange of said
mounting being operative to engage one of
the projections on the flange of said arm to
support the sound reproducer in an approxi-

56 mately operative position, and arranged to
engage the other projection to support said
sound reproducer in an inoperative posi-
tion with its axis, substantially in a plane
with the axis of said arm.

60 11. The combination with a tone aimi hav-
ing a laterally curved free end terminating
in an elongated flange, of a mounting for a
.sound reproducer terminating in a flange
substantially conforming to the flange on

65 said tone arm, and means extending cen-

trally through said flanges arranged to piv-
otally support their faces in contact, and to
movably supi)ort said tone arm and mount-
ing in alinement when in operative posi-
tion, the respective flanges being operative 70
to close the respective openings m the tone
arm and mounting when in an inoperative
position.

12. In a talking machine, the combina-
tion with a tubular tone arm having a fi-ee 75
open end projecting transversely and later-
ally from the main portion of said arm, of a
longitudinally curved elongated tubular
mounting for a sound reproducer eccentri-
cally connected to said free end and cooper- sO
ating therewith to form a conduit for sound
waves.

13. In a talking machine, the combination
with a tubular tone arm having a free open
end projecting transversely and laterally 85
from the main portion of said arm, of a
longitudinally curved elongated tubular
mounting for a sound reproducer eccentrj-
cally connected to said free end upon an axis
substantially parallel to the longitudinal 90
axis of said end and cooperating therewith

to form a conduit for sound waves.

14. In a talking machine, the combination
with a tubular tone arm curved adjacent to

its free end at right angles to the major por- 95
tion of its longitudinal axis and provided
with an inlet in its free end, of elongated
longitudinally curved means movably con-
nected to said arm and having a flat wall
arranged to open and close said inlet, and a lOO
sound reproducer carried by said means and
arranged to be thrown thereby into and out
of communication with said inlet.

15. In a talking machine, the combination
with a tubular tone arm curved adjacent to 106
its free end at right angles to the major por-
tion of its longitudinal axis and having its
said free end open, of elongated longitudi-
nally curved means connected in abutted re-
lation to said arm and mounted to oscillate lio
about an axis eccentric to, but substantially
parallel with the longitudinal axis of said
open end and arranged to open and close
said open end, and a sound reproducer car-
ried by said means and movable into and ?.15
out of communication with said open end.

16. In a talking machine, the combination
with a tubular tone arm having a free open
end projecting transversely from the main
portion of the said arm, means carried by 120
said arm and mounted to oscillate with re-
spect thereto to open and close said open end,

an elongated tubular mounting for a sound
reproducer carried by said means and ar-
ranged to swing thereon into and out of 125
communication with said open end, and a
sound reproducer carried by and communi-
cating with said mounting.

17. In a talking machine, the combination
with a tubular tone arm having a free open 130

•dk

1,049,348

end projecting transversely and laterally
from the main portion of the said arm,
means carried by said arm and mounted to
oscillate with respect thereto to open and
close said open end, an elongated longitudi-
nally curved substantially U-shaped tubu-
lar mounting for a sound reproducer carried
by said means and arranged to swing there-
on into and out of communication with said

open end, and a sound reproducer carried by
and communicating with said mounting.

In witness whereof, I have hereunto set
my hand this 17th day of March, A. D.,
1911.

JOHN C. ENGLISH.
Witnesses :

Feank B. Middleton, Jr.,
Charles F. Willaed,

10

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

Washington, D. C."

J. ROEVER.

MULTIPLE PHONOGRAPH.

APPLICATION PILED MATH, 1910.

1,049,923.

Patented Jan. 7, 1913.

^^' ^Jh^ T^^e^. ^A^^A^^.

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

JULIUS ROEVER, OE NEW YORK, N. Y.
MULTIPLE PHONOGRAPH.

1,049,923.

Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Jan. 7, 1913.

Application filed May 11, 1910. Serial No. 560,569.

To all whom it may concern:

Be it known that I, Julius Roever, of
the city of Xew York, county of Queens, and
State of New York, have invented a iiew and
5 u.5eful Iniprovenient in Multiple Phono-
graphs, of which the following is a full,
clear, and exact description.

My invention relates to improvements in
multiple phonographs in which a wheel is

10 used, the said wheel carrying on its circum-
ference a series of records which are brought
in turn or as desired beneath the reproduc-
ing mechanism. Machines of this kind are
used in public places and are operated after

15 drojiping in a coin, and it is necessary and
desirable occasionally to change the records
and give a new list of pieces or tunes.

The object of the present invention is to
provide a device for supporting the records

20 so that they may be easil}' and quickly
changed, and so that when changed the ma-
chine may be assembled for operation again
without any chance of jamming of the dif-
ferent parts so that there will be too much

25 friction for the proper running of the mech-
anism. To this end I provide a rotatable
record wheel carrying record holders near
its periphery, the record holders being sup-
ported by the wheel only at one end of the

30 holder and at right angles to the surface of
the wheel. The records are changed by
merely slipping them off and on the holder.
In connection with the record wheel I pro-
vide a disk rotatable with the wheel and

35 having cards or other means secured there-
to indicating the name of the tune or piece
of the corresponding record on the wheel,
and an indicator set at a point where it is
necessary to stop in order to have a desired

40 record brought under the stylus of the re-
producer.

Eeference is to be had to the accompany-
ing drawings forming a part of this in-
vention, in which similar reference charac-

45 ters indicate corresponding parts in all the
views.

Figure 1 is a broken front elevation of a
machine showing my improvements, and
Fig. 2 is a cross sectional view through the

50 center and the upper part of the same.

I have shown the invention in connection
with the post or support 10 which supports
the horizontal shaft 11, said shaft being held
stationary in the post by the lug 12. The

55 record wheel 13 is mounted upon the sleeve
14 which is carried by the shaft 11 and ro-

tated thereon. Between the sleeve 14 and
the shaft 11 I provide a bearing sleeve 15
and a set screw 16 so that the bearing will
revolve with the sleeve 14. The record 60
wheel 13 is a metal disk or frame, and is
rigidly secured to the sleeve 14 and revolves
Avith it. Along the peripliery of the Avheol
are arranged the record holders 17 whicli
are supported on the horizontal shaft 18. 65
The shaft 18 is sujoported in the sleeve 19,
the latter being rigidly secured to the wheel
13 and carries the ball bearings 20 and 20^
which allows for easy rotation of the
shaft 18. 7Q

At 21 on the inner end of the shaft 18 I
have shown a pinion or friction disk secured
to said shaft, which can be operated by any
desired mechanism for rotating the shaft
and the record holder on it. The record 75
holder proper 17 is mounted on the outer
end of the shaft 18 and is held rigidly
against the .shaft by a set screw 22. It will
thus be seen that I provide a means for
mounting the record holder on the record go
wheel so that the outer end of the holder is ,
free, thus making it possible to change the
records by mereh^ slipping them off and on
over the end of the holder.

At 22^ I have shown a brn.sh loosely hung 35
on the sleeve 14 and having a weighted end
22^ This brush does not revolve with the
sleeve 14 and record wheel 13, but remains
in an upright position by reason of the
weighted end 22'', and therefore as it is ar- go
ranged to contact with a record, it will keep
the record clean from dust and other par-
ticles of dirt while the record is being re-
volved under the reproducer.

In order that the name of the tune or 95
song upon the record may be indicated to
one desiring to use the machine, I provide a
disk 23 which is carried on a sleeve 24 and
will rotate on the sliaft 11 at the same time
with the record wheel 13. as the sleeve 24 is 100
locked with the sleeve 14 by the pin 25.
Openings 26 are provided near the outer
edge of the disk 23, and a spring 27 which
is secured at one end 28 to the inner sur-
face of the disk 23, and thus a card bear- 105
ing the name of the tune upon the phono-
graphic record directly behind it may be
supported plainW in view.

In order to provide for centering the rec-
ord which it is desired to hear beneath the 110
reproducer, I provide an indicator 29 which
is rigidly supported on the shaft 11 and

1,049,923

points where the record wheel should stop,
in order that the desired record may be acted
upon by the mechanism of the reproducer.
I have not shown the reproducer in the draw-
5 ings, as it forms no j)art of my present in-
vention, but it would preferably be placed
just above the record wheel 13. The indi-
cator 29 is attached to the thimble 30 which
fits over the outer end of the shaft 11, and is
10 held rigidly in place by the spring pressed
pin 31. This pin has a head 32 and is mov-
abl}^ supported in the casing 33 which forms
the lower part of the thimble 30, by the
spring 35 which abuts against the collar 34
on the pin and against the nut 36 which is
screwed over the end of the casing 33. The
spring 35 acting on the collar 34 presses the
pin into the depression in the shaft 11, and
thus locks the thimble 30 and the indicator
29 firmly in place. The inner edge of the
thimble 30 is provided with a collar 36
which abuts against the spring 37. The
siDring 37 is secured to the outer surface of
the disk (see Fig. 1) and thus holds the
sleeve 24 snugly against the sleeve 14, lock-
ing them firmly by means of the pin 25.
The operator, then, in order to change the
records, simply pulls down the spring
pressed pin 31 and pulls oE the thimble 30.
The sleeve 24 carrying the disk 23 can then
be pulled off and the records changed by
simply slipping them off and on the record
holders 17. As the record holders are sup-
ported on the record wheel 13 only at one
end of the holder, it is evident that I pro-
vide a very simple and easy means for
changing the records. When the records

15

20

30

35

40

have been changed, the disk is replaced and
locked against the sleeve 14, and the indica-
tor and thimble put on and secured to the
end of the shaft, and the cards on the disk
23 changed to correspond to the records.
It will be seen that even though the man
changing the records were careless or in-
competent, there is no chance of putting the 45
parts together so that they Avill be jammed
and the mechanism not work perfectly,
T claim : —

1. In a multiple phonograph, the combi-
nation of the shaft, a sleeve rotatable there-
on, a disk secured to the sleeve, record hold-
ers supported on the disk near its periphery
and at right angles to the surface thereof,
a second sleeve on the shaft abutting with
the first sleeve, a disk supported on the sec-
ontl sleeve, locking means on the sleeves so
that they will rotate in unison, and a thim-
ble removably secured to the end of the
shaft and abutting with the second sleeve.

2. In a multiple phonograph, the combi-
nation with the horizontal shaft, a sleeve
mounted on the shaft and rctatable thereon,
a record wheel rigidl}^ supported on the
sleeve, a second sleeve mounted on the shaft
and locking with the first sleeve and rota-
table therewith, a disk mounted on the sec-
ond sleeve, a thimble fitting over the end of
the shaft and abutting with the disk, means
in the thimble to lock it on the shaft, and
an indicator rigidly secured to the thimble.

JULIUS EOEVER.
Witnesses :

Thomas T. Seelye,
Arthur G. Dannell.

50

55

GO

G5

70

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

Washington, D. C."

T. A. EDISON.

PHONOGRAPH.
APPLICATION FILED AUG. 12, 1909.

1,050,355.

Patented Jan. 14, 1913.

2 SHEETS-SHEET 1.

'aJ

r^l

'/y///////////////y//////////yy/v/y///y///yyyy>yyyyyyyyyy^^^

T. A. EDISON.

PHONOGRAPH.

APPLICATION FILED AUG. 12, 1909.

1,050,355.

'.^

Patented Jan. 14, 1913.

2 SHEETS-SHEET 2.

I

/

11

A

Z^'^

;<Kiat^

6?

(^

if^A

lU

< ^^

7 y

W

=*<, J'

z W

tf/t-aM^t

0<^-^^-<^^^^

TTioma^AUdMOii

'^ t;^t<«-*-<^ ZT"

COLUMBIA PLANOQRAPH CO.. WASHINQTON, D. C.

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

THOMAS A. EDISON, OF LLEWELLYN PARK, WEST ORANGE. NEW JERSEY. ASSIGNOR
TO THOMAS A. EDISON, INCORPORATED, OF WEST ORANGE, NEW JERSEY, A COR-
PORATION OF NEW JERSEY.

PHONOGRAPH.

1,050,355.

Specification of letters Patent. Patented Jail. 14, 1913.

Application filed August 12, 1909. Serial No. 512,579.

To all whom, it may concern :

Be it known that I, Thomas A. Edison,
a citizen of the United States, and a resi-
dent of Llewellyn Park, West Orange,
5 county of Essex, and State of New Jersey,
have made a certain new and useful Inven-
tion in Phonographs, of which the follow-
ing is a description.
My invention relates to phonographs and

10 particularly to phonographic reproducing
apparatus of the so-called " hornless " type,
or that type in which the horn or sound con-
veying means is entirely inclosed and hid-
den from view.

15 Among the objects of my invention are
the production of an improved apparatus of
this character wherein the horn or sound
conveying means is suspended in an ap-
proximately horizontal plane and is for-

20 wardly directed from the neck of the repro-
ducer. This sound conveying means is in-
closed within a casing which is also for-
wardly directed in an approximately hori-
zontal position from the reproducer, which

25 is also inclosed. The horn inclosing cham-
ber is constructed preferably of wood.

Reference is hereby made to the accom-
panying drawings forming part of this
specification, embodying a preferred form of

30 my invention, and in which—

Figure 1 represents a side elevation of an
apparatus embodying my invention, the cas-
ing being shown in cross section; Fig. 2
represents a plan view of the same ; and Fig.

35 3 represents a front view loolring from the
left in Fig. 1.

Corresponding parts are denoted through-
out by the same reference numerals.

Referring to the drawings, the casing,

40 represented as a whole by the numeral 1, is
mounted upon legs or supports 2, of Avhich
there is preferably one at the forward end
and two at the rearward end. The vertical
partition 3 divides the casing 1 into a for-

45 ward or horn inclosing chamber 4 and a
rearward or reproducer inclosing chamber
5. The reproducer 6, mounted upon the base
plate 7, is supported within chamber 5, the
base plate 7 resting upon shelf 8 therein.

50 The motor 9 suspended below base plate 7

. is entirely below the shelf 8 within the

chamber 5. Access may be had to the re-

producer and the interior of the chamber 5
by means of the hinged cover 10, pivotally
supported by hinges 11. " 55

The horn or sound conveying means 12
is forwardly directed from reproducer 6,
the small end of the horn being attached
by the usual connection to the neck of the
reproducer, and the horn extending through go
an opening in vertical partition 3. The
horn or sound conveyer is entirely inclosed
within the walls of chamber 4, the horn 12
being suspended therein in any convenient
manner, as by means of the supporting link (j5
13 attached to the under side of the upper
wall of the chamber. The forward end of
the horn, which preferably is bell shaped,
is immediately behind the front wall 14 of
the horn inclosing chamber. This front 70
wall is provided with an opening through
which the sounds conveyed by horn 12 may
emanate, this opening being preferably
provided with the grille work 15 or equiva-
lent device which serves the function of 7 5
largely hiding the inclosed horn, while at
the same time, it does not interfere notice-
ably with the volume of sound passing
therethrough.

The structure is of a pleasing appear- 80
ance, and permits the suspension of the
sound conveying means in an approximately
horizontal position, whereby the loss of vol-
ume due to bends in the horn is prevented,
while, at the same time, the advantages of 85
the concealed horn are retained.

Having now described my invention, what
I claim and desire to protect by Letters Pat-
ent is as follows:

In a phonograph, the combination with 'JO
a reproducer, of a sound conveying horn
forwardly directed therefrom without bend
in an approximately horizontal direction, a
casing comprising a chamber in which said
reproducer is supported and inclosed, said 95
chamber having a hinged cover, and a cham-
ber inclosing said horn and extending in an
approximately horizontal direction from
said reproducer chamber, a vertical parti-
tion fixed in the cafiing for separating said 100
chambers and having an opening therein
for the horn, a horizontal shelf in said re-
producer chamber dividing the same into
upper and lower parts and on which shelf

1,060,365

said reproducer is supported and below
which the reproducer motor is positioned
and means for suspending said horn from
said casing for pivotal movement about a
substantially vertical axis adjacent the outer
end of said horn inclosing chamber, sub-
stantially as described.

This specification signed and witnessed
this 7th day of August 1909.

THOS. A. EDISON.

Witnesses :

Dyer Smith;,
Anna R. Klehm.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

Washington, D. C."

H. 0. MILLER.

SOUND BOX.

APPLICATION FILED JAN. 28, 1907.

1,050,743.

Patented Jan. 14, 1913.

4 SHEETS-SHEET 1.

y^^^

yr%j^.7^

filttoi-nei^

COLUMfilA Pt-ANOORAPH CO.. WASHINOTOM, D. C.

H. C. MILLEK.

SODND BOX.
APPLICATION PILED JAN, 28, 1907.

1,050,743.

Patented Jan. 14, 1913.

4 SHEETS-SHEET 2.

7^^^j(!>. ^

y^.^jc>-^-

7

\

1

m^

i

•^ 3nucnl'ot

3

Ll.ABIA I'LANOUUAPM CO.. WASmNUTON. D. C.

H. C. MILLEE.

SOUND BOX.
APPLICATION FILED JAN, 28, 1907.

1,050,743.

Patented Jan. 14, 1913

4 SHEETS-SHEET 3.

^WvttvMaea

ckwoa^vto*

£Ittoi»i»^

COLUMBIA PLANUORAPH CO.. WASHlNtiTON, U. C.

H. C. MILLEK.

SOUND BOX.

APPLICATION FILED JAN. 28, 1907,

1,050,743.

Patented Jan. 14, 1913.

4 SHEETS-SHEET 4.

v^T^e^' -^^

-^^c^

7^:t^.y^

20

-^-

y^^' v^

y^X^. ^<^

QttOf4««1^

COU'JMBIA PLANOORAPH CO., WASHINGTON. D. C.

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

1,050,743.

HENRY C. MILLER, OF WATERFORD, NEW YORK.
SOUND-BOX.

Specification of letters Patent. Patented Jan. 14, 1913.

Application filed January 28, 1907. Serial No. 354.542.

To all whom it may concern :

Be it known that I, Hknry C. ]\Iiller, a
citizen of the United States, residing at
"Waterford, in the county of Saratoga and
6 State of NeAv York, have invented certain
new and useful Improvements in Sonnd-
Bo.xes, of which the following is a specifica-
tion.

This invention relates to improvements in

10 sotmd bo.xes designed primarily to overcome
rattling or blasting sounds usually present
in sound boxes.

In the Avell-known talking machines, the
stylus sujiports the entire weight of the

15 sound box and frequently in addition the
horn; the stylus lever being fed by the
groove in the record. In other forms the
sound box is fed by appropriate feeding
mechanism, and in such instances guide-

20 ways are ])rovided to relieve the weight on
the stylus point. But in the use of these
constructions I have discovered defects, in
that a positive fulcrum for the stylus lever
is not used, resulting in the elimination of

25 the lower sounds of a selection being re-
produced.

According to my invention, I provide
what I shall hereafter term recompensing
means, which in effect causes the stylus to

30 follow closely all of the vertical indenta-
tions of the record, and also prevents the
stylus from jumping from one groove to
the other. The details of construction of
the recompense are such as to enable the

35 stylus to recover itself from one indentation
to the other, l)ecause I eliminate the rigid
style structure which supports the weight
of the sound box, and sometimes the horn,
usually employed on other sound boxes

40 where the whole weight of the structure is
supported on the stylus. Although I do not
show it in the drawing, the horn may be
directly connected to the sound box, in which
case the stylus supports the sound box and

45 the horn; my invention even then compelling
the stylus to be always in perfect contact
with the projections or undulations of the
groove thereby rendering the i-eproduction
luitural. Without the use of a recomjiense

50 device it would not be ))ossible for a stylus
tu support the weight of the sound box with-
out the use of some resilient means between
the stylus and the sound box. as the stylus
would jump from one bold projection to

55 the other without reaching the indentation

of the groove and perhaps jump out of the
groove entirely. I accomplish these objects
by suppoi-ting the sound box on the stylus
and providing a resilient recompense on
said stylus, or in other words the stylus re- 60
siliently hangs frojn the sound box. I also
l)rovide a positive fulcrum for the stylus
lever, in combination with a recompense,
and means for adjusting the latter.

Other objects and advantages will be here- 65
inafter referred to and particularly pointed
out in the claims.

In the drawings: Figure 1 is an elevation
])artially in section of my improvement ap-
plied to a talking machine of the type where 70
the sound box is adapted to be moved over
the surface of a record by means of a feed
screw. Fig. 2 is a front elevation of the
same. Fig. 3 is a detail horizontal section
of a means for connecting the stylus lever 75
to the diaphragm. Fig. 3" is a side eleva-
tion of the same. Figs. 4, 5, and G, repre-
sent different forms of the application of
my improvement to sound boxes. Fig. 7 is
a detail sectional view on the line 7 — 7 of 80
Fig. 1. Fig. 8 is a side elevation partially
in section of my improved sound box ap-
plied to a talking machine of the type where
the record groove moves the stylus over its
surface. Fig. 9 is a face view of the same. 85
Fig. 10 is an edge view. Fig. 11 is an en-
larged detail section of a stylus and a por-
tion of the record. Fig. 12 is a detail horizon-
tal sectional vieAv of the .sound box, the dia-
phragm being flattened. Fig. 13 is a similar 90
view illustrating the normal position of the
diaphragm. Fig. 14 is a detail section of a
straight diaphragm and a covered tuning
element ready to be applied to the former.
Fig. 15 is a view of the diaphragm with 95
the modifying element applied thereto. Fig.
K) is a similar view showing the modifying
element composed of a series of strips. Fig.

17 is a detail view of the recompense. Fig.

18 is a sectional view of a modification. 100
Refei-ring particularly to Figs. 1, 2. and

(■) ; 1. indicates a .sound box, preferably of
hard rubber, and 2, a flange therein against
which bears a resilient washer 3, to support
a dished diaphragm 4. A washer 5, of less 105
diameter than the Avasher 3, bears against
the opposite side of the diaphragm and is
supported by a spider 6, the latter being
swiA'eled to a threaded stem 7, provided with
a head 8, with indicating characters on its 110

1,050,743

IC

15

20

25

periphery, and a stop 9. A pointer 10, se-
cvired on a projection 11, on the sound box,
cooperates with the characters on the head 8,
to indicate the adjustment of the dished
diaphragm for playing a particular selec-
tion. A thin plate 15, is secured to the sound
box at 16, and is provided with an opening
17, ears 18, and a bar connecting the latter.
Extending outwardly from the plate 15, is
a spring tongue 19, against which an ad-
justing screAv 20, bears, said screw being-
mounted in an extension 21, on the sound
box 1, and held in set position by a lock-
nut 22. Between the ears 18, is pivot ally
mounted the stylus lever 23, which has ex-
tensions 21; one receiving a screw 25, in one
of the ears and the other receiving a spring
pressed pin 26, in an extension 27. on the
other ear, and adapted to be held in fixed po-
sition by a set screw 28. The end of the
stylus lever rests against the face of the
diaphragm and is held in contact therewith
by a spring or other yielding connection 29.
secTU'ed to the diaphragm and passing over
the outer edge of the lever, as shoAvn par-
ticularly in Figs. 1, and 2. This connection
may be varied somewhat as shoAvn in Figs. 3
and 3^, wherein a piece of catgut 30, is se-
cured to the diaphragm and it passes around

SO the stylus lever, and interposed between the
latter and the diaphragm is a light spring-
Si. By this construction it is evident that
the stylus 31^, will recover itself quickly in
passing from one indentation or projection

35 of the groove in the record to the other, due
to the fact that the adjustment of the bear-
ings for the stylus lever are supported by
a resilient plate fastened to the sound box
and the connection of said lever with the

40 diaphragm is such, as will effectuallj'^ re-
lieve the strain incident to the direct weight
of the sound box. Furthermore, the neces-
sar}^ downward pressure of the stjdus in the
record groove, can be minutely adjusted b,y

45 manipulation of the set screw 20, to increase
or decrease the tension on the tongue 19, of
the spring plate 15. The stylus lever is con-
structed of wood. Avhich in combination with
a hard rubber sound box casing enables me

50 to obtain exceedingly satisfactory results.

In Figs. 4, 5, and 6, the mounting of the
stylus lever is somewhat differently ar-
ranged, but the same generic principle is
preserved. For instance, in Fig. 4, the set
screw 20'', is mounted on an extension 20",
of the stylus lever, said screw bearing upon
a spring tongue 20*^, which carries the stjdus
32. In Fig. 5, the set screw 20^, extends
through a lug extending inwardly from the

^® sound box, and bears on a light spring 20'^.
extending from the stylus lever, and another
light spring 20^, also extending from the
stylus lever bears directly on the diaphragm.
In Fig. 6, the stylus lever is provided with

^5 a light spring 20', which bears on the dia-

55

phragm, while a spring tongue 20^, extends
from the rear of said lever and the adjust-
ing screw 20^, bears on a lug, 20^, extending
from the sound box. In each of the con-
structions shown in Figs. 4, 5, and 6, the
same substantial results can be obtained as
with the form of my invention shown in
Figs. 1 and 2.

Referring to Figs. 8, 9, and 10, the con-
struction of the nioimting for the stylus lever
is substantially the same as that shown in
Figs. 1, and 2, except its form is somewhat
changed to adapt it to an angularly dis-
posed sound box. In connection with the
means of mounting the stylus lever I have
found results can be obtained by the em-
ployment of a normally concavo-convexo
diaphragm, preferably formed of Avood, and
having applied to it a modifying element 4^
located across the grain, and whose normal
tendency is such as to dish the diaphragm.
The diaphragm Avhen the modifying element
is first applied, is considerably higher in
pitch than maj^ be required. The pitch of
the diaphragm may be reduced while on the
sound box by peeling, or sandpapering the
modifying element. It is obvious that the
modifying element may be formed of a series
of strips, such for instance as shown in Fig.
16, in Avhich case the pitch or tune of the
diaphragm may be altered by removing one
or more of said strips. Allien operating the
sound box the pitch may be modified by turn-
ing the threaded stem 7, to flatten the dia-
phragm throughout its entire area, caused
by the engagement of the Avasher 5, pressing
it interior of the Avasher 3. It is well knoAvn
that the tension on and altering of the face
form of a diaphragm materially affects the
sound reproduced, and I find superior re-
sults are obtained by having it normally
dished, and then flattening it.

40, indicates a sound dampener, shown
particularly in Figs. 8 and 9, and cbmprises
a cup-shaped member 41, on the soimd box,
and a similar cup-shaped member hinged at
43, and provided Avith Iavo fingers 44, bent
to provide buffers 45, and designed to con-
tact with the diaphragm ; a slight spring 46,
causing the two members to be draAvn to-
gether. The cup-shaped members form a
pocket for a bulb 47, connected by a pipe 48,
Avith a bulb 49, designed to be held in the
hand of the operator. When it is desired to
dampen the sound to produce effects nec-
essary in the reproduction of certain selec-
tions, the bulb 49, is slightly squeezed and
the buffers or points 45, are caused to engage
the cliai^hragm until the effect on the repro-
duction is obtained. For instance, to soften
the sound the buffers are caused to contact
Avith the diaphragm, Avhile for loudness pres-
sure on the diaphragm is relieved.

Referring to the construction shoAvn in
Fig. 1, 50, indicates a post to receive the

70

75

80

85

90

95

100

110

115

120

125

1-30

1,060,743

8

record 52, and it has fixed to it a sprocket-
wheel 53, around which a leather belt 54,
passes, which also passes around a sprocket-
wheel 55, mounted on a shaft 56. A sleeve
K 57, extends from the sprocket wheel 55, and
at its upper end is a beveled gear wheel 58,
which meshes with a beveled gear 59, formed
on an internal threaded sleeve 60. The
sleeve 60, is mounted in a hearing 61, cm the

10 "Ppcr end of the rod 56, and is held in place
by a collar 62. A su])porting rod 63, ex-
tends outwardly from a tube 64, connected
to the sound box 1, and this rod is provided
with a groove 65, in which slides a rod 70,

15 beveled at one end at 72, and provided on
its lower end with threads 73, adapted to
engage the threads on the internalh^ thread-
ed sleeve, and normally held in engagement
therewith by spring? 74. The end of the rod

20 70, is provided with a handle 75, inclined on
its lower end at 76^ to engage a similar in-
clined surface 77, on rod 63, which, together
with a pin 78, extending across the groove
65, Avill permit of the elevating of the

25 threaded bar to disengage it from the inter-
nal threads of the sleeve 60, and thereb}'
allow of the sound box being returned to
normal position, after a selection has been
reproduced.

30 AVhere diaphragms of unusually large di-
ameters are to be iised, mj- present in\ention
is particularly applicable. Under this con-
dition it is essential that the stylus lever be
long, but this matters not in so far as results

35 are concerned, because of the fact that the
direct strain on the record is relieved by m}'^
improved form of recompense.

The means shown for holding the stylus
lever to the diaphragm is of importance in

40 niy improved sound box. The point of the
stylus lever contacting with the diaphragm
is not of a permanent nature which would
necessitate of a record lifting the entire
weight of the sound box, but on the contrary

45 the stylus yields to allow the parts to elas-
tically carry the vibrations from the record
to the diaphragm without causing the usual
rattling noise, incident to an ordinary link
or other positive connection. This feature

50 possesses another advantage in that it per-
mits of the diaphragm being readily re-
moved for repairs or change of parts. Tliis
construction is also quite essential, inasmuch
as the stylus nuist at all times maintain a

55 determinate position, so, when the dia-
phragm is dished or straightened, the nec-
essary' relative location of the parts will at
all times be maintained, and at the same
time strain is obviated.

60 From the foregoing description taken in
connection with the accompanying drawings
it will be seen, I have a sound box supported
by a stylus. Avith a resilient recompense on
said stylus: a stylus resiliently hung from

65 the sound box, the resilient means support-

ing the whole or part of said sound box;
the stylus supporting the recompense and
the sound box.

While I have specifically mentioned a
record having a groove with vertical projec- »q
tions and indentations it is evident my in-
vention may be employed in connection with
a grooved record of the ordinary latei'al un-
dulating groove.

It is evident many minor cluuiges may be -5
made without departing from the spirit and
scope of my invention, as for instance in-
stead of pivotal fulcrums I may empl(>y
knife or spring fulcrums.

In Fig. 18, I havt, shown a dift'erent form gQ
of my invention. The lower part of the
st5dus lever is split to provide a spring
member 80, and the screw 20, is mounted in
the upper member 80', of said le^er. This
construction produces a recompense of the gg
same general principle disclosed in Fig. 4.

What I claim is :

1. A sound box comprising a diaphragm,
a resilient member secured to the sound box
and carrying bearings, a stylus lever pivot- 90
ally mounted in the bearings to permit move-
ment of the stylus independent of the move-
ment by the resilient member, said stylus
lever bearing on the diaphragm, and means
bearing on the resilient member to increase 95
or decrease the tension on said member at
right angles to the movement of the stylus
lever by the diaphragm.

2. A sound box comprising a diaphragm,
a stylus lever, yielding means secured to the /joo
diaphragm and passing around the stylus
le^^er to hold the latter in contact with the
former.

3. A sound box comprising a diaphragm,

a stylus lever, yielding means secured to the io5
diaphragm and passing around the stylus
lever to force the latter toward the dia-
phragm, and a yielding connection between
the stylus lever and the sound box.

4. A sound box comprising a conca\'o- no
convex diaphragm, means independent of
the stjdus lever for flattening the dia-
phragm, a stylus lever cooperating with the
diaphragm, a resilient means for holding
one end of the stylus lever in contact with 115
the diaphragm.

5. A sound box comprising a convex dia-
phragm, means for flattening the dia-
phragm, a stylus le^•er, and a resilient con-
nection between the diaphi-agm and the 120
stylus lever to hold one end of the latter in
contact with the diaphragm.

6. A sound box comprising a concavo-
convex diaphragm, a plurality of parallel
strips extending across the face of the dia- 125
phragm and permanently secured thereto
throughout their entire length, and a stylus
lever cooperating with the diaphragm.

7. A sound box comprising a concavo-
convex diaphragm, having attached thereto 130

1,050,743

a modifying element extending diametri-
cally over the face thereof and secured
thereto throughout its entire length, and a
stylus lever cooperating with the diaphragm.
5 8. A sound box comprising a concavo-
convex diaphragm having attached thereto
a modifying element extending diametri-
cally across the face thereof and secured
thereto throughout its entire length, a stylus
10 lever cooperating -with the diaphragm and
resilient means for holding one end of the
stylus lever in contact with the diaphragm.

9. A sound box comprising a concavo-
convex diaphragm, a modifjdng element at-

15 tached to and extending over the face there-
of and normally tending to dish the dia-
phragm, and a stykis lever cooperating with
the diaphragm.

10. A sound box composing a Avooden con-
20 cavo-convex diaphragm, a modifying element

attached to and extending diametrically
over the face of the diaphragm and secured
thereto throughout its entire length, and a
yielding stylus lever cooperating with the
25 diaphragm.

11. A sound box comprising a diaphragm,
a modifying element composed of a plural-
ity of sections attached thereto, and extend-
ing diametrically across the face of the dia-

30 phragm and secured thereto throughout its
entire length, and a stylus lever cooperating
with the diaphragm.

12. A sound box comprising a diaphragm
and a stylus lever, a dampener including a

35 buffer to bear on the diaphragm, a pneu-
matic device for operating the buffer includ-
ing a bulb located at a point distant from
the sound box and a connection between the
bulb and buffer, whereby upon operation of

40 the bulb, the buffer may be operated to
change the tone of the diaphragm during
the reproduction of a selection.

13. A sound box comprising a concavo-
convex diaphragm, a modifying element at-

45 tached to and extending diametricall}"
across the face of the diaphragm, a washer
against which the diaphragm rests, a second
washer on the opposite side of the dia-
phragm and smaller in diameter than the

50 first mentioned washer, a spider supporting
the second washer, means for forcing the
spider toward the first washer to flatten the
diaphragm, a stylus lever cooperating with
the diaphragm, a resilient connection be-

55 tween the latter and the stylus lever, and a
resilient connection between the sovmd box
and the stylus lever to permit movement of
the latter independent of the former.

14. A sound box, comprising a casing, a
60 diaphragm in the casing, a stylus lever, re-
silient means for securing the stylus lever to
the casing to permit the point of the stylus
lever to move slightly over the face of the
diaphragm, means connecting the stylus le-

66 \ er and the diaphragm to permit the slight

movement of said stylus, and means for reg-
ulating the tension of the resilient means.

15. A sound box comprising a casing, a
diaphragm in the casing, a stylus lever, a
resilient connection supported by the casing,
means pivotally connecting the stylus le-
ver to the resilient connection to permit the
stylus lever to rock, and means holding the
point of contact of the stylus lever against
the diaphragm, but permitting said stylus
lever to be moved slightly over the face of
the dia])hragm by movement of the I'esilient
connection, and means for regulating the
tension of the resilient connection.

16. A sound box comprising a casing, a
diaphragm in the casing, a stylus lever, a
resilient element connected to the casing and
]]aving bearings, means pivotally support-
ing the stylus lever in the bearing's, and a
coiuiection between the stylus lever and the
diaphragm which will permit movement of
the stylus lever by the resilient connection
independent of the movement of the dia-
phragm.

IT. A sound box, comprising a diaphragm,
a stylus lever, yielding means secured to the
diaphragm and passing around the stylus
lever to hold the latter in contact with the
former, and a resilient element secured to
the sound box to which the stylus lever is
pivoted.

18. A sound box comprising a diaphragm,
a modifying element attached thereto and
extending diametrically across the face of
the diaphragm, and secured thereto through-
out its entire length, a stylus lever cooperat-
ing with the diaphragm and a spring se-
cured to the diaphragm and extending
around the stylus lever to hold the end of
the latter in contact with said diaphragm.

19. A sound box comprising a diaphragm,
a modifying element attached diametrically
across the face of the diaphragm , and se-
cured thereto throughout its entire length, a
stylus lever cooperating with the diaphragm,
resilient means for holding the stylus lever
in contact with the diaphragm, and means
independent of the resilient means for in-
creasing or decreasing the frictional contact
of the stylus lever with the diaphragm.

20. A sound box comprising a diaphragm,
a stjdus lever, yielding means passing
around the stylus lever, and secured to the
diaphragm to hold the said lever in contact
with the diaphragm.

21. A sound box comprising a diaphragm,
a stylus lever, yielding means secured to the
diaphragm, and passing around the stylus
lever to force the latter toward the dia-
phragm, and a yielding connection between
the stykis lever and the sound box.

22. A sound box comprising a diaphragm,
a modifying element attached thereto and
extending diametrically across the face of
the diaphragm^ and secured thereto through-

70

75

80

85

90

95

100

105

110

i

115

120

125

130

1,060,743

Q

out its entire length, a stylus lever cooperat-
ing with the diaphragm, a yielding connec-
tion between the stylus lever and the dia-
phragm, and means for altering the cross
6 sectional shape of the diaphragm includ-
ing the reinforcing element.

23. A sound box comprising a diaphragm,
a stylus lever cooperating with the dia-
phragm, yielding means for holding the

10 .stylus lever against the diaphragm, means
independent of the stylus lever for altering
the cross sectional shape of the diaphragm,
and means extending across the face of the
diaphragm for reinforcing the latter, said

15 means being permanently secured to the face
cf the diaphragm.

24. A sound box comprising a concavo
convex diaphragm, a modifying element at-
tached to and extending over the face there-

20 of, and normally tending to dish the dia-

phragm, a stjdus lever cooperating with the
diaphragm, and means operating on the dia-
phragm for altering its cross sectional shape
to change its tone during the period of re-
jiroducing a selection.

25. A sound box comprising a casing, a
diaphragm, a stylus lever, a flat spring plate
formed with an opening and secured to the
casing, and having bearings, the stylus ex-
tending through the openings in the flat
spring plate and mounted in the bearings,
and an adjusting element on the casing to
regulate the tension of the flat spring plate.

In testimony whereof I have signed my
name to this specification in the presence of
two subscribing witnesses.

HENRY C. MILLER.

Witnesses :

F. F. FOLLET,

George H. Cole.

25

30

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

Washington, D. C."

• z' s^J VJ *^ , / <y

7

V. H. EMERSON.

DISK RECORD AND THE PRODUCTION THEREOF.

APPLICATION PILED APE. 15, 1905.

1,050,933.

Patented Jan. 21, 1913.

Fig.l

fi

Fig. 2

Fig.3

"-A

4

1

\-'

^^

/^j^.4

(D

A

r

3

Fig. 5

-E

^ A

Bf./^

Fig 7

^w,x><>MX<yc

^^<i-«se.-«-t^-o

'Oa*-iA.Jt^

COLUMBIA PUANOORAPH CO.. WASHINGTON, D C.

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

VICTOR H. EMERSON, OE NEW YORK, N. Y., ASSIGNOR TO AMERICAN GRAPHOPHONE
COMPANY, OF BRIDGEPORT, CONNECTICUT, A CORPORATION OF WEST VIRGINIA.

DISK RECORD AND THE PRODUCTION THEREOF.

1,050,933.

Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Jan. 21, 1913.

Application filed April 15, 1905. Serial No. 255,803.

To all whom it may concern:

Be it Imown that I, Victor H. Emekson,
a citizen of the United States, and a resident
of New York city, New York, have invented
5 a new and useful Improvement in Disk Rec-
ords and the Production Thereof, which im-
provement is fully set forth in the following
specification.

This invention relates to the production of

10 commercial sound-records of the disk form.
Such records are now commonly made of a
plastic material composed largely of earthy
material and shellac. The surface of such
records is, on account of the extremely hard

15 particles present in the earthy material,
comparable to a very fine emery wheel, and
rapidly wears the point of the reproducing-
stylus. For this reason, it is the practice to
use very cheap reproducing-needles, employ-

20 ing a fresh needle for each reproduction.
Notwithstanding the use of very soft repro-
ducing-needles, records of this sort are com-
paratively shortlived, and the quality there-
of begins to show signs of deterioration

25 after a relatively small number of reproduc-
tions. This is due to the fact that the sur-
face, though quite hard, presents numerous
very fine points against which the stylus
engages and changes the form of the undu-

30 lations.

The object of the present invention is to
produce records which will endure a greater
number of reproductions without deteriora-
tion of quality, and having a surface which

35 will not abrade the stylus, so that a perma-
nent reproducing-point may be employed
therewith. It also aims to effect economy in
production of the record, and to give a
smoother reproduction of the recorded

40 sounds free from scraping noises.

In the compositions now in use the shellac
is needed in order to give the surface of the
record a " glazed " character. The compo-
sition without shellac would be utterly un-

45 suited to the purpose; and, as already stated,
even where a large proportion of shellac is
used the surface is characterized by the pres-
ence of numerous abrading particles. No
satisfactory substitute for shellac for this

50 purpose has yet been found, and its greatly
increased cost has added largely to that of
the sound-records.

I have found that a record pressed in a
continuous surface of shellac, while not so
hard as that of the ordinary composition, is 55
so smooth that a reproducing-point will rub
over the same with inappreciable friction,
and with very slight wear to either record
or point. For the same reason, the scratch-
ing noises heard in the reproduction of or- 60
dinary sound-records are much diminished.

The principle of the present invention is,
therefore, the production of a sound-record
impressed in a continuous film of shell&c,.
which film may be ^exceedingly thin, thus 65
reducing the quantity of shellac to a mini-
mum. The body of the sound-record may be
made of any suitable and cheap inferior
stock which of itself may be unsuitable for
a smooth record surface, but is capable of 70
being rendered plastic, for example, the
earthy compounds now in use with an ordi-
nary binding agent instead of shellac.

In carrying out the principle of the in-
vention, difficulty has arisen in obtaining a 75
filmy shellac surface free from the gritty
partiieles liable to be present in the stock,
but this result has now been accomulished
by employing a thin separator — preferably
a sheet ol fibrous .material, as_paper — be- 80
tween the shellac surface and the plastic
stock composing the body of the tablet.
Another difficulty has arisen in impressing
the matrix into this shellac surface, in that
air would be entrapped between the shellac 85
surface and the matrix-surface, resulting
in a bad impression of the undulating rec-
ord-lines. This difficulty has now been over-
come by applying the plastic stock to the
rear surface of the sheet in the form of a 90
lump placed in the center of the disk, the
effect of which is that, as pressure is applied,
the lump of stock spreads outwardly from
the center, whereby the air is driven out
from between the matrix and the tablet. 95
In practising the invention it has been found
that linen paper of good quality and about
five one-thousandths of an inch in thickness
will answer the purpose in a satisfactory i
manner. A sheet of such paper may be 100
coated by dipping into an alcoholic solution
of shellac, or the latter mav be applied with
a bfiish, or otherwise. In this way the paper j
acts as a carrier for the shellac (permitting !

1^

1,050,932

the use of a minimum quantity of the lat-
ter) as well as a separator from the material
employed for the body of the tablet. To
form the sound-record, the paper so treated
5 is- laid on the warmed matrix and placed as
usual in a suitable press, the stock in the
form of an approximately globular lump is
laid on the paper sheet at the center of the
matrix, and pressure is then applied in the

10 usual way. The stock is applied in a plastic
state, being softened at a temperature of
about 190° F. A solid and strong tablet
results, the union of the several parts there-
of not being affected by expansion and con-

15 traction due to changes of temperature.

Although reference has been made above
solely to shellac, which gives the best re-
sults of any material thus far tried for the
purpose, it is obvious that other gums, cellu-

20 loid, or like materials may be employed in
the same way. When shellac is used it is
preferable, after drying the sheet, to dip it
in a very thin solution of celluloid, which
protects the shellac, and prevents it from
sticking to the hot matrix.

In the accompanying drawings I have
illustrated the various steps which I prefer-
ably employ in practising the process to-
gether with the resulting product.

In said drawings, Figures 1 to 6 inclusive
are side elevations. Fig. 1 shows a sheet of
paper with a film of shellac thereon; Fig.
2 is the same as Fig. 1 with the addition of
a_celluloid coat on the shellac; Fig. 3 illus-
trates a matrix with a shellac-coated sheet
of paper thereon with the shellac surface
against the matrix; Fig. 4 is the same as
Fig. 3 with the addition of a mass of infe-
rior plastic composition placed in the center

40 thereof ; Fig. 5 shows the plastic composition
in the act of being pressed out or flattened
by a press and spreading from the center
outward; Fig. 6 shows the plastic composi-
tion spread over the back of the sheet of

45 paper, and the press in the act of forcibly
pressing the plastic material, the paper sheet
and the shellac together, and impressing the
latter into the face of the matrix. Fig. 7
is a perspective view of a tablet with the

50 jjlastic material, the sheet of paper, the
_shfillac and the _cdjhil£id_ujiiJ;i.d . l^
into a complete record tablet under the ac- "
tion of the heat and pressure in the press.
'V In said drawings, A indicates the sepa-

55 rator which preferably consists of a sheet
j of thin paper, and B the coating or film of
/shellac or shellac-like record composition,
/ and h indicates a film of celluloid which
' is sometimes superimposecf upon the film B

30 of shellac.

C indicates the matrix, and D indicates
a mass or lump of plastic material for form-
ing the main body portion of the completed
tablet. This portion D may be composed of

65 an inferior grade of stock capable of being

25

30

35

rendered plastic by heat, and of which the
inferior grade of plastic stock now used for
disk records is an illustration.

The^ celluloid. J^L^flg_^may be dispensed
with if desired.

Having thus described my invention, I
claim :

1. A sound-record composed of a main
body portion of inferior material unsuit-
able for a smooth record surface and capa-
ble of being rendered plastic, a film of glaze
material as shellac or the like, an interposed
separator between said body portion and
said glaze material, and having impressed
in said film irregularities corresponding to
sound waves.

2. A sound-record composed of a main
body portion of inferior material unsuit-
able for a smooth record surface and capa-
ble of being rendered plastic, a film of glaze
material as shellac or the like, and an in-
terposed separator of fibrous material be-
tween said body portion and said glaze ma-
terial, and having impressed in said film
irregularities corresponding to sound
waves.

3. A sound-record composed of a main
body portion of inferior material unsuitable
for a smooth record surface and capable of
being rendered plastic, a sheet of fibrous
material having shellac or the like applied
to both of its surfaces, said shellac serving
as a binder between said body portion and
one side of said sheet and having irregulari-
ties corresponding to sound waves impressed
in the other side.

4. A sound-record consisting of a tablet
coated or glazed with shellac or the like, and
having a separator between said coating and
the main body of the tablet, said coating
having impressed therein irregularities cor-
responding to sound-waves, and said main
body being of inferior material unsuitable
for a smooth record surface and capable of
being rendered plastic.

5. A sound-record composed of a tablet
having a coating or film of shellac with a
separator of paper or the like between said
shellac and the body of the tabletj and hav-
ing impressed therein irregularities corre-
sponding to sound-waves, and said body be-
ing of inferior material unsuitable for a
smooth record surface and capable of being
rendered plastic.

6. A sound-record composed of a body of
suitable stock material, a sheet of paper se-
cured to the same, and a film of shellac or the
like secured to said paper, said shellac sur-
face having impressed therein irregularities
corresponding to sound-waves, and said body
being of inferior material unsuitable for a
smooth record surface and capable of being
rendered plastic.

7. A sound-record composed of a body
portion containing inferior plastic material

70

75

80

85

90

95

100

105

110

/
115

120

125
130

1,050,032

8

linsuited for a smooth record surface, a rec-
ord surface coating of superior shellac-like
record material, and a separating sheet be-
■ tween said body portion and said coating
5 to which sheet said body portion and coat-
ing adhere.

8. A sound record composed of a body
portion containing inferior plastic material
rendered plastic by heat and unsuited for a

10 smooth record surface, a record surface
coating of superior shellac-like record ma-
terial, and a separating sheet between said
body portion and said coating to which
sheet said body portion and coating adhere.

9. A sound record composed of a body
portion containing inferior plastic material
unsuited for a smooth record surface, a
record surface coating of superior shellac-
like record material, and a separating sheet

20 between said body portion and said coating
to which sheet said body portion and coat-
ing adhere under heat and pressure.

10. A sound record tablet consisting of a

15

N

body portion composed mainly of plastic
composition, and a surface composed of a 25
sheet of paper united to the body portion
and having an exterior coating of shellac
like material.

11. A disk sound record comprising a
suitable body portion capable of becoming 30
softened when heated, and a surface com-
posed of a sheet of paper coated with shel-
lac like material and having a sound-rec-
ord groove impressed therein.

12. A sound record containing a sheet of 35
paper comprising a shellac-containing sur-
face carrying a sound record thereon, and a
plastic composition to which said sheet is
united.

In testimony whereof I have signed this 40
specification in the presence of two sub-
scribing witnesses.

VICTOE H. EMERSON.
Witnesses :

Wm. Haokt.a'nd,
James A. McConnell.

V

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the

Washington, D. C."

'Commissioner of Patents,

E. DE LA KUE.
SOUND BOX FOR GRAMOPHONES,
APPLICATION FILED JULY 25, 1912.

1,051,489.

Patented Jan. 28, 1913.

Fia.2.

I CU.,\VASI1INaTON, U. C.

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. •

ERNEST DE LA RUE, OF LONDON", ENGLAND.
SOUND-BOX FOR GRAMOPHONES.

1,051,489.

Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Jail. ^8, 1913.

Application filed July 25, 1912. Serial No. 711,405.

To all tvhom it may concern :

Be it known that I, Ernest de la Rite, a
subject of the King of Great Britain, re-
siding at 2G Belgrave Square, London, Eng-
5 hxnd, have invented new and useful Im-
jiroveuients in Sonnd-Boxes for Gramo-
phones, of which the following is a specifi-
cation.

This invention relates to what are known
10 as " edge mounted " diaphragms, that is to
say, diaphragms which are not nipped be-
tween two surfaces but are secured by their
edges being pressed against elastic surfaces.
AVith some diaphragms and especially mica
15 diaphragms great difficulty is experienced
in getting the diaphragm into place without
either cockling or injuring it.

According to this invention the elastic sur-
face is carried by the semi-circular halves
20 of a split ring and after the diaphragm has
been put into j)lace the ends of the halves
of the split ring are drawn together by
screws.
The drawings illustrate an apparatus
25 made in accordance with this invention.

Figure 1 is a plan and Fig. 2 a section on
the line 2—2 Fig. 1.

a is one half of a split ring made in one
with or connected to the base & of the sound
box. c is the other half of the split ring de- 30
tachably connected to the other half a by
screws d d.

The diaphragm e is held in position by an
elastic ring / which is itself secured to the
sound box by means of the two halves a and 35
c of the split ring. A stylus bar g is at-
tached to the diaphragm in the usual man-
ner.

What I claim is : —

In a sound box for talking machines, the 40
combination with the base, of a split ring
supported by the base, an elastic ring with-
in the split ring, means for detachably con-
necting one half of the split ring to the
other half, and a diaphragm supported at 45
its edge or periphery only hj engagement
with the elastic ring and being firmly held
in position therein by the split ring.

ERNEST DE LA RUE.

Witnesses :

Elmee C. Vitt,
Cecil Harding.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

Washington, D. C."

1

1,051,513.

F. D. PDDUMJEE.
SOUND RECORDING APPARATUS.
APPLICATION FILED MAY 20, 1911.

i^

Patented Jan. 28, 1913.

1

(^

<sZ^<5^:2<t*;£^

COLUMBIA PI..ANOaRAPH CO., WASHINOTON. D. C-

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

FUBDOONJEE DOKABJEE PUDUMJEE, OF BOMBAY PRESIDENCY, INDIA.
SOUND-RECORDING APPARATUS.

1,051,513.

Specification of letters Patent. Patented Jan. 38, 1913.

Application filed May 20, 1911. Serial No. 628,399.

To all irhom it may concern :

Be it known that I, Fitidoonjee Dorab-
JEE PuDUMjEE, a subject of the King of
England, residing at Bombay Presidency.
5 India, have invented certain hew and use-
ful Improvements in Sound-Eecording Ap-
paratus, of which the following is a specifi-
cation.
The invention refers to an improved

10 method and apparatus for recording sound
and is particularly applicable to the manu-
facture of gramophone records.

The method as at present used consists in
cutting or engraving the vibrations pro-

15 duced by sound on a rotating disk of spe-
cially prepared hard wax by means of a
sharp point or cutting edge attached in a
particular way to a membrane which vi-
brates in unison with the sound produced

20 in front of it. The vibrations are engraved
parallel to the surface of the disk in the
shape of a spiral, and the engraving thus
forms the original record from which dupli-
cates are made by pressing ebonite or simi-

25 lar composition disks on a matrix which is
made from the original wax record by the
process of electrotyping. The principal dis-
advantages of the process as at present
worked reside in the fact that considerable

30 resistance is otferedtothe engraving point by
the substance engraved so that the vibrating
membrane to which the engraving stylus is
attached is not free to vibrate as desired,
and to respond to the minutest variations of

35 sound. Hence the deformations due to the
engraving are great enovigh to render the
voice unrecognizable and in most cases not
clear. Moreover, the amplitudes of the
vibrations engraved on the wax plate are

40 limited in extent, depending upon the char-
acter of all three, the membrane, the dis-
position and length of the engraving stylus
and the hardness of the substance engraved.
These amplitudes cannot be increased be-

45 yond what has been attained in practice up
to now, and so the intensity of the sound
reproduced is limited. Again, the mechani-
cal vibrations produced by the act of cutting
or engraving on. the surface of the wax

50 plate are superimposed on the original
vibrations due to sound and therefore the
record is imperfect and is not free from
disturbing and secondary or unnecessary
scratching .■^oimd- vibrations.

55 It is the object of this invention to remove
the disadvantages above set forth and this

invention consists in the process of record-
ing sound by the aid of light, a ray of light
being caused to vibrate in unison with a
vibrating membrane by means of a mirror 60
attached thereto, and then allowed to im-
pinge on a rotating photographic sensitized
plate, whereby the vibrations due to the
sound waves produced on the membrane are
fixed on the sensitive plate by the chemical 65
action of light, and the photographic plate
after development by any of the known
protographic methods carries a record of
the original sound.

The process of recording will be ex- 70
plained clearly by Figure 1 of the accom-
l^anying drawings, in which —

Figure 1 is a diagrammatic view of a suit-
able apparatus for carrying out the method
according to the invention. Figs. 2 and 3 75
are side and end views respectively of a con-
structional form of the apparatus above-
mentioned.

Eeferring to Fig. 1, 5 is a powerful and
actinic source of light as for example the go
sun or an electric arc or a magnesium
burner whose rays are allowed to condense
by means of an achromatic lens 1, on to a
very small circular aperture 2 in the opaque
screen S. On the other side of the screen 35
the rays enter a photographically dark
chamber or box wherein they pass through
aphotogi'aphic lens N placed at a suitable
distance from the aperture, and then strike
on a small mirror 3. This mirror is inclined 90
to the horizontal at an angle of 45° and is
so fixed that it is free to vibrate on a hori-
zontal axis exactl}^ in unison with the vi-
brating membrane 4 which is stretched
across one end of a tube, the other end of 95
which terminates in a horn or mouthpiece
V preferably outside the dark chamber.
The rays of light strilring on the mirror are
reflected vertically downward and are
brought to a focus on the photographic lOO
sensitive plate 6 placed on the horizontal
rotating table C, so that a minute but bril-
liant spot of light, being the reduced image
of the circular aperture 2, strikes on the
surface of the sensitive plate. The lens N, 105
the mirror 3, and the membrane 4 are
(Avithout disturbing their relative positions
and in their same vertical plane) made to
move gradually in a direction parallel to
the surface of the rotating table from its lio
circumference to its center inward while
the plate is made to rotate. So long as no

a

1,051,513

• sound is produced the mirror remains at
rest and the spot of light merely traces a
fine regular line on the sensitive plate form-
ing the figure of a spiral. But when sound
5 is produced in front of the mouthpiece, the
membrane and the mirror vibrate in unison
and the line traced b_v the spot of light is
no longer regular but undidates and records
faithfully the vibrations of the sound pro-

20 duced in front of the membrane. The
record on the sensitive plate is made per-
manent by the usual photographic process
of developing and fixing. For the repro-
duction of sound thus recorded a matrix

15 may be made from the negative either by
etching on a metal plate by any of the
methods usual in line photo engraving, or
the matrix may be made by electrotyping
a photogelatin relief produced from the

20 negative by the Woodbury or similar proc-
ess, or by any other laiown photo-chemical
methods. From this matrix impressions
may be pressed in great numbers on ebonite,
celluloid or similar composition disks as

25 now made, and these disks may be used in
any suitable gramophone.

It will be obvious that the disadvantages
hereinbefore mentioned are removed by the
process according to the present invention

30 Avhich also provides that records can be
made not only on flat disks as hitherto but
also on any length of strips of substance
which is elastic so that it can be rolled up
and hard like celluloid or similar sub-

35 stances, or on metal or on an endless band
of any length and breadth of similar sub-
stance as above, on the surface of which the
vibrations may be recorded in the form of a
helix.

40 The constructional form of apparatus
shown in Figs. 2 and 3 will now be de-
scribed. The apparatus is driven by the
pulley A either hj clock work or a weight,
or an electric motor by a strap or a belt.

45 The pulley is fixed on a shaft which runs
on pivots at both ends. On the end of the
shaft near the pulley is cut a very fine
screwthread. The other end of the shaft
carries a pulley B which can be fixed by a

50 screw on the shaft in any position required.
C is a rotating table on Avhich the sensitized
plate is placed, being fixed in position by
means of the raised ends of the table. The
table rotates horizontally on a vertical bear-

55 ing supported by the frame D, and is driven
by friction of the pulley B on which the
table rests, the bottom of the table being
faced with leather to insure smooth running.
Parallel to the shaft which carries the pul-

60 leys is a bar E on which can slide a sleeve
F which carries at one end a rigid curved
frame or bracket G. On the other end of
the sleeve is a spring underneath which is
attached a portion of a nut bearing on the

65 corresponding screw cut on the pulley shaft.

%

so that as the pulley rotates, the screw moves
or slides the sleeve toward the rotating ta-
ble and with it the frame G, whose free end
rests on a plate H, the surface of which is
planed parallel to the plane of the table.
On the top of the frame G is a clamp which
carries a tube J in the same vertical plane
as the pulley shaft and parallel to the plane
of the table. The tube J can be fixed in the
clamp where desired and carries at one end
a pinion K working a rack L which sup-
]:orts the vertical frame M. The lens N is
held by this frame in slots so that it can be
lowered or raised at will of the operator,
while the rack and pinion afford means
for focusing. The rack is supported inside
the tube J, in which it slides. On the tube
J is clamped the bracket O, which supports
the soundbox and the mirror arrangement.
This soundbox may consist of the usual vi-
brating membrane stretched across or cov-
ering the open end of a tube P, and the mir-
ror may be simpl}^ fastened to the membrane
at its center or may be pivoted on supports
attached to the body of the tube and joined
to the membrane with a tender material, or
the mirror may be formed on the membrane
itself. The tube P carrying the membrane
is supported by a cross tube Q, Fig. 3, Tvhich
is held by an adjustable clamp R, which can
be fixed in any position in the slot made for
the purpose at the vertical bend of the sup-
port O. The membrane and the mirror ar-
rangement can therefore be adjusted verti-
cally with reference to the lens N, and the
table C and their relative adjustment in a.
horizontal direction can be effected by
means of the parts J, K, L, above described.
Thus, longer or shorter undulations of vi-
brations can be recorded at the will of the
operator as the distance between the mirror
from the sensitized plate is increased or de-
creased. The pitch of the spiral record can
also be varied by varying the position of
the pulley B in relation to the table C so as
to suit longer or shorter undulations of the
vibrations recorded. The apparatus is in-
closed in a photographically dark chamber
or box which may be conveniently made
large enough to hold the operator. At the
end S of the box on the outer side is a con-
denser 1 and the arrangement for the light,
the ray of light entering the tube T through
the small aperture 2 which is joined to the
lens N^ by the intervening bellows U, so as
to allow free lateral movement of the lens
system. The tube T keeps off light from
the dark chamber. At the other end of the
box and outside it is fixed the mouthpiece
or horn V which is connected with the said
box by a flexible coupling and a sliding tube
W. A light board shown in dot-and-dash
lines Fig. 3 in the drawings may be sus-
pended underneath the lugs X, X and Y.
The board is held clear of the sensitized 130

70

75

80

85

90

95

100

105

110

115

120

125

1,051,513

plate slightly above it, and protects the plate
from all other reflections of light while it
allows the vibrating rays to pass through a
narrow slit made in the board for the pur-
5 pose. The lug Y is slotted to allow of the
movement of the lens during focusing.

What I claim as my invention and desire
to secure by Letters Patent is : —

In a sound recording apparatus, the com-

10 bination with a sound receiving horn, a
sound box attached thereto and comprising
a membrane, a mirror connected to said
membrane at an angle therewith, means for
projecting a ray of light on said mirror

15 comprising^ an apertured diaphragm, a pho-
tographic lens and means for adjusting said
parts relatively to one another, of a bracket
carrying the membrane mirror and lenses
in unvarying relation to one another and in

a common plane, a rotating table adapted to 20
carry a photographic plate, a fixed bearing
for said rotating table, a spindle, a pulley
adjustable thereon engaging and driving
said table, a driven pulley at the end of
the spindle opposite to the first mentioned 25
pulley, a screw-thread on said spindle, a bar
parallel to the latter, a sleeve sliding on said
bar and fixed to the bracket and means caus-
ing the motion of said screw to be trans-
mitted to said sleeve. 30

In testimony whereof I have signed my
name to this specification in the presence of
two subscribing witnesses.

FTIRDOONJEE DORABJEE PUDUMJEE.

Witnesses :

Jehangir M.
Lalla Doolab.

EUTNAGUR,

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

Washington, D. C."

T. A. EDISON.

PHONOGRAPH REPEODDCER.

APPLICATION PILED OCT. 28, 1909.

1,052,656.

Patented Feb. 11, 1913.

m-^

S£oma4 (Z. ^16 (mo

a

^ o

COLUMRIA PCANOGkAI'l

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

THOMAS A. EDISON, OF LLEWELLYN PARK, WEST ORANGE, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR TO
THOMAS A. EDISON, INCORPORATED, OF WEST ORANGE, NEW JERSEY, A CORPORA-
TION OF NEW JERSEY.

PHONOGRAPH-REPRODUCER.

1,053,656.

Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Feb. 11, 1913.

Application filed October 28, 1909. Serial No. 525,063.

To all whom it may concern:

Be it known that I, Thomas A. Edison,
a citizen of the United States, and a resident
of Llewellyn Park, West Orange, Essex
5 county, New Jersey, have invented certain
new and useful Improvements in Phono-
graph-Eeproducers, of which the following
is a description.
• My invention relates to phonograph re-

10 producers and has for its object the pro-
vision of means whereby the stylus lever
may have gTeater freedom of movement in
tracking the grooves of the sound record,
and particularly in movements transverse to

15 the record groove.

While great facility of movement of the
stylus lever both in a direction parallel to
and transverse to the record groove is im-
portant for reproduction from any sound

20 record of the hill and valley type, it is par-
ticularly important in the case of a record
having 200 threads or a gi'eater number of
threads per inch, owing to the thin walls
between the record grooves which might be

25 broken down or jumped across by a stylus,
the parts moving with which have consider-
able inertia.

In phonograph reproducers as commonly
constructed, any movement of the styhis

30 lever transverse to the record groove moves
or twists the link connecting the stylus lever
to the diaphrag-m, and a certain amount of
inertia of this link must be overcome during
the movement. I overcome this difficulty in

35 my present invention by pivotally connect-
ing the stylus lever to a floating weight
which is pivotally connected to the sound
box body, the pivotal connection therefor
being in the same plane at right angles to

40 the diaphragm as the link connecting the
stylus lever to the diaphragm. By this
means the floating weight, which is mounted
to have a limited movement transverse to
the record groove, may so move transversely

45 together with the stylus lever without mov-
ing the link from its normal position or in
any way stressing or distorting the same.

In order that my invention may be more
clearly understood, attention is hereby

50 directed to the accompanying drawings,
illustrating a preferred form thereof, in
which —

Figure 1 is a central vertical section

through a reproducer equipped with my in-
vention, certain parts being shown in side 55
elevation. Fig. 2 is a bottom plan view
thereof.

Referring to the drawings, the usual
sound box 1 is provided with diaphragm 2,
which is clamped between gaskets 3, the 60
whole being held in place by ring 4, which
is threaded within flange 5 of sound box 1
in the usual manner. A bridging member
6 is secured to the bottom of flange 5 of the
reproducer in such a manner as to extend 65
diametrically across the same as shown. A
cylindrical member 7 screw threaded on its
periphery, as shown at 8, and having an an-
nular flange 9 at its upper end, is threaded
through a suitable opening for the same in 70
member 6, so that cylindrical member 7 is
axially in alinement with the center of dia-
phragm 2. Member 7 is provided with lugs
10 and 11 on opposite sides at its lower end,
and to these lugs, floating weight 12 is piv- 75
ctally connected by screws 13, which extend
through lugs or ears 14 formed on the float-
ing weight 12, and into the lugs 10, 11 on
member 7, the lugs on the floating weight
being so formed as to embrace member 7 and 80
come closely adjacent to lugs 10, 11 on mem-
ber 7. Screws 13 are thus placed in a plane
which is substantially in alinement with the
center or axis of diaphragm 2. Stylus lever
15 bearing stylus 16 is pivotally connected 85
to floating weight 12 by means of pivot pin
17, which is supported in ears 18 depending
from floating weight 12 or in any other con-
venient manner. Cylindrical member 7 is
provided with a passageway 19 which ex- 90
tends axially through the same. Link 20
connecting the center of diaphragm to the
tail of stylus lever 15 is extended through
this passageway, being positioned substan-
tially in the same plane as pivots 13 of the 95
floating weight. Cylinder member 7 being
rotatable in bridging member 6, a limited
amount of movement of the floating weight
transverse to the record groove is permitted.
The floating weight is supported, when 100
stylus 16 is not in contact with the record,
by means of screw 21 which is threaded
within member 6 and is provided with a
head 22 of a conical shape, engaging within
a conical opening 23 on the lower side of 105
floating weight 12.

1,052,656

Having now described my invention, what
I claim and desire to protect by Letters Pat-
ent is as follows:

1. In a phonograph reproducer, the com-
5 bination with the sound box, of vibratory

means therein, a stylus lever, a member ro-
tatably supported from said sound box cen-
trally thereof and having a passageway
therethrough, a link extending through said

10 passageway and connecting said lever to
said means, a floating weight, pivot means
for said lever carried by said weight, and
means pivotally supporting said weight
from said member, substantially as de-

15 scribed.

2. In a phonograph reproducer, the com-
bination with the sound box, of vibratory
means therein, a stylus lever, a cylindrical
member rotatably supported from said

20 sound box centrally thereof and having a
passageway axially therethrough, a link ex-
tending through said passageway and con-
necting said lever to said means, a floating
weight, pivot means for said lever carried

25 by said weight, said weight being provided
with lugs embracing said cylindrical mem-
ber, and pivot means for said weight extend-
ing through said lugs into said member,
substantially as described.

■'^ 3. In a phonograph reproducer, the com-
bination with the sound boK, of vibratory
means therein, a stylus lever, a bridging-
member secured to the face of said sound

box, a cylindrical member rotatably mount-
ed in said bridging member and haAdng a 35
passageway axially therethrough, a link ex-
tending through said passageway and con-
necting said lever to said means, a floating
weight, pivot means for said lever carried
by said weight, said weight being provided 40
with lugs embracing said cylindrical mem-
ber, and pivot means for said weight ex-
tending through said lugs into said member,
substantially as described.

4. In a phonograph reproducer, the com- 45
bination with the sound box, of vibratory
means therein, a stylus lever, a member ro-
tatably supported from said sound box and
having a passageway therethrough, a link
extending through said passageway and 50
connecting said lever to said means, a float-
ing weight, pivot means for said lever car-
ried by said weight, and means pivotally
supporting said weight from said member
for up and down movement, the said means 55
being located in a substantially vertical
plane extending transversely to the longitu-
dinal axis of said lever and containing the
axis of said link, substantially as described.

This specification signed and witnessed ^^
this 26th day of October 1909.

THOS. A. EDISON.

Witnesses :

Dyek Smith,
John M. Canfield.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the

Washington, D. C."

' Commissioner of Patents,

1,054,096.

F. L. DYER.

TALKINQ MACHINE.

APPLICATION PILED OOT. 20, 1910.

Patented Feb. 25, 1913.

l^c,.J

^ey,

COLUMBIA PLANOGRAPU CO., WASHINGTON. I>. C.

UNITED STATES PATE:HT OFFICE.

FRANK L. DYER, OF MONTCLAIR, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR, BY MESNE ASSIGNMENTS,
TO THOMAS A. EDISON, INCORPORATED, OF WEST ORANGE, NEW JERSEY, A COR-
PORATION OF NEW JERSEY.

TALKING-MACHINE.

1,054,096.

Specification of letters Patent. Patented Feb. 25, 1913.

Application filed October 20, 1910. Serial No. 588,069.

To all whom it may concern:

Be it known that I, Frank L. Dyer, a
citizen of the United States, and a resident
of Montclair, Essex county, New Jersey,
5 have invented certain new and useful Im-
provements in Talking-Machines, of which
the following is a description.

My invention relates to talking machines,
particularly those of the so-called "hom-

10 less " type, and my object is to provide a
simple compact structure in which the cover
for the casing and reproducing mechanism
may be adjusted when in open position to
form a sound amplifying means for the re-

15 producer. Preferably, a sound conduit or
tube extends from the reproducer through
the cabinet to one side or end wall thereof,
provided with an opening in which the con-
duit ends. The cover has a properly pro-

20 portioned sound conveying conduit formed
therein, and the cover is so mounted upon the
casing that when it is opened the sound con-
veying or amplifying surfaces within the
cover are brought into alinement with the

25 end of the conduit in the casing and caused
to abut against the same so as to form a con-
tinuous sound passageway therewith. This
is accomplished b}' means of movements,
both of reciprocation and oscillation, of the

30 cover with resjDect to the casing, as will
hereinafter be more fully described.

Other objects of my invention reside in
the construction of parts and combinations
of elements, as will be hereinafter more

35 fully described and pointed out in the ap-
pended claims.

For a clearer comprehension of my inven-
tion, attention is hereby directed to the ac-
compan.ying drawings, forming part of this

40 specification, and in which —

Figure 1 represents a central vertical
cross section through a cabinet and repro-
ducing mechanism embodying my invention,
certain parts being shown in side elevation

45 and the cover being shown in closed posi-
tion; Fig. 2 is a similar view showing the
cover in open position, in which it forms a
sound amplifier for the reproducer : Fig. 3 is
a section on line 3 — 3 of Fig. 2 looking in the

50 direction of the arrow: and Fig. 4 is a detail
cross section taken on line 4—4 in Fig. 2.

Referring to the drawings, the cabinet or
casing 1 is provided with a horizontal parti-
tion or member 2 beneath which a suitable

motor is carried in the casing 3 supported by 55
member 2. A record support or turn-table
4 is mounted above i:)artition 2 and is car-
ried by vertical spindle 5 which is adapted
to be rotated by the motor. Eeproducer G is
carried by the holloAv arm or sound convey- 60
ing tube 7 pivot ally mounted at 8 in hori-
zontal member 2 at which i)oint it connects
with the stationary tube or sound conveying
condviit 9 which extends downwardly and
forwardly beneath motor casing 3 as shown, 65
terminating in an opening in the end wall

10 of casing 1. '

The side members of casing 1 are pro-
vided with suitable giiideways 11. The
cover 12 is provided with a sound conduit 70
13 extending therethrough, which conduit
has a small end 14 and a large exit end 15, as
shown. Cover 12 has an end member or ex-
tension 16 which, when the cover is closed,
is adajjted to extend downwardly outside 75
end member 10 of casing 1 to cover the ori-
fice of sound conveying conduit 9, as shown
in Fig. 1. This extension 16. the surfaces of
which are situated in parallel planes, is pro-
vided with horizontally extending pins 17 at 80
the lower end thereof, as shown in Fig. 1,
one of said pins extending into the slideway

11 upon one side of the casing, and the other
pin 17 extending into the slideway 11 upon
the opposite side of the casing. When it is 85
desired to open the cover and place the ma-
chine in operative position, cover 12 is
swung to the right, as shown in Fig. 2, about
pins 17 which are then positioned in the ex-
treme right hand end of slideways 11, as 90
shown in Figs. 1 and 2, and act as pivots for
the cover. ^Vhen the cover has been swung
about pins 17 until end member 16 of the
cover has reached a horizontal position or is

in alinement with slideways 11, the cover is 95
pushed toward the left, referring to Fig. 2,
pins 17 sliding in guideways 11 and mem-
ber 16 sliding upon the bottom 18 of the
casing. The side walls of the casing may
be provided with gniiding strips 19 above lOO
the ui:)per surface of end member 16, when
the latter is being slid into position. The
cover is thus moved into the position indi-
cated in full lines in Fig. 2, in which the
cover abuts against the outer surface of end 105
wall 10 of the casing with the small end 14
of conduit 13 of the cover in alinement with
the end of conduit 9 within the casing and

1,054,096

forming a continuous sound passageway
therewith. In this position, the cover is se-
curely mounted upon side or end 16 thereof
which rests upon the bottom member 18 of
5 the casing and is held steadily in place by
guiding strips 19 secured to the casing, and
by the engagement of pins 17 in slots 11 of
the casing. When it is desired to close the
cover, the same is slid to the right, refer-

10 ring to Fig. 2, until the pins IT have reached
the extreme right hand end of slots 11, when
the cover is raised and oscillated about pins
17 as a fulcrum, the cover being swung to
the left until it comes to rest above the cas-

15 ing and reproducer, as shown in Fig. 1, In
which position wall 16 of the cover forms an
end Avail for the casing covering the end of
conduit 9. When the cover is in open posi-
tion, it forms an efficient sound amplifier,

20 the sound reproduced by reproducer 6 issu-
ing forth from the large end 15 of conduit
13 in the cover.

Having now described my invention, Avhat
I claim ancT desire to protect by Letters Pat-

25 ent is as folloAVs: —

1. In talking machines, the combination
of a casing, a reproducer carried thereby, a
sound conveying conduit extending from
said re]jroducer through said casing and a

30 cover having sound guiding surfaces there-
in, said coA^er haA'ing a part slidably borne
by said casing and pivotal means for said
coA'er carried by said part, said coA'er being
adapted to form a continuation of said con-

35 cluit when in ojoen position, substantially as
described.

2. In talking machines, the combination
of a casing, a reproducer carried thereby, a
sound conveying conduit extending from

40 said reproducer through said casing and
having one end thereof in a Avail of said
casing and a cover having soimd guiding
surfaces therein, said coA^er having a part
adapted to cover the said end of said con-

45 duit wdien said cover is in closed position,
and said cover being adapted Avhen in open
position to form a sound amplifier Avith said
guiding surfaces abutting the end of said
conduit in said casing Avail, substantiallj' as

50 described.

3. In talking machines, the combination
of a casing, a reproducer carried thereby,
a sound conveying conduit extending from
said reproducer through said casing and a

55 cover having guiding surfaces therein, said
casing having a slideway parallel to said
conduit and said cover having a member
reciprocable in said slidcAvay to aline said
guiding surfaces into connection w'ith said

60 conduit Avhen said cover is in open position,
and carrying pivot means about Avhich said
cover may be oscillated into closed position,
substantiallv as described.

4. In talking machines, the combination

of a casing, a sound conveying conduit 65
therein, a reproducing mechanism car-
ried thereby, and a cover therefor hav-
ing a sound conA^eying passage there-
through, said cover liaAdng a flat exten-
sion slidably connected to. said casing, and 70
said passage being adapted to form a con-
tinuation of said conduit when said cover is
in open position, substantially as described.

5. In talking machines, the combination

of a casing, a sound conA^eying conduit 75
therein, a reproducing mechanism carried
thereby, and a coA'er therefor having a sound
conA'eying passage therethrough, said cover
having a flat extension slidably and piA^ot-
ally connected to said casing Avhereby when 80
the coA-er is in open position said passage
may form a continuation of said conduit,
substantially as described.

6. In talking machines, the combination

of a casing, a reproducer carried thereby, a 85
sound conveying conduit extending from
said reproducer through said casing and a
coA^er having sound guiding means therein,
said coA'er having an extension adapted to
coA'er the outer end of said conduit when 90
said coA^er is in closed position, and said
cover being adapted when in open position
to form a sound amplifier with said guiding
surfaces abutting the outer end of said con-
duit, substantially as described. 95

7. In talking machines, the combination
of a casing, a reproducer, a sound conveying
conduit extending from said reproducer
through said casing, and a cover having
sound guiding surfaces therein, haA^ng a 100
pivotal connection with said casing to per-
mit opening and closing of the same, and
having a sliding connection with said cas-
ing whereby translatory movement may be
imparted to the same to move said sound 105
guiding surfaces into or out of connection
Avith said conduit, substantially as described.

8. In talking macliines, the combination
of a casing, a reproducer, a sound couA-ey-
ing conduit extending from said reproducer 110
through said casing, and a cover having
sound guiding surfaces therein, said casing
having a slidew^ay, and said cover having a
member reciprocable in said slideway to
aline said guiding surfaces into connection 115
Avith said conduit Avhen said coA'er is in open
position and carrying pivot means about
Avhich said cover may be oscillated into
closed position, substantially as described.

This specification signed and witnessed 120
this 12th day of October 1910.

FEANK L. DYER.

Witnesses :

Anna E. Klehm,
Dyer Smith.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of IPatents,

Washington, D. C."

T. H. MACDONALD.

GEAPHOPHONE.

APPLIOATIOH PILED DEO. 27, 1906.

1,054,359.

P5

Patented Feb. 25, 1913.

3 SHEETS-SHEET 1.

'^Witiieaaea

'^^^^ii^i^^.r^^^

T. H. MACDONALD.
QEAPHOPHONE.

APPLICATION PILED DEO. 27, 1906.

1,054,359.

Patented Feb. 25, 1913.

3 SHEETS-SHEET 2.

oiJLt-7

^^ iOln.

1,054,359.

T. H. MAODONALD.

GKAPHOPHONE.

APPLICATION PILED DEO. 27, 1906.

Patented Feb. 36, 1913.

3 SHEETS-SHEET 3,

di\ve.yiioz

^^^^^^4~<y^^^<'--^

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

THOMAS H. MACDONALD, OF BRIDGEPORT, CONNECTICUT, ASSIGNOR TO AMERICAN
GRAPHOPHONE COMPANY, OF BRIDGEPORT, CONNECTICUT, A CORPORATION OF
WEST VIRGINIA.

GRAPHOPHONE.

1,054,359.

Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Feb. 35, 1913.

Application filed December 27, 1906. Serial No. 349,696.

To all whom it may concern :

Be it known that I, Thomas H. Mac-

DONALD, of Bridgeport, Connecticut, have

invented a new and useful Improvement in

5 Graphophones, which improvement is fully

set forth in the following specification.

This invention relates to graphophones,
and has for its obcjct to improve the con-
struction and general arrangement of parts

10 entering into said machine.

As heretofore constructed, graphophones
and similar talking machines using the cy-
lindrical form of record, have generally em-
ployed a reproducer resting approximately

15 upon the upper surface of the record, so that
the Aveight of the reproducer rises and falls
in response to the irregularities of the record
as a whole, and the reproducer was sup-
ported by the advancing carriage in ap-

20 proximately a horizontal plane. In case
an amplifsang horn was employed, such
horn has been carried bodily on the front
side of the reproducer carriage, to the end
that the reproduced sounds might be direct-

25 ed by the horn toward the front of the in-
strument; or if a larger horn is employed,
the same has been mounted upon a stand in
front of the machine and connected to the
top of the reproducer and on the front side

30 of the carriage.

According to the present invention, the
reproducer is mounted to the rear of the
cylindrical record and rigidly fixed in the
carriage, so that the reproducer as a whole

5^ i.s not capable of movement toward and
from the record, the reproducer style be-
ing pressed against the record by a spring
tension. Furthermore, by the present in-
vention the amplifying horn is mounted

*^ upon a rigid supporting bracket projecting
to the rear of the machine, the horn, how-
ever, being so mounted on said arm that it
is capable of swinging so as to direct the
open or mouth end of the horn to any point

■*" of the compass. Moreover, extending be-
tween the reproducer and the point where
the horn is supported by the rigid bracket,
there is a hollow sound-conveying tube pref-
erably tapering in form, and so mounted
" upon the supporting bracket as to be capable
of swinging in a horizontal plane, and also
of more or less movement in a vertical plane,
though this last freedom of movement is
not essential. The reproducer carriage,
and hence also the reproducer, move in a

right line past the cylindrical record,
and in order that the union between
the horizontal sound-conveying arm and
the reproducer may be a continuous one,
(notwithstanding the increase of dis- 60
tance between the axis- of said arm and
the reproducer as the same .is advanced
along the record), the said arm is connected
to the reproducer by means of an expanding
or telescopic joint. The carriage is ad- 66
vanced along the slide or way supporting it
by means of a suitable nut engaging the op-
erating sci-ew, and means are provided for
simultaneously lifting said nut from the
screw by overcoming the tension of the 70
spring which holds it in operative position,
and at the same time lifting the reproducer
stylus from contact with the record, and
likewise overcoming the tension of the
spring holding it against the record. 76

There are other features of invention
which will be specifically hereinafter de-
scribed and then pointed out in the claims.

One of the several mechanical expressions
of which the inventive idea is capable is 80
shown in the accompanying drawings, in
which — ■

Figure 1 is a side elevation of my im-
proved graphophone, parts being broken
away for greater clearness of illustration; 85
Fig. 2 is a top plan view with the amplify-
ing horn removed, a portion of the same,
however, being shown in dotted outline;
Fig. 3 is a front elevational view with a part
of the cylindrical record and supporting 90
mandrel broken away in order to show the
reproducer and connected parts; Fig. 4 is a
broken loerspective detail illustrating the
nut by which the carriage is connected and
operated by the advancing screw; and Fig. ^^
5 is a perspective detail illustrating the tele-
scopic joint between the reproducer and the
connected tone-arm.

Referring to the drawings, in which like
reference numerals indicate like parts, 1 is ^^^
the casing or box of the machine within
which is inclosed the usual or any suitable
motor, and 2 is the driving belt extending
from said motor to the mandrel 3, which
mandrel is connected by suitable gearing ^^^
with the screw shaft 4. The mandrel has
bearings at one end only in the upright
bracket 5, while the screw shaft has bear-
ings not only in said bracket 5, but also in
the bracket 6 at the opposite side of the ma- ^^^^

1,054,350

5

10

chine. Extending between the brackets 5
and 6 and to the rear of the screw shaft
and mandrel, is a guide rod 7 upon which
slides a sleeve 8 supporting the frame 9,
within which is rigidly mounted the repro-
ducer 10, the same being preferably held in
position by a suitable set-screw 11 (Fig. 3).
Pivoted in a central slot in the lower part
of the frame 9 and positioned so as to turn
around the sleeve 8 is a lever 12 (see Fig. -4) ,
in the general foi'm of a bell-crank lever.
One arm 13 projects forward from the sleeve

8 and carries a nut 14 engaging the screw on
the shaft 4 ; the other arm is bent in a semi-

15 circular form sO' as to coincide substantially
with the outline of the frame 9 without in-
terfei'ing with the reproducer, and extends
upward to the top of the said frame 9, and
is provided at its upper end with a for-

20 wardly projecting lug or arm 15 whose up-
per forward corner is preferably beveled, as
clearly shown in Figs. 1 and 4.

The reproducer consists of the usual re-
producer frame and diaphragm carried in

25 the frame, while pivoted to the frame is a
bell-crank lever 16 extending across the face
of the diaphragm and supporting the stylus
lever 17 which is suitably pivoted thereto,
one arm of said stylus lever carrying the

30 stylus and the other arm being connected by
a flexible connection 18 to the diaphragm,
as clearly shown in Fig. 1. Pivoted on a
bracket i9 on the upper part of the frame

9 is a lever 20 which is provided with two
35 cam-shaped arms or lugs 21 and 22 so

formed and positioned that when the lever

20 is in the position shown in Fig. 1, lugs

21 and 22 are out of contact with the arms

15 and 16 on the nut-operating lever and the
stylus lever, and therefore the nut is held
by its spring 23 in engagement with the
screw-thread on the propelling shaft, and
the stylus is held in contact with the record
by the tension of spring 24; but when the

45 lever is thrown backward (that is, from left
to right as shown in Fig. 1), the lug 21
wipes upon the cam or beveled end of the
arm 15, and the. lug 22 wipes against the arm

16 of the stylus lever, and thereby throws
the nut out of engagement with the screw
and the stylus out of engagement with the
record.

Eigidly mounted upon the casing 1 and
extending rearward therefrom is a bracket

55 25, Avhich is preferably formed at its upper
rear end so as to afford an annular seat for
the amplifying horn 26, which is retained
in place upon the bracket by any suitable
clamping ring 27 which overlaps the pro-

80 jecting flange on the end of the horn and
thus retains it in position so that it can be
swiveled or turned around in any direction
in its seat. Projecting from the rear side
of the reproducer easing is a neck 28 within

65 which there is seated the close-fitting spher-

10

50

ical end of a tube 29, which tube is prefer-
ably conical on its inside, but with approxi-
mately cylindrical walls on its outside, as
will be clearly seen from Fig. 1. This tube
29 is firml}!' held in place in the neck 28 by
means of a pin 30 preferably screw-threaded
through the neck 28, and provided with a
lug or pin-like part entering a suitable hole
in the spherical portion of the tube 29.
Telescoped over the tube 29 is a tone-arm 31
which is hollow and preferably tapering in
form, expanding from a point adjacent to
the tube 29 until it practically coincides in
diameter with the amplifying horn 26 at the
point where said horn is supported in
bracket 25. This tone-arm is provided with
suitable means for supporting it in the
bracket 25 so as to leave it free to turn in a
horizontal plane. As here shown these,
means consist of two trunnions 32, 32 se-
cured to the exterior wall of the end of the
tone-arm, which trunnions rest upon an an-
nular ledge 33 (Fig. 1) on the interior face
of the annular part of the bracket 25. This
leaves the tone-arm free to be turned in a
horizontal plane and also in a vertical plane,
as may be convenient when adjusting the
parts.

It will be seen by this construction
that there are no parts of the machine
in front of the record or mandrel, and
therefore, that the same may be much more
conveniently reached for placing a record
upon the mandrel or removing it therefrom.
Moreover, the carriage is quickly and
readily connected to the operating screw
and the stylus brought in contact with the
record by a single movement, while an am-
plifying horn of any desired size and weight
may be employed without imposing any
additional burden upon the operating car-
riage, and the horn be free to be swung
during the operation of the machine so as to
direct the sound as desired.

Referring to Fig. 2, it will be seen that
the end of the tone-arm 31 adjacent to the
neck 28 on the reproducer, will, during the
reproduction of the entire record, move
through the arc indicated by the dotted lines
a? cc in Fig. 2, whereas the reproducer car-
riage will move in a right line parallel with
the record. This movement of the parts is
permitted by reason of the telescopic con-
nection between the tube 29 and the tone-
arm 31. When the reproducer is opposite
approximately the central portion of the
record, that is, in the position shown in
Figs. 2 and 3, the tube 29 will extend well
into the end of the tone-arm 31, but when
the reproducer is moved to either side of
the medial line, the tube 29 begins to draw
out of the end of the tone-arm 31, in the
manner clearly illustrated in Fig. 5.

For the purpose of steadying the carriage,
there is preferably provided a rod or bar

70

' 75 •

80

95

100

105

110

115

120

125

130

1,054,359

•5

33', extending between the brackets 5 and
6 and below the guide-bar 7, and an arm 31
I'igidh- attached to the carriage extends
downward and engages the guide rod 33
with its lower forked end, thereby steadying
the action of the carriage and preventing it
from oscillating around the bracket rod 7.
What I claim is: —

1. In a talking machine, the combination
10 of a propelling screw, a vertically disposed

movable frame, a sound box mounted in said
frame, a diaphragm and stylus, a spring-
pressed supporting lever on which said sty-
lus is mounted, a nut connected to said
frame and engaging said screw under spring
tension, a rocking lever supporting said nut,
and a lever pivoted on the top of said frame
and provided with two arms which respec-
tively engage said supporting lever and said
rocking lever to simultaneously disengage
the stylus from the record and the nut from
the screw.

2. In a talking machine, the combination
of a propelling screw, a vertically disposed
movable frame, a sound box mounted in said
frame, a diaphragm and st5dus, a spring-
pressed supporting lever on which said sty-
lus is mounted, a two-armed rocking lever
pivoted in the lower part of said frame, one
of said arms carr3'ing a nut that engages
said screw and the other being bent to sub-
stantially semi-circular form, and a lever
pivoted on said frame and provided with
two arms which respectivelj' engage said
supporting lever and said rocking lever to
simultaneously disengage the stylus from
the record and the nut from the screw.

15

20

25

30

35

3. In a talking machine, the combinatioii
of a propelling screw, a guide rod, a collar
movable thereon, a vertically disposed frame 40
mounted on said collar, a sound box mount-
ed in said frame, a diaphragm and stylus,

a spring-pressed supporting lever on which
said stylus is mounted, a two-armed rocking
lever mounted in the lower part of said 45
frame and adapted to turn around said
sleeve, one of said arms carrying a nut that
engages said screw and the other project-
ing upwardly toward the top of said frame,
and a lever pivoted on said frame and pro- 50
vided with two arms which respectively en-
gage said supporting lever and said rocking
lever to simultaneousl}" disengage the stjdus
from the record and the nut from the screw.

4. In a talking machine, the combination 55
of a reproducer having a stylus normall}^
held against the record by spring pressure,

a frame moving in a right line and support-
ing said reproducer in approximately a ver-
tical plane, a neck projecting rearwardly 60
from said reproducer, a tube provided with
a spherical end that engages in a corre-
spondinglj^ shaped portion in said neck, an
amplifying horn mounted on a fixed sup-
port, and a hollow tone arm telescoping over 6 5
said tube and leading to said horn.

In testimony whereof I have signed this
specification in the presence of two subscrib-
ing witnesses.

THOMAS H. MACDONALD.

Witnesses :

Lucy B. Nicholson,
Margueett R. Pardoe.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

Washington, D. C."

A. R. CUNNIUS.
SOUND REPRODDCING MACHINE.
APPLICATION PILED MAE. 20, 1911.

1,054,395.

Patented Feb. 25, 1913.

3 SHEETS-SHEET 1.

riic^;>c3

AlfredJl-Cujuikbs

Si^ uoiil'o-c

Clttottvey

COLUAtBIA PLANOORAPIl CO.. WASHINGTON. D. C.

A. E. GUNNIUS.

SODND REPRODUCING MACHINE,
APPLICATION FILED MAK. 20, 1911.

1,054,395.

Patented Feb. 26, 1913.

3 SHEETS-SHEET 2,

^V'\XAAAiy:\t^Ci

3ti/u«4n/tc't

cLa^

COLUMBIA PLANOORAPH CO., WASHINGTON, D. C.

1,054,395.

A. K. CUNNIUS.
SOUND REPRODUCING MACHINE.
APPLIOATIOK PILED MAK. 20, 1911,

Patented Feb. 25, 1913.

3 SHEETS-SHEETS.

:^f^(M<i/Hu^,

ei«,

OX.W9A^

COLUMBIA PLANOQRAPH CO., WASHINGTON, D. C.

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

ALFRED R. CUNNIUS, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO LIPMAN
KAISER, OF EAST ORANGE, NEW JERSEY.

SOUND-REPRODUCING MACHINE.

1,054,395.

Specification of letters Patent. Patented Feb. 25, 1913.

Application filed March 20, 1911. Serial No. 615,650.

7b all whom it may concern:

Be it known that I, Alfred R. Cdnnius,
a citizen of the United States, residing at
Brooklyn, in the county of Kings and State
5 of Xew York, have invented a new and use-
ful Sound-Reproducing Machine, of which
the following is a specification.

This invention has reference to improve-
ments in sound reproducing machines, and

10 relates more particularly to the cabinet type
of sound reproducing machines Avhere the
sound amplifier is carried beneath the motor
mechanism and the large end of the ampli-
fier terminates at the front of the cabinet.

15 The object of the present invention is to
materially increase the volume of sound pro-
duced by such type of machine.

In sound reproducing machines of the
cabinet type the motive mechanism and the

20 turn-table for supporting the sound record,
as well as the sound box and the taper arm,
or" as it is sometimes called the tone-arm,
carrying said sound box all follow the usual
construction found in sound-reproducing

25 machines where the amplifying horn over-
hangs the turn-table, but the large end of
the tone-arm is turned downwardly and con-
nects with a sound conduit which in turn
is coupled to the small end of a sound ampli-

30 fying horn or conduit housed in the cabinet
and projecting forwardly from the rear end
of the cabinet to the front thereof where the
large end of the amplifier terminates and is
commonl}' closed in b}- doors, whereby the

35 emitted sound may be modified at the will of
the operator up to the full power of the ma-
chine. There is, however, a noticeable loss
in volume as compared with the type of
reproducing machines where the amplifying

40 horn overhangs the tablet carrying table,
but there are advantages in the cabinet type
of sound reproducing machine in that the
reproduced sound has a softness and
naturalness not foimd in the other type men-

45 tioned, and Avhicli for convenience of de-
scription may be termed the horn type.
^Moreover, the cabinet type of machine is
provided with a cover for inclosing the re-
volving table, the sound box and tone-arm,

50 and the motor mechanism for driving the
revolving table is housed in the body of the
cabinet, so that machine noises and the noise
of the reproducing st3'lus upon tlie record
tablet as well as such sounds as are caused

by the reproducing diaphragm on the ex- 55
posed face are all hushed, and only such
sounds as travel through the sound conduit
and are emitted through the large end of the
sound amplifier are observable by the
listener, the freedom from extraneous noises 60
materially contributing to the perfection of
the reproduction of the sound record.

B}^ the present invention a very material
lengthening of the sound conduit \\ii\\ cor-
responding increase in volume of the ampli- 65
fied sound is brought about, and, moreover,
provision is made for a wide range of modi-
fication whereby the device is adapted to
soft rej)roduction of sounds suitable for
small rooms or a loud reproduction of the 70
sounds suitable for large halls, or any in-
termediate degree of sound that may be
desirable.

The invention iwill be best understood
from a consideration of the following de- 75
tailed description taken in connection with
the accompanying drawings forming a pai't
of this specification, with the understanding,
however, that while the drawings illustrate
a practical and commercial form of the in- 80
vention, the latter is by no means limited to
the exact construction shown, but may be
varied in many details without departure
from the scope of the invention.

In the drawings: — Figui-e 1 is a front ele- 85
yation of the cabinet embodying the present
invention with the controlling door of one
of the sound amplifiers open and with one
of the doors of a tablet containing compart-
ment open. Fig. 2 is a front to rear vertical 90
section through the machine Avith some parts
shown in elevation and some parts broken
away. Fig. 3 is a vertical section on the
line 3—3 of Fig. 2. Fig. 4 is a section in
substantially the same part. as Fig. 3 but 95
taken through the small end of one of the
terminal amplifiers and of the adjacent por-
tion of the neck connected thereto, the scale
being someAvhat larger than that of Fig. 3.
Fig. 5 is a section at right angles to that 100
of Fig. 2 and taken through the sound con-
duit Avhere joining the pivoted end of the
tone-arm, parts being omitted, and showing
a somewhat modified form of the invention.
Fig. 6 is a section on the line 6 — 6 of Fig. 5. 105
Fig. 7 is a section on the line 7 — 7 of Fig. 5.
Fig. 8 is a section in part similar to Fig. 5
and shoAvinff still another form of the in-

1,064,398

vention. Fig. 9 is a plan view of a coupling
used in the structure of Fig. 8.

Referring to the drawings, there is shown
a case or cabinet 1, wliich in general form
i^ ma}'^ foiJOAv the design usually employed
for the cabinet type of sound reproducing
machines, and since such cabinets are often
installed in dwelling houses the exterior of
the cabinet may be of ornamental configura-

IQ tion. The body of the cabinet is provided
with a top or cover member 2 connected to
the body member by hinges 3 and provided
with a handle or handles 4, whereby the top
may be lifted to gain access to tlie interior

15 of the upper end of the cabinet, which is
divided from the main portion of the in-
terior of the cabinet by a partition 5 inset
a short distance from the upper edges of
the wal^s of the cabinet and constitutes not

20 only a division wall, but a support for parts
of the mechanism. Below the partition or
shelf 5 is a cross jjiece 6 in spaced relation
to the shelf 5, and this cross piece may be
fastened to the side walls of the cabinet

25 by brackets 7 or otherwise. The cross piece
6 is designed to support a motor mecha-
nism 8, such as is commonly employed in
machines of this character for driving a
turn-table 9 located above but in close rela-

30 tion to the shelf 5. The motor and turn-
table may be of ordinary and well known
construction and, therefore, need no specific
description.

Considering that portion of the casing to

35 which the cover 2 is connected by the hinges
3 as the rear of the casing, the shelf near
the rear edge has fast thereto a ring-like
member 10, which may be either cast or
turned or both, and this ring-like member

40 is provided with an upstanding flange in
surrounding relation to a hole or passage
through the shelf. The ring has connected
to or formed thereon a bracket 11 between
which and a suitable spicier 12 Avithin the

45 ring 10 there extends a post 13, which may be
made fast to a tone-arm 14, but which is free
to turn about its longitudinal axis in suit-
able bearings in the bracket 11 and spider
12. The pivotal support for the tone-arm

50 may be such as is ordinarily used in con-
nection with machines of this character,
and so needs no specific description. The
small end of the tone-arm 14, which is of
the customary taper form, carries pivotally

56 a neck 15, which latter in turn carries a
sound box 16 in position to engage, by a
suitable stylus or " needle," a sound record
groove in a tablet 17 lodged on the turn-
table 9.

60 As so far described the structure need not
vary in any essential particular from struc-
tures of like character already in existence,
and,, also, may be made in any other man-
ner suitable for the purposes of the present

65 invention, but which structures do not enter

into the present invention and, therefore,
need no particular description, the show-
ing of the drawings with respect to the
several features named being typical rather
than mandatory. . >jq

Depending from the shelf 5 coincident
with the passage into which the tone-arm
opens is an expanding sound conduit 18
forming a continuation of the tone-arm, so
far as the conducting of sound is concerned, 75
and this sound conduit is carried to a point
comparatively low in the casing 1, and in
the particular showing of the drawings ex-
tends more than half way toward the bot-
tom of the casing. The expanded end of 30
the conduit 18 which may be of metal is con-
nected to divergent necks 19, 20, respec-
tively, and these necks are returned on
themselves so that the ends remote from
those connected to the conduit 18 open in 35
generally the same direction as the length of
the conduit 18, but the longitudinal axes of
the open ends of these necks are at an angle
to the longitudinal axis of the conduit 18
although substantially parallel one with the 90
other. Each neck 19 and 20 has formed
thereon 'Or connected thereto a radial flange
21 terminating in an annular flange 22 in
which is lodged the smaller end of an ampli-
fier 23, the latter being preferably made of a 95
circular series of staves so shaped that the
interior of the amplifier continuously ex-
pands from the end lodged within the
flanged end of the respective neck 19 or
20 to the other end of the amplifier. To iqq
prevent rattling or other noises some soft
material, indicated at 24, is interposed be-
tween the end of the sound amplifier 23 and
the socket flange receiving it and the parts
are secured together by screws 25 or in 105
any other appropriate manner. The mate-
rial 24 may be, and usually is fe-t.

The necks 19 and 20 are each so shaped
that the flanged ends and the amplifiers 23
carried thereby are directed toward the no
front of the casing and at the same time
upwardly, so that thej^ terminate on each
side of the center line of the casing at the
front thereof at openings 26, the correspond-
ing ends of the amplifiers 23 terminating at 115
an appropriate angle, so as to rest squarely
against the inner wall of the front of the
casing in surrounding relation to the corre-
sponding opening 26, and in order to pre-
vent any rattling at these points due to 120
looseness of contact, a suitable felt gasket 27
is interposed, while cleats 28 glued or other-
wise secured to the outer end of each ampli-
fier serve as a means for securing the ampli-
fier in place by the use of screws 29, or by 12-3
other appropriate fastening devices. Be-
cause of the general frusto-conical .shape of
each amplifier 23 and the angle at which the
larger end is cut in order to fit snugly
against the inner face of the front wall of 118O

1,064,305

3

the casing, the openings 26 are of oval form
with the longer axis upright, but this form
is by no means mandator}'. Each opening
26, there being two amplifiers 23 on oppo-
f, site sides of the center line of the casing,
is provided with a door 30 Avhich may be
connected to the front of the casing by a
hinge 31, and is provided with a knob or
handle 32, whereby the door may be readily

10 opened or closed. Any of the ordinary
forms of latch devices may be used to hold
the doors in the closed position, but such
latch devices are not shown in the drawings.
The longitudinal axes of the two amplifiers

15 23 are substantially parallel one with the
other and the sound emitting ends of these
amplifiers are of enlarged area due to the
fact that the planes of said ends are each at
an angle to the longitudinal axis of the

20 respective amplifier, so that such enlarged
ends operate acoustically like the. expanded
bell ends of ordinary sound amplifiers. Be-
cause of the upward and forward direction
of the amplifiers 23, the openings 26 are

25 located near the top of the casing and there
remains ample i-oom below these openings
and below the amplifiers 23 for racks 33, 34,
respectively, designed to receive record tab-
lets of the disk type, and these racks may be

30 supported by generally horizontal partitions
35, 36, of which the latter may constitute
the bottom of the cabinet, and doors 37 may
be provided to close in thei^e racks against
the entrance of dust or dirt, and, also, to

36 add to the appearance of the front of the
cabinet. The rack compartments in them-
selves form no j)art of the present inven-
tion, since they may be made in a manner
corresponding to the usual custom in ma-

40 chines of this character.

To brace the lower end of the pendent
conduit 18 and the lower ends of the ampli-
fiers 23, brachig vstrips 38 are provided, and
these strips may be connected to nearby

46 fixed parts of the cabinet.

One of the necks, eay the neck 20. is open
at one side and this opening is flanked by
guard members 39 between which may be
passed a valve plate 40 held against rattling

60 by strips 41 of felt or otlier material lodged
in corresponding enlargements of the guard
members 39. The valve 40 exterior to the
guard members is connected to an operat-
ing bar 42 carried to and through the shelf

55 ^5 and above this shelf is provided with a
manipulating handle 43. By pulling on the
rod or bar 42 by means of the handle 43,
the valve 40 may be i^ulled out of traversing
relation to the corresponding neck 20. so

60 that the latter is left free and open, or the
passage through the neck may be closed by
the valve on a proper manipulation of the
rod 42.

Let it be assumed that the doors 30 are

•5 closed and that the valve 40 is in a position

where it closes the passage through the neck
20 from the conduit 18 to the corresponding
amplifier 23. Let it also be supposed that
a sound record tablet is lodged on the turn-
table and that the apparatus is in operation 70
for the production of sound from such tab-
let. Because both amplifiers liave their
outer ends or mouths closed, and because
one of the amplifiers is cut off from the
c(mduit 18, the reproduced sound is so 75
muffled as to be nearly inaudible. If, now,
the door 30 controlling the mouth of the
amplifier connected to the neck 19 be open,
a volume of sound will at once issue from
the instrument commensurate with the go
length and cross section of the sound con-
duit from the sound box to the mouth of
the particular amplifier 23 under considera-
tion. The volume of sound is readily con-
trolled by the degree of opening of the cor- 85
responding door 30, and because of the
length of the sound amplifier and, also, be-
cause of the cross section thereof, there is-
sues from the amplifier connected to the
neck 19 a volume of sound in excess of the 90
cabinet type of sound reproducing machines
as ordinarily constructed. If a greater vol-
ume of sound is desired, then the valve 40
is moved out of interfering relation to the
interior of the neck 20 and there is imme- 95
diately brought about a marked increase in
the volume of sound until it reaches a maxi-
mum in excess of that producible by a com-
mercial form of horn machine of large size.
The extraneous sounds necessarily asso- 100
ciated with the horn machine are eliminated
in the cabinet type of machine of the pres-
ent invention, while not on^y is the volume
of sound emitted by the machine of the pres-
ent invention far in excess of the volume of 105
sound producible by any known commer-
cial form of cabinet machine, but the vol-
ume of sound may even exceed the loudest
commercial type of horn machine, and is
only exceeded by the air pressure type of no
sound reproducing machines. Moreover,
the amplifiers 23, which may be made of
wooden staves, materially enhances the pu-
rity and naturalness of the reproduced
sound in the same manner as is brought 115
about by the use of a A>^ooden horn in the
horn machines.

The elongated sound conduit reaching,
Avell toward the bottom of the cabinet and
the upwardly and outwardl,y directed .am- 120
plifiers give a desirable length to the
sound passages to impart volume to the
somid, while the upward direction of the
emitting end of the sound amplifiers causes
a disposition of the sound, whereby in 125
large audience halls the sound may be made
to travel with practically the same volume
to all parts of the hall, distance only serv-
ing to diminish the sound, while the sound
is as readily audible to one side of the di- 3 30

1,054,305

rect line of projection from the machine as
directly in front thereof. Moreover, the
twin soimd amplifiers makes it possible to
greatly modifj' the volume of the emitted
5 sound and to wider extent than wonld hap-
pen if the modification of the volume of
sound was due solely to the opening and
closing of a door or doors controlling but
one amplifier, for one of the amplifiers may

10 remain unimpeded with the door wide open
while the sound ma}^ be diminished or in-
ci'eased by moving the valve 40 into and
out of traversing relation to the neck 20 to
any extent desired. The valve 40 does not

15 interfere with the use of the doors 30 for
modifying purposes, but usually these doors
are used for the modification of the sound
only in small rooms, wiiere the full power
of the machine, or even of one of the am-

20 plifiers is excessive.

The more pronounced control of the emit-
ted sound may be brought about by dividing
the conduit 18 into two parts longitudinal^.
This may be done, as indicated in Fig. 5,

25 where the conduit 18 is traversed longitudi-
nally by a centrally located web 44, so that
there is no direct communication between
the sound passages from the large end of the
tone-arm to the emitting end or ends of the

30 amplifiers 23. By the time the reproduced
sound reaches the large end of the tone-arm
it is amplified, but not to any very marked
degree. In the structure shown in Figs. 2
and 3 the sound by the time it reaches the

35 necks 19 and 20 is amplified about as much
as the total volume of sound issuing from a
cabinet type of machine of ordinary con-
struction. The result of this is that while
the valve 40 produces a noticeable diminu-

40 tion of the volume of sound issuing from
the machine as a whole, this valve being
placed in traversing relation to the neck 20,
some sound will still issue through the sound
amplifier which has been cut otf from direct

45 communication with the sound box, this be-
ing due to conduction of sound through the
valve and the walls of the neck 20 adjacent
thereto. AVith the construction shown in
Figs. 5 and 6 there is less amplification of

50 the sound in each half of the conduit 18 than
would occur if the web 44 were absent, so
that whatever sound may still issue from the
cut off amplifier is much diminished with
reference to the form shown in Figs. 2 and

55 3. In order that the direct communication
with one side of the conduit 18 may be con-
trolled before the sound passing thereto is
amplified to any great extent, there is pro-
vided a valve 45 beneath but close to the

60 shelf 5 and so positioned as to be movable
into and out of traversing relation to that
side of the amplifier 18 connected to the
neck 20. In order that this valve may be
readily controlled from the front portion of

65 the machine, it is connected to a rod 46 trav-

ersing a bracket 47 fast to the interior of
the casing, and this rod is also surrounded
by a spring 48 tending to move the valve
toward the closed position. The end of the
rod 46 remote from the valve 45 is con- 70
nected to a bell crank lever 49, which in turn
is connected by a link 50 to another bell
crank lever 61 mounted on a bracket 52 and
provided with a manipulating rod 53 ex-
tending through the slot 54 in the shelf 5 75
and through a corresponding slot in a plate
56 on the shelf 5 immediately surrounding
the slot 54. The rod 53 is formed Avith a
handle 57 above the shelf 5, so that this han-
dle may be readily reached by the operator go
and drawn up or pushed down as to w^hether
it is desirable to move the valve 45 out of or
into traversing relation to the portion of
the conduit 18 connected to the neck 20. A
pin 58 traversing the rod 53 may be pulled 86
through the slot 54 in the shelf and the slot
in the plate 56, and if this slot be of the key
hole variety the pin 58 may be carried into
locking relation to the plate 56, so as to hold
the valve 45 in the open position against the 90
tendenc}^ of the spring 48.

With the structure shown in Figs. 5, 6 and
7 the full volume of sound is approximate^
that of the structure shown in Figs. 2 and 3,
but since the presence of the web 44 reduces 95
the effective cross section of the conduit 18
so far as either of the amplifiers 23 is con-
cerned, the volume of sound issuing through
a single amplifier is less than in the struc-
ture shown in Figs. 2 and 3, and conse- lOO
quently the cutting off of one half the con-
duit 18 is more pronounced in effect in the
reduction of the volume of sound than in the
structure of Figs. 2 and 3.

It is possible to produce an even more 105
marked effect by substituting for the conduit
18 two conduits separately connected to the
respective necks 19 and 20, so that the com-
bined cress sectional area of the two con-
duits may be greater than that of the single 110
crnduit 18 at the same point. In Figs. 8
and 9 two conduits 18^ and 18'' are indicated
and each of these conduits may be circular
in cross sections, and at one point may be
brought into contact for convenience of 115
mounting, being joined at these points by
soldering or otherwise if found desirable.
In order to connect the smaller ends of the
conduits 18'' and 18" Avith the large end of
the tone-arm 14 there is provided a connect- 120
ing member 59 in traversing relation to the
shelf 5 and formed with a flange 60 adapted
to engage the under face of the shelf 5 to be
secured thereto b}' screws or otherwise. This
connector 59 is formed above the shelf with 125
a collar like extension 61 designed to re-
ceive tlie large end of the tone-arm 14, while
the other end of the member 59 below the
shelf 5 is formed Avith a flange 62 of a shape
to receive the rounded smaller ends of the 130

1,054,395

5

conduits 18^ and 18", while the spaces be-
tween these conduits where in abutment may
be closed by a filling G3 either formed in one
piece with the member 59 or formed sepa-
5 rately therefrom. The conduit IS'' is pro-
vided Avith a valve 45" adapted to the shape
of the conduit and controllable in the same
manner as the valve 45 described with refer-
ence to Figs. 5, 6 and 7.
10 What is claimed is: —

1. A sound reproducing machine of cabi-
net type having sound record driving means,
a sound bi)x and a tone-arm in the upper
portion, a sound conveyer of progressively

I") increasing cross section communicating at
the small end with the tone-arm and from
thence having a downward direction or drop
and also having a sound emitting end of
double form rising from the lower end of

20 the dro]) portion, and means for cutting out
one of the two sound emitting devices from
direct connnunication with the tone-arm,
said means having an accessible manipulat-
ing portion extending to the upper part of

25 the cabinet adjacent the sound record driv-
ing means.

2. A sound reproducing machine compris-
ing a suitable cabinet provided with tablet
actuating means, a sound box, and a taper

30 tone-arm all located in the upper end of the

ALFRED E. CUNNIUS.

Witnesses :
John H.
David E.

35

40

cabinet, a sound conduit of progressively in-
creasing diameter communicating at its
smaller end with the larger end of the tone-
arm, said sound conveyer comprising a
metallic portion extending from the tone-
arm in a downward direction in the cabinet
and termiiuiting in two upturned branches
or necks and upwardly directed continua-
tions of each neck of the convej'cr in the
form of a hollow wooden member progres-
sively expanding from the respective neck
and terminating at the front of the cabinet
below that ])ortion containing the sound box
and tone-arm, the terminal portion of each
wooden continuation of the sound conveyer 45
being provided with a door individual there-
to, and one of the two necks of the metallic
l)ortion of the sound conveyer being pro-
vided with a cut-off having a manipulating
member extending to that portion of the
cabinet containing the sound box and tone-
arm and there accessible.

In testimony, that I claim the foregoing
as my own, I have hereto affixed nxy signa-
ture in the presence of two witnesses.

oO

SiGGERS,

Wagner.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the

Washington, D. C."

Commissioner of Patents,

V. H. EMERSON & G. A. MANWARING.

ART OF AND APPARATDS FOR RECORDING AND REPRODDCING SOUND.

APPLICATION PILED APE. 17, 1908.

1,055,525.

Patented Mar. 11, 1913.

^'

^

"7

r^u.'^

C^ec-* -c/^^j

COLUMBIA PLANOQRAPH CO., WASHINGTON, D. C.

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

VICTOR H. EMERSON, OF NEW YORK, N. Y., AND GEORGE A. MANWARING, OF BAYONNE,
NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNORS TO AMERICAN GRAPHOPHONE COMPANY, OE BRIDGE-
PORT, CONNECTICUT, A CORPORATION OF WEST VIRGINIA.

ART OF AND APPARATUS FOR RECORDING AND REPRODUCING SOUND.

1,055,525.

Specification of letters Patent. Patented Mar. 11, 1913.

Application filed April 17, 1908. Serial No. 427,691.

To all whom it may concern :

Be it known that we, Victor H. Emerson
and George A. Manwaring, citizens of the
United States of America, residents of New
5 York city, New York, and Bayonne, New
Jersey, respectively, have invented new and
useful Improvements in the Art of and
Apparatus for Recording and Reproducing
Sound, which improvements are fully set

10 forth in the following specification.

Our invention relates to talking-machines
and is based upon the use of the selenium
cell. It has long been known that selenium
possesses the peculiar property of becoming

15 more electro-conductive in the presence of
light, — or stated reversely: its electrical re-
sistance diminishes as the light increases.
This property has been utilized by various
forms of apparatus known as " selenium

20 cells " which are inserted in an electrical
circuit and provided with means for regu-
lating the admission of light upon the cell.
Such cells are very sensitive in responding
to slight variations in the amount of light.

25 The utilization of our present invention
comprises a talking-machine employing the
principle of the telephone and that of the
selenium cell, namely : thei^e is a diaphragm
actuated by an electro-magnet; the electro-

30 magnet in turn is actuated by an electric
current ; and this current is modulated in in-
tensity by means of the varying resistance
imparted to a selenium cell included in the
circuit. This varying resistance is impart-

35 ed to the selenium cell by means of a special
sound-record, — the latter being a sort of
" stencil " which admits more or less light
to the selenium cell, the amount of light ad-
mitted corresponding to the .sound-waves.

40 Consequently the electric undulations in the
circuit, and the resultant audible vibrations
of the diaphragm, correspond to the sound-
waves.

The present invention consists in the

45 manner of producing the special sound-
record or " stencil " record for such service,
and further in the various details pointed
out and claimed.

"We have also invented the stencil record

50 itself, and the apparatus for titilizing it, as

well as the method of reproducing sound,

all as hereinafter pointed out ; but do not

claim the same in the present application.

_The invention will be best understood by

describing the details of preferred embodi- §5
ments thereof.

In the annexed drawings. Figure 1 repre-
sents, conventionally, but greatly enlarged,
a portion of a stencil record such as may be
used for the purpose indicated; Fig. 2 is a 60
vertical section of a reproducing apparatus,
embodying our invention; and Fig. 3 is a
transverse section of a detail of Fig. 2.

One way of making the stencil record is
as follows: We first produce an "original" 65
sound-record of the up-and-down, or verti-
cally-undulating, type. That is to say, a
V-pointed recording-stjdus is caused (by
sound-waves) to vibrate up and down, be-
ing embedded into the surface of a revolv- 70
ing recording disk of the usual wax-like
material, while the stylus is simultaneously
fed across the disk, — in order to produce a
spiral record-groove having vertical irregu-
larities of varying depth, such for example 75
as set forth by Bell and Tainter Patent No.
341,214, of May 6, 1886. The stylus is of
the usual type employed in making records
of this character, and owing to its taper
(its end being substantially V-shaped) the 80
deeper the cut, the wider it will be. Conse-
quently, such a record-groove corresponds
to the sound-waves not only in its varia-
tions of depth, but also in its variations in
width. The surface of this " original " rec- 85
ord-disk is then rendered electro-conduc-
tive in any convenient manner (as by coat-
ing it with finely powdered graphite), and
an electroplate obtained therefrom (conven-
iently of copper). From this first or nega- 90
tive electroplate we obtain, by any of the
well-known processes, a second or positive
electroplate, which will be an exact copy of
the original sound-record. It will be a
plane metal surface having a gi'oove of va- 95
rying depth, and, as explained before, of
varying width. The deeper the cut, the
wider it will be; consequently since (as is
well known) the vertical irregularities or
variations in depth correspond to the sound- 100
waves, so also the lateral variations — the
variations in width — will likewise corre-
spond to the original sound-waves. This
second or positive metal plate is then used
as a printing-plate. Any suitable ink is 105
applied to its surface, and then imprinted
upon a sheet of paper. This printed sheet of
paper (Fig. 1) will appear as a black field

a

1,055,525

having a spiral blank space, or succession
of spaces, 30 (where no ink has been de-
posited). This blank space 30 corresponds
to the superficial shape of the record-groove
5 of the printing-plate (and of the original
sound-record) . The paper may be any ordi-
nary paper; or it may be treated before-
hand to render it more translucent; or such
treatment may be applied after the paper
jQ has been printed, as, for instance, by " wax-
ing" the printed sheet. This new sound-
record may be defined as a " stencil ", being
an opaque sheet or disk 20 having a translu-
cent portion 30 corresponding, in variations

25 of width, to sound-waves. The " record "
proper is made up of a succession of lakes
30 as it were, as illustrated in Edison Pat-
ent No. 430,278, dated June 17, 1890 (Fig.
9 thereof) ; and it differs from the tracing

20 shown in Fig. 5 of Berliner Patent No.
732,786, dated Nov. 8, 1887, in that the line
y of the latter is not " of varying width ",
nor is it described as " translucent ".

Eeferring now to Fig. 2, 11 is a table or

26 frame-plate, beneath which is indicated a
battery 12 having the circuit 13 — 13. At 14
is the core, and at 15 the windings, of an
electro-magnet in the circuit 13, in front of
which magnet is a suitably-supported dia-

80 phragm 16, from which extends a sound-
duct 17, leading to the horn 17'. The sele-
nium cell included in the circuit 13, is indi-
cated at 18. Broadly stated, we provide in
the electric circuit a selenium cell and a tele-

35 phone. In front of the selenium cell, we
provide a revoluble and laterally-progress-
ing carrier 19, which may be a sort of spider
or ring (or a disk of glass or other trans-
parent material) upon which our stencil

40 record 20 is detachably secured by any con-
venient device (not shown). On the front
side of the record 20, we locate a lamp or
other source of light 21 ; and, between the
record 20 and the selenium cell is an opaque

45 shield 22 having a narrow transverse slit
23 (see Fig. 3). The selenium cell will fur-
ther be protected from light by a removable
opaque housing 24. Suitable means (not
shown) are provided for rotating the car-

60 rier 19 and the record 20, while causing them
to progress laterally in front of slit 23.

The operation is now obvious: When the
apparatus is started, the stencil record 20
is caused to revolve and to progress in front

65 of the slit 23, the rate of progression being
correlated to the pitch of the spiral record-
path 30 ; so that this blank space 30 will, in
its successive convolutions, be passing con-
tinuously in front of the slit. The stencil

60 record 20 acts as sort of shutter in admit-
ting more or less light through the slit 23
and upon the selenium cell 18 ; the wider
the blank space 30, the more light will be
admitted to the selenium cell ; and the longer

65 each particular " lake " or enlargement in

the blank space, the longer will be the period
of time in which light is being admitted
to the selenium cell. In short, the quantity
of light admitted to the cell, and the dura-
tion of the admission of light, correspond
exactly to the intensity and duration of the
original sound-waves. From this it follows
from the principle of the selenium cell, that
its electrical conductivity is increased and
diminished precisely in accordance with the
sound-waves; consequently the electro-mag-
net 14 — 15 has its energy increased and di-
minished in precise accordance with the
sound-waves; and the diaphragm 16 is vi-
brated accordingly, and gives forth sounds
corresponding precisely to the original
sounds whose waves had been recorded and
then copied graphically upon the stencil
record 20.

It will be understood of course that the
apparatus just described is merely one em-
bodiment of an apparatus for carrying out
our invention, and for utilizing a stencil
record obtained as heretofore described or
otherwise.

While we have described our record as in
the form of a disk having the translucent
spaces arranged in a spiral, it is manifest
that a tape, or an endless belt, might be em-
ployed; and the translucent spaces might
extend in a continuous straight line or oth-
erwise. Furthermore, the terms "opaque"
and " translucent " are relative, the gist of
this part of our invention consisting in the
sound-record having variations of translu-
cency corresponding to sound-waves. For
instance, the path indicating the sound-
waves might be the opaque portion while
the field of the record would be translucent;
and the whole article might be more or
less translucent, but the part corresponding
to path 30 markedly more so and with its
translucency varjdng in accordance with
sound-waves. Such articles would still be
within the spirit of our invention. Again,
since the two sides of the record-path 30
are similar, only one side of such record
might be employed for obtaining audible
reproductions. Therefore, the employment,
in modulating the admission of light to the
selenium cell, of a zig-zag record-path of
uniform width, as illustrated in Fig. 5 of
the Berliner Patent No. 732,786 (heretofore
mentioned), by using only one-half of such
record, would be within the spirit of our
invention. It will also be understood that
our stencil record may be obtained by other
means or processes than above set forth. And
other changes may be made in the construc-
tion and arrangement, and in details, with-
out in any case departing from the spirit of
our invention, which broadly consists, first,
of a sound-record presenting variations of
translucency corresponding to sound-waves ;
and, second, in reproducing sounds by mod-

I

70

75

80

85

90

95

100

105

110

115

120

125

130

1,066,626

d

ulating (in accordance with sound-waves)
the amount of light admitted upon a seleni-
um cell, and thereby correspondingly actuat-
ing the diaphragm of the talking-machine.
5 Having thus described our invention, we
claim :

1. The process of producing a sound-
record, which consists of first producing in
a tablet of suitable material a record-groove

10 of varying width corresponding to sound-
waves, obtaining therefrom in hard mate-
rial an exact duplicate of said original rec-
ord-groove, and finally printing the surface
of the latter upon a translucent sheet.

15 2. The process of producing a sound-
record, which consists of producing in suit-
able material a record-groove of varying
Avidth corresponding to sound-waves, and
printing therefrom upon a translucent

23 sheet.

3. The process of producing a sound-
record, which consists of first producing in
a tablet of suitable material a record-grooA^e

of varying width corresponding to sound-
waves, and then producing therefrom upon 25
a sheet of suitable material a sound-record
consisting of areas having translucency dif-
ferent from that of the rest of the sheet, the
widths of said areas varying in accordance
with the sound-waves. 30

4. The process of producing a sound-
record, which consists of first producing in
a tablet of suitable material a record-groove
of varying width corresponding to sound-
waves, and then producing therefrom an 35
opaque sheet having a translucent path of
varying width corresponding to sound-
waves.

In testimony whereof Ave have signed this
specification in the presence of two sub- 40
scribing witnesses.

VICTOR H. EMERSON.
GEORGE A. MANWARING.

Witnesses :

Ralph L. Scott,
W. H. Hakting.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

Washington, D. C."

T. A. EDISON.

REPRODUCER.
APPLICATION PILED MAY 18, 1911.

1,055,621.

Patented Mar. 11, 1913.

J^'^

^^

—

^

1

^

J

ZO

J^

~i^

^^p"

I __ . . 1'^ __ZiL

^=-J9

rs > l^J^ ^^

/^r

^'^

j ^^ J I

n-

Itjj

^^.^

COLUMBIA

CO., WASHINOTON. D. I

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

THOMAS A. EDISON, OF WEST ORANGE, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR TO THOMAS A. EDISON,
INCORPORATED, OF WEST ORANGE, NEW JERSEY, A CORPORATION OF NEW JERSEY.

REPRODUCER.

1,055,631.

Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Mar. 11, 1913.

Application filed May 18, 1911. Serial No. 627,952.

To all ivhom it may concern:

Be it known that I, Thomas A. Edison,
a citizen of the United States, and a resi-
dent of West Orange, in the county of Es-
5 sex and State of New Jersey, have invented
certain new and useful Improvements in
Reproducers, of which the following is a
specification.

^ly invention relates to reproducers for

10 phonographs and other sound reproducing
apparatus and my principal object is to pro-
vide a device of this character whereby an
improved qualitj" of reproduction can be ob-
tained,

15 It has heretofore been customary to con-
nect the tail of the stylus lever to the dia-
phragm by means of a rigid metal link,
This structure is objectionable in that the
diaphragm cannot move quickly enough to

2o permit the stilus to remain in engagement
with the record groove so that the stylus
jumps over the forward walls of the deep
indentations and after striking the bottom
of the indentations rebounds from the rec-

25 ord and causes the production of sharp un-
pleasant sounds. Slight defects in the rec-
ord furthermore cause the transmission to-
the diaphragm of objectionable weak
sounds, and the suddenness or abruptness

30 of the sound waves causes the emission of
sliarp metallic sounds, Furthermore it is
impossible to form a metallic connecting
link perfecth' straight jj and as the weight
used with reproducers is never sufficient to

35 straighten out the fiat bow commonly found
in such a link, the vibration of the stylus
lever jjroduces therein local vibrations
whereby the loudness and accuracv of the
reproduction are greatly impaired.

40 I liave found that the above defects ma.y
be remedied by employing an elastic resili-
ent connection, such as a cotton string to
connect the stvlus leA'er to the diaphragm.
Such a connection is of very small weight.

45 and therefore responds readily to the elastic
j)ower stored therein to hold the stylus con-
tinuously hi engagement with the record
groove. It also through its short elasticity
absorbs the objectionable weak sounds men-

50 tioned above and diminishes the suddenness
and abi-uptness of the sound waves so that a
very pleasing mellow tone is obtained. By
choosing a connection of proper elasticity
and diameter, and properly adjusting the

55 length thereof, the quality of the reproduc-

tion may obviously be varied at will. As
a weight of small mass is sufficient to hold
my improved connection taut, the objections
due to the curved form of metal links are
eliminated. 60

My invention furthermore- comprises an
improved diaphragm of such lightness and
flexibility that the w^eight of the reproducer
and the consequent wear on the record can
be materially decreased. 65

Other features of my invention are an
improved connection between the dia-
phragm -and stylus lever whereby the dis-
tortion of the diaphragm during the repro-
duction of the record is prevented, and an 70
improved mounting for the stylus lever
whereby the same is caused to more readily
and faithfully track the record groove.

Further objects of my invention will ap-
pear more fully in the following specifica- 75
tion and appended claims.

In order that my invention may be better
understood, attention is hereby directed to
the accompanying drawings forming part
of this specification and in which — 80

Figure 1 is a side elevation partly in sec-
tion showing a reproducer embodying my
invention; Fig. 2 is a bottom plan view
thereof; Fig. 3 is a front elevation showing
a detail of construction; Fig. 4 is an en- 85
larged central vertical section showing an-
other detail of construction; Fig. 5 is a
view similar to that shown in Fig. 4 of a
modification; and Fig. 6 is a side elevation
of another modification. 90

In all the views, like parts are desig-
nated by the same reference numerals.

The sound box comprises an annular mem-
ber 1 having an extension 1' and an upper
ccnical member 2 provided with a neck 2', 96
the periphery of the member 2 being secured
between two rings 3 and 4, threaded into
the interior of the annulus 1. The dia-
phragm 5 is mounted between rubber gas-
kets (5 and 7 which in turn are secured be- 100
twoen the ring 4 and a third ring 8 threaded
into the bottom of the member 1. The stylus
9 is mounted in a lever 10 rotatably sup-
ported on a pivot 11 which is mounted at its
ends in spaced bearings 12 projecting down- 105
wardly from the lower surface of the weight
13. In order to prevent the record from
throwing the stylus lever and stylus side-
wise on its pivot, and thus emitting objec-
tionable foreign sounds. I make the bearing lie

^

1,055,621

20

25

of the said lever of considerable width, pref-
erabh^ substantially as wide as the tracking
arm of the lever is long, a sufficient width
being preferably obtained for the bearing
5 by providing the lever with laterally offset
or projecting portions through which the
pivot 11 passes, as shown. As clearly shown
in Figs. 1 and 2, I make the weight 13 of
considerable length and mount the same at a

10 considerable distance from the place at
which the stylus lever is secured thereto,
thus providing a structure wherein the
pivotal movement of the floating weight in
following the irregularities ,of the record is

15 very slight; so that the said weight, by rea-
son of the increased leverage obtained, is
readily adjusted by the stylus in tracking
the i-ecord groove. The floating weight is
connected to the outer end of the extension
1' in the following manner: A spring 14 or
other suitable elastic member is secured at
its forward end by means of screws 15 to
the rear end of the weight 13, washers 16
being inserted between the heads of the said
screws and the spring 14. At its opposite
end, the spring 14 is secured by screws 17
to a headed pivot member 18 loosely
swiveled in a vertical opening in the outer
end of the extension 1'. The numeral 19

30 represents washers inserted between the
screws 17 and the head of the member 18,
and the numeral 20 a nut for securing the
pivot member 18 in place. The swiveling
or pivoting of the floating weight as de-

35 scribed above permits the stylus to track
close to the center of the record groove and
thus eliminates objectionable pressure on
the sides of the record groove.

The elastic spring connection described

40 above is evidently free from objectionable
looseness such as is practically unavoidable
in the ordinary pivot joints employed for
mounting floating weights, it being prac-
tically very difficult to make a small pivotal

45 connection tight without binding.

Secured to the front of the floating weight,
is a loop 21 having an upper portion 22 in
the shape of an inverted V, this latter por-
tion being adapted to be engaged by a pin

50 22' secured to the front of the member 1 to
center and support the floating weight when
the reproducer is raised from operative
position.

The diaphragm 5 is made of a very light

55 and flexible material so that it is possible
to reduce the weight on the stylus and thus
diminish the wear on the record and
cause a more faithful production from
the record. The body portion of the dia-

eWphragm is preferably built up of a number
of layers of elastic fibrous material, sheets 23
of Japanese paper about .001 of an inch
thick being preferably employed. These
sheets are thinly lacquered, then placed in

66 the air to dry, then assembled together to

the required thickness, and finally cemented
into a unitary structure by the application
of heat and pressure. A suitable thickness
for a diaphragm two inches in diameter is
.005 of an inch. To -this body portion is se-
cured hy shellac or other suitable meanSja

ppTifpr pjgpp 24 of COtI^ "'- ntliPr gi]]itnpTe|

80

85

90

95

100

plastic yielding material. This center piece ;
24 IS maae comparatively thick at the center, I
tapers off toward its edge, and covers a large!
portion of the area of the diaphragm. For
a diaphragm two inches in diameter, I have
found that the center piece should be about
one-eighth of an inch thick at the center,
and about one and one-half inches in di-
ameter. The curvature of the outer surface
of the center piece 24 should be such that
substantially the whole body portion of the
diaphragm flexes into a spherical shape dur-
ing the vibration thereof by the stylus.

Such a diaphragm as described above not
only has elasticity as a whole, but it is made
of a material which is internally highly
elastic, thus requiring a minimum of power
to set it in motion. The diaphragm is
further advantageous as it is stable and
does not change with use, the whole dia-
phragm being extremel}' light in weight
compared wiUilliose in general use, and
being at the same time by reason of the em-
ployment of the relatively thick center piece
free from strains which permit local buc-
kling when vibrations of gi'eat amplitude
are emitted.

Another improvement contemplated by
my invention is the substitution of an elas-
tic, resilient, non-metallic member, such -as
a cotton cord 25, for the commonly employed
metallic connecting link between the stylus
lever and the diaphragm. This cord, as 105
shown in the drawing, is connected at its
ends by light flexible wires 26 and 27 or
other suitable means to the tail of the st5dus
lever 10 and to the link 28 respectively. The
link 28 fits closely in a vertical opening in a
cup shaped cap or bridging member 29
which is secured to the upper face of the
diaphragm by shellac or any other suitable
means and extends across and a substantial
distance above the central opening 29' pro-
vided in the diaphragm, a similar opening
being formed in the cork member 24 imme-
diately below the opening 29'.

As shown in Fig. 1, the upper portion of
wire 27 is connected for universal movement
to the lower iDortion of the link 28 substan-
tiall}^ at the center of the diaphragm 5. By
the term " center " as herein employed with
reference to the diaphragm, I mean the
point on the central axis of the diaphragm
midway between the faces of the body por-
tion of the diaphragm. With the construc-
tion herein disclosed the " center " of the
diaphragm will be located midway between
the extremities of the opening 29'. By con-

110

115

120

125

130

1,066,621

8

necting the cord 25 to the diaphragm in this
manner, the power is so applied to the dia-
phragm that there is no distortion of the
diaphragm when the connecting member 25
5 is inclined to the axis of the diaphragm, such
distortion being unavoidable if the connect-
ing member is connected to the diaphragm
above or below the center or otherwise ec-
, centrically thereof. The cup shaped cap 29

ii|^is m-eferablv made of "a httl'd uiatti'iul-gttA
M a^jj^tu;^ and is formed with a large lower

'^ surface m engagement with the diaphragm,
so that there is no local compression of the
said member or the diaphragm and no loss

15 of amplitude in the vibration.

As hereinbefore stated, the employment of
an elastic resilient non-metallic connection
such as the cord 25 for transmitting the vi-
brations of the stylus lever to the diaphragm

20 serves as a means of mellowing the tone of
the diaphragm and improving the quality
of the reproduction, the qualitj' being read-
ily controlled b)^ using a connection of suit-
able diameter and elasticity and by properly

25 adjusting the length of the connection. Such
a connection is sufficiently light to respond
rapidly to the elastic power stored therein
by the floating weight and thereby causes
the stybisv to more accurately track the rec-

30 ord groove than if the same were joined to
the relatively slowh- moving diaphragm by
a rigid connection. In m}^ invention as above
disclosed, both the diaphragm and the con-
nection 25 serve through the tension im-

35 parted thereto by the floating weight to hold
the stylus in engagement with the record, so
that a very faithful reproduction is ob-
tained.

In Fig. 5, I have shown a modified means

40 for connecting the cord 25 to the diaphragm.
A piece of wire bent to form a loop 30 at its
lower end, is twisted as shown at 31 and
passed through the vertical opening in the
cap 29. being then bent down upon the top

45 of the cap as shown at 32. The loop 30 is of
sufficient size to bear upon the lower surface
of the cap 29, and the upper portion 32 of
the wire is secured to the top of the cap by
a mass 33 of shellac in which the said upper

60 portion is embedded. A ring 34 gripping
the upper end of the cord 25 therein is sus-
pended from the loop 30 by a wire loop 35
which passes through the loop 30 and is se-
cured at its ends to the sides of the ring 34.

55 In Fig. C). I have shown a vertically dis-
posed sound box 36, having a stylus lever 37
pivoted to ears or lugs 38 projecting from
the side of the sound box, the lever being
provided with an offset portion 39 support-

60 ing the stylus 40 and extending under the
sound box. With this construction, the
weight of the sound box holds t])e elastic
resilient cord 25 under tension and thereby
causes the stylus to accurately track the

65 record.

Many modifications, in addition to those
described above, may be made in my inven-
tion, and I wish, therefore, not to be limited
to the exact details shown and described.

What I claim as new and desire to pro- ^q
tect by United States Letters Patent is as
follows :

1. As an article of manufacture, a dia-
phragm composed of a plurality of super-
posed sheets of Japanese paper united into yg
a unitary structure, substantially as de-
scribed.

2. As an article of manufacture, a dia-
phragm composed of a plurality of super-
posed sheets of Japanese paper united into go
a unitary structure having secured thereto
an elastic yielding member located concen-
trically with one of the faces of the said
structure, and extending into proximity to
the periphery thereof, the said elastic mem- gg
ber being of decreasing thickness from the
center to the periphery thereof, substantially

as described.

3. In a device of the class described, the
combination of a diaphragm, a support 90
therefor, a floating weight, a stylus lever
supported thereby, means for connecting
said stylus lever to said diaphragm, and re-
silient means for securing said weight to
said support, said weight being arranged to 95
place said connecting means normally under
tension substantially as described.

4. In a device of the class described, the
combination with a diaphragm, a support
therefor, a floating Aveight, a stylus lever 100
mounted on said floating Aveight, nieans for
connecting said lever to said diaphragm,
and resilient means for connecting said
weight to said support, said last named
means being mounted to permit lateral 105
movement of said floating Aveight, substan-
tially as described.

5. In a device of the class described, the
combination of a diaphragm, a support
therefor, a floating Aveight, a stylus lever 110
supported tliereby, means for connecting
said stylus lever to said diaphragm, and
means comprising a flat spring for securing
said Aveight to said support, said Aveiglit be-
ing arranged to place said connecting means 115
normally under tension substantially as de-
scribed.

6. In a deA'ice of the class described, the
combination of a diaphragm having a cen-
tral opening therein, a member separate 120
from said diaphragm, mounted thereon, and
forming a bridge across and at a substantial
distance above said opening, securing means
connected to said member and extending
into said opening, a stylus IcA'er, and con- 125
necting means betAveen said securing means
and said stylus leA'er, said connecting means
being connected to said securing means at

the center of said diaphragm, substantially

as described. " 130

1,055,621

7. In a device of the class described, the
combination of a diaphragm haAdng a cen-
tral opening therein, a member separate
from said diaphragm, mounted thereon, and

5 forming a bridge across and at a substantial
distance above said opening, securing means
connected to said member and extending
into said opening, a stylus lever mounted
for movement laterally of as well as toward
10 and away from said diaphragm, and con-
necting means between said securing means
and said stylus lever, said connecting means
being connected to said securing means at
the center of said diaphragm and having
universal movement with respect to said se-
curing means, substantially as described.

8. In a device of the class described, the
combination of a diaphragm having a cen-
tral opening therein, a member separate
from said diaphragm, mounted thereon, and
forming a bridge across and at a substantial
distance above said opening, securing means
connected to said member and extending
into said opening, a st^ylus lever, and elastic
non-metallic connecting means between said
securing means and said stylus lever, said
connecting means being connected to said se-
curing means at the center of said dia-
phragm, substantially as described.

9. As an article of manufacture, a dia-
phragm having a body portion composed of
Japanese paper and a center piece of elastic
material secured to one face of said body
portion and having a diameter greater than
one-half the diameter of said diaphragm,
substantially as described.

10. As an article of manufacture, a dia-
phragm having a body portion composed of
Japanese paper and a center piece of cork

4 0 secured to one face of said body portion and
having a diameter greater than one-half the
cliameter of said diaphragm, substantially
as described.

11. In a device of the class described, the
combination of a diaphragm, a support
therefor having an extension thereon, an
elongated floating weight, a stylus leyei
supported thereby, means for connecting
said stylus lever to said diaphragm, and re-

50 silient" supporting means having connec-
tions to said support and weight, said con-
nections permitting lateral movement of
said weight, substantially as described.

12. In a device of the class described, the
55 combination Avith a diaphragm, a support

therefor, a floating vreight, a stylus levei
having a horizontal bearing of considerable
width relative to the length of the tracking
arm of the lever mounted on said floating
weight, means for connecting said lever to
said diaphragm and resilient means for con-
necting said weight to said support, said
means being mounted to permit lateral

15

20

25

30

35

45

CO

movement of said floating weight, substan-
tially as described. 65

13. As an article of manufacture, a dia-
phragm formed of Japanese paper, sub-
stantially as described.

14. As an article of manufacture, a dia-
phragm having a body portion composed of 70
elastic non-subereous material and a center
piece of cork secured to one face of said
body portion and having a diameter greater
than one-half the diameter of said dia-
phragm, substantially as described. 75

15. As an article of manufacture, a dia-
phragm having a body portion composed of
elastic non-subereous material and a center
piece of cork secured to one face of said
body portion and having a diameter greater 80
than one-half the diameter of said dia-
phragm, the said center piece being of de-
creasing thickness from the center to the
periphery thereof, substantially as de-
scribed. 85

16. As an article of manufacture, a dia-
phragm having a body portion composed of
a pluralit}' of superposed sheets of elastic
material united into a unitary structure and

a member of cork located concentrically 90
with one of the faces of the body portion

and extending into proximity lu th© periph-
ery thei'eof, substantiall}'^ as described.

17. In a device of the class described, the
combination of a diaphragm, a support 95
therefor, a floating weight, a stylus lever
supported thereby, i-esilient non- metallic
means for connecting said stylus lever to
said diaphragm, and resilient means for se-
curing said weight to said support, said 100
Aveight being arranged to place said con-
necting means normally under tension, sub-
stantiall}" as described.

18. In a device of the class described, the
combination of a diaphragm, a support 105
therefor, a floating weight, a stykis lever
supported thereby, means for connecting
said stylus le\er to said diaphragm, and re-
silient means for securing said weight to
said support, said weight being movable up-
wardly and dowuAvardly and being ar-
ranged to place said connecting means nor-
mally under tension, substantially as de-
scribed.

19. As a neAv article of manufacture, a
diaphragm of elastic material having a cen-
tral opening therein, and an ivory bridging
member mounted on said diaphragm aboA^e
said opening, substantially as described.

This specification signed and witnessed
this IGth day of May 1911.

THOMAS A.EDISON.

Witnesses :

Frederick BachmajStn,
Anna R. Klehm.

110

115

120

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the

"Washington, D. C."

' Commissioner of Patents,

p. WEBER.

DIAPHEAGM FOR TALKING MACHINES.

APPLICATION FILED FEB. 28, 1907,

1,056,475.

^^.J

Patented Mar. 18, 1913

3 SHEETS-SHEET 1.

r —

^^Sf.

COLUMBIA PLANOORAni LC. WASHINOTON, U. i.

p. WEBER.

DIAPHRAGM FOR TALKING MACHINES.

APPLICATION PILED FEB. 28, 1907.

1,056,475.

^^'^

Patented Mar. 18, 1913.

3 SHEETS-SHEET 2.

4

^^.^

y

,Z /Z /Z /T

^

zf

^^^.

COLUMBIA PLANOORAPH CO., WASHINOTON, D. C.

1,056,475.

p. WEBER.

DIAPHKAGM FOR TALKING MACHINES.
APPLICATION FILED FEB. 28, 1907.

Patented Mar. 18, 1913.

3 SHEETS-SHEET 3.

^

^

.^^^.^

o

t7^«-,.«-ve X" '^f^r-'i-'^

Jf^^s

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

PETER WEBEK, OF ORANGE. NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR, BY MESNE ASSIGNMENTS, TO
THOMAS A. EDISON, INCORPORATED. OF WEST ORANGE, NEW JERSEY, A CORPORA-
TION OF NEW JERSEY.

DIAPHRAGM FOR TALKING-MACHINES.

1,056,475.

Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Mar. 18, 1913.

Application filed February 28, 1907. Serial No. 359,891.

To all whom it mai/ concern :

Be it known that I, Peter AVeber, a citi-
zcMi of tlioTJuited States, residing at Orange,
county of Essex, and State of New Jersey,
5 have invented new and useful Improvements
in Diaphragms for Talking-Machines, of
which the following is a description.

^ly invention relates to an improved dia-
phiagm for ])honographs or other talking

10 niacliines, and my object is to provide a
very simple, cheap and effective diaphragm
fur the purpo.se, by means of which superior
reproduction can be obtained.

It is now recognized that to secure the

15 best results with a synniietrical diaphragm,
the latter should vibrate as nearty as a
whole as possible, and to this end the dia-
phragm .should be comparatively rigid or
stilf for its greater part, its rigidity prefer-

20 ably increasing toward the center. To se-
cure this object it has been heretofore pro-
posed to const luct a diaphragm of a series
of di.sks cemented together, but such a con-
struction is expensive, the disks are likely

25 to work loose, and the diaphragm is mi-
duly heavy, so that it does not respond ac-
curately to the record. It has been also pro-
posed to construct a diaphragm in which
substantially the result indicated will be

30 secured by farming the same with a series
of concentric shallow depressions, which are
arranged nearer together toward the center,
but such an arrangement is undesirable, for
tlie reason that the diaphragm is provided

35 witii relatively extensive flat portions in
whicli independent vibration may take place.
On the othtr hand, if the shallow depres-
sions are arranged so as to occupy the entire
surface of the diaphragm, its rigidity would

40 be substantially the same throughout, and

hence, the best results would not be obtained.

With my improved diaphragm I secure

rigidity of practically its entire surface, ex-

ce])t at the outer edge where it is clamped

45 in place and at the center Avhere connection
is made with the stylus, and at the same
time I obtain gradually increased rigiditj^
toward the center without increasing the
weight, so that the diaphragm is extremely

50 sensitive and responsive to the record or
sound vibrations.

To this end the invention consists of mak-
ing the diaphra^n of a disk of extremely
thin metal, prereiably hard rolled copper,

and in forming t^e main portion thereof 55
with a series of concentric depressions or
grooves innnediately adjacent to one an-
other and of gradually increasing depth to-
ward the center, whereby the stiffness or
rigidity of the diaphragm will be propor- 60
tionately increased. Outside of the concen-
tric de])ressions a sufficient surface is pro-
vided for accommodating vibratory move-
ment.

Although a diaphragm characterized as 65
described produces better results than pre-
vious forms, I find that it is desirable that
the diaphi-agm be additionall}- stiffened as
by indentations extending transversel}' with
respect to the corrugations or grooves, or 70
radially with respect to the diaphragm, and
my invention therefore comprises dia-
pliragms embodying this featui'e.

In order that the invention ma}'^ be better
understocd attention is directed to the ac- 75
companying drawing in which —

Figure 1 is a plan view on an enlarged
scale of the preferred form of diaphragm ;
Fig. 2 is a section on line 2 — 2 of Fig. 1,
the thickness of the diaphragm being ex- so
aggerated ; F'igs. 3 and 4 are views similar
to 1 and 2 respectively of a modified foi-m
of diaphragm, and Figs. 5 and 6 are similar
views of a second modification.

Eeferring to Figs. 1 and 2 the diaphragm 35
1 is formed of a disk preferably of hard
rolled sheet copper, about .0025 of an inch
in thickness. The outer edge of the dia-
phragm is left flat to permit it to be clamped
in place and to offer a sufficient space in 90
which vibration may take place. The main
porticn of the diaj^hragm is formed with n
jjlurality of concentric depressions 2, four of
which are .shown and which ai'e of progres-
sively increasing depth, so as to provide for gs
gradually increased rigidity, two of said de-
pressions being located within a distance of
substantially one-lialf of the radius of said
diaphragm from the center of said dia-
phragm. These depressions are immedi- lOO
ately adjacent, so that in cross-section the
diaphragm presents a wave-like line, as
shown. B}' making the depressions immedi-
ately adjacent to one another, no flat ])or-
tions are presented in the body of the dia- 105
phragm, in which independent vibration can
take place. The central portion 3 is left
flat, as shown, to provide a space for tlie

1,056,475

attachment of or connection with the stylus
of a recorder or reproducer. This dia-
phragm is provided with additional stiffen-
ing means in the form of a large number of
5 small indentations 4 which extend trans-
versely with respect to the corrugations
or depressions 2. These depressions prefer-
abl}^ extend radially of the diaphragm but
it is not necessary that their direction be ex-

] 0 actly radial, provided it is transverse to the
main depressions or corrugations 2.

The diaphragm of Figs. 3 and 4 is exactly
similar to that of Figs. 1 and 2 except that
the depressions 4 are lacking and the dia-

] 5 phragm is formed near its periphery with
two small concentric grooves 5 and 6 con-
nected by radial indentations 7. The dia-
phragm of Figs. 5 and 6 is exactly the same
as that of Figs. 1 and 2 except that the in-

20 dentations 4 are absent.

Having now described mv invention, what
I claim as new and desire to secure by Let-
ters Patent, is as follows:

1. An improved diaphragm comprising a
25 disk, iDrovided for its greater part with

closely arranged concentric depressions or
grooves of gradually increasing dej)th to-
ward the center, a plurality of said depres-
sions or grooves being located within a dis-
30 tance of substantially one half the radius of
said disk from the center of said disk, sub-
staitiall}^ as and for the purpo.-es set forth.

2. An improved diaphragm comprising a
metallic disk provided for its greater part

35 with concentric depressions adjacent to one
another and of gradually increasing depth
toward the center, a plurality of said depres-
sions being located within a distance of sub-
stantially one half the radius of said disk

'^ 0 from the center of said disk, substantially as
and for the purj^oses set forth.

3. An improved diaphragm comprising a
disk formed over its greater part with a
series of adjacent concentric depressions of

^5 gradually increasing depth toward the cen-
ter, a plurality of said depressions being lo-
cated within a distance of substantially one
half the radius of said disk from the center
of said disk, substantially as set forth.

5f^ 4. An improved diaphragm, comi^rising a
disk having a flat outer portion, and a main
portion, consisting of a series of concen-
tric adjacent depressions of gradually in-
creasing depth toward the center, a plu-

55 rality of said depressions being located with-
in a distance of substantially one half the

radius of said disk from the center of said
disk, substantially as and for the purposes
set forth.

5. A circular diaphragm provided with 60
concentric depressions of increasing depth
toward the center and indentations extend-
ing transversely thereto, a plurality of said
depressions being located within a distance

of substantially one half the radius of said 65
diaphragm from the center of said dia-
phragm, substantially as set forth.

6. A dia^Dhragm provided with concentric
corrugations so closely arranged as to leave
substantially no flat portions in the body of 70
the diaphragm, and indentations extending
transversely thereto and intersecting the
same, substantially as set forth.

7. A diaphragm provided with concentric
corrugations so closely arranged as to leave 7 5
substantially no fiat portions in the body of
the diaphragm, and radial stiffening means
crossing the concentric corrugations, sub-
stantially as set forth.

8. A diaphragm provided with concentric 80
and radial stiffening means, both closely ar-
ranged and covering substantially the whole
surface of the diaphragm except a central
portion and a narrow annulus at the extreme
edge, the said radial means extending across 85
some of the concentric means, substantially

as set forth.

9. A diaphragm provided at its central
portion with a plurality of concentric stiff-
ening means adjacent one another and also 90
provided w4th radial stiffening means ex-
tending substantially to the periphery of
said diaphragm, the said concentric and
radial stiffening means being so arranged

as to leave substantially no flat portions in 95
the body of the diaphragm, substantially as
set forth.

10. A diaphragm provided at its central
jDortion and adjacent its periphery with con-
centric stiffening means and also provided 100
with radial stiffening means extending be-
tween said central and peripheral stiffening
means, the said means being so arranged as

to leave substantially no flat portions in the
body of the diaphragm, substantially as set 105
forth.

This specification signed and witnessed
this 26 day of February 1907.

PETEE WEBER.
Witnesses :

Delos Holden,

Frank D. Lewis.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents.

Washington, D. C."

T. A. EDISON.

MEANS FOR REPRODOOING SODND.

APPLICATION FILED DEO. 8, 1909.

1,056,517.

Patented Mar. 18, 1913.

1^0- z

'?f!^//7/^///r//7r//-///Y^A
/ ^ 1^ J J

kOtUMMIA PLANOQBAPH CO., WASHINQTON, D. C.

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

THOMAS A. EDISON, OF LLEWELLYN PARK, WEST ORANGE, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR
TO THOMAS A. EDISON, INCORPORATED, OF WEST ORANGE, NEW JERSEY, A COR-
PORATION OF NEW JERSEY.

MEANS FOR REPRODUCING SOUND.

1,056,517.

Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Mar. 18, 1913.

Application filed December 8, 1909. Serial No. 532,075.

To all whom it may concern :

Be it known that I, Thomas A. Edison,
a citizen of the United States, and a resident
of Llewelh^n Parle, West Orange, in the
5 county of Essex and State of New Jersey,
haA'e invented certain new and useful Im-
provements in Means for Reproducing
Sound, of which the following is a descrip-
tion.

10 My invention relates to a method and
means for reproducing sound from a record
of the same upon a traveling tablet, and
the object of my invention is to provide a
novel and efficient method for propelling the

15 means which is vibrated in accordance with
the sound inidulations of the record along
the same, and a suitable apparatus for carry-
ing out the said method.

Other objects of my invention will appear

20 in the following specification and appended
claims.

My invention is particularly adapted to
the feeding of a sound box carrying a dia-
phragm or other vibratory means and the

25 reproducing stylus for vibrating the latter
across the spiral grooves of a disk sound
record, although it may be adapted to cor-
respondingly feed the same parts trans-
versely of the record grooves formed on

30 the surface of a revolving cylinder. Also,
my invention is particularly applicable for
use in connection with the reproduction from
a sound record, the sound undulations of
which are of the vertical or " hill and valley "

35 tj^pe, although it also may be used in con-
nection with a record having lateral undu-
lations. For purposes of illustration, I have
shown in the accompanying drawings an
apparatus in which reproduction is made

40 from vertical undulations formed on the
surface of a rotating disk.

It is old in the art to vibrate a stylus by
and in accordance with the lateral undu-
lations of the record groove of a disk record

45 and to propel the stylus along the record by
and in accordance with the record groove
itself. It is also old to propel a stylus across
the face of a disk record having vertical sound
undulations recorded thereon by means of a

50 mechanical feed. It has not been feasible,
however, to propel a stylus along the spiral
track of a record having vertical undulations
formed upon a disk or other record surface

by the sole means of the engagement of the
stylus itself with the record groove, because 55
of the fact that the walls of a record groove
having vertical undulations are so sloping
that it is extremely difficult to keep the
stylus within the groove while feeding the
stylus by engagement with the Avails of the 60
groove. Because of the slope of the record
walls, the stylus is very apt to jump across
from one groove to the next if a mechanical
feed is not provided. This can be remedied
to some extent by greatly increasing the 65
weight upon the stylus, but this results in
undue Avear upon the record and upon the
stylus. I overcome these difficulties by pro-
viding a plurality of bearing surfaces adapt-
ed to travel within the grooves of a sound 70
record, which bearing surfaces are connect-
ed to propel the sound box and vibratory
means carried thereby from the record
groove, these bearing surfaces being pro-
A'ided only for the purpose of feeding the 75
stylus along the groove, and not being con-
nected to vibrate the diaphragm. By the
provision of a plurality of these feeding de-
vices, the difficult}^ experienced on account
of the sloping walls of the groove when a 80
single bearing surface following the groove
is relied upon to feed the device, is OA'ercome.
I preferably use for these feeding devices a
plurality of sapphires or other suitable bear-
ing surfaces carried by the ends of the teeth 85
of a comb supported in line with the stylus
beneath the sound box, this comb being con-
nected to the sound box to propel the same,
and being adapted to contact the record
yieldingly. Preferably, also, I mount these 90
feeding surfaces to the rear of the stylus in
the line of progression of the sound box
across the record grooves, and proAdde a
number of feeding grooves having no sound
undulations impressed thereon in advance 95
of the first record grooA-e, so that the repro-
ducing stylus may be placed in the first
record groove when the reproduction is
started.

Referring to the accompanying drawings, 100
illustrating one embodiment of my im-
proved apparatus whereby my method may
be carried out, Figure 1 represents a partial
plan vieAv of the same; and Fig. 2 a corre-
sponding side elevation partly m section. 105

Referring to the drawings, the sound box

1,056,517

1 is carried by the tone arm 2 which is
pivoted in the well known manner at 3.
Preferably, the stylus 4 is carried by stylus
lever 5 pivoted as shown at 6 or in any well
? known manner to floating weight 7 pivot-
ally connected to sound box 1 in the well
known manner. The tail of stylus lever 4
is connected as shown at 8 in the well knoAvn
manner to the diaphragm 9 or other vibra-

10 tory means carried by sound box 1. Stylus
4 is adapted to follow the sound undulations
of the record grooves 10 formed on disk 11.
Preferably I form the spiral record 10 in
such a direction that the stylus is fed from

15 the innermost record groove toward the pe-
riphery of the disk. I also preferably form
a spiral groove 12 having a number of turns,
but having no sound undulations formed
thereon on the innermost side of record

20 grooves 10 and extending into or forming
a continuation of the same. It is, however,
obvious that, if desired, the record could be
formed to feed the sound box from the oiit-
side toward the center of the disk in which

25 case the non-record-bearing grooves 12
would be placed between the periphery of
the disk and the outermost record bearing
groove.

The feeding devices are shown as a num-

30 ber of small styluses or members formed
with bearing surfaces shaped for engage-
ment with the record groove, as shown at
13. These points may be formed of sap-
phire or other suitable material and are

35 carried at the ends of teeth 14 of comb 15,
this comb being preferably formed as a
leaf spring extending below floating weight
7 and secured to the body of sound box 1,
as shown at 16. These feeding devices 13

40 are preferably positioned to travel along ap-
proximately the same arc 17 as does stylus
4 in its movement transverse to the record
grooves. When it is desired to reproduce
from the record, the arm 2 is positioned so

45 that stylus 4 engages the first record groove
10 while feeding devices 13 engage the aux-
iliai-y or false grooves 12. The spring ma-
terial of which comb 15 is formed yields
slightly so that stylus 4 engages the records

50 and bears the greater part of the weight of
sound box 1 and connected parts. Any num-
ber of points 13 desired may be provided,
and these may engage adjacent or non-ad-
jacent grooves as desired. When record

55 disk 11 is set in rotation, sound box 1 is fed
across the record by the engagement of feed-
ing devices 13, first with the false grooves
12 and then with the record grooves 10.
T\niile comb 15 yields somewhat in a direc-

60 tion at right angles to the surface of the
record, it is unyielding in a direction par-
allel to the record, consequently, the en-
gagement of teeth 13 with the groove feeds
sound box 1 across the record. Comb 15

65 is not connected to the diaphragm and hence

the vibration of members 13 by the undu-
lations of the record groove do not affect
the sound as reproduced b}^ the reproducer.
Having now described my invention,
what I claim and desire to protect by Let- 70
ters Patent is as follows :

1. In a sound reproducing apparatus, the
combination of a traveling surface having:
a sound record groove formed thereon, a re-
producing stylus shaped for engagement 75
with the record groove, vibratory means
free to move across the record, connections
between said stylus and vibratory means
for vibrating the latter, and means shaped
for engagement with said record groove and 30
adapted to be propelled by the same, and
connected to propel said vibratory means
but not to vibrate the same, substantially as
described.

2. In a sound reproducing apparatus, the 35
combination of a traveling surface having

a sovmd record groove formed thereon in
spiral lines, a reproducing stylus shaped for
engagement with the record groove, vibra-
toiy means free to move across the record, 99
connections between said stylus and vibra-
tory means for vibrating the latter, and
means shaped for simultaneous engagement
with a plurality of the lines of said record
groove and adapted to be propelled by the 95
same, and connected to propel said vibratory
means but not to vibrate the same, substan-
tially as described.

3. In a sound reproducing apparatus, the
combination of a traveling disk having a loO
sound record groove formed thereon in
spiral lines, a reproducj-ng stylus shaped for
engagement with the record groove, an arm
pivoted to swing across the lines of the
record groove, vibratory means carried by 105
said arm and connected to said stylus, and
means shaped for engagement with said
record groove and adapted to be propelled

by the same and connected to propel said
arm, substantially as described. no

4. In a sound reproducing apparatus, the
combination of a traveling surface having
a sound record groove formed thereon, a
reproducing stylus shaped for engagement
Avith the record groove, a sound box 115
mounted free to move across the record, vi-
bratory means carried thereby, connections
between said stylus and vibratory means for
vibrating the latter, means shaped for en-
gagement with the record groove and connec- 120
tions between said means and sound box
for propelling the latter, said connections
being jdelding in a direction transverse to
the record surface, substantially as de-
scribed. 125

5. In a sound reproducing apparatus, the
combination of a traveling surface having
a sound record formed thereon in spiral
grooves, a feeding groove to one side of said
record grooves and forming a continuous 130

i

i.oije.si'?

10

15

20

25

spiral therewith, a reproducer styhis shaped
for engagement with the record groove, vi-
bratory means free to move across the
record, connections between said stylus and
vibratory means for vibrating the latter,
and means shaped for engagement with said
feeding and record grooves and adapted to
be propelled by the same, and connected to
propel said vibratory means, but not to vi-
brate the same, substantially as described.

6. In a sound reproducing apparatus, the
combination of a traveling record having a
vei'tically undulating spiral record groove
thereon, a reproducing stylus shaped for en-
gagement "s^'itli the record groove, vibratory
means free to move across the record, con-
nections between said stylus and vibratory
means for vibrating the latter, and means
shaped for simultaneous engagement with a
plurality of the grooves of the record and
adapted to be propelled by the same, and
connected to propel said vibratory means
but not to vibrate the same, substantially as
described.

7. In a sound reproducing apparatus, the

combination of a sound box, vibratory
means carried thereby, a reproducing stylus
connected to said vibratory means, a comb
carried hj said sound box and having bear-
ing surfaces adapted to track the record, 30
substantially as described.

8. In a sound reproducing apparatus, the
combination of a sound box, vibratory
means carried thereby, a floating weight, a
stylus lever pivoted to said weight carrying 35
a stylus and connected to said vibratory
means, a comb having bearing surfaces on
the ends of the teeth thereof adapted to
track parallel grooves of the record, and
spring means secured to said sound box for 4 0
positioning said comb below said weight and
in line with said stylus, substantially as de-
scribed.

This specification signed and witnessed
this 4th day of December, 1909.

THOMAS A. EDISON.

Witnesses :

Dyer Smith,
John M. Canfield.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

Washington, D. C."

I

p. WEBER.

PHONOGRAPH.

APFLIOATION PILED OOT. 14, 1907.

1,058,284.

Patented Apr. 8. 1913.

X^.z

COLUMBIA PLANOUUAPH CO.. WASHINGTON . D. C.

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

PETER WEBER, OF ORANGE, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR, BY MESNE ASSIGNMENTS, TO
THOMAS A. EDISON, INCORPORATED, OF WEST ORANGE, NEW JERSEY, A CORPORA-
TION OF NEW JERSEY.

PHONOGRAPH.

1,058,384.

Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Apr. 8, 1913.

Application filed October 14, 1907. Serial No. 397,283.

To all whom it may concern:

Be it known that I, Peter Weber, a citi-
zen of the United States, and a resident of
Orange, in the county of Essex and State of
5 New Jersey, have invented certain new and
useful Improvements in Phonographs, of
which the following is a description.

My invention relates to phonographs and
particularly to phonograph horns and sup-

10 ports therefor.

In order to secure the best results from a
phonograph it has been found necessary to
make use of horns of relatively large dimen-
sions. Such horns are usually supported

15 from the phonograph cabinet by some form
of horn crane so that they extend outward
in front of the phonograph to a consider-
able distance. The objections to this form
of apparatus are numerous; for example, a

20 horn so supported takes up a large amount
of room, and it has a tendency to upset the
phonograph or to twist and bend the parts
thereof. Such a horn can only be partially
supported from the horn crane, and it is

25 necessary in order to secure stability that a
considerable portion of its weight be borne
by the reproducer or recorder of the phono-
graph, and this to a considerable extent in-
terferes with the movements of the phono-

30 graph carriage, and imposes wear on the
fine feed screw. The horn extending out to
the front is often in the way of the operator,
and it is difficult and almost impossible to
direct such a horn so supported toward any

35 given point without turning the phono-
graph bodily around. Again, it is difficult
to replace the cover uj)on the cabinet, after
the instrument has been used, as the horn
is always more or less in the way, and it is

40 often found necessary to entirely remove

the horn from the phonograph and crane

before the cover can be placed upon the

cabinet.

It is the object of my invention to do away

45 with the objections which are present in the
horns and supports therefor now in com-
mon use, and I obtain these results by mak-
ing my improved horn of such form that it
may be supported above the phonograph in-

50 stead of extending out in front thereof, as is
the common practice. By making the horn of
my improved form I am enabled to support
it from a point vertically above its center of

gravity without the resulting instability
which would be caused if the horns now in 55
use were so supported. It is possible to do
this with my improved horn for the reason
that its center of gravity is at a relatively
considerable distance beneath the point of
support. My improved horn is loosely con- 60
nected with the reproducer and none of its
weight is borne thereby, as has been the case
with horns supported in the old way, and it
therefore does not interfere in any way with
the movements of the carriage. The horn 65
being entirely supported from above at a
point vertically over its center of gravity
can readily be turned in any direction so
that the sound may be directed to any point
without the necessity of turning the phono- 70
graph about to a new position upon the ta-
ble or other support, and the horn being sus-
pended above the cabinet takes up but little
space in a room, and need not be removed in
order to replace the cover upon the cabinet, 75
but may be readily pushed to one side to
permit the placing of the cover in position
and the horn need not be removed from its
crane when the phonograph is out of use,
but may remain suspended from its crane 80
at all times, and when it is desired to oper-
ate the phonograph it is only necessary to
remove the cover and connect the lower end
of the horn to the reproducer.

With the above and related objects in 85
view, my invention consists in the parts, im-
provements and combinations hereinafter
set forth and claimed.

In the accompanying drawing, forming a
part of this specification, and wherein the 90
same reference numerals are uniformly used
to designate the same parts, Figure 1 is an
end elevation of a phonograph provided
with my improved form of horn and horn
support, the connection between the tube of 95
the reproducer and the horn being shown
in section, and Fig. 2 is a view partly in sec-
tion and partly in side elevation of the re-
producer, and a portion of the means for
connecting the horn thereto. 100

1 represents the phonograph cabinet and
2 the carriage which is movable transversely
of the mandrel 3 and supports the repro-
ducer 4. Of course instead of a reproducer,
a recorder may be used, as is well under- 105
stood, the term " sound box " used in the

1,058,284

claims being intended to designate either of
these devices. In the preferred form of
my invention, the reproducer or recorder is
supported horizontally in the carriage 2, so
g that the neck 5 through which the sound is-
sues therefrom is substantially vertical.

My improved horn comprises a bell 6,
a tapering elbow 7, secured to the smaller
end of the bell, and a tapering tone arm 8

10 secured to the smaller end of the elbow.
The longitudinal axis of the tone arm and
the longitudinal axis of the bell if con-
tinued Avould meet in an angle which is
preferably somewhat less than a right an-

15 gle. The tone arm is loosely and flexibly
connected to the neck 5 of the reproducer
by any suitable means. The connecting
means which I have shown comprises a flexi-
ble rubber tube 9 and a short cylindrical

20 tube 10, the inner diameter of which is some-
what larger than the outer diameter of the
neck 5 of the reproducer, and which is pro-
vided with an inwardly extending bead or
flange 11 at its lower end, which fits fairly

26 closely about the reproducer tube but not
so close as to bind thereon. It will be evi-
dent that by reason of thei bead 11 this cy-
lindrical tube 10 may be tilted with re-
spect to the reproducer neck 5 through a

30 considerable angle. An outwardly extend-
ing bead or flange 12 is formed on the up-
per end of the tube 10 over which the rub-
ber sleeve 9 frictionally engages. Support-
ing means is provided for this horn at a

S5 point directly in line with the center of
gravity thereof. It is desirable that the
horn shall be capable of being turned upon
this supporting means so as to face in any
desired direction and at the same time, that

40 sufficient stability shall be secured to retain
the horn facing in any direction. I have
therefore made the support in the form of
a rod 13 provided with a ball 14 which fits
within the socket piece 15, secured to the

46 bell 6. This rod 13 is supported by the up-
per end 16 of a horn crane. As shown, the
rod 13 is threaded at its upper end and after
passing through the end 16 of the upper
portion of the crane it has a nut IT screwed

60 thereon, but it is evident that other forms of
connection may be used. The lower portion
of the horn crane comprises a substantially
vertical rod 18, which is secured in socket
pieces 19 at the back of the phonograph

55 cabinet and held in place by set screw 20.
It is to be understood, however, that other
forms of cranes and other means of connect-
ing the crane to the phonogTaph may be
used if desired. The portion 18 of the

60 crane is hollow and the upper part 16 of
the crane fits therein and is held from ro-
tation relatively to the part 18 by means of
a pin 21 passing through the upper, portion
16 of the crane, and fitting in shallow

65 notches 22 in the upper end of the crane

section 18. As is shown in the drawing,
the lower end of the tone arm, which is
adapted for connection with the recorder or
reproducer 2 is directly beneath the support
13 and the center of gravity of the horn.

Having now described my invention, I
claim :

1. In a phonograph, the combination with
a sound box, of a horn having a forwardly
directed bell, means for suspending said
horn from a point in substantially vertical
alinement with said sound box, said means
permitting oscillation of the horn about a
substantially vertical axis and a connection
between the smaller end of the horn and
said sound box, said connection likewise per-
mitting oscillation of the horn about said
axis, substantially as described.

2. In a phonograph, the combination with
a sound box, of a horn having a forwardly
directed bell, means for suspending said
horn from a point vertically above said
sound box, said means permitting oscilla-
tion of the horn about a substantially ver-
tical axis and a sliding connection between
the smaller end of the horn and said sound
box, said connection likewise permitting
oscillation of the horn about said axis, sub-
stantially as described.

3. In a phonograph, the combination with
a sound box having a vertically disposed
neck, of a horn having a forwardly directed
bell, means for suspending said horn from
a point vertically above said neck, said
means permitting oscillation of the horn
about a substantially vertical axis, and a
yielding connection between the smaller end
of said horn and said neck, substantially as
described.

4. In a phonograph, the combination with
a sound box having a vertically disposed
neck, of a horn having a forwardly directed
bell, means for freely suspending said horn
from a point in a substantially vertical line
passing through the center of gravity of
said horn and the axis of said neck, and a
yielding connection between the smaller end
of said horn and said neck, substantially as
described.

5. In a phonograph, the combination with
a sound box, of a horn having a forwardly
directed bell, means for suspending said
horn from a point vertically above said
sound box and for adjusting the vertical
position of said horn, said means permit-
ting oscillation of the horn about a substan-
tialty vertical axis, and a connection between
the smaller end of said horn and said sound
box, said connection likewise permitting os-
cillation of the horn about said axis, sub-
stantially as described.

6. In a phonograph, the combination with
a sound box having a neck, of an upwardly
and forwardly extending horn, means for
suspending the horn from above, and a flexi-

70

75

80

85

90

96

100

106

110

115

120

125

130

1,058,284

ble connection between the lower end of the
horn and the sound box neck comprising a
flexible sleeve and a tube fitting over the
sound box neck and provided with an in-
5 wardly extending flange or bead, substan-
tially as described.

This specification signed and witnessed
this 12 day of Oct., 1907.

PETEE WEBEE.
Witnesses :

Feank D. Lewis,
Charles F. Eobson.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

Washington, D. C."

K. H. JONES.

TALKING MACHINE NEEDLE.

APPLIOATIOH FILED APB.2e, 1909.

1,058,754.

Patented Apr. 15, 1913.

qJ^.^,

6 r f

4 / h

(2^1^.^.

e^.^^

h,^^

^jg

x?^

aS.

Uf0ip^^je^^i

^

/

cn^MCU FIJWOOBAPM CO.. WAMINOTOM. I>. C.

XINITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

RICHARD H. JONES, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS.
TALKING-MACHINE NEEDLE.

1,058,754.

Specification of letters Patent. Patented Apr. 15, 1913.

Application filed April 26, 1909. Serial No. 492,205.

To all whom it may concern :

Be it known that I, Richard H. Jones, a
citizen of the United States of America, and
resident of_ Chicago, Cook county, Illinois,
5 have invented a certain new and useful Im-
provement in Talking-Machine Needles, of
which the following is a specification.

My invention relates to improvements in
talking machine needles and has for its

10 object the production of a device by means
of which the sound may be accurately pro-
duced.

A further object is the production of a
needle that will not wear the record.

15 A further object is the production of a
needle that may be used an indefinite num-
ber of times without appreciable deteriora-
tion.
These and such other objects as may here-

20 after appear, are attained by my device, em-
bodiments of which are shown in the accom-
panying drawings in which :

Figure 1 represents a side elevation of the
rough material from which my device i^

25 made. Fig. 2 represents a plan view of Fig.
1. Fig. 3^ represents a plan view of a com-
pleted needle. Fig. 3" represents a side ele-
vation of Fig. 3^. Fig. 4* represents a plan
view of a modified form of needle. Fig. 4''

30 represents a side elevation of Fig. 4*. Fig. 5
represents a perspective view of a talking
machine equipped with my device.

Like numerals of reference indicate like
parts in the several figures of the drawings.

35 Referring now to the drawings — 1 rep-
resents an example of the crude material
preferably used in the manufacture of my
improved needle which in this particular
case is the thorn or spine from certain spe-

40 cies of cactus. An ordinary thorn such as
shown in Fig. 1, is cut into say three parts
as shown at 8 — 9 and a stylus formed there-
from having a substantially triangular end
flaring at 10, terminating in a knife edged

45 end 11 ; the base of the needle is preferably
rounded as shown at 12, adapted to fit with-
in the reproducer.

Referring now to Fig. 5 — 13 represents
the talldng machine box, 14 the horn sup-

50 port, 15 the horn, 16 the reproducer, 17 the
diaphragm from which the arm 18 extends.
On this arm is mounted a frame carrying
the needle 19. The record disk 20 is shown
in a position to be operated upon.

55 In Figs. 4^ and 4" I have shown a modi- I

fied form of needle in which the operative
end is elongated into a point 21, tapering
gradually backward to the thicker part 22.

I make no claim of novelty in any of the
parts of the machine except the needle and 60
its combination with the machine.

I am aware that needles of ivory and of
metal have heretofore been used, all of
which are more or less harder than the rec-
ord disk and consequently their use wears 65
out the record. I am also aware that nee-
dles of wood or fiber have been used, all of
which have been softer than the record disk
and consequently have been quickly worn
out in playing, in fact in some instances a 70
needle will not last through a half of some
records.

I have invented a needle made from the
cactus of the same degree of hardness as the
record itself and by its use not only do I 75
not wear out the record* but the needle itself
may be used a great number of times. This
is a very important consideration; in the
first place many records are of great value
and often irreplaceable, while in the second 80
place the user is not obliged to keep replac-
ing a worn out needle with a fresh one — be-
sides as the softer needle deteriorates, so
also the quality of the music becomes less
pleasing to the ear. By the use of my im- 85
proved needle however, I am enabled to
maintain a uniform and pleasing excellence
of rendering.

I claim:

1. A reproducing needle formed from the 90
spine of the cactus.

2. A reproducing needle formed from the
spine of the cactus of the same degree of
hardness as the record disk.

3. In a talking machine, the combination 95
with a reproducer of a record disk and a
reproducing needle formed from the spine

of the cactus.

4. In a talking machine, the combination
with a reproducer of a record disk and a 100
reproducing needle formed from the spine

of the cactus of the same degree of hardness
as said disk.

Signed by me at Chicago, Cook county,
Illinois, this 15th day of April, 1909.

RICHARD H. JONES.

Witnesses :

Clarence E. Taylor,
E. H. Clegg.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents.

Washington, D. C."

A. SCHWER.

PHONOGRAPH.
APPLIOATIOH PILED 00T.2, 1912.

1,058,911.

Patented Apr. 15, 1913.

i SHEETS-SHEET 1.

2S~yk7^-:A^i>^

\ PLANOGRAPH CO., WASHINGTON. D. C.

A. SCHWER.

PHONOGRAPH,

APPLICATION FILED OCT, 2, 1912.

1,058,911.

Patented Apr. 15, 1913.

4 SHEETS-SHEET 2.

Ttz i^t esse s/—

-i--c-c---£^

COLUMBIA PLANOORAPH CO., WASHINOTON, O. C.

A. SOHWER.

PHONOGRAPH.

APPLICATION PILED 0GT,2, 1912,

1,058,911.

Patented Apr. 15, 1913.

4 3H££TS-SH££T 3,

z^ G-T-r 7r>'.

/y7bWc^/>

• 'OLL'.N^BEa I'LANOORAPH CO., washinoton, d. c.

1,058,911.

A. SCHWER.

PHONOGEAPH.

AFFLIOATION FILED OOT. 2, 1912,

Patented Apr. 15, 1913.

i SH££T3-SH££T 4.

U^

-/2^-t: ?rT ess e-s:

COLUMBIA PLANOORAPH CO., WASHINGTON. D. C.

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

ADOLPH SCHWER, OF BUFFALO, NEW YOBK.
PHONOGRAPH.

1,058,911.

Specification of letters Patent. Patented Apr. 15, 1913.

Application filed October 2, 1912. Serial No. 723,499.

To all tchom it may concern:

Be it known that I, Adolph Scnn^ER, a
citizen of the United States, residing at Buf-
falo, in the'county of Erie and State of New
5 York, have invented a certain new and use-
ful Improvement in Phonographs, of which
the following is a specification.

This invention relates to improvements in
phonographs.

10 One of the features of the invention has
reference to a disk record mechanism and a
cylinder record mechanism, each of which is
complete in itself and independent of the
other, a driving mechanism and means for

15 connecting the driving mechanism with
either the disk record mechanism or the cyl-
inder record mechanism.

Another feature has reference to the
mounting of the disk record mechanism,

20 the cylinder record mechanism and the driv-
ing mechanism on a movable base or support
so that said mechanisms may be quickly and
conveniently exposed for adjustment or re-
pair.

25 Another feature has reference to the man-
ner of starting and stopping the driving
mechanism, regulating the speed and shift-
ing from the disk record mechanism to the
cylinder record mechanism or vice versa.

30 The principal objects of the invention are
to provide for almost instantaneously chang-
ing from one record mechanism to another,
to perfectly control and regulate the speed
at will, to start and stop the mechaiysm

35 when desired, and to arrange the various
mechanisms so that they are quickly acces-
sible for adjustment or repair.

The inA^ention also relates to certain de-
tails of construction which will be herein-

40 after described and claimed, reference be-
ing had to the accompanying drawings in
which a preferred adaptation of the machine
is shown.

Figure 1, is a top plan view of the im-

45 proved phonograph. Fig. 2, is a vertical
transverse section through the upper portion
of the box of the machine with a front ele-
vation of the various mechanisms attached
to the same. Fig. 3, is a fragmentary

50 perspective view to illustrate the toggle
clutch operating mechanism and one mem-
ber of one of the clutches. Fig. 4, is a frag-
mentary horizontal section through the box
with a bottom view of the driving mecha-

nism. Fig. 5, is a fragmentary vertical sec- 55
tion through the box on line 5 5 Fig. 4, to
illustrate the starting and stopping friction
brake mechanism. Fig. 6 is a fragmentary
section through the box on line G G Fig. 4, to
illustrate the ratchet and dog locking device 60
of the spring driving mechanism. Fig. 7, is
an enlarged fragmentary section through
one of the clutch mechanisms. Fig. 8, is a
vertical longitudinal section through the box,
the driving mechanism being omitted. 65

In referring to the preferred adaptation
of the improved machine illustrated in the
accompanying drawings in detail like nu-
merals designate like parts.

The box 1 as shown has a lower sounding 70
compartment 2 and an upper inclosing com-
partment 3 for the driving mechanism. The
box top is composed of a fixed or stationary
rear portion 4 and a movable front portion
5 which is hinged at its rear edge to the 75
front edge of the fixed rear portion 4; said
movable front portion forming a cover
which maj'' be readily lifted to permit ac-
cess to the upper compartment 3.

The disk record mechanism, and the cyl- 80
inder record mechanism are both mounted
on the front portion or cover 5 and the driv-
ing mechanism is suspended from said front
portion or cover 5 as shown in Fig. 2.

The reproducing mechanisms of which two 85
are provided, one for the disk record mech-
anism and the other for the cylinder record
mechanism are absolutely independent of
each other and are supported from the fixed
rear portion 4 of the top of the box. Said 90
reproducing mechanisms are adapted to be
swung manually by the operator into and
out of operating position with reference to
the records.

The disk record mechanism consists of a 95
vertical shaft 6 journaled in a depending
bracket 7 attachecl to and depending beneath
the cover 5 and having its upper end project-
ing loosely through an opening in the said
cover and a horizontal support or turn table 100
8 fixed to the upper projecting end of the
shaft 6 upon which the disk records are
adapted to be placed in the usual manner.

The reproducing mechanism for the disk
record mechanism includes a sound conduct- 105
ing tube 9 Avhich is supported from the fixed
rear portion 4 and has the usual goose neck
10 and a sound box 11 arranged at the for-

2

1,058,911

ward terminal of said goose neck which car-
ries the needle 12.

The cylinder record mechanism is mount-
ed on the cover 5 at one side of the disk rec-
5 ord mechanism and comprises a frame 13, a
cylinder record supporting mandrel 14 jour-
naled in said frame, a screw bar 15 for feed-
ing the reproducer goose neck along the
record and gear means for changing the

10 feed to permit records of different pitch
threads such as the Edison Standard and
Amberol records to be played by the cyl-
inder record mechanism.

The gear changing means is arranged at

15 one side of the mandrel 14 being mounted in
an end extension 17 of the frame and con-
sists of a shaft 18 extending from the
mandrel, a small pinion 19 mounted on said
shaft, an intermediate shaft, 20, a centrally

20 mounted spur gear wheel 21 on said shaft
20 which meshes with the pinion 19, two
spur gear Avheels 22 and 23 also mounted
on the shaft 20 on opposite sides of the
wheel 21, a slide shaft 24 connected to the

25 feed bar 15 and two gear wheels 25 and 26
on said slide shaft adapted to mesh respec-
tively with the gear wheels 22 and 23 see
Fig. 1.

The slide shaft 24 has an enlarged

30 knurled head 27 at its outer end which is
adapted to be grasped by the operator to
slide a movable clutch member 27^ attached
to the inner end of the slide shaft 24 into
clutching engagement with either one of

35 two fixed clutch members 27^ and 27"= which
are respectively attached to the gear wheels
25 and 26 as shown in Fig. 1. The gear
wheels 25 and 26 are always in mesh Avith
the gear ^yl^eels 22 and 23 and are loosely

40 mounted on the slide shaft 24 so as to rotate
independently thereof except when clutched
thereto by the movable clutch member 27*.

In Fig. 1 the movable clutch member is
shown in clutching engagement with the

45 fixed clutch member 27" attached to the gear
wheel 25 and out of clutching engagement
with the fixed clutch member 27'' attached
to the gear wheel 26. The purpose of this
mechanism is to enable the ratio of speed

50 between the feed bar 15 and the rnandrel
14 to be varied or changed so that different
styles of cylinder records may be played on
the same machine.

The cylinder record reproducing mecha-

55 nism is similar to the disk record reproduc-
ing mechanism; being located on one side
thereof and it consists of a sound conducting
tube 28 supported from the fixed rear por-
tion 4, a goose neck tube 29 pivotally at-

60 tached to the tube 28, a sound box 30 at-
tached to the forward terminal of the goose
neck tube 29 and a needle 31 carried by said
sound box.

The driving mechanism in the adaptation

65 illustrated is of the spring operated type.

Referring to Figs. 2-4 and 5, a spiral spring
32 is incased within the two parts 33 and
34 of a two member cylindrical housing and
is adapted to be wound up or placed under
tension by a winding handle 35 (a frag- 70
ment of the stem of said handle being shown
in Fig. 4) which is detach ably fitted on the
ezad' of a shaft 36 journaled in bearings in
a bracket 37 depending from the cover 5.

The shaft 36 is provided with a ratchet 75
wheel 37'' and a pivotal locking dog 38 is
arranged to engage the teeth of the ratchet
wheel and thereby prevent the shaft 36 turn-
ing in the reverse direction or in a direction
to unwind the spring, see Fig. 6. 80

A spur gear wheel 39 is mounted on the
shaft 36 Avhich meshes with a spur gear
wheel 40 mounted on a short projecting
shaft 41 extending from the outer member
34 of the housing. The housing member 34 85
is also provided at its outer end with a large
spur gear wheel 42 which meshes with a
small pinion 43 mounted on an intermediate
shaft 44, see Fig. 4.

At the opposite end of the intermediate 90
shaft is arranged a spur gear wheel 45
which meshes with a spur gear wheel 46
mounted on one member 47 of a clutch
which is arranged on the driving shaft 48
for the cylinder record mechanism. 95

The clutch member 47 is loose on the
shaft 48 being free to rotate independently
thereon but is held against longitudinal
movement thereon by one of the two frame
members 49 and 50 in which the driving 100
shaft 48 is journaled. The other or oppo-
site member 51 of the clutch is also mounted
on the driving shaft but is vinrotatably
fastened thereon by a pin 52 extending
transverselj'^ from the shaft and projecting 105
in a longitudinal slot 53 in the clutch mem-
ber 51 as shown in Fig. 3, which permits it
to be shifted into and out of clutching en-
gagement with the other clutch member.

The driving shaft 48 for the cylinder no
record mechanism is connected to the shaft
18 extending from the cylinder mandrel by
a belt 54 which encircles pulleji's 55 and 56
mounted respecdvely on the driving shaft
48 and shaft 18 as shown in Fig. 2. 115

A driving shaft 57 for the disk record
mechanism is also mounted beneath the
cover 5 shown in Fig. 4, and has a bevel
gear wheel 58 at one end which meshes with
a bevel gear wheel 59 on the vertical shaft 6. 120

A clutch similar to the clutch mounted on
the driving shaft 48 is likewise moimted on
the driving shaft 57 for the disk record
mechanism and consists of two members 60
and. 61; the member 60 being slidably but 125
unrotatably secured thereon and the other
member 61 loosel}^ surrounding the shaft
but held from longitudinal movement there-
on. The member 61 is rotatable independ-
ently of the shaft and carries a pinion 62 130

1,068,011

which meshes with the spur gear wheel 45
on the intermediate shaft 44. The slidable
members of the tAvo clutches are connected
to a single clutch shifting mechanism for
5 simultaneous operation.

For an understanding of the principal
iwrtion of the clutch shifting mechanism
reference is to be had to Fig. 3.

A rock shaft 63 is journaled in brackets

10 64 and carries a crank arm 65 provided with
a bifurcated end 66 which loosel}' engitges
in a groove 67 in the clutch member 51 and
a bell crank 68 which is connected at one
end to the clutch member 60 of the clutch

11 controlling the operation of the disk record
mechanism and at the opposite end to a tog-
gle arm 69 extending from the rock shaft.
From this construction it will be noted that
by rocking the shaft 63, the slidable clutch

20 member 51 will be moved in one direction
by the crank arm 65 while the other clutch
member is shifted in the opposite direction
by the bell crank and toggle, thereby bring-
ing one clutch into clutching engagement

26 and simultaneously therewith disengaging
the other clutch.

The shaft 63 is rocked by means of a turn
button 70 arranged on the top of the cover 5
and having a depending stem 71 and a

30 transvei-se arm 72 at the lower end of said
depending stem which is provided with an
opening (not shown) through which one
end of a connecting rod 73 loosely and slid-
ably fits. The arm 72 is balanced yieldingly

35 on said rod 73 between two springs 74 and
75 which are held in place on the rod by two
separated washers 76 and 77 and the oppo-
site end of said rod 73 is pivoted to a crank
78 extending from the rock shaft 63. The

40 purpose of the springs 74 and 75 are to pro-
vide a spring tension on the rod in either di-
rection it is moved and thereby force the
slidable clutch member of the clutch that is
being engaged into clutching position as

41 soon as it registers with its opposed clutch
member.

The speed of the machine is controlled by
a governor 79 of the ball spring type and
said governor is regulated and adjusted to

60 vary the speed by a turn button 80 project-
ing from the top of the cover and having a
stem 81 extending through an opening in the
cover ; said stem being provided at its lower
end with a cam 82 which is connected to the

66 governor by a connecting rod 83.

The machine is started and stopped by the
operator turning a third button 84 mounted
on the cover which controls a friction brake
85 adapted to be engaged with or disen-

•0 gaged from a wheel 86 shown in Fig. 5.

The brake shoe 85 is pivotally mounted on
one end of a lever arm 87 which is pivoted
at an intermediate point to a bracket 88 and
at its opposite end to the lower terminal of a

66 vertical rod 89.

The upper portion of the rod 89 fits
loosel}^ through an opening 90 in the cover 5
and into a recess in the button 84 and has a
transversely extending portion 91 ,at its up-
per end which slidably fits through a cam ^q
slot 92 in the side of the button 84. By
turning the button 84 in one direction, the
rod 89 is lowered applying the brake and by
turning it in the opposite direction the rod
is raised disengaging the brake. ^5

A sj)ring 93 is mounted on the rod 89 be-
ing held thereon by a washer 94; the tend-
enc}^ of said spring being to press the rod
downward in a direction to apply the brake.

The operation of this improved machine gQ
is as follows : — The spring of the driving
mechanism having been wound up by turn-
ing the handle 35 and a record or records
having been placed on one or both the turn
table 8 and the mandrel 14; the machine is 35
started by turning the button 84 in a direc-
tion to release the brake, the clutch shifting
mechanism is moved to connect either the
disk or the cylinder record mechanism with
the driving mechanism by turning the but- 90
ton 70 in the desired direction, and the speed
is regulated by turning the button 80.

In this improved machine the disk and
cylinder record mechanisms are entirely in-
dependent of each other and are arranged so 95
that they are operated from a single driving
mechanism.

It will be understood that the foregoing
mechanisms ma}^ be altered or varied within
the scope of the following claims without loo
departing from my invention.

I claim —

1. In a machine of the class described, a
disk record mechanism, a cylinder record
mechanism, a driving mechanism, and 105
clutch means for connecting either of the
said record mechanisms to the driving mech-
anism.

2. In a machine of the class described, a
disk record mechanism, a C5dinder record no
mechanism, a driving mechanism, a clutch
connected to the disk record mechanism, a
clutch connected to the cylinder record
mechanism, and means for shifting said
clutches to operatively connect the driving 115
mechanism to either of the record mecha-
nisms.

3. In a machine of the class described, a
disk record mechanism, a cylinder record
mechanism, a driving mechanism,* a clutch 120
connected to the disk record mechanism, a
clutch connected to the cylinder record
mechanism, and a single means for shifting
both of said clutches simultaneously.

4. In a machine of the class described, a 125
disk record mechanism, a cylinder record
mechanism, a driving mechanism, a clutch
connected to the disk record mechanism, a
clutch connected to the cylinder record
mechanism, and a single button controlled 130

1,068,911

means for shifting both of said clutches si-
multaneously.

5. In a machine of the class described, a
disk record mechanism, a cylinder record

5 mechanism, a driving mechanism, a clutch
connected to the disk record mechanism, a
clutch connected to the cylinder record
mechanism, and means for shifting one of
said clutches into clutching engagement and
10 the other clutch out of clutching engage-
ment.

6. In a machine of the class described, a
disk record mechanism, a cylinder record
mechanism, a driving mechanism, a speed

15 changing mechanism, and clutch mechanism
for operatively connecting the driving

mechanism to either of the record mecha-
nisms.

7. In a machine of the class described, a
box, disk and cylinder record mechanisms 20
mounted on said box; each of said record
mechanisms being complete in itself and in-
dependent of the other record mechanism, a
driving mechanism within the box, and a
shiftable clutch mechanism whereby the 25
driving mechanism may be connected to
either of the record mechanisms.

ADOLPH SCHWEE.

Witnesses :

D. H. Harper,
A. J. Sangster.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents.

Washington, D. C."

p. CATUCOI.

PHONOGRAPH SOUND BOX.

APPLICATION PILED MAK. 11, 1911.

1,059,345.

Patented Apr. 22, 1913.

J'x^.Z

<>

TzT^.f.

F.J J.

^3-^^

/\^y^

J

l^

J K'^

F~Y\^k^^f

/1^^C\

(2/ vd)

(2/ Xs)

^^

J

^.^.

/ /* r

^./

jfzo. Cf.

W^C^^ ^cO^cc^ 3>^t)CHtor

COLUMBIA PLANOGRAPH CO.. WASHINGTON. D. C.

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

PLINY CATUCCI, OF NEWARK, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR TO A. F. MEISSELBACH &
BROTHER, A CORPORATION OF NEW JERSEY.

PHONOGRAPH SOUND-BOX.

1,059,34.'».

Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Apr. 33, 1913.

Application filed March 11, 1911. Serial No. 613,814.

To all whoin it may concern:

Be it known that I, Pliny Catucci, a
citizen of the United States, residing in the
city of Newark, county of Essex, and State
5 of Xew Jerse}'^, have invented certain new
and useful Improvements in Phonograph
Sound-Boxes; and I declare the following
to be a full, clear, and exact description of
the same, such as will enable others skilled

10 in the art to make, construct, and use the
same.

My invention relates to that class of sound
boxes wherein the reproducing stylus is
caused to follow a helical groove in a cylin-

15 drical phonograph record, and its particu-
lar purpose is to so construct the stylus
holder and its connected parts as to permit
of a universal movement of the stylus point,
as it follows such groove: that is to say, if

20 at any portion of the record groove, it should
deviate from a true helix as is often the case,
the stylus point will bear directly into the
groove, and not upon the sides thereof; re-
sulting in a more perfect reproduction of

25 the selection upon the record.

A further object is the material simplifi-
cation of the structure of the parts and a
consequent reduction in the cost of manu-
facture, at the same time, preserving all of

30 the requisites of a perfect sound box.

Another object accomplished by my im-
provement is the simplifying of the means
for throwing the recording or reproducing
stylus out of action during the replacing of

35 a blank or record.

In another application, I have set 'forth
the details of the construction of the sound
box proper, and of the stylus holder and its
connection with the diaphragm, and they

<0 need not be repeated here; but the follow-
ing description will be confined to the de-
tails of the universal connections and shift-
ing devices, with only such reference to the
parts disclosed in said other application

*5 as may be necessary to a full understanding
of the present improvement. The said ap-
plication bears Ser. No. 613,813 filed Mar.
11, 1911.
In the drawings Figure 1 is a side eleva-

^0 tion, partly in section, of the box with the
stylus out of action. Fig. 2 is a side eleva-
tion with the stylus in action. Fig. 3 is a
rear view of the supporting bracket, show-
ing one form of shifting device in position

55 to throw the stylus out of action. Fig. 4 is

a similar view with the stylus in action.
Fig. 5 is a similar view of a modified form
of shifting device. Fig. G is a perspective
view of a detached shifting device such as
shown in Fig. 5. Fig. 7 is a perspective 80
view of the supporting bracket. Fig. 8 is
a plan of the bracket head before bending
the same to shape. Fig. 9 is an edge view
of the stylus holder.

Similar letters of reference refer to like 65
parts throughout the specifications and
drawings.

As above stated, the sound box proper 1,
the stylus holder 2, the diaphragm 3, and its
connection with the stylus holder, are in all 70
substantial respects like those described in
my application above refei'red to.

Upon the rear side of the box 1, is rigidly
secured, the bracket 4, with its upper end
slotted as at 5, and having the upwardly 75
flanged bearing lugs G and 7. The two legs
8 and 9, are for the purpose of affording a
broad base by which the bracket is secured
to the box 1, by means of the screws or rivets
10. The flanged bearing lugs G and 7, are 80
formed by bending the metal of which the
bracket is made, at right angles to its plane,
providing the pivot bearing apertures 11
and 12, and the shifting device apertures
13 and 14, the latter being somewhat larger 85
than the aperture 13. The head of the
bracket, that is, the part having the bearing
lugs 6 and 7, is bent at right angles to the
general plane of the bracket, so as to over-
hang and project forward of the box 1, as 90
shown in Figs. 1 and 2.

Mounted within the channel formed by
the lugs G and 7, upon a pivot pin 15, which
is inserted through the apertures 11 and 12,
is the two-armed stylus lever 16, one arm 17, 96
Ijdng horizontally in the channel and the
other arm 18, extending vertically through
the slot 5, down in front of the diaphragm
3, the slot 5, acting as a guide to confine the
movements of the arm 18, within a vertical 100
plane at right angles to the plane of the
diaphragm. The stylus lever thus formed
is in fact a lever bent substantiallj^ at its
middle to form the two right angled arms
17 and 18 with the pivot pin 15 located at 106
their angle. The horizontal arm 17, is pro-
vided with a weight 19, whose tendency is to
tilt the lower end of the arm 18, forward
or away from the diaphragm 3. In some
cases I may supplement the weight with a HO

o

1,059,345

spring 20, the upper end of which is con-
nected to the arm 17, and its lower end to a
laterally projecting lug 21, upon the bracket
4, as shown. Or if desired, I may dispense
£, with the weight 19, and use the spring alone,
according to the class of record being repro-
duced. I wish it to be understood that I do
not confine myself to the weight alone or the
spring alone, as in some cases otie will oper-

10 ate to give a better reproduction, while in
others, to get the best results both weight
and spring must be used.

At the lower end of the arm 18, is an
aperture into which is swiveled the eye-pin

15 22, in the slotted outer end of which is piv-
oted the stylus holder 2, as shown, the con-
struction being such that the point of the
stylus may sway from side to side upon the
eye-pin 22, as it follows the record groove,

20 and yet not interfere with its following the
excavations and elevations in the bottom of
the groove.

As a means for shifting the stylus point
into and out of contact with a record, I may

25 use the shifting pin 23, which is located in
the apertures 13 and 14, as shown. This pin
has two diameters, upon either of which the
arm 17, may rest. The two diameters are
connected with a slight cone so that the slicl-

30 ing of the pin endwise under the arm 17,
will either raisQ or lower the arm 17, and
consequently move the arm 18 toward or
away from the diaphragm, as the arm 17,
rides upon the large or the small diameter of

35 the pin 23. The handle 24, integral with the
pin 23, projects outside the lug 7, whereby
the pin may be readily manipulated, the
other end being headed to prevent detach-
ment.

40 In Figs. 5 and 6, I have shoAvn a slight
modification of the shifting device. In this
case, I use a cylindrical pin 25, with a
knurled head for turning the same. A por-
tion of this pin is cut away or halved,

45 as at 26, so that as the arm 17, rides
upon the cutaway part, the arm 18, is
shifted away from the diaphragm to bring
the stylus point upon the record; but when
the pin 25, is rotated to bring the cylindrical

50 surface of the pin beneath the arm 17, then
the arm 18, is shifted toward the diaphragm,
and consequently, the stylus point will be
raised from the record, as will be readily
understood.

55 The sound box as thus described is de-
signed for use in connection with the phono-
graphs illustrated and described in my prior
patent applications, Ser. Nos. 592,818, filed
Nov. 17, 1910; and 030,170 filed May 29,

60 1911 ; and it will be noted that when in posi-
tion on either of such phonographs, the
plane of the diaphragm 3 will be vertical
while the arm 17 of the stylus lever 16 will
be substantially horizontal and the arm 18

65 will be substantially vertical.

It will be -thus seen that by the construc-
tion described and illustrated, I am able to
produce a sound box, at once simple in con-
struction, which contains all of the requi-
sites of a perfect mechanism, cheap to manu-
facture, easy to operate and not liable to
disarrangement.

I claim :

1. In a sound box for phonographs, the
combination of a box body, a diaphragm se-
cured therein a bracket secured to the box
bod}'', said bracket having an arm projecting
above and in front of said diaphragm, a sty-
lus lever having a horizontal arm and a verti-
cal arm, said lever being pivotally supported
intermediate its ends upon the arm of said
bracket, a stylus holder connected to said
diaphragm and to the vertical arm of said
stylus lever, and a weight secured to the
horizontal arm of said lever.

2. In a sound box for phonographs, the
combination of a box body, a diaphragm se-
cured therein, a bracket secured to the box
body, said bracket having an arm projecting
above and in front of said diaphragm, a
stylus lever having a horizontal arm and a
vertical arm, said lever being pivotally sup-
ported intermediate its ends upon the arm
of said bracket, a stylus holder connected to
said diaphragm and to the vertical arm of
said stylus lever and a spring connecting the
horizontal arm of said lever with said
bracket.

3. In a sound box for phonographs, the
combination of a box body, a diaphragm se-
cured therein, a bracket secured to the box
body, said bracket having an arm projecting
above and in front of said diaphragm, a
stylus lever having a horizontal arm and a
vertical arm, said lever being pivotally sup-
ported intermediate its ends upon the arm
of said bracket, a stylus holder connected to
said diaphragm and to the vertical arm of
said stylus lever, a weight secured to the
horizontal arm of said lever and a spring
connecting the horizontal arm of said lever
with said bracket.

4. In a sound box for phonographs, the
combination of a diaphragmi, a supporting
box therefor, a bracket secured to the rear
face of said box, and having an arm pro-
jecting above and forward of said dia-
phragm, a stylus lever having its arms at
right angles to each other, and pivotally
connected at its angle to said bracket arm, a
stylus holder connected to said diaphragm,
a universal joint connection between the ex-
tremity of one arm of said stylus lever and
said holder, and a weight secured to the
other arm of said lever.

5. In a sound box for phonographs, the
combination of a diaphragm, a sound box
for supporting said diaphragm, a bracket
mounted upon said box, said bracket having
a forwardly projecting channeled arm, a

70

75

80

85

90

95

100

105

lio

115

120

125

130

1,069,346

10

15

stylus lever pivoted in the channeled arm of
said bracket, a stylus holder connected to
said diaphragm, a universal joint connec-
tion between said lever and said holder,
gravity actuated means for tilting said le-
ver and said holder into one of their respec-
tive positions, and manually operated means
for tilting and holding said lever and holder
into their reverse positions.

G. In a sound box for phonographs, the
combination of a diaphragm, a supporting
box for said diaj^hragm, a bracket mounted
on said box and having an overhanging
channeled arm, a stylus lever having hori-
zontal and vertical arms pivotally supported

between its ends on the channeled overhang-
ing arm of said bracket, a stylus holder con-
nected to said diaphragm, a universal joint
connection between said holder and the ver-
tical arm of said stylus lever, a weight
mounted on the horizontal arm of said lever
for tilting the stylus holder into one of its
respective positions, and manually operated
means for tilting and operating the lever
and holder into their respective reverse po-
sitions.

PLINY CATUCCI.
Witnesses :

Loyis M. Sanders,

W. T. Friedd.

20

25

Copies of tMs patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the

Washington, D. C."

Commissioner of Patents,

1,059,346.

p. CATUCCI.

GRAMOPHONE SODND BOX,
APPLIOATION PILED NOY. 26, 1912.

Patented Apr. 22, 1913.

JTit/.-s

zz ^\ z^ zz

//

^^■^- '^ JlX. -tj .c

/k

-^M.

^-a.

.AJBh-

Zl

^. ^~

ZL

Cr L ^ "1 -^

"^Zo

r.jr

'/y

/Z 'F

J f\jO-rr.O-^0^ J^ -Jbc

CO., WASHINGTON, U. C.

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

PLINY CATUCCI, OF NEWARK, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR TO A. F. MEISSELBACH &
BROTHER, A CORPORATION OF NEW JERSEY.

GRAMOPHONE SOUND-BOX.

1,059,346.

Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Apr. 33, 191 3.

Application filed November 26, 1912. Serial No. 733,585.

To all. whom, it may concern:

Be it known that I, Pliny Catucci, a
citizen of the United States, residing in the
city of Newark, county of Essex, and State
5 of New Jersey, have invented a new and use-
ful Improvement in Gramophone Sound-
Boxes, of which the following is a specifi-
cation.
The object of my invention 'vp to provide

10 an improved construction in and relating

to the sound boxes for talking machines.

The main essential parts of a sound box

are the diaphragm and the stylus lever.

The diaphragm must be so held in place that

15 it will readily respond to the oscillation of
the stylus; it must also have some restrain-
ing means to prevent any excessive move-
ments or oscillations beyond those transmit-
ted by the stylus through the stylus lever.

20 The stylus lever with its stylus must be
mounted in such a manner as to respond to
the following requirements: It must abso-
lutely be free to respond to the micro-oscil-
lations due to the sound waves ; 2nd, its axis

25 of oscillation must be absolutely rigid and
resist any movement tending to displace it
from the plane occupied when at rest; 3rd,
and finally the stylus lever must be re-
strained and controlled in its rotation upon

30 the fixed axis.

The superior musical rendition and the
distinctness and clearness of enunciation of
my present sound box confirm the correct-
ness of the above reasoning.

35 The essential parts of my invention are
most elementary; a one-piece stylus lever
retaining the removable stylus, which is
under pressure between one flat surface and
the keen edge of a blade. The keen edge of

40 the blade with its plane transverse to that
of the stylus lever offers a rocker like re-
sistance in the transverse direction; but per-
mits the free oscillation of the stylus lever,
which is sensitive to most minute oscilla-

4^ tions. The portion of metal of the stylus
lever which extends on each side of the pres-
sure exerting edge, acts as a restraining
member, and eliminates all costly, cumber-
some, adjustable springs which can only be

^0 properly adjusted by persons well versed in
the art of manufacturing sound boxes. This
restraining action is of great importance.
Without it (in the high soprano notes) the
stylus, impinging on one abrupt wave of the

^^ sound grooves, would impart to the stylus

bar a sharp movement that would carry the
diaphragm end of the bar beyond its in-
tended limit of amplitude; the next wave
would have to overcome the momentum of
the stylus and would repeat the excessive 60
movement in the opposite direction. This
behavior of the stylus lever produces dis-
cordant chattering; on the other hand, if the
mounting of the lever is too rigid, the lever
will not be sensitive to the micro-oscillations 65
and the volume of the sound will be greatly
reduced. It is, therefore, of great impor-
tance to mount the bar on an almost mathe-
matical axis, to achieve great sensitiveness;
but it is also essential to provide restraining- 70
controlling means that work in conjunction
with its free movement. Figure 1, is a front
view of a sound box showing my improve-
ment. Fig. 2, is a side view showing the im-
provement in elevation. Fig. 3, is a view 76
similar to Fig. 1, but with the fastening bar
removed. Fig. 4, is a front elevation and
Fig. 6. is a plan view of the fastening bar.
Fig. 6, is a front elevation and Fig. 7, is an
end elevation of the equalizing bar. Fig. 8, 80
is a side elevation of the stylus lever. Fig.
9, is a cross section of the stylus lever
through its supporting arms.

Similar reference numerals refer to like
parts throughout the specification and draw- 85
ings. ,

The sound box body 1, is of the usual type,
having the second conveying thimble 2, at
its rear ; the diaphragm 3, is secured in posi-
tion in the body 1. by means of the ring 4. 90
From one side of the body 1, project the two
lugs 5, 5, which are provided with the screw
threaded apertures 6, 6. The stylus lever 7,
is made from thin sheet metal, pressed to the
form illustrated, with the tubular end 8, pro- 95
vided with the stylus needle socket 9, to re-
ceive the needle 10, the latter being held in
position by means of the small thumbscrew
11. The tubular body of the lever is cut
away at 12, so as to leave a semi-tubular 100
shell, as shown in Figs. 8 and 9, with the
thin lateral arms 13, 13. extending at right
angles to the length of the lever. These
arms are slightly cambered as shown in Fig.
8, so that they serve in the nature of rockers, 105
about which the lever may slightly oscillate
under the vibrations of the diaphragm 3.
The semi tubular portion of the lever 7, is
pinched together from the point 14, to the
end, and bent at substantially a right angle HO

1,059,346

at 15, and provided at its extremity with a
foot 16 by which it is secured in any con-
venient or desired manner to the center of
the diaphragm 3, as by the rivet 17. When
5 in position the arms 13, 13, rest upon the flat
face of the bridge of metal 18, extending be-
tween the two lugs- 5, 5, and in substantial
alinement with the two apertures 6, 6.

The fastening bar 19, is of the general

10 shape shown in Figs. 4, and 6, and is pro-
vided with the offset apertured lugs 20, 20.
It is slightly arched as shown with the semi-
circular notch 21, cut in its lower edge, so
that when in the position shown in Fig. 2

16 it will span the semitubular part of the
stylus lever 7, without contact therewith.
Screws 22, 22, pass through the apertured
ends of the bar 19, and into the apertures

6, 6, and thus hold the fastening bar 19 in
20 place.

The equalizing bar 23, is made from a thin

strip of hardened steel of the general shape

shown in Figs. 6 and 7. Its lower edge is

sharpened to a knife edge as shown at 30,

25 and notched as at 24 to span the stylus lever

7, without contact therewith. The equaliz-
ing bar is pivotally secured to the fastening
lever 19, by means of the pin 25, which
passes through the apertures 26, and 27 re-

130 spectively in the bar 19, and in the bar 23.
When the parts are assembled as shown in
Figs. 1 and 2, with the screws 22, 22, secur-
ing the fastening bar 19 in place, the knife
edges 30, of the equalizing bar 23, bear

35 upon the concave side of the rocker arms
13, 13, and press them firmly upon the flat
bridge 18. Inasrnuch as the equalizing bar
23, is centrally pivoted upon the bar 19, this
pressure is equal upon the two arms 13, 13,

40 notwithstanding inequality of pressure upon
the ends of the bar 19, due to the screws
22, 22.

By the structure of my improvement I
am able to firmly clamp the stylus lever to

45 the sound box body, in such a manner as to
permit said stylus to vibrate freely in a
plane perpendicular to the diaphragm,- and
yet avoid any tendency of the parts to rattle,
or come loose. The structure is neat and

50 simple, and presents no manufacturing diffi-
culties which so often are present in devices
of this nature.
I claim:

1. In a sound box, the combination of a
55 box body, a diaphragm secured in said body,

a stylus lever centrally secured to said dia-
phragm, a pair of cambered arms extending
laterally from said stylus lever, a fastening
bar adjustably secured to said box body, an
60 equalizing bar centrally pivoted upon said
fastening bar with one edge of said equaliz-
ing bar bearing upon the concave faces of
said cambered arms.

2. In a sound box, the combination of a
65 box body and a stylus lever, means for se-

curing said lever to said box body compris-
ing a pair of cambered arms extending lat-
erall}^ from said lever and bearing upon the
face of said body, a fastening bar spanning
said lever and adjustably secured to said 70
body, an equalizing bar spanning said lever
and centrally pivoted upon said fastening
bar, said equalizing bar having knife edges
which bear with equalized pressure upon
the cambered arms of said stylus lever. ^g

3. In a sound box, the combination of a
box body having a pair of lugs extending
laterally therefrom, a bridge extending be-
tween and connecting said lugs, a stylus lever
having a laterally extending cambered arm gQ
upon each side thereof and resting upon
said bridge, an equalizing bar spanning said
lever, and having a pair of knife edges
which bear upon said cambered arms, and
means for pivotally and adjustably support- gg
ing said equalizing bar from said lugs.

4. In a sound box, the combination of a
box body, and a stylus lever, cambered arms
upon said lever, means for securing said
stylus lever to said box body comprising an 90
equalizing bar having knife edges which
bear upon and press said cambered arms
firmly against said box body, and means for
pivotally supporting said equalizing bar
upon said box body. 95

5. In a sound box, the combination of a
box body having laterally extending lugs
and a connecting bridge thereon, a stylus
lever having laterally extending arms there-
on, means for securing said lever to said iqo
body comprising an equalizing bar pivotally
and adjustably secured to said lugs, said
equalizing bar being provided with knife
edges which bear upon and press said stylus
arms firmly upon said bridge. io5

6. In a sound box, the combination of a
box body having a lateral projection there-
on, a stylus lever having lateral arms there-
on, a fastening bar, an equalizing bar piv-
otally secured to said fastening bar, and no
means for adjustably securing said fasten-
ing bar to said lateral projection, to cause
said equalizing bar to press said lateral arms
firmly upon said projection.

7. In a sound box, the combination of a 115
box body having a lateral projection there-
on, a stylus lever having elastic cambered
rocker arms projecting laterally therefrom,
and means for firmly pressing said rocker
arms upon said lateral projection. 120

8. In a sound box, the combination of a
box body having a lateral projection there-
on, a stylus lever having lateral elastic sup-
porting arms, bearing upon said projection,
equalizing means for firmly pressing said 126
arms with equal pressure upon said projec-
tion.

9. In a sound box, a box body, a stylus
lever, means for securing said stylus lever

to said box body, comprising a fastening iso

1,059,346

bar, adjustably secured to a part of said
box body, an equalizing bar centrally piv-
oted upon said fastening bar, knife edges
upon said equalizing bar which bear upon
5 and press parts of said stjdus lever firmly
upon a part of said box bod3\

10. Means for securing a stylus lever to a
sound box body, comprising a fastening bar
having apertured ends and an equalizing

10 bar centrally pivoted upon said fastening
bar, and adapted to bear upon and firmly
press a part of said stylus lever upon a part
of said sound box.

11. Means for securing a stylus lever to a
15 gramophone sound box, comprising a fas-
tening bar having offset apertured ends, an
equalizing bar pivoted at its center to the
middle of said fastening bar, and knife
edges upon said equalizing bar in alinement

20 with the apertures in the ends of said fas-
tening bar.

12. In a sound box, the combination with

a box body having laterally projecting lugs
provided with screw threaded apertures, a
bridge connecting said lugs, a stylus lever 25
having cambered rocker arms projecting lat-
erally therefrom in alinement with said
ai^ertures and resting upon said bridge, a
fastening bar having offset apertured ends,
an equalizing bar pivoted at its center to 30
the middle of said fastening bar, and hav-
ing knife edges thereon in alinement witli
the apertures in the ends of said fastening-
bar, and screws passing through said aper-
tured ends and into the screw threaded aper- ?,5
tures of said projecting lugs of the box
body, to press said knife edges upon said
cambered arms, and thereby yieldingly pivot
said stjdus lever upon said bridge.

PLINY CATUCCI.

In presence of —

Norman E. Zusi,
Louis M. Sanders.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

Washington, D. C."

1,059,418.

C. S. WICKES.

SOUND EECORD FOR TALKING MACHINES

APPLICATION PILED SEPT. 6, 1910

Patented Apr. 22, 1^13.

2 SHEETS-SHEET 1.

^ G 7

I^^Q. J.

^O

_^o

-I^.Z^.^.

WIT/VBSSES

By

INVENTOR
>»TTO/?fl/EY

COLUMBIA PLANOGRAPH CO. . WASHINGTON, I>, C.

1,059,418.

C. S. WICKES.

SOUND RECORD FOR TALKING MACHINES

APPLICATION FILED SEPT. 6, 1910

Patented Apr. 22, 1913.

2 SHEETS-SHEET 2.

J^.t^.G.

WITNESSES

-J^

^^

INVENTOR

BY

/(/m^

ATTORNEY

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

25

30

35

40

45

CLARENCE S. WICKES, OE MERCHANTVILLE, NEW JERSEY. ASSIGNOR TO VICTOR
TALKING MACHINE COMPANY, A CORPORATION OF NEW JERSEY.

SOUND-RECORD FOR TALKING-MACHINES.

1,059,418.

Specification of letters Patent. Patented Apr. 33, 1913.

Application filed September 6, 1910. Serial No. 580,670.

To all whom it may concern :

Be it known that I, Clarence S. Wickes,
a citizen of the United States, and a resident
of the borough of Merchantville, State of
5 Xew Jersey, have invented certain new and
useful Improvements in Sound-Kecords for
Talking-Machines, of which the following is
a full, clear, and exact disclosure, reference
being had to the accompanying drawings,

10 forming a part of the following .specifica-
tion.

The main objects of this invention are, to
provide a durable and efficient disk sound
record of minimum thickness and having a

15 substantially flat recorded surface and suffi-
cient rigidit}^ for commercial purposes; to
provide an improved somid record compris-
ing a relatively thin body portion and hav-
ing a ribbed and recessed back; to provide

20 a disk sound record having a central depres-
sion in the face thereof for a label and hav-
ing a corresponding projection on the back
thereof; and to provide other improvements,
as will appear hereinafter.

It has been discovered after numerous ex-
periments, that a compressed disk i-ecord
having a relatively thin body portion pro-
vided upon its back with a marginal rib and
with radial or transverse reinforcing ribs
extending from the central portion of the
record and connected with the marginal rib
at their outer ends, tends to warp as it cools
after being taken from the press in the proc-
ess of manufacture, and is liable to warp
during its subsequent use. This warping ap-
pears to be due to the fact that the outer ends
of the radial or transverse ribs are connected
to the marginal rib, whereby as the record
cools, the rim of the record is drawn slightly
rearwardly, and the face of the record is
caused to assume a convex shape.

One of the objects of this invention is to
overcome this tendency to warp, which is
found in the ribbed back record as hereto-
fore constructed, during its process of manu-
facture and during its subsequent use, and I
have found that when the marginal rib is
omitted in a record of this kind and the
radial ribs are retained, that this tendency

50 of the record to warp is eliminated. This
omission of the marginal rib, however, ob-
viously deprives the I'ecord of some of its
strength at its edge.

I have also discovered after various ex-
periments, that a thin ribbed-back record 55
having the desired qualities of rigidity and
strength and having a flat recorded surface,
may be provided by constructing the record
with a marginal rib and also with radial or
transverse ribs extending from the central 60
portion of the back of the record outwardly,
and the outer ends of which are not con-
nected with the marginal rib.

Furthermore, I have discovered that in the
latter construction and also in the construe- 65
tion in which the marginal rib is omitted,
or 'in other constructions, transverse or radial
ribs which have their outer ends connected
to the marginal rib or extending from the
margin of the record, and their inner ends 70
spaced from the central portion of the
record, may be used to advantage to
strengthen the record and to prevent warp-

In the accompanying drawings. Figure 1 75
is a diametrical section of a sound record
constructed in accordance with this inven-
tion; Fig. 2 a fragmentary bottom plan view
or rear elevation of the same ; Fig. 3 a frag-
mentary top plan view or front elevation of 80
the same; Fig. 4 a diametrical section of a
modified form of this invention : Fig. 5 a
fragmentary bottom plan view of Fig. 4, the
top plan view of Fig. 4 being the same as
shown in Fig. 3; and Figs. 6, 7, 8 and 9 are 85
fragmentary bottom plan views of various
other modified forms of this invention.

Referring to the drawings, one embodi-
ment of this invention comprises a circular
disk record 1, made in any suitable way of 90
an}^ suitable material, but preferably made
in a well known manner b}'' compressing be-
tween two heated matrices a well known
mixture of shellac and other materials, which
is heated before being compressed, and which 95
is permitted to cool after being removed
from the matrices or press. This record
comprises a relatively thin body portion 2,
)irovided upon its face or front side with a
flat annular surface 3, extending from the 100
margin of the record inwardly, and contain-
ing the usual spiral sound groove 4, formed
of lateral undulations of uniform depth.
Instead of the sound groove 4 described, any
suitable sound record might be applied to the 105
flat annular face 3 of the disk.

1,059,418

15

20

30

The record is j^referabl}^ provided with the
nsnal central aj^erture 5, and the central por-
tion of the face of the record is preferably
deiDressed within the recorded surface 3, to
5 form a shalloAV flat circular recess 6, of sub-
stantially uniform depth and concentric with
the record. This recess 6 is adapted to re-
ceive the usual label 7, which is secured in
place in any suitable manner. The back or

10 under side of the record is preferably pro-
vided with a flat circular jDrojection 8, form-
ing a part of the bod^;- of the record. The
thickness of the projection 8 is preferably
substantially uniform and substantially
equal to the depth of the label recess 6, in
the face of the record ; and the diameter of
the projection is preferably, however, as
shown, slightly greater than the diameter of
the recess, to preserve a substantially uni-
form thickness throughout the body of the
record. In other words, the label recess 6 is
formed by depressing the central portion of
the face of the record and correspondingly
raising the central portion 8 of the back of

25 the record a substantiall}^ equal amount. The
record is also provided upon its under *side
with a flat circular boss 9, surrounding and
concentric with the central aperture 5 of the
record, the diameter of the boss being only
a small part of the diameter of the projec-
tion 8 of the back of the record, and being-
intended merely to strengthen the record
around its central aperture.

The record is preferably formed with an

35 annular marginal rib 10, preferably pro-
jecting rearwardly from the back of the
record, the lower surface of the rib being
preferably substantially in the plane of the
lower surface of the boss 9, at the center of

40 the record. This annular marginal rib
might be arranged to project forwardlj^
from the front of the record, if preferred.
Radial ribs 11 are also provided upon the
back of the record, the outer ends of these
ribs being spaced inwardly from the margi-
nal rib, the inner portions of these radial
ribs preferably overlapping the circular pro-
jection 8, upon the back of the record, and
the inner ends of the ribs being preferably
spaced from the boss 9, surrounding the cen-
tral aperture of the record. The under sur-
faces of the ribs 11 are preferably tangent
to a plane coincident with the lower surface
of the boss 9, and tangent to the marginal
rib 10, throughout substantially their full
lengths. The extremities of the ribs may
be tapered to meet the under surface of the
body of the record.

Instead of constructing the record with a

60 marginal rib as heretofore described, the
marginal rib may be omitted as shown in
Figs. 4 and 5, the record being constructed
in other i-espects identically as before or as
hereinafter described. AVlnen the marginal

65 rib is omitted, the record is obviouslv more

45

50

55

fragile, but may be found, when constructed
of suitable material, to be durable enough
for ordinary purposes.

In Figs. 6, 7, 8 and 9 are shown bottom
plan views of modified forms of this inven- 70
tion, in which the body portion 2 of the
record is constructed in each instance as
heretofore described and shown in Figs. 1
to 5, but in which the back of the record is
provided with various forms and arrange- 75
ments of ribs. The under surfaces of all
of the ribs in these modified forms are pref-
erably tangent or coincident with the plane
of the lower surface of the central boss 9.

The record shown in Fig. 6 is provided go
on its back with a marg"inal rib 10 and with
radial ribs 11, which may be called in this
connection inner ribs, extending outAvardly
from the central projection 8 and having
their outer ends spaced from the marginal 35
rib 10, as heretofore described, and also with
comparatively short outer radial ribs 15 ex-
tending from the marginal rib 10 inwardly
and having their inner ends spaced from the
raised portion 8 of the back. In this con- 90
struction the outer ribs alternate with and
overlap the inner ribs, or, in other words,
the alternate ribs are ojopositely disposed
and arranged in a staggered formation
around the record. 95

The record shown in Fig. 7 is similar to
the record shown in Fig. G, just described,
except that in the space between each two
adjacent outer radial ribs 15 are two inner
radial ribs 11. 100

The record shown in Fig. 8 is similar to
that shown in Fig. 7 and just described, ex-
cept that in the space between each two ad-
jacent inner radial ribs 11 are two outer
radial ribs 15. 105

The record shown in Fig. 9 is similar to
the record shown in Fig. 6, heretofore de-
scribed, except that in this case the inner
and oiiter ribs 11 and 15 are curved' instead
of straight. The ribs are shown curved no
simply to indicate that ribs other than
straight may be used, and the curved form
shown is only one of many forms that ob-
viously might be employed and which might
be found to possess some advantages for 115
some purposes over the straight ribs. The
invention, therefore, is not limited to any
particular form of rib, but is intended to
include all forms.

It is to be understood that in each of the 120
various forms of records described above, all
of the ribs, the projection 8, and the boss 9,
are preferably integral with the body of the
record, and that the record as a whole, in-
cluding the body, ribs, projection and boss, 125
is preferably a compressed record, substan-
tially^ homogeneous and comparatively hard,
rigid and clurable, and adapted for use in
directly reproducing sound. This inven-
tion might also be applied, however, to any isO

1,059,418

10

15

20

25

30

3i,

40

60

record, whether compressed or not, and
whether homogeneous or not ; for instance,
it might be applied to a cast or cut record
or to a record having a hiyer of paper or
cardboard embedded or inck)sed in prefer-
ably a mass of other material. The body of
the record in each case, is too thin to with-
stand of itself ordinary usage, and depends
upon the ribs to give it the necessar}^ stiff-
ness and durability.

B}^ this invention it is evident that a com-
mercial sound reproducing record is pro-
duced which for any given material and for
any given area of face or recorded surface
has a body portion of minimum thickness,
and has consequently a minimum mass or
bulk, but which is sufficiently rigid and du-
rable for all requirements.

Only a few of the many forms in which
this invention may be embodied have been
shown, but these forms are thought to be
sufficient to illustrate the invention and to
indicate that the invention is not limited to
any particular construction described, but
might be applied in various forms without
departing from the spirit of this invention
or the scope of the appended claims.

Having thus fully described this inven-
tion, I claim and desire to pi-otect by Letters
Patent of the United States: —

1. A disk sound record comprising a rela-
tively thin body portion having recorded
upon its face side sound undulations, and
upon its opposite side a marginal rib and
inwaixlh^ extending ribs having their outer
ends opposite said undulations and spaced
from said marginal rib, and connected to
said marginal rib only by said body portion.

2. A disk sound record comprising a rela-
tiveW thin body portion having recorded
upon its face side sound undulations, and
up(m its opposite side, a marginal rib and
radially disposed ribs having their outer
ends overlai:)ping said undulations and
spaced from said marginal rib, and connect-
ed to said marginal rib only by said body
portion.

3. A disk sound record comprising a rela-
tively thin body portion having recorded
upon its face side sound undulations, and
upon its back inwardly extending ribs hav-
ing their outer ends opposite said imdula*
tions and connected onh' by said body por-
tion.

4. A disk sound record comprising a rela-
tively thin bodj'^ portion having recorded
upon its face side sound undulations, and
upon its back inwardly extending radial ribs
having their outer ends overlapping said
imdulations and connected only by said bodj'^
portion.

5. A disk sound record having a central
depression upon one side and a correspond-
ing projection upon its opposite side, and
ribs integral with said record and connecting

70

SO

85

90

said projection and the surrounding bodj''
portion of said record, and having their
outer ends free from contact other than with
said body portion.

6. A compressed homogeneous disk sound
record having a central depression upon one
side and a corresponding projection integral
with said disk upon its opposite side, said
record being provided with ribs connecting
said projection with the surrounding body 75
portion of said record, and said ribs having
their ends free from contact other than with
said body portion.

7. A compressed homogeneous disk sound
record having a central depression upon one
side and a cori'esponding projection integral
with said disk upon its oppo.site side, and
ribs connecting said projection with the sur-
rounding body portion of said record and
being connected to one another only by said
portion, the depth of said depression being
substantially equal to the thickness of said
projection, and said projection being of sub-
stantially the same area as said depression.

8. A compressed homogeneous disk sound
record comprising a relatively thin body
portion having recorded upon its face side
sound undulations, and upon its opposite
side integral therewith, a marginal rib and
radial ribs, said radial ribs extending over 95
an area directh?- opi^osite said undulations
and having their outer ends spaced from
said marginal ribs and connected thereto
only by said body portion.

9. A compressed homogeneous disk sound 100
record comprising a relatively thin body
portion having upon its face side a sound
record, and upon its opposite side integral
therewith, a marginal rib and radial ribs
having their outer ends, spaced froin said 105
marginal rib and connected thereto only by
said body portion, said bocty portion being
provided with a central aperture and with

a shallow depression upon its face side, a
corresponding projection integral with said no
record upon its opposite side, and a central
boss upon said projection.

10. A disk sou.nd record comprising a rela-
tively thin body portion having i-ecorded
upon one side soimd undulations, and hav-
ing upon its opposite side a marginal rib
and inwardly extending ribs having their
outer ends spaced from said marginal rib
and connected to said marginal rib only by
said body portion, said inwardly extend-
ing ribs being distributed over a major por-
tion of the area of said opposite side.

11. A disk sound record comprising a body
portion provided with a transverse rib on
the back thereof to strengthen the same, said
rib extending longitudinally a major por-
tion of but not the entire distance between
the central portion and the margin of said
record, one end of said rib being free from
contact except with said body portion. 13^

115

120

125

1,059,418

12. A disk sound record comprising a body
portion having a transverse rib extending
from the margin thereof inwardly and hav-
ing an inner end spaced from the central

5 portion of said record and connected there-
to only by said body portion, said record
having also a transverse rib extending to-
Avard the central portion thereof and hav-
ing an outer end spaced from the margin
10 thereof and connected to said margin only
by said body portion.

13. A disk sound record provided on the
face thereof with sound undulations and on
the back thereof opposite said undulations

15 with a marginal rib and with a plurality
of transverse ribs spaced around said back
in a staggered arrangement, and each hav-
ing one end free from contact except with
the body of said record.

14. A disk sound record comprising a body
portion having recorded on one side there-
of, sound undulations, and having on its
opposite side and distributed over the major
portion of said opposite side, a marginal
rib and a plurality of sets of transverse ribs
arranged in staggered formation, one of said
sets of transverse ribs having their inner
ends free from contact except with said body

20

25

portion, and the other of said sets having
their outer ends free from contact except 30
with said body portion.

15. A disk sound record comprising a body
portion having recorded on one side thereof
sound undulations, and having on its oppo-
site-side and distributed over the major por- 35
tion of said opposite side a marginal rib
and a plurality of transverse ribs arranged

in staggered formation, each of said trans-
verse ribs havi"^g one end free from contact
except with said body portion. 40

16. A disk sound record comprising a body
portion, having a marginal rib and a plu-
rality of spaced transverse ribs extending
a major portion of, but not the entire dis-
tance, between said marginal rib and the 45
central portion of said record, the inner ends

of said transverse ribs being free from con-
tact except with said body portion.

In witness whereof, I have hereunto set
my hand this 2nd day of September, A. D., 50
1910.

CLAKENCE S. WICKES.

Witnesses :

Frank B. Middleton, Jr.,
Charles I. Willaed.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

Washington, D. C."

C. E. KENYON.

SOUND CONTROLLER FOR TALKING MACHINES.

APPLICATION PILED MAT 31, 1911.

QQQ Patented Apr. 22, 1913.

l,0Oy,y<J»^» 2i 2 SHEETS-SHEET 1.

6 INI/El^TOR

ATTORNEYS

COLUMBIA PUANOOBAPM CO.. WASHINOTON, U. C.

1,059,939.

C. E. KENTON.

SOUND CONTROLLER FOR TALKING MACHINES.

APPLICATION PILED MAT 31, 1911.

Patented Apr. 22, 1913.

2 SHEETS-SHEET 2.

-^

F^.^.

WITNESSES:

d9 30

INVENTOR
^^^ AffORNEYJ.

COLUMbIA PLANOGBAPH CO., WASHINQTON. D. C.

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

CHARLIE EMERY KENYON, OF NEWARK, NEW JERSEY.
SOUND-CONTROLLER FOR TALKING-MACHINES.

1,059,939.

Specification of letters Patent. Patented Apr. 22, 1913.

Application filed May 31, 1911. Serial No. 630,526.

To all whom it may concern :

Be it Imown that I, Charlie Emery Ken-
yon, citizen of the United States, and resi-
dent of Newark, county of Essex, and State
5 of New Jerse,y, have invented certain new
and useful Improvements in Sound-Con-
trollers for Talking-Machines, of which the
following is a specification, reference being
had to the accompanying drawing, forming

10 a part thereof, in which similar letters of
reference indicate corresponding parts.

This invention relates to sound control-
lers for phonographs and talking machines ;
the objects of the invention being to reduce

15 the unmusical scratching soimd produced
by the action of the needle as it moves over
the record; and to provide means for con-
trolling the volume of sound emitted from
the horn.

20 Phonographs when operated in small
rooms generally emit such a large volume
of soimd as to produce harshness, and there-
by mar the enjoyment of the listeners. This
is especially notable when band records or

25 records of \qvj powerful voices are em-
ployed. By the use of my invention the vol-
ume of sound emitted can be so nicely gradu-
ated and controlled as to make any record
adaptable for successful use in any sized

30 room. Moreover, it is susceptible of use in
connection with any type of phonograph
and tallring machine.

This invention will be hereinafter fully
described and specifically set forth in the

35 annexed claims.

In the accompanying drawings forming
part of this specification Figure 1, is a lon-
gitudinal sectional view of a phonograph
horn having my improved controller con-

40 nected thereto; Fig. 2, a cross sectional view
taken on the line 2 — 2 of Fig. 1; Fig. 3, a
vertical sectional view of a cabinet, or horn-
less variety of phonograph, having my im-
proved controller inserted therein; Fig. 4,

45 a sectional plan view taken on the line 4 — 4
of Fig. 3: Fig. 5, a similar view, drawn on
an enlarged scale, and illustrating a modi-
fied means for operating the controller;
Fig. 6, a perspective view of a plug for at-

50 taching the device ; Fig. 7, a side view of one
end of the device showing a modification of
valve operating means; Fig. 8, an end view
thereof ; and Fig. 9, is a longitudinal sec-
tional view illustrating a further modifica-

55 tion.

As illustrated in Figs. 1 and 2, of the
drawings, the device embodies a cylinder 1,
having an integral head 2, and an open
ended, inwardly extended contracted part 3,
which engages within an annular recess of go
a hollow plug 4 ; this plug fits snugly within
the horn, as A, and holds the device in
place. Leading peripherally through the
device is an annular series of slots 5, and
openings 6, through which the sound waves 65
pass laterally and are discharged into the
horn A. All of the said parts ai*e composed
of elastic rubber.

Normally seated within a bevel-edged
opening of the head 2 of the cylinder 1, is 70
a valve 7 ; this valve forms an integral part
of said head and it is joined at 8, a i*ib 9,
being employed to stiffen the joint and
maintain the valve in closed position.

When the device is composed of rubber 75
the valve 7, is held normally closed by its
own resiliency; but I do not confine myself
to the use of rubber, as other non-resonant
material, as compressed fiber or wood, may
be employed. When such material is used 80
the valve, as 9, Fig. 9, of the drawings em-
bodies a separate part which is connected
to the cylinder head by means of a hinge 10,
closed position of the valve being main-
tained by means of a suitable spring, as 11. 85

As a means for operating the valve 7, I
employ an eccentric cam 12, which is mount-
ed on a horizontal rod 13 ; this rod extends
through one side of the horn A, and is
journaled in bearings 14, which are formed 90
integral with the cylinder 1 ; a knob 15, is
attached to the outer end of said rod 13, to
be employed as a means for turning the
same. When the \ alve for discharging
sound into the horn is composed of elastic 95
rubber a coating of fabric IG, see Fig. 2.
of the drawings, is placed thereon to reduce
friction against the cam 12, whereby said
cam may be easily operated.

In Figs. 7 and 8, of the drawings, I have lOO
illustrated a cylinder head having a plu-
rality of valves 17, engaging outlet open-
ings 18. These are of differential propor-
tion, and are to be opened successively, the
largest when a full volume of sound is re- 105
quired, and the smallest when a light vol-
ume of sound is desirable. Each of said
valves is connected to an operating lever 19,
which is piloted to a bearing 20, each lever
being operable by means of cams 21, form- 110

1,059,939

ing part of a cam wheel 22, which is mount-
ed on a shaft 23, journaled in bearings 24,
which are secured to the cylinder head.
When the invention is used in a cabinet,
5 or hornless variety of phonograph, a square
plug is fitted to the inlet of the recess 26,
for the purpose of holding the device in
place, and the rod 13, is extended laterally
through the side walls of the cabinet. Or

,10 the rod 13, may have a bevel-gear wheel 28,
on the outer end thereof which engages a
similar Avheel 29, mounted on the inner end
of an operating rod 30, which extends
through the rear wall of the cabinet. The

15 cabinet may have grilled doors 27, for dis-
charging the sound, whereby it is not neces-
sary to open them when the phonograph is
being operated.

In the operation and use of the invention,

20 the controller being placed in communica-
tion with the sound-inlet part of the horn
or other ejector, as shown in the drawings,
it is simply necessary for an operator of
the phonograph to open and close the valve

25 or valves, in accordance with the vohune of
sound required, by the simple act of turn-
ing the knob 15, in one direction to open,
and in the other to close the valves.

When the valves are entirely closed a

30 minimum of sound is ejected into the horn
through the slots 5 and openings 6, and
when they are fully opened a full volume of
sound is attained; the operator can also
cause any desired intermediate degree of

35 sound to be emitted by a differential ad-
justment of the valves.

I do not confine myself to the specific
means for operating the valve, as herein
shown; for instance a chord B, see Fig. 9

40 of the drawings, may be attached to the
valve and led through the horn to any point
handy for the operator.

Having thus described my invention,
what I claim as new, and desire to secure

45 by Letters Patent, is:

1. A sound controller for talking ma-
chines comprising a non-resonant compart-
ment embodying an outer head part and an
inwardly extended open ended and contract-

50 ed part, having an annular series of soimd-
outlet openings leading therethrough, and
a sound-outlet opening leading through said
head, and a spring actuated valve normally
closing said opening, and a rod and cam for

55 operating said valve, substantially as shown
and described.

2. A sound controller for talking ma-
chines, comprising ^ non-resonant compart-
ment embodying an outer head part and an

60 inwardly extended open ended contracted
part, said contracted part having an annu-
lar series of sound-outlet openings leading
therethrough, and said head part having a

sound-outlet opening leading centrally
therethrough, and a valve normally closing 65
said opening, and means for operating said
valve, substantially as shown and described.

3. A sound controller for talking ma-
chines, comprising a non-resonant compart-
ment, composed of elastic material and em- 70
bodying an outer head part and an inwardly
extended open-ended contracted part, hav-
ing an annular series of elongated sound-
outlet openings leading through its periph-
eral wall, and a sound-outlet opening lead- 75
ing through said head, and a valve formed
integral with said head and normally clos-
ing said sound-outlet opening, and means
for operating said valve, substantially as
shown and described. 80

-4. A sound controller for talking ma-
chines, comprising a non-resonant compart-
ment embodying an outer head part hav-
ing a sounci-outlet opening therethrough,
and a spring actuated valve normally clos- 85
ing said opening, and an inwardly extended
open ended contracted part having annu-
larly arranged cylindrical outlet openings
and annularly arranged elongated openings
leading therethrough, and means for oper- 90
ating the spring actuated valve, substan-
tially as shown and described.

5. The combination, Avith a phonograph
sound-outlet part, of a controller compris-
ing a compartment embodying a head and 95
a cylindrical part said part having a con-
tracted extension open at its inner end, and
having an annular series of peripheral open-
ings, and an opening leading through said
head, and a normally closed spring actuated lOO
valve within said opening, and a cam and
rod for operating said vah^e, substantially

as shown and described.

6. A sound controller for talking ma-
chines, comprising a non-resonant compart- i05
ment embodying an outer head part hav-
ing a sound-outlet opening leading there-
through, and a spring actuated valve nor-
mally closing said opening, and an inwardly
extended open ended contracted part having lio
an annular series of sound-outlet openings
leading peripherally therethrough, and a
hollow plug of non-resonant material, said
plug having an annular recess therein which
engages the inner end of said contracted 115
part, and means for operating the said
valve, substantially as shown and described.

In testimony that, I claim the foregoing
as my invention, I have signed my name in
presence of two witnesses, this twenty sec- 120
ond day of May, A. D. 1911.

CHARLIE EMERY KENYON.

Witnesses :

Edwahd Markhoff,
August J. Chambosse.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents.

■Washington, D, C,"

H. W. QUADE.

ATTACHMENT FOR SOUND EEPBODDCING MACHINES.

APPLICATION FILED MAT 1, 1912.

1,060,209.

Patented Apr. 29, 1913.

P^

ia.5

i

SWU-^

o m/ /'UU^

?"5

Iq-4".

,^^

s^

^-^W-

^^'

^

3tVUC4VtoT

cS-y

OrtotMC'yJ

COLUMBIA PLANOGUAPH CO.. WASHINGTON. D. I

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

HENRY W. QI7ADE, OF HANCOCK, MISSOURI.
ATTACHMENT FOR SOUND-REPRODUCING MACHINES.

1,060,209.

Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Apr. 39, 1 913.

Application filed May 1, 1912. Serial No. 694,343.

To all li'hom it may concern:

Be it known that I, Henry W. Quade,
a citizen of the United States, residing at
Hancock, in the count}- of Pulaski and State
5 of Missouri, have invented certain new and
useful Iniprovenients in Attachments for
Sound-Keproducing Machines, of which tlie
following is a specification.

This invention relates essentially to im-

10 provements in sound reproducing instru-
ments, its primary object being to provide
an attachment which may be easily applied
to the ordinary con.st ructions of phono-
graphs, or the like, for the purpose of in-

15 tensifying the sound vibrations and thereb}^
permitting the use of a non-metallic needle
so as to pre\ent wear, or injury to the rec-
ords to be reproduced.

I am aware that it has heretofore been

20 proposed to use a wooden or nonmetallic
needle in this connection and such has been
done at the sacrifice of the necessary volume
or amplitude of sound which has been pro-
duced by steel needles now in common use.

25 I have found from actual practice that my
invention will not onh^ play the records
with as good or even better definition than
the steel needle which in time practically
destroys or injures the quality of the re-

30 production but there is no tendency to blur
the sound as results in the use of a non-
metallic needle in the usual manner.

It has therefore been my object, and I
believe I am the first to employ the combi-

35 nation of a sound intensifj^ing member in-
terposed between the usual sound box, and
a non-metallic needle to accomplish the re-
sult which is now obtained by using me-
tallic or "hard" styli, whereby wear and

40 tear on the records are eliminated advan-
tageously.

Still a further object of my invention lies
in the peculiar resilient mounting of the
needle on the attachment, whereby it may

45 be easily and quickly removed for repoint-
ing or reversing, as well as permitting flexi-
bility of said needle in any direction, there-
by preventing the point of a needle from
being knocked off, as it travels through the

60 irregularities of the groove of the record,
it being understood that the vibrations of
the record are transmitted through the
needle thus mounted to the vibratory mem-
ber and thence to the sound box through the

85 needle arm in the customary manner.

For a full understanding of the present

invention, reference is to be had to the fol-
lowing detail description and to the accom-
panying drawings, in which—

Figure 1 is a view in elevaticm of the qq
low'er portion of the reproducing mechanism
of a phonograpli, showing mj^ attach-
ment in position for use in reproducing
particularly disk records. Fjg. 2 is a front
elevation of my attachment alone, showing 55
more clearly the resilient mounting of the
needle thereon. E'ig. 3 is an end elevation
of said attachment. Fig. 4 is a bottom plan
of the attachment plate showing a modified
form of mounting the needle tlierein. Fig. 70
5 is a to]D plan view of the attachment as
shown in Fig. 2.

Thfoughout the following detail descrip-
tion and on the several figures of the draw-
ings, similar parts are referred to by like 75
reference characters.

Eef erring to the drawings and specificallj'^
describing my invention, A designates a nee-
dle arm of a phonogi-aph, such as is in ordi-
nary use, connecting at its upper extremity 80
with the diaphragm carried by the sound
box B. The arm A is provided with the
usual recess in its lower portion into which
the needle may be inserted and held in posi-
tion by means of a set screw 1. I take 85
advantage of this construction so that it is
absolutely unnecessary to change the struc-
ture or add any other detail to the machine
to permit of the employment of my device,
which consists of a vibratory member pref- 90
erably in the form of a flat or thin plate
2, provided at its upper central portion
with the integi^al shank 3 which is adapted
to be inserted in the needle arm wdiere the
needle is ordinarily held. The particular 95
function of the member 2 is to intensify the
sound transmitted thereto from the record
by the stylus or needle and it is therefore
made of any hard substance, such for in-
stance as steel, hard wood, cane, bamboo, 100
metal, bone, glass, oyster shell, ivqry, am-
ber, or other compositions or combination.s
of material, and the shape of the plate de-
pending somewhat upon the material used.
However, it has been found from practice 105
that the material used in the manufacture of
pearl buttons, produces the best results. As
this plate may be constructed in many ways
and various means for holding the stylus
may be used, only a preferred construction 110
is described which involves the use of a
pair of spring members of similar construe-

s

1,060,209

tion secured at one end, in spaced relation,
to the face of the plate 2 in any desired
manner, as by means of rivets, screws, or the
like. Such springs are designated in the
5 drawings by 4, being arranged horizontally
and are formed at their free ends with the
vertical or elongated gripping members 5,
the springs aforesaid being raised or bent
from the surface of the plate 2, as most

10 clearly seen in Fig. 5.

At 6 is designated the stylus or needle
which is preferably made in my construction
of hard wood, as distinguished from the
flexible wooden or fiber needles at present in

1^ use and directly connected with the needle
arm. The needle 6 being heavy or non-
flexible intensifies and transmits the vibra-
tions to the plate 2 interposed between said
needle and the arm without loss of power

^^ and the springs 4 between which it is in-
serted hold it flexibly to preserve its point.
The hard substance from which the plate 2
is made vibrates so easily that practically
the full poAver of the vibrations is trans-
mitted to the diaphragm of the sound box.
I have illustrated the particular forin of
needle in the drawings as triangiilar in
shape and one side of which rests against
the plate while the springs 4 rest against the
needle on its other sides, as shown in Fig. 2,
the needle being frictionally held by means
of tension of the springs which permit it
to yield in anj' direction.

In Fig. 4, I have shown the body or plate
2 as provided with a wedge-shaped slot and
into this slot the needle may be advanta-
geously held for the purposes of this inven-
tion. Wlien the needle is thus held, it is

preferable that the shank 3^ be secured to a
flexible spring member 4^ intermediate the 40
ends of the latter, screws 5^ passing through
the opposite ends of said spring and into
the vibratory member 2^. This allows the
needle point some freedom of movement.

Having thus described the invention, what 45
is claimed as new is:

1. In combination, an attachment for
sound reproducing machines consisting of a
flat body and a shank, a sound box to which
the attachment is detachably connected, a 50
needle adapted to rest against the body, and
spring means secured to the body adapted

to frictionally hold the needle thereagainst.

2. An attachment for sound reproducing
machines consisting of a flat body and a 55
shank, a needle adapted to rest against the
body, and spaced spring members secured

at one end to the body and adapted to re-
ceive therebetween the needle aforesaid,
whereby the latter may yield in any direc- SO
tion.

3. An attachment for soimd reproducing
machines consisting of a flat body and a
shank, a needle adapted to rest against the
body, and spaced horizontal spring members 65
secured at one end to the body and formed
with elongated vertically disposed gi'ipping
members between which the needle aforesaid

is adapted to be yieldably held.

In testimony whereof I affix my signature "^
in presence of two witnesses.

HENRY W. QUADE.

Witnesses :

M. O. Mitchell,
Arthur Alexander.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

Washington, D. C."

1,060,235.

[som

W. N. DENNIJ

TALKING MACHINE.
APPLICATION FILED MAE. 8, 1906.

Patented Apr. 29, 1913.

3 SHEETS-SHEET 1.

^IV-i/fcvpeaaeo

33y / </701l^

3-ti:0«144^

COLUMBIA PLANOORAPH CO., WASHINGTON. O. C.

1,060,235.

W. N. DENNISON..

TALKING MACHINE.
APPLIOATION FILED MAE. 8, 1906.

Patented Apr. 29, 1913.

3 SHEETS-SHEET 2.

^^^'y^ y

WITNESSES

ATTORNEY.

COLDMBIA PLANOGRAPH CO.. WASHINGTON. U. C

1,060,235.

W. N. DENNISON.

TALKING MACHINE,

APPLICATION PILED MAK.8, 1906.

Patented Apr. 29, 1913.

3 SHEETS-SHEET 3.

.^y^-c^-O.

J9 ^^

^:^y^' ^o.

j^^g. /^.

WITNESSES:

^^Q-CtAAAAy^

INVENTOR

Br

/

ATTORNEY.

COLUMBIA PUWCMRAPH CO.. WASHINOTON, D. C.

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

WILBURN N. DENNISON, OF MERCHANTVILLE, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR TO VICTOR
TALKING MACHINE COMPANY, A CORPORATION OF NEW JERSEY,

TALKING-MACHINE.

1,(K50,235.

Specification of letters Patent. Patented Apr. 39, 1913.

Application filed March 8, 1906. Serial No. 304,836.

To all whom it may concern:

Be it known that I, Wilbuen N. Denni-
sox, a citizen of the United States, and a
resident of the borough of Merchantville,
5 State of Xew Jerse}', have invented certain
new and useful Improvements in Talking-
Machines, of which the following is a full,
clear, and com.plete disclosure.

This invention relates to talking machines

10 of the ty|)e commonly known as pneumatic,
and in which sound waves are impressed
upon a fluid current by means cooperating
with a sound record.

The main objects of this invention are, to

15 provide an improved pneumatic talking ma-
chine, simple and durable in construction
and highly efficient in operation; to pro-
vide in a pneumatic talking machine an im-
proved sound box or sound reproducer, and

20 an improved mounting therefor; to provide
in a pneumatic, sound box an improved
valve and means for balancing the same; to
provide in a iDueumatic sound box means for
delicately and accurately controlling the

25 flow of a fluid current therethrough; and to
provide other improvements as will appear
hereinafter.

In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1
is a fragmentary perspective view of a talk-

30 ing machine constructed in accordance with
this invention; Fig. 2 a fragmentary cen-
tral sectional view of a portion of the same;
Fig. 3 a fragmentai-y end view of an im-
proved sound box forming part of this in-

35 vention; Fig. 4 a sectional view taken on
the line 4 — 4 of Fig. 3; Fig. 5 a sectional
view taken on line 5 — 5 of Fig. 3; Fi^. 6
a perspective view .showing parts of the
same separated from each other; Fig. 7 an

4 0 end view of a detail of the sound box; Figs.
8 and 9 are perspective views of details of
the same; Figs. 10 and 11 are elevations of
details of a modified form of this invention;
and Fig. 12 is an enlarged sectional view of

45 the parts illustrated in Figs. 10 and 11,
assembled in operative relation.

Referring to the drawings, one embodi-
ment of this invention comprises a cabinet
20, upon Avhich is mounted the usual or any

50 suitable turn-table 21, for cai-ryihg the usual
or any suitable sound record 22, the turn-

table being rotated by the usual driving
mechanism (not shown), mounted in the
cabinet 20.

Projecting rearwardly and upwardly from 55
the cabinet 20 is a bracket 23, secured to the
upper end of which and projecting in-
wardly therefrom is a horizontal ring or
annular support, 23'. Depending from the
ring 23', is the larger end of a tapering hoi- 60
low sound box arm or tone arm 24, which
is mounted to swing in a horizontal plane
about a vertical pivot 24', carried by the
outer portion of the bracket 23 and engag-
ing the under portion of the larger end of 65
the tone arm. Projecting upwardly from
the ring 23', and carried thereby, is a sound
amplifj'ing horn 25, communicating with
the tone arm 24.

For supporting a sound box in communi- 70
cation with the smaller free end of the tone
arm 24, and for supplying the sound box
with a fluid current, the smaller end of the
tone arm terminates in a transverse tubu-
lar horizontal connection or support 27, 75
rigidly secured thereto. The free end of
the tone arm 24 is open and registers with
an opening provided therefor through the
wall of the transverse tubular support 27.
Projecting laterally in opposite directions 80
from the ends 27' and 27" of the support 27,
are two U-shaped oppositely disposed tubes,
28 and 29, the inner ends of Avhich are co-
axial with the tubular support 27, and the
outer ends of which are coaxial with and 85
firmly attached to the opposite ends respec-
tively of a sound box 30. One, 28, of these
U-shaped tubes forms a supply tube for the
sound box 30, and the other, 29, U-shaped
tube forms a discharge pipe for the sound 90
box. The U-shaped supply tube 28 commu-
nicates with a supply pipe 31, which ex-
tends rearAvardly from the tubular sup-
port 27 substantially jiarallel to the sound
box arm 24. The front end of the supply 95
pipe 31 is open and is secured in an opening
provided therefor in the wall of the tubular
support 27, this end of the pipe 31 being
flush with the inner surface of the support
27. The rear portion of the supply pipe 31 lOO
is rigidly secured to the larger end of the
tone arm 24, curves downwardly, and termi-

1,060,235

nates in communication with a piece of rub-
ber or other flexible tubing 31', secured
thereto and by wliich it is connected to a
suitable fluid compressor or other source of
5 fluid supply (not shown).

For connecting the U-shaped tubes 28 and
29 rotatably to the tubular support 27, the
inner poi'tion of the U-shaped tube 29, form-
ing the discharge passage between the sound

10 box and the tone arm, is reduced in diame-
ter and is extended entirely through the
tubular support 27, fitting snugly but ro-
tatably therein, and held against longitudi-
nal movement therein by means of a col-

16 lar 31", threaded over the projecting end of
the U-shaped tube 29 and abutting against
the adjacent end of the tubular support 27,
and a collar 31'" surrounding the reduced
portion of the U-shaped tube 29 and en-

20 gaging upon its outer side against the
shoulder between the reduced inner portion
of the U-shaped tube 29 and its main por-
tion, and upon its inner side against the
adjacent end of the tubular support 27.

25 The inner end of the U-shaped tube 28
abuts against the inner end of the U-shaped
discharge tube 29, and is rigidly connected
thereto by means of a short tube, one end,
32, of which is closed and fits snugly with-

30 in the end of the U-shaped discharge tube
29, and the other end of which is open and
fits snugly in the inner end of the U-shaped
supply tube 28. The closed end 32 of this
short tube is arranged between the free end

35 of the tone arm 24 and the adjacent end of
the supply pipe 31, dividing the interior
of the tubular support 27 into two cham-
bers, 32' and 32", one, 32', of which com-
municates with the adjacent end of the sup-

40 ply pipe 31 through a substantially circu-
lar opening through the cylindrical walls
of the short tube 32 and containing tube
29, which registers with a corresponding-
opening leading through the tubular sup-

45 port 27, when the sound box is in operative
position. The other, 32", of these chambers
communicates with the open free end of
the tone arm 24 through a substantially
circular opening provided through the c^r-

50 lindrical wall of the U-shaped tube 29,
which registers with the opening in the end
of the tone arm 24 when the sound box is
in operative position. By this construction
the sound box 30 is free to oscillate in a

55 vertical plane about the longitudinal axis

of the tubular support 27, and also may

swing laterally across the record about the

vertical pivot 24' of the tone arm 24.

One form of pneumatic sound box con-

^^ structed in accordance Avith this invention
comprises (see Figs. 3 to 9) a cylindrical
casing 33, open at its inner end and closed
at its outer end, and provided at its closed
end with a projecting tubular portion 34,

*^ coaxial therewith and telescoping tightly

70

75

80

90

within the outer end of the U-sha]3ed sup-
ply tube 28 and forming an inlet for the
sound box when the sound box is in opera-
tion.

For spreading and distributing the fluid
current in the sound box, there is arranged
Avithin the casing 33, and coaxial therewith,
a conical deflector 35, the apex of which
faces toward the inlet of the sound box
formed by the tubular projection 34. This
conical deflector is slightly less in diameter
than the internal diameter of the casing 33,
and is mounted upon a stud 36, coaxial
therewith and projecting inwardly there-
from, and the inner end of which is sup-
ported by a spider comprising arms 37, pro-
jecting radially from the stud 36, and the
outer ends of which are integral with or
secured to a cyliiidrical ring 38^whioh-fi4s-
snugly within the int^noroi tHeIcasing.3j3._g5

For filtering the fluid current as it passes
through the sound box, and for equalizing
its pressure, there is provided a foraminated
diaphragm 40, preferably consisting of a
piece of closely woven silk fabric, tliejnar-
gin of which is clamped between the inner
cylindrical surf ace of the ring 38, support^
ing the deflector 35, and the outer cylindri-,
cal surface of a second cylindrical ring' 39,
telescoping thereio, the rear edges of the 95
two'rmgs being preferably flush.

The opeh'"enH oF'tKe' casing 33 is re-
duced externally in diameter and the re-
duced portion is provided with screw
threads 41, which engage corresponding in- 100
ternal threads of a cap or cover 42. The
cap or cover is provided with a cylindri-
cal tubular extension 43, projecting out-
Avardly therefrom, coaxial therewith, and of
less diameter than the cap, and which tele- 105
scopes tightly within the U-shaped dis-
charge tube 29, forming an outlet for the
sound box.

For impressing sound waves on a fluid cur-
cent passing through the sound box, there is 11a
provided a flat circular valve seat 44, which
is arranged coaxiallj^ with and in a plane
perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the
sound box, and between the diaphragm 40
and the inner surface of the cover 42. The 115
marginal portion of this valve seat is
clamped in an annular internal groove pro-
vided therefor between the sound box cas-
ing 33 and its cover 42. The valve seat is
held in a predetermined position with re- 120
spect to the cover by means of a positioning
pin 45, projecting through and rigidly se-
cured to the valve seat and engaging in an
opening 47 in the inner side of the cover,
and the valve seat is thus prevented from 125
rotating with respect to the cover as the
cover is being, rotated into position upon,
or is being remoA^ed from, the casing 33.

The valve seat 44 is provided centrally
with one or more openings or ports. When 130

1,060,235

a plurality of ports are used, they may be
in the form of a series of parallel narrow
slits or openings 51, which preferably extend
over an area someAvhat greater than the
5 transverse sectional area of the opening
through the tubular extension 43 forming
the outlet of the sound box, for a purpose
hereinafter explained.

Cooperating with the -valve seat 44, and

10 between the valve seat and the adjacent in-
ner surface of the cover 42 of the sound box
casing, is a valve 52, Avhich is actuated by a
stylus bar 50, actuated by a stylus 50', which
engages in the usual socket 62 of the stylus

15 bar and which is held in place therein, as
usual, b}^ a set-screw 62', and which coop-
erates with a sound record 22, as described
hereinafter. The valve 52 is preferably in
the form of a thin, flat plate or sheet of

20 nietal, preferably flexible, in which is ar-
ranged a series of slits or openings 53, simi-
lar to the openings 51 in the valve seat 44,
and so arranged that Avhen the A^alve is in
operative position the bridges between the

25 openings of the one register with and nor-
mally cover the openings of the other. To
provide a suitable space to receive the valve
and the stylus bar, the inner surface of the
cover 42 is provided with a shallow recess

30 or depressed portion 42', adapted to receive
the valve, and in which is located a recess 48
extending radially Avith respect to tlie cover
and adapted to receive the inner end of the
stjdus bar 50 and communicating with a ra-

35 dially extending opening 49 through the cy-
lindrical wall of the cover, and through
which the stylus bar projects outwardly
from the sound box casing.

For securing the stylus bar 50 to the valve

40 52, the valve is preferably provided with a
lug 54, brazed or otherwise secured thereby,
and provided with an aperture 55, within
Avhich the inner end of the stylus bar 50 is
snugly fitted and also secured bj'- a set-screw

45 56 extending through the lug and engaging
the stjdus bar.

The stylus bar 50 is mounted to oscillate
upon a tension spring 57, which passes trans-
versely through the stylus bar and Avhieh is

50 provided at its opposite ends with ears 58,
which are secured to the valve seat 44 by
means of screws threaded aiB at 59 into the
valve seat, thus securing the spring 57 to
the valve seat.

55 To prevent displacement of the valve in
its OAvn plane, there is attached to the valve
seat a screw 60, which passes through an
opening 60' provided thei-efor in the valve,
and to hold the valve yieldingly against its

60 seat the screw 60 may be provided with a
head and a spring or rubber washer 61 may
be interposed between the head of the screw
and the outer surface of the valve. ^Vlien
the stylus bar is oscillated by cooperation

63 with the sound record, the valve will be

flexed between the tension spring 57, upon
which it is mounted, and the outer end of
the valve, the flexed portion being slightly
lifted from its seat and permitting the fluid
current to pass through the valve. The 79
screw 60 and washer 61 may, however, be
dispensed with and the valve be permitted to
vibrate freely upon the tension spring 57.

In the above described construction the
inner surface of the cover 42 is spaced from 75
the opposite outer surface of the valve 52
only a sufficient distance to permit of the
free oscillation of the valve, and to provide
a narrow passage for the fluid current be-
tween the valve and the wall of the cover, gg
In practice the distance between the valve
and the adjacent wall of the cover, when the
valve is in contact with its seat, is prefer-
ably only about 3/1000 of an inch. The ob-
ject of this construction is to trap air pass- 35
ing between the valve and the cover to form
a cushion for the valve, thus obviating the
use of springs or other mechanical devices
for balancing the valve, the construction of
the valve seat, valve and other parts of the qq
sound box being identical in otlier respects
with the construction hereinbefore described.

Instead of forming the openings or ports
in the valve seat and valve, as hereinbefore
described, concentric openings maj^ be pro- 95
video! in the valve seat and corresponding
concentric openings provided in the valve, so
that the bridges between the openings in one
of these members will cover the openings in
the other member when the two members are jqq
in operative position. (See Figs. 10, 11
and 12.)

In the operation of any of the several
forms of this invention hereinbefore de-
scribed, air or any ether suitable fluid is xo5
conducted through the flexible tube 31',
supply pipe 31, chamber 32' and curA'ed
supply tube 28 into the interior of the sound
box casing 33, where the air impinges against
the convex surface of the conical deflector no
35, by which it is spread and directed to-
ward the cylindrical wall of the sound box
casing. The air then passes between the
cylindrical wall of the sound box casing
and the outer edge of the deflector 35 and 115
is delivered radially inwardly against the
diaphragm or screen 40, striking the outer
portions of the screen first. The air then
passes through the screen 40 into the open-
ings or ports 51 in the valve seat 44. The 120
deflector 35 therefore acts in cooperation
with the screen 40 to insure a uniform dis-
tribution of the air through the ports of
the valve seat. If some such provision were
not made for spreading or distributing the 125
air in the sound box, the air would impinge
directl}^ upon the inner side of the valve
seat and would pass through the various
openings in the valve seat and valve at
varying speed, more air passing through the 130

1,060,235

10

15

20

middle of the valve than through the outer
portions thereof. After passing through
the valve seat, some of the air then passes
through the corresponding openings 53 of
the valve ; the remaining portion of the air,
however, passing through the space between
the valve seat and the valve as the valve is
oscillated and flexed, and around the mar-
gin of the valve and between the valve and
the inner surface of the cover 42. The por-
tion of the air which passes through the
central portion of the valve will continue
directly out through the tubular outlet 43
of the soxmd box, and the portions of the
air which pass around the valve or through
the outer openings of the valve will first
be deflected by the inner surface of the
cover 42 to cuslaion the valve, and will then
pass out through the tubular outlet 43 of
the sound box, mingling with the air that
has passed through the central portion of
the valve. From the tubular outlet 43 of
the sound box, the air passes through the
U-shaped discharge tube 29 and through the

25 circular opening in the inner portion of the
tube and into the tone arm 24, from whence
it is delivered from the device through the
amplifier 25. It is therefore evident that
the amount of air which is permitted to pass

30 through the sound box will be constantly
variecl by the oscillations of the valve, actu-
ated when in operation by the stylus bar
and stylus oscillated in accordance with a
sound record, and that vibrations corre-

35 spending to the sound waves recorded on
the record will be set up in the air passing
through the sound box by this oscillation of
the valve. It is also evident that the sound
box may be inverted from an operative po-

40 sition with its stylus in contact with a
record, into an inoperative position whei-e
it will rest upon the free end of the tone
arm 24, and that by thus inverting the
sound box, the opening in the free end of the

45 tone arm 24 and the opening in the corre-
sponding adjacent end of the supply pipe
will be closed and the flow of current
through the sound box will be stopped.
This inversion of the sound box therefore

50 effects the double function of moving the
sound box into an inoperative position, and
of stopping the flow of the fluid current
therethrough, or, in other words, when the
sound box is inverted into an inoperative

55 position, the flow of the fluid current
through the sound box is automatically
stopped and a waste of power is prevented.
This invention is not limited in its ap-
plication to the particular construction

60 hereinbefore described, but may be applied
in other forms to meet various conditions,
without departing from the spirit of this
invention or the scope of the appended
claims.

65 Having thus described my invention,

what I claim and desire to protect by Let-
ters Patent of the United States is :

1. In a sound box, the combination with
means for convejdng a fluid, of a valve for
producing sound waves in said fluid, and
means for causing said fluid to balance said
valve.

2. In a sound box, the combination with a
vibratory valve, of means for conveying a
fluid through said valve, means for vibrat-
ing said valve in accordance with sound
waves, and means for causing the fluid per-
mitted to pass through the valve to balance
said valve.

3. The combination in a sound box pro-
vided with an inlet opening forming a valve
port, and with an outlet opening, and a de-
pression surrounding said outlet opening, of
a valve located between said openings and
within said depression, covering said inlet
port and having its outlet side in close prox-
imity to the Avail of said depression, where-
by part of the fluid passing through said
port will be deflected to balance said valve.

4. In a sound box, the combination with a
casing providing means for convejdng a
fluid and having an outlet, of a valve hav-
ing a plurality of passages for fluid, said
valve being located close to the wall of said
casing and over said outlet, and means to
actuate said valve in accordance with sound
waves, the area of the portion of said valve
containing said passages being greater than
the area of said outlet.

5. In a sound box, the combination with a
casing provided with an outlet, of a valve
seat provided with a series of openings lo-
cated adjacent one side of said casing and
in alinement with said openings, a movable
valve located between said valve seat and
said side of said casing and just out of
contact with said side, and means to actuate
said valve in accordance with sound waves,
the construction being such that when the
fluid is passed through said openings, some
of the fluid will be deflected by the said
side of said casing to balance said valve.

6. In a sound box, the combination with a
hollow casing for conveying a fluid, of a
valve arranged to impress sound waves upon
said fluid, and means for deflecting the fluid
toward the inner walls of said casing before
permitting the fluid to pass into contact with
said valve.

T. In a sound box, the combination with a
hollow casing for conveying a fluid, of a
valve for impressing sound waves on said
fluid, means for actuating said valve in ac-
cordance with a sound record, and means for
deflecting said fluid toward the inner walls
of said casing before said fluid is permitted
to pass into contact with said valve.

8. In a sound box, the combination with a
hollow casing for conveying a fluid, of
means for impressing sound waves upon

70

75

80

85

90

95

100

105

110

115

120

125

130

1,060,235

said fluid, and tapering means arranged to
deflect said fluid toward the inner walls of
said casing before said fluid is permitted to
pass iato contact with the said first men-
5 tioned means.

9. A sound box provided with a passage
for a fluid, said passage terminating in op-
positely disposed openings, means inter-
posed in said passage between said openings

^Q and substantially coaxial with said joassage
and tapering longitudinally thereof for de-
flecting said fluid, and means to impress
sound waves upon said fluid.

10. In a sound box, the combination with
15 a casing having an inlet and an outlet and

providing a conduit connecting said inlet
and said outlet, of means for impressing
sound waves upon a fluid passing through
said conduit, and means for causing said
20 fluid to be deflected away from the central
portion of said conduit.

11. In a sound box, the combination with
a hollow casing provided with an inlet and
with an outlet, of a deflector located in said

25 casing for directing a fluid against the walls
of said casing, and means for impressing
sound waves on said fluid.

12. In a sound box, the combination with
a hollow casing provided with an inlet and

30 with an outlet, of a deflector arranged in
said casing and tapering toward said inlet
for directing a fluid toward the inner walls
of said casing, and means for impressing
sound waves upon said fluid.

35 13. In a sound box, the combination with
a hollow casing provided with an inlet and
with an outlet and forming a conduit con-
necting said inlet and said outlet, of a de-
flector for directing a fluid toward the in-

40 ner walls of said conduit, and a valve be-
tween said deflector and said outlet for im-
pressing sound waves on said fluid.

14. In a sound box. the combination with
a casing provided with an inlet and with an

45 outlet and forming a conduit for a fluid con-
necting said inlet and said outlet, of a valve
adjacent said outlet for impressing sound
waves upon said fluid, and means in said
conduit between said valve and said inlet for

50 equalizing theflow of said fluid toward said
valve.

1."). In a sound box, the combination with
a casing providing a passage for a fluid and
having an inlet and an outlet, of a valve

55 provided with a plurality of openings and
arranged in said passage between said inlet
and said outlet for impressing sound waves
on said fluid, and means between said valve
and said inlet to distribute said fluid equally

60 through said openings.

16. In a sound box, the combination with
a casing providing a passage for a fluid, said
passage having an inlet and an outlet, of a
valve for impressing sound waves upon said

65 fluid, and means between said valve and said

inlet for deflecting said fluid outwardly to-
ward* the inner walls of said passage, and
then causing the same to be delivered to
said valve at substantially equal velocities.

IT. In a soimd box, the combination with ^q
a casing including two separable portions, of
a vah^e seat arranged between said portions
and dividing the interior of said casing into
a plurality of compartments, said seat being
provided with a pert, a valve arranged with- 75
in said casing to control said port, and
sound reproducing means mounted upon
said seat and arranged to vibrate said valve
in accordance with soimd waves.

18. In a sound box, the combination with jg
sound rej^roducing means, of a fluid deflector
and equalizer comprising an outer ring, an
inner ring, a screen having its edges clamped
between said rings, and a deflector secured

to said outer ring. gS

19. In a sound box for talking machines,
the combination with means for conveying
a fluid, of a flexible valve movably restricted
at spaced points and arranged to oscillate as

a whole about a predetermined axis, for im- 90
pressing vibrations corresponding to sound
waves upon said fluid, and means to flex and
to oscillate said valve in accordance with a
sound record.

20. A sound box for talking machines 95
comprising a stationary member, a flexible
valve cooperating with said stationary mem-
ber, jaelding means restraining said flexible
valve at spaced points, and sound reproduc-
ing means arranged to flex said flexible 100
valve between said points in accordance with

a sound record.

21. Sound reproducing means comprising
a relatively stationary member, a flexible
member movably secured to said stationary 105
member at spaced points and arranged to
flex between said points, and to oscillate as

a whole about a predetermined axis, and
means arranged to be 'actuated by a sound
record to flex said flexible member between no
said points and to oscillate said member
about said axis in accordance with said
record.

22. In a sound box, a stationary member
having an inlet valve i")ort, a valve covering 115
said port, means for vibrating said valve to
impress sound waves on a fluid passing
through said port, and means on the outlet
side of said valve for deflecting part of said
fluid after it has passed through said port, to 120
balance said valve.

23. In a sound box, the combination with
a casing provided with an outlet in one side
thereof, of a plate provided with an inlet
port opposite said side, a valve controlling 125
said port, and means to vibrate said valve

in accordance with a sound record, said
valve extending beyond the boundary of said
outlet into the space between the said side
and said port plate, and almost in contact 130

1,060,236

with the inner Avail of said side, Avhereby
when a fluid is forced through the said port,
part of the said fluid will he deflected after
it has passed through said port to balance
5 the said valve.

24. In a sound box, the combination with
a casing provided with a central outlet in
one side thereof, of a flat plate provided
with an inlet port opposite said outlet open-

XO irig ^hd a flat valve over said inlet port, and
means to vibrate said valve in accordance
with a sound record, said valve extending
beyond the boundary of said outlet into the
space between the said side and said port

15 plate, and almost in contact with the inner
wall of said side, whereby when a fluid is
forced through the said casing part of said
fluid will be deflected to balance the said
valve.

20 25. In a sound box, means for impressing
sound waves on a fluid, said means compris-
ing a stationary member, and a valve mount-
ed to oscillate about an axis adjacent one
end thereof and yieldingly secured adjacent

25 its opposite end to said stationary member.

26. In a sound box, means for impressing
sound waves on a fluid, said means compris-
ing a stationary member, and a flexible valve
mounted to oscillate about an axis located

30 adjacent one end thereof and yieldingly se-
cured adjacent its opposite end to said sta-
tionary member.

27. In a sound box, means for impressing
sound waves on a fluid, said means compris-

35 ing a stationary member, a valve mounted
upon said stationary member to oscillate
about an axis located adjacent one end of
said valve, and yielding means connecting
the opposite end of said valve to said sta-

40 tionary member.

28. In a sound box, means for impressing
sound waves on a fluid, said means compris-
ing a stationary member, a valve, a headed
projection passing through said valve and

45 carried by said stationary member, and a
yielding washer between the head of said
projection and said valve for holding said
valve yieldingly in position.

29. In a sound box, means for impressing
50 sound waves on a fluid, comprising a station-
ary member and a movable member, secured
at one end and having an adjustable .yield-
ing connection at its other end to the said
stationary member.

55 30. In a sound box, a valve comprising a
stationary member, having an aperture, and
a flexible movable member adapted to nor-
mally cover said aperture, said flexible
member being secured on opposite sides to

60 said stationary member, and means mounted
upon said stationary member to flex said
movable member in accordance with a sound
record to impress sound undulations upon a
fluid passing through said aperture.

65 31. A sound box for talking machines,

comprising a casing including two separable
portions united to form an internal groove,
a valve seat mounted in said groove, a valve
arranged to cooperate with said seat, and
means mounted upon said seat to actuate ^q
said valve in accorclance with a sound record.

32. A sound box for talking machines,
comprising a casing including two sejoarable
portions connected together to form an in-
ternal groove, a valve seat mounted in said 75
groove and provided with a port, a valve ar-
ranged to control said port, and means
mounted upon said seat for actuating said
A^alve in accordance with a sound record.

33. A sound box for talking machines, go
comprising a casing including two separable
portions united to form an internal groove,

a valve seat mounted in said groove and
provided with a port, a valve arranged in
said casing to control said port, and means 85
mounted to oscillate upon said seat and con-
nected to said valve to actuate said valve in
accordance with a sound record.

34. A sound box comprising two directly
connected separable portions, provided with 90
an internal groove between said portions, a
A^alve seat removably secured in said gTOove,
means for positioning said valve seat Avith
respect to said grooA^e Avhen the parts are
being assembled, and means secured to said 95
valve and projecting outwardly from said
sound box for actuating said valve in ac-
cordance with a sound record.

35. A sound box comprising two separable
portions provided with an internal groove 100
between said portions, a valve seat remoA^-
ably secured in said groove, a pin for posi-
tioning said vah'e seat with respect to said
groove when the parts are being assembled,
and a stylus bar rigidly secured to said valve 105
and projecting outwardly from said box for
actuating said valve in accordance Avith a
sound record.

36. In a sound box, the combination with
soimd reproducing means of an e(]'ualizer, 110
comprising an outer ring, an inner ring, and

a screen having its edges clamped between
said rings.

37. In a sound box, the combination with

a hollow casing, of sound reproducing means, 115
a deflector arranged in said casing, and
radial arms supporting said deflector.

38. In a sound box, the combination with
a hollow casing provided with an inlet and
with an outlet, of sound reproducing means, 120
a deflector arranged in said casing and taper-
ing toward said inlet, radial arms support-
ing said deflector, a ring supporting said
arms and carried by said casing, a ring
within said first-mentioned ring, and a 125
screen having its edges clamped between said
rings.

39. In a sound box, the combination with
a hollow casing having an inlet and an out-
let, of sound reproducing means arranged in 130

1,060,235

10

15

20

30

35

40

45

50

55

60

said casing, a deflector in said casing between
said sound reproducing means and said inlet,
and a screen between said sound reproducing
means and said deflector.

40. In a sound reproducer, the combina-
tion of a hollow body provided with an in-
let chamber having fiat parallel walls situ-
ated close together, a set of ports in one of
said walls, a valve for varying the extent of
opening of said ports, and means for vibrat-
ing said valve in accordance with sound
waves.

41. In a sound reproducer, the combina-
tion with a hollow body containing chambers
communicating through a port, of a stylus
bar carried by and mounted to oscillate with
respect to said body, and a plate of elastic
material carried by said bar and forming a
valve arranged to control said port.

42. In a sound reproducer, the combina-
tion with a casing containing chambers com-
municating through a port, of a plate of
elastic material seated over said port, yield-
ing means restraining said plate at spaced
points, and means arranged to flex said plate
between said points in accordance with sound
waves.

43. Sound reproducing means comprising
a valve seat provided with a port, a valve
arranged to control said port, and means
mounted upon said seat for actuating said
valve in accordance with a sound record.

44. Sound reproducing means comprising
a plate provided with a port, a valve ar-
ranged to control ^aid port, and oscillatory
means moinited upon said plate to actuate*
said valve in accordance with a sound
record.

45. In a soimd reproducer, the combina-
tion with a hollow body provided with
chambers communicating through a port,
of a plate of elastic material seated upon
said port, yielding means pressing on said
plate to force it toward a closed position,
and means for flexing said plate in accord-
ance with sound waves to vary the extent of
opening of said ]3ort.

46. A sound reproducer comprising a hol-
low casing, a valve seat provided with a
port and dividing the interior of said cas-
ing into two compartments communicating
through said port, a flexible valve arranged
in one of said compartments to control said
port, and means moimted upon said seat to
actuate said valve in accordance with a
soimd record.

47. In a sound reproducer, the combina-
tion of a body having a port, a plate of elas-
tic material seated over said port, yielding
means pressing on said plate, means for
varying the pressure of said yielding means,
and means for flexing said plate in accord-
ance with sound wa^es to vary the extent of
opening of said port.

90

95

48. In a sound box, the combination with 95
a valve seat provided Avith a port, of a flexi-
ble valve arranged to cooperate with said
seat, yielding means arranged to restrain
said valve at two points upon opposite sides
respectively of said port, ancl means ar- 70
ranged to flex said valve betAveen said points

in accordance with a sound record.

49. In a sound box, the combination with
a valve seat provided with a port, of a flexi-
ble valve arranged to cooperate with said 75
seat, and yielding means arranged to re-
strain said A'alve at tAvo points upon oppo-
site sides respectively of said port, and a
stylus bar connected to said valve and ar-
ranged to flex said valve between said first 80
mentioned points in accordance Avith a
sound record.

50. In a sound box, the combination Avith
n. casing provided with an outlet, of a mov-
able A^alve mounted in said casing adjacent 85
said outlet, said valve, being apertured OA^er
an area greater in extent than the trans-
A'erse sectional area of said outlet, and means

to actuate said valve in accordance with a
sound I'ecord.

51. In a soimd box, the combination with
a casing provided with an outlet, of a valve
extending in said casing adjacent said out-
let, the area bounded by the margin of said
A^alve being greater than the transverse sec-
tional area o^ said outlet, and means to ac-
tuate said A^alve in accordance with a sound
record.

52. In a sound box, the combination with

a valA'e seat provided with a port, of a vah^e 100
mounted to oscillate about an axis toward
and away from said seat and controlling
said port, means arranged to oppose the
moA;ement of said valve aAvay from said
seat at a point spaced from said axis, and 105
means to oscillate said valve in accordance
with sound Avaves, said port being arranged
between said axis and said point.

53. In a sound box, the combination with
a valve seat provided with a port, of a valve
mounted to oscillate about an axis toward
and away from said seat and controlling
said port, yielding means arranged to op-
pose the movement of said valve away from
said seat at a point spaced from said axis, 115
and means to oscillate said valve in accord-
ance with sound waA-es, said port being ar-
ranged between said axis and said point.

54. In a sound box. the combination Avith
m.eans proA'iding a passage for a fluid, of a
A-alA'e cooperating therewith for producing
sound Avaves in said fluid, said valve being
arranged to be balanced in its action by said
fluid. ^

55. In a sound box for talking machines,
the combination Avith means for conA'eying
a fluid, of a flexible oscillatory valve coop-
erating therewith, and means for oscillating

110

120

125

8

1,060,236

said valve as a whole about an axis in ac-
cordance "with a sound record for impressing
sound waves upon said fluid.

56. In a sound box, the combination with
5 a casing providing a passage for a fl\iid,said

passage having an inlet and an outlet, of a
valve arranged in said casing close to a wall
of said passage and in alinement with said
cutlet, the area of said valve being greater
IQ than the area of said outlet, and means to
vibrate said valve to produce sound waves.

57. In a sound box, the combination with
a casing providing- a passage for a fluid and
having an inlet and an outlet, of a valve

15 provided Avith a plurality of openings and
located in said casing adjacent said outlet
and close to a wall of said iDassage, the area
of the portion of said valve containing said
openings being greater than the area of said

20 outlet, and means to vibrate said valve to
produce sound waves.

58. In a sound box, |he combination with
a casing providing a passage for a fluid and
having an inlet and an outlet, of a A^alve seat

25 provided with a port arranged in said cas-
ing, a valve located between said seat and
said outlet and close to but spaced from a
wall of said casing, and means to vibrate
said valve to produce sound waves, the ar-

30 rangement being such that when a fluid is
forced through said valve seat some of said
fluid will be deflected by said wall to bal-
ance said valve.

59. In a sound box, the combination with
35 a casing providing a passage for a fluid, of

a 'vibratoi'y valve arranged in said casing
for impressing sound waves on said fluid,
means for vibrating said valve in accord-
ance with a sound record, and means ar-
40 ranged in said passage for deflecting the
fluid toward the walls of said passage 'be-
fore permitting the fluid to pass into con-
tact with said valve.

60. In a sound reproducer, the combina-
45 tion with a flexible valve yieldingly re-
strained at one point and mounted to oscil-
late as a Avhole about an axis spaced from
said point, of means arranged to oscillate
said valve about said axis by and in ac-

50 cordance with a sound record.

61. In a sound reproducer, the combina-
tion with a flexible valve yieldingly re-
strained at one point and mounted to oscil-
late as a whole about an axis spaced from

55 said point, of means arranged to flex said
valve between said point and said axis and
to oscillate said A^alve about said axis by
and in accordance with a sound record.

62. In a sound box, the combination with
60 sound reproducing means, of a fluid deflector

and equalizer comprising an outer ring, an
inner ring, a screen having its edges clamped
between said rings, and a conical deflector
secured to said outer ring.
65 63. In a sound box, the combination with

a hollow casing, of sound reproducing means
carried thereby, a deflector arranged in said
casing, a ring supporting said deflector and
carried by said casing, a second ring, and a
screen clamped between said rings. 70

64. In a sound box, the combination with
a hollow casing, of sound reproducing means
carried thereby, a ring removably mounted
in said casing, a deflector carried by said
ring, and a screen carried by said ring. 75

65. In a sound box, the combination with
a hollow casing provided with an inlet and
with an outlet, of sound reproducing means
arranged within said casing, a ring mounted

in said casing between said sound reproduc- go
ing means and said inlet, a deflector carried
by said ring, and a screen carried by said
ring.

66. In a sound box, the combination with

a hollow casing iDrovided with an inlet and 35
with an outlet, of sound reproducing means
arranged within said casing, a ring mounted
in said casing between said sound reprodu,c-
ing means and said inlet, a deflector carried
by said ring, and a screen carried by said 90
ring, said deflector tapering toward said
inlet.

67. In a sound box, the combination with
a hollow casing having an inlet and an out-
let, of sound reproducing means in said cas- 95
ing, a deflector in said casing between said
sound reproducing means and said inlet and
tapering toward said inlet, and a screen be-
tween said sound reproducing means and
said deflector. . ^qo
• 68. In a sound box, the combination with
means providing a passage for a fluid, of a
flexible valve cooperating therewith for pro-
ducing sound waves in said fluid, said valve
arranged to be balanced in its action by 105
said fluid.

69. In a sound box, the combination with
a valve seat provided with a port, of a flexi-
ble valve mounted to oscillate about an axis
toward and away from said seat and con- no
trolling said port, yielding means arranged

to oppose the movement of said valve away
from said seat at a point spaced from said
axis, and means to oscillate said valve in
accordance with sound waves, said port be- 115
ing arranged between said axis and said
point.

70. A sound box comprising a valve seat
provided with a port, a flexible valve ar-
ranged to' control said port and restrained 120
at points iipon opposite sides respectively of
said port, and means to flex said valve be-
tween said points in accordance with a sound
record.

71. A sound box comprising a valve seat 125
provided with a port, a flexible valve mount-
ed to oscillate about an axis and restrained

at a point spaced from said axis to produce
sound waves, and means to limit the oscil-
lation of said valve. 130

1,060,235

o

72. A sound box comprising a valve seat
provided with a port, a flexible valve mount-
ed to oscillate about as axis to produce
sound waves, and yielding means arranged
to engage said valve at a point spaced from
said axis to limit the oscillation of said
valve.

In witness whereof I have hereunto set
my hand this 7th day of March, A. D., 1906.

WILBURN N. DENNISON.

Witnesses :

Alston B. Moulton,
Alexander Park.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

Washington, D. C."

1,060,541.

J. H. ELFERING.

TALKING MACHINE.
APPLIOATIOH FILED SEPT. 6, 1902,

Patented Apr. 29, 1913.

^2.^?.S 'VO

S?- 'i'5 '^^

Witnesses:

edurliT.lGM ^.

Inventor:

ATTORNEY:

COLUMBIA l-LANOOBAPH CO., WASHINQTON, D. C.

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

JOHN H. ELFERINa, OF CAMDEN, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR TO THE VICTOR TALKING
MACHINE COMPANY, A CORPORATION OP NEW JERSEY.

TALKING-MACHINE.

1,060,541.

Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Apr. 39, 1913.

Application filed September 6, 1902. Serial No. 122,303.

To all xchom it may concern :

Be it known that I, John H. Elfering,
a citizen ^f the United States, and a resi-
dent of Camden, State of New Jersey, have
5 invented certain new and useful Improve-
ments in Talking-Machines, of wiiich the
following is a specification.

The main objects of this invention are,
to provide, in a talking machine, an im-

10 proved support for a sound box; to provide
improved means for connecting a sound box
to its support; to provide an improved
joint in a sound conveyer; and to provide
other improvements as will appear herein-

15 after.

In the accompanying drawings: Figure
1 is a side elevation of a talking machine
constructed in accordance with this inven-
tion; Fig. 2 a side elevation, partly in cen-

20 tral vertical section, of a portion of the
same ; Fig. 3 a plan view of a portion of the
same; and Figs. 4 and 5 are, a plan view,
and a longitudinal central vertical section,
of a modified form of a portion of the same.

25 Referring to the drawings, one embodi-
ment of this invention comprises the usual
casing 1 containing a motor, and supporting
thereon the usual flat horizontal circular
turntable 2, which is mounted on a vertical

30 axis to be rotated by the motor to carry a
sound record 3.

A rigid vertical curved supporting
bracket 4 is rigidly attached at its lower end
to one side of the casing 1, and is provided

35 at its upper end with an inwardly extend-
ing horizontal portion having an axially
vertical cylindrical opening therein, form-
ing a collar 5. Beneath the collar 5, and
axially in vertical alinement with the axis

40 of the opening in the collar, is a spring
pressed yielding pivot or end bearing 6,
which fits slidably in an axially vertical
cylindrical recess provided therefor in the
bracket 4. A short section of cylindrical

45 tubing fits tightly in the opening in the col-
lar 5, being held in fixed position therein,
and projects slightly above and below the
collar.
An amplifying horn 9 is carried by the

50 bracket 4, the inner end of the horn tele-
scoping loosely over the upwardly project-
ing end of the fixed tube 7, and engaging
against the upper surface of the collar 5 of
the bracket. The horn is thus rotatably

mounted upon a vertical axis and is in com- 55
munication Math the interior of the tube 7.

A hollow cylindrical vertical hub 8 is ro-
tatably retained in position between the tube
7 and the yielding spring pressed pivot 6.
The lower end of the hub is closed and rests 60
against the upper end of the pivot which is
preferably conical in shape and which en-
gages in a conical recess provided therefor
centrally in the end of the hub. The upper
end of the hub 8 is reduced in diameter and 65
fits or telescopes loosely within the lower
end of the tube 7, the shoulder of the hub
being held in engagement against the lower
end of the tube by the pressure of the pivot
6. The ujoper end of the hub is open to per- 70
mit communication between the interior of
the hub and the interior of the horn through
the tube 7.

Extending outwardly from the hub 8, and
commimicating therewith, is a cylindrical tu- 75
bular arm 10 for supporting a sound box.
This arm is divided into two communicating
sections by a flexible practically sound tight
joint 11 adjacent the outer end of the arm.
The inner section of the arm is rigid with 80
the hub 8 and extends radially and horizon-
tally therefrom, and the outer section of the
arm is shorter than the inner section and
has attached to its free end the sound box 19.

One form of the joint between the two 85
sections of the sound box arm, comprises a
hollow cylindrical sleeve or portion 13, the
longitudinal axis of which is horizontal and
perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the
arm 10, forming tlie outer end of the inner 90
ser-tion of the arm and an externally cylin-
drical hub or pcu-tion 12 forming the adja-
cent end of the outer portion of the arm and
fitting rotatably within the cylindrical end
13 of the inner portion of the arm 10. The 95
cylindrical end 13 of the inner portion of the
arm is provided on its upper front side with
a longitudinal recess 14 having a curved
inner edge to permit of the upward move-
ment of the outer section of the hollow arm. 100

It is evident that, by this construction,
the inner section of the hollow sound box
arm 10 is restrained to oscillate in a fixed
horizontal plane, carr^'ing the outer section
of the arm therewith and that the outer sec- 105
tion of the arm 10 is free to swing in a ver-
tical direction about the horizontal axis of
the joint 11, The outer section of the arm

1,060,541

10

being shorter than the inner section, the
greater part of the weight of the arm is
supported by the mounting on the bracket 4
when the sound box is in operative position
5 resting on the record, thus relieving the
styhis of all of the Aveight of its supporting
. arm 10 except about half of the weight of
the short outer section of the arm which is
but a small fraction of the total weight of
the arm.

The outer end of the outer section of the
hollow sound box arm 10 is cut away longi-
tudinall}'^, and is substantially semicircular
in transverse section to provide a recess, as

l^ shown at 15, for the reception of a sound
box. For attaching the sound box, oppo-
sitely recessed ears 16 are provided upon the
upper and lower sides respectively, and in-
tegral with the flat vertical plate 17, which

20 forms the inner flat side of the recessed por-
tion of the arm. The plate 17 has a circular
opening 18 to allow communication between
tlie sound box and the interior of the hollow
arm.

25 The sound box 19 is mainly of the usual
construction, having the usual diaphragm
actuated by a stylus bar, carrying a stylus
for engagement with the record. The sound
box has a flat back, which is rigidly secured

30 against the flat side 17 of the outer end of
the hollow arm bj' means of thumb screws
20, which extend through the recesses of the
ears 16 and are threaded into the sound box
casing. The sound box is thus held in axial

35 alinement with the aperture 18 in the flat
plate 17 of the sound box arm, the interior
of the sound box being in communication
with the interior of the arm through the
opening 18. The sound box may be detached

40 from the plate by loosening the screws and

giving the sound box a partial rotation

clockwise until the screws are released from

engagement with the recesses of the ears 16.

A modified form of joint, shown in Figs.

45 4 and 5, for the hollow sound box arm com-
prises a hollow spherical portion 21, form-
ing the outer end of the inner section of the
arm, and, fitting within this spherical por-
tion, an externally spherical portion 22

50 forming the adjacent end of the outer sec-
tion of the arm. These two cylindrical por-
tions are pivoted together by means of a
horizontal pivot 23, whei'eby the movement
of the outer section of the arm is limited

55 to a vertical plane. The outer spherical
portion of the joint is recessed on its front
upper edge to permit of the necessary
amount of vertical movement of the outer
section of the arm.

60 In the operation of this machine, when
it is desired to place a record upon the turn-
table, or remove a record therefrom, it is
necessary only to raise the box 19 vertically,
and swing it horizontally with its support-

65 ing arm 10 to one side of the turn-table.

During this movement of the sound box, the
horn 9 remains stationary, as the movement
of the sound box does not affect the move-
ment of the hoi'n, but the horn is rotatable
about its vertical axis into any position de- >jq
sired, indeiDendent of the sound box. When
the sound box is in operative position on the
record, the two sections of the tubular
sound box supporting arm are substantially
in the same straight line which gives a pleas- 75
ing appearance, and an effective straight
channel of communication between the
soimd box and the amplifying horn.

Having thus described my invention what
I claim and desire to protect by Letters Pat- go
ent of the United States, is:

1. In a talking machine, the combination
with a hollow swinging sound conducting
arm having a straight portion, and a joint

in said portion, dividing said arm into an 35
inner section and a relatively movable outer
section shorter than said inner section, of
a sound box secured to said outer section,
and communicating therewith, said joint
consisting of a hollow hub rigidly attached 90
to one of said sections, and a sleeve inclosing
said hub and rigidly attached to the other of
said sections, and the said hub having lat-
eral communication with both of said sec-
tions. 95

2. In a talking machine, the combination
with a hollow swinging sound conducting
arm having a joint dividing said arm into
an inner section and a relatively movable
outer section shorter than said inner sec- joo
tion, of a soimd box secured to said outer
section and communicating therewith, said
joint consisting of a hollow hub rigidly at-
tached to one of said sections, and a sleeve
inclosing said hub and rigidly attached to 105
the other of said sections, and the said hub
having lateral communication with both of
said sections.

3. In a talking machine, the combination
with a hollow swinging sound conducting no
arm having a joint dividing said arm into

an inner section and a relatively movable
outer section shorter than said inner sec-
tion, of a sound box secured to said outer
section and communicating therewith, said 115
joint consisting of a hollow hub rigidly at-
tached to one of said sections, and a sleeve
inclosing said hub and rigidly attached to
the other of said sections, and the said hub
having lateral communication with both of 120
said sections, said sections being substan-
tially in longitudinal alinement when said
sound box is in operative position.

4. In a talking machine the combination
with a hollow tone arm provided with a 125
plate having a flat surface, said plate being
provided with an aperture surrounded by
said surface, and with a plurality of margi-
nal ears each provided with a recess, of a
sound box engaging against said flat sur- 130

1,060,541

3

face, and means carried by said sound box
and engaging in said recesses and clamping
said box to said plate, said box communi-
cating through said aperture with said tone
5 arm.

5. In a talking machine the combination
with a hollow tone arm provided with a
plate rigid therewith and having a flat sur-
race, said plate being provided Avith an ap-

10 erture surrounded by said surface, and with
a plurality of marginal ears each provided
with a recess, of a sound box engaging
against said flat surface, and means carried
by said sound box and engaging in said re-

15 cesses and clamping said box fixedly to said
plate, said box communicating through said
aperture with said tone arm.

6. In a talldng machine, the combination
with a hollow tone arm provided with a
plate rigid therewith and having a flat sur- 20
face, and with an aperture surrounded by
said surface, and a pair of ears oppositely
disposed with respect to said aperture and
each providiid with a recess, and means car-
ried by said sound box and extending 25
through said recesses clamping said box
fixedly to said plate.

In witness whereof I have hereunto set
my hand this twentieth day of August,
A. D. 1902.

JOHN H. ELFEMNG.

Witnesses :

Jno. T. Cross,

Lewis H, Van Dusen..

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

Washington, D. C."

E. E. JOHNSON.

TALKING MACHINE.

APPLICATION FILED APE. 7, 1903.

1,060,550.

Patented Apr. 29, 1913.

2 SHEETS-SHEET 1.

IV/Tfl£SSES:

edu/W.Vaklf

INVENTOR

JJldrid^eJiJohn^oTt

BY

j/^/mA.

ATTORNEY.

COLUMBIA PLANOORAPH CO.. WASHINOTON, D. C.

E. R. JOHNSON.

TALKING MACHINE,
APPLICATION PILED APE, 7, 1903.

1,060,550.

Patented Apr. 29, 1913.

2 SHEETS-SHEET 2.

J^Z^S

WITNESSES:

INVENTOR

JEldrid^eR.Johndoit .

ATTORNEY.

COLUMBIA PL\NOGHAI'H CO.. WASHINGTON, D. C.

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

ELDRIDGE R. JOHNSON, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR TO VICTOR
TALKING MACHINE COMPANY, A CORPORATION OF NEW JERSEY.

TALKING-MACHINE.

1,060,550.

Specification of letters Patent. Patented Apr. 39, 1913.

Application filed April 7, 1903. Serial No. 151,454.

To all whom it may concern:

Be it known that I, Eldridge R. Johnson,
a citizen of the United States, and a resident
of the city of Phihadelphia, State of Penn-
5 sylvania, have invented certain new and use-
ful Improvements in Talking-Machines, of
which the following is a specification.

The main objects of my invention are to
provide, in a talking machine, an improved

10 sound box support constrained to swing in a
fixed plane; to provide means for the ad-
justment of the support to change the plane
of movement thereof; to provide improved
means for mounting an amplifier upon said

15 support to move in unison therewith ; to pro-
vide improved means for connecting a sound
box to the support to be carried thereby ; and
to be movable transversely of the plane of
movement of the support ; to provide means

20 of communication between the sound box and
the amplifier; and to provide other improve-
ments as will appear hereinafter.

In the accompanying drawing, Figure 1
is a side elevation of a talking machine con-

25 structed in accordance with this invention;
Fig. 2 a fragmentary side elevation of the
same partly in section and with parts re-
moved; Fig. 3 a top plan view partly in
horizontal section of a portion of the same ;

30 Fig. 4 a rear elevation partly in vertical
section of a portion of the same; Fig. 5 a
somewhat enlarged front elevation of the
sound box, and its supporting plate shown in
Fig. 1 : Fig. G a fragmentary vertical long"i-

35 tudinal sectional view of a portion of the
machine; Fig. 7 a fragmentary horizontal
sectional view of a portion of the same ; and
Fig. 8 a section similar to P^ig. 7, but of a
modified form of the invention.

40 Referring to the drawings, one embodi-
ment of this invention comprises a motor
casing 1 of the usual form, upon which is
mounted the usual turntable 2 for carrying
upon its upper surface a sound record 3.

45 At one side of the motor casing 1 is rigidly
attached a rigid supporting bracket 4 which
is pro\ided at its outer end with a vertical
portion 5 to which is attached a yoke or
casing G in which is pivoted a sound box

50 arm IG. This yoke or casing G is made ad-
justable on the bracket 4 by having vertical
slots in the arms or sides of the yoke which

register with a hole in the bracket through
which passes a bolt 7, as shown in Fig. 7 of
the drawings. When it is desired to change 55
the height of the plane of movement of the
sound box arm the bolt 7 is loosened, the arm
adjusted to the desired position, and the
bolt then tightened to hold the yoke firmly
in place upon the vertical portion 5. 60

A modified form of the means for ad-
justing the yoke in relation to the bracket
4 is shown in Fig. 8 of the drawings. In
this form the arms of the yoke 6 are pro-
vided with vertical grooves 8 in which slid- 65
ingly engage vertical ribs 9 on the upper
part 5 of the bracket. The arms in this
instance are also provided with longitudi-
nal slots 10 within which a bolt 11 passing
through the bracket is adapted to slide. In 70
this form it will be seen that to adjust the
supporting arm of the sound box the bolt
11 is loosened and the yoke adjusted ver-
tically by sliding the same upward or down-
ward upon the part 5, its motion being 75
guided by the flanges 9 sliding in the groove
8. Upon again tightening the bolt 11 the
yoke 6 is held firmly in position .^

For supporting the radial sound box arm
IG, the yoke 6 is provided with two hori- 80
zontal vertically spaced cross-bars 12 and
13, which have oppositely disposed recesses
forming bearings to receive the conical ends
of a pair of vertical pivots 14 and 15, which
are carried in a vertical socket extending 85
through the inner end of the solid radial
sound box arm IG. These pivots are in
vertical alinement, and project in opposite
directions from the sound box arm, the lower
one of these pivots being adjustably retained 90
in position by a set-screw 17, and the upper
one being held yieldingly in position by a
spiral spring 18, which is confined in the
socket between the inner ends of the pivots.
Tliis construction permits the sound box arm 95
to be easily removed from or replaced in its
support in the yoke G.

For supporting a sound box 22 and a
horn or amplifier 27, the radial sound box
arm IG has a horizontal circular opening 100
19, adjacent its outer or free end, in which
snugly fits a cylindrical sound box tube or
horn intake 20, integTal and coaxial with
the intake end of which is an annular flat

a

1,060,550

vertical sound box supporting plate or
flange 21. Upon the flange 21 and in com-
munication with the horn intake 20 is piv-
oted the sound box proper 22, by means of
5 a horizontal screw 23, passing loosely
through a lateral extension of the back plate
or carrier of the sound box, and threaded
into the flange. The sound box is movable
in a vertical plane about its pivot and across

10 the mouth of the horn intake, and is pro-
vided as usual with a stylus bar 24 and a
diaphragm 25.

A sound amplifier or horn 27, or other
sound conducting means, has its inner end

15 carried by and communicating with the out-
let end of the horn intake tube 20, and is
also carried, intermediate of its ends, by a
horizontal rod or support 26, which contacts
against the under side of the horn, and one

20 end of which is rigidly attached to the
sound box arm at any suitable point to give
the desired inclination to the horn or sound
conveyer.

The rear or carrier plate of the sound box

25 may be provided with a short tube or flange
29, surrounding the opening between the
sound box and the horn intake and project-
ing slightly into the horn intake, thereby
directing the sound waves from the sound

30 box into the intake, and limiting the verti-
cal movement of the sound box Avith respect
to its supporting flange 21 and sound box
arm 16. This short tube 29 is not essential,
but is considered to be a desirable feature of

35 the construction.

In the operation of this machine, the
plane of movement of the sound box sup-
porting ar-m 16 ma}'^ be adjusted vertically
by adjusting the yoke 6 by means of the

40 bolt 11 to bring the sound box 22 into the
proper plane to cooperate with the record 3,
and in this position the sound box is per-
mitted to yield sufficiently in either direc-
tion verticall}^ about its pivot 23, to follow

45 any slight irregularities in the record, or to
compensate for any inaccuracies in the
mounting of the turn-table.

This invention is not limited in its appli-
cation to the particular construction herein

50 illustrated, as various changes might be
made in the construction shown without de-
parting from the spirit of this invention, or
the scope of the appended claims.

Having thus fully described the inven-

55 tion, I claim and desire to protect by Let-
ters Patent of the United States :

1. In a talking machine, the combination
with sound conducting means, of a support-
ing arm independent of said means, a pivot

60 for supporting said arm, means independ-
ent of said pivot for adjusting the same to
change the position of said arm, and a
sound box supported by said arm.

2. In a talldng machine, the combination
65 with hollow sound amplifying means, of a

sound box arm supporting said means, a
fixed supporting member upon which said
arm is mounted to oscillate in a fixed plane,
and means for adjusting the position of the
plane of oscillation of said arm with respect 70
to said fixed supporting member.

3. In a talking machine, the combination
with sound conducting means, of a support-
ing arm independent of said sound conduct-
ing means, vertical pivots adjacent one end 75
of said arm and supporting said arm, a yoke

in Avhich said pivots have bearings, a sup-
port for said yoke, means for adjusting said
yoke upon its support, and a sound box piv-
oted adjacent the free end of said arm. go

4. In a sound reproducing machine, a
tube provided with a flange at one end, and
a casing j^rovided with sound producing
means pivoted to said flange to move in a
plane parallel thereto, and having a tubular 85
projection on its rear face extending into
said tube.

5. In a talking machine, the combination
with sound conducting means, of an arm
for supporting said means, a sound box car- 90
ried by said ai-m, a supporting member,
and a yoke adjustably mounted on said sup-
porting member, said arm being mounted
iipon said yoke to oscillate.

6. In a talking machine, the combination 95
with sound conducting means, of an arm
for supporting said means, a sound box car-
ried by said arm, a supporting member,
and a yoke adjustably mounted on said sup-
porting member, said arm being mounted ]oo
upon said yoke to oscillate in a fixed plane.

7. In a talking machine, the combination
with a vertical pivot, of a sound box arm
mounted to SAving upon said pivot in a fixed
path, a sound box carried by said arm, hoi- i05
loAV sound conducting means carried by said
arm and communicating Avith said sound
box, and A'ertically adjustable means sup-
porting said pivot.

8. In a talking machine, the combination no
with a supporting arm, of a piA^ot carrying
said arm, a A'ertically moA^able yoke support-
ing said pivot, a support for said yoke, verti-
cal guides cooperating between said yoke
and said support, means for clamping said 115
yoke in position, and a sound box carried by
said arm and movable upwardly and doAvn-
wardly with respect thereto.

9. In a talking machine, the combination
with a supporting arm, of a IioHoaa^. sound 120
amplifier carried thereby, a pivot upon
AA'hich said arm is mounted to swing, and a
vertically adjustable yoke supporting said
pivot.

10. In a talking machine, the combination 125
of a moA^able arm, a horn intake carried
thereby, a sound box carrier moA^able with
the arm and also movable independently of
and in a plane perpendicular to the plane of
movement of said arm, and a sound box 130

1,060,560

carried by the sound box carrier, positioned
thereby in operative relation to the horn in-
take and movable with said carrier trans-
versely with reference to said horn intake,
J substantialh' as described.

11. In a talking machine, the combination
of a movable arm, a horn intake carried
thereby, a sound box carrier on one side of,
movable with, and also movable independ-

10 ently of and in a plane perpendicular to the
plane of movement of said arm, and a sound
box carried by the sound box carrier, posi-
tioned thereby in operative relation to and
movable with the carrier across the mouth

15 of said horn intake, substantially as de-
scribed.

12. In a talking machine, a movable horn
support, a horn supported thereon and car-
ried thereby, and a sound box carrying ele-

23 ment movable across the intake of the horn,
substantially as described.

13. In a talking machine, the combination
of a movable arm, a horn intake carried
therebjf, a sound box carrier on one side of

25 the said arm, pivoted thereto, movable there-
with and also movable independently there-
of in a plane perpendicular to that of the
movement thereof, and a sound box carried
by the sound box carrier, positioned thereby

30 in operative relation to and movable with
the carrier across the mouth of said horn in-
take, substantially as described.

14. In a talking machine, the combination
of a supporting element movable in a hori-

35 zontal plane, a horn intake carried thereby,
a sound box carrier connected to said ele-
ment and movable therewith and also mov-
able independently thereof in a vertical
plane, and a sound box carried by the sound

40 box carrier, positioned thereby in operative
relation to and movable across the horn in-
take, substantially as described.

15. In a talking machine, the combination
with a sound amplifier restrained to move in

45 a fixed plane, of a sound box mounted to
move in unison with and actuated by the
movement of said amplifier, and also being
movable in a direction transverse to the
plane of movement of the amplifier, and

50 means to change the plane of the movement
of said amplifier.

16. In a talking machine, the combination
with a sound amplifier pivoted to move in a
fixed plane, of a sound box communicating

55 with said amplifier and held against move-
ment with respect to said amplifier in the
plane of movement of the amplifier but mov-
able freely in a direction transverse to said
plane, and means to change the plane of the

60 movement of said amplifier.

17. In a talking machine, the combination
with a sound amplifier restrained to swing
in a fixed plane about a fixed axis, of a
sound box communicating with said ampli-

'^5 fier, and held against movement with re-

spect thereto in the plane of the movement
of the amplifier, but movable in a direction
transverse thereto.

18. In a talking machine, the combination
with an amplifier having an intake, of an yo
arm supporting said amplifier, and a sound
box communicating with said amplifier
through said intake and movable across said
intake.

19. In a talking machine, the combination 75
with an amplifier provided with a tubular
intake, of a sound box having a tubular ex-
tension projecting into said intake, the said
tubular extension being of less external di-
ameter than the internal diameter of said go
intake, and being mounted to oscillate freely
laterally in said intake.

20. In a talking machine, the combination
with a sound box, of an arm supporting said
box, a pivot upon which said arm is mount- 35
ed to oscillate only in a fixed path, and ver-
tically adjustable means supporting said
pivot.

21. In a talking machine, the combination
with a sound box, of an arm supporting said 90
box, pivots upon which said arm is mounted

to oscillate, a yoke supporting said pivots, a
support for said yoke, and means for adjust-
ing the position of said yoke in its support.

22. In a talking machine, the combination 95
with a supporting arm, pivots supporting
said arm, a 3^oke supporting said jDivots, a
support for said yoke, guides cooperating be-
tween said 3^oke and supi^ort, means for
clamping said yoke in position, and a sound iqO
box mounted upon said supporting ann and
movable with respect thereto.

23. In a talking machine, the combination
with a swinging sound box carrying arm, of
pivots upon which said arm is mounted, and 105
means supporting said pivots, one of said
l^ivots being yieldingly mounted.

24. In a talking machine, the combination
Avith a swinging sound box carrying arm, of
vertical pivots upon which said arm is no
mounted, and means supporting said pivots,
said pivots being in vertical alinement. and

the upper one of said pivots being yieldingly
moinited in its support.

25. In a talking macliine, the combination 115
with a sound box, of an arm supporting said
sound box, a pair of spaced pivots mounted

in a socket provided therefor in said arm for
supporting said arm, and yielding means in
saifl sockets between said pivots. 120

9(\. In a talking machine, the combination
with a sound box, of an arm supporting said
sound box, a pair of sjiaced pivots mounted
in said arm for supporting said arm, and
yielding means between said pivots, one of 125
said i^ivots being held in a fixed position
with respect to said arm.

27. In a talking machine, the combination
with a sound box, of an arm supporting said
sound box, a pair of spaced pivots mounted 130

1,060,550

in said arm for supporting said arm, and
a spiral spring between said pivots, one of
said pivots being held in a fixed position
with respect to said arm, and the other of
5 said pivots being yieldingly retained by said
spring.

28. In a sound reproducing machine, the
combination of an arm carrying a sound
box, a yoke in which said arm is mounted,

10 supporting arms for said yoke, and a
bracket on which said supporting arms are
adjustably mounted.

29. In a sound reproducing machine, the
combination with a bracket, of a non-
15 rotatable vertically adjustable yoke sup-
ported on said bracket, ind a swinging
soimcl box arm supported by said yoke.

30. In a sound reproducing machine, the
combination with a sound conducting tube

20 pi'ovided with a tubular intake, of a sound
box mounted to swing across the open end
of said intake, and having an extension pro-
jecting into saicl intake.

31. In a talking machine, the combination
25 with a vertical pivot, of a sound box arm

mounted to swing upon said pivot, a sound
box carried by said arm and movable inde-
pendently thereof, hollow sound conducting
means carried by and fixed with respect to
30 said arm and communicating with said
sound box, and vertically adjustable means
supporting said pivot.

32. In a talking machine, the combination
with a sound box arm mounted to swing in

35 a fixed plane about a fixed axis, of a sound
box carried by said ami and movable inde-
pendently thereof, and hollow tapering
sound amplifying means carried by and
fixed with respect to said arm. said sound

40 box being adjacent the small end of said am-
plifving means and communicating there-
with and movable with respect thereto.

33. In a talking machine, the combination
with a fixed sui^port, of a non-rotatable ver-

45 ticallv adjustable yoke carried thereby, a
sound box arm mounted in said yoke to
swing' unon a vertical axis, and a sound box
carried by said arm.

34. In a talking machine, the combination
50 with a fixed yoke, of a sound box arm

mounted therein to swing upon a fixed ver-
tical axis, a sound box carried by said arm
and movable vertically Avith respect thereto
on a horizontal axis.

55 35. In a talking machine, hollow rela-
tively long sound conductin<r means mounted
on a fixed axis to swing freely in a fixed
path, and a sound box communicating with
said sound conducting means and held

00 against movement relative 'thereto in the
path of movement of said conducting means,
but movable freel^^ in a ])lane transverse to
the path of movement of said means, into
and out of engagement with the sound

65 record.

36. In a talking machine, the combination
of a sound amplifier mounted for swinging
movement about one pivotal axis only, a
record support, a sound box communicating
with the amplifier and movable therewith to >jq
thereby traverse the record support, and
means for permitting the sound box to move
relatively to, in contradistinction to about,
said pivotal axis into and out of operative
relation to the I'ecord support. 75

37. In a talking machine, the combination
of a relatively long sound conduit mounted
for swinging movement about one pivotal
axis only, a record support, a sound box com-
municating with the conduit and movable go
therewith to thereby traverse the^record sup-
port, and means for permitting the sound
box to move relatively to, in contradistinc-
tion to about, said pivotal axis into and out

of operative relation to the record support. 85

38. In a talking machine, the combination
of a record support, a sound box, means ex-
tending across the record support, for car-
rying the sound box, saicl means being
mounted for swinging movement about one 90
pivotal axis only, whereby to traverse the
record support, and means for permitting
the sound box to move into and out of oper-
ative relation to the record support.

39. In a talking machine, the combination 95
of a record support, a tapering sound ampli-
fier provided at its smaller end with a sound
box, means for pivotally mounting said
amplifier to have a free swinging movement

to cause the sound box to traverse said rec- lOO
ord support, said amplifier being restrained
against any other pivotal movement, and
means for permitting said sound box to
move into and out of operative relation to
said record ■ support. 105

40. In a talking machine, a record sup-
port, a tapering sound amplifier provided ■
at its smaller end with a sound box, means
for pivotally mounting said amplifier to
swing across the record support, the ampli- 110
fier being restrained against any other
pivotal movement, and means for permit-
ting the sound box to move relatively to,

in contradistinction to about, the pivotal
axis of the amplifier into and out of opera- 115
tive relation to said record support.

41. In a talking machine, the combination
of a record support, a rigid member extend-
ing across saicl record support and provided

at one end with a sound box, means for 120
pivotally mounting said member at its
other end, to have a swinging movement to
cause the sound box to traverse the record
support, said member being restrained
against any other pivotal movement, and 125
means for permitting the sound box to move
into and out of oj^erative relation to the
record supjDort.

42. In a talking machine, a record sujd-
port, a tapering sound amplifier mounted 130

1,060,650

to swing only parallel to the record sup-
port, a sound box carried at and communi-
cating with the smaller end of the amplifier
and movable therewith to traverse the record
5 support, and means for permitting the sound
box to move into and out of operative rela-
tion to the record support.

43. In a talking machine, the combina-
tion of a relativelj'^ long supporting mem-

10 ber pivotally mounted at one end for swing-
ing movement about only one pivotal axis,
and a sound box carried at and movable with
the free end of said member and also mount-
ed to move freely independently of said

15 member in the direction of the aforesaid
pivotal axis.

44. In a talking machine, the combination
of an elongated supporting member pivot-
ally mounted at one end for swinging move-

20 ment about only one pivotal axis, and a
sound box carried at and movable with the
free end of said member and also pivotally
mounted to move freely independently of
said member, the pivotal axis of the sound

25 box being located nearer to the sound box
than to the said pivotal axis of the support-
ing member.

45. In a talking machine, the combination
of tapering sound conducting means having

30 swinging movement about only one pivotal

axis, and a sound box communicating with
and movable with the smaller end of said
conducting means, and also pivotally mount-
ed to move independently thereof.

46. In a talking machine, the combination 05
of supporting means having swinging move-
ment about only one pivotal axis, and a
sound box movable with said supporting
means and also mounted for sliding move-
ment relative thereto. ^q

47. In a talking machine, the combination
of hollow sound conducting means having
swinging movement about only one pivotal
axis, a sound box communicating with and
movable with said conducting means and 45
also mounted to move relatively thereto,
and a joint between the sound box and con-
ducting means consisting of contacting un-
obstructed plane surfaces.

48. In a talking machine, a swinging arm, 50
a mounting for said arm comprising a fixed
bearing and a yielding bearing opposed
thereto, and sound reproducing means mov-
able with said arm.

In witness whereof I have hereunto set 55
my hand this 30th day of March, A. D. 1903,
ELDRIDGE R. JOHNSON.
Witnesses :

Rose Chevalier,
Lester L. Bristol.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

Washington, D. C."

1,060,551.

E. C. JORDAN.

AUTOMATIC NEEDLE FEEDEE FOE PHONOGEAPHS,

APPLICATION PILED MAY 14, 1912.

Patented Apr. 29, 1913.

2 SHEETS-SHEET 1.

WITNESSES,

(^^ V\^<r^-w^V/IV<rvv«-ft/^

INVENTOR
BY

- C. Jbraan ^

AUORNEYS

COLUMBIA PLANOGRAPH CO., WASHINQTON. D. C.

E. C. JORDAN.

ADTOMATIC NEEDLE FEEDER TOR PHONOGRAPHS.

APPLICATION TILED MAY 14, 1912.

1 nan t^t^^ Patented Apr. 29, 1913.

1,UdU,OOi. 2 sheets-sheet 2.

'5 //7

WITNESSES

i^A'U^-^^*^*^

'C> INVENTOR

Elmer C Jbr-dccT-t

BY

I^Tjn^^^^j-T^'^

ATTORNEYS

COLOMBCA PLANOaBAPH CO., WASHINOTON. D. C.

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

ELMER C. JORDAN, OF SACRAMENTO, CALIFORNIA.
AUTOMATIC NEEDLE-FEEDER FOR PHONOGRAPHS.

1,060,551.

Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Apr. 39, 1913.

Application filed May 14, 1912. Serial No. 697,177.

To all who'ni it may concern :

Be it known that I, Elmer C. Jordax, a
citizen of the United States, and a resident
of Sacramento, in the county of Sacramento
5 and States of California, have invented a
new and Improved Automatic Needle-
Feeder for Phonographs, of which the fol-
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description.
This invention relates to attachments for

10 phonographs on which removable needles
are used, and among the objects aimed at is
to provide a device of this character which
will insure the least possible delay and
trouble in making the renewals of the

15 needles. It is quite usual in operating
phonographs for the same needle to be used
repeatedly when the best results can be re-
ceived only when a fresh needle is used on
each record. By the use of a device of this

20 c'liaracter there is little or no excuse for not
renewing the needles according to highest
demands.

The invention consists in the novel details
of construction hereinafter fully described

25 and claimed and illustrated in the accom-
panying drawings, in which —

Figure 1 is a perspective view of the de-
vice attached to the tone arm of a standard
phonograph, a portion of the magazine be-

30 ing broken away; Fig. 2 is a plan view of
the same; Fig. 3 is a vertical section on the
line 3 — 3 of Fig. 2, the parts being in normal
position ; Fig. 4 is a similar view on the line
4 — 4 of Fig. 2, the parts being in position

35 for receiving a needle into the chuck; Fig. 5
is a bottom plan view ; and Fig. C is a frag-
mentary detail of the parts shown in Fig. 2,
the toothed wheel being omitted.

As a suitable embodiment of this inven-

40 tion I have devised a bracket 10 of any suit-
able form or construction w'hich is adapted
to be secured rigidly, as for example, by
means of a clamp 11 upon the tone arm 12
of the instrument. Rigidly secured to the

45 upper end of said bi'acket is a magazine 13
which is shoMn as of a cylindrical form with
a bottom horizontal flange 14 and having an
open top. In the center of the magazine is
a stud 15 shown as carried by a cross bar IG,

50 and on said stud is journaled a star or

toothed wheel 17 between which and the
inner surface of the magazine wall are
adapted to be carried a circular series of
needles 18 in spaced vertical relation.
These needles are supported upon the afore- 55
said bottom flange 14 of the magazine.

In order to deli^'er or feed the needles suc-
cessively into the socket or chuck 19 of the
reproducer 20 in a most expeditious manner,
I provide a slide 21 which is adapted to be 60
reciprocated recti linearly across the bottom
of the magazine in one direction by contact
of a portion of the reproducer, as for in-
stance, the cliuck aforesaid, being brought
into engagement with a lug 22 connected or 65
secured to said slide as by a screw 23. The
slide is adapted to be maintained in its
normal position b}' any suitable means such
as a spring 24 connected to any suitable
fixed part, as for instance, the bracket 10 70
and having its other end bearing outwardly
against the stud 25 connected to the afore-
said lug 22. The slide 21 is guided in its
reciprocations along the bottom of the maga-
zine by a set of keepers 26, and 27, the latter 75
of which embraces the slide above the lug
22, as shown. The front end of the slide 21
is provided with a slot 21"^, the outer end of
which is parallel to the longitudinal axis of
the slide and the rear end of which is off.set 80
to an extent substantially equal to the dis-
tance between, the centers of two adjacent
teeth of the wheel 17, or between the centers
of two adjacent needles, such offset of the
slot forming a cam shoulder 28. 85

As indicated in Fig. 4 more especially, the
bottom of the magazine is slotted at 29,
which slot extends into or communicates
with a slot 30 in tlie bottom of the flange 14
of the magazine and extending circumfer- 90
entially therein to an extent substantially
equal to the distance between two adjacent
needles. In the normal position of the parts,
a needle will be seated in the slot 30 and
groove 21" and supported upon the keeper 95
27. When the reproducer is brought up to
receive a fresh needle, the chuck 19 bearing
against the lug 22 will cause the slide 21 to
move from^he position indicated in Fig. 3
to the position indicated in Fig. 4, and dur- 100

1,060,551

ing such movement the cam 28 bearing
against the needle then in the slot will cause
a rotation of the toothed wheel 17 and all of
the needles carried by it, whereby the needle
5 in the slot will be drawn along the slot 30
and into alinement with the outer parallel
portion of the slot 21^ During this opera-
tion the next needle in turn will be brought
into the slot 30 in position to drop into the
10 slot 21^ as soon as the slot is restored to its
outer or normal position.

For the purpose of securing the toothed
wheel in proper delivering position, and
also to insure that the needle to be delivered
15 will not be prevented by friction or other-
wise from dropping into the chuck at the
desired time, any suitable means may be
provided. For this purpose, however, I
have shown a pin 31 carried rigidly by the
20 slide and adapted to be carried by it
through a slot 32 in the magazine and into
operative engagement with the tooth, of the
wheel in advance of the needle to be de-
livered. Any tendency of the toothed wheel
25 to be retarded as by friction on its bearing
stud 15 or the dragging incident to the
large number of needles carried by it around
the bottom flange 14, tending to hold the
needle from dropping into the chuck, Avill
30 be positively counteracted by the effect of
the pin 31 operating upon the toothed wheel,
as above set forth. By this time the needle
to be delivered will be free to drop from
the magazine through the slots 30 and 21^,
35 before described, and through the radial slot
27^ in the keeper 27. The needle in the
chuck may then be turned outward from the
magazine through the slot 29 and be secured
in place as usual.
40 By the device in operation as above set
forth all of the needles in the magazine
may be delivered successively to the chuck
of the reproducer, the star wheel being op-
erated step by step by the successive recip-
45 rocations of the slide 21.

I desire not to be limited to the specific

details of construction, reserving the right

to modify the same with respect to relative

sizes and proportions and to construct them

50 of any suitable materials.

Having thus described my invention, Avhat
I claim as new and desire to secure by Let-
ters Patent is:

1. In a device of the character set forth,
55 the combination of a cylindrical magazine
having a slot in its bottom, a toothed wheel,
journaled for rotation in the magazine and
adapted to support a circular series of
needles therein in spaced relation, the
60 needles being adapted to be supported upon
the bottom of the magazine, and means as-
sociated with the magazine for delivering
the needles successively therefrom, such
means comprising a slide movable recti-

linearly across the bottom of the magazine 65
and having a cam slot at one end cooperat-
ing Avith said slot in the bottom of the maga-
zine, substantially as set forth.

2. In a device of the character set forth,
the combination of a cylindrical magazine 70
having a bottom flange, a toothed wheel
journaled therein on a vertical axis, said
magazine having a slot in its bottom, a slide
movable across the bottom of the magazine
and having a cam slot cooperating with the 75
magazine slot whereby a needle is brought
into delivering position and the toothed
wheel caused to rotate on its axis, and means
carried by the slide to momentarily lock
the toothed wheel from rotation, for the 80
purpose set forth.

3. In a device of the character set forth,
the combination of a magazine having a
bottom flange provided with a circumfer-
ential slot, a toothed wheel journaled in 85
said magazine for rotation on a vertical
axis and adapted to support a series of
needles in spaced relation, a slide recipro-
cable across the bottom of the magazine and
having a cam slot cooperating with the 90
magazine slot aforesaid for delivering the
needles singly and successively and to ro-
tate the toothed wheel on its axis, and a
pin carried by the slide and adapted to co-
operate with the toothed wheel to momenta- 95
rily lock the same from rotation and to in-
sure the free delivery of the intended needle,
substantially a§ set forth.

4. In a device of the character set forth,
the combination of a magazine having a 100
short circumferential slot in its bottom, a
keeper secured to the magazine beneath said
slot and having a radial slot registering
with one end of the magazine slot, means
within the magazine to support a series of 105
needles for successive delivery through said
slots, a slide reciprocable across the, maga-
zine between said keeper and the magazine
and having a cam slot registering normally
with the other end of the magazine slot and 11 0
adapted to receive a needle therein for sub-
sequent delivery, and means to reciprocate
said slide whereby the needle received by
the aforesaid magazine and slide slots will

be moved circumferentially of the maga- 115
zine for delivery through the keeper slot.

5. In a device of the character set forth,
the combination of a cylindrical magazine
having a circumferential slot in its bottom,
a star wheel journaled in said magazine on 120
a vertical axis and adapted to support a
series of needles in vertical spaced relation,
a keeper connected to the bottom of the
magazine and having a radial slot register-
ing- with one end of the magazine slot, a 125
slide reciprocable within said keeper and
having a cam slot, one portion of which
normally registers with the other end of

i, 060,651

feaid magazine slot and adapted to receive
one of said needles, means to reciprocate the
slide whereby another portion of the slide
slot is made to register with the keeper slot
and cause the needle contained therein to
rotate the star wheel, substantially as set
forth.

In testimony whereof I have signed my
name to this specification in the presence
of two subscribing witnesses.

ELMER C. JORDAN.
' Witnesses :

C. G. Barrett,
May Harmon.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

Washington, D. C."

J. W. AYLSWORTH.

PROCESS OF MAKING DDPLICATE PHONOGRAPH EZCORDS.

APPLICATION FILED SEPT. 17, 1909.

1,060,577.

f^ig.J

Patented May 6, 1913.

2 SHEETS-SHEET 1.

COLUMBIA Pl^NOtJRAPM CO., WASHINOTON. D. C.

J. W. AYLSWORTH.

PROCESS OF MAKING DDPLICATE PHONOGRAPH RECORDS.

APPLICATION PILED SEPT. 17, 1909.

1,060,577.

Patented May 6, 1913.

2 SHEETS-SHEET 2.

zo

27

19

i

I

w

Z7

ZO

w\

i

%

t

i

m

m-^

-]9

^

7

m

Z6-

/

1

.^'^

ra

'\

J/it^/t/or:

'^ e^/M

COLUMBIA PLANOORAPH CO., WASHINGTON. D. >

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

JONAS W. AYLSWORTH, OF EAST ORANGE, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR, BY MESNE ASSIGN-
MENTS, TO THOMAS A. EDISON, INCORPORATED, OF WEST ORANGE, NEW JERSEY, A
CORPORATION OF NEW JERSEY.

PROCESS OF MAKING DUPLICATE PHONOGRAPH-RECORDS.

1,060,577.

Specification of Letters Patent. Patented May 6, 1913.

Application filed September 17, 1909. Serial No. 518,272.

To all vhom it may concern:

Be it known that I, Jonas W. Aylsworth,
a citizen of the United States, and a resident
of East Orange, in the county of Essex and
5 State of New Jersey, have made a certain
new and useful Invention in Processes of
Alaking Duplicate Phonograph-Records, of
Avhich the following is a description.

IVIy invention relates to a process for mak-

10 ing phonograph records in which the wear-
ing surface is entirely of metal. The entire
record may be constituted of the metal, or
the latter may be merely a shell provided
with a backing of other material. The proc-

15 ess is particularly adapted to the manufac-
ture of cylindrical phonograph records, al-
though it may be used for making records
of the disk ty])e if desired.

Cylindrical sound records at the present

20 time are generally made of a wax-like ma-
terial molded or cast within a hollow matrix,
and disk records are formed of somewhat
harder material employing considerable
quantities of shellac, the impression being

25 secured from a flat matrix. With both types
of record the material is subjected to consid-
erable wear when used on a phonograph,
and the production of a phonograph record
easily and cheaply manufactured from metal

30 or other substance having greater wearing
qualities than the records now actually in
use, is desirable.

It has been jiroposed to make duplicate
records of metal, but such processes have

35 been objectionable in that it has been neces-
sary therein to destroy the matrix in order
to liberate the metallic duplicate. By an in-
vention on which application for patent Se-
rial No. 516,309 was filed by me Sej^tember

40 4, 1909, a process was described and claimed
by which it is possible readily to free the
metallic duplicate from the matrix without
injury to the latter, whereby the same may
be used for the production of an indefinite

45 number of copies. By the invention form-
ing the subject matter of the present appli-
cation, the same result is attained.

Tlie objects of my present invention, ac-
cordingly, are the coimnercial production of

50 metallic duplicate sound I'ecords, the pi'oduc-
tion of a novel and efficient matrix for the
production of such metallic duplicates, and
the processes and sub-processes hereinafter

more particularly described and claimed for
producing the aforesaid metallic duplicates 55
and the aforesaid matrix.

The method hereinafter to be described
comprises four major operations. First, the
manufacture of a master record. Second,
the manufacture of a metallic master record. 60
Third, the manufacture of a matrix of a
large co-efficient of expansion from the me-
tallic master, and, fourth, the manufacture
of commercial metallic duplicate records
from the matrix so formed. 65

The second step above mentioned is not
present in the process described in my ap-
plication Serial No. 516,309, above referred
to, and the matrix of large co-efficient of
expansion in the present jDrocess is specifi- 70
cally different from that employed in the
process described in my above mentioned ap-
plication. The processes covered by the two
applications, however, attain the same gen-
eral object as above stated, and broad generic 75
claims to the same, Avhich might be made in
either application, are inserted in applica-
tion Serial No. 516,309 above referred to.

In order that the invention may be better
understood, reference is made to the accom- 80
panying drawings, of which —

Figure 1 is a central vertical section
through a master record, showing the forma-
tion of a temporary matrix thereon. Fig. 2
is a central vertical section of apparatus for 85
producing the matrix within which the me-
tallic positive records are to be formed. Fig.

3 is a similar view of the matrix after being
removed from the apjjaratus of Fig. 2. Fig.

4 is a similar view showing apparatus for 90
producing a metallic deposit within the ma-
trix to form the record or record wearing
surface; and Fig. 5 is a similar view of the
comjilete record in its preferred form.

In all of these views, corresponding parts 95
are designated by the same reference nu-
merals.

The first step of the process consists in
the obtaining of a master record. This may
be obtained in the same manner and may be 100
of the same composition as is common in the
art. The master record is designated in the
drawings by the reference charactei' 1.

The second operation comprises the plat-
ing of the master record 1 with a coating of 105
copper or zinc after application of the neces-

1,060,577

sary conductive coating of graphite or of
gold by well known methods. This copper
or zinc deposit forms a temporary matrix 2,
as indicated in Fig. 1 of the drawings. The
5 master record 1 is then removed from the
zinc or copper negative or temporary matrix,
and a positive metallic master is formed
therein by electro-deposition. I prefer to
form the metallic master of nickel. How-

10 ever, if the temporary matrix is formed of
zinc, the master which is formed therein
may be either of copper or of nickel, while
if the temporary matrix is copper, the me-
tallic master formed therein may be either

15 nickel, iron, cobalt, silver or platinum.
After suitably backing the nickel or other
metallic master record, the copper or zinc
temporary matrix 2 is removed by dissolv'
ing the same in an alkaline solution. This

20 may be a sohition of caustic soda or potash
containing hydrogen peroxid if the tempo-
rary matrix is of zinc. If the matrix to be
dissolved is of copper, the solution may be
10% cupric ammonia and 90% of strong

25 ammonia. The cupric ammonia is formed
of 5% copper sulfate, 5% ammonium sul-
fate, and 90% of strong ammonia.

The third operation consists in casting a
substance which has a high co-efficient of

SO expansion with respect to copper, nickel and
iron, around the metallic positive to form a
permanent matrix. This substance should
also be chemically inert to the plating bath
and insoluble in the acids which may be re-

35 quired to dissolve away the metallic master
after the formation of the permanent
matrix. The substance which I prefer to
use in the present process for fonning the
permanent matrix is a phenol condensation

40 product, such as that described by me in
my application Serial No. 496.060, filed
May 14, 1909, or that described by Baeke-
land in the Journal of Indnstrial and Engi-
neering Chemistry^ published by the Amer-

45 ican Chemical Society March, 1909, page
149. The matrix may be formed by casting
one of these or equivalent substances in their
preliminary stages and heating the same in
the mold, with or without the application of

50 pressure to produce by chemical action the
final non-plastic condition of the material
in which the latter is very hard and durable,
is chemically inert, and is practically in-
fusible and insoluble in and otherwise not

55 attacked by commercial acids. In this op- -
eration, the metal master record may be used
as a core for the matrix. This operation is
illustrated in Fig. 2 of the drawings, where-
in the reference character 3 designates the

60 nickel or copper or other metallic master
which has been formed within the tem-
porary matrix 2 after the removal of the
original master record 1. The metallic mas-
ter 3 is backed Avith any suitable substance 4

65 and the same placed ujDon the hollow taper

mandrel 5, which acts as a centering device.
The master 3 and backing 4 are placed upon
the base G through which the taper mandrel
6 extends. The cylindrical mold 7 is also
placed ujion the base 6 which is jDrovided 70
with upwardly directed flange 8 to retain the
same. The cap 9 provided with downwardly
directed flange 10 is set upon the top of the
mold 7. The cap 9 is provided with open-
ings 11 through which the material of which 75
the matrix is to be formed may be poured.
If the matrix is to be formed from a phenol
condensation product or similar substance in
which the use of an increased pressure dur-
ing the baking process is desirable, the whole 80
ajDparatus is placed within a pressure cham-
ber 12 provided with a duct or pipe 13 lead-
ing to a suitable pump or other source of
pressure. This pipe 13 may be provided
with a two-way valve connection, one branch 85
of which is connected with the pump, the
other Avith the atmosphere.

The heat necessary for transforming the
substance of which the matrix 14 is to be
formed into a hard, durable and chemically 90
inei-t substance, may be applied in any usual
way. I prefer, however, to apply the heat
from the inside of the matrix. Accordingly,
in the drawing, the hollow taper mandrel 5
is illustrated as being jjrovided with two 95
pipe connections 15 and 16 which pass
through the wall of pressure chamber 12
and the lower wall of mandrel 5 which is
entirely closed at its ends except for the
tAvo pipe connections. A circulation of 100
steam or other hot gases through the inside
of mandrel 5 may be maintained by means
of these connections, and the heat necessary
for transforming the substance of Avhich the
matrix is composed into the final condensa- 105
tion product, thereby applied. The heat
thus imparted to the inside of mandrel 5 is
conducted through backing 4 and metallic
master 3 to matrix 14 which is thus given
the highest heat on its inner or record bear- 110
ing surface. The substance of Avhich matrix
14 is composed hardens under heat treat-
ment in contact Avith the record surface car-
ried by master record 3 and forms a perfect
negatiA^e thereof. After cooling, the matrix 115
thus formed is relieved of the metal master
3 by dissolving the same in dilute acid. Or
the matrix might be separated, if desired,
from the metallic master 3 by forcible ex-
pansion of the matrix away from the master 120
3 by the method described in my applica-
tion Serial No. 487,360, filed April 1, 1909.

A modification of the method so far de-
scribed may be used, which consists in com-
pressing a celluloid or hard rubber tube 125
around the metal master 3 to form a matrix
in place of the matrix 14 of a phenol con-
densation product hereinbefore described.
In this case, the celluloid or hard rubber
tube is warmed sufficiently to render it plas- 1 3C

1,060,577

tic. The same may be removed from the
metal master 3 when nearly cold by forcible
expansion, as described in my application
Serial Xo. 487,360, above referred to, or by
5 dissolving- out the metal master 3 as pre-
viously described. These steps result in the
matrix shown in Fig. 3. the same having a
high co-efficient of expansion as compared
with metals. In order to obtain a metallic

10 record from a matrix of this character, the
interior and the lower end are first provided
with an electrically conductive coating, such
as finely divided graphic or gold deposited
in vactio, and the matrix is then placed in

15 a holding frame suitable for the application
of current therein in an electro-plating bath.
This frame is illustrated in Fig. 4 and con-
sists of upper and lower clamping plates 17
and 18 held together by headed bolts 19

20 which are provided with wing nuts 20, the
matrix resting upon contact plate 21 which
is electrically connected by wire 22 with one
bolt 19 and leading-in wire 23. Upper and
lower rings 24 and 25 of insulating material

25 are secured within plates 17 and 18 respec-
tively and conductive coatings are applied
to such parts of these rings and of the plate
18 as it is intended shall receive a metallic
deposit to form the shell or positive rec-

30 ord 26.

The anode 27 of copper, zinc, iron, or
other suitable metal is inserted within the
frame and connected to leading-in wire 28,
and the whole is placed in a cold plating

36 bath, and a thin coating or shell 26 of the
anode metal is plated upon the matrix and
adjacent parts, as shown. The plating bath
should be maintained at a constant tempera-
ture, preferably below 50 degrees F., as is

40 described in mv application Serial No.
516.309. filed September 4, 1909. After the
plating operation, the frame and contents
are removed from the plating bath and
washed, and the record removed from the

45 matrix by warming the matrix and record
sufficiently to expand the matrix out of con-
tact with the record 26, whereupon the same
may be removed from the matrix by direct
longitudinal movement. Or the matrix may

50 be forcibly expanded within its elastic limit
to separate the same from the record 26
without application of heat, as described in
my application vSerial Xo. 487,360, above re-
ferred to. The record may be used as

55 formed, or. if desired, it may be suitably
backed by well known means with the back-
ing 29. The matrix, after the removal of the
metallic shell, is uninjured, and may be
cleaned and dried and used in the manner

60 described for an indefinite number of times
for producing metallic records.

Having now described my invention, what
I claim and desire to protect by Letters
Patent is as follows:

66 1. The process of duplicating phonograph

records which consists in forming a tempo-
rary matrix around a master record, re-
moving the master record, forming a me-
tallic master within the temporary matrix,
removing the latter, forming a permanent jq
matrix around the metallic master of a sub-
stance whose coefficient of expansion is rela-
tively high as compared with metals, re-
moving the metallic master, forming metal-
lic duplicate records within said permanent 75
matrix, applying heat to separate the rec-
ords from the matrix by relative change of
diameter, and removing the records from
the matrix by relative longitudinal move-
ment, substantially as described. go

2. The process of duplicating phonograph
records which consists in casting about a
metallic master record a matrix of a sub-
stance whose coefficient of expansion is rela-
tively high as compared with metals, re- 85
moving the metallic master, forming me-
tallic duplicate records within said perma-
nent matrix, applying heat to separate the
records from the matrix by relative change

of diameter, and removing the records from 90
the matrix by relative lo'ngitudinal move-
ment, substantially as described.

3. The process of duplicating phonograph
records which consists in casting about a
metallic master record a matrix of a non- 95
metallic substance whose coefficient of ex-
pansion is relatively high as compared with
metals, and which is not attacked by certain
plating baths, removing the metallic master
and depositing within the matrix formed 100
a deposit of a metal from a plating bath

by which the substance of the matrix is not
attacked to form a metallic duplicate rec-
ord, substantially as desci'ibed.

4. The jorocess of duplicating phonograph 105
records which consists in casting about a me-
tallic master record, a matrix of a non-me-
tallic substance whose coefficient of expansion

is relatively high as compared with metals,
and which is not attacked by certain acids 110
and certain plating baths, dissolving awaj'^
the metallic master in an acid which does not
attack the matrix, electrolytically depositing
within the matrix a deposit of a metal from
a plating bath by which the substance of 115
the matrix is not attacked to form a metallic
duplicate record, and separating the latter
from the matrix by relative change of di-
ameter, substantially as described.

5. The process of duplicating phonograph 120
records which consists in casting about a me-
tallic master record a matrix of a non-me-
tallic substance whose coefficient of expan-
sion is relatively high as compared with
metals, which is not attacked by certain 125
acids, and which has a high melting point,
dissolving away the metallic master in an
acid which does not attack the matrix, form-
ing a metallic duplicate record within the
matrix, and applying heat to separate the 130

1,060,577

record from the matrix by relative change
in diameter of the record and matrix, sub-
stantially as described.

6. The process of diiplicating phonograph
5 records which consists in casting about a

metallic master record a matrix of a non-
metallic substance whose coefficient of ex-
pansion is relatively high as compared with
metals and which is not attacked by cer-

10 tain plating baths, separating the matrix
thus formed from the metallic master, de-
positing within the matrix a deposit of a
metal from a plating bath which does not at-
tack the matrix to form a metallic duplicate

15 record, and separating the record from the
matrix by relative change in the diameters
of the record and matrix, substantially as
described.

7. The iDrocess of duplicating phonograph
20 records which consists in forming about a

metallic master record a matrix of a ma-
terial whose coefficient of expansion is rela-
tively high as compared with certain metals,
separating the matrix thus formed from the

25 metallic master, forming within the matrix
a duplicate record of a metal whose coeffi-
cient of expansion is low as compared with
that of the matrix, and applying heat to
separate the record from the matrix by rela-

30 tive change in the diameters of the record
and matrix, substantially as described.

8. The process of duplicating phonograph
records which consists in forming a master
record of a substance having a high melting

35 point, forming in a plastic condition about
the latter a matrix of a substance which is
plastic in one condition and which is trans-
formed by chemical action into another con-
dition in which it is hard and infusible by

40 heat treatment, applying the said heat treat-
ment to cause the matrix to become hard
while on the master record, and separating
the master from the matrix, substantially
as described.

45 9. The process of duplicating phonograph
records which consists in forming a master
record of a substance having a high melt-
ing point, forming in a plastic condition
about the latter a matrix of a phenol con-

50 densation XDroduct, applying heat treatment
to transform the matrix into a hard, dura-
ble inert condition, and removing the mas-
ter therefrom, substantially as described.
10. The process of duplicating phono-

graph records which consists in forming a 55
master record of a substance having a high
melting point, forming in a plastic condi-
tion about the latter a matrix of a phenol
condensation product, applying heat treat-
ment to transform the matrix into a hard,
durable inert condition, removing the master
therefrom, forming a metallic positive rec-
ord within the matrix, applying heat to the
record and matrix and separating the same,
substantially as described.

11. The process of duplicating phono-
graph records which consists in forming a
master record of a substance having a high
melting point, forming in a plastic condi-
tion about the latter a matrix of a phenol
condensation product, api^lying heat treat-
ment to transform the matrix into a hard,
durable inert condition, dissolving away the
master, depositing electrolytically a metallic
positive record within the matrix and sepa-
rating the record from the matrix by causing
relative change in their diameters, sub-
stantially as described.

12. The process of duplicating phono-
graph records which consists in forming a
master record of a substance having a high
melting point, forming in a plastic condi-
tion about the latter a matrix of a substance
which hardens by chemical action under heat
treatment and has a relatively high co-
efficient of expansion as compared with
metals, heating the matrix to harden the
same while on the master record, and re-
moving the master record therefrom, sub-
stantially as described.

13. The process of duplicating phono-
graph records which consists in forming a
master record of a substance having a high
melting j^oint, forming in a plastic condi-
tion about the latter a matrix of a substance
Avhich hardens by chemical action .under
heat treatment and has a relatively high co-
efficient of expansion as compared with
metals, introducing heat inside the matrix
to harden the same while on the master rec-
ord, and removing the master record there-
from, substantially as described.

This specification signed and witnessed
this 14th day of September, 1909.

JONAS W. AYLSWORTH.
Witnesses :

Dyer Smith,
John M. Canfield.

60

65

70

75

80

85

90

95

100

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

Washington, D. C."

W. N. DENNISON.

SOUND BOX rOR TALKING MACHINES.

APPLIOATIOK FILED JAN. 24, 1907.

1,060,672.

Patented May 6, 1913.

^iT

INVENTOR

^^' ^ /e

W/Suiv^MOermi-so/^.

WITNESSES

BY

/(A^n^

ATTORNEY

COLUMBIA T»I-ANOaRAPH CO.. WASHINGTON. D, C

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

WILBUKN N. DENNISOW, OF MERCHANTVILLE, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR TO VICTOR
TALKING MACHINE COMPANY. A CORPORATION OE NEW JERSEY.

SOTJND-BOX FOR TALKING-MACHINES.

1,060,673.

Specification of Letters Patent. Patented 3Iay 6, 1913.

Application filed January 24, 1907. Serial No. 353,774.

To all whoiih it may concern:

Be it known that I, Wjliu rn N. Denni-
soN, a citizen of the United States, and a
resident of the borougli of JMerchantville.
5 county of Camden, State of New Jersey,
have invented certain new Improvements in
Soimd-Boxes for Talking-Machines, of
Avhich the following is a full, clear, and com-
plete disclosure, reference being had to the

10 accompanying drawings, forming part of
this specification.

This inA-ention relates in general to sound
boxes, but more particularly to pneumatic
.sound boxes for talking machines and in-

15 eludes improvements in that form of pneu-
matic sound box in which a valve is pi-o-
videcl, the movable member of which is po-
sitioned within and very close to the sound
box casing so that the air passing through

20 the valve is caught or trapped between the
movable member and the casing to cushion
or balance the movable member.

The main objects of this invention are to
provide in a sound box an improved mount -

25 ing for a st^dus bar and a valve carried
thereby, and whereby the valve may be con-
veniently and accurately adjusted; to pro-
vide a yielding resistance in the path of the
valve and adjustal)le from the outside of the

30 sound box casing; and to provide other im-
provements as will appear hereinafter.

In the drawings; Figure 1 is a longitudi-
nal section on line 1 — 1 of Fig. 2 ; of a sound
box constructed in accordance with this in-

35 vention; Fig. 2 a fragmentary front view
of the same: Fig. 3 a longitudinal sectional
view on line 3 — 3 of Fig. 2: Fig. 4 an en-
larged sectional A'iew on line 4 — 4 of Fig. 2 ;
Fig. 5 an enlarged sectional view on the

40 line 5 — 5 of Fig. 2; Fig. 6 an enlarged sec-
tional view on line 6 — 6 of Fig. 2; and Fig.
7 a fragmentary back Aiew of a portion of
the device.

Referring to the drawings, the improved

45 sound box shown, comprises a casing having
a substantially cylindrical hollow main por-
tion 1, the central portion of the back end
face of which is provided with a reduced
tubular extension having a cylindrical open-

50 ing 2 forming an inlet through which air or
other suitable fluid is foi'ced by any suitable
means into the sound box. The front end
of the main portion 1 of the casing is re-
duced exteriorly in diameter and is pro-

vided with external screw threads 3 over 55
whicli is threaded a caji or cover 4 which
forms the front end of th(i casing.

For impressing sound waves on a fluid
current passing through the sound box, there
is provided a stationary valve seat 5, and a 60
valve 0 cooperating therewith. The valve
seat 5. which is preferably flat and circular,
is securely clamped in position by and be-
tween the main portion 1 and the cap 4 of
the casing, and is provided centrally with a 65
series of parallel oblong openings or ports
5'. The valve 6, which preferably consists
of a normally flat flexible plate of steel, or
other resilient or suitable material, is ar-
ranged between the seat 5 and the cap 4 of 70
the casing, and is provided with a series of
parallel oblong openings or ports forming
grid bars 6', which are proportioned and ar-
ranged to cover the ports 5' in the valve
seat. 75

The inner face of the cap 4 is provided
w^ith an annular recess 7 for the reception
of the valve 6, and the valve 6 is normally
separated from the inner wall 7' of the cap
by only a few thousandths of an inch there- 80
by forming a chamber 8' between the valve
and the wall 7'. The cap 4 is further pro-
vided upon its front end with a reduced
tubular extension, forming a cylindrical out-
let 8 which is in axial alinement with the 85
valve, the cross sectional area of the opening
being less than the area of the valve. In
this arrangement the openings through the
"\-alve 6 extend on opposite sides of the out-
let 8 through the cap, and the air after pass- 90
ing through the openings in the valve will
enter the chamber 8' between the cover and
the valve to cushion or balance the valve
and will then pass out through the opening
8 of the cap. 95

For spreading and distributing the fluid
current in the sound box, there is arranged
Avith the casing 1 and between the valve seat
5 and the inlet 2 a conical deflector or
spreader 9, which tapers toward the inlet 2 100
coaxially therewith, the marginal edge of
the deflector being spaced from the inner
surface of the casing to provide an annular
passage between the edge of the spreader
and the casing. Spaced between the 105
spreader 9 and the valve seat 5 is a reticu-
lated or foraminous diaphragm 10, pref-
erably of closely woven silk or other fabric,

s

1,060,672

which acts to filter the Huid received from
the spreader and to equalize its pressure,
and diffuse the fluid equall^y throughout the
chamber 11 between the diaphragm and the
5 valve seat 5, so that tlie fluid will pass
through the several ports of the valve seat
with equal velocities.

For oscillating the valve 6 in accordance
with a sound record, the valve is carried by

10 a stylus bar 12, the lower portion of the
valve being rigidly secured to the bar by
means of a screw 13 and steady or guide
pins 14, and the stylus bar is preferably cut
away, as at 15, to receive the valve, and the

15 valve seat 5 is provided with a recess 16 for
the reception of the head of the screw 13.

For supporting the stylus bar and the
valve carried thereby, a torsional spring bar
or pivot 17 extends adjustably through an

20 opening 18 in the stylus bar. An oblique
kerf 19 is provided between the opening 18
through the st5dus bar and the cut out por-
tion 15 of the bar, and screws 20 pass freely
through suitable transverse oj)enings 21 of

25 the main portion of the stylus bar and are
threaded through the portion 12' separated
from the main portion by the kerf 19 where-
by the stylus bar is securely clamped to the
torsional spring, the bar being adjustable

30 rotatively with respect to and longitudinally
of the spring as shown in Figs. 2-5-6.

To provide a mounting for the stylus bar
which will hold the bar and valve carried
thereby upon a substantially fixed axis, but

35 which will permit of the proper freedom of
oscillation, the torsional spring bar 17 is
preferably tubular in form and made of
steel or other resilient material. The ends
of the tubular spring 17 are rigidly mounted

40 in bearing blocks 22 which are adjustably
mounted on the face of the valve seat 5 as
hereinafter described, and the spring is pref-
erably weakened upon each side of the stylus
bar b}'' being provided with an external an-

45 nular recess between the stylus bar and each
bearing block.

To provide space for the upper portion of
the stylus bar and for the parts upon Avhich
the bar is mounted, the inner wall of the cap

50 4 is recessed as at 4' the recess being no
larger than is actually required for the pur-
pose. This provides a space for the recep-
tion of those parts of the device that pro-
ject from the valve in the direction of the

55 balancing or cushioning chamber 8' with-
out materially increasing the effective size
of the balancing chamber, and therefore
without decreasing the balancing effect.
For adjusting the axis of oscillation of the

60 valve toward or aAvay from the plane of its
seat, each of the blocks 22 supporting the
stylus bar is provided at one end with a
knife edge 23 engaged in a knife edge groove
24 in the face of the valve seat. An adjust-

ing screw 24' for each block is threaded 65
through the valve seat from the back there-
of and the inner end of the screw engages
against the rear face of the bearing block.
Also inserted from the back of the valve
seat and extending loosely therethrough is 70
a clamping screw 25 for each block, this
screw being threaded as at 26, into the .
front portion 22' of the block and passing
freely through the rear portion 22" of the
block, the lower end of the block being di- 75
vided into the two portions 22' and 22" by
the longitudinal kerf 27.

By properly adjusting the screws 24' and
then clamping the blocks 22 upon the knife
edges 23 and upon the ends of the screws 24' 80
by means of the screws 25 the bearing blocks
are held rigidly against the valve seat. By
this construction it is evident that the axis
of oscillation of the stylus bar and valve
carried thereby can be readily adjusted to- 85
ward or away from the valve seat whereby
the valve may be adjusted to rest normally
squarely upon the seat, which is a very de-
sirable result.

To clamp the torsional spring 17 Avithin 90
the openings 28 in the journal blocks 22,
each block is provided with a screw 29 pass-
ing freely through the front portion 22' of
the block in front of the kerf 27, and thread-
ed into the portion 22" of the block upon 95
the other side of the kerf 27, whereby when
the screw 29 is tightened the two portions of
the block are forced toward each other and
are clamped rigidly upon the torsional
spring. The lower end of the stylus bar 100
projects outwardly through the recess 4'
which opens through the side of the cap 4
of the casing, and is provided with the usual
socket 30 for holding a stylus, the stylus be-
ing clamped in the socket b)^ the usual set 105
screw 31 or other suitable means.

For yieldingly restraining the oscillations
of the valve there projects outwardly
through an opening 32 in the front end of
the cap 4 a screw 33, the inner end of which 110
passes loosely through a suitable opening in
the upper end of the valve and is threaded
into the valve seat 5. An elastic bushing or
washer 34 is mounted upon the screw be-
tween the head thereof and the front of the 115
valve. The pressure upon the elastic washer
34 may be adjusted by the adjustment of the
screw in the valve seat whereby the valve
may be held yieldingly against its seat under
a predetermined adjustable tension. 120

In the operation of this device, with a sub-
stantially uniform pressure of air in the
chamber 11, the tensioning screw 33 might
be dispensed with, and the valve allowed to
oscillate freely upon its spring 17, but since 125
the pressure of the air in the chamber 11
generally varies and may be greater than is
absolutely necessary for the operation of the

1,060,672

device, the elasticity of the washer 34 pre-
vents the valve from being blown or forced
too far from its seat. It usually happens
that while the pressure of air in the cham-
5 ber 11 forces the whole of the valve away
from its seat during the operation of the
device the undulations are impressed upon
the moving current of air by the flexing as
well as the vibrating of the valve.

10 Although this invention has been de-
scribed as embodied in a pneumatic sound
box, it is obvious that some of the features
of the invention might be used in other
forms of sound boxes or in other devices.

15 For instance the im.proved mounting for
the stylus bar might be used in connection
with any well known form of sound box
having a diaphragm instead of a valve.
Therefore when the term " sound box " is

20 used it is intended to cover any form of
sound reproducing means to which this in-
vention might be applied. Moreover, the
term " a mounting for said bar " and similar
terms in the claims ai*e intended to cover

25 either a mounting for a stylus bar or a
mounting for a sound reproducing valve, or
any other movable member. Furthermore,
although only one form in which this in-
vention may be embodied is described here-

30 in, many changes might be made in the con-
struction set forth without departing from
the spirit of this invention or the scope of
the appended claims.

Having thus fully described the invention

35 I claim and desire to protect by Letters Pat-
ent of the United States:

1. In a sound box, the combination with
a valve seat, of a valve moimted to oscil-
late with respect to said seat, a stylus con-

40 nected to said valve, and means to adjust
the position of the axis of said valve toward
and away from said seat.

2. In a sound box. the combination with
a flexible valve, of a stylus bar on which

45 said valve is mounted, a torsional spring
forming a pivot for said bar, and laterally
adjustable means to clamp said bar to said
spring.

3. In a sound box. the combination with
50 a stylus bar. of a tc^rsional spring on which

said bar is mounted, mountings for said
spring, laterally adjustable means to clamp
said mountings to said spring, and means
to adjustably clamp said bar to said spring.

55 4. In a sound box. the combination with
a relative stationary member, of a stylus
bar. a torsional spring upon which said
stylus bar is adjustable, clamping blocks for
said spring, means to adjust said blocks

60 laterally with respect to said stationary
member, and a valve mounted on said stylus
bar.

5. In a sound box, the combination with
a stationary member, of a stylus bar, a tor-

sional spring upon which said bar is adjust- 65
abl_y mounted, blocks for said spring secured
to said stationary member, means to adjust
said spring laterally with respect to said
stationary member, and a flexible valve
mounted on the inner end of said stylus bar. 70

6. In a sound box, the combination with
a relatively stationary member, of a valve,
a pivoted stylus bar on which said valve
is moimted, journal blocks for said bar, each

of said blocks being provided at one end 75
with a knife edge engaging in a groove i^ro-
\ided therefor in said stationary member,
adjusting screws passing through said sta-
tionary member and engaging the opposite
ends of said blocks respectively, means to 80
secure said blocks to said stationary member,
and means to adjustably clamp said stylus
bar to said blocks.

7. In a sound box, the combination with

a valve seat, of a valve cooperating there- 85
with, laterally adjustable means to cause
said valve to rest squai-ely iipon said seat
when said sound box is inoperative, and
means to oscillate said valve in accordance
Avith sound waves. 90

8. In a sound box, the combination with
a valve seat, of a flexible valve, a pivoted
stylus bar to which said valve is secured,
and means to adjust the pivot of said bar
toward and away from said seat, to cause 95
said valve to rest squarely on said seat.

9. In a sound box, the combination with
a valve seat, of a pivoted valve, a casing
within which said valve is mounted, means
adjustable from the outside of said casing 100
for holding one end of said valve yieldingly
against said seat, and means for vibrating *
said valve in accordance with sound waves.

10. In a sound box, the combination with

a cap provided with a stylus bar recess, of 105
a relatively stationary valve forming with
said cap a valve chamber, a valve located
within said chamber, a stylus bar secured to
one end of said valve and located within
and substantially filling said stylus bar re- no
cess, said cap being also provided with an
opening adjacent the opposite end of said
valve, and adjustable yielding means sub-
stantially filling said opening and acting to
force the latter end of said valve against 115
said seat.

11. In a sound box, the combination with
a casing, of a valve seat adjacent one side
of said casing and forming therewith a bal-
ancing chamber, a valve within said cham- 120
ber, a stylus bar secured to said valve, and
blocks in which said stylus bar is pivoted,
said casing being provided with a recessed
]5ortion substantially filled by said st3dus
liar and said blocks. 125

12. In a sound box, the combination with
a valve seat, of a valve moimted to oscillate
in accordance with sound waves with re-

•&

1,060,672

spect to said seat, and means to adjust the
position of the axis of oscillation of said
valve toward and away from said seat,
13. In a sound box, the combination with
5 a substantially fiat valve seat, of a valve
mounted to oscillate about an axis substan-
tially parallel to said seat, and in accordance
with sound waves, and means to adjust the
position of said axis laterally.

10 14. In a sound box, the combination with
a valve seat, of a valve mounted to oscillate
with respect thereto in accordance with
sound waves, and means to adjust said valve
longitudinally of its axis of oscillation.

15 15. In a sound box, the combination with
a valve mounted to vibrate in accordance
with sound waves, of a casing inclosing said
valve, and means adjustable from without
said casing for limiting the extent of vibra-

20 tion of said valve.

16. In a sound box, the combination with
a valve mounted to vibrate in accordance
with sound waves, of a casing inclosing said
valve, and yielding means adjustable from

25 without said casing for limiting the extent
of vibration of said valve.

17. In a soimd box, the combination Avith
a valve seat, of a valve mounted to vibrate
with respect to said seat in accordance with

30 sound waves, a longitudinally adjustable
member extending through said casing and
into said seat, and yielding means between
said member and said valve to restrain the
movement of said valve.

35 18. In a sound box, the combination with
a stjdus bar, of a mounting therefor com-
prising a pair of blocks rotatably mounted
- on knife edges on the same axis, means to
adjust the free end of each block with re-

40 spect to said axis, and a rod connecting said
blocks and said bar.

19. In a sound box, the combination with
a stylus bar, of a tubular torsional spring
fixed intermediate of its ends to said bar,

45 and means holding the ends only of said
spring in fixed position.

20. In a sound box, the combination with
a stylus bar, of a tubidar torsional spring
fixed intermediate of its ends to said bar,

50 and means to hold the ends of said spring
in fixed position, said bar being adjustable
longitudinally of said spring, and said
spring being adjustable laterally.

21. In a sound box, the combination with
55 a stylus bar, of a tubular torsional spring

fixed to said bar, and means to hold the ends
of said spring in fixed position, said spring
being adjustable longitudinally and later-
ally.
60 22. In a sound box, the combination with
a valve mounted to vibrate in accordance
with sound waves, of a casing inclosing said
valve, and means cooperating within said
Q^sing with said valve, and adjustable from

without said casing, for applying a yielding 65
resistance to the vibration of said valve.

23. In a sound box, the combination with
a movable sound reproducing member, of a
mounting therefor, comprising a pair of
blocks rotatably mounted upon the same 70
axis, means to adjust the free end of each
block with respect to said axis, and means
connecting said blocks and said movable
member.

24. In a sound box, the combination with 75
a movable sound reproducing member, of a
tubular torsional spring fixed intermediate

of its ends to said movable member, and
means to hold the ends of said tubular mem-
ber in fixed position, said tubular member 80
being weakened between one end and said
movable member.

25. In a sound box, the combination with
a movable sound reproducing member, of a
mounting therefor comprising a tubular 85
spring said spring being weakened inter-
mediate of its ends.

26. In a sound box, the combination with
a movable sound reproducing member, of a
mounting therefor, comprising a tubular 90
yielding member, said tubular member be-
ing provided with an annular recess to
weaken the same.

27. In a sound box, the combination with

a fixed valve member, of a movable valve 95
member mounted to oscillate with respect
thereto in accordance with sound waves and
means to adjust the position of the axis of
said movable member with respect to said
fixed member. 100

28. In a sound box, the combination with
a valve seat of a movable member mounted
to oscillate adjacent one side of said seat in
accordance with sound waves, and means ad-
justable from the other side of said seat for lOS
adjusting the axis of said movable member
with respect to said seat.

29. In a sound box, the combination with
a valve seat, of a movable member mounted

to oscillate adjacent one side of said seat in 110
accordance with sound waves and means ex-
tending through said seat and adjustable
from the other side thereof for adjusting the
axis of said movable member.

30. In a sound box, the combination with 115
a valve seat of a movable sound reproducing
valve upon one side of said seat, a mounting
for said valve comprising a block upon one
side of said seat, a screw threaded through
said seat from the other side thereof and 120
resting against said block, and a screw pass-
ing freely through said seat and threaded
into said block said block being adjustable

by means of said screws to change the po-
sition of the said movable member. 125

31. In a sound box, the combination with
a flexible sound reproducing valve, mounted
to oscillate, of a casing inclosing said valve,

1,060,672

&

and means adjustable from the outside of
said casing for applying a pressure adjacent
to the free end of said valve.

32. In a sound box, the combination with
5 a substantially flat valve seat of a flexible
sound reproducing valve mounted to oscil-
late on an axis, a casing inclosing said valve,
yielding means adjustable from the outside
of said casing for applying a pressure to the

10 free end of said valve, and in a direction
substantially perpendicular to said seat.

3.3. In a sound box, the combination of a
casing, a valve seat therein provided with
a poi't, a \alve for opening and closing said

15 port in accordance with sound waves, and
means cooperating within said casing with
said valve, and adjustable from outside said
casing for counterbalancing pressure on the
inner side of said valve.

20 34. In a sound box, the combination with
a stylus bar provided with an aperture ex-
tending therethrough and a kerf extending
from said aperture, means extending through
said aperture to support said bar, and means

25 for drawing the sides of said kerf together
to clamp said stjdus bar on said supporting
means.

35. In a sound box, the combination with
a torsional support, of a stylus bar rigidly

30 mounted thereon, and a pair of split blocks
clamped on said support for supporting the
same.

36. In a sound box, the combination with
a A'alve seat, of a movable valve member

35 mounted to oscillate in accordance with
sound waves adjacent said seat upon an ad-
justable axis.

37. In a sound box, the combination with
a pair of fixed supports, of a stylus bar be-

40 tween said supports, and yielding means
connecting said bar to said supports, said
means being reduced in cross section be-
tween said bar and each of said supports.

38. In a sound box, the combination with
45 a pair of fixed supports, of a stylus bar be-

tween said supports, and a yielding tube
connecting said bar to said supports, said
tube being reduced in cross section between
said bar and each of said supports.

39. In a sound box, the combination with 50
a member forming a valve seat, of a movable
sound reproducing member mounted to oscil-
late with respect to said seat, and means to
adjust the position of said movable member

in a direction substantially parallel to said 55
seat.

40. In a sound box, the combination with
a valve seat, of a movable valve member
arranged to cooperate with said seat to re-
produce sounds, and adjustable in a direc- 60
tion substantially parallel to Said seat.

41. In a sound box, the combination with
a valve seat, of a valve member arranged to
be moved toward and away from said seat

to reproduce sounds, and adjustable in a 65
direction substantially parallel to said seat.

42. A stylus lever for talking machine re-
producers having an opening therein to re-
ceive pivoting means, said lever being
formed with resiliently connected portions 70
on opposite sides of said opening adapted

to snugly incase said pivoting means within
said opening.

43. A stylus lever for talking machine
reproducers having an opening formed 75
therein to receive pivoting means and hav-
ing a slot or kerf therein communicating
with said opening.

44. A stylus lever for talking machine
reproducers having an opening therein to 80
receive pivoting means and having a kerf

or slot intersecting said opening and ex-
tending to the periphery of the lever.

In witness whereof t have hereunto set
my hand this 22nd day of January A. D., 85
1907.

WILBURN N. DENNISON.
Witnesses :

Harry Cobb Kennedy,
Alston B. Moulton.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

Washington, D. C."

B. K. SMITH.

SOUND REPRODDCING INSTRUMENT.
APPLICATION PILED JUNE 5, 1911.

1,060,955.

Patented May 6, 1913.

2 SHEETS-SHEET 1.

^<i^<^^e-ev5'v5'ev5/

N

COLUMBIA PLANOOHAIMI CO., WASHINGTON. D. C.

B. R. SMITH.

SODND REPfiODDCING INSTRUMENT.
APPLIOATIOIT riLED JUNES, 1911.

1,060,955.

Patented May 6, 1913.

2 SHEETS-SHEET 2.

...Z7^x/■Gri^<>r^■

COLUMBIA PLANOQRAPH CO.. WASHINOTON, D. C.

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

BEN R. SMITH, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR TO SMITH REPEATOSTOP COMPANY,

OE CHICAGO, ILLINOIS, A CORPORATION.

SOUND-REPRODUCING INSTRUMENT.

1,060,955.

Specification of Letters Patent. Patented May 6, 1913.

Application filed June 5, 1911. Serial No. 631,347.

To all tchom it niai/ concern:

Be it known that I, Ben E. Smith, a citi-
zen of the United States, residing at 3922
Xorth Hamilton, avenue, Chicago, Illinois,
5 have invented new and useful Improvements
in Sound - Reproducing Iji.struments, of
Avhich the following is a specification.

This invention relates to repeating and
braking attachments for sound-reproducing

iO instruments, such as gramophones and instru-
ments of like character, and is designed for
the purpose of enabling a sound-reproducing
record to be placed upon such instrument
and played through, whereupon, according

15 to prearrangement of the device, the sound-
reproducing means, " or sound-box ", will be
replaced in position for repeating its travel
over such record ; or, if the device is other-
wise arranged, the apparatus will be stopped

-0 at the end of its performance.

Other objects of the invention will appear
hereinafter.

The device comprises, in general terms, a
shelf-like member which extends over the

25 .surface of the sound - reproducing record
(hereinafter called the "record-disk"), im-
mediately below the path of travel of the
said sound-box, and means operating at the
end of a perfoi-mance of one of such record-

30 disks, for inclining said shelf ; whereby said
sound-box is caused to slide (or roll, being
provided with a wheel for such purpose)
over the surface of such shelf and assume
the correct position for a repetition of its

35 travel over the record-disk. In such posi-
tion, according to a prearranged setting
of the device, the parts may be arrested, and
maintained : or said shelf may again assume
its original horizontal position and allow the

40 sound-box to repeat its travel over the rec-
ord-disk; and the instrument thereby to re-
peat the performance of the selection en-
graved upon such disk.

A device embodying thfe principles of the

45 present invention is illustrated in the accom-
panying drawings in which :

Figure 1 is a top plan view illustrating
the deAace in combination with a sound-re-
l^roducing instrument of well known form

5^ and known as a gramophone. Fig. 2 is a
similar view in enlarged detail of a portion
of the swinging shelf constituting a part of
the device. Fig. 3 is a vertical section on the
line 3 of Fig. 2. Fig. 4 is a vertical section

55 on the line 4 of Fig. 1. Fig. 5 is a horizontal

section on the line 5 of Fig. 4. Fig. 6 is an
enlarged detail view of a portion of Fig. 4,
but showing the parts in an altered position.
Fig. 7 is a vertical section on the line 7 of
Fig. 5. Fig. 8 is a vertical section on the line 60
8 of Fig. 1. Fig. 9 is a vertical section on the
line 9 of Fig. 1. Fig. 10 is a vertical section
on the line 10 of Fig. 1. Fig. 11 is a vertical
section on the line 11 of Fig. 8.

As shown in said drawings, the gramo- 65
phone comprises a box or housing 12, ordi-
narily made of Avood, including a top, or
cover portion 15, in which box or housing is
arranged the driving mechanism for ro-
tating the sound-reproducing disk, or rec- 70
ord-disk. Above the cover 1.5 is arranged a
horizontal, circular, rotating table 16 Avhich
is fixed to a vertical shaft or spindle 17 pass-
ing through said cover. Upon such rotating
table is placed the record-disk 18, Avhich lat- 75
ter is thereupon rotated, in the operation of
the device, by its frictional engagement with
said rotating table. A long, hollow, hori-
zontal arm 20, hinged upon a bracket mem-
ber 21 attached to the side of the gramo- 80
phone housing, carries at its free end a
hinged and curved hollow arm 19 support-
ing the sound-reproducing device, or sound-
box 22; the latter carrying a needle, or
stylus 23 which engages a spiral groove in 85
the surface of said record-disk 18. These
parts are shown in the form which they as-
sume in a well known form of gramophone
apparatus, and, except as hereinafter speci-
fied, their particular construction constitutes 90
no part of the present invention.

Above the table 16, and normall}^ lying
parallel thereAvith, is arranged a flat, shelf-
like member 25, which takes somewhat the
form, as seen in top plan view, of a letter 95
V; being arranged with its closed end over
the center of the table 16, and its opposite
ends extending beyond the circumference of
the same. The latter are hinged to the ends
of a horseshoe-shaped member or bracket 100
26, secured to the said cover portion 15 of
the gramophone box, and likewise extending
beyond the circumference of said rotating
table and upturned at its ends in order to
meet the ends of said shelf 25. The said 105
shelf 25, and the bracket member 26, are con-
A'eniently made of sheet metal, and their re-
lated ends take the form of hinge leaA-es,
the parts being connected by means of re-
movable pins, or "loose butts ''^ 30, 30. The lIC

1,060,955

bracket 26 is conveniently secured to the
cover 15 by means of screws 31, passing-
through slots (indicated by the dotted lines)
in said bracket, "whereby, after temporarily
5 detaching the table 16 from its spindle, the
bracket may be accurately located xipon the
cover 15 for the shelf 25 to assume its cor-
rect position with respect to such spindle.
To the upper end of the shaft 17 is fixed

10 an externally threaded stud or screw 32, as
here shown designed to replace the shorter
unthreaded stud ordinarily placed in the
center of the rotating table of the type of
gramophone here illustrated, said screw be-

15 ing made hollow at its lower end and inter-
nally threaded for engagement with the re-
duced and correspondingly threaded upper
end of the shaft 17. It is desirable that the
screw 32, instead of having threads of or-

20 dinary form, be made with threads having
somewhat the form, in cross-section, of up-
wardly-facing saw-teeth, as shown, in order
to secure more effective engagement there-
with of another part of the device, herein-

25 after described. •

The screw 32 extends through an opening
in the shelf 25, and is somewhat enlarged in
diameter at its lower end to provide a shoul-
der 33 upon which the inner end of said

30 shelf rests. In the normal operation of the
gramophone apparatus the shelf 25 occupies
a horizontal position as shown in the full
lines in Fig. 4. and the sound-box 22, in its
travel over the record-disk, remains a small

35 distance above said shelf, and free from en-
gagement therewith. When said sound-box
has reached the end of its travel over the
record-disk, parts carried by said shelf are
designed to engage with the screw 32, and,

40 by the rotation of the latter, to raise said
shelf into its inclined position, as shown by
the dotted lines in Fig. 4; whereupon the
latter engages with a small wheel 36, mount-
ed in a forked bracket member 37 attached

45 to said sound-box, and said sound-box is
lifted from the record-disk, and travels down
the inclined surface of the shelf to its initial
position at the circumference of the disk.
According to a prearranged setting of the

SO device, the parts may either remain in this
position, with the shelf 25 raised, the sound-
box out of engagement Avith the record-disk,
and the rotating table free to revolve until
its driving spring has unwound ; or the

55 braking device comprising a part of the
present invention may engage with said ro-
tating table and arrest its rotation; or the
shelf 25 may be again lowered, the sound-box
replaced in engagement with the record-disk,

60 and the apparatus allowed to repeat its per-
formance.

The means whereby the shelf 25 is brought
into engagement with the screw 32 in order
that the rotation of the latter may taise the

65 inner end of said shelf comprises a small

block 40 (Figs. 1, 4, 8 and 11) which is re-
cessed along its sides (Fig. 11) to engage
with and slide in a radial slot in said shelf
Avhereby said block may be slid toward, or
from the screw 32; said block having its
inner end formed in the shape of a thin,
concavely curved edge, or thread 41, (Fig.
8) adapted to engage with the threads of
said screw when the parts are brought to-
gether. A vertical pin or stud 42 affixed to
said block engages with a slotted lever 43,
pivoted upon the surface of said shelf and
attached to and controlled by a long arm 44
for swinging said lever about its point of
attachment to the shelf 25 and bringing said
block 40 into, or out of engagement with the
screw 32. Said arm 44 is attached to the
armature 45 of a pair of electro-magnets 46,
and means are provided for energizing the
latter as follows: A thin piece of wire or
contact point 50, is secured to the sound-box
and adapted for contact with an adjustable
contact point 52 extending laterally from the
shelf 25; these parts being suitably con-
nected to a source of electrical energy, as
will be explained hereinafter, whereby upon
the completion of the travel of the sound-
box toward the center of the record-disk
these contact j^oints are brought together,
the electro-magnets energized, the block 40,
through the medium of the long arm 44 and
the short lever 43, brought into engagement
with the threads of the screw 32, and the
shelf 25 thereb}^ raised. This raises the
sound-box 22 from the surface of the record-
disk, and after a certain degree of inclina-
tion has been reached, the sound-box com-
mences to travel backward upon the inclined
surface of said shelf and toward its outer
end. It is evident that almost immediately
upon the commencement by said sound-box
of such journey, the contact points 50 and 52
Avill be separated, but upon the raising of the
sound-box as above stated, contact , is also
made and the electrical circuit is completed
through the wheel 36 and the shelf 25, Avhere-
by the magnets remain energized and the
shelf continues to rise until said sound-box
has traveled substantiallj^ to the limit of its
outward travel; whereupon the wheel 36
IDasses upon an insulated portion 55 (Fig. 2)
of the shelf, and the circuit is broken. A
light spring 56, engaging with a pin 57 ujDon
the arm 44, then acts to move the same away
from the magnets whereby the block 40 is
released from its engagement with the ro-
tating screw 32, and. if it is desired to repeat
the record, the shelf 25 is allowed to descend
to its original position. Such descent is par-
tially aiTCsted by means of an air cjdinder 60
placed below the shelf and provided with
a piston 61, a piston rod 62 upon which the
shelf 25 may rest, and a small hole 63 to
allow the air to escape slowly upon the
downward movement of said piston, whereby

70

75

80

85

90

95

12?

1,060,955

8

the free fall of the shelf 25 is restrained. A
coil sirring fi4 within the cylinder acts to
again raise the piston when the shelf 26 is
again raised to its inclined position, suitable
^ holes C5, in the upper cylinder head, allow-
ing the air to escape from above the piston.
The contact jioint 50 is made thin and flexi-
ble in order that it may bend slightly, after
meeting the contact point 52, and allow the

IQ needle 23 to travel a small distance farther
along its spiral groove before the rising shelf
can lift it from the record-disk. Preferably
it may be made in the form of a coil spring,
being wound one or more times about the

15 needle-supporting portion GG (Fig. 10) of
the sound box.

In order to arrest the outward movement
of the sound-box 22 upon the shelf 25, a
fixed and a movable stop, 70 and Tl rcspec-

20 tiA'ely, are provided. The former is pro-
\ided u])on its inner face Avith a flat leaf
spring 72 which acts as follows: Upon the
descent of the sound-box 22 along the in-
clined surface of the shelf the ends of the

25 wheel-carrying fork 37 strike said spring
and deflect the latter, but it is designed that
the spring shall not have sufficient foi'ce to
raise the weight of said sound-box and move
it back along the inclined surface of the

30 shelf, but shall allow said sound-box to rest
in its extreme outermost position until the
shelf is again lowered. Thereupon the
needle 23 again comes into contact with the
surface of the record, Avhich likewise acts to

35 restrain said sound-box from being pushed
inwardly by the spring 72; but upon the
continued rotation of the record-disk, and
the continued pressure of the spring, the
sound-box is moved, relatively to the record-

40 disk, in a spiral direction upon the surface
of the latter until the needle 23 reaches the
first sound-reproducing groove upon the
record-disk; AAdiereupon it is further guided
inwardly in the usual manner.

45 The stop 70 is designed to arrest the out-
Avard travel of the sound-box 22 at the ex-
treme outer edge of the rotating table when-
ever a record-cfisk of the largest diameter is
used upon the latter; but if a smaller disk

50 is used, the movable stop 71 is placed in posi-
tion to arrest such travel at a correspond-
ingly shorter radial distance. For such
purpose the stop 71 is similarly provided
Avith a spring 73, and is provided at one end

55 Avith a cylindrically enlarged portion in the
form of a hub 75 through Avhich passes a
A'ertical shaft, or pin 76, extending through
and engaging in an opening through the
shelf. A flange or collar 78, upon the loAver

60 end of said pin, and a spring 79, act to
maintain frictional engagement between the
hub portion 75 and the surface of the shelf,
and a short pin 80 extending doAvnward
from said stop into a circumferential slot

65 81 confines the movement of said stop to an

angle of substantially 90° ; whereby it may
be swung into its operative position as
shown in full lines in Fig. 2, or into the
position indicated by the dotted lines and
out of the line of traA^el of said sound-box. ^jq

In order that the distance of travel of the
sound-reproducing needle 23 iuAvard over
the surface of the record-disk may be varied
according to the area covered by the in-
dented portion of said record-disk; which 75
varies Avitli productions of different lengths
since the latter are ordinarily engraA^ed upon
the dislv from the outer edge of the same
iuAvard ; means are provided for jnoving the
contact point 52 in a radial direction over go
the sotating table. For this purpose the
said contact point projects lateralh' from a
long slotted strip of metal 90. Avhich latter
is slidably mounted upon the •-ur?ace of
the shelf 25 by means of screws 91, 91 ex- 85
tending through its slot and into me said
shelf. One of its edges is provided Avith
rack teeth 92, which engage, through the
medium of an idler pinion 93, Avith a small
pinion 94 upon a A^ertical shaft 95 journaled 90
in said shelf. The upper part of said shaft
is enlarged into (he form of a dial plate 9G
and a knurled handle 97 similar to the dial
and the handle of a safe, Avhereby, thi'ough
the rotation of said hand Avheel, the rack 95
may be operated to move the contact point
52 radially over the surface of the record-
disk.

The dial is suitably graduated and num-
bered so that Avhen its correct ])osition has 100
once been determined for any particular
record, a corresponding number may be
marked upon the latter, and thereafter, by
the operation of said dial, the contact point
52 may again be placed in its correct posi- 105
tion Avifh respect to the width of engraving
upon the record-disk.

Eeferring noAv to the electrical circuits
by means of Avhich the magnets 46 are ener-
gized and the above described operation of 110
the parts is effected, 100 indicates a source
of electrical energy such as a dry cell or
battery of ordinary form, Avhich may be
conveniently placed in the gramophone hous-
ing as shoAvn. From said battery a Avire 115
101 leads to the electronuignets 46, and
thence, by means of a Avire 102, the current
is '■ grounded " upon the shelf 25. The op-
posite pole of the battery is connected
through a wire 103 to one of the bolts 104 120
attaching the arm-supporting bracket 21 to
the side of the gramoplione housing. All of
said Avires are here shown as diagram-
matical only. Inasnuich as the gramophone
housing is ordinarily constructed of Avood, 125
the re-producing needle 23 rests upon a
record-disk made of insulating material, and
the sound-box 22 is entirely out of contact
Avith the shelf 25 Avhen the latter is in its
horizontal position, the electrical circuit 1^^

1,060,965

25

30

will remain open until the contacts 50 and
52 are brought together as above described.
It is evident, however, that if the gramo-
phone housing should be constructed of a
5 conducting material, the bracket 21 may be
insulated tlierefrom, or the circuits other-
wise arranged Avithout departing from the
spirit of the present invention. To prevent
the circuit from being completed through

10 the sound-box 22 and one of the springs 72
or 73, after the sound-box has passed upon
the insulated portion 55 of the shelf 25, the
spring' 72 is insulated from the stop 70 by
a strip of insulation lOG ; and for the same

15 purpose, the movable stop 71 as here shown
is made of insulating material.

In order that the operation of the gramo-
phone may be arrested if desired at the end
of the performance of a certain selection,

20 and without allowing a repetition of the
same, means are provided as follows for
supporting the shelf 25 in its inclined posi-
tion after it has been raised to such position
in the manner above described; and there-
after either allowing the table 16 to con-
tinue its rotation Tuitil the driving spring
has been entirely unwound, or braldng the
same, and thereby arresting its rotation.
For this purpose there is arranged beneath
one of the hinged ends of the shelf 25 a
toggle device comprising a short upright
lever 110, hinged at its lower end to a ver-
tical flange 111 rising from the pJate 26, and
free to move in a vertical plane toward and

35 from the adjacent cylindric surface of the
rotating table 16, being yieldingly drawn
away from such table hj a coil spring 112
attached to its upper end. To the upper
part of said lever 110 is pivoted the lower

40 portion of a someAvhat T-shaped member
113. The latter is flattened at its upper por-
tion 114 (Figs. 4 and 6) and a light coil
spring 115 woimd about its point of attach-
ment to the lever 110 tends to move said

45 member 114 outward, or away from the cir-
cumference of the rotating table. "When
these x^arts are released from their engage-
ment Avith the locking device hereinafter de-
scribed, such ontAvard moA^ement of the

50 member 114 is preA^ented, when the shelf 25
is down or in its horizontal position, by the
engagement of said flat surface 114 with the
under surface of the shelf (Fig. 4) ; but
when the latter is raised, the spring 115 acts

55 to move said member backward, as shown in
Fig. 6, and thereafter upon the descent of
such shelf after its release from engagement
with the screAv 32 it will fall upon the up-
raised inner arm of said T-shaped member
113, and its Aveight Avill act to force the in-
clined leA'er 110 toAvard the rotating table.
The latter is provided at its upper part Avith
a suitable brake-shoe 116, Avhich thereupon
engages the cylindric surface of the ro-

65 tating table and arrests the motion of the

/60

same. In such position of the parts, the
shelf Avill be permanently suppofted in its
inclined position as shoAvn in Fig. 6, and
the re-producing needle will remam out of
contact with the record disk. The spring
115 is relatively Aveaker than the spring 112,
in order that Avhen the member 113 is re-
strained from backward moA'ement, either
by its engagement with the shelf 25 above it,
or by the locking device hereinafter de-
scribed, the reaction of said spring 115 will
not press the inclined lever 110 against the
rotating table.

When it is desired that the rotating table
shall not be arrested and that the driving
spring shall be alloAved to unwind, means
are provided for restraining the iuAvard mo-
tion of the pivoted lever 110 in order that it
may support the shelf 25, through the me-
dium of the member 113, Avithout forcing
said lever into engagement with the rotating
table. These comprise a slotted bolt 120
adapted to engage with a pin 121 upon said
lever 110 and extending through an opening
in the upturned portion 122 of the outer end
of the bracket 26. Such outer end of the
bolt is threaded and provided with a thumb
screw 123, Avhereby said bolt may be draAvn
outward, against the influence of a spring
124, and its slotted end engaged Avith the
pin 121 to prevent the brake-shoe 116 from
being forced into engagement with the ro-
tating table.

The locking means, aboA^^e referred to, for
throAving the shelf-supporting and braking
devices, or the parts 110 and 113, out of op-
eration, comprise a bell-crank lever 130, haA'-
ing a short horizontal arm 131, and likeAvise
piA^oted to the flange 111. Said short arm
131 is adapted to engage with the under
surface 132 of the outer arm of the T-shaped
member 113, as shown in Fig. 4, whereby
said member 113 is prevented from turning
under the influence of the spring 116, and
will remain in the position shown Avhen the
restraining weight of the shelf 25 is remoA^ed
from its upper surface 114. Said member
is released from its engagement with the
arm 131 by moAdng the lever 130 into its in-
clined position and therebj^ depressing its
short arm, as shown in Fig. 6; and a spring
detent 140, adapted to engage with either
of tAvo radial notches 141, 141, in the hub
portion of said bell-crank lever, acts to
Adeldingiy maintain said leA'er in one or the
other of its positions, as shown.

A stop or rest 150 limits the angle of
movement of the shelf 25 to a little more
than 90° and provides a rest for the same
when it is raised past its vertical position
as indicated by the dotted lines in Fig. 4;
wherebA'' said shelf may be rested against
said stop for the purpose of removing and
replacing record disks upon the rotating
table.

70

75

80

85

90

95

100

105

110

115

120

125

130

1,060,955

The operation of the device is as follows :
The shelf 25 is first raised and a record-disk
placed in position upon the table 16, after
which the shelf is again lowered to its hori-
5 zontal position, the sound-box placed in cor-
rest position at the outer circumference of
the record-disk in the ordinary manner, and
the movable contact point 52 adjusted with
respect to the width of engraving upon the

]^0 record-disk; and if it is desired that the se-
lection shall be played through and shall
then be repeated, the locking lever 130 is
placed in i^s vertical position and the instru-
ment ])laced in operation. Whereupon the

15 sound-box will travel toward the center of
the record-disk until the contacts oO and 52
come together, the shelf will rise, the sound-
box will travel backwai'd upon its surface,
and the shelf will again descend and start

20 the sound-box upon a repetition of its for-
ward travel, as above described. If it is de-
sired that the selection shall not be repeated,
and that the rotating table shall be stopped
at the end of the performance, the locking

25 lever 130 is operated to release the shelf-
supporting and braking lever 110; where-
upon the shelf 25, after rising as above
stated, will descend upon the upturned arm
of the member 113 and brake the rotating

30 table as above described. If it is desired
that the performance of the instrument
shall be arrested, but that the table shall be
allowed to rotate until its driving spring has
unwoimd, the thumb screw 123 is turned to

35 draw the bolt 120 outward, whereby the
bralcing lever 110 is restrained from en-
gaging with the rotating table.

From the foregoing it Avill be seen that
the device is more especially adapted for use

40 in connection with the type of gramophone
having a horizontal record disk above which
is arranged a swinging horizontal hollow
arm with a sound-box hinged to its inner
end and, in the operation of the instrument,

45 resting with substantially its entire weight
upon the record disk. Such an instrimient
is known in the market as a " Victor "' gram-
ophone and such term herein used will be
understood as describing an instrument of

50 substantially the form and construction here
illustrated. The improved device hereinbe-
fore described ma}' be readily attached to a
Victor gramophone with practically no al-
teration of the latter whatever, it being nec-

55 essary mereh' to unscrew a small stud or-
dinarilj^ fitted upon the threaded upper end
of the spindle IT and substitute the screw
32, secure the base plate 26 to the wooden
top of the gramophone housing, place the

60 battery therein and make a few simple wir-
ing connections. The device may be as
readily detached from the gramophone in-
strument, if desired, by withdrawing the
hinge bolts 30. 30 and disconnecting the wire

65 leading from the battery to the electromag-

nets 46: and the bracket member 26 may
also be detached by withdrawing the screws
which secure it to the cover 15 of the gram-
ophone housing, and the screw 32 detached
from the spindle 17 and replaced by the sti;d ^g
which ordinarily takes its place, leaving no
parts exposed to view, and no marks upon
the instrument to detract from its appear-
ance.

I am aware of the fact that sound-repro- ^g
ducing instruments have heretofore been
constructed in such a manner that they may
be made to automatically repeat a selection
after having played it through one or more
times, but do not believe that a device has go
ever before been constructed which may be
attached to a gramophone of the general
type hereinbefore described with substan-
tially no alteration of the latter; and which
is adapted for ready disengagement from 35
the instrument with substantially no attach-
ing parts left affixed thereto to detract from
the appearance of the instrument; and
which moreover may be entirely detached
from the instrument without leaving any 90
traces whatever which are exposed to view.

I claim as ray invention:

1. The combination with a sound-repro-
ducing instrument of the gramophone type,

of a repeating device adapted for attach- 95
ment to such instrument without substantial
alteration of the latter and comprising a
horizontal shelf and means for inclining it,
and a braking device actuated by the weight
of said shelf. 100

2. The combination with a sound-repro-
ducing instrument including a sound box, a
sound-reproducing record and means for ro-
tating the same, of a repeating attachment
comprising a shelf arranged below the path io5
of travel of said sound-box, a screw engag-
ing with said record-rotating means and ro-
j:ated thereby, a member carried by said
shelf for engaging with said screw, and
means controlled b}^ the travel of said no
sound-box over the sound-reproducing rec-
ord for bringing said member and said
screw" into engagement and inclining said
shelf.

3. The combination with a sound-repro- 115
ducing instrument including a sound-repro-
ducing record, of a repeating and braking
attachment therefor, comprising a shelf ar-
ranged over the surface of the sound-repro-
ducing record, means for inclining said 120
shelf, and a braking device arranged beneath
said shelf and actuated by the weight of the
latter to arrest the operation of the sound-
reproducing instrument.

X 4. The combination with a sound-repro- 125
ducing instrument including a sound box, a
sound-reproducing record and means for ro-
tating the same, of a repeating attachment
comprising a shelf arranged below the path
of ti-avel of said sound box, a part fixed to 130

1,060,956

such record-rotating means and rotated
thereby, another part carried by said shelf
for engaging with said first part, means con-
trolled by the travel of said sound box over
5 the sound-reproducing record for bringing
said parts into engagement and inclining
said shelf, and means for supporting said
shelf in its inclined position.

5. The combination with a sound-repro-
10 ducing instrument including a sound box, a

sound-reproducing record and means for ro-
tating the same, of a shelf arranged below
the path of travel of said sound box, a part
fixed to the center of said record rotating

15 means and rotated thereby, another part car-
ried by said shelf for engaging with said
first part, means controlled b}^ the travel of
said sound box over the sound-reproducing
record for bringing said parts into engage-

20 ment and inclining said shelf to permit said
sound box to travel backward upon it, and
adjustable means for arresting the backward
travel of said sound box and operating upon
the restoration of said shelf to its horizontal

25 jDOsition to impel said sound box in the direc-
tion of its forward travel over said sound-
rejDroducing record.

6. The combination with a sound-repro-
ducing instrument including a rotating

30 sound-reproducing record, means for sup-
porting and rotating the same, and a sound-
box traveling over and engaging with its
surface, of a vertical screw engaging with
and rotated by said means, a normally hori-

35 zontal shelf extending over the surface of
said sound-reproducing record, a sliding
block carried by said shelf and adapted to
engage with said screw, means engaging
Avith said block to move the same toward

40 said screw, an electro-magnet likewise car-
ried by said shelf and adapted to operate
said last mentioned means, and contact
Ijoints carried hj said sound-box and said
shelf for completing the circuit through said

45 electro-magnet, one of such contact points
being adjustable for varying the place of
contact between them with reference to the
position of said sound-box over the sound-
reproducing record.

50 7. The combination with a sound-repro-
ducing instrument including a rotating
sound-reproducing record, means for sup-
porting and rotating the same, and a sound-
box traveling over and engaging with its

55 surface, of a normally horizontal shelf ar-
ranged over the surface of said sound-repro-
ducing record, means for raising the same
into an inclined position, a braking means
operating to support saicl shelf in such in-

60 clined position and actuated by the weight
thereof to arrest the operation of said in-
strument, and means for restraining such

braking means from engagement with the
instrument.

8. The combination with a sound-repro- 65
ducing instrument including a traveling
sound-box, of a detachable repeating and
braking device therefor, an electro-magnet
for operating such device, contact points for
closing the circuit through said electro- 70
magnet, one of such contact points being
carried by the sound-box, and means for
varying the place of contact between said
contact points with reference to the surface

of said sound-reproducing record. 75

9. The combination with a sound-repro-
ducing instrument including a sound box, a
sound-reproducing record and means for ro-
tating the same, of a shelf arranged below
tlie path of traA'el of said sound box, a screw 80
engaging with said record-rotating means
iincl rotated thereby, a member carried by
said shelf for engagement with said screw,
and electromagnetic means controlled by
the travel of said sound box over the sound- 85
reproducing record for bringing said mem-
ber and said screw into engagement and in-
clining said shelf.

10. The combination with a sound-repro-
ducing instrument including a sound box, a 90
sound-reproducing record and means for ro-
tating the same, of a shelf arranged below
the path of travel of said sound box, a part
fixed to said record-rotating means and ro-
tated thereby, another part carried by said 95
shelf for engagement with said first part,
electromagnetic means controlled by the
travel of said sound box over the sound-
reproducing record for bringing said parts
into engagement and inclining said shelf, 100
and contact points through which the circuit

is closed, one of such contact points being
carried by the sound box and one of such
contact points being adjustable with respect
to the path of travel of said sound box. 105

11. The combination with a sound-repro-
ducing instrument including a sound box, a
sound-reproducing record and means for ro-
tating the same, of a shelf arranged below
the path of travel of said sound box, a part 110
fixed to the said record rotating means and
rotated thereb}^, another part carried by said
shelf for engagement Avith said first part,
and means controlled by the travel of said
sound box over the sound-reproducing rec- 115
ord for bringing such parts together and in-
clining said shelf.

In witness whereof, I have hereunto sub-
scribed my name in the presence of two wit-
nesses this first day of June, 1911.

BEN E. SMITH.
"\'\'"itnesses :

Frank Lowenthal,
Ben. C. Fuller.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

Washington, D. C."

1,061,070.

A. HAYES.

NEEDLE OR STYLUS.
APPLICATION FILED MAE. 8, 1913,

Patented May 6, 1913.

,^y^,s.

'y/ip.y.

^y.^.s.

y^^i^.^.

y^y/:^.s.

INVENTOR

4^ ^l/)ert /^Gf/e^,

ATTORNEY

eOLVMitnC njUtlOORAPH CO., WASHINOTON. D. C.

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

ALBERT HAYES, OF SALT LAKE CITY, UTAH.
NEEDLE OR STYLUS.

1,061,070.

Specification of letters Patent. Patented May 6, 1913.

Application filed March 8, 1913. Serial No. 752,884.

To all whom, it may concern :

Be it known that I, Albert Hayes, a
citizen of the United States, i-esiding at Salt
Lake City, in the county of Salt Lake, State
5 of Utah, have invented certain new and use-
ful Improvements in Needles or Styli, of
which the following is a description, ref-
erence being had to the accompanying
drawings, forming a part hereof.

10 jSIy invention relates to improvements in
needles or styli for use in connection with
sound boxes of graphophones or gramo-
phones and has for its object to provide a
needle or stylus which can be used with

15 the least possible wear either upon the
needle itself or upon the record and Avhich
can be so shifted as to modify the character
of the tone produced as the groove of the
record is brought into contact with the end

20 of the needle.

With these objects in view my invention
consists in the construction hereinafter de-
scribed and claimed.

Referring to the drawings. Figure 1 is a

25 side elevation of a needle or stylus embody-
ing my invention, the needle or stylus be-
ing turned into position to give a loud or
full tone. Fig. 2 is a similar view but show-
ing the needle turned into position to give a

30 soft or subdued tone. Fig. 3 is a detail
view of the needle or stylus as shown in
P'ig. 1, but on an enlarged scale. Fig. 4 is
a detail view of the needle or stylus as shown
in Fig. 2, but on an enlarged scale, and Fig.

35 5 is a cross sectional view on line a — a of
Fig. 4.

In the drawings 1, indicates the shank of
the needle which is preferably cylindrical
in cross section and is adapted to be re-

40 ceived in a holder 2 in which it is secured by
set screw 3. The needle has a cylindrical
outer end portion 4 adapted to be received
in the groove of the record disk or cylinder
and to receive and transmit vibrations

45 caused by the irx-egularities. in the sides of
the gi'ooves. The extreme end 5 of the end
portion 5 is rounded so that it will not cut

or plow into the bottom of the groove of
the record disk or cylinder and the end por-
tion is of the same diameter throughout its 50
length from its point to its upj)er end at
which it merges into a flattened portion 6.

The thickness of this flattened portion be-
ing preferably substantially the same as the
diameter of the cylindrical end portion 4 55
while the shank 1 is of much greater di-
ameter. When the needle is set in the po-
sition in which it is shown in Fig. 1 this
flattened portion 6 adds to the rigidity of
the needle as regards any lateral movement, 60
but when it is set in the position shown in
Fig. 2 this flattened portion being thinner
than the shank is resilient and j^ielding and
to a certain extent takes up the vibrations
so that they are transmitted to the dia- 65
phragm of the sound box less forcibly than
when the needle is set as in Fig. 1.

While I am aware that the broad idea of
a needle having a flattened portion between
its point and its shank is not new I believe 70
that I am the first to use such a flattened
portion in connection with a needle having
its end portion adapted to be moved laterally
by the irregularities of the groove of the
record and of the same diameter from its 75
extreme end to the point at which it merges
with the flattened portion.

Having thus described my invention what
I claim is :

A needle of the character described hav- 80
ing a shank of relatively large diameter and
an end portion of relatively small diameter
and a relatively broad flattened portion be-
tween the shank and the end portion, the
end poi'tion being blnnt at its extreme end, 85
cylindrical throughout its length and ex-
tending directly from the lower end of the
flattened portion.

This specification signed and witnessed
this 8th day of March, A. D. 1913.

ALBERT HAYES.

In the presence of —
A. P. Greeley,
H. P. Howard, Jr.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

Washington, D. <',."

A, HATES.

SOUND BOX.

AEPLIOATIOH riLED MAB. 8, 1913.

1,061,071.

Patented May 6, 1913.

^^4^^ — ^

INVENTOR

COLUMBIA PLANOCRAPH CO.. WASHINGTON, D. Z.

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE

ALBERT HAYES, OF SALT LAKE CITY, UTAH.
SOUND-BOX.

1,061,071.

Specification of letters Patent. Patented May 6, 1913.

Application filed March 8, 1913. Serial No. 752,886.

To all whom it may concern:

Be it known that I, Ai^bert Hayes, a
citizen of the United States, residing at Salt
Lake Cit^^, in the county of Salt Lake, State
5 of Utah, have invented certain new and use-
ful Improvements in Sound-Boxes, of which
the following is a description, reference
being had to the accompanying drawings,
forming a part hereof.

10 My invention relates to sound boxes for
gramophone and gTaphophone reproducers
and has for its object to provide a sound
box which will produce improved results in
the reproduction of sound from a record

15 disk or cylinder or other means for causing
vibration of a diaphragm particularly in-
creased loudness, gTeater clearness, greater
sweetness of tone, the production of throat
notes as against the nasal tones character-

20 istic of most sound reproducers in use, and
the elimination of overtones.

With these objects in view my invention
consists in the construction and combination
of elements hereinafter described and

25 claimed.

Referring to the drawings, Figure 1 is a
central vertical sectional view of a sound
box embodying my invention on the plane
of the lever by which the diaphragm is vi-

30 brated. Fig. 2 is a central vertical sectional
view on a plane at right angles to that on
which Fig. 1 is taken, and Fig. 3 is a bot-
tom plan view of the sounding board and
the ring which carries it.

35 In the drawings 1 indicates the body of
the sound box having central opening 2 in
which is received the end of the horn or
sound tube (not shown). This body 1 has
at its periphery a flange 3. Within the

■*0 chamber formed by the flange 3 concentric
with the opening 2 is a ring 4 the face of
which is dressed off and is throughout in
the same plane which plane is at right
angles with the axis of the body 1. Be-

^^ tween the ring 4 and the flange 3 is a de-
pressed annular channel 5 which is so
formed that it is deeper, relative to the
plane of the face of the ring 4, on one side
than on the other so that the plane of the

^^ bottom of the annular channel 5 is at a
slight angle to the plane of the dressed face
of ring 4. On one side the flange 3 is cut
away and is provided at the ends of the cut
away portion with lugs 6 each of which is

^^ provided with an inwardly extending bear-

ing point 7, preferably adjustable in the
lugs, to form the bearings for the trunnions
of a lever 9, the outer arm 10 of which is
provided with a socket to receive the needle
or stylus (not shown) a set screw 11 being 60
provided for holding the needle in position.
The inner arm 12 of lever 9 extends into line
with the center of the opening 2 and at its
inner end is bent toward said opening as
shown at 13. To the inner end of tbe arm 65
13 is rigidly secured a disk 14, preferably
of mica of a diameter slightly less than the
interior diameter of the flange 3, and pro-
vided on its periphery with a ring 15 of
compressible material such as semi-hard 70
rubber, that is rubber which has been vul-
canized sufficiently to make it harder than
soft rubber but not sufficiently to give it the
rigidity of hard rubber. This ring 15 en-
velops the periphery of the disk so as to 75
form a somewhat compressible ring above it
and below it.

16 indicates what may be termed a sound-
ing board. This is carried by a ring 17 hav-
ing inwardly extending annular shoulder 80
18 adapted to fit over and upon the ring 15
to force it downward so that the portion of
the ring below the periphery of the disk 14
will be pressed firmly against the bottom of
the annular channel 5 throughout its extent 85
so that the disk 14 will be forced or dis-
torted into a plane oblique to, that is not at
right angles to. the axis of the sound box.
The sounding board 16 is provided with
openings 20 preferably curved as shown, 90
and within the sound box are arranged
strings 21 jireferably of cat-gut having their
ends secured in openings formed in the ring
17, the strings being drawn taut and being
each arranged near to one of the openings 20 95
and in the same general direction as that of
the opening. By the use of the sounding
board 16 with its openings and the strings 20
overtones are eliminated so that the tones
produced from the record are pure and clear. 100

By reason of the bowing or distortion of
the disk 14 as above described it is much
more sensitive than it would otherwise be.
Its edges are firmly held and the only move-
ment permitted is a movement of the central 105
portion of the disk and this movement is I'e-
stricted by the distortion.

The portion of the compressible ring 15
which is beneath the periphery of the dia-
phragm is restricted by the outer edge of HO

a

1,061,071

ring 4 on the one side and the flange 3 on the
other side from expanding laterally when
put under compression.

It will, of course, be understood that I do
5 not desire to be limited to the particular
constxuction and arrangement shown as it
will be obvious that the precise construction
and arrangement may be varied without de-
parting from the spirit of the invention.

10 Having thus described my invention what
I claim is:

In a sound box the combination with a
box body having a central opening therein,
a diaphragm within the box body and

15 means for vibrating it, of a sound board ex-

tending over and closing the box body, hav-
ing openings therein, and strings under
tension extending across the sound box be-
tween the sounding board and the dia-
phragm, the sound board and strings being 20
arranged on the side of the diaphragm op-
posite to that which faces the central open-
ing in the sound box body.

This specification signed and witnessed
this 8th day of March A. D. 1913.

ALBEET HAYES.

In the presence of —

A. P. GEEELEr,

H. P. HowAED, Jr.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the

Washington, D. C."

Commissioner of Patents.

A. HAYES.

METHOD OF MOUNTING A VIBRATING DIAPHRAGM.

APPLICATION FILED MAK, 13, 1913.

1,061,072.

Patented May 6, 1913.

r/ Cr-/-

//-

a

//

C 7 , ^^ ^ Y 6 /& /7

f/£r.S^.

WITNESSED -X A^

INVENTOR
ATTOmSY

COLUMBIA PLANOaBAPH CO., WASHINQTON, D. C.

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

ALBERT HAYES, OF SALT LAKE CITY, UTAH.
METHOD OF MOUNTING A VIBRATING DIAPHRAGM.

1,061,072.

Specification of Letters Patent. Patented May 6, 1913.

Application filed March 13, 1913. Serial No. 754,063.

To all whom it may concern :

Be it known that I, Albert Hayes, a
citizen of the United States, residing at
Salt Lake City, in the county of Salt Lake,
o State of Utah, have invented certain new,
and useful Improvements in Methods of
Mounting a Vibrating Diaphragm, of which
the following is a description, reference be-
ing had to the accompanying drawings,

10 forming a part hereof.

My invention relates to methods of con-
struction and arranging the diaphragm of
sound reproducing devices such as the sound
boxes of gramophones, graphophones and

Id other devices in which sound is reproduced
by the vibration of a diaphragm, and the
invention has for its object to increase the
sensitiveness of such diaphragms and. to
thus secure improved results in the repro-

20 duction of sounds.

With these objects in view my invention
consists in the method hereinafter described
and claimed.
Referring to the drawings: Figure 1 is a

25 central vertical sectional view of a sound
box adapted to carry out my invention,
taken on the line of the lever by which the
diaphragm is A^brated ; Fig. 2 is a central
vertical sectional view on a line at right

30 angles to that on which Fig. 1 is taken;
and. Fig. 3 is a plan view of the sound box
partly broken away.

In the drawings 1 indicates the body of
the sound box having central opening 2 in

35 which is received the end of the horn or
sound tube (not shoAvn). This body 1 has
at its periphery a flange 3. Within the
chamber formed by the flange 3 concen-
tric with the opening 2 is a ring 4, the face

40 of which is dressed off and is throughout
in the same plane, which plane is at right
angles with the axis of the body 1.

Between the ring 4 and the flange 3 is a
depressed annular channel 5 which is so

46 formed that it is deeper, relative to the
plane of the face of the ring 4, on one side
of the axis of the sound box than on the
other so that portions of the bottom of the
annular channel 5 are in two different

60 planes with a shoulder 5' between them
with the result that when the disk is forced
down as hereinafter described a kink or
bend will be formed in it on the line of the
shoulders 5'.

55 On one side the flange is cut away and is

provided at the ends of the cut away por-
tion with lugs 6, each of which is provided
with an inwardly extending bearing point
7, preferably adjustable in the lugs, to form
the bearings for the trunnions 8 of a lever qq
9, the outer arm 10 of which is provided
with a socket to receive the needle or stylus
(not shown) a set screw 11 being provided
for holding the needle in position. The in-
ner arm 12 of lever 9 extends into line with 65
the center of the opening 2 and at its inner
end is bent toward said opening as shown
at 13. To the inner end of the arm 13 is
rigidly secured a disk 14, preferably of
mica, of a diameter slightly less than the 70
interior diameter of the flange 3, and pro-
vided on its periphery with a ring 15 of
semi-hard rubber, that is rubber which has
been A^ulcanized sufficiently to make it
harder than soft rubber. This ring 15 en- 75
velops the periphery of the disk so as to
form a somewhat compressible ring above
it and below it.

16 indicates a clamping ring secured to
the flange 3 by screws 17 and having an in- 80
wardly extending annular shoulder 18 adapt-
ed to fit over and upon the ring 15 to force
it downward so that the portion of the I'ing
below the periphery of the disk 14 will be
pressed firmly against the bottom of the 85
annular channel 5 throughout its two por-
tions so that the disk 14 will be so forced
or distorted out of a plane parallel with the
dressed face of ring 4 that one portion will
be lower than the other and a link or bend 90
will be formed in it on the line of the shoul-
ders 5'.

The lever 9 being rigidly held by the bear-
ing points 7 against any twisting, and the
end of the arm 13 being rigidly secured to 95
the center of the diaphragm disk, and the
periphery of the diaphragm disk being
lower on one side than on the other it neces-
sarily follows that the center portion of the
disk will be bowed or distorted as shown 100
in Fig. 2. By reason of this bowing or
distortion of the diaphragm it is not only
stiffened but it is given a considerable re-
silience so that when acted on by the lever
9 to cause it to vibrate it will return quickly 105
to normal position and will aid in restoring
the lever to normal position or state of rest.
The action of the groove of the record on
the needle or stylus is thus aided by the
spring of the diaphragm. No such spring 110

1,061,072

13

15

20

action is possible where the diaphragm is
so held at its periphery as to be free to be
vibrated bodily as in the ordinary arrange-
ment. In the arrangement herein shown
and described the diaphragm disk being
firmly held at its periphery the only move-
ment permitted is a vibration of the central
portion of the disk and this movement of
the vibration is permitted only by reason of
the kink, bend or offset given to the disk
as above described as a flat disk clamped
at its periphery could not be vibrated to a
satisfactory extent by force applied at its
center.

It will, of course, be understood that the
disk 14 is not at any time in contact with
the dressed face of ring 4.

The trunnions 8 are rigidly held by the
bearing points 7 against any lateral or ver-
tical movement so that the forcing of the
periphery of the disk 14 into a plane out of
that parallel to the face of the ring 4 can-
not cause any distortion of the lever 9.

By reason of the projection of the ring
4 above the plane of the bottom of annular
channel 5 the lower portion of the . com-
pressible ring 15 is held against inward ex-
pansion where pressure is brought to bear
upon the ring.

It will, of cdurse, be understood that I
do not desire to be limited to the precise con-
struction and arrangement shown and de-
scribed as it will be obvious that my method
may be carried out by apparatus differing

35

from that shown and described in details
of construction and arrangement.

It Avill also be understood that I do not
herein claim the construction of sound box
herein shown and described as that is
claimed in a separate application filed by 4q
me on March 8, 1913, Serial No. 732,885.

Having thus described rny invention what
I claim is:

1. The herein described method of mount-
ing a vibrating diaphragm which consists 45
in clamping a diaphragm at its periphery
against a surface one portion of which is
out of the plane of another portion so that

a part of the central portion of the dia-
phragm is forced out of the plane of another 50
portion of said central portion along a dia-
metrical line, and applying vibrating means
to the central portion of the diaphragm..

2. The herein described method of mount-
ing a vibrating diaphragm which consists 55
in so clamping a diaphragm at its periphery
that one portion thereof will be out of the
plane of the other portion with a kink, bend

or upset between the two portions extend-
ing across the central portion of the dia- 60
phragm and applying vibrating means to
the center of the diaphragm.

This specification signed and witnessed
this 13th day of March A. D. 1913.

ALBERT HAYES.
In the presence of —
A. M. Paekins,
Parker Cook.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

Washington, D. C."

C. RAMUS.
SOUND EEPRODUCING MACHINE.
APPLICATION FILED JUNE 17, 1912.

1,061,124.

Patented May 6, 1913.

2 SHEETS-SHEET 1.

WITNESSES

INVENTOR
Carl R.amus

BY

/h^yyT-jAih^

"^

ATTORNEYS

COLUMBIA PLANOGRAPH CO.. WASHINGTON. D. C.

1,061,134.

C. RAMUS.
SOUND REPRODUCING MACHINE.

APPLIOATION FILED JUNE 17, 1912.

Patented May 6, 1913.

2 SHEETS-SHEET 2.

WITNESSES

(^kj^/^^^Ut^^Z-cTZ^

fjj-n.

INVENTOR
Car) T?.arr)us

AUORNEYS

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

CARL RAMUS, OF PORT TOWNSEND, WASHINGTON.
SOUND-REPRODUCING MACHINE.

1,061,124.

Specification of Letters Patent. Patented May 6, 1913.

Application filed June 17, 1912. Serial No. 704,134.

To all whom if may concern :

Be it known that I, Carl Ramus, a citi-
zen of the United States, and a resident of
Port Townsend, in the county of Jefferson
5 and State of Washington, have invented a
new and Improved Sound - Reprodflcing
Machine, of which the following is a full,
clear, and exact description.

Among the principal objects which the

10 present invention has in view are: to pro-
vide a machine of tlie character mentioned,
adapted to be operated by records of differ-
ent shapes: to provide an attachment where-
by the usual disk-o])erated machine may be

15 utilized for sound - reproduction of cylin-
drical records; and to provide a simple
mechanism for operatively connecting said
attachment to the disk machine.
Reference is to be had to the accompany-

20 ing drawings forming a part of this speci-
fication, in which similar characters of ref-
erence indicate corresponding parts in all
the views, and in which —

Figure 1 is a perspective view of a ma-

25 chine constructed and arranged in accord-
ance with the present invention; Fig. 2 is
a front side view of a machine constructed
and arranged in accordance with the pres-
ent invention ; Fig. 3 is a detail view, on an

30 enlarged scale, showing in vertical section
the friction-driven wheel of the transmis-
sion gear employed in the present invention;
Fig. 4 is a detail view, on an enlarged scale,
showing an end fragment of a cylindrical

35 record and the fixed shaft on which the rec-
ord and mandrel rotate ; and Fig. 5 is a de-
tail view, on an enlarged scale, showing
means employed for suspending in inopera-
tive relation the soimd-box of the disk ma-

40 chine while operating the cylindrical record.
As seen in the accompanying drawings,
the box is the usual case for the motor of
what is known as a "disk-record talking-
machine" or " graphophone." The motor

45 contained within the box 10 is operatively
connected with, to rotate, a table 11, upon
which, in its usual employment, a disk 12
is disposed, being centered thereon by a pin
13. To follow the sinuosities of the spiral

50 groove cut in the disk 12, the sound-box 14
is furnished with a stylus or needle 15. The
sound-box 14 is pivotally mounted by means
of a goose-neck 16 at the small end of a
horn 17.

55 The usual method of operating this class

of machines is so well understood that it is
thought unnecessary to describe the opera-
tion in the present specification.

Heretofore, the above briefly described
sound-reprodiicing macliine has been oper- 60
ated in competition with another style of
sound-producing machine, commonly known
as the "phonograph," wherein a cylin-
drical record is provided to operate a sound-
box and sound-maenifying devices connect- 65
ed thercAvith. Desirable records have been
]:>roduced for both machines. This condi-
tion has necessitated that a person, in order
to enjoy both classes of records, has been
compelled to possess both classes of machines. 70
In the present machine, provision is made
for employing both classes of records, the
sound being delivered from both through
the horn 17. To this end, the fixed shaft 18
is provided with the usual mandrel 19 to 75
receive and hold the cylindrical record 20.
The said shaft 18 is fixed in suitable sup-
ports provided in end plates 21 of a frame
22, which frame is supported bv means of
brackets 23 on the box 10. " 80

Suitably mounted in the plates 21 is a
supporting rod 24 for carrying the bracket
arm 25 of the sound-box 26. The bracket
arm 25 is moved over the rod 24 by a feed-
screw 27, the fine pitched threads thereof are 85
engaged by a device provided in the sleeve
28 when the ai-m 25 is dropped to the opera-
tive position for the sound-box 26. In the
present machine, the screw 27 is rotated in
the usual manner by power supplied through 90
transmission gear wheels 30 and 31, as best
seen in Fig. 2 of drawings, the former of
which is engaged with driving gear wheels
32 fixedly connected with the pulley 44.

A driving mechanism for the mandrel 19 95
is herein provided, embodying the friction
wheel 33. The wheel 33 is furnished with a
rim 34 constructed of rubber or other suit-
able material to frictionally engage the sur-
face of the table 11, or of a disk, such as 12, 100
disposed thereon. The wheel 33 is loosely
mounted upon a short .shaft 35, and is fixedly
connected to a grooved pulley 36, as seen
best in Fig. 3 of drawings. The shaft 35 is
slidably mounted in a slot 37 formed in the 105
end of a lever arm 38, to rest over the table
11. The lever arm 38 is pivotally connected
by a pin 39 to a bracket arm 40 loosely
mounted upon a shaft extension 41. The
bracket arm 40 is held in position on said 110

a

1,061,124

shaft bj' means of small collars 42. The
shaft extension 41 is mounted upon the shaft
18, being bored and tapped to provide a
screw-thread in the end thereof to register
g with the screw-threaded end of the shaft 18
exposed when the setting nut usually pro-
vided for said shaft, is removed.

The lever arm 38 is rocked to the posi-
tion shown in Fig. 2 of drawings Avhen the
IQ machine is being operated by a record-disk
12. When the machine is being operated by
a record-cylinder 20, the lever 38 is disposed
in the position shown in Fig. 1, where the
wheel 33 rests firmly upon the table 11, or,
15 as above-mentioned, upon a disk such as 12,
disposed thereon. In this latter position, a
belt 43 is drawn tightly, to permit the rota-
tion from the driving pulley 36 to a driven
pulley 44 mounted on the mandrel 19, as
20 seen best in Fig. 4 of drawings. The rota-
tion imparted by the table 11 is thus trans-
mitted to the said mandrel, and thence to the
record 20 when mounted on the mandrel.
The extension shaft 41 is provided to
25 permit the lateral adjustment of the bracket '
40 to shift the Avheel 33 on the table 11 or
disk 12, thereby varying the peripheral speed
of said wheel and the consequent rate of
rotation transmitted to the mandrel 19.
30 In order to set the bracket 40 in the ad-
justed position, the collars 42 are provided
with any suitable form of locking devices,
such as the set screw 45.

To adapt the disk machine for transmis-
35 sion to the horn 17 thereof, a triple-extension
tube 46 is fitted to the goose-neck 16, and
between the same and the sound-box 14, two
of the extensions of the tube 46 being alined
for this purpose. The third extension of the
40 tube 46 is perpendicular to the other two
extensions, and is disposed, when the sounds
box is in proper position, to extend above
said other extensions, to have fitted there-
over one end of a flexible tube 47. The other
45 end of the tube 47 is fitted to the delivery
opening of the sound-box 26, as seen best
in Fig. 1 of drawings.

When the cylindrical record 20 is to be

used, it is necessary to lift the sound-box 14

50 away from the table 11 or disk supported

thereon, and for this purjoose, I use a bracket

member 48 formed from wire twisted to the

desired shape. As seen in Fig. 6 of the

drawings, the bracket member 48 is provided

55 with a looped end to extend under the horn

17, and with a straight end to extend under

the forward length of the goose-neck 16, the

intermediate part of the bracket member 48

passing over, and anchoring upon, the inner

60 length of the goose-neck 16. The member 48,

as seen in Fig. 5 of the drawings, operates to

raise the box 14 and to lift the stylus or

needle 15 from contact with the table 11 or

disk 12 carried thereon. Wlien, now, the

65 table 11 is rotated by the driving mechanism

with Avhich the disk machine is provided, the
wheel 33 is correspondingly rotated, and
through the transmission mechanism de-
scribed, the mandrel and the cylindrical rec-
oi'd 20 carried thereon are rotated. A stylus /o
carried by the box 26 now receives the neces-
sary vibrations from the cylindrical record,
which vibrations are transmitted through
the flexible tube 47 to the goose-neck 16, and
thence to the horn 17, where, being magnifTed 75
in the manner peculiar to constructions of
this character, the vibrations are delivered
to the surrounding atmosphere to produce
sound.

WJien it is desired to discontinue the use 80
of the cylindrical record 20, and to use the
disk record 12, the lever 38 is lifted to re-
move the wheel 33 from the table 11, and
the flexible tube 47 is disconnected from the
triiDle-extension tube 46, the opening in the 85
end of said tube 46 to which said tube 47 has
been attached being now closed by a suitable
metal cap 49, as seen best in Fig. 2 of the
drawings. The bracket 48 is remoA^ed from
engagement with the goose-neck 16, atid 90
thereafter the disk reproducing mechanism
is ojDerated independently of the cylinder
reproducing mechanism.

"V^^ien it is desired or found practical to
operate both records simultaneously, this is 95
accomplished by removing the bracket mem-
ber 48 to allow the needle 15 to engage the
disk 12. In this conjunction, the wheel 33
will be permitted to track on the disk 12,
operating the box 14. To successfully and lOC
practically consummate the double use of
the records requires that the lever arm 38
or the wheel 33 be adjusted to harmonize and
synchronize the two records or sounds pro-
duced thereby. loi

The slot 37 is sufficiently elongated to pro-
vide an adjustment sometimes found neces-
sary for the wheel 33. To clamp the shaft
35 upon the leA^er 38, a collar 50 is, formed
on said shaft, and the end 51 of said shaft IK
is threaded to receive a clamping nut 52
and a lock nut 53. By means of the nuts
52 and 53, the shaft 35 is locked rigidly in
any desired position in the slot 37.

Having thus described my invention, I IIJ
claim as new and desire to secure by Let-
ters Patent: —

1. A sound reproducing machine, com-
prising a rotary record-disk supporting ta-
ble; a record-cylinder supporting mandrel; 12(
a plurality of sound boxes, one adapted for
operation by a record disk on said table and
the other for operation by a record cylin-
der on said mandrel ; a resonator perma-
nently in open communication with one of 121
said boxes ; means for temporarily establish-
ing the communication between said reso-
nator and the other of said boxes; a fric-
tion wheel adapted to engage said table or
disk mounted thereon; a pulley operatively 13t

1,061,124

connected with said wheel; and transmis-
sion means operatively connecting said pul-
ley and mandrel.

2. A sound reproducing machine, com-
5 prising a rotary record-disk supporting ta-
ble; a record-cylinder supporting mandrel;
a plurality of sound-boxes, one adapted for
operation by a record disk on said table and
the other for operation by a record cylin-

10 der on said mandrel; a resonator perma-
nently in open communication with one of
said boxes ; means for temporarily establish-
ing communication between said resonator
and the other of said boxes ; a friction wheel

15 adapted to engage said table or disk mount-
ed thereon; a pulley operatively connected
with said wheel; transmission means op-
eratively connecting said pulley and man-
drel; and a supporting ai'm for said wheel,

20 adapted to be moved to vary the operating
distance of said wheel relatively to the cen-
ter of said table.

3. A sound reproducing machine, com-
prising a rotary record-disk supporting ta-

25 ble; a record-cylinder supporting mandrel;

a plurality of sound boxes, one adapted for
operation by a record disk on said table and
the other for operation by a record cylinder
on said mandrel; a resonator permanently
in open, communication with one of said 30
boxes; means for temporarily establishing
communication between said resonator and
the other of said boxes; a friction wheel
adapted to engage said table or disk mount-
ed thereon; a pulley operatively connected 35
with said wheel; transmission means op-
eratively connecting said pulley and man-
drel ; a supporting arm for said wheel adapt-
ed to be moved to vary the relative rota-
tion of said table and mandrel and means 40
for locking said arm to prevent lateral move-
ment.

In testimony whereof I have signed my
name to this specification in the presence of
two subscribing witnesses.

CARL RAMUS.

Witnesses :

P. I. Carter,
A. M. Thomas.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

Washington, D. C."

W. W. YOUNG.

ACOUSTIC DIAPHRAGM,

APPLICATION PILED AUG. 1, 1911,

1,061,211.

Patented May 6, 1913.

Jiii_ 1_

yij&_ a_

ji

^ rili^liurt i ) •, \', i i i i i i . .y . . i ,i iH. , i i . I , , . ,.\

^,.v»,,-, ■, : ; , , ■, , ■,■,■, . ■, » ;■.■,■. I } i i i i , :■.■.■

m

Z ^

J«i_ 4.

7 3

WITNESSES.

INVENTOR.

^^^^^<.k<C*^^

BY

^^-^i

A TTORNEYS.

COLUMBIA PLANOORAPH CO., WASHINGTON, D. C.

L

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

WILLIAM W. YOUNG, OF AGAWAM, MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR, BY MESNE ASSIGN-
MENTS, TO LUCY A. YOUNG, OF AGAWAM, MASSACHUSETTS.

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

45

50

ACOUSTIC DIAPHRAGM.

1,061,311.

Specification of letters Patent. Patented May 6, 1913.

Application filed August 1, 1911. Serial No. 641,753.

To all whom, it may concern:

Be it known that I, William W. Young,
a citizen of the United States of America,
residing at Agawam, in the county of
Hampden and State of Massachusetts, liave
invented a new and useful Acoustic Dia-
phragm, of which the following is a .specifi-
cation.

My invention relates to improvements in
diaphragms having acoustic properties
which are designed especially for the sound-
boxes of talking machines, and consists es-
sentially of what may be termed a base mem-
ber slit radially and covered with a per-
manently fixed integument on one or both
sides, all as hereinafter set forth.

The object of m,y invention is to produce a
comparatively inexpensive diaphragm which
is inherently durable retains its acoustic
properties without deterioration for an in-
definite length of time, and possesses such
properties in so highly a developed state as
to make the diaphragm superior for talking
machine purposes.

A furtliei: object is to construct the base
member of the diaphragm in such a way
that the necessary amount of vibration is
provided for without unduly weakening said
diaphragm or taking from it the degree of
stability which is also required in order to
obtain the best results.

Other objects will appear in the course of
tlie following description.

I attain these objects by the means illus-
trated in the accompanying drawings, in
Avhich —

Figure 1 is a plan of a base member which
may be employed in my diaphragm; Fig. 2,
a similar view of a slightly modified form
of base member ; Fig. 3, an enlarged central
cross-section through a complete diaphragm
which embodies my invention in a practical
form, and. Fig. 4, a similar cross-section
through a diaphragm having integuments
on both sides.

Similar figures refer to similar parts
throughout the several views.

Diaphi'agms for the sound-boxes of talk-
ing machines are made in the form of disks,
for the reason that better results are ob-
tained from round sound jDroducing mem-
bers of this type, hence my diaphragm is
made round or disk-like.

The diaphragm comprises a base member

1 having one or more radial slits 2 therein, 55
and a covering or integument 3 on one side
of such base member, or two integuments
one on each side of said member, such in-
tegument or integuments being permanently
affixed to the base member by means of suit- 60
able adhesive and hardening material, as
lacquer, varnish, shellac, and the like.

For the base member 1 I provide a disk
of thin material which is resonant and re-
silient and possesses the other necessary 65
characteristics or qualities for reproducing
sound to the best advantage, such as alu-
minum for metal or a fine grade of card-
board for fiber, although I do not restrict
myself to these materials inasmuch as the 70
range of available materials for such base
member is quite wide, but merely mention
them as examples of two of the best ma-
terials for my purpose.

In Figs. 1 and 2, three slits 2 are shown, 75
but, while that number is most practical for
some diaphragms, for others less than three
or even more will be found advantageous,
and when only a single slit is present in a
diaphragmal base member the desired effect 80
may be produced. Each slit 2 radiates from
the vicinity of the center of the base mem-
ber 1 outward through the edge of such
member, and when there are three slits they
are preferably spaced uniformly. The slits 85
m.ay be made without removing any of the
material betAveen the contiguous edges of
each, as represented in Fig. 1, but I prefer
to cut out a narrow strip of material so as to
separate the edges of each slit, as repre- 90
sented in Fig. 2, because freer vibratory ac-
tion is thus permitted the base member. I
also prefer to enlarge the inner end of each
slit 2, as shown in Figs. 2, 3 and 4 where
such enlargements or perforations appear 95
at 4, since by so doing the vibratory action
of tlie base member and consequently of the
diaphragm as a whole is still further in-
creased, and this without impairing the sta-
bility of said diaphragm. lOO

For each integument 3 a thin fabric is em-
ployed, the same being much thinner than
the base member 1. In order to serve as a
good absorbent medium for the adhesive ma-
terial, as is desired, the fabric for the in- 105
tegument 3 may be a paper of fairly loose
texture. The integument becomes saturated
with the lacquer or other adhesive material

2

1,061,211

used, when it with such material is applied
to the base member, and thus is filled with
the adhesive material when the latter har-
dens, besides being securely affixed to said
5 base member. In this way the integument
is closely and permanently united with the
base member and enters so intimately into
the structure of the diaphragm as to form
with said member and the hardened ad-

10 hesive material a disk or diaphragm which
possesses ample strength and great power
to sustain and endure the multiplicity of
vibrations to which such a device is sub-
jected.

15 Ordinarily an integument 3 on one side
only of the base member 1 is all that is nec-
essary to cover the slits 2, with their enlarge-
ments 4 Avhen present, and bind together or
connect the slitted parts, as shown in Fig. Z,

20 but two integuments 3 may be employed, as
is sometimes desirable, as shown in Fig. 4.
Wliether one or both of the integuments be
incorporated in the diaphragm, the office is
the same in each case, such office being to

25 transform, with the aid of the adhesive ma-
terial, the slitted base member into a serv-
iceable diaphragm, which possesses all of
the desired qualifications, by closing or cov-
ering the slits 2 and connecting the parts

30 separated by such slits without interfering
unduly with the flexibility of said base mem-
ber, but rather converting a flabbiness which
the slitted member may have alone into the
kind of flexibility or resiliency required, and

35 at the same time lending itself in other ways,
such as those hereinbefore pointed out, to
aid in the perfection of the diai^hragm.
The filled and hardened integument, united
as it is with the slitted member, connects and

40 blends, as it Avere, the resonant vibrations
produced by and given off from said mem-
ber.

A diaphragm constructed in the manner
herein shown and described is capable of

producing most excellent and satisfactory 4 5
results in volume and quality of tone.

It is obvious that modifications, in addi-
tion to those made special note of in this
specification, may be made without" depart-
ing from the sjDirit of my invention. 50

What I claim as my invention, and de-
sire to secure by Letters Patent, is —

1. As a new article of manufacture, an
acoustic diaphragm comprising a base mem-
ber slit from a point outside of the center 55
thereof to and through the edge of said
member, and an integument affixed to said
member over the slitted portions of the same.

2. As a new article of manufacture, an
acoustic diaphragm comprising a base mem- 60
ber perforated outside of the center thereof
and having a slit extending from such perfo-
ration to and through the edge of said mem-
ber, and an integument affixed to said mem-
ber over the perforated and slitted portions 65
of the same.

3. As a new article of manufacture, an
acoustic diaphragm comprising a base mem-
ber slit from a point outside of the center
thereof to and through the edge of said 70
member, an integument adapted to cover
one side of said member, and a hardening
adhesive material capable of uniting said in-
tegument with said member and of entering
intimately and permanently into the texture 75
of said integument.

4. As a new article of manufacture, an
acoustic diaphragm comprising a base mem-
ber having a plurality of perforations there-
in adjacent to the center thereof, and also 80
having a plurality of slits extending from
said perforations to and through the edge of
said member, and an integument covering
one side of and united with said member.

WILLIAM W. YOUNG.
Witnesses :

F. A. Cutter,
A. C. Fairbanks.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents.

Washington, D. C."

p. B. KUGGLES.

NEEDLE FOR TALKING MACHINES.

APPLIOATION TILED FEB. 8, 1913.

1,061,408.

Patented May 13, 1913.

OMk}

■iiiiiiiiii II 1 1 I I I

II I I I I I I 1 1 i-i 1 1 mMiiiihiiiiiiM

Jk^^ ^ ^^,o/u4^

COLUMBIA PLANOGRAPH CO., WASHINGTON. O. C.

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

PERCY B. BUGGLES, OF WYOMING, OHIO.
NEEDLE FOR TALKING-MACHINES.

1,061,408.

Specification of letters Patent. Patented Blay 13, 1913.

Application filed February 8, 1913. Serial No. 747,029.

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

45

50

55

To all whom it may concern :

Be it known that I, Percy B. Ruogles, a
citizen of the United States, and a resident
of the village of '\^^Yoniino-, in the county of
Hamilton and State of Ohio, have invented
certain new and iisefnl Improvements in
Xeedles for Talking-jMachines, of which the
following is a full, clear, and exact descrip-
tion, reference being had to the accompany-
ing drawings, forming part of this specifi-
cation.

The object of my invention is to provide
a needle or stylus for sound, reproducing
machines, which shall have no injurious
effect on and thus shall prolong the life of
the records, and which shall be adapted to
increase the harmony and eliminate the
blasts of stringed instruments, while soften-
ing and mellowing the tones and entirely
avoiding the unpleasant scratching so fre-
quently noticeable in phonographic repro-
ductions.

I have discovered that the shafts of the
feathers of birds when denuded of barbs
and propei'ly sharpened possess in a re-
markable degree the characteristics requi-
site for a perfect needle for transferring the
recorded vibrations from the record to the
reproducing diaphragm. I am aw'are that
the quills of bird feathers have been sug-
gested for this purpose, but quill points are
not suiRciently rigid to withstand the strain
of a long record, and the horny structure
alone does not seem to be adapted to effec-
tively transmit the necessary vibrations.

The shaft of the feather from which the
barbs are removed, however, especially
when properly pointed and preferably arti-
ficially hardened, as will be hereinafter de-
scribed and claimed, fills the groove of the
record and most delicately responds to its
undulatory path so that perfect tonal effects
are obtained with the complete elimination
of all extraneous sounds, reproducing the
sound waves as perfectly as they were origi-
nally delivered.

In the drawings. Figure 1 is a side eleva-
tion showing the reproducer head equipped
with my improved needle. Fig. '2 is an en-
larged perspective view illustrating the
needle seated in one of the grooves of the
record disk. Fig. 3 is a side elevation of
the same. Figs. 4 and 5 are perspective
A'iews of the needle in different positions.

The reproducer head of a talking ma-
chine of ordinary construction is illustrated

by the numeral 1, with the outer end of the
swinging arm 2 and the holder 3 in which
the needle 5 is secured usually in a socket
in the holder by a set screw 4, the needle eo
resting in the groove 6 of the rotary disk
record 7.

While I have illustrated my construction
as applicable to disk records, my improved
needle is of course equally serviceable on 65
cylindrical or other records.

The needle itself is formed from the shaft
of a feather which has been denuded of the
barbs, leaving the strip substantially rec-
tangular in cross section, and these strips 70
are cut up into proper lengths and sharp-
eiied to form the point of the needle. The
shaft of the feather comprises an outer shell
thicker en the top and bottom and com-
paratively thin on the sides from which the 75
barbs have been removed, and with a softer
interior portion.

I have found that a more rigid and sub-
stantial point is obtained by cutting the
feather shaft on a diagonal plane, commenc- 80
ing at one of the corners of the top 8 and
side 9 of the shaft and running to the oppo-
site corner at 10. The point is thus sup-
ported and braced between the top and bot-
tom and the sides. Then in mounting the 85
needle in the holder, the needle is turned as
indicated in Fig. 2, so that the point 10
shall be seated in the groove, with the sides
of the feather parallel with the grooves of
the record, so that the plane of the cut shall 90
be radially disposed with reference to the
record disk.

The feathers of any of the domestic fowls
and of pigeons I have found very satisfac-
tory for the construction of my needle. I
do not, however, wish to be limited to the
use of any particular feather, nor to the
method of forming the point, as the essen-
tial feature of my invention consists in the
discovery that the shaft of the feather itself,
with its shell-like exterior and softer pithy
interior is admirably adapted for the pur-
pose. I have found, also, that it is of ad-
vantage and increases the effectiveness of
the needle to harden the structure artifici- 105
alh' by treatment with linseed oil, with a
small amount of turpentine and rosin mixed
therewith. The shafts are immersed for a
bi-ief period in the oil, and for speedy dry-
ing I also use with the mixture a small HO
amoTmt of Japan drier.

Having thus described my invention,

95

100

2

1,061,408

what I claim as new and desire to secure
by Letters Patent, is: —

1. A reproducing needle formed from the
shaft of a feather denuded of barbs and pos-
sessing an outer shell with softer interior.

2. A reproducing needle formed from the
shaft of a feather denuded of barbs and pos-
sessing an outer shell with softer interior,
and having a V-shaped point of the outer
shell to enter and fill the record grooves.

3. A reproducing needle formed from the
shaft of a feather denuded of barbs and pos-

sessing an outer shell with softer interior,
with the structure artificially hardened.

4. A reproducing needle formed from the 15
shaft of a feather denuded of barbs and pos-
sessing an outer shell with softer interior,
and having a V-shaped point of the outer
shell to enter and fill the rocord grooves,
with the structure artificially hardened.
PERCY B.RUGGLES.
Witnesses :

Thomas Bentham,
Helen L. Aichholz.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

Washington, D. C."

p. CATUOCI.

SOUND BOX.

APPLICATION FILED APB. 26, 1912.

1,061,729.

Patented May 13, 1913.

COLUMBIA PLANOOQAPH CO., WASHINGTON. D. C.

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

PLINY CATUCCI, OF NEWABK, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR TO A. P. MEISSELBACH &
BROTHER, A CORPORATION OF NEW JERSEY.

SOUND-BOX,

1,061,739.

Specification of Letters Patent. Patented May 13, 1913.

Application filed April 26, 1912. Serial No. 693,353.

To all whom, it may concern :

Be it known that I, Pliny Catxjcci, a
citizen of the United States, residing in the
city of Newai-k, county of Essex, and State
5 of New Jerse}', have invented certain new
and useful Improvements in Sound-Boxes,
of which the following is a specification.

The particular embodiment of my present
invention, as set forth in the annexed speci-

10 fication, is designed more particularly for
use in connection with the phonograph de-
scribed and illustrated in my co-pending
application, Ser. No. 693,352 filed on the
26th day of Api-il, 1912, and has for its

15 purpose the simplilication of structures of
this kind, and at the same time a material
reduction in the cost of manufacture.

The invention also lends itself admirabty
to a more delicate adjustment of the parts

20 than has hitherto been accomplished in
sound boxes of the character and Idnd for
usg on the so called disk record, such as use
the sharp pointed steel stylus needle.

In the drawings accompanying this appli-

25 cation, Figure 1 illustrates a rront or face ele-
vation of the sound box with the stylus lever
and stylus shown in plan. Fig. 2 illustrates a
longitudinal section of the same. Fig. 3 is
a perspective view of the clamping ring.

30 Fig. 4 illustrates the stylus lever and stylus
with the parts thereof separated to show the
details of their consti-uction. Fig. 5 illus-
trates an enlarged section of the jeweled
screw pivots used to support the stylus le-

35 A'er. Fig. 6 is a cross section of the stylus
lever showing the bead stamped therein for
strengthening the same. Fig. 7 illustrates
the stylus lever blank. Fig. 8 illustrates a
slightly modified form of stylus lever.

40 Similar reference numerals refer to like
parts throughout the specification and
drawings.

The box body consists of a plane disk of
metal 1 of considerable thiclaiess, and is

•*5 provided with the circumferential flange 2.
Through the center of the disk 1 extends
the aperture into which is rigidly inserted
the connecting thimble 3, said thimble be-
ing provided for the purpose of connecting

^0 the sound box to the sound conveying tube
4. On the front face of the sound box body
1 is rigidly secured the clamping ring 5 by
means of the screws 5' screw threaded into
the flange 2. The latter is made from a

65 disk of metal cut out in the center and

stamped to the shape shown in cross section
in Fig. 2. This clamping ring has a depth
beneath the inwardly extending flange 6,
to the outer face of its flange 7, a trifle less
than the combined thickness of the two 60
gaskets 8 and the diaphragm 9, so that
when the clamping ring 5 is rigidly se-
cured to the flanges 2 of the box body 1,
the gaskets 8 will be slightly compressed
with the margin of the diaphragm there- 85
between. Inasmuch .as the clami^ing ring
is accurately gaged as to thickness and di-
mensions, it will be seen that the gaskets 8
Avith the diaphragm 9 may alwaj^s be put
under the same comiDression, and this uni- 70
form compression is found to be one of the
important elements in the character of re-
production of sound in devices of this kind.
The clamping ring 5 is provided, upon the
one side, with an extension 10, integral with 75
the body of said ring, and this extension is
also provided with a pair of lugs 11, bent at
right angles to the plane of the ring and
said lugs are provided with screw threaded
apertures 11' to receive the screw threaded 80
pivots 12 in accurate alinement with each
other.

It is one of the objects of this invention
to provide a stylus lever, which in itself,
will contain all of the elements found to 85
be requisite in a stylus lever and its sup-
ports combined. The stylus lever proper
is formed from sheet steel blanked to the
shape as illustrated in Fig. 7, and it con-
sists of the strip 13 having the lateral lugs 90
14 rearwardly directed and provided with
accurately positioned pivot sockets 15. The
end of the blank is also provided with rec-
tangular projections 16. In this shape it is
ready to be pressed into the form illustrated 95
in Figs. 1, 4, and 8, wherein the lugs 14 are
shown bent at right angles to the general
plane of the blank, while the lateral pro-
jections 16 are bent into tubular shape and
the forward end is given a camber and 100
provided with a stiffening bead 17. The
stylus lever as thus formed, I find to be
very rigid longitudinally and yet to possess
all of the transverse elasticity required in
a substantially perfect stylus lever. In the 105
tubular pari, formed by the bending of the
projections 16, is located the stylus or needle
socket 18. This socket consists of a cylin-
drical piece of metal having the socket hole
19 extending into one end thereof and the no

1,061,720

lateral screw threaded aperture 20 to re-
ceive the set screw 21, whereby the needle
22 is rigidly held in position. The socket
piece 18 has a diameter a trifle larger than
g the inner diameter of the tubular part of
the stylus lever, so that when the socket 18
is forced into the tubular part of the stylus
lever, the arms 16 of said tubular part will
firmly grip the socket piece. I also pro-

IQ vide an aperture 23 on the upper side of the
tubular parts of the st3dus lever, so that the
set screw may pass through it and into
the screw threaded aperture 20 to grip
the neeedle 22, and thus the single set

15 screw performs the double function of
rigidly holding the needle in the socket 19,
and at the same time the set screw pre-
vents any displacement of the socket
piece 18.

20 In practice, the pivot screws 12 may be of
ordinary case hardened steel with cone
points, or if desired, they may be of a special
construction with jeweled points. To make
jeAveled pivots the ordinary machine screw,

25 like that shown in Fig. 6, may be used, said
screw having its point counterbored as at
24, with a small aperture 25 extending com-
pletely through the axis of the screw. A
cone point sapphire jewel 26 is inserted into

go the counterbore 24 where it is held in posi-
tion by cement, such as shellac or amyl-
acetate 27. The small aperture 25 is for the
purpose of preventing the trapping of the
bubble of air in the minute counterbore

35- which might result in displacing the
jewel 26.

In Fig. 8 I have illustrated a slightly
modified form of stylus lever. In this case,
instead of curving the forward portion of

40 the lever as illustrated in Fig. 4, the shank
13' is made perfectly straight with a rec-
tangular bend 13^ made in its upper end,
with of course, a further rectangular bend
13^ provided for attachment to the center

45 of the diaphragm by means of a rivet or
other attaching means as 28. In order to
render the stylus lever perfectly rigid, al-
though made of spring steel, I provide the
shank 13' with a longitudinal bead 17' run-

50 ning throughout the length of said shank,
and extending down to the cylindrical or
tubular portion 16'. The lateral arms 14'
are also of the same shape and configuration
as the corresponding parts of the form illus-

55 trated in Fig. 4. In order however, to ren-
der these lateral arms or lugs 14 more elas-
tic or resilient in the plane of the metal and
yet longitudinally rigid, the necks of said
arms are made somewhat wider and pro-

60 vided with the apertures 29 so as to reduce
their cross section and yet preserve the
longitudinal ligidity of the structure. In
this modified form every part of the stylus
lever is intended and so constructed as to be

65 practically rigid with the exception of the

two lateral arms or lugs 14'; these for the
purj)oses and objects above set forth are
made resilient in order that the pivot screws
12 may find a yielding bearing upon the
stylus lever. 70

From the above description, it will be seen
that I have by the construction illustrated,
provided a sound box and its requisite parts
at once simple in construction, easy to ma-
nipulatej not likely to get out of order, and 75
accomplishing all of the objects set lorth
in the preamble.

I claim,

1. In a phonograph sound box, the com-
bination of a body section, a clamping ring go
having lateral supporting lugs thereon, and

a diaphragm, a rigid stylus lever, having
resilient supporting lugs pivotally secured
between the lateral supporting lugs upon
said clamping ring. gs

2. In a phonograph sound box, the com-
bination of a body section, a diaphragm, a
clamping ring for securing said diaphragm
to said body section, lateral lugs upon said
ring, adjustable pivot pins extending 90
through said lugs in axial alinement with
each other, a rigid stylus lever connected to
said diaphragm, resilient supporting lugs
upon said lever, for resiliently supporting
said lever between said pivot pins. 95

3. In a phonograph sound box, the com-
bination of a body section, a diaphragm,»a
flanged clamping ring for securing said
diaphragm to the body section, rigid lugs
upon said clamping ring, a rigid stylus lever lOO
connected to the center of said diaphragm, a
pair of resilient supporting lugs upon said
stylus lever, adjustable pivots extending
inwardly from said rigid lugs for pivotally
supporting between them said rigid stylus 105
lever through said resilient lugs thereon.

4. In a phonograph sound box, the com-
bination of a body section, a diaphragm
and a flanged clamping ring for securing
said diaphragm to said body section, a pair no
of rigid lugs integral with said clamping
ring, and extending laterally therefrom,
pivot pins adjustably secured in said lugs,
and a rigid stylus lever secured to said dia-
phragm and resilient lugs upon said lever 115
located between said rigid lugs and held
therein by said pivots.

5. A stylus lever for phonograph sound
boxes, comprising a rigid strip of metal hav-
ing a pair of lugs extending relatively upon 120
opposite sides of its median line, with their
extremities bent at right angles to the gen-
eral plane of the lever and provided near
their extremities with pivot sockets, a sec-
ond pair of resilient lugs extending* re- 125
spectively upon opposite sides of one ex-
tremity of said lever, being bent into a tubu-
lar resilient ring, a cylindrical stylus needle
socket extending into and frictionally held

by said tubular ring, and a clamping screw 130

1,061,729

8

10

extending through said tubular resilient
ring through said socket to bear upon the
stylus needle inserted into the axis of said
socket.

6. In a phonograph sound box, the com-
bination of a body section, a diaphragm, a
clamping ring for securing said cliaphragm
to said body section, lateral lugs upon said
ring, adjustable pivot screws extending
through said lugs in axial alinement with
each other, said pivot screws each having an
axial counterbore therein, a jewel pivot ac-

cui'ately secured in each of said counter-
bores, a rigid stylus lever connected to said
diaphragm and resilient supporting lugs on
said lever for resiliently supporting said
lever between said jewel pivots.

In testimony whereof I have hereunto set
my hand.

PLINY CATUCCI.

Witnesses :

Louis M. Sanders,
W. B. Waltzingek.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

Washington, D. C."

15

C. M. ROOT.

STETHOSCOPE.

APPLIOATIOH TILED APK, 13, 1912.

1,061,963.

Patented May 13, 1913.

l^IC^. 1

irfa.3.

F'JC^. 3

WITNESSES

BY

.INVENTOR

ATTORNEY

COLUMBIA PLANOGRAPH CO.. WASHINGTON. D. C

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

CHARLES M. ROOT, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR TO PENN SURGICAL
MANUFACTURING COMPANY, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, A CORPORA-
TION OF PENNSYLVANIA.

STETHOSCOPE.

1, (Mil. 963.

Specification of Letters Patent. Patented May 13, 191 3.

Application filed April 13, 1912. Serial No. 690,616.

To all whom it rnay concern :

Be it known that I, Charles M. Root, a
citizen of the United States, residing at the
city of Philadelphia, in the county of Phila-
5 deiphia and State of Penns,vlvania, have in-
vented certain new and useful Improve-
ments in Stethoscopes, of which the follow-
ing is a specification.
My invention relates to stethoscopes of the

10 type patented to me No. 821,315, under date
of May 22d 1906 ; and in such connection it
relates particularly to a detachable sound
conveying tube member for employing with
a diaphragm transmitting sound member so

15 as to be quickly detachable for application
to diiferent size stethoscopes.

The nature and scope of my present in-
vention will be more fully understood from
the following description taken in connec-

20 tion with the accompanying drawings form-
ing part hereof, in which —

Figure 1, is a rear elevational view of the
sound conveying tube member of an ordi-
nary stethoscope detachably connected to the

25 diaphragm transmitting sound member, and
.so as to be readily adapted to different size
stethoscopes, the same embodying the par-
ticular main features of my said invention ;
and Figs. 2 and 3, are respectiA'ely, rear

30 views of two different sizes of diaphragm
transmitting soimd members of a stethoscope
adapted to engage the said attachment of
my invention.

Referring to the drawings a, is the dia-

35 phragm transmitting sound member of the
stetho.scope ; and 6, is the soimd conveying
tube member. The member a, on the arched
back a\ is provided with preferably a series
of headed-pins a-, arranged at suitable dis-

■^0 tances apart ai'ound the arched portion of
said back, as clearly shown in Figs. 2 and 3.

The concaved and perforated tube member
h, with its rear extending tubing Z>^, has
projecting from the peripheral portion
thereof, a series of catches Z>-, so arranged 45
as that when the concaved member &, is
seated in the recessed opening a^, of the
member a, by turning the said member h,
therein, the catches &'^, can be readily and
(juickly brought into locking engagement so
with the series of pins a^, of the member a,
to firmly hold together the two members of
the stethoscope for use, and as readily to
shift the member &, from the member a,
to a larger size instrument which constantly 55
becomes necessary in the practical use of
stethoscopes for organ soundings.

Having thus described the nature and ob-
jects of my invention, what I claim as new
and desire to secure by Letters Patent is : — ■ 60

A stethoscope having a transmitting mem-
ber, a sound conveying member and means
for lockingly securing said members, one
element of said means connected with said
transmitting member and consisting of a 65
series of headed pins a^, in triangular ar-
ranged position, and the other element of
said means consisting of a series of catches
6", and said means operative to attach and
detach said members to and from each other 70
by a manual rotary movement of the catches
of said sound conveying member, to thereby
accommodate such member to different size
transmitting members, as shown and de-
scribed for the purpose set forth. 75

In witness whereof, I have hereunto set
my signature in the presence of the two sub-
scribing witnesses hereto.

^CHAS. M. ROOT.

Witnesses :

Thomas M. Smith,
Helen F. Miller.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents.

■Washington, D. C."

W. H. COOK.

TONE MODIFYING DEVICE.
APPLICATION PILED MAY 28, 1912,

1,062,224.

Patented May 20, 1913.

^y

C^^r^c^-t^ /-^^^-gM^c/o..^ ^a^i

COLUMBIA PLANOORAPH CO.. WASHINQTON. O. C.

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

WILLIAM H. COOK, OF WEBSTER CITY, IOWA.
TONE-MODIFYING DEVICE.

1,063,324.

Specification of Letters Patent. Patented May 30, 1913.

Application filed May 28, 1912. Serial No. 700,498.

To all whotn it may concern :

Be it known that I, William H. Cook, a
citizen of the United States, residing at
AVebster City, in the county of Hamilton
5 and State of Iowa, have invented a certain
new and useful Tone-Modifying Device, of
which the following is a specification.

The object of my invention is to provide
a stylus supporting lever to be connected

10 with a diaphragm and so arranged as to
prevent or modify the harsh grating metal-
lic sounds ordinarily produced in phono-
graphs on account of the use of wholly
metallic material between the stylus and

15 the diaphragm.

More specifically it is my object to pro-
vide a stylus supporting device for trans-
mitting vibrations to the diaphragm in
which the stylus may be readily and easily

20 removed or replaced and in which the ten-
sion or the amount of frictional engage-
ment between the wooden and metallic mem-
bers of the stylus arm may be adjusted to
suit the requirements and to produce the

25 best results in modifying the tone of the in-
strument.

My invention consists in the construction,
arrangement and combination of the parts
of the stylus arm, whereby the objects con-

30 templated are attained, as hereinafter more
fully set forth, pointed out in my claims and
illustrated in the accompanying drawings,
in which :

Figure 1 shows a side elevation of a part

35 of a phonographic reproducer and a stylus
arm embodying my invention applied
thereto. A part of the casing is broken
away to show the connection between the
stylus arm and the diaphragm. Fig. 2

40 shows a transverse, sectional view of the
lower part of the stylus arm, and Fig. 3
shows an enlarged, detail, longitudinal, sec-
tional view of the lower part of the stylus
arm.

45 Referring to the accompanying drawings,
I have used the reference numeral 10 to indi-
cate the frame of the reproducer having
therein a diaphragm 11 of ordinary con-
struction. At the bottom of the casing 10

50 is a bracket 12 in which is pivotally sup-
ported a metallic reproducer arm 13 of ordi-
nary construction, which arm is connected
at its upper end to the center of the dia-

phragm 11. The lower end of the arm 13
is provided with a screw threaded extension 55
14 for purposes hereinafter made clear.

My improved stylus arm is formed of two
parts, one part being a metallic member 13
and the other being a wooden member which
comprises a body portion 15, an arched ex- 60
tension 16 and an upper end portion 17, the
latter being designed to engage the arm 13
near the point where it is attached to the
diaphragm. The body portion 15 is pref-
erably arranged below the end of the me- 65
tallic member 13 and is provided with a
bolt 18 extended transversely through it and
said bolt has on one end a loop 19 and its
other end is screw threaded at 20 to receive
a winged nut 21. The wooden body por- 70
tion 15 is provided with a recess at 22 into
which the loop 19 may be extended. It is
also provided at a point adjacent to the
recess 22 with a longitudinally arranged de-
pression 23. The stylus proper is indicated 75
by the numeral 24 and is of the ordinary
construction. It may be connected with the
body portion 15 by inserting it through the
loop 19 and into the groove 23 and when
thus inserted the winged nut 21 may be 80
tightened to hold the stylus firmly against
the wooden body portion 15 and in the
groove 23. To detach the stylus it is only
necessary to loosen the winged nut and push
the bolt 18 so that the loop 19 moves away 85
from the recess 22, whereupon the stylus ,
may be readily removed and a new one in-
serted. The arched portion 16 of the wooden
stylus arm member is provided near the
body portion 15 with an opening 25 through 90
which the screw threaded extension 14 is
projected, and a nut 26 is placed on said
screw threaded extension to rest against the
outer surface of the arched portion 16, as
shown in Fig. 1. 95

In practical use, and assuming that the
stylus is being vibrated in accordance with
the undulations of a phonographic record,
the vibrations will be transmitted first from
the metal stylus to the large wooden body 100
portion 15. These vibrations will then be
transmitted through both the metallic mem-
ber 13 and the wooden member 16 and 17 to
the diaphragm.

I have demonstrated by experiment that 105
by having the stylus arranged in contact

1,062,224

only with the wooden member of the arm,
and that by having an arm composed of a
metallic member and a wooden member held
in en'^agement both at the lower ends and
g upper ends thereof, the tone of the instru-
ment is modified and the harsh grating and
metallic sounds ordinarily produced when
a wholly metallic stylus arm is employed are
eliminated or modified to a considerable ex-

10 tent.

I am aware that heretofore stylus arms
have been made wholly of metal and that
stylus arms have been made. wholly of wood,
and also that stylus arms made of metal

15 have been provided with some sort of a cush-
ioning device between the metallic arm and
the stylus. None of these devices Avill suc-
cessfu.lly accomplish the purposes for which
my invention is intended. In cases where

20 ^ metal stylus arm is employed and a cush-
ion of a material such, for instance, as rub-
ber, is placed between the stylus and the
stylus arm, then the tone is modified but
many of the lesser vibrations are eliminated

25 entirely and all of the vibrations are weak-
ened so that the sounds reproduced by the
instrum_ent are relatively weak and are not
clear.

In cases where the entire stylus arm is

30 made of wood, I have discovered that the
vibrations will not be transmitted so faith-
fully as with a metallic arm. Hence the
tone, while eliminating the harsh and metal-
lic sounds, does not reproduce all of the

35 sound vibrations in a clear and satisfactory
manner. By means of my improvement the
metallic member of the arm tends to faith-
fully reproduce the sound vibrations in a
clear and loud manner while the wooden

40 member being held in firm contact with the
metal member near the diaphragm tends to
eliminate or modify the harsh metallic
sounds that are ordinarily produced by the
use of a wholly metallic arm.

45 I have obtained the best results and be-
lieve it to be advantageous to make a wooden
member having a large body portion at its
lower end to which the stylus is attached
and which is relatively inflexible.

50 I have also found it advantageous to pro-
vide in the Avooden member an arched por-
tion spaced apart from the adjacent part
of the metal arm member but held in contact
with the metal member near the diaphragm.

55 I have found that by adjusting the nut ■
26 to vary the tension between the wooden
and metallic arm members difference in the
sounds produced by the instriunent are no-
ticeable. The operator may, by a manipu-

60 lation of the nut 26 adjust it so as to cause
the instrument to reproduce sounds in a
loud and clear manner and without the
harsh, metallic and grating sounds usually
occurring in instruments of this kind.

65 The stylus arm, as illustrated and de-

scribed, is composed of a metallic and a non-
metallic member. For the tioti-metallic
member I preferably employ wood of a kind
having a comparatively close grain such,
for instance, as walnut. I however have em- -q
ployed wood and paper fibers of various
kinds and have demonstrated that various
non-metallic substances improved the tone
of the instrument, although I have obtained
the best results by the use of close grained »g
wood as the non-metallic member.

I do not desire to be understood as limit-
ing my invention to the employment of wood
as the non-metaliic member of the stylus
arm. gQ

I claim as my invention:

1. In a tone modifying device for phono-
graphs, the combination of a pivotally sup-
ported metallic stylus arm member, a non-
metallic stylus arm member in engagement gg
with the metallic member on both sides of
its piA'Otal support, and a stylus carried by
the non-metallic member.

2. In a tone modifying device for phono-
graphs, the combination of a pivotally sup- 90
ported stylus arm member, a non-metallic
stylus arm member spaced apart from the
metallic member at its pivotal point and in
engagement with the metallic member at op-
posite sides of said pivotal point, and a 95
stylus carried by the non-metallic member.

3. In a tone modifying device for phono-
graphs, the combination of a pivotally sup-
ported stylus arm member, a non-metallic
stylus arm member spaced apart from the 100
metallic member at its pivotal point and in
engagement with the metallic member at op-
posite sides of said pivotal point, a stylus
carried by the non-metallic member, and
means for adjustably holding the non-me- i05
tallic member in engagement with the me-
tallic member.

4. In a device of the class described, the
combination of a diaphragm, a stylus arm
comprising a metallic member connected to 110
the diaphragm, means for pivotally support-
ing the metallic member, a non-metallic
member comprising a relatively large body
portion, means connected thereto for sup-
porting a stylus, said non-metallic member 115
also comprising an arched portion extending
past the pivotal support of the metallic
member and engaging the metallic member
adjacent to the diaphragm, and means for
holding the non-metallic member firmly in 120
engagement with the metallic member on
both sides of the pivotal center of the me-
tallic member.

5. In a device of the class described, the
combination of a diaphragm, a stylus arm 125
comprising a metallic member connected to
the diaphragm, means for pivotally support-
ing the metallic member, a non-metallic
member comprising a relatively large body
portion, means connected thereto for sup- 130

1,062,264

porting a stylus, said non-metallic member
also comprising an arched portion extending
past the pivotal support of the metallic
member and engaging the metallic member
adjacent to the diajihragm, and adjustable
means for holding the non-metallic member
firmly in engagement with the metallic mem-

ber on both sides of the pivotal center of the
metallic member.

Des Moines, Iowa, January 12, 1912.

W. H. COOK.
Witnesses :

W. B. KooD,

J. A. BOEYE.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

Washington, D. C."

B. R. SMITH.

SODND REPRODUCING INSTRUMENT.

APPLIOATIOH TILED JUNES, 1912.

1,062,369.

Patented May 20, 1913.

4 SHEETS-SHEET 1.

MMBIA PLANOORAPH CO.,

B. R. SMITH.

SODND EEPRODUCING INSTEDMENT.

APPLICATION TILED JUNE 3, 1912.

Patented May 20, 1913.

4 SHEETS-SHEET 2.

1,062,369.

B. E. SMITH.

SODND EEPEODD0IN6 INSTRUMENT.

APPLIOATION FILED JUHE 3, 1912.

Patented May 20, 1913.

4 SHEETS-SHEET 3.

COLUMBIA PLANOGRAPH CO., WASHINQTON, D. C.

B. R. SMITH.

SOUND REPEODDOING INSTEDMENT,

APPLICATION PILED JUNE 3, 1912.

1,062,369.

Patented May 20, 1913.

4 SHEETS-SHEET 4.

COLUMBIA PLANOGRAPH CO., WASHINQTON. D. i

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

BEN R. SMITH, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR TO SMITH REPEATOSTOP COMPANY,

OP CHICAGO, ILLINOIS, A CORPORATION.

SOUND-REPRODUCING INSTRUMENT.

1,0(>2,3C9.

Specification of Letters Patent. Patented May 30, 1913.

Application filed June 3, 1912. Serial No. 701,195.

To all whoin it may concern:

Be it known that I, Ben R. Smith, a citi-
zen of the United States, residing at 3922
North Hantilton avenue, Chicago, Illinois,
5 have invented new and useful Improvements
in Sound-Eeproducing Instruments, of
Avhich the following is a specification.

This invention relates to means connected
with a sound-reproducing instrument for

10 automaticall}' causing such instrument at
the end of a performance to either repeat
such performance, or to cease playing.

The iuA'ention relates more especially to the
type of instrument employing a flat circular

15 disk, hereinafter referred to as a record
disk, for recording the impressions of the
various selections which are to be repro-
duced; such tyj)e of instrument being more
commonly referred to as a graphophone.

20 The present invention contemplates the
employment of an attachment for such an
instrument not previously designed for such
purpose, and such attachment is adapted
for engagement with the moving parts of

25 the instrument in such manner as to auto-
matically accomplish the necessary move-
ments to either cause a repetition of the per-
formance of a selection; or to arrest the
operation of the instrument.

30 The device comprises more ]:)articularly
an attachment which is designed to engage
with the sound-reproducing means, herein-
after referred to as the sound box, in order
to raise such sound box from the record

35 disk at the end of its travel over such disk
and place it in the proper position for re-
peating such travel, in the same manner as
is ordinarily done by the operator when a
repetition of the selection is desired; and in

40 addition, means are provided for engaging
with the rotating table or turn table which
carries the record disk for braking or ar-
resting the rotation of such table at either
the end of the first, second or a pre-deter-

45 mined subsequent performance of the selec-
tion, according to a j^re-arranged setting of
the device.

The device comprises in general terms, a
shelf-like member which extends horizon-

50 tally over the surface of the record disk
immediately below the path of travel of the
sound box and means operating at the end
of a performance of one of such record disks
for inclining the shelf by raising its inner

55 end; whereby the sound box is raised from

tlie record disk and is caused to slide (or
roll, being provided with a wheel for such
purpose) over the surface of the shelf and
assume the correct position for a repetition
of its travel over the record disk. In such «0
position, accoi-ding to a pre-arranged setting
of the device, the parts may be arrested and
maintained; or the shelf may again assume
its original horizontal position and allow
the sound box to repeat its travel over the 65
record disk and the instrument thereby to
continuously repeat its performance of the
selection engraved upon such disk as long-
as it may be actuated by its driving spring
or other impelling means with which the in- 70
strument may be provided; or the device
may be arranged to permit a limited number
of repetitions only, after which the braking
device is brought into operation to arrest
the further performance of the instrument. 76

A device embodying the principles of the
present invention is illustrated in the ac-
companjnng drawings in which:

Figure 1 is a top plan view illustrating
the device in combination with a sound-re- 80
producing instrument of well known form.
Fig. 2 is a similar view of the device de-
tached from the instrument and with a por-
tion broken away to disclose parts lying be-
neath. Fig. 3 is a view similar to Fig. 2, 85
but sliowing the moving parts in an altered
position with relation to each other. Fig.
4 is a vertical section on the line 4 of Fig.
2. Fig. 5 is a vertical section on the line o
of Fig. 1. Fig. 6 is a reproduction of a 90
portion of Fig. 5 on a larger scale. Fig. 7
is a vertical section through the axis of the
wheel 36 shown in Fig. 5. Fig. 8 is a view
showing the selecting and braking mecha-
nism arranged beneath the inclining shelf, 95
being shown as a horizontal section taken
on the line 8 of Fig. 9. Fig. 9 is a view of
the same parts in side elevation. Fig. 10
is a vertical section on the line 10 of Fig.
8. Fig. 11 is a similar section on the line 100
11 of Fig. 8. Fig. 12 is a view similar to
Fig. 11 but showing the moving parts in
an altered position with relation to each
other. Fig. 13 is a vertical section on the
line 13 of Fig. 9. Fig. 14 is a vertical sec- 105
tion on the line 14 of Fig. 8.

As shown in said drawings the grapho-
phone iiLstrument comprises a box or hous-
ing 12, including a horizontal top or cover
15, in which box or housing is arranged the HO

2

1,062,369

driving mechanism for rotating the sound
. reproducing disk or record disk. Above the
cover 16 is arranged a horizontal, circular,
rotating table or turn-table 16, which is
5 fixed to a vertical shaft or spindle IT pass-
ing through such cover. Upon the rotating
table is placed the record disk 18 which
latter is thereupon rotated in the operation
of the device by its frictional engagement

IQ with the rotating table. A long, hollow,
horizontal arm 20, pivoted upon a bracket
member 21, attached to the side of the
graphophone housing, cari-ies at its free end
a hinged and curved hollow arm 22, sup-

15 porting the sound-reproducing device or
sound box 23; the latter carrjdng a needle
or stylus 24, Avhich engages a s^Diral groove
in the surface of the record disk 18. These
parts are shown in the form which they as-

20 sume in a well known type of graphophone
apparatus, and, except as hereinafter speci-
fied, their particidar construction constitutes
no part of the present invention.

Above the table 16 and normally lying

25 parallel therewith is arranged a flat shelf-
like member 25, which takes somewhat the
form as seen in top plan view of a letter V;
being arranged with its closed end over the
center of the table 16 and its opposite ends

30 extending beyond the circumference of the
same. The latter are bent downward and
hinged to the ends of a horseshoe-shaped
member or bracket 26, secured to the cover
portion 15 of the graphophone box and like-

35 wise extending beyond the circumference of
such rotating table and upturned at its ends
in order to meet the ends of the shelf 25.
By this means it will be seen that the inner
end of the shelf -like member, being the por-

40 tion thereof lying above the center of the
circular rotating table, is free to rise and
fall in the o^Deration of the device, and the
j)urpose of bending its outer ends downward
and hinging them upon an axis somewhat

45 below the plane of the shelf is to also cause
the inner end of the shelf to move radialh^
with respect to the circular table a greater
distance than would be the case if its an-
gular movement Avere confined to an arc

50 having a vertical tangent at its foot; such
radial movement, as will hereinafter be more
fully explained, being necess<ary in the op-
eration of the device. The said shelf 25 and
the bracket member 26 are conveniently

55 made of sheet metal and their related ends
take the form of hinge leaves, the parts be-
ing connected by means of removable pins
or loose butts 30, 30. The bracket 26 is con-
veniently secured to the cover 15 by means

60 of screws 31 passing through holes in such
bracket, wherebj^, after temporarily detach-
ing the table 16 from its spindle, the bracket
may be accurately located upon the cover 15
for the shelf 25 to assume its correct posi-

65 tion with respect to such spindle.

To the upj)er end of the shaft 17 is fixed
a threaded stud or screAV 32, as here shown
designed to replace the shorter unthreaded
stud ordinarily placed in the center of the
rotating table of the type of graphophone
here illustrated, said screw being made hol-
loAv at its lower end and internally threaded
for engagement with the reduced and cor-
respondingly threaded shaft 17. It is de-
sirable that the screw 32 instead of having
threads of ordinary form, is made with
threads having somewhat the form, as seen
in cross section, of upwardly facing saw
teeth in order to secure more effective en-
gagement therewith of another part of the
device hereinafter described.

The screw 32 extends through an opening
34 in the shelf 25, which opening is made
large enough to permit the shelf to be raised
above the top of the screw for the purpose
of placing the record disks upon the table,
and removing them therefrom. In the nor-
mal operation of the graphoj)hone appara-
tus the shelf 25 occupies a horizontal posi-
tion as shown in the full lines in Fig. 5,
being supported by other parts beneath it,
to be hereinafter described, and the sound
box 23 in its travel OA^er the record disk re-
mains a small distance aboA^e the shelf and
free from engagement thereAvith. 'VVlien the
sound box has reached the end of its travel
OA'er the record disk parts carried by the
shelf are designed to engage Avith the screw
32 and by the rotation of the latter to raise
said shelf into its inclined position as shown
by the dotted lines in Fig. 5 ; whereupon
the latter engages Avith a small wheel 36
mounted in a bracket member 37 attached
to the curved tube 22 adjacent to the sound
box, and said sound box is accordingly lifted
from the record disk and traA'els clown the
inclined surface of the shelf to its initial
]Dosition at the circumference of the disk.
The said bracket member 37 comprises a
band 38 Avhich encircles the curved tube, 22
at the end of the latter immediately, adja-
cent to the sound box, the ends of such band
being secured together by a small bolt 39
and iDcing widened to form a flat plate in
the lower margin of which is cut a A^ertical
slot 40. The wheel 36 is mounted upon a
.shaft 41 having a shoulder 42 near one end
and being threaded at the other end to en-
gage with a nut in the form of a thumb
screw 43 between which and the shoulder
42, the portions of the plate 37 adjacent to
the slot may be clamped ; whereby the wheel
may be raised or lowered in the bracket in
order to accommodate the device to different
lengths of needle which maj' be used in the
sound box. According to a pre-arranged
setting of the device the parts may remain
in such position with the shelf 25 raised
and the sound box out of engagement with
the record disk, and the braking device may

70

75

80

85

90

95

100

105

110

115

120

125

130

1,062,369

operate to arrest further rotation of the
turn table; or the shelf 25 may be again
lowered, the sound box replaced in engage-
ment in a record disk and the instrument
5 allowed to repeat its performance one or
more times after which the bralcing device
may operate; or the braking device may re-
main wholly inoperative and the instrument
be permitted to repeat its performance an

20 unlimited number of times.

The means whereby the shelf 25 is brought
into engagement with the screw 32, in order
that the rotation of the latter may raise the
inner end of said shelf, comprises a small

25 block 50 arranged below the end of the shelf
25 adjacent the opening 34 and designed to
move radially in order to engage with the
screw 32, said block having a slot 51 at one
end engaging with a pin 52 fixed in the end

20 of the shelf 25 and having near its other end
a short pin 53 engaging with a similar
slot 54 which constitutes an extension of the
opening 34, whereby said block is free to
slide toward and from the screw 32 ; said

25 block having its inner end formed in the
shape of a thin concave edge or thread 56
adapted to engage with the threads of the
screw 32 when the parts are brought to-
gether. The pin 53 also engages with a

30 slot in one arm 58 of a bell crank le^'er 50
which is pivoted upon the under-side of the
shelf, said bell crank lever having a long
arm 60 for swinging it about its pivot jDoint
61 and bringing the block 50 into engage-

35 ment with the screw 32. The bell crank le-
A"er 59 is also pro^'ided with a slot 63 ex-
tending in the dii-ection of an arc described
about its pivot point 61, the ends of such
slot being designed to engage with a pin 64

40 fixed in the shelf 25 in order to limit the
movement of such bell crank lever.

The bell crank lever 59 is designed to re-
main normally in the position shown in
Fig. 2 with the arm 58 ahd the block 50 at-

45 tached thereto withdrawn from the screw
32, and is retained thus by a latch 66, which
latch comprises a pivoted lever having at its.
free end a pointed toe or foot 68 adapted to
rest upon the curved or cam-.shaped end 69

50 of the arm 58, the lever 66 being drawn to-
ward the end of such arm by means of a
spring 70. It is designed, however, that
Avhen the arm 58 has moved a small distance
in a direction to slide the block 50 toward

55 the screw, the latch 66 will operate to
quickly move it through the rest of its throw
and into the position shown in Fig. 3, and
will thereupon act to yieldingly retain the
block in engagement with the screw until

60 the block is again withdrawn in the further
operation of the device, as will be herein-
after described. For this purpose tlie end
of the arm 58 which engages with the point-
ed toe 68 is correspondingly pointed so that

65 after it has moved a sufficient distance to

carry the pointed toe 68 over the highest
place on its rounded end it will be quickly
thrown the further distance required to com-
plete its movement by the pressure of such
pointed toe and the engaging surfaces sliding 70
upon each other; the ciu'ved or cam-shaped
surface 69 being interrupted by cutting the
end of the arm ofl' diagonally to form a bev-
eled or wedge-shaped surface 71. When
the block 50 is in its withdrawn position, as 75
shown in Fig. 2, the pointed end of the foot
68 rests upon the cur\'ed surface 69 and
acts to yieldingly maintain the parts in such
position; but when the block has been
moved a small distance toward the screw, go
the foot 68 at the end of the latch lever 66
slides down over the slanting surface 71
to quickly comj)lete the movement of the
parts and hold the block and the screw to-
gether; the engaging surfaces between the 35
arm 58 and the latch lever however, being
arranged at such an angle that a sufficient
pressure upon the thin end of the sliding
block will force it aAvay from and out of en-
gagement Avith the screw 32, such with- 90
drawing movement of the sliding bolt caus-
ing the foot 68 to slide up over the pointed
end of the arm 58 and again rest upon the
rounded part 69, in which position the parts
Avill be set for a subsequent operation of 95
the device.

The means for operating the long arm 60
of the bell crank lever in order to bring the
block 50 into engagement wath the screw
comprises parts as folloAvs: Arranged upon loo
the under-side of the shelf 25 and extend-
ing in a direction parallel to the arm 60
Avhen the latter is in its normal position,
and over-lapping the end of such long arm,
is a sliding rack bar 75, the latter being Ion- 105
gitudinalty slotted near one end, as indi-
cated at 76, to engage with a pin 78 fixed in
the shelf, and haAnng at its other end a pin
79 engaging Avith a similar slot 80 in the
shelf. Along one edge of said rack bar are no
formed rack teeth 84 meshing Avith a pin-
ion 85 on the lower end of a spindle 86 ex-
tending through and journaled in the shelf
25, the upper end of said spindle being pro-
vided Avith a rotative dial 88 and a knurled 115
thumb wheel 89 similar to the dial of a safe,
by means of Avhich the spindle may be ro-
tated to slide the rack bar 75 lengtliAvise
along the underside of the shelf; a small
mark 90 being made upon the shelf to indi- 120
cate the correct setting of the dial as Avill be
hereinafter explained. At the end of the
rack bar 75 which OA'erlaps the long arm 60
of the bell crank leA^er, and by means of the
small pin 79, there is piA-oted a T-shaped 125
lever 92, the same comprising a head portion
93 which extends parallel to the arm 60 and
immediately adjacent thereto, and a long
arm 94 Avhich extends beyond the edge of
the shelf 25 and over the record disk in a 130

1,062,369

10

tangential direction. The bracket 37 above
described, Avhich is secured to the sound box
23, is provided with an integral marginal ex-
tension in the form of a pointer 96 which is
designed in the travel of the sound box to
engage with the arm 94 and swing the same
upon its pivot, whereupon the head poi-tion
93 will push against the long arm 60 and
rotate the bell crank lever about its pivot to
bring the sliding block 50 toward the screw
32, and the latch 66 will operate to complete
such moA^ement and hold the parts together
while further rotation of the screw will
raise the inner end of the shelf 25 beneath

15 the wheel 36 and thereby raise the sound
box and its needle from the record disk : the
inclining of the shelf being sufficient to cause
the soimd box, supported by its wheel 36, to
roll downward along the shelf to the outer

20 edge of the disk and in position for a repe-
tition of the performance of the selection.

In order to insure positive operation of
the parts at all times the screw 32 is made
of such length as to raise the inner end of

25 the shelf somewhat higher than may always
be necessar}^ to overcome the frictional and
other resistance of the parts and cause the
sound box to roll downward as aboA'e de-
scribed; and after tlie sliding block 50 has

30 engaged Avith the screAv the shelf aauII con-
tinue to rise until the sharp edge of the
block has reached the end of the threaded
portion of the screw, at Avhich point, by
reason of the inclination of the shelf its

35 projected length upon the record disk will
have become shortened sufficiently to pull
the block aAvay from the screAv and release
the end of the shelf and allow it to fall
back into its horizontal position; the block

40 being then retained in such Avithdrawn po-
sition and i-eady for a subsequent operation
by means of the latch 66 Avith its pointed
toe resting upon the curved end of the arm
58 as shoAvn in Fig. 2. It has been found

45 that on different record disks the length of
the engraving varies, and the inner ends of
the engraved spiral lines may be at differ-
ent distances from the centers of the disks.
The i-ack-bar 75 Avith its connected parts

50 is therefore provided in order to move the
arm 94 iuAvard and outAvard and to place
it in the correct position to engage Avith the
arm 96 on the sound box immediately after
the latter has reached the end of the en-

55 graA-ing. and not before; and the dial 88
is proAdded in order that after the correct
setting for any given record disk is once
obtained a corresponding figure may be
marked upon such disk and the same set-

60 ting again secured by simply turning the
dial to the correct position Avithout the ne-
cessity of closely examining the engraving
upon the disk.

At the end of its outAvard travel upon the

65 shelf 25 the sound box is arrested by means

of a stop 100 which is also made adjustable
to provide for record disks of different di-
ameters. Such stop comprises a base plate
102 Avith its ends up-turned or flanged, as
shoAvn at 103 and 104, to provide supports ^qi
for a sliding pin or bolt 105 which extends
through openings in siich flanges and is
provided Avith flat circular heads, 106 and
107 respectively, at each end. Coiled com-
pression springs 109, 109, are interposed be-
tween the circular heads at the ends of the
sliding pin and the adjacent bearing flanges
through Avhich such join passes in order to
cushion and absorb the shock of the sound
box striking against one of the ends of such
sliding pin. The base plate 102 is piA'oted
upon the upper side of the shelf 25 by means
of a small bolt 111 which passes through
such plate nearer to one end than to the
other in order that hj turning it about such
pivot point either its long end or its short
end ma}' be directed toward the center of
the circular disk to accommodate the device
to a small, or a large disk, respectiA^ely ; the
latter being ordinarily made in two differ-
ent diameters. The loAver end of the bolt
111 is provided with a nut as shoAvn, and
between such nut and the bottom of the
shelf there is interposed a spring 113 to
draAV the bolt cloAvnAvard and cause fric-
tional engagement betAveen the plate 102
and the shelf 25 ; and a punched depression
115 in such base plate is also designed to
engage with holes 117 in the shelf to main-
tain the adjustable parts in their correct
setting. There is also proA'ided beloAv the
shelf 25 means for arresting its fall Avhen
released from engagement Avith the screAV
32, such means comprising a dash pot de-
Adce in the form of a A'ertical cylinder 120
Avhich is mounted upon the base flange 26
of the device, such cylinder being provided
Avith a cylinder head 122 and having there-
in a piston 124 provided Avith a piston rod
125 Avhich extends upAvard through an open-
ing in the center of the cylinder head. The
piston is made a loose fit within the cylin-
der and the latter may be filled Avith liquid
such as gl5'cerin or oil if desired. In oper-
ation the descending shelf 25 is retarded in
its fall by the piston rod iipon which it
rests, the latter being retarded by the sIoav
escape of air or liquid from the loAver to the
upper end of the CAdinder. A coiled spring
128 acts to raise the piston when released
from the Aveight of the shelf aboA'e.

Referring noAV to the selecting device for
automatically selecting a pre-determined
number of repetitions and then bringing the
braking device into operation Avhen desired,
the same is arranged beneath the inclining
shelf 25 iind comprises a segmental shaped
flat plate piA^oted horizontally at its small
end and free to move up and doAvn at its
other end in the manner of a pump handle. 130

80

85

90

95

100

105

110

115

120

125

1,062,869

Such segmental plate is spring-pressed up-
ward but in eacli ()]^eration of the inclining
shelf 25 is j^nshed downward by the weight
of sucli shelf resting up(m its upper edge.
5 A pawl carried by the plate engages with
a ratchet wheel to rotate the latter a small
angular distance at each downAvard move-
ment of the pawl; and such ratchet wheel is
designed at the end of its rotative movemeiit

10 to actuate a braking device and arrest the
rotation of the turn table 16. The deter-
mining of the desired number of repetitions
is accomplished by setting the I'atcliet wheel
a measured tlistauce forward in its move-

15 ment at the beginning of the operation ; and
the braking device, is rendered inoperative
to permit of an indimited number of repe-
titions by allowing tlie pawl to rest upon
a smooth place on the circumference of the

20 ratchet wheel, the latter thus remaining
stationary. These parts more particularly
described are as follows : A flat vertical rec-
tangular ])late in the form of a wall 135 is
arranged beneath one arm of the shelf 25

25 adjacent the hinged end of the latter and
extending in a radial direction toward the
circumference of the turn table 16, such
plate being formed with an integral, hori-
zontal, supporting base portion 13G by means

30 of which it is secured upon the base plate
26 of the apparatus; and as here shown such
horizontal base portion 136 likewise consti-
tutes a support for the dash pot cylinder
120 above described.

35 In the upper outer corner of the plate
135 is pivoted upon a horizontal pivot pin

137 the small end of the segmental shaped
plate, 138, above referred to, the free end
of such plate being of sufficient Avidth to

40 extend from the base plate 26 to the shelf
25 when the latter is in its horizontal po-
sition, thereby constituting a support for
such shelf which rests upon its upper edge.
A flat, curved spring 142 pressing upon

45 the lower edge of the segmental plate 138
acts to push the latter upward at its free
end, such upward movement being limited
by means of a bolt 147 which extends
through an arc-shaped slot 148 in the large

50 end of the plate. It will be seen therefore
that upon each upward movement of the
shelf 25 the segmental plate 138 will be
raised by the spring 142, and upon each
downward movement of the shelf it will be

55 again pushed downward by such shelf. Ar-
ranged with its plane parallel with and ad-
jacent to the plane of the segmental plate

138 is a ratchet wheel 153 having in a part
of its circumference ratchet teeth 154 which

60 are designed to engage with a pawl 156 piv-
oted upon the plate 138 and pressed toward
such ratchet wheel by means of a spring
157. A second pawl 158 is pivoted about the
same axis as the plate 138, being mounted

65 upon the shaft 137 above described, and is

pressed downward and toward the ratchet
wheel by means of a spring 159 thereby pre-
venting the return movement of such ratchet
wheel by the frictional engagement of the
pawl 156 with its ratchet teeth. A large 79
flat plate 160 is arranged to slide radially
toward the turn table 16, being placed like-
wise parallel with the plane of the ratchet
wheel 153 and confined between such ratchet
wheel and a front cover plate or wall 162 yg
which, together with the back plate 135,
incloses the selecting mechanism; the two
plates being secured together by means of
bolts 164, 166, and the bolt 147 above de-
scribed. The two bolts 164 and 166 also gQ
serve to maintain the spring 142 in place, as
shown in Fig. 11, the spring being curved
about the upper bolt and its lower end en-
gaging with the lower one. The plate 160''
is horizontally slotted, as shown at 170 and gg

170, and the bolts 164 and 147 pass through
such slots, small spacing tubes 168, 168 be-
ing placed upon each bolt to properly space
the two walls 135 and 162 apart and main-
tain them in parallel and rigid relation to qq
each other. The plate 160 is also provided

at about the center of its length with a
horizontal slot through which extends one
hub 170^ of the ratchet wheel 153 and such
slot is continued upward at one end in the gg
form of a large rectangular opening 172
through which extends a crank pin 171 pro-
jecting from the plane of the ratchet wheel.
In order to better support the crank pin

171, the ratchet wheel 153, instead of com- -^qq
prising a single circular disk, is made spool-
shaped, having a cylindric drum portion
with integral circular heads at each end, one

of them comprising the ratchet wheel 153,
and the other being indicated at 174; and -j^q^
the spool-shaped member is extended at each
end beyond such circular heads to form the
hub 170^, above designated, and a similar
hub 175 at its other end. These hubs ex-
tend into circular openings through the ^-^q
front and back plate 162 and 135, respec-
tively which thereby form bearings for the
ratchet wheel. The circular disk 174 also
furnishes lateral support for the sliding
plate 160 which lies between it and the front .^^^
wall 162. and the pin I7l fits tightly into an
opening through the disk and is extended
beyond its front face to engage in the open-
ing through the sliding plate, as above de-
scribed. In the rotation of the ratchet wheel -^20
the pin 171 engages in the vertical sides of
the wide slot or opening 172 to moAC the
sliding plate forAvard and backrward, and
the inner end of such plate is extended to-
ward the turn table and bent to form a brak- ^25
ing foot 176 having a circular opening there-
through through which is inserted a brake-
shoe 177, the latter being conveniently made
of wood, rubber or other frictional mate-
rial and the opening through the brake- 130

1,062,369

foot being threaded as shown in order to
permit the brake-shoe to be adjusted Avith
respect thereto. A flat, coiled spring 180
which is wound about the drum portion of
g the spool-shaped member 153 acts to rotate
the latter in a counter-clockwise direction,
as shown in Fig. 11, this direction carrying
the pin l7l away from the turn table and
acting to withdraAv the brake-shoe from en-

10 gagement with the circular plate, such piu
extending through a curved slot 182 in the
plate 162 and such counter-clockwise rota-
tion of the disk 153 being limited either by
the lower end of such slot or by a triangu-

X5 lar cover plate 183 which may be adjusted
to partially cover such slot, according to
the desired" operation of the parts. The tri-
angular adjusting plate 183 is fixed on the
end of a shaft 185 which extends entirely

20 through the spool-shaped member 153 and
is provided at its rear end with a nut 186
and also with a spring 187 interposed be-
tween such nut and the back plate 135 to
press the plate 183 into yielding contact

25 with the plate 162. A pin 190 fixed in the
apex of the triangular plate 183 is designed
to engage with holes 191, 191 arranged in
the plate 162 in an arc about the axis 185
and the triangular plate is also provided

SO with a knurled hand wheel 192 by means
of Avhich it may be rotated and adjusted in
such position as to cover a part of the curved
slot 182 of more or less extent, thereby lim-
iting the travel of the pin l7l in such slot,

35 or, if desired, to entirely uncover such_ slot,
as indicated by its dotted outline in Fig. 9.
Pins 196 and "197 projecting from the seg-
mental plate 138 limit the inward movement
of the pawls 156 and 158 for a purpose

40 which will be hereinafter explained.

The operation of the device is as follows :
When the shelf 25 is lifted the necessary dis-
tance to place a record disk upon the instru-
ment the plate 138 will spring upward as

45 far as will be permitted by the slot 148 and
this movement will disengage both the
pawls 156 and 158 from the ratchet teeth
and allow the pin 171 to be rotated back-
ward in its curved slot as far as is permitted

50 by the adjusting plate 183 ; or entirely to the
end of such slot according to the pre-ar-
ranged setting of the device. The graphc-
phone instrument is then set in operation
in the usual manner and at the end of the

lb performance of the selection the inclining
shelf 25 will operate as above described to
return the sound box to its original position
at the circumference of the disk, Avhereupon,
again descending, the shelf 25 will push the

60 triangular supporting j^late 138 downward ;
and at the same time the sonnd box will be
set upon the record disk, and, the latter ro-
tating, the spring pressed stop 100 will urge
it inward until its needle engages with the

65 spiral grooA'es and continues the sound box

upon its journey over the disk. In the
event that the dial plate 183 has been set to
entirely uncover the curved slot 182 and
allow the ratchet wheel to rotate backward
to the farthest extent permitted by such ^q
slot, the pawl 156 will engage with the
smooth circumference of the ratchet wheel
beyond the toothed portion thereof and will
slide upon the latter without rotating it,
whereby this part of the device will remain 75
inoperative and continued repetitions will
occui". If however, the adjusting plate 183
has been set in a position covering a portion
of such slot the position of the ratchet Avheel
153 will be correspondingly changed so that go
the descending pawl 156 will engage with
one of the ratchet teeth and rotate the
ratchet wheel the distance of its travel; the
operation being repeated until the pin 171
has been rotated a sufficient distance to en- 55
gage with the forward vertical Avail of the
slot 172 in the sliding plate 160 and press
the brake-shoe into engagement Avith the
circular plate 16 to arrest the rotation of
the latter. For a succeeding operation of 90
the graphophone instrument the shelf 25 is
again lifted, permitting the plate 138 to
spring its full distance upward and free the
ratchet Avheel as before; and if a different
•number of repetitions is desired for such 95
succeeding operation the adjusting plate 183
is rotated by hand into another one of its
positions, Avhich will alter the distance of
travel of the pin 144 before engaging Avith
the sliding plate to actuate the braking de- 100
vice.

I claim as my invention :

1. The combination with a sound-repro-
ducing instrument including a sound box,
and a rotating table, of a shelf arranged be- 105
low the path of travel of said sound box, a
screAv fixed to said rotating table and ro-
tated thereby, a member carried by said
shelf for engaging Avith said scx'ew, a part
extending from said shelf OA^er said record 110
disk and adapted for engagement with said
soimd box in the traA^el of the latter, and
means acting through the movement of such
part to bring said screAV engaging member
into engagement with such screw and in- 115
cline said shelf.

2. The combination Avith a sound-i-epro-
ducing instrument including a rotating
table, of a horizontal shelf arranged above
said rotating table, means for detachably 120
securing said shelf to the instrument, a
screw carried by said rofcatiiig table and I'o-
tated thereby, a movable member secured to
said shelf for engaging Avith said screAV, a
leA-er extending from said shelf to engage 125
with the sound box in the travel of the lat-
ter, and means for transmitting the move-
ment of said lever to the moA'able member in
said shelf.

3. The combination Avith a sound-repro- 130

1,062,369

ducing instrument including a rotating
table, of a horizontal shelf arranged above
said rotating table, means for detachably
securing said shelf to the instrument, a
5 screw carried by said rotating table and ro-
tated thereby, a movable member secured
to said shelf for engaging with said screw,
a lever extending from said shelf to engage
with the sound box in the travel of the lat-

10 ter, and means for transmitting the move-
ment of said lever to the movable member
in said shelf, said lever being adjustable
with respect to a radius of said rotating
table.

15 4. The combinaticm with a sound-repro-
ducing instrmnent including a sound box,
and a rotating table, of a shelf arranged
above said rotating table, a sliding block in
the end of said shelf, a pivoted lever for

20 moving said block, said lever having a cam-
shaped portion, and a latch engaging with
said cam-shaped portion to yieldingly main-
tain said sliding block in one of its posi-
tions.

25 5. The combination with a sound-repro-
ducing instrument including a sound box,
and a rotating table, of a shelf arranged
above said rotating table, a sliding block in
the end of said shelf, a pivoted lever for

30 actuating said sliding block, and another
lever extending over the record disk and en-
gaging with said first lever.

6. The combination with a sound-repro-
ducing instrument including a sound box,

36 and a rotating table, of a shelf arranged
above said rotating table, a sliding block in
the end of said shelf, a pivoted lever for
actuating said sliding block, and another
lever extending over the rotating table and

40 engaging with said first lever, the said sec-
ond mentioned lever being adjustable with
respect to a radius of said rotating table.

7. The combination with a sound-repro-
ducing instrument including a sound box,

45 and a rotating table, of a shelf arranged
above said rotating table, a sliding block in
the end of said shelf, a pivoted lever for
actuating said sliding block, another lever
extending over the rotating table and en-

50 gaging with said first lever, a rack bar to
which said second mentioned lever is se-
cured, a pinion engaging therewith, and in-
dicating means for determining the correct
setting of said rack bar.

55 8. The combination with a sound-repro-
ducing instrument including a sound box,
and a rotating table, of a shelf extending
over said rotating table, means for inclining
said shelf, a movable member below said

60 shelf, means for yieldingly pressing said
member upward, said member being pressed
downward in each downward movement of
said shelf by the weight thereof, means op-
erated by the reciprocal movements of said

65 member for arresting the operation of the

sound-reiDroducing instrument, and means
for selecting a pre-determined number of
operations of said member before bringing
said arresting device into operation.

9. The combination with a sound-repro- yy
ciucing instrument including a sound box,
and a rotating table, of a shelf extending
over said rotating table, means for inclining
said shelf, a movable member below said
shelf, means for yieldingly pressing said 75
member upward, said member being pressed
downward in each downward movement of
said shelf by the weight thereof, means op-
erated by the reciprocal movements of said
member for arresting the operation of the go
sound-reproducing instrument, said means
including a ratchet wheel having a part of
its circumference smooth and a pawl car-
ried by said movable member for engaging
with said ratchet wheel, and means for caus- 85
ing said ratchet wheel to assume a position
with said pawl resting upon the smooth part

of the circumference.

10. The combination with a sound-repro-
ducing instrument including a sound box, 90
and a rotating table, of a shelf extending
above the rotating table, means for inclining
said shelf, and means actuated by the weight
thereof to arrest the operation of the in-
strument, said means including a sliding 95
member having a brake-foot carrying a
brake-shoe, and said shoe being adjustable
with respect to said foot.

11. The combination with a sound-repro-
ducing instrument, of an inclining shelf, a lOO
yielding member below said shelf adapted

for downward movement by the weight of
said shelf resting upon it, means for return-
ing said member upward when such weight
is removed, a pawl carried by said member, 105
a ratchet wheel for engagement therewith, a
braking device operated by the movement of
said ratchet wheel, and means for setting
said ratchet wheel a pre-determined distance
forward upon its travel at ths beginning of 110
each operation.

12. The combination with a sound-repro-
ducing instrument, of an inclining shelf, a
rising and falling member downwardly
pressed by the weight of said shelf, means 115
for yieldingly pressing said member up-
ward, a pawl carried by said member, and a
ratchet wheel for engagement therewith, said
pawl being adapted for disengagement from
said ratchet wheel in the upward movement 120
of said member to its farthest extent.

13. The combination with a sound-repro-
ducing instrument, of a braking device com-
prising a ratchet wheel having a smooth
place on its circumference, a movable mem- 125
ber having a pawl for engagement with said
ratchet wheel to rotate the same, means for
yieldingly rotating said ratchet wheel in a
reverse direction, and means for permitting
the latter to rotate in such reverse direction 13©

d

1,063,869

the required distance to bring such pawl
upon such smooth place.

14. The combination with a sound-repro-
ducing instrument, of a braking device com-
5 prising a ratchet wheel, a movable pawl
for rotating the same, means for yieldingly
rotating said ratchet wheel in a reverse di-
rection, a curved slot and a pin carried by
said ratchet wheel and entering said slot
10 for limiting the rotation of said ratchet
wheel, and means for covering an end of said

slot to limit the distance of travel of said"
pin, or for uncovering such end to permit
the pin to travel to its farthest extent toward
such end.

In witness whereof, I have hereimto sub-
scribed my name in the presence of two wit-
nesses this 1st day of June, A. D. 1912.

BEN R. SMITH.
Witnesses :

Florence McCulloch,
Thomas E. D. Bradley.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

Washington, D. C."

15

J. W. AYLSWORTH.

TALKING MACHINE.

APPLICATION PILED FEB. 3, 1910.

1,062,579.

Patented May 27, 1913.

^^ zz '^ i/ti

ir

9

y-^

ir^ff-^

CO., WASHINGTON, D. C.

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

JONAS W. AYLSWORTH, OF EAST ORANGE, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR, BY MESNE
ASSIGNMENTS, TO THOMAS A. EDISON, INCORPORATED, OF WEST ORANGE, NEW
JERSEY, A CORPORATION OF NEW JERSEY.

TALKING-MACHINE.

1,062,579.

Specification of Letters Patent. Patented May 37, 1913.

Application filed February 3, 1910. Serial No. 541,763.

15

20

25

To all whom if may concern:

Be it known that I, Jonas AA^. Avls-
AAOKTH, a citizen of the United States, and a
resident of East Orange, in the county of
5 Essex and State of New Jersey, have invent-
ed certain new and useful Improvements in
Talking-lNIachines. of which the following is
a descri])tion.

My inventi(m relates to talking machines

10 or piionograjihs. and my' object is to jjroduce
a talking machine of the type which oper-
ates upon disks or flat sound records, ^vhich
will permit the use of exceed inglv thin rec-
ords and record blanks, which, because of
their thinness, are flexible, liglit. and inex-
pensive in comi:)arison with the common
type of comparatively thick disk records
known to the art. Exceedingly thin records
of the character specified are more particu-
larly described and claimed in application
Serial Xo. 5-11,70-1:. filed by me on even date
herewith. Eei^roduction can be made from
such records on disk talking machines as
known to the art with but most im])erfect
results, if at all. l>ecause such records have
not sufficient backing in themselves for the
stylus to react against, and because also,
when sujjported upon the usual turntable or
recoi'd support, they will not lie sufficiently

30 flat and even uiion the support to permit the
.stylus to ])roperly track the same and be fed
t hereby.

In my present invention, these difficulties
are overcome in a sini])le and effective man-
ner, whereby it is made possible to form
records on exceedingly thin disks or other
flat surfaces and reproduce the records
formed thereon. Accordingly, my invention
comprises a table or support for an exceed-
ingly thin flat record together with means
for maintaining the record firmly in uni-
form contact Avith the supporting surface.
The record is so held in contact with the
supi^orting surface by means creating a uni-
form difference in pressure between the up-
per and lower sides of the record, the pres-
sure upon the lower or under side of the rec-
ord being the le.ss.

More specifically, I provide a record sup-

50 port of porous material and exhaust the air

from the pores of this material and beneath

the under surface of the record to hold the

same upon the table by suction.

35

40

45

Attention is hereby directed to the accom-
panying drawings, forming part of this 55
specification and illustrating a number of
ways in which vaj invention maj^ be carried
out.

In the drawings, Figure 1 represents a
vertical cross section through a table and 60
disk sound record supported thereby, to-
gether with means for creating suction to
hold the record upon the surface of the
table and embod3dng one form of my in-
vention. Fig. 2 represents a partial plan 65
view of the same. Fig. 3 represents a view
similar to Fig. 1 of a modified form of my
invention. Figs. 4, 5 and 6 represent similar
views of other modifications.

Referring to the drawings, the suction 70
table is provided in all of the modifications
with an outer annular solid or non-porous
rim 1 designed to form a more or less air
tight joint with the record disk 2 beyond
the portion of the disk 2 bearing the sound 75
record 3. A solid or non-porous center 4
is likewise provided, which is designed to
form a relatively air tight joint with the
disk inside the record-bearing portion 3 and
between the same and the central hole 5 of 80
the disk. The table between the outer rim
1 and the inner portion 4 is formed of a
porous material 6. This porous portion of
the table 6 is designed to form the bearing
surface for that portion of the under side 85
of the disk opposite the record bearing sur-
face thereof. It may be formed of any por-
ous material from which the air may be ex-
hausted, and is preferably formed of a com-
pact, material as for example, plaster of 90
Paris, porous cement or biscuit porcelain
or unglazed earthenware. The upper sur-
face of the table comprising the upper sur-
faces of rings 1 and 4 and the porous por-
tion 6 should be smooth and hard in order 95
that the exceedingly thin record 2 placed
thereupon may be reproduced properly.
When the record is placed upon the table,
the air beneath the disk and in the pores of
the table is attenuated by suction, so that 100
atmospheric pressure above the disk will
hold the same firmly against the table, which
will support the disk at so many points as
to produce practically a solid portion for
the same.. 105

The desired suction mav be obtained in

s

1,062,579

a number of ways. For example, as shown
in Fig. 1, the outer non-porous ring 1
formed of any suitable material, has a hori-
zontal disk 7 secured to or integral there-
5 Avith extending below the record 2 and the
porous portion 6. This lower disk-shaped
member 7 is secured to or integral with the
central portion 4 and also has secured to or
integral with it a cylinder 8 closed at the

IQ bottom and coaxial with the central spindle
9 of the talking machine through which the
rotary movement of the supporting table is
transmitted. A plunger 10 is mounted to
reciprocate vertically within the cylinder 8,

15 this plunger having a stem or reduced por-
tion 11 extending upwardly therefrom
through the central aperture of the disk 2,
the stem being guided by sleeve 12. A num-
ber of passages 13 extend through the por-

20 ous portion 6 of the table and connect the
same with the interior of cylinder 8. Pas-
sages 13 are also connected to an annular
space 14 which is preferably provided be-
tween the periphery of the porous portion

25 6 of the record support and the non-porous
rim 1. A passage 15 is provided between
the interior of cylinder 8 and the atmos-
phere below the under surface of plunger 10.
When it is desired to support a record as

30 2 upon the table for reproduction from the
record, the latter is placed upon the table
and plunger 10 is drawn upwardly hj means
of the knurled head 16 of stem 11 protrud-
ing above the record surface, this upward

35 movement forcing most of the air out from
imder record 2. Plunger 10 is then pushed
downwardly creating a vacuum within
chamber 8 above the plunger within the
pores of porous material 6 and within all

40 the air passages below record 2 and between
the same and the non-porous disk 7 and
cylinder 8. The record will now be held
upon the table firmly by suction. Suitable
means may be provided for holding the

45 plunger 10 in its lower position. A suitable
means is shown in the drawings in which a
small pawl 17 pivoted at 18 to the central
portion 12 of ring 4 is adapted to be pressed
into an annular notch 19 formed around the

50 periphery of stem 11 of plunger 10. Pawl
17 may be provided with a vertical upstand-
ing lug 20 which may serve as a finger piece
for pushing the pawl into its holding posi-
tion. Stem 11 of plunger 10 may also be

55 provided with a circular notch 21 with
Avhich pawl 17 may co-act to hold the plun-
ger in its raised position. When the record
is to be removed, the plunger is raised to its
upper position, releasing the suction thereon

60 when pawl 17 may be pressed into notch 21
and the record removed. If a disk record is
to be rotated, as is the common practice, the
motion may be derived from a suitable
motor not shown, from which it is trans-

65 mitted through spindle 9 and cylinder 8

integral therewith to the table and record
supported thereby.

In Fig. 3, I have shown a modification
of my invention in which a different means
for creating the suction is employed. The ^q
porous disk 6 is preferably inclosed within
the non-porous inclosing member 1 — 7 — 4.
A bellows-like member 22 is mounted below
disk 7 and surrounding the central spindle
9 of the talking machine. This bellows- 75
like member comprises a flat rigid bottom
plate 23 which is closety mounted upon
spindle 9 to slide upon the same and the
ex]3andible bellows member 24 of any suit-
able flexible and air tight material which go
takes the form of an annulus, the outer pe-
riphery of which is attached to the outer
solid rim 1 of the record support, and the
inner periphery of Avhich is attached to the
bottom of plate 7 adjacent to the central 55
j)ortion 4 of the table. Plate 7 is perfo-
rated as shown. In place of plunger 10 and
stem 11, a stem 11' having a knurled head
20' is provided, stem 11' being adapted to
slide vertically within an axial hole formed 90
in spindle 9 and through the center open-
ing of the disk 2. Spindle 11' is j^rovided
with arms 2.5 bearing upon the upper sur-
face of plate 23 of bellows 22 for forcing
the same downwardly when stem 11' is de- 95
pressed. Spindle 9 is provided with slotted
guideways 26 in which arms 25 move as
stem 11' is reciprocated. Stem 11' may be
provided with circular notches coacting
with a pawl, as was described in connection loo
with Fig. 1, for holding the stem in its up-
per and lower positions. When it is desired
to reproduce a record, the member 22 may
be telescoped, the record placed upon the
turntable, and stem 11' then depressed to at- 105
tenuate the air within the bellows member
22 and create a suction through the pores of
table 6.

In the modification shown in Fig. ,4, an
elastic member 23' is provided and is at- lio
tached to the under side of the table, its
outer periphery being secured to the under
surface of rim 1 and its inner periphery
to the central portion 4 of the table adjacent
to the spindle 9 of the tallring machine. 115
This member 23' may be formed of rubber
or other suitable elastic material. It is
maintained in its lower position by means
of springs 27 which are connected at one
end to the under side of plate 7 and at their 120
lower ends to the plate 28 placed within
flexible member 23'. Member 23' may be
pressed upwardly by the fingers against the
lower surface of plate 7 when the record is
placed upon the table and the finger pres- 125
sure upon member 23' released, whereupon
springs 27 will expand and cause the desired
suction. In Fig. 5, the plunger 10' is adapt-
ed to reciprocate within a cylinder 8' formed
integral with plate 7 which is integral with ■* 30

1,062,579

or secured to rim 1. Plunger 10' has con-
nected therewith rod 11- which is adapted
to be connected to the motor of the talking
machine in any desired way, phmger 10'
5 thus constituting a continuously acting
pump for exhausting the air continuously
from beneath the record 2 during the re-
in'dduction of the same. Phuiger 10' may
be provided with any suitable valve means

IQ as 29 therethrough, this valve opening when
the plunger moves toward the record or to-
ward the central spindle of the machine, and
closing when it moves away from the record
or the spindle to exhaust the air. The de-

25 vice shown in Fig. 6 is similar to that shown
in Fig. 3, different merely in the means pro-
vided for reciprocating member 23, this
means comprising a U-shaped member 30
which is attached at its ends to plate 23 and

20 extends upwardly through the central por-
tion 4 of the record support above which it
may be grasped to compress and expand
the bellows member 22. Any desirable
means may be used for holding the same in

25 either upper or lower position. Also, the
ring 31 is shown as placed upon the edge of
sound record 2 to hold the latter firmly
upon its support while the suction is being
created.

30 Having now described my invention, what
I claim and desire to protect by Letters Pat-
ent is as folloAvs:

1. In a talking machine, a rotatable table
or record support formed of compact por-

35 ous material and having a smooth hard
record-supporting surface, substantially as
described.

2. In a talking machine, a rotatable table
or record support having a non-porous an-

40 nular j^ortion and a portion formed of com-
pact porous material and having a smooth
hard record supporting surface, substan-
tially as described.

3. In a talking machine, a rotatable table
45 having a hard smooth surface adapted to

support a disk sound record, the said table
having a non-porous portion positioned to
be contacted by the rim of the record and
a portion formed of compact porous mate-
50 rial positioned to be contacted by that por-
tion of the record the opposite side of which
bears the sound record grooves, substan-
tially as described.

4. In a talking machine, a rotatable table
55 having a hard smooth surface adapted to

support a disk sound record, the said table
having a non-porous portion positioned to
be contacted by the rim of the record, a
non-porous portion adjacent the center

60 thereof and a portion formed of compact
porous material between said non-porous
portions, substantial^ as described.

0. In a talking machine, in combination,
a rotatable table having a surface portion

65 formed of compact porous material adapted

to support a sound record, and means for
holding a record upon said surface by suc-
tion, substantially as described.

6. In a talking machine, in combination,

a rotatable table or support having a hard 70
smooth surface portion of compact porous
material adapted to support a disk sound
record, and means movable at will to cause
such a record to be secured in uniform en-
gagement with said surface or to be released 75
therefrom, substantially as described.

7. In a talking machine, in combination,
a table or support formed of compact por-
ous material and having a smooth hard sur-
face adapted to support and form a backing gO
for a thin flat sound record or blank, and
means for exhausting the air from the pores

of said porous material and holding the rec-
ord or blank on the supporting surface by
suction, substantialljr as described. §5

8. In a talking machine, in combination,
a table or support formed of compact por-
ous material and having a smooth hard sur-
face adapted to support and form a back-
ing for a thin flat sound record or blank, 90
and a movable member below said support
adapted to be moved to exhaust the air from
the pores of the record supporting member
and create a partial vacuum beneath the
record on said support, substantially as de- 95
scribed.

9. In a talking machine, in combination,
a table or support having a surface portion
formed of compact porous material and
adapted to support and form a backing for 100
a thin flat sound record or blank, and means

for holding such a record in uniform en-
gagement with said surface during the mak-
ing of the record or reproduction thereof,
by producing a imiform difference in pres- 195
sure between the two sides of the record,
the pressure upon the under side of the
record being the less, substantially as de-
scribed.

10. In a talking machine, in combination, 110
a table or support having a smooth hard
surface adapted to support and form a back-
ing for a thin flat sound record or blank,
said table being formed of a compact porous
material beneath the record surface of the 11&
record, means for exhausting the air from

the pores of said material, and means form-
ing an air tight joint around said porous
portion of the table, substantially as de-
scribed. 120

11. In a talking machine, the combina-
tion with a table comprising a porous por-
tion having a smooth hard surface adapted
to support and form a backing for a thin
flat sound record or blank, and a non-porous 126
portion supporting and partly mclosing said
porous portion and having a part spaced
from said last named portion, of means for
exhausting the air from said porous por-
tion and from the space between the same ^^^

1,062,579

and said non-porous portion, substantially
as described.

12. In a talking machine, the combination
AAuth a table comprising a poi^ous portion

5 having a smooth hard surface adapted to
support and form a backing for a thin flat
sound record or blank, and a non-porous
portion supporting and partly inclosing said
porous portion and having a part spaced

10 from said last named portion, of a plunger
mounted to reciprocate beneath said table
to exhaust the air from said porous portion
and from the space between the same and
said non-porous portion, substantially as de-

15 scribed.

13. In a talking machine, the combination
with a table comprising a porous portion
having a smooth hard surface adapted to
support and form a backing for a thin flat

20 sound record or blank, and a non-porous
portion supporting and partly inclosing
said porous portion and having a part
spaced from said last named portion, said
non-porous portion being adapted to closely

26 contact the rim of a record supported on
said porous portion, of means for exhaust-
ing the air from said porous portion and
from the space between the same and said
non-porous portion, substantially as de-

30 scribed.

l-t. In a talking machine, in combination
a table or support having a smooth hard
surface adapted to support and form a back-
ing for a thin flat sound record or blank.

35 said table being formed of a porous mate-
rial beneath the record surface of the record,
and having a ring of non-porous material
around the same to form an air-tight joint,
and a non-porous portion beneath said por-

40 ous material and connected Avith said ring,
and a reciprocable plunger extending
through the center of said table and adapt-
ed to extend through the central aperture
of a record placed thereon and adapted to

45 be reciprocated away from the bottom of
said table to exhaust the air between said
plunger and record, substantially as de-
scribed.

15. In a talking machine, in combination,

a rotatable support having a surface portion 50
formed of porous material adapted to sup-
port and form a backing for a thin sound
record or blank, and means rotatable witli
said support for exhausting the air from the
pores of said porous material and holding 55
the record or blank on the supporting sur-
face by suction, substantially as described.

16. In a talking machine, in combination,
a rotatable support having a surface portion
formed of porous material adapted to sup- CO
port and form a backing for a thin sound
record or blank, and means comprising a
manually operable member rotatable with
said support for exhaiisting the air from
the pores of the porous material and creat- 65
ing a partial vacuum beneath the record on
said support, substantially as described.

17. In a talking machine, in combination,
a rotatable support having a surface portion
formed of porous material adapted to sup- 70
port and form a backing for a thin sound
record or blank, means comprising a man-
ually operable member rotatable with said
support for exhausting the air from the
pores of the porous material and creating 75
a partial vacuum beneath the record on said
support, and means for holding said mem-
ber in a given position, substantially as de-
scribed.

18. In a talking machine, in combination, 80
a rotatable support having a surface portion
formed of porous material adapted to sup-
port and form a backing for a thin sovmd
record or blank, means comprising a man-
ually operable member rotatable with said 85
support for exhausting the air from the
pores of the porous material and creating a
partial vacuum beneath the record on said
support, and means for holding said mem-
ber in position to maintain said partial 90
vacuum, substantially as described.

This specification signed and witnessed
this 2d day of February 1910.

JONAS W. AYLSWOKTH.

Witnesses :

Dyer Smith,
Anna R. Klehm.

Copies of this patent may be obtained foi- five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents.

"Washington, D. C."

F. E. THORMEYER.
MEANS FOE EEGOEDING AND EEPRODDCING LENGTHY SPEECHES, COMPOSITIONS, AND THE LIKE.

APPLIOATION PILED OOT. 22, 1906.

1,063,085. Patented May 27, 1913.

4 SHEETS-SHEET 1.

■ffy

u

a

d

^

I'liiiiiiiiiiiiiin^r

iiiiniii I iiiiiiing

IZE

m

L.

Tia. 1.

Witnesses.

Inventor.

/j

o^ <^^c

M^

COLUMBIA PLANOORAFU CO., WAfHnMTOM, D. C.

F. E. THORMEYEK.
MEANS FOE EECORDING AND EEPEODUOING LENGTHY SPEECHES, COMPOSITIONS, AND THE LIKE.

APPLICATION TILED OOT. 22, 1906. , ,„ ^« ,«,^

1,063,085. Patented May 27, 1913.

4 SHEETS-SHEET 2.

7^.^.

(Cv^Wj/tf'wZ^^,

QXX^

COLUMBIA PLANOORAPH CO.. WASHINGTON, D. C.

F. E. THOEMEYEK.^
MEANS FOE EEOORDING AND BEPEODDCING LENGTHY SPEECHES, COMPOSITIONS, AND THE LIKE.

APPLIOATION PILED OOT. 22, 1906.

1,063,085. Patented May 27, 1913.

4 SHEETS-SHEET 3.

ffiyj (o) q ^ m

Witnesses. ■^^'\ ^^ ^^ /^^

F. E. THORMETEK.
MEANS FOR EEOOEDING AND EEPRODDCING LENGTHY SPEECHES, COMPOSITIONS, AND THE LIKE.

APPLIOATION FILED OCT. 22, 1906.

1,063,085. Patented May 27, 1913.

4 SHEETS-SHEET 4.

6S

6^ 7^.11.

63

l^JZ.

yi

6-7^ III . yo ■ \J^/6y~^

en.

J^.13.

COLUMBIA PLANOGRAPH CO., WASHINOTON, D. C.

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

FRANZ EWALD THORMEYER, OF HAMBURG, GERMANY.

MEANS FOR RECORDING AND REPRODUCING LENGTHY SPEECHES, COMPOSITIONS,

AND THE LIKE.

1,063,085.

Specification of Letters Patent. Pateutecl May 37, 1913.

Application filed October 22, 1906. Serial No. 340,067.

To all whom, it may concern :
I Be it known that I. Franz Ewald Thor-

jiEYER, a citizen of Hamburg, in the German
Empire, have invented a new and useful
5 Means for Recording and Reproducing
! Lengthy Speeches, Compositions, and the

Like, of which the following is a specifica-
tion.

This invention relates to means for record-

10 ing and reproducing lengthy speeches, music
and the like by the aid of two or more sound
reproducing machines.

The object of the invention is to provide
means for starting the several instruments

15 one after the other, the measure of motion
of the apparatus working being transferred
to a regulating device, which is set in mo-
tion together with the working apparatus
and serves to determine the starting of the

20 second apparatus, when the record on the
first or working-apparatus has come to its
end.

In the accom]3anying drawings similar
letters refer to similar parts in the various

25 figures.

Figure 1 is an elevation of an apparatus
embodying one form of my invention. Fig.
2 is a diagrammatic plan of two instruments
in combination with two regulating devices.

30 Figs. 3 and S'^ are modifications in diagram-
matic side and end elevation for releasing
tlie regulating device. Fig. 4 is a modifica-
tion of an electric shunt-system employed in
connection with the apparatus illustrated in

35 Figs. 1 and 2. Fig. 5 is a plan view of a
modified form of aj^paratus in which both
instruments are driven by the same driving
mechanism. Fig. 6 is an elevation of an-
other modification operating in a manner

40 similar to that shown in Fig. 5. Fig. 7
is a vertical section of a modification of the
clutch at the right hand side of Fig. G.
Fig. 8 is a diagrammatical plan of an appa-
ratus provided with two series of instru-

45 ments coupled one after the other to a single
driving means. Fig. 9 is a diagrammatic
view of mechanism for registering the rates
of movements of the device shown in Fig. 6.
Fig. 10 is a section and Fig. 11, an elevation

50 of a modification of the registering mecha-
nism shown in Fig. 9. Fig. 12 is an eleva-
tion and Fig. 13 a plan of means for deter-
mining the starting movement of a record
section.

55 In the apparatus shown in Figs. 1 and 2,

which may be used for either recording or
reproducing speeches, music and the like,
two phonic instruments I and II are em-
plo3'ed, in combination with two electric
tripping devices. Each instrument consists 60
of a bearing plate or mandrel a rotated by
any known means, on which a disk h carry-
ing the record or phonic line is placed, so
that this record-carrier rotates with the
bearing plate a. The latter is provided with 65
a cam c, which preferably is made adjustable
and in the path of which there is an anchor
6?, which is acted upon by a spring d- and
which coacts with teeth / of a regulating
or tripping disk /<, driven by any suitable 70
means for instance a spiral-spring g. At
each revolution of the bearing plate a the
anchor d is tripped by the cam c, thus al-
lowing the regulating disk h to rotate in
the direction of the arrow for one tooth /. 75
The disk A, which is preferably made of
non-sounding material, is provided with an
annular upright flange i, having an opening
/.■ at one place. An electrical contact m,
wliich is acted upon by a spring I has a 80
hooked end n, hooking over the flange L
Allien the corresponding instrument is work-
ing the hooked end n bears against the inner
surface of the flange i until the opening k
reaches the hook, whereupon the latter is 85
released and the cojitact m is forced for-
ward b}' the spring I to make contact be-
tween contact-pieces o and o^ of an electric
circuit.

Before the instrument I is started the 90
bearing plate a is held against rotation by
a stud <7, arranged on the rim of the plate
and bearing against an arm r, which forms
the armature of an electro-magnet s.

For placing tlie stylus at the proper place 95
on the record a special s]Dring pressed hand
or ]:»ointer t is arranged on a bracket xi next
to the bearing plate a and adapted to bear
against the rim of the disk Z> by a shoulder
r. The front end of the hand t reaches as 100
far as that convolution of the phonic line
on which the stylus is to be placed. "When
this done the hand t is withdrawn and
held in this position by the spring u' . "When
the instrument is to be set in motion all that 105
is necessary to do is to draw the arm r away
from the electro-magnet, so as to allow the
stud q to pass.

In order to ascertain the moment the in-
strument II is to be started the cam c is 110

1,063,085

made adjustable. For this purpose there is
a series of holes c^ arranged in a circle near
the rim of the bearing plate «, say GO, into
either of which the cam c may be placed. If
5 for example on the disk record carrier h a
section of a speech is to be reproduced that
extends over 135J convolutions of the spiral
phonic line and 5f convolutions are to move
idle, the plate a must rotate for 141 revolu-

10 tions before the second instrument should
allow a sound to be heard. As will be
clearly understood, every motor requires
some time before it attains its normal speed,
therefore the instrument II should be start -

15 ed before the said 141 revolutions of the in-
strument I are completed and the phonic
line of the instrument II must have a fore-
line corresponding to the length of time,
which is necessary to attain the normal

20 speed. If this length of time corresponds
say with a movement of 8^ revolutions, the
instrument II must be started when the
first instrument has made 141— 8|=132f
revolutions. The setting of the apparatus

25 is done in the following manner : The cam c
is placed on the rim of bearing plate a, the
holes c^ of which are numbered, in the 15tli
hole from the hole standing opposite the
anchor point, in the starting position, while

30 the regulating-disk h is given such a posi-
tion, that the opening h is at a distance away
from the contact-piece m corresponding with
133 teeth. In this position the cam c will
contact with the anchor d^ when the bearing

35 plate has made \ revolution, so as to release
the same and to allow the disk h to rotate
the distance of one tooth by aid of the spring
q. On each folloAving revolution of the
bearing plate a the cam will again trip the

40 anchor d and allow the disk h to rotate the
distance of another tooth until the 132J rev-
olutions of the bearing plate a are com-
pleted and the opening h presents itself to
the hook n of the contact piece m. The lat-

45 ter closes the circuit and an electro-magnet
w'^ included in the circuit is energized. The
electro-magnet is placed opposite an arma-
ture /'^, which corresponds to the armature of
r of the instrument I. Thus the armature r^

50' is withdrawn from the stud q'^ of the bearing
plate n^ forming part of the instrument II
and allows the latter to be set in motion,
which will begin its play after a length of
time corresponding to 8^ revolutions, that

55 is at the same time the first instrument ceases
to sound. For stopping the latter, there is
provided another pair of contact-pieces o^,
0^, between which the contact-piece m} may
project to close a circuit in which the elec-

60 tro-magnet s is included. The contact-piece
m'^ is constructed similar to the contact-piece
m. Thus when the opening k is moved to
the hooked end of the contact rn?- the latter
is moved in between the contact-pieces o^, o'^

65 and the circuit is closed, so that the electro-

magnet s is energized and attracts the arm r
which acts as a brake on the rim of the
bearing plate a and finally stops it when the
stud q contacts therewith. The circuit-
breaker 0-, m}, 0^ may be made adjustable, ^q
so as to make it correspond Avith the fore-
line of the next following record. In set-
ting the instrument II the same rules mu.st
be observed as in setting the instrument I,
so that the opening k'^ on the flange i^ of yg
the instrument II comes opposite the con-
tact-piece fii"^ when a third record carrier,
in the meanwhile placed on the bearing
plate a of the apparatus I, is to be set in
motion, and the opening k^ comes opposite gQ
the contact-piece m^, when the instrument
II is to be stopped.

Every time the instrument I has come to
rest the plates a and h must be set anew
while the instrument II is playing and the §5
record-carrier is replaced by one which is
to follow that on the bearing plate a?- at
the time being. The same is done with the
instrument II when the instrument I is
playing. 90

When the instruments are driven by
spring-motors or the like it is of advantage
to limit the tension of the spring or the like
by an abutment, so as to obtain fairly equal
motive power. 95

The record-carriers may be numbered so
that the carriers bearing numbers that can
be divided by 2 are placed on the bearing
plate a^ and the rest on the plate a.

In order to make the choice of the record- 100
carriers easier, the bearing plates a and a^
may be provided with means of attachment
that differ totally from each other. For
instance, in the construction shown the plate
a is provided with an arc shaped piece x i05
while the plate a} is merely provided with
two pins y and 2. The record carriers that
are to be placed on the plate a. therefore
must be provided with an arc shaped slot
and those that are to be placed on the plate no
a^ with two small circular holes.

In order to avoid friction the tripping of
the anchor escapement may be eifected by
electrical means as shown in Figs. 3 and 3*.
A sprinsf-supportod pin 1 is arranged to 115
project into the path of the cam r in such
a manner, that, when this cam slides over
the top of the pin, the latter is pushed down-
ward into a mercury contact-bath 2, thus
closinsr a circuit in which an electro-mag- 120
net 3 is placed. The spring pressed anchor
d. serves as an armature and therefore is
attracted when the circuit is closed. When
the cam c has passed the pin 1, the latter is
drawn away from the contact bath bv the 125
spring 4, thus opening the circuit and allow-
ing the spring d^ to throw the anchor over
to the other side again, and the disk has now
moved for the distance of one tooth.

In Fig. 4 the electric connection is in 130

1,063,085

series instead of parallel. This has the ad-
vantage of a minor consumption of current
and a better operation of the electro-magnet.
In this modification the contact-piece m} or
5 m^ is so constructed tliat it is included in
the circuit closed by the circuit-breaker <?,
m, 0^ or o*, w.-. o^ respectively and tliat tins
circuit is broken as soon as the contact piece
m} or 7??^ is pushed in betAveen the contact-

10 pieces 0- o^ or o^. o' respectirely.

Like the regulating disks A and Ti^ the
anchor may be made of nonsounding mate-
rial so as to avoid noise as much as possible.
It is of advantage to provide the phono-

15 graphic instruments with clutches so as to
secure a decided and quick starting of the
instrument. When there are only two in-
struments working alternatively they can be
connected by suitable gearings and cou-

20 plings in such a way that at the same
moment one instrument is started the other
is stopped. In this instance the best way
is to drive both instruments by only one
motor, so that there can be no doubt that

25 the instruments are always driven by the
same speed or nearly so. Any kind of
motor will do for this purpose, preferably a
spring-motor or electric-motor. The em-
l^loyment of only one motor has besides the

30 uniform speed also the advantage of the
equal pitch of tune of the delivery. It is
not necessar}^ to crowd a certain section of
the speech, or music into one single record
but an interruption may be made at any

35 place, for instance at the end of a sentence,
verse or paragraph or at an}^ other suitable
moment, to allow a record-section to come
to an end and to begin a new one on an-
other carrier. The fore-line may be left

40 out since when one instrument is thrown out
of gear and the next one into gear, the lat-
ter instrument starts at once with the nor-
mal speed and there is no fear that an in-
terruption between the parts of the de-

45 livery takes place.

In the apparatus shown in Fig. 5, two
conical roll-carriers 10 are connected by
gearings and clutches so as to be driven alter-
natively by the same motor, (not shown)

50 by aid of the pulley 1*. This pulley l"" is in
operative connection with a broad toothed
wheel S^' by the belt S"* and two wheels 4*
and 5* are in mesh with the wheel 3*.
Keyed to the shaft 6^ of the wheel 5* is a

55 broad pinion T', which gears with a wheel 8"
of the same diameter as the wheel 4*. These
wheels 4* and 8" rotate in opposite directions
and are adapted to slide on their preferably
common shaft 9^ and to be coupled with

60 either of the roll carriers 10 by means of
studs 4^ and 10^ or d^ and 10^^ respectively.
If desired the construction may be changed
so as to allow both roll-carriers 10 to be
driven in the same direction.

65 )Since the rolls or record carriers are

played one after the other the conical car-
riers 10 must be brought into operative con-
nection with the wheels 4* and S'' alterna-
tivel}". For this purpose there is attached
to the nave of the wheels 4"^ and 8" a collar ^q
11, which collar projects into notches 12 of
a sliding rod 13, by means of which the posi-
tion of the wheels 4'' and 8^ is determined.

Each roll carrier is provided with a worm
14 or the like gearing with the teeth of a 75
regulating disk 15, preferably made of non-
sounding material. Each revolution of the
worm 14 creates a rotating movement of the
disk 15 for the distance of one tooth. The
disk is provided with division lines (not §0
shown) corresponding with the revolutions
of the roll or record-carrier. "By means of
a spindle, slides or other devices, (not
shown) the disk may be thrown out of gear
with the worm, when desired. There is a g5
gap 19 cr projection or the like on each
disk to create a movement of a lever 18 or
18^ pivoted on fixed stud 17, when such gap
or the like presents itself to the lever, by
which means the coupling gear is changed. 90

In the apparatus shown the disk is
brought into gear with the worm in a posi-
tion, in which the lever 18 or 18^ respec-
tively, points to a number on the rim of
the disk correspondinir with the number of 95
revolutions the record-carrier has to make.
"When the record is played, that is when the
roll carrier has run a corresponding number
of revolutions, the disk has moved to such
positicn, that the lever 18 or 18^ falls 100
through the gap 19, in between the roll-
carrier 10 and the wheel 4* or S'' respec-
tively, the latter, by aid of its conical part
20 and on account of the weight of the
lever, being moved so as to be thrown out 105
of gear with its corresponding i-oll carriei*
10. At the same time the opposite wheel is
thrown into gear with its corresponding roll
carrier, which now rotates at once with its
normal speed. \\(j

Xo fore-line or after-line is nece-sary with
this apparatus, when the stylus is placed
on the commencement of the line or not far
from this end of the line, so that the com-
mencement of the record proper coincides 115
or nearly coincides with that of the phonic-
line. This has the advantage that the space
on the roll or other record-carrier hereto-
fore used for a fore-line or after-line is
gained for a part of the record-line proper, 120
so that a longer section of a speech or music,
can be recorded en the carrier and the num-
ber of record-carriers will be reduced.

^^Hien fore-lines are made use of botli
record carriers must partly be rotated at 125
the same time. The clutches therefore must
be so constructed that when one roll-car-
rier is thrown into gear the other must still
keep on- rotating for some time, after which
it is also arrested. 130

1,063,085

When the change of movement is to be

carried out by hand, this may be done by aid

of the rod 13, which in this instance may

be provided with a handle. The parts 14

5 to 20 will in such case be omitted.

Instruments having plates as record-car-
riers such as gramophones can be driven
by a common motor in similar manner as
the instruments with rolls commonly called

iO phonographs.

In this modification shown in Fig. 6 the
bevel wheel 21 gearing with the bevel wheel
22 may be driven by any means (not shown)
and the rotation of these wheels is trans-

15 ferred through a train of gearings 23, 24,
25 and 24\ 25^ to clutch or coupling halves
30 and 32 arranged loosely on the shafts 26
and 26^, to which are fixed the plate-carriers
27 and 27^ respectivelj^ The latter partake

20 of the rotation as soon as their correspond-
ing clutches are thrown into gear. On the
left hand side of the Fig. 6 the coupling-
half 30^ is connected with the shaft 26 by
a pin 29 fixed to the shaft and projecting

25 into a longitudinal slot 28 of the coupling-
shaft 30\ which in a known manner can be
moved longitudinally by a forked lever 31
or the like by hand or otherwise, to gear
with the coupling-half 30 or to be thrown

30 out of gear with the same. On the right
hand side of said figure a friction cone-
clutch is made use of. The gear 25^ is
made integral with the cone 32 and is slid-
able on the shaft 26\ The longitudina'

35 movement can be brought about by the
forked lever 31^^ in a well known manner.
The second coupling-half 33 consists of a
hollow conical member 33 integral with the
plate-carrier 27^. ~\'\nien the coupling-half

40 32 which may be made of resilient material
is moved axially by the lever 31^ in an up-
v\'ard direction the cone 33 and also the
plate-carrier 27^ Avill partake of its rotation.
This modification has the advantage that

45 the rotation of the plate or record-carrier
resting on the carrier 27^ will not be started
suddenly with the full normal speed which
sometimes makes the stylus leap out of the
phonic line but owing to the friction be-

30 tween the parts 32 and 33 the rotation of
the plate-carrier will initially be slow.
HoAvever the change from the initial slow
motion to the normal speed takes place so
quick, that there is no perceptive interrup-

55 tion or disturbance in the delivery. Other
kinds of clutches may be devised for the
same purpose, it being of advantage that
the parts are resilient. This last described
clutch has the additional advantage that it

60 creates no shaking or trembling of the
record carrier when the coupling takes place.
When the clutch is of the kind in Avhieh
cou^Dling teeth of one-half coact with teeth
of the second coupling-half it is of ad-

85 vantage to employ a great number of teeth,

so as to avoid jerks and shocks as much as
possible.

In the modification shown in Fig. 7 the
coupling consists of two cylindrical cou-
pling-boxes 32^ and 33^, in which projections
34 on the box 32^ coact with interdental
spaces 35 on the box 33\ The two boxes
serve as a guide for each other, when the
coupling is shifted, so that shocks and jerks
are a^^oided.

If desired a greater number of record-car-
riers may be arranged on rotating-disk,
slides or the like, which may be so moved as
to successively bring the instrument in posi-
tion to be coupled with the driving mecha-
nism.

In the modification shown in Fig. 8 two
horizontal rot at able disks 38 and 38^ are
employed, each of which is mounted with a
series of phonographic rolls or record-car-
riers. Between the tAvo disks 38 and 38^
there is a double clutch 36, the shaft of
Avhich is continuously driA^en by the gearing

37 from any desired source. By means of
a handle or IcA^er 39 the clutch may be cou-
pled to a roll-carrier of either of the disks

38 or 38\ When the first roll 1 is playing
the disk 38 must be rotated so as to bring
the roll 2 opposite the clutch 36 in a posi-
tion that, as soon as the record on the roll

1 has come to its end, clutch 36 is shifted
oA'er to the other side so as to throw the roll

2 into gear and stop the roll 1. The disk
38^^ is then rotated to bring the roll 3 into
the position of the roll 1, ready to be coupled
Avith the clutch 36 as soon as the record on
roll 2 has been played to its end. During
the time the disks are rotated the corre-
sponding reproducer is raised and there-
upon it is lowered onto the next roll in
proper position.

Instruments haAdng flat record carriers or
disks may in a similar manner be arranged
on a larger disk, or frame or slide so as to
be plaj^ed one after the other. Thus the
record-carriers shown in Fig. 6 may be used
in multiple arrangement. Flat record-car-
riers may also be arranged one OA'er the
other, in such a way that their center shafts
can be coupled by clutches to the main driv-
ing shaft, for alloAving the diA^ers records to
be reproduced one after the other. The
stylus can be taken away from the record-
carrier that has been iDlayed last, Avhen the
next following record is playing. Prefer-
ably the record line of the disk has its be-
ginning near the center and finishes off near
the rim of the disk, so that the speed of the
phonic line at the place Avhei'e it contacts
Avith the stylus is not so great in starting.

In order to prevent sounds from being
heard in reproducing that might be pro-
duced by the fore-lines or after-lines, the
effect or operation of the stylus, particularly
the Avriting or cutting stylus in recording, 130

70

75

80

85

90

95

100

105

110

115

120

125

1,063,085

should be destroyed or prevented. This can
be done either by preventing the diaphragm
or some other part of the writing mechanism
from vibrating by holding it fast, or mak-
g ing it soundless or by closing the opening
of the horn or the sound-box, by a flap-valve
or by a device similar to the photographic
shutters, or finally the recorder or repro-
ducer may be lifted up during the time the

IQ instrument has to run idle. When the
record is completed the writing mechanism
can be allowed to drop on the following
record-carrier, so that there is no fore-line
and the record proper starts at the begin-

25 ning of the phonic line or near the same.
When recording it is not absolutely neces-
sary to make use of two instruments that
are connected so as to work alternatively, but
this arrangement is of special advantage in

20 reproducing. The recording of the sections
of speeches, music and the like may be car-
ried out on one and the same instrument or
on a number of instruments working inde-
pendent from one another, as long as they

25 are driven at the same speed or nearly so,
the number of revolutions being ascertained
by any means. Hereby it is of advantage
to transfer the rates of movement of the
phonic-line sections on a separate surface,

30 which is made to run synchronously to the
record carrier or to the instrument. This
surface, which may be on a disk, such as
shown in Fig. 2, or a band as shown in Fig.
9, or some other mechanism, which may be

gg driven b}^ the recording instrument or by
any other means, is provided with divisions
for instance a circular row of teeth /, Fig.
2, and with an initial sign for instance a
gap /..' and which, when at work, will be

40 gi^en a second sign or mark by hand or
automatically on the moment the desired
part of the phonic line is finished, so that the
number of revolutions can be ascertained,
for instance, by counting the number of

45 teeth / between the two signs.

In the modification shown in Fig. 9 a
band 43 of paper, celluloid or other suitable
material is used, on which the rates of move-
ment are registered. This band is driven

50 by a drum 40 keyed to the shaft 21' of the
bevel-wheel 21 described with reference to
Fig. 6, and provided with teeth 41 that en-
gage openings 42 in the band 43, to feed it
along. Each rotation of the plate carrier

55 27 or 27' respectively corresponds to a cer-
tain length of movement of the band 43,
which preferably is divided into a number
of partitions 44.

A number of writing pens or styli, for

60 instance four, viz : 46^, 46'', 46^^ and 46"^ ar-
ranged rotatively on shaft 45 are drawn
against the band 43 by aid of a correspond-
ing number of electro magnets 47'^, 47'', 47°
and 47'', when these are energized, thus

65 drawing lines on the moving band.

Springs 48 are provided to hold the stylus
at a distance from the band, when the elec-
tro-magnets are not energized. When the
lever 31, which is adapted to serve as an
electric switch, throws the clutch 30, 30' into jq
gear, said lever at the same time closes a
circuit in which the switch 49 contact 50
and the electro-magnet 47'' are included, in-
ducing the stylus 40*^ to press against the
surface 43 to draw a line representing the ^g
fore-line on the record tablet. The line for
the fore-line is not shown in the drawing
but it would be found in the direction of the
line 55. The starting point and the length
of such line corresponds with the com- gQ
mencement and length of the fore-movement
of the record carrier 27, so that the number
of partitions 44 crossed by the line is equal
to the number of revolutions.

When the machine has attained its nor- gc
mal speed the switch 49 is moved to make
contact with the contact button 51 the mo-
ment the performance commences, so that
the electro-magnet 47"^ is deenergized and
the stylus 46^ is raised from oif the band, gQ
while the electro-magnet 47'' is energized
and attracts the stylus 46'', which records the
length of phonic line proper by the line 54
on the band. Before the first part of the
performance comes to an end the second ma- 95
chine is thrown into gear by the lever 31',
which also is adapted to close a circuit in
this case for the electro-magnet 47*=. The
st^dus 46° of the latter now records on the
band 43 the length of the fore-line on the iqq
second record-tablet by the line 56. On a
convenient part of the performance for in-
stance at the end of a sentence or the like,
the lever 49' is moved from the contact 52
to the contact 53 and at the same time the xo5
lever 49 from the contact 51 to the contact
50, whereupon the stylus 46'^ registers the
length of the second phonic line by the line
57, while the stylus 46"^ registers the length
of the after-line by the line 55. The latter no
is cut off as soon as the clutch 30, 30' is
thrown out of gear and thereby the circuit
is broken by the lever 31, whereupon merely
the stylus 46'' records the line 57. This is the
position shown in the drawing. When rec- 115
ord-tablets are used without fore and after-
lines, the lines 55 and 56 will be omitted.
In any case the beginning and end of the
phonic line j^roper can be made distinctly
visible on the record or record-carrier. i2{

By the aid of the partitions 44, each of
Avhich corresponds to the length of a single
coil of the phonic line, it will be easy to de-
termine the commencement and the end of a
sectional phonic line, particularly when the 125
partitions are subdivided by suitable divi-
sion-lines 58. According to the drawing
the line 56 is found to run over three and
two sixth partitions; the fore line of the
second phonic line therefore will run over 130

1,063,086

15

20

25

3^- coils of the spiral line, that is to sa}^, the
second machine will make 3J revolutions be-
fore it commences to speak.

The determination of the number of revo-
5 lutions of the machine when recording by
means of only one single machine or by ma-
chines working independent from one an-
other is carried out in a similar way.

In the modification shown in Figs. 10 and
IQi 11, a disk 60 is provided with a circle of divi-
sion-line 61 corresponding to the units or
measure of movements of the record-carrier
and in front of the disk 60 a rotatable hand
62 or pointer points to the numbered divi-
sion lines.

Every movement of the phonic-line is
transferred to the hand 62 by means of a
suitable gearing 63 and the amount of the
movement of this hand 62 can be read off
from the disk at any time. When the hand
or pointer 62 makes more than one complete
revolution, there may be a train of gearings
64 or the like connected with the same to
transfer the movement to a second hand or
pointer 65 or the completion of the revolu-
tion may be made to be perceived by the
sounding of a bell 66 or the like. In order
to ascertain the finishing of the fore-line and
the record proper only the position of the
30 pointer 62 is to be watched and the number
of revolutions to be registered, so as to en-
able the correct combining of the record
sections by aid of the numbers ascertained
in the above manner.

The marking of the beginnings and ends
of the record-sections can also be carried out
after recording by allowing a sign, a pointer,
a divided surface or the like to move syn-
chronously with the record carriers in a
similar manner as described above with ref-
erence to Figs. 2, 9, 10 and 11. The begin-
ning and end of each record-section may be
read off from the surface or at the pointer,
or the number of revolutions of the record-
carrier made visible by a sign' or the like
counted.

In reproducing the phonic line of the in-
strument may itself be used for determining
the starting moment of the next following
record section. In this case all the operator
has to do is to watch the playing of the
instrument intensively and to set the next
instrument in motion by hand as soon as he
hears the last sound of the plajdng instru-
ment. If desired the after line may be so
curved that it induces a decided move-
ment of the sound box or horn so as to trip
a device which automatically stops or starts
the instrument respectively. Means of this
description are shown in Figs. 12 and 13.

Loosely pivoted on the shaft 67 of each
record carrier plate a is a double-armed le-
ver 68, one end of which is bent upward so
as to be adapted to be engaged by the sound
65 box carrier 69, while the other end is piv-

35

40

45

50

55

60

otally connected to a rod 70 or 71 respec-
tively. These rods are connected to levers
72 and 73 one of which engages with its
other end a slide 74 directly, while the other
is also in operative connection with this slide
by the intermediary of an upright lever 75,
Fig. 12. By these means one sound box car-
rier 69 is adapted to move the slide 74 to
one side, when it approaches the center of its
talking machine and the other sound box
carrier 69 moves the slide to the other side
when it approaches the center of the talking
machine. This movement will be a very de-
cided one, when the phonic line 76 in which
the needle or stylus 78 is placed is provided
with an after line 77 bent to a small circle
to run toward the center with a short cut.

The slide 74 is bent at right angles on each
end 79, which ends are adapted to enter the
path of an arm 80 arranged on any con-
venient rotating part of the talking ma-
chine. Thus when in the operation of one
talking machine the phonic line has come to
its end, the stylus and also the horn or sound
box carrier 69 will be given a quick move-
ment by the after-line 77 thereby operating
the levers and rods described above to catch
hold of the arm 80 of one machine and to
release the arm 80 of the other machine.
The result is that the first named machine-
is stopped and the second is started at the
same time.

I claim: —

1. The combination of a plurality of su,c-
cessively^operative recording or reproducing
machines and means automatically con-
trolled by the operation of one of said ma-
chines for starting the operation of another'
of such machines.

2. The combination of a plurality of suii;
cessively operatiye recording or reproducing
mnchinef^ and elec'tro-magnetic inecxns auto-
matically controtrecTby the operation of one
of said machines for starting the operation^
of another of such machines.

3. The combination with a plurality of
succes£Li:ely_^3eratiye sound recording or
reproducing m?ic|fif[es each including a rec-
ord and a stylus, of a r^gulatijig^jneaiis op-
erated by the machine first operated for
causing the operation of the after operated
machine.

4. The combination with a plurality of
succ£§siyely:.operative sound recording or re-
producing ni^cEiii£s each including a record-
carrier, of a reg^ulating device actuated_by
the movem

-«i-€aie recordcaTrier to con-
troT the operation of tKe~afher record carrier.
5. The combination of a plurality of suc-
cessivel}'' operative sound recording or re-
producing rriadliinea, means automatically
controlled bytKeoperation of one of said
machines for starting the operation of an-
other machine and nie34iajto_sto]2rtiejnoye-
meiit-^^thejnachine firstopSated! '~'

70

75

80

85

90

95

110

115

120

125

130

1,063,085

V

15

.^0

G. The combination of a plurality of suc-
cessively operative sound recording or repro-
ducing madiincs, means automatically con-
trolled by the operation of one of said ma-
5 chines for starting the operation of another
machine, memis to ston_the movement of the
machine fi"rst operaiedT and means^ jip^rated
byZik£_jnaclnne _last^__put in _operat ioja _ to
a^a]jiiitart_the ap.ei^ion.oI Ojamad
10 Pi^tinojDeratioji.

V. 'riie combination of a plurality of sound
recording or reproducing machines and
ni£ima automatically controlled by the op-
eration of oiifi of said machines for ^tartiiig
the operation of npotlierljTTnchinf^ nt nny
2->vpdotfTuiinfd-ii»if of movement of the ma-
chine in operation.

8. The combination with a plurality of
sound recording or reproducing machines

20 each including a record and a stylus, of a
regulating means operated by the machine
first operated^ for causing the operation of
the after operated machine, and an f^djust-
able n-|Ambp.r ou the regulating means to de-

-•5 tennine the time of operation of the after
operaTecT machine.

9. llie combination with two sound re-
cording or reproducing machines, each in-
cluding a record, of meansjncluding de.vicgs

maticallv controlled by the said machines to
start .fi^jgh. otJier at proper times.

10. In combination, cooperating sound re-
jjroducing machines each having a stylus,
and regulating mechanism actuated by that
machine first set in oi^eration and regulating
th£ time. of^pfeiatloii..jQ£jUia.sucj^ediagaQjt-
chine with relation to the machine first set
in operation, records mounted on the ma-
chines and means^ to position jthe respective
records wjth respect to theif styli to repro-
duce the phonic lines in succession.

11. In combination, cooperating sound re-
cording or reproducing macliines and mecha-
jii£mJlLiyiei:niilely^cjmtro]^l^^^ operatioiTof 45
saiiLmachines. said mecTianisni"actTTatecrT)y
tliat machine first set in operation and regu-
lating the time of operation of the succeed-
ing machine.

12. The combination of two sound record- 50
ing or reproducing rnachines each compris-
ing a motor, a stylus and a record connected
up with each machine, a magnet connected
with each of said motors, an electric circuit
between each machine and the magnet of the 55
other machine, a s'ource of electric .current,
irienjlP tp p.y(-,itp--thfi iTlHgTiPt of either one of
the machines from said source and thereby
operate the same, and automatic means on
the machine first operated to excite with
electric current the magnet of the second
machine and thereby operate the latter.

13. The combination of a plurality of suc-
cessively operating sound recording or re-
producing machines, each comprising a mo-
tor, a rejDroducer and a record ; of electro
mfignpj-ip iT|P.flnp controlled by the operation
of the machine first operated for causing the
operation of the after operated machine,
substantially at the termination of^ t|iQ,op-
erntiQli, of ih^^jaaxikinfi ^;;.^^erated .

14. The combination of a plurality of suc-
cessively operative sound reproducing ma-
chines, having records and sound boxes, and
njfiiuis adapted to be operatively connected 75
with one of the two machines and tor,,.ataxt
nn^thpT nigr.hino. thtk-moipsnt th£-£r.st--ma-
chine ceai^es ta.plav. the souncTboxes oi-both
iQiHrniPS i'PS^^ing,£;j2J-!2^ir,,Il^^^^xd£7li^^ the
timethisj;].ia.ngLe in tlie acFiorLJtakes- place.

FRANZ EWAt-DTTffORMEYER.

Witnesses :

Charles Harrt Roelknee,
Otto W. Hellmrich.

GO

65

70

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patentt,

Washington, D. C."

J. HOSLER.

COMBINED PHONOGRAPH AND GRAPHOPHONE AND OPERATIVE MECHANISM THEREFOR.

APPLIOATIOH FILED PEB. 29, 1912.

Patented June 3, 1913.

4 SHEETS— SHEET 1.

1,063,262.

*^Wi4>M.e<><M2^

/^Y^^^''^^^^^^^'''^'***^'

Q^<ytM€\^

J. HOSIER. .
COMBINED PHONOGRAPH AND GRAPHOPHONE AND OPERATIVE MECHANISM THEREFOR.
APPLICATION FILED FEB. 29, 1912.

1,063,263. PatentedJune 3, 1913.

4 SHEETS-SHEET 2.

Siitot/tMU

COLUMBIA PLANOORAPH CO., WASHINGTON. -^ C.

J. HOSLEB.

COMBINED PHONOGRAPH AND GRAPHOPHONE AND OPERATIVE MECHANISM THEREFOE.

APPLICATION FILED rEB.29, 1912.

Patented June 3, 1913.

1,063,262.

4 BEEET8-SHEIIT 3.

1^1(^.8

COLUMBIA

VASHINOTON, D. C.

J. HOSIER.

COMBINED PHONOGEAPH AND 6RAPH0PH0NE AND OPERATIVE MECHANISM THEREFOB.

APPLICATION PILED rEB.29, 1912.

Patented June 3, 1913.

4 SHEETS-SHEET 4.

225

1,063,262.

^48^

SUtotMCi^

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

JOHN HOSLER, OF LLEWELLYN, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR TO WILLIAM O. HOSLER,

OE LLEWELLYN, PENNSYLVANIA.

COMBINED PHONOGRAPH AND GRAPHOPHONE AND OPERATIVE MECHANISM

THEREFOR.

1,063,363.

Specification of letters Patent. Patented June 3, 1913.

Application filed Fe'bruary 29, 1912. Serial No. 680,716.

To all whom it may concern :

Be it known that I, John Hosler, a citi-
zen of the United States, residing at Llewel-
tyn, in the county of Schindkill and State
5 of Pennsylvania, have invented certain new
and useful Improvements in Combined
Phonograi^hs and Graphophones and Oper-
ative ^Mechanism Therefor, of Avhich the fol-
lowing is a specification.

10 The present invention relates to a com-
bined phonograph and graphophone and has
for its purpose to provide a machine of that
character embod^'ing various and novel fea-
tures, to wit: a machine capable of playing

15 from cither a disk or cylinder record, and
wherein the mechanism for selecting one or
the other is of simple constiaiction and easy
to operate.

With this and other objects in view the

20 invention consists in the arrangement and
combination of parts hereinafter claimed,
and, while the invention is not restricted to
the exact details shown and described, still,
for the purpose of disclosure, reference is

25 had to the accompanj'ing drawing, in which
like refeience characters designate the same
parts in the several views, and in which,

Figure 1 is a perspective view disclosing the
invention ; Fig. 2 is a top plan view thereof ;

30 Fig. 3 is a top plan view of the horn shift-
ing mechanism ; Fig. 4 is a central sectional
view of the horn and tone arm connection;
Fig. 5 is a similar view taken at right angles
to Fig. 4: Fig. 6 is a detailed view in eleva-

35 tion of the tone arm support ; Fig. 7 is a side
elevational view of the cylinder feed shifting
device; Fig. 8 is a central sectional Anew
thereof; Fig. 9 is a perspective vieAV of the
same, with parts remoA^ed for clearness ; Fig.

40 10 is a detail perspectiA^e view of the horn
shifting deAace; Fig. 11 is a front eleva-
tional Aiew showing the driA-ing means, and
associated parts, of the disk record.
Eeferring to the construction in further

45 detail, 1 designates the casing Avithin which
the gi'eater part of the mechanism is con-
tained and AA-hich, on its top or cover, has
suitabl}' mounted supporting means for a
cylinder record 2 and a disk record 3. The

50 usual stylus 4, carried by a tube or pipe 5,
transmits the sound waves from the disk 3,
as will be understood. In like manner, a
stylus carried by the tube 6 engages with
the cylinder 2. The tubes 5 and 6 are con-

nected by elboAvs 7 and 8 respectiA'cly with 55
a supporting plate 9, (see Figs. 3, 4 and 5),
and said plate 9 is cut aAvay to communicate
Avith the elbows 7 and 8. The horn shown in
outline in Fig. 1 has the pipe 10 thereof pro-
vided with an elbow 11, Avhich is adapted to 60
be brought into register Avith either one of
the openings_ in the plate 9 accordingly as
the machine is playing on a disk or cylinder
record. The elbow 11 is sAviveled in a plate
12 by means of an arcuate piece 13, the pur- 65
pose of Avhich being to allow the plate 12
to be shifted from side to side.

The plate 9 has secured to either side
thereof a guiding strip 14, Avhich pieces are
fixed through the medium of screws 15, as 70
shown. The plate 12 is shifted through the
medium of a leA^er IG that is fulcriimed at
17 to a member 18 which is in turn fixed to
a supporting post 19 (see Figs. 1 and 10).
An arcuate plate 20 is likewise secured to 75
the supporting piece 18 and has a cut-aAvay
edge 21 to receive a stud 22 carried by the
IcA-er 16, whereby said lever 16 is limited
in its SAvinging movements. When the lever
is moA-ed in one direction, the horn is con- 80
nected to communicate with the tube 5 of
the disk record, and when said lever 16 is
moved in the full opposite direction, said
horn communicates Avith the tube 6 of the
CA'linder record, as will be understood. The 85
stylus tube 6 has its shif table end connected
to the stylus support 23 bj^ the common uni-
versal joint 24, and the member 23 is mount-
ed in a ring 25, which ring is provided with
a tubular section 26 that reciprocates on a 90
rod 27 that is mounted in bracket arms 28.
The member 26 is caused to be reciprocated
through the medium of two screw threaded
shafts 29 and 30 accordingly as the cylinder
record 2 is grooved to run at a two minute, 95
four minute or other speed. The cylinder
shaft is provided with a fixed pinion 48=*
that driA^es the shaft 30 through the medium
of a larger pinion 30=^, and an intermediate
pinion 30''. The shaft 29 is driA'en from the 100
shaft 30 through the medium of pinions 29*
and 29'' mounted on the shafts 30 and 29
respectiA'cly, and an interposed pinion 31".

The means for selecting the speed desired
consists in a threaded piece 31 adapted to 105
engage with the shaft 30 and a similar
piece 32 adapted to engage with the shaft
29. The member 31 (see Fig. 9) is secured

2

1,063,262

to a piece 33 that is in turn fixed on a shaft
34 and said shaft 34 is the fulcrum member
on which is mounted the shifting lever 35.
As the lever 35 is moved in either direction,
5 it will thetefore follow that the engaging
piece 31 is moA^ed in the reverse direction.
The piece 32 is mounted on an arm 36 which
in turn is secured to a piece 37 that is fas-
tened to a block 38. The block 38 is moinited

10 to turn on the shaft 34, and at its vipper end
said block 38 has engagement with a bar 39
Avhich acts in the manner of a crank. The
bar 39 is joiirnaled in a block 40, which is
cut away on its lower side (see Fig. 8) to

15 receive the block 33. Said block 40 also
provides the bearing or journal for the
shaft 34. A piece 41 is secured to the op-
posite end of the shaft 39, and on its upper
eild said piece 41 is provided with a stud

20 42 that engages within a slot 43 in the lever
35. With this construction it will be ap-
parent that as the lever 35 is moved in
either direction, the block 32 is moved in the
same direction. The lever 35 is provided

25 Avith a grip 44 Avhich carries, at its lower
end, a stud 45 which is adapted to engage
within the openings 46 and hold one of the
members 31 or 32 into engagement with its
respective shaft.

80 A spring motor is proA^ded as at x and
is adapted to drive the cjdinder and disk
record through a suitable gearing compris-
ing a pinion 84 that meshes with a pinion
85. The pinion 85 is fixed on a shaft 86

35 which carries a larger pinion 87 and said
pinion 87 meshes with a smaller pinion 88
that is ke3^ed on a shaft 89. The shaft 89
is fitted Avith a belt pulley 90 for driving
a belt 91. The belt 91 runs on a second pul-

40 ley 92 (see Fig. 11), and said pulley 92 is
splined on a shaft 93 that is suitably sup-
ported from the casing by brackets 94. The
pulley 92 has clutch elements 95 and 96
adapted to engage respectiA'ely with similar

45 elements 97 and 98 on pulleys 99 and 100
respectively. A belt 101 runs on the pulley
99 and on a second pulley 102 for driA^ng
the cylinder supporting shaft. The means
for driving the disk record support is of a

50 similar arrangement and comprises a belt
103 that runs over guiding pulleys 104 and
OA^er the pulley 105 which is secured to the
shaft 106. Said shaft 106 is journaled in
suitable arms 107 and 108, and at its upper

55 end is fitted Avith the disk supporting base
109. The belt 103 is, of course, driA^en by the
pulley on the shaft 93. The means for
shifting the pulley 92 to drive either the
belt 101 or the belt 103 consists in an arm

®^ 110 pivoted at 111 to the machine frame and
connected by a bar 112 to the cranked end
113 of a shaft 114. The upper end of the
shaft 114 is connected to a lever 115 through
the medium of which said shaft 114 may be

^^ turned, as will be understood.

It is obvious that those skilled in the art
may vary the details of construction and ar-
rangement of pai'ts Avithout departing from
the spirit of my invention, and, therefore, I
do not wish to be limited to such features, 70
except as may be required by the claims.

Having thus described my invention, Avhat
I claim as neAV and desire to secure by Let-
ters Patent, is :

1. In a combined phonograph and graph- 75
ophone having a cylinder support and a disk
record support and means for actuating the
same, the combination of a single horn
transmitter therefor; a tone arm for each

of said supports; a common means for go
mounting said arms; and means for shift-
ing said horn to communicate Avith either of
said arms, substantially as described.

2. In a combined phonograph and gi-aph-
ophone having a cylinder support and a disk 85
record support with means for supporting
and actuating the same; the combination of

a single horn transmitter therefor; a tone
arm for each of said supports; a support-
ing plate constructed with guidewfi3^s and 90
having apertures communicating with said
tone arms; and a plate slidably mounted
within said gaiideways and having con-
nected thereto one end of the horn trans-
mitter, said plate adapted to be shifted to 95
bring the horn transmitter into commtinica-
tion with either of said tone arms, substan-
tially as described.

3. In a combined phonograph and graph-
ophone having a cylinder support and a disk loo
record support with means for supporting
and actuating the same; the combination of

a single horn transmitter therefor; a tone
arm for each of said supports ; a supporting
plate constructed Avith guideways and haA'- 105
ing apertures communicating with said tone
arms; a plate slidably mounted Avithin said
guideways on said supporting plate and pro-
vided with an aperture; means fof SAvivelly
connecting one end of the horn transmitter no
to said slidable plate; and a device for man-
ually shifting the slidable plate whereby to
bring the swiveled end of said horn trans-
mitter into communication with either of
the tone arms, substantially as described. 115

4. In a combined phonograph and graph-
ophone having a cylinder support and a disk
record sujDport with means for supporting
and actuating the same; the combination of

a single horn transmitter therefor; a tone 120
arm for each of said supports ; a supporting
plate constructed with guideways and hav-
ing apertures communicating Avith said tone
arms; a plate slidably mounted within said
guideways on said supporting plate and 125
provided with an aperture ; means for swiv-
elly connecting one end of the horn trans-
mitter to said slidable plate ; a lever haAdng
a link connection with said slidable plate
for manually shifting said plate whereby 130

1,063,262

to bring the liom transmitter into commu-
nication with either of said tone arms; and
an arcuate plate having stops adapted to
limit the movement of said lever.
5 5. In a combined phonograph and graph-
ophone having a cylinder support and disk
record support with means for supporting
and actuating the same; the combination of
a single horn transmitter therefor; a tone

10 arm for each of said supports; a support-
ing plate; strips secured on said plate pro-
viding guideways ; a plate slidably mounted
on said supporting plate within said guide-
ways, said slidable plate having an aperture

13 and a countersunk portion adapted to re-
ceive one end of the horn transmitter: an

arcuate plate secured to said slidable plate
and retaining said transmitter horn end
within the countersunk portion ; a lever hav-
ing a link connection with said slidable plate 20
adapted for shifting said plate whereby to
bring said transmitter honi into connnuni-
cation with either of said tone arms; and
an arcuate plate provided with stops for
limiting the movement of said lever, sub- 25
stantially as described.

In testimony whereof I affix my signatiire
in presence of two witnesses.

JOHN HOSLER.

Witnesses :

Frank Little,
I. A. Reed.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the

Washington, D. C."

Commissioner of Patents.

0. E. MERTZ.

CABINET FOE TALKING MACHINES.

APPLICATION FILED APB.8, 1910.

1,063,821.

Patented June 3, 1913.

7fo5noeSS

cs.

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

OSCAR E. MERTZ, OF PHILADELPHIA. PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR, BY DIRECT AND
MESNE ASSIGNMENTS, OF ONE-HALF TO AMERICAN GRAPHOPHONE COMPANY, OF
BRIDGEPORT, CONNECTICUT, A CORPORATION OF WEST VIRGINIA, AND ONE-HALF
TO THOMAS A. EDISON, INCORPORATED, OF WEST ORANGE, NEW JERSEY, A COR-
PORATION OF NEW JERSEY.

CABINET FOR TALKING-MACHINES.

1,063,831.

Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Juiie 3, 1913.

Application filed April 8, 1910. Serial No. 554,110.

To ((11 trhom it may concern:

Be it known that I, Oscar E. Mektz, a
citizen of the United States, it'siding in
Phihulelphia. Pennsylvania, have invented
5 certain Improvements in Cabinets for
Talking-Machines, of which the following
is a specification.

Th.e object of my invention is to improve
(he construction of cabinets for talking ma-

10 chines so that when it is desired to change
the records the part of the mechanism carry-
ing the record can be drawn out without
disturbing the top of the cabinet.

In the accompan3'ing drawings, — Figure

15 1, is a perspective view of my improved
cabinet with the doors open to expose the
horn; Fig. 2, is a perspective view of the
upper jiortion of the cabinet with the pivot-
ed drawer open so that the record can be

20 changed ; Fig. 3, is a sectional plan view
of the cabinet, and Fig. 4, is a sectional
view in elevation.

A is the cabinet, supported in the present
instance upon suitable legs a and orna-

25 men ted in an}' manner desired.

a' is the top of the cabinet Avhich is pref-
erably secured to the permanent frame so
that ornaments can be placed upon the cabi-
net, and these ornaments need not be re-

30 moved when it is desired to change the
records.

B is a pivoted slide adapted to an opening
in one side of the cabinet, as shown. This
slide is pivoted at h and is provided with

35 a knob or other device V by which it can
be drawn out on the pivot, as illustrated in
Fig. 2. Mounted on this slide is the motor
mechanism of the talking machine.

In the present instance I have shown a

40 machine of the disk type, but it will be un-
derstood that a machine of any form may
be nsed without departing from the essen-
tial features of the invention. The disk D
is so located on the slide that when the slide

4 5 is closed as in Fig. 1, it will be in proper
position in the cabinet, and when the slide
is drawn out as in Fig. 2, it is in easy access
of the operator, so that a disk can be re-
moved from the machine and another disk

50 placed in its stead.

The stylus arm is located over the disk in

the ordinary manner and the horn connec-
tion may be made through the pivot or at
any other point on the slide.

E is the horn which communicates with 55
the honi section carried by the slide, and if
the horn section is at the pivot, then the
connection need not be broken, but if it is
a distance from the pivot, then the connec-
tion must be broken. When the slide is GO
di'awn out, or a flexible connection used, the
hern may also be carried bodily by the slide,
and either projects above or below the slide,
as desired, depending upon the type of
cabinet to which the invention is apjDlied. 65
In order to allow sufficient room for the
stylus arm I preferably liinge the side F of
the cabinet above the slide at / — / and I
connect this hinged side with the slide by a
rod c so that when the slide is drawn out the 70
side will be turned on its pivot and raised,
as in Fig. 2. In place of the pivoted side,
the front of the slide may extend above the
platform a sufficient distance to exjDose the
parts so that access may be readily had to 75
the mechanism.

While I have shown the slide and other
]Darts of the cabinet made of wood, it will
be understood that they may be made of
metal or any other material without depart- 80
ing from the essential features of the inven-
tion, and any suitable pivot may be used for
the slide.

The design of the cabinet may be varied
and the body of the cabinet may be square, 85
round or otherwise shaped without depart-
ing from the essential features of the inven-
tion, and the slide can be mounted on either
side or at the front or back of the cabinet
as desired. 90

I claim: —

1. The combination, in a talking machine
mount, of a casing, a pivot therefor, a record
carried thereby, reproducing means in en-
gagement W'ith said record, a horn connected 95
with said i-eproducing means, and a pivotal
connection for said horn in line with the
pivot of said casing whereby movement of
the mount upon its pivot may be made with-
out affecting the delivery of sound waves to 100
said horn.

2. The combination, in a talking machine

2

1,063,821

mount, of a main casing, a supplemental
casing movable with respect to the main
casing, a pivot for said supplemental casing,
a record carried thereby, reproducing means
5 in engagement with said record, a horn con-
nected with said reproducing means, and a
pivotal connection for said horn in line with
the pivot of said supplemental casing where-
by movement of the latter upon its pivot

10 may be made without affecting the delivery
of sound waves to said horn.

3. The combination, in a talking machine
mount, of a main casing having a permanent
top, a supplemental casing movable into and

15 out of the main casing and pivoted at one
side of the same, a record carried thereby,
reproducing means in engagement with said
record, a horn connected to said reproducing
means, pivotal connections for said horn in

20 line with the pivot of said supplem^ental
casing whereby movement of the mount
\ipon its pivot may be made without affect-
ing the delivery of sound waves to said horn,
a movable side section hinged to the main

25 casing above said supplemental casing, and
means connecting said side section with the
supplemental casing whereby said side sec-

tion may be operated when the supplemental
casing is moved on its pivot.

4. The combination, in a talking machine 30
mount, of a main casing having a permanent
top, a supplemental casing movable into and
cut of the main casing and pivoted at one
side of the same, a record carried thereby,
reproducing means in engagement with said 35
record, a horn connected to said reproducing
means, pivotal connections for said horn in
line with the pivot of said supplemental cas-
ing whereby movement of the moimt upon
its pivot may be made without affecting the 40
delivery of sound waves to said horn, a
movable side section hinged to the main cas-
ing above said supplemental casing, and
a rod pivotally connected to said side section
and the supplemental casing whereby said 4 5
side section may be operated when the sup-
plemental casing is moved on its pivot.

In testimony whereof, I have signed my
name to this specification, in the presence of
two subscribing Avitnesses.

OSCAR E. MERTZ.

Witnesses :

Wm. E. Shupe,
Wm. a. Barr.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

Washington, D. C."

H. 0. MILLER.
SOUND BOX.
AFPLIOAIION FILBD JVHE 2, 1806. BSNEWED OOT. 4, 1912.

1,063,823.

Patented June 3, 1913.

3 SHEETS-SHEET 1.

•^WvbM^ojea

r ^*-^ n 7^^ IT o'o £l*t<>*«»^

COLU,,.lEIA PLANOGRAPH CO.. WASHINGTON. I> .

H. C. MILLER.
SOUND BOX.
APPLICATION FILED JUNE 2, 1906.. EENEWED OOT. 4, 1912.

1,063,823. Patented June 3, 1913.

3 BHEETS-SHEET 2.

Qttot*%»if

'M CO.. WASHINGTON. IK C,

H. C. MILLEK.
SOUND BOX,
APPLIOATIOH FILED JUSE 2, 1906. RENEWED OOT. 4, 1912.

1,063,823.

Patented June 3, 1913.

3 SHEETS-SHEET 3.

J^yCjO^ Z

y^^:^,7^. T'^^uj^ -y^

y^Z^^LJ:^' ^^

77

1;':

/6,

V--\

(

77

\a

vX" "f '

^Wit»i eases

Swveitt'o*

77.C.7k/x:7X^7'

itey

Qttotv

COLUMBIA PLANOGRAPH CO.,

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

HENRY C. MILLER, OF WATERFORD, NEW YORK.
SOUND-BOX.

1,063,823. • Specification of letters Patent. PateiltedJline3, 1913.

Application filed June 2, 1906, Serial No. 319,934. Renewed October 4, 1912. Serial No. 723,998.

To all whom it mm/ concern :

Be it known that I, Henky C. Miixkr,
a citizen of the United States, residing at
Watei-ford, in the county of Saratoga and
5 State of New York, have invented certain
new and useful Improvements in Sound-
Boxes, of which the foUowing is a specifica-
tion.

This invention relates to improvements

10 in sound boxes of the type shown and de-
scribed in my pending application for pat-
ent Serial No. 314,654, filed May 1, 1906.

The object of the invention is to provide
a sound box having a diaphragm whose

1-5 shaj^e ma}^ be altered, or in other words
dished for raising the pitch, in combination
with means operating on said diaphragm
with or without stopping the machine, or
the necessity of being in close proximity to

20 the machine. The diaphragm on the sound
box is normally in what might be stated
zero position, and its shape is susceptible
of being altered to change the pitch by a
pneumatic arrangement, the pitch being en-

£5 tirely under control of the operator during
operation of the machine to bring out the
salient features of a particular record being
reproduced.

In the above mentioned application I have
described, and claimed modifying elements
attached to the diaphragm, and I find from
exjjeriments that better results are obtained
by making these elements in disconnected
series to permit the free A'ibration of the
diaphragm in all directions.^ It is essential
in order to obtain the very best results that
the lines of vibration be free on the dia-
phragm, for which reason I have found it
desirable as above stated, to make the modi-

4D fying elements spaced from and in line
with each other.

A further object of the invention is to
provide means for taking up wear of the
stylus bar, during the reproduction of a

i5 record.

In the drawing.s — Figure 1 is a front ele-
vation of my improved sound box. Fig.
2 is a rear view of the same. Fig. 3 is a
vertical section on the line 3 — 3 of Fig. 1.

£3 Fig. 4 is a view similar to Fig. 3, but show-
ing the diaphragm convexed to alter its
tone. Figs. 5, 6, and 7, are views of dia-
phragms showing different means of apply-
ing ni}' improved modifying elements. Fig.

££ 8 is a detail view of the connection between
the stylus lever and diaphragm. Fig. 9 is

fO

£5

a view similar to Fig. 3 of a slight modifica-
tion. Fig. 10 is a view of a diaphragm
.showing the modifying elements radially
disposed, as shown applied in Fig. 1. Fig. go
11 is a detail section of a diaphragm having
the modifying elements embossed therein.
Figs. 12 and 13 are views of a different
form of diaphragm modifying means. Fig.
14 is a face view of the same. ^5

The numeral 1, indicates a sound box
formed with an opening 2, in its periphery,
and an internal flange 3. To the rear of
the sound box is attached a plate 4, formed
with a hollow extension 5, to which the 70
usual horn 6, may be attached. Attached
to the open end of the extension 5, is a cap-
plate 7, formed with an opening 8, con-
nected by a tube 9, with a bulb 10.

The diaphragm 11, is located in the sound 75
box and bears on a preferably rubber ring
wa.sher or flange 12, seated against the flange
3. Between the extension 5, and the dia-
phragm, and moving freely within the sound
box, is a spider frame 13, formed with a 80
reduced annular flange 14, which extends
inwardly toward flange 3. Mounted on
flange 14, and projecting slightly beyond
the same is a preferably rubber washer 15,
the outer periphery of which is slightly 85
within tlie inner diameter of the washer 12,
its inner face bearing directly on the rear
of the diaphragm 11. The spider 13, is
connected by a rod IG, with a flexible dia-
phragm 19, as by washers and a screw 20. 90
The outer ends of said diaphragm 19, being
clamped between the cap-plate T, and the
extension 5.

The conical journals 21, of the stylus bar
21=^, are mounted, one in a bearing 22, which 95
is fixed to and extends outwardly from the
sound box, and the opposite journal is sup-
ported in a bearing in an L shaped spring
ijlate 23, secured to the sound box as at 24;
the normal tendency of said spring plate 109
being to spring away from bearing 22. The
ipring plate 23, is connected by a screw 25,
having a knurled head 26, and passes through
an opening 27, in the fixed bearing 22, the
loAver threaded end 27^*, engaging a threaded 105
opening 28, in said spring bearing 23. By
turning the screw rod 25, spring plate 23,
may be drawn toward bearing 22, to take up
wear of the conical journals 21, the thrust
as previousW stated being toward the fixed 110
bearing.

By the arrangement described, I am also

s

1,063,823

enabled to take np wear of the parts without
stopping the motor of the talking machine
to compensate for any irregularity of the
stjdus bar when playing a record, as will be
g very readily understood.

The stjiiis lever 29, is preferably formed
with the stylus bar, and extends upwardly
through opening 2, to a point approximately
opposite the center of and spaced from the

IQ diaphragm, the upper end of the stylus lever
being split at 30, to receive the bent end 31,
of a flat spring connecting device 32, the
opposite end of which is attached to the dia-
phragm 11, and to the opposite end of the

15 stylus lever is attached the usual stylus, in-
dicated at 33. The spring connecting de-
vice 32, may be in the form of a round wire
spring, and its outer end passed through
an opening drilled in the stylus lever.

20 I have fully and minutelj^ set forth the
advantages of a modifying element applied
to a diaphragm in my pending application,
No. 314,6.54 filed May 1, 1906 and for a
complete understanding of this feature it is

25 necessary to refer to it. In my present ap-
plication, and while I have carried out sub-
stantially the same theory, the modifying
elements are differently applied to permit
the diaphragm having as much flexibility as

30 possible, in order that the greatest suriface
may be vibrated to properly transmit the
sound waves produced by the records.

Assuming the diaphragm to be in the po-
sition illustrated in Fig. 3, and a record is

35 being reproduced which requires a different
pitch, the operator squeezes bulb 10, and the
air acting on the flexible diaphragm 19,
forces in the spider 13, and the washer 15.
bears on the diaphragm and compresses or

40 dishes it as shown on an exaggerated scale
in Fig. 4. The location of the washers 12
and 1.5. causes the washer 15, to act circum-
ferentially on the diaphragm inside the
inner diameter of washer 12, and produces

45 the result shown in Fig. 4, which prevents
buckling.

By the construction described the edge of
the diaphragm is free, and when the spider
is operated it dishes the entire area of the

50 diaphragm, without piilling or stretching
the material, and the quality of the dia-
phragm is therefore maintained irrespective
of its shape.

In the practical operation of the sound

55 box, the diaphragm is necessarih^ dished
comparatively little in order to change the
tone, so that the outward movement at the
center dees not affect the stylus lever to any
great degree; the spring connection 32, al-

60 lowing the stylus bar to operate in any of
the positions free enough so as not to injure
the record.

It will be understood that the Avashers or
flanges 12, and 15, may be of any material

65 and if necessary can be formed with flange

70

80

85

90

3, and spider 13, respectivel}', and maj' also
be corrugated if desired.

The spaces between the tuning elements are
of micrometer distances, but are made larger
so as to show tlie travel of the sound Avaves
betAveen them, the waA^es being shoAvn in
dotted lines a its before set forth.

In Fig. 5, I have shoAvn a slightly dif-
ferent arrangement of tuning elements, the
latter being placed in line with each other, -^
and Avhen used in connection with a Avooden
diaphragm, these modifjdng elements are
placed lengthwise of the grain. It is ob-
vious that the tuning elements may be ar-
ranged on the diaphragm to accomplish the
best results. For instance the arrangement
illustrated in Fig. 1, wherein the modify-
ing elements are disposed radially, excellent
results are obtainable with diaphragms con-
structed from certain materials. The dia-
phragm may be formed of metal, with the
modifying elements embossed therein, as will
be readily understood. The modifying ele-
ments may be placed on one or both faces
of the diaphragm, depending someAA^hat on
ihe conditions, and the washers for dishing
the diaphragm may be reA^ersed without af-
fecting the sound adjusting quality.

As disclosed in Figs. 12 to 14, the modify-
ing means consists of an arched strip 80, g^
extending entirely across the diaphragm,
and fastening it to the edge of the latter, the
same results may be accomplished as with
the disclosures herein before indicated. Or if
the modifying element is placed in the sound
box with the arch toward the diaphragm,
and then moving it by the operating means
16, it will be apparent that the soimd will
be altered.

I maA" combine with the ])neumatic means ^qi^
for altering the sound, a manual means in-
dicated at lO'"", in Fig. 3. This construction
is identical with that shown in the applica-
tion referred to, and is designed to be used
to set the position of the dia]3hrajym, or
Avhen it is undesirable to use the pneumatic
means, the latter being of course inoperatiA'e
Avhere the manual means is brought into op-
eration. The manual means may be operat-
ed to set the dia]5hragm, and then the pneu-
matic ineans operated as described, inde-
pendently of the operation of said manual
means.

^AHiat I claim is —

1. A sound box provided with a substan-
tially flat diaphragm, and means bearing
near its edges for dishing the diaphragm
throughout its entire area to alter its pitch.

2. A sound box comprising a casing haA^-
ing an annular flange, a normally flat dia- 125
]:)hragm AA-ithin the casing and seated on the
annular flange, and means acting on an an-
nular line within the margin of the annular
flange on the casing to dish said diaphragm

in concaA'o-convex form throughout its en- 130

100

110

ins

120

1,063,823

tire area to alter the pitch of the sound
transmitted by said diaphragm.

3. A sound box comprising a diaphragm,
a washer on which the diaphragm is seated,
5 a washer acting on an annuhir line on the
opposite side of the diaphragm to dish the
latter in concavo-convex form throughout
its entire area, and means opierating the lat-
ter dasher.

IQ 4. A sound box cohiprising a substantially
flat diaphragm, a flange on which the outer
edge of one surface of the diaphragm rests,
means acting near the edge of the dia-
phragm to dish the diaphragm throughout

15 its entire 'area, and means for operating the
latter means.

5. A sound box comprising a diaphragm,
means for disliing the same, and a pneu-
matic device which may be operated dur-

20 ii^g the operation of the machine without in-
terference tliercAvith for operating said
means.

('■>. A sound box comprising a substantially
flat diaphragm, means engaging the surface

25 of the diaphragm for dishing the latter
throughoiit its entire area, ancl means for
operating the latter means.

7. A sound box comprising a diaphragm,
means acting on the surface of the latter

30 to dish it, and jiueumatic means for operat-
ing said latter means.

S. A sound box comprising a flange on
Avhich the edge of one face of a diajihragm
rests, a diaphi'agm, an operating flange act-

35 ing on a line inside the flange of the sound
box for dishing the diaphragm, a S])ider sup-
porting the operating flange, and means op-
erating on the center of the spider for op-
erating the same.

40 0. A sound box comprising a flange on
which the edge of one face of a diaphragm
rests, a dia])hragm, an operating flange act-
ing (m a line inside of the aforesaid flange
for dishing the diaphragm, a si)ider on

45 which tlie operating flange is sup])orted, and
])neumatic means which may be operated
during the ojjeration of the machine witliont
interference therewith for operating the
spider.

50 10. A sound box comprising a substan-
tially flat diaphragm free on one side, a
flange, one face of the dia]:)hragm near one
edge resting on the flange, an o])erative
washer of smaller area than the aforesaid

55 flange and beariiig on the surface of the dia-
phragm, and means for operating the opera-
tive wa.sher to cause the edge of the dia-
])hragm to leave the flange and dish said
diaphragm throughout its entire area.

60 11- A sound box comprising a dia]:)hragm,
cooperating means for dishing said dia-
phragm, an air compressicm chamber extend-
ing from the sound box, a flexible dia-
phragm in said chamber, means connecting

65 the latter diaphragm and the diaphragm

dishing means, and means for regulating the
sujjply of air in the compression chamber.

12. A sound box com]3rising a diaphragui,.
means for dishing the diaphragm, an exten-
sion on the sound b )x, a imeumatic device ^^
formed in the extension for ojierating the
dishing means, and means for regulating
the su])ply of air for operating the dishing
means.

13. A sound box, comprising a diaphragm, ^rt,
means for dishing the same, and extension
on the sound box, pneumatic means in the
extension for operating the dishing means,
and a horn opening formed in the extension
between the diaphragm and the pneumatic 33
means.

1-1. A sound box having a stationary bear-
ing extending therefrom, a spring member
secured to said sound box and having its
free end formed in a bearing turned to be 35
in alinement with the stationary bearing, a
stylus lever mounted in the stationary bear-
ing and the bearing formed in the end of
the spring member, and a screw^ connecting
the two bearings to adjust the tension of 90
the spring bearing toward or from the sta-
tionary bearing.

15. A sound box comprising a diaphragm,
means for dishing the same including a
jDueumatic device com])rising a bulb and a 05
piston.

16. A sound box formed with an exten-
sion, a diaphragm, means partially Avithin
the extension for altering the pitch of the
diaj^hragm including a reciprocating elo- 100
mcnt and operatively positioned to change
the shape of the diaphragm, and ])neumatic
means for o]UM'ating the reciprocating ele-
ment without interrupting the operation of
the machine. 105

17. A sound box provided with a substan-
tially flat diaphragm, a flange against which
one face of the diaphragm rests, and means
for dishing the diaphragm, said means in
operation causing the circumference of 'the no
diaphragm to be moved from the flange to
dish the entire area of the diaphragm.

18. A sound box having a diaphragm,
modifying elements attached to said dia-
phragm, means located near the outer edge 115
of the diajihragm for dishing it throughout

its entire area, and means for operating the
dishing means.

19. A sound box comprising a stylus lever

a dia])hragm having modifying elements at- 120
tached thereto and spaced from each other,
between the edge of said diaphragm and
said stylus lever, the modifying elements be-
ing alined with resjiect to each other, means
for dishing the diaphragm throughout its 125
entire nrea, and means for operating the
dishing means.

20. A sound box comprising a diaphragm,
a stylus lever formed with a notch, and an

L shaped connecter having one end attached 130

1,063,823

to the diaphragm and its opposite end en-
gaging the notch in the stylus lever.

21. A sound box comprising a diaphragm,
means for altering the sound of the dia-

5 phragm, and pneumatic means which may
be operated during the operation of the ma-
chine Avithout interference therewith for
oi:)erating the sound altering means.

22. A sound box comprising a diaphragm.
JO means for altering the sou.nd of the dia-
phragm, pneumatic means for operating the
sound altering means, and a manual means
for oiDerating the sound altering means the
two latter means being operable independ-

15 ently of the other.

23. A sound box comprising a diaphragm,
means for altering" the sound of the dia-
phragm, pneumatic means for operating the
sound altering means, and manual means for

20 operating the sound altering means, the lat-
ter means adapted to be operated to set the
diaphragm, independently of the pneumatic
means.

2-1. A sound box comprising a casing, a

25 diaj:)liragm, a stationary washer, a movable
washer of a diiferent diameter, a spider en
which the movable washer is fastened,
means for moving the latter to dish the dia-
phragm throughout its entire area, and re-

30 leasing the pressure on said diaphragm to
allow the straightening of the same, the
movable washer actuating means extending
through the rear of the casing.

25. A sound box comprising a casing, a
35 diaphragm, a stationary washer, a movable

washer and sj^ider, means acting on the cen-
ter of the spider for causing variable pres-
sure on the outer edge of the diaphragm to
dish the latter throughout its entire area
40 and for withdrawing same to release the
pressure from the diaphragm.

26. A sound box comprising a casing, a
diaphragm, a stationary washer, a movable

washer of different diameter than the sta-
tionary washer and fastened on a movable 45
spider, means for causing pressure on the
center of the spider for dishing the dia-
phragm throughout its entire area, and a
pivoted stylus acting on the dished dia-
phragm. 50

27. A sound box, comprising a diaphragm,
means for altering the pitch of the dia-
phragm, and a pneumatic device for oper-
ating on the aforesaid means during the op-
eration of the machine without interference 55
therewith.

28. A sound box comprising a casing hav-
ing an annular flange on the inside, a sub-
stantially flat diaphragm, the flange form-
ing an abutment for the diaphragm and the 60
latter being free at its edge, and means act-
ing on a circumferential line on one side of
the diaphragm to alter the pitch of the lat-
ter, the free edge of the diaphragm serving

to pennit the latter means to be operative. 65

29. A sound box comprising a diaphragm
having its edge free to move, means acting
on a circumferential line at a point distant
from the edge of the diaphragm for dishing
the latter, and a centrally located stem ex- 70
tending through the sound box for operat-
ing the dishing means.

30. A sound box comprising a casing, a
diaphragm, and modifjdng elements at-
taclied to the diaphragm, said modifying ele- 75
ments being arranged in separated groups,
each element being attached throughout one

of its entire surfaces to the surface of the
diaphragm.

In testimony whereof I have signed my 80
name to this specification in the presence of
two subscribing witnesses.

HENRY C. MILLER.
Witnesses :

Wm. F. Palmer,
Jjsro. Imirie.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing' the " Commissioner of Patents,

Washington, D. C."

1,064,062.

J. C. ENGLISH.

SOUND BOX FOR TALKING MACHINES.

APPLICATION FILED OCT. 31, 1910.

Patented June 10, 1913.

JTC^.J.

JCt^. 3.

SQ'

WITNESSES

ATTORNEY

COLUMBIA PLANOORAf^H CO., WASHINOTON, D. C.

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

JOHN C. ENGLISH, OF CAMDEN, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOS TO VICTOR TALKING
MACHINE COMPANY, A CORPORATION OF NEW JERSEY.

SOTJND-BOX FOR TALKING-MACHINES.

1,0G4,0(>2.

Specification of letters Patent. PateiltedJune 10, 1913.

Application filed October 31, 1910. Serial No. 589,845.

To all 'whdm it may concern:

Be it known that I. Johx C. Encjlisii, a
citizen of the United States, and a resident
of the city of Camden, county of Camden,
5 and State of Xew Jersey, have invented cer-
tain new and useful Im]irovements in
Sound-Boxes for Talkinji-Machines, of
which the following is a full, clear, and ex-
act disclosure.

10 The main objects of this invention are, to
])rovide an improved sound box of simple,
compact and durable construction that will
record or re])roduce sounds with great ac-
curacy and efficiency; to proA ide in a sound

lo box, an improved casing, an improved dia-
phragm, and an improved stylus bar and
mounting therefor; and to provide other
improvements as will appear hereinafter.
It has been contended that in sound boxes

20 in which a thin flexible diaphragm is used
and in which the sound vibrations are pro-
duced or recorded by flexing the diaphragm,
the diaphragm acts like a reed and responds
sympathetically to certain tones in a manner

'-'5 tiiat produces undesirable results. It has
also been contended that such a diaphragm
is comparatively difficult to vibrate and does
not act with sufficient sensitiveness to pro-
duce or to record delicate OA'er-tones. In

.so this invention these defects which it has
been contended are incident to the recording
or reproduction of soxuid by the flexing of
a diaphragm, are obviated by utilizing, in-
stead of a flexible diaphragm, a light sub-

S5 stantially inflexible diaphragm and an im-
proved mounting therefor whereby the dia-
phragm is permitted to vibrate as a whole
without being flexed-

In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1

iO is a front elevation of a sound box con-
structed in accordance with this invention ;
Fig. 2 a transverse section on the line 2 — 2
of Fig. 1 ; Fig. 3 a side elevation of the
same; Fig. 4 a perspective of a detail of the

45 same; Fig. .j a fragmentary enlargement of
a portion of Fig. 2; Fig. 6 a view similar to
Fig. .5 but showing a modified form of this
invention; Fig. 7 an enlarged fragmentary
diametrical section of the diaphragm and

50 mounting or supporting ring shown in Figs.
1, 2 and 5 as they appear before being placed

in position in the sound box; and Fig. 8 is
a view similar to Fig. 7, showing in a similar
way the diaphragm and modified form of
mounting therefor which are shown in op- 55
erative position in Fig. 6.

Eeferring to the drawings, one embodi-
ment of this invention comprises a cylin-
drical sound box casing or support composed
of two main portions, — a cylindrical cup 60
shaped front plate 1 and a back plate 2 tele-
scoping into the front plate and provided
Avith a circular central aperture 3 for the
passage of sound waves.

Secured to the rear face of the back plate 65
2, coaxial therewith, by means of screw 5,
is a yielding tubular extension 6 provided
with a non-yielding lining 7 and an in-
wardly projecting stop 8, whereby the sound
box may be telescoped over the usual tubular 70
tone-arm or sound conveyer (not shown).

The inner surface 10 of the back plate 2
is preferably convexly curved flaring in-
wardly from the central aperture 3 to the
outer peripher}'- of the plate. The inner sur- 75
face of the front plate 1 of the casing is
preferably in the form of a stepped cylin-
der, providing an annular shoidder 12 fac-
ing rearwardW and spaced from the oppo-
site inner surface of the back plate 2, form- 80
ing therewith an annular recess 15 in which
snugly fits a yielding gasket or mounting 16,
in which is supported a diaphragm 17.

The gasket 16 is continuous or closed in
structure, is preferably made of rubber or 85
other suitable solid resilient or yielding ma-
terial, and is preferably substantialfv T-
shaped in cross section, comprising a base 18
substantially equal in width to the width of
the recess 15. and having a cylindrical outer 90
surface 19 slightly greater in diameter than
the c.vlindrical inner surface of the recess 15.
The inner surface of the base 18 is prefer-
ably convex in cross section and in the form
of two oppositely disposed inwardly con- 95
verging conical surfaces 20, which meet in
a centrally arranged normally flat annular
web 21 which forms a reduced intermediate
portion of the gasket. This web 21 is inte-
gi-al with the base 18 and extremely thin and 100
flexible. The inner portion of the web 21
terminates in an annular binder or holder

1,064:,062

integi'al with and thicker than the web and
is provided upon its inner edge with a cen-
trally arranged annular cylindrical grooved
recess 22, in which snugly fits the marginal
5 portion of the diaphragm 17. The gasket
may be held in position by means of wax 22'
or other similar material applied between
the base of the gasket and the inner cylin-
drical surface of the front plate 1.

10 The diaphragm IT is preferably made of
paper or any other light material, and when
made of paper or other similar poroiis ma-
terial may be impregnated with resin or any
other substance or composition to make the

15 diaphragm moisture-proof. The diaphragm
is of substantially uniform thickness
throughout its entire extent, and with the
exception of its marginal portion, is prefer-
ably dished or conical in shape, converging

20 rearwardly axially with the sound box cas-
ing. The marginal portion of the dia-
phragm is preferably in the form of a flat
annulus, arranged in a plane perpendicular
to the longitudinal axis of the sound box.

25 As the diameter of the gasket 16 is
slightly larger than the internal diameter of
the recess 15, in which it is held, the gasket
Avill be held under a state of compression
when the diaphragm and gasket are in oper-

30 ative position in the casing, and the thin
portion of the web 21 will be slightly dis-
torted laterally, as shown in Fig. 2 and en-
larged in Fig. 6, from its normally flat con-
dition. The diaphragm is thus held when in

35 operative position under a slight tension or
compression against the periphery 17' there-
of by the gasket acting radially against the
peripheral edge of the diaphragm and it
may here be stated that so far as this appli-

40 cation is concerned the expressions "' pe-
riphery " or " peripheral portion " or " pe-
ripheral edge" refer to the outer edge of
the diaphragm, that is to say, that portion
of the diaphragm between the plane surfaces

45 of the opjDOsite sides of the mai-ginal portion
of the diaphragm.

To hold the back plate 2 in position and
to permit of the adjustment of the back
plate toward and away from the gasket 16.

50 a series of oblong apertures 2?> are provided
through the cylindrical rim of the front
plate, and a headed screw 24 extends loosely
through each of these apertures and is
threaded into the back plate. By this con-

55 struction the pressing of the back upon the
base of the gasket may be varied to increase
or diminish the pressure of the gasket
against the peripheral edge of the dia-
jonragm.

60 For communicating vibrations corre-
sponding to sound waves to or from the dia-
phragm, a stylus bar 25 is monnted to oscil-
late upon the front plate of the sound box
casing, one end of the bar being within -the

casing axially in front of the diaphragm, 65
and the bar extending radially outwardly
through an aperture 26 provided therefor
in the casing. The inner end of the stylus
bar is ^Divotally connected to the outer ^nd
of a light but rigid connecting rod 27, the 70
inner end of which is phonetically connect-
ed in any suitable manner to the central por-
tion of the diaphragm, the outer end of the
connecting rod being preferably bifurcated
to receive the inner end of the stylus bar. 75
The outer end of the stylus bar projects out-
wardly from the sound box casing and is
provided with the usual stylus socket 30 and
set screw 31 for holding a stylus 32 in place.

For supporting the stylus bar to oscillate 80
upon a substantially fixed axis with respect
to the sound box casing, the bar is provided
outside of the casing with a cross-piece 35,
rigid therewith, and projecting in opposite
directions therefrom. Each end of this 85
cross-piece 35 is recessed to receive a clamp-
ing plate 36, which is adjustobly connected
to the cross-piece by means of a headed
screw 37, which extends loosely through the
clamping plate and an aperture in one end 90
of a flexible connector 38 and is threaded
into the cross-piece 35.

Each of the two flexible connectors, or
spaced yielding stipports 38 is pi-eferably
made of thin tempered steel, but may be 95
made of copper, fabric or other non-resilient
material. Each connector 38 extends in-
Avardly from the cross-piece 35, being
clamped rigidly at its outer end between the
cross-piece 35 and the clamping plates 36 by 100
means of the screw 37. The inner end of
each flexible connector 38 is similarly
clamped against the rear surface of an ex-
tension 39, integral or rigid Avitli the front
portion of the sound box casing, by means 105
of a clamping plate 40 and a sci'ew 41. The
flexible connectors 38 are thus arranged par-
allel to each other and in a plane siibstan-
tially perpendicular to the longitudinal axis
of tiie sound box casing. no

The space between the extension 39 of the
casing and the cross-piece 35 of the stvlus
bar is preferably only sufficient to permit of
the necessary oscillation of the bar, and the
bar is thus restrained to swing- upon a sub- 115
stantially fixed axis, ])erpen«licular to the
bar and parallel to the plane of the marginal
portion of the diaphragm.

In the modified form of this invention
shown in Figs. 6 and 8, the sound box casing 120
and the diaphragm 17 are constructed as
hereinbefore described and the gasket 51 is
substantially identical with the gasket 16,
hereinbefore described except that the mar-
ginal portion or base of this gasket is bifur- 125
cated and in the form of two outwardly di-
verging portions 52. The outer diameter of
the bifurcated base of this gasket is aor-

1,064,062

mally substantially the same as the inner
diameter of the annular groove 15 in which
it rests.

When the gasket 51 is in its operative po-
5 sition the free edges of the two i^ortions 52
of the base of the gasket are clamped to-
ward each other between the shoulder 12
of the front plate 1 and the inner surface
of the back ]Dlate 2, so as to compress the

10 gasket radially against the peripheral edge
of the diaphragm 17. The thin web-like por-
tion of the gasket is slightly distorted lat-
erally from its normally fiat plane by this
compression.

15 The stylus bar and its mounting and
other features of this modified construction
may be the same as shown and hereinbefore
described.

In the operation of this device, owing to

20 the extreme thinness and flexible nature of
the web forming the intermediate portion
of the gasket, and to the extreme lightness
and comparatively inflexible nature of the
diaphragm, the diaphragm is extremely sen-

25 sitive to respond to the vibration of the
stylus bar in reproducing sound or to re-
spond to the action of the sound waves in
recording sound and in either case therefore
the diaphragm vJl)rates as a whole without

30 any appreciable flexing and there is very
little, if any, appreciable loss of efficiency
•due to the diai:)hragni or its moujiting.

It is evident that in applying this inven-
tion various changes might be made in the

35 constructions without departing from the
spirit of this invention or the scope of the
api:)ended claims.

Having thus descriljed this invention, I
claim and desire to protect by Letters Pat-

4 0 ent of the United States:

1. In a sound box, the combination with
a substantially inflexible conical diaphragm,
of a yielding gasket su])porting said dia-
phragin, said ga.sket being held under an

45 initial pressure forcing said gasket against
the i:>eripheral edge of said diaphragm.

2. In a sound box, the combination with
a circular diaphragm, of a yielding gasket
supporting the same, said gasket comprising

60 an annular base portion greater in internal
diameter than the diameter of said dia-
phragm and surrounding said diaphragm in
the plane of the marginal edge thereof, and
comj^rising a relatively thin annular por-

55 tion between said base portion and said dia-
phragm.

3. A gasket for a sound box comprising
an annular base portion, and a relatively
thin normally flat annular portion carried

60 by said base porti(m and projecting toward
the center of said base portion from the in-
ternal surface of said base portion.

4. A yielding gasket for a sound box,
comprising a base portion, a relatively thin

portion inclosed by and projecting inwardly 65
from said base portion, and a holder ex-
tending inwardly from said relatively thin
portion, and adapted to support the mar-
ginal portion of a diaphragm.

5. An annular yielding gasket for a sound 70
box, comprising a base portion, a relatively
thin portion projecting inwardly from said
base portion, and a grooved holder extend-
ing inwardly from said relatively thin jjor-
tion, and adapted to support the marginal 75
portion of a cliaphragm.

G. In a sound box, the combination with
a diaphragm, of yielding means engaging
the peripheral edge of said diaphragm, and
adjustable means for compressing said 80
yielding means to apply a yielding pressure
upon said i)eripheral edge radially with re-
spect to said diaphragm.

7. In a sound box, the combination with

a yielding support, of a diaphragm having 85
its marginal edge surrounded and engaged
by said support, the cliaphragm being of a
size to place the yielding support under ini-
tial compression, and adjustable means act-
ing on the yielding support to modify the go
state of compression of said support.

8. In a sound box, the combination with
a diaphragm having a cupped central por-
tion and a substantially flat rim, of a yield-
ing gasket engaging said rim and held un- 95
der an initial pressure, forcing said gasket
radially against the peripheral edge of said
rim.

9. In a sound box, the combination with

a diaphragm, of a yielding gasket sup])ort- loo
ing said diaphragm, and bearing against
the marginal edge tliereof, said gasket com-
prising a yielding base portion having an
internal diameter greater than the external
diameter of said diaphragm and arranged in 105
the plane of the' marginal edge of saicl dia-
phragm, and comprising a relatively thin
yielding portion between said base portion
and said diaphragm.

10. An annular ^nelding gasket for a no
sound box, said gasket comprising a yield-
ing annular base portion, and a yielding an-
nular portion thinner than and inclosed by
said base portion, integral therewith and
projecting iuAvardly from the internal sur- 115
face of said base portion.

11. An annular yielding gasket for a
sound box, comprising a yielding annular
base porti(!n, a normally flat annular web
thinner than said base portion and integral 120
with and projecting inwardly therefi'om,
and an internally grooved holder projecting
inwardlj^ from said web and integral there-
with.

12. In a sound box, the combination with 125
a diaphragm of a gasket surrounding said
diaphragm and supporting the same, said
gasket comprising a holder embracing the

1,064,062

opposite sides of the margin of said dia-
phragm, having a relatively thin web-like
yielding portion integral Avith said holder
and surrounding the same.
5 13. In a sound box, the combination with
a diaphragm of a gasket surrounding said
diaphragm and supporting the same, said
gasket comprising a holder embracing the
opposite sides of the margin of said dia-

10 i^hragm, having a relatively thin web-like
yielding portion integral with said holder
and surrounding the same, said gasket being
in contact with the marginal edge of said
diaphragm.

15 14. In a soimd box, the combination with
a diaphragm vibratory as a whole, without
flexing, and in a direction transverse to its
own plane, of a yielding gasket surrounding
and supporting said diaphragm, said gasket

20 being free to flex, and being held under an
initial state of compression by said dia-
phragm.

16. In a sound box, the combination with
a diaphragm vibratory as a whole, without

25 flexing, and in a direction transverse to its
own plane, of a yielding gasket surrounding
and supporting said diaphragm, said gasket
being free to flex, and being held under an
initial state of compression by said dia-

30 phragm, said gasket reacting to compress
said diaphragm radially.

16. In a sound box, the combination with
a dished diapliragm of substantially uni-
form thickness throughout its full extent, of

35 a yielding gasket surrounding and support-
ing said diaphragm, said gasket being free
to flex and being held in an initial state of
compression by said diaphragm.

17. In a sound box, the combination with
40 a diaphragm of a yielding gasket free to

flex and supporting said ctiaphragm in an
initial state of compression, said diaphragm
reacting to hold said gasket under an initial
state of compression.

45 18. In a sound box, the combination with
a diaphragm vibrator}^ as a whole without
flexing, and in a direction transverse to its
own plane, of a yielding gasket supporting-
said diaphragm and holding the same in an

50 initial state of compression, said diaphragm
reacting to hold said gasket in an initial
state of compression.

19. In a sound box, the combination with
a diaphragm vibratory as a whole without

55 flexing and in a direction transverse to its
OAvn plane, of a yielding gasket entirely
supporting said diaphragm and holding the
same in an initial state of compression, said
diaphragm reacting to hold said gasket in

60 an initial state of compression.

20. In a sound box, the combination with
a substantiall}'' inflexible diaphragm vibra-
tory as a whole in a direction transverse to
its own plane, of a yielding gasket inclosing

said diaphragm and contacting with the pe- 65
ripheral edge thereof and holding said dia-
phragm in an initial state of compression,
said diaphragm reacting through its mar-
ginal edge to hold said gasket in an initial
state of compression. 70

21. A gasket for a sound box, comprising
a continuous base portion, and a relativelj^
thin web portion carried and surrounded by
said base portion.

22. A gasket for a sound box, comprising 75
a continuous base portion and a relatively
thin web portion carried by said base por-
tion and lorojecting into the space inclosed
by said base portion.

23. A gasket for a sound box, comprising 80
a continuous yielding base portion, and a
relatively thin yielding web portion sur-
rounded and carried by said base portion.

24. A gasket for a sound box, comprising

a continuous yielding base portion, and a 85
relatively thin yielding web portion sur-
rounded and carried by said base portion
and wholly included in the space surrounded
by said base portion.

25. In a sound box, the combination with 90
a diaphragm, of yielding means engagingthe
peripheral edge of the diaphragm and con-
fined peripherally, and adjustable means for
compressing said yielding means laterally to
apply yielcling pressure on the diaphragm 95
in the plane of said edge.

26. A gasket for a sound box comprising
a base portion, and a relatively thin flat web
portion carried by said base portion and
projecting inwardly from the internal sur- lOO
face of said base portion.

27. In a sound box, the combination with
a diaphragm, of a yielding support engag-
ing the peripheral edge of the diaphragm,
and adjustable means acting on said yield- 105
ing support to cause the same to apply dif-
ferent yielding pressures on the peripheral
edge of the diaphragm in a plane substan-
tially normaito the axis of the diaphragm.

28. In a sound box, the combination with no
a diaphragm, of yielding means engaging
the peripheral edge of the diaphragm, and
adjustable means acting on said yielding
means to produce varying pressures of said
yielding means on the diaphragm, said yield- 115
ing means exerting a pressure on the pe-
ripheral edge of said diaphragm independ-
ently of said adjustable means.

29. In a sound box, the combination of a
substantially inflexible diaphragm, a flexible 120
web member supporting said diaphragm by
engagement with the peripheral portion
thereof, and means for causing stress in said
flexible member to act on the periphery of
said diaphragm solely in a plane substan- 125
tially normal to the axis of said diaphragm.

30. In a sound box, the combination of a
substantially inflexible diaphragm, a yield-

1,064,062

Q

ing member surrounding and supporting
said diaphragm, and means acting on said
yielding member to vary tlie stress of said
yielding member with respect to said dia-
jjhragm, said yielding member exerting a
pressure on the peripheral edge of said dia-
phragm independently of said adjustable
means.

In witness whereof, I have hereunto set
my hand this 27th day of October, A. D. lo

1910.

JOHN C. ENGLISH.

Witnesses :

Chaeles C. More,
Frakk B. Middleton, Jr.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

Washington, D. C."

J. A. BABBITT.

TALKING MACHINE.

APPLIOATIOH TILED FEB. 8, 1010.

1,064,931.

Patented June 17, 1913.

2 SHEETS-SHEET 1.

INVENTOR

iO 'iZ

ATTORNEY

I'LANlHiHAl'H CO., WASI^N0TO^, L

J. A. RABBITT.

TALKING MACHINE.

APPLICATION FILED FEB. 8, 1910.

1,064,931.

Patented June 17, 1913.

2 SHEETS-SHEET 2.

INVENTOR

^^ii^uH^a./^^/Mf

ATTORNEY

PLANOQRAPH CO., WASHINOTON. D. C.

UNITED STATES PATENT OI'FICE.

JAMES ALOYSIUS RABBITT, OF YOKOHAMA, JAPAN.
TALKING-MACHIWE.

1,064,931.

Specification of Letters Patent Patented Juiie 17, 1913.

Application filed February 8, 1910; Serial No. 543,709.

To all whom if may concern :

Be it known that I, Jaimes ^. Rabbitt, a
citizen of the United States, residing at
Yokchnnia, nn the Empire of Japan, have
5 invented certain new and iisefiil Improve-
meuts in Talkinir-Machines. of which the
following is a specification.

This invention relates to talking machines
and is directed to the provision of a machine

3C of an improved construction with which re-
corded sounds may be reproduced clearly
and with ample volume, and which is con-
venient to use and of attractive appearance.
One feature of the invention resides in the

15 construction of the sound-conveying i^assage
leading from the sound-box, this being such
as to offer little obstruction to the sound
waves pa.ssing therethrough and to permit
of the free movement of the sound-box under

20 :ill conditions during the reproduction of the
record. The sound-conveying devices more-
over, are readily removable and again in-
serted in operative position for convenience
in transporting the machine.

25 Other features of the invention x^elate to
the construction of a talking machine where-
by it is made more convenient to use, these
including the provision of receptacles for
used and imused styli and means for sup-

30 porting the tone-arm while replacing a used
.'-tylus with a new one.

The preferred embodiment of my inven-
tion is illustrated in the accompanying
drawings in which —

35 Figure 1 is an elevation of the machine,
Figs. 2 and 3 are detail views partly in ele-
vation and partly in section, Fig. 4 is a top
view of the machine with the horn removed.
Fig. 5 is a detail view of the receptacle

40 .showing the cover thereof in position to
support the tone-arm, Fig. 6 is a view simi-
lar to Fig. 1 showing the tone-arm in the
inoperative position, Fig. 7 is a view of the
sound-box and stylus support, partly in sec-

45 tion. and Fig. 8 is a sectional elevation show-
ing the speed regulating device.

Referring to these drawings, the machine
consists of the usual motor-box 1, having a
motor therein arranged to drive a vertical

50 shaft 2 which carries the turn-table 3, the
latter being adapted to receive a sound-rec-
ord 4 of disk form and to rotate the latter.
In the top of the motor-box and preferably
at one corner thereof is an opening which

65 receives a tubular socket 5, the latter being
secured in this opening in any suitable man-

ner. This socket 5 cooperates Avith a pin 6,
lK)th' of polygonal cross-section, to support
a tubular elbow-member 7 forming part of
the sound-conveying passage. This elbow 7 so
is in the form of a U and is mounted upon
the top of the motor-box with both side-
membere thereof directed upwardly. In the
bottom of this elbow-member is a threaded
opening into- which' tlie upper end of the pin 65
6 is threaded. In the drawing, I have
shown the pin f5 secured to the elbow-mem-
ber 7 at about the cent-er line of the latter
but the arrangement in this respect may be
varied as may be deemed advisable, depend- 70
ent upon' the length of "the tone-armi and the
character of the horn employed.

The tone-arm^ is shown at 8 ; it is prefer-
ably tapered from end to end and its large
end is turned downwardly; to the smaller 75
end of the tane^^arm is secured the sound-
box 9' whose stylus is adapted to track in the
groove of the record 4 upon^ the turn-table 3.
The deflected end of the tone-arm^ 8 is pivot-
ally connected to one end of the elbow 7 in 80
such a manner that free movement of the
tone-arm and sound-box is permitted about
both vertical and horizontal axes. The con-
struction whereby the tone-arm is mounted
thus is shown in Figs. 2 and 3. On the in- 85
terior of the elbow 7 adjacent to the end
thei'eof is a projection or circumferential
flange' 10. The exterior of the elbow 7 at
the end thereof is threaded to receive a re-
taining ring 11. BetAveen the inwardly pro- 90
jecting edge of the retainer 11 and the shoul-
der 10 is a ring 12 which is positioned by
these parts and which may freely turn cir-
cumferentiall}'. The large end of the tone-
arm i^asses through this ring 12 and pivot 95
pins 13 are provided at diametrically oppo-
site points which permit the tone-arm to
turnaielatdvely to ringi 12 about a horizontal
axis.

The end of the elbow-member 7 opposite 100
that to which the tone-arm is secured is
formed to support a tapering amplifying
honi 14 in any suitable manner and to per-
mit of adjusting tlie horn about a vertical
axis so that the sound may be directed as 105
desired. In the drawing I have shown the
end of the member 7 as provided with a
flange 15, the horn 14 as provided with a
coacting flange IG and a clamp 17 adapted
to l)e screwed doAvn upon the flange 15 over- 110
lapping flange 10 so as to hold the horn 14
in position upon the elbow-member 7.

2

1,064,931

Eeferring to Figs. 4, 5 and 6, it will be
seen that the machine is provided with a
receptacle for the styli and this receptacle
is so formed as to facilitate the replacing
5 of a used stylus with a new one. In the top
of the motor-box adjacent to the turn-table
is an opening in which is mounted a recepta-
cle having two compartments 18 and 19
therein. The compartment 18 is for new

10 styli and the compartment 19 for used styli
and r therefore provide means for support-
ing the tone-arm in such position that when
the stylus carried thereby is released it will
drop into the compartment 19. I utilize as

15 the support for the tone-arm the cover pro-
vided for the stylus receptacle. The recep-
tacle has a top plate 20 secured to the top
of the motor-box and to this top plate is
hinged a cover 21. This cover is provided

20 with a projection 22 such that when the
cover is turned on its hinge to the position
in which it is shown in Fig. 5, the projec-
tion will co-act with the top of the motor-
box to support the cover 21 in this position.

25 Cover 21 is provided with an off-set portion
23, cut away on one side to substantially the
curvature of the tone-arm 8. Thus when a
stylus has become used, the cover 21 may be
turned back to permit of obtaining a new

30 stylus from the compartment 18, and the
tone-arm 8 may then be moved to its inop-
erative position resting upon the off-set 23
of the cover 21, as shown in Fig. 6. In
this position the stylus carried by the sovmd-

35 box will be directly over the compartment
19, and the operator may then release the
used stylus, the latter falling into the com-
partment 19; and as the tone-arm is then
supported in inoperative position, he has

40 both hands free for inserting and securing
the new stylus in position. If desired the
compartment 19 may be provided with a
cover-plate 24 having an opening therein,
as shown in Figs. 4 and 6, which opening

45 will be directly under the stylus carried by
the sound-box when the tone-arm is in in-
operative position.

Fig. 7 shows the means employed for se-
curing the stylus in position. The stylus-

50 holder is shown at 25 ; it consists of an exte-
riorly threaded member which is slotted lon-
gitudinally at one end thereof and is pro-
A'ided with an axial bore to receive a stylus
26. On the exterior of the member 25 is a

55 tapered portion, as shown at 27. A nut 28
is threaded on the member 25 and this nut
may be turned to carry it into engagement
Avith the tapered portion 27 with which it
will coact to contract the member 25 and

60 cause it to grip the stylus 26 therein.

Referring to Fig. 8, a convenient form of
speed-regulating device for the motor of the
machine is shown. This consists of a lever
29 in the form of a Y pivotally mounted in
a slot formed in the top of the motor-box. 65
Two of the arms of this member project up-
wardly above the upper surface of the mo-
tor-box and are provided with finger-pieces
whereby the lever may be readily turned on
its pivot. A sheet-metal piece 30 is secured 70
to the under ^ide of the top of the motor-
box and has ears projecting up into the
slot of the member 29 and on which that
member is pivotally mounted. The third
arm of the lever projects downwardly and 75
to its end is pivotally connected one end
of a link 31, the other end of which is piv-
otally connected to a lever 32 which oper-
ates the brake connected to the centrifugal
governor of the machine. The piece 30 is 80
l^rovided with a depending arm carrying
an interiorly threaded sleeve 33 which re-
ceives one end of a rod 34, the opposite end
of which passes through an opening in the
side wall of the motor-box. By turning the 85
rod 34 it may be positioned as desired to
limit the turning motion of the member 29
so that the latter may be readily moved to
the position which will give the desired
speed of rotation of the motor. 90

Having described my invention what I
claim as new therein and desire to secure
by Letters Patent of the United States is :

1. A talking machine having a motor -box,

a rotatable turntable supported above the 95
same, a pivoted tone-arm, a sound-box and
stylus carried thereby, a stylus receptacle
mounted on the motor-box, and a cover for
said receptacle movable into position to
support said tone-arm with the stylus of the 100
sound-box over the receptacle, substantially
as set forth.

2. A talking machine having a motor -box,
a rotatable turntable supported above the
same, a pivoted tone-arm, a sound-box and 105
stylus carried thereby, a stylus receptacle
mounted on the motor-box and having two
compartments therein, and a cover for said
receptacle hinged at one end thereof and
movable into position to support said tone- iio
arm with the st3dus of the soimd-box over
one of said compartments, substantially as

set forth.

This specification signed and witnessed
this 22nd day of December, 1909.

JAMES ALOYSIUS RABBITT.

Witnesses :

j. k. coldwell,
Genji Kukbavar.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing thei " Commissioner of Patents,

"Washington, D. C."

A. L. BUEKE.

PHONOGEAPH REPEODUOER.
APPLICATION FILED APE. 4, 1913.

1,065,212.

Patented June 17, 1913.
/

^>^

/V^i«/t$r^

l.PaZ&L.

<2S&4.<:^^e^^^/^^t/d,^'^-''^^

COLUMBIA PLANOORAPH CO., WASHINCTON, D. C.

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE,

ABRAHAM L. BUKKE, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR TO WALTER A. SCOTT.

TRUSTEE.

PHONOGRAPH-REPRODUCER.

1 ,065,213.

Specification of
Application filed April 4,

H To all whom it may coneeru:

Be it known that I, Auijaha:m L. Bxtrice,
a citizen ol the Ignited Stnte.s, residing at
Chicago, in the county of Cook and State
5 of Illinois, have invented certain new and
useful Improvements in Phonograph-Re-
producers, of which the following is a speci-
fi<'ation.

The object of my invention is to improve

10 the construction of phonograph reproducers
in su<*h manner as to make the reproduced
sound more pleasing and a more faithful

B reprtjduction of the original sound.

~ As is well known the reproduction of

15 sounds by phonograplxs is ordinarily made
up in part of extraneous sounds not form-
ing part of the original sounds recorded
upon the phontJgraph record, and all sounds
are not repr(;duced viith the same propor-

20 tionate value which they have in the origi-
nal. These extraneous sounds may arise
from a variety of causes, but in all cases
the}^ have an injurious effect upon the faith-
fulness of the reproduction and they are in-

25 variably of a disagreeable character. I have
found that these extraneous sounds can be
largely eliminated and the tone of the repro-
duced sounds greatly improved b}" the con-
struction herein described and claimed and

30 illustrated in the drawings, in which —

Figure 1 is a cross sectional view^ of a
phcmcgraph reproducer of a type now in
connnon use, but having my improvements
applied thereto. Fig. 2 is a view ox the re-

2p l)roducer box from the side on which the
needle arm is located. Fig. 3 is a detail
perspective view of my improved reproducer
arm; and Fig. 4 is a cross sectional view
througli the end of the reproducer arm ad-

^0 jacent the needle socket. Fig. 5 is a bottom
plan view of the sound box.

In phonograph reproducers, as ordinarily
constructed, the needle arm is an all-metal
member extending from the point of at-

*5 tachment to the diaphragm to the point of
attachment to the reproducer needle. Ac-
cording to my inA^ention I break the all-
metal path between the diaphragm and the
needle by the interposition in said path of

^0 souie substance different from the metal of
which the needle arms have heretofore been
formed, the object being to provide a con-
struction of such a character as to eliminate
the obnoxious sounds ])roduced by an all-

^5 metal needle arm and to improve the tone

Letters Patent. Patented June 17, 1913.

1913. Serial No. 758,827.

of (he i-eproduced .sound. A convenient
ineans of bringing about the desired result
is to construct the needle arm of the form
shown in the drawings. The outer end. 1
of the needle arm there shown is formed 60
of metal secured to the diapjiragm 2 by
meansof a screw 3 in the usual manner, the
end of the needle arm and the screw being-
further held to the diaphragm by means of
wax or other adhesive 4. The outer metallic 65
end 1 of the needle arm does not extend con-
tinuously to the inner end thereof, but is
secured to an intermediate part 5 of some
other material, the intermediate part o be-
ing in turn secured to the inner metallic 70
part 6 of the needle arm. In practice, I
have found celluloid to be a material Avell
adapted to eliminate the undesirable vibra-
tions and to correctly reproduce the sounds.
In the form of my invention shown in the 75
drawings, I interpose celluloid between the
diaphragm and the needle. A convenient
mode of assembling the structure, a mode
which I have used in practice, consists in
constructing the intermediate part of the 80
needle ai-m of two la^^ers 5', 5" of celluloid,
the thicker part 5' being grooved at its op-
posite ends to receive the outer and inner
metallic parts 1 and 6 of the needle arm
after which the thinner celluloid layer 5" 85
is secured to the jDart 5' and the metallic
outer and inner parts 1 and 6 of the needle
arm are firmly secured in place by means of
rivets 7 passing therethrough and through
the celhdoid. 90

My invention is in no wise restricted to
the specific construction described, although
I have found such construction well adapted
to the purpose intended.

Together with my improved needle arm 95
I use certain other improvements which co-
act therewith in improving the quality of
the reproduced sound. Beneath the heads
of the screws 8, whereby the needle arm is
secured against its knife edge bearings 9, 100
I insert washers 10 formed of rubber or
other more or less soft and yielding mate-
rial, these washers having the effect of pre-
venting the transmission of vibration from
the needle arm to the casing of the dia- 105
phragm.

A further improvement which I find to
have a beneficial effect in connection with
the other improvements herein described is
the u.se of hard celluloid gaskets 12 between 111

1,065,213

the diaphragm and the rubber gaskets 13
ordinarily employed. The use of such hard
celluloid gaskets prevents contact of the soft
rubber gaskets with the diaphragm and
5 thereby obviates the injurious effect upon
the tones which I have found to be caused
by the soft rubber gaskets. It seems prob-
able that the improvement in tone caused
by the use of the hard celluloid gaskets may

10 be due to their having the effect of doing
away with the dampening of the vibrations
in the diaphragm by the contact therewith
of the soft rubber gaskets, and it seems prob-
able that the hard celluloid gaskets which

15 directly contact with the diaphragm do not
lessen its effective diameter, as is done by
the direct contact of soft rubber gaskets.
However this may be I have found in prac-
tice that a material improvement in tone

20 is brought about by the use of the hard
celluloid gaskets, and that the use in combi-
nation of my improved needle arm, the hard
celluloid gaskets, and the Avashers beneatli
the heads of the screws, which hold the

25 needle arm in place brings about a great im-
provement in the tone of phonographs, in

some cases imparting a pleasing and true
tone to phonographs which without my im-
provements give only an unjoleasant and
unfaithful reproduction of the original 3
sound.
I claim:

1. In a phonograph, a diaphragm, and a
needle arm, said needle arm comprising
parts of metal and of celluloid, through 3
which the vibrations are transmitted.

2. In a phonograph, a diaphragm, a
needle arm, said needle arm comprising a
metallic outer part secured to said dia-
phragm, a celluloid intermediate part se- 4
cured to said outer part, and a metallic inner
part secured to said intermediate part.

3. In a phonograph, a diaphragm, and a
needle arm, said needle arm comprising a
celluloid portion through which the vibra- ^
tions are transmitted.

In testimony whereof, I have subscribed
my name.

ABKAHAM L. BURKE.
Witnesses :

Walter A. Scott,
Annie C. Courtenay.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents

WasMngt

each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,
on, D. C."

C. LINDSTKOM.

STOP MECHANISM FOR TALKING MACHINES.

APPLIOATIOH PILED MAT 4, 1911,

1,065,694.

Patented June 24, 1913.

Figi. Kg.5. R6.6.

uv / r/v £• s s £: S :

Ihyn%.4l.<^

-y

ciaJ^

sy

/fisJB'\JTO'R.

fWroTIN EYS.

COLUMBIA PLANOORAPH CO.. WASHINQTON, D. C.

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE

CARL LINDSTBOM, OF BERLIN, GERMANY.
STOP MECHANISM FOR TALKING-MACHINES.

I

1,065,694.

Specification of Letters Patent. Patented June 34, 1913.

Application filed May 4, 1911. Serial No. 624,917.

To all whom, it may concern :

Be it known that I, Cari. Lindstrom, a
citizen of the Kingdom of Sweden residing
at Berlin, Germany, have invented certain
5 new and useful Improvements m Stop
Mechanism for Talking-Machines, of which
the following is a specification. _

This invention relates to an improved
stop-mechanism for talking machines, and
10 more especially to an engaging and disen-
<ya<nncr device for the sound-record carrier
of ^he same, the primary object being to
provide means by which the motion-trans-
mitting belt and its pulley that drive the
15 record-cylinder and that are driven by a
motor, are shifted on the shaft of the motor
either with or out of mesh with the same.
This arrangement has the great advantage
that the belt -pulley on the sound -record
20 carrier is not disengaged, as m construc-
tions heretofore known, with the aid ot a
fork clutch or the like, and that the beit-
pullev does not run idle. This known con-
struction is much heavier and causes a grat-
25 ing sound in the receiver. In addition, the
new construction is materially simpler and
cheaper in manufacture. Also, the con-
sumption of current when an electric motor
is used is less, because the heavy belt-pulley
30 and the appertaining parts which impart
the rotation of the motor shaft to the sound-
record carrier remain stationary.

One illustrative embodiment of the inven-
tion is represented by way of example m
35 the accompanying drawing, wherein:—

Figure 1 is a front elevation showing the
motor and the engaging and disengaging
device in its engaged position; Fig. 2 is a
bottom plan view of said device disengaged ;
40 Fig. 3 shows the coupling lever and Figs.
4 to 6 show details of the device.

Similar letters of reference indicate the
same parts in the different figures of the
drawing.
45 Referring to the drawing, a designates
the motor, h the motor shaft, loose on which
is the belt-pulley c which can be pushed to
and fro on the shaft & by a lever d (Fig. 3).
Attached to or integral with the belt-pulley
50 e is a disk e, and a disk / is fast on the
shaft 6. These two disks e and / have pms
g and A, respectively, and form a clutch
for throwing the belt-pulley in or out of

mesh with the driving shaft h; m the en-
gaged position the pins g and h abut one 55
against another so that the belt-pulley c
is driven by the rotating shaft h and the
sound-record carrier is rotated by the

belt i. -12.

The belt-pulley e is thrown into and out 60
of gear as follows: — By means of a pneu-
matic or mechanical releasing device the
lever Jc fulcrumed on the frame s of the
machine is pressed downward; the arm Z
appertaining to this lever then moves to the 65
left and through the medium of the rod m
presses the lever d to the left. This takes
the belt-pulley c with it and therefore dis-
engages the latter from the shaft h. The
rod m is mounted in a sleeve n supported 70
on the frame. A helical spring o pressing
against a collar m' of the rod m holds the
clutch e. / in its engaged position.

In order to quickly stop the sound-record
carrier in its disengaged position, the disk e 75
of the belt-pulley c is provided with a pm p
which abuts against a fixed stop-pm g and
consequently at once stops the belt-pullej^ c.
The stop-pin q is provided on a disk r which
is mounted on the fixed sleeve n as shown 80
in Figs. 2 and 6.

I claim: —

1. In a stop-mechanism for talking ma-
chines, the combination, with a motor and
the shaft of the same, of a belt-pulley 85
mounted loosely on said shaft, a motion-
transmitting belt, a clutch between the shaft
and the belt-pulley, a fulcrumed bell-crank
lever, a stationary sleeve, a spring-actuated
connecting-rod guided in said sleeve and 90
interposed between the bell-crank lever and
belt-pulley, and a stop-device between the
fixed sleeve and the clutch on the belt-
pulley for arresting the motion of the belt-
pulley on releasing the clutch. 95

2. In a stop-mechanism for talking ma-
chines, the combination, with a motor and
the shaft of the same, of a belt-pulley
mounted loosely on said shaft, a motion-
transmitting belt, a clutch, one member of 100
which is located on the shaft and the other
member located on the belt-pulley, a ful-
crumed bell-crank lever, a stationary sleeve,
a spring-actuated connecting-rod guided m
said sleeve and actuated by said bell-crank 105
lever, a connecting link between the con-

2

1,065,694

necting-rod and belt-pulley, and a stop-
device between the fixed sleeve and the
clutch-member on the belt-pulley, said stop-
device consisting of a disk clamped to the
fixed sleeve and provided with a stop-pin,
and a stop-pin on the clutch-member on the
belt-pulley.

In testimony whereof I affix my signature
in presence of two witnesses.

CARL LINDSTROM.

Witnesses :

WOLDEMAR HaUPT,

Henrt Hasper,

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing thej " Commissioner of Patents,

Washington, D. C."

1,065,888.

W. a. SABINE.

SOUND MODIFYING DEVICE.

APPLIOATION PILED NOV. 20, 1912,

Patented June 24, 1913.

/=-/G. /

^^3

•^Wi^c^y^^cd

^^\y»^>v\\,QX,

tJf/^^/^y^t ^ '^y9^//V .

CUlot^vt^

COLVMBIA PLANOGRAPH CO., WASHINOTOff, O. C.

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

WILLIAM G. SABINE, OF YOUNGSTOWN, OHIO, ASSIGNOR TO ANNIE PERRY SABINE, OF

YOUNGSTOWN, OHIO.

SOUND-MODIFYING DEVICE.

1,065,888.

Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Juiie 34, 1913.

Application filed November 20, 1912. Serial No. 732,572.

To all whom it may concern :

Be it known that I, William G. Sabine,
a citizen of the United States, residing at
Youngstown, in the comity of Mahoning
5 and State of Ohio, have invented certain
new and useful Improvements in Sound-
Modifjdng Devices, of which the following
is a specification.

The present invention relates in general

10 to sound reproducing machines, and more
jDarticularlj' to novel means for modifying
the sound so as to clarify the same and
muffle or soften the harsh metallic ring
which is always incident to such machines.

15 One of the objects of the invention is the
provision of a sound modifying device
which is simple and inexpensive in its con-
struction, and which will operate in an ef-
fective manner to modify and soften the

20 sound of the instrument and do away with
the whizzing or gi-ating sound.

A further object of the invention is the
provision of a device of this character which
is susceptible of being constructed in such

25 a manner as to be applied in the form of an
attachment to the usual sound boxes now in
common use.

With these and other objects in view, the
invention consists in certain combinations

bO and arrangements of the parts as will more
fully appear as the description proceeds,
the novel features thereof being pointed out
in the appended claims.

For a full understanding of the invention,

35 reference is to be had to the following de-
scription and accompanying drawings, in
which :

Figure 1 is an enlarged elevation of a
conventional form of sound box of the kind

4 0 usually emjDloyed with a disk type of talk-
ing machine, the view illustrating the sound
box fitted with the improved sound modi-
fying device claimed herein. Fig. 2 is a
detail perspective view showing the several

45 parts of tlie invention in a separated re-
lation.

Corresponding and like parts are referred
to in the following description and indi-
cated in all the view of the drawings bj' the

50 same reference characters.

In the present instance the soimd modify-
ing device is shown as constructed in the
form of an attachment so as to be applied
to a sound box of the conventional construc-

tion. The sound box itself does not consti- 55
tute any part of the present invention, and
ma}' be briefly referred to as including a
casing 1 provided upon one side thereof
with the usual means for attachment to the
swinging arm or other equivalent member 60
of a sound reproducing machine, the oppo-
site side of the casing being formed with
an open chamber 3 within which the dia-
phragm 2 is mounted. This diaphragm is
held in position between rings 4 of some soft 65
material such as rubber which fits within
the chamber 3, and the central portion of
the diaphragm is connected in the usual
manner to the inwardly extended end of a
stylus carrying bar 5. The opposite end 70
of this stylus carrying bar is rigid with a
head G which is suitably mounted in the
ordinary manner upon the casing 1 so as to
have the necessary rocking or vibratory
movement, and is provided with the usual 75
socket to receive the stylus point.

The sound modifying attachment com-
prises a plurality of disks 7, 8, 9, and 10,
which are of several different materials as-
sembled in face to face relation and held 80
clamped together as a unit at one side of
and against the diaphragm 2.

Referring to the materials from which the
disks are made, and the individual func-
tions of each, it will be observed that the 85
disks 7 and 10 are made of thin sheet rub-
ber and are provided with the central sound
openings 7^ and 10* respectively. The disk

8 is made of parchment and differs from the
other disks only in the particular of its 90
central opening 8* being of much greater
diameter than any of the openings in said
other disks. The disk 9 is made of metal
and its diameter is less than that of any

of the other disks. However, the said disk 95

9 is provided with a central opening 9^^
whose diameter substantially corresponds to
that of the openings 7=^ and 10^ in their re-
spective disks.

In assembling the attachment above ck- 100
scribed the rubber disk 7 is placed next to
the diaphragm 2 and face to face therewith,
so that the opening 7^^ is opposite the junc-
tion of the stylus bar 5 with the diaphragm
2. Next to this thin rubber disk is placed 105
the parchment disk or ring 8, which by rea-
son of its enlarged central opening S'' pro-
vides within such opening an auxiliary sound

1,065,888

clarifying chamber 11, one side of which is
formed by the disk 7, and the other side
of which is formed by the metal disk 9
which comes next in order after the parch-
5 ment has been placed in position. The
metal disk preserves the distinctness of the
sound waves, while the i^archment and rub-
ber packing so modifies the sound as to
eliminate the whizzing or grating sound in-

10 cident to the travel of the needle over the
record and the reproduction of the selec-
tion.

The assembling of the device is completed
by placing the rubber disk 10, which is a

15 duplicate of the disk 7, next to the metal
disk 9, so that it is concentric with the other
disks, and so that the opening 10^ is oppo-
site the junction of the stylus bar with the
diaphragm similar to the opening 7^ in the

20 disk 7. It may also be observed that by
reason of the metal disk 9 being of less di-
ameter than the chamber 3 within which
it is located, the edges of said disk are
spaced from and out of contact with the

25 metallic wall of the said chamber 3, thus
permitting the said metal disk to have its
independent vibration as it may be influ-
enced by the vibrations of the main dia-
phragm communicated through the first

30 rubber disk 7 and the intervening parch-
ment sheet 8. This construction and ar-
rangement of parts has been found to be
very sensitive and reliable in its action to
modify and soften the harsh grating sound

35 and metallic ring which usually accom-
panies the operation of the ordinary gramo-
phone.

In those forms of sound boxes where the
diaphragm is made of metal, such as alumi-

40 num, satisfactory results may be secured ^
the present invention, by omitting the metal
disk and simply utilizing the two rubber
disks with the parchment disk between,
although it will be understood that in the

45 conventional form of sound box within
which the common mica or equivalent dia-
phragm is employed, the particular ar-
rangement of disks herein described is the
one preferred and ordinarily employed.

I claim: 50

1. A modifying attachment for sound
boxes, comprising, in combination with the
main diaphragm, a laminated muffling unit
clamped within the sound box at the inner
side of the diaphragm and including a pair 55
of rubber disks, one of which is arranged
against the diaphragm, a metal disk ar-
ranged against one of the rubber disks, and

a parchment disk interposed between the
metal disk and the other rubber disk. 60

2. A modifying attachment for sound
boxes, comprising, in combination with the
main diaphragm, a laminated muffling unit
clamped within the sound box at the inner
side of the diaphragm and including a pair 65
of rubber disks, one of which is arranged
against the diaphragm, a metal disk lo-
cated between the rubber disks and of less
external diameter than the same, and a
parchment disk interposed between the 70
metal disk and one rubber disk and having
an internal auxiliary sound clarifying
chamber.

3. A modifying attachment for sound
boxes, comprising in combination with the 75
main diaphragm, a laminated muffling unit
clamped within the sound box at the inner
side of the diaphragm and including a pair

of rubber disks of uniform diameter and
having central openings therein, one of the 80
rubber disks being arranged against the
diaphragm, a metal disk arranged against
one of the rubber disks and of less external
diameter than the same, and also having a
central opening, and a parchment disk of 85
substantiall}/ the external diameter of the
rubber disks and having a concentric hole
of greater diameter than those of the other
disks, said parchment disk being interposed
between the metal disk and the other rub- 90
ber disk.

In testimony whereof I hereunto affix my
signature in the presence of two witnesses.

WILLIAM G. SABINE.

Witnesses :

Agnes A. Johnston,

E. E. MiLLEK.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for flve.^cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

Washington, D. C."

p. CATUCCI.

PHONOGRAPH.

APPLICATION FILED FEB. 17, 1913.

1,067,405.

Patented July 15, 1913.

4 SS££TS-SH££T 1.

^UVU'

-M-ec^jieo :

^V^ {^^f^^^M^V^OM,,

C/^^,^.^^^^ C,:k>^L<-ce^ 3^VO«44^i

p. CATUCCI.

PHONOGRAPH.

APPLICATION PILED PEB, 17, 1913.

1,067,405.

Patented July 16, 1913.

4 SHEETS-SHEET 2.

US

J^.3.

[>

^

^

y//////////y

y^ M

^

COLUMBIA PLANOORAPM CO.. WASHINGTON, D. C.

p. CATUCCI.

PHONOGRAPH.

APPLICATION PILED PEB.IT, 1913.

1,067,405.

Patented July 15, 1913.

4 SHEETS-SHEET 3.

/z

Iljj.

6-d-

7f /7^ ./^-

r

'73 ^Cb Z \'

j^^ /O

'/

v^^jUy

,-:..r..7i. /^^

1,067,405.

p. CATUCCI.

PHONOGRAPH.

APPLICATION PILED PEB.l?, 1913.

Patented July 15, 1913.

4 SHEETS-SHEET 4.

COLUMBIA PLANOQRAPH CO.. WASHINGTON. D. C.

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

PLINY CATUCCI, OF NEWARK, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR TO A. F. MEISSELBACH &
BROTHER, A CORPORATION OF NEW JERSEY.

PHONOGRAPH.

1,067,405.

Specification of letters Patent. Patented July 15, 1913.

Original application filed May 15, 1912, Serial No. 697,426. Divided and this application filed February 17,

1913. Serial No. 748,767.

To all whom it may concern :

Be it known that I, Pliny Catucci, a
citizen of the United States, residing in the
city of Newark, county of Essex, and State
5 of New Jersey, have invented certain new
and useful Improvements in Phonographs,
of Avhich the following is a specification.

This application is a division of my prior
application, Ser. No. 697,426, filed May 15,

10 1912.

The prime object of my invention is to
so construct the case of a phonograph as to
provide in itself sound amplifying means
without special adaptation of the sound con-

15 ductor or so called horn.

In phonographs of the disk t^^pe, as at
the present day constructed, it is the prac-
tice either to lead a sound conductor or tube
from the reproducer to an external sound

20 amplifying horn or lead such tube into,
and thence construct within the case a more
or less distorted funnel shaped sound am-
plifier, the degree of distortion depending
of course upon the space within this case

25 after the motor and other operating parts
have been provided for. After a series of
exhaustive experiments, I have found that
the case itself, without material modifica-
tion, may be utilized as a sound amplifying

30 device so that the distorted amplifier, alDove
referred to, may be wholly dispensed with,
and a simple deflector of metal, wood, fiber,
or other suitable material may be located
adjacent to the exit of the sound waves from

35 the conductor, when substantially the same

results and even in some cases better results

have been obtained than by the old fonn of

structure.

In carrying out my invention, I make use

40 of the structure illustrated in the accom-
panying drawings, and described in detail
in the following specification.

Figure 1 is a plan view of the complete
phonograph. Fig. 2 is a side elevation of

45 the same. Fig. 3 is a vertical section on
line 3 — 3 of Fig. 1. Fig. 4 is a horizontal
section through line 4 — 4 of Fig. 3. Fig. 5
is an end view of the sound box and con-
ductor in playing position. Fig. 6 is a simi-

50 lar section view but with the sound box re-
versed or elevated for the purpose of re-
placing the stylus needle. Figs. 7 and 8 are
vertical cross sections on line 7, 8 of Fig. 3,
showing the two positions of the sound box

55

tube. Fig. 9 is a plan view of the brake
mechanism. Fig. 10 is a vertical section of
the brake mechanism with the brake as
"oil." Fig. 11 is a similar view with the
brake as "on." Fig. 12 is a bottom plan
view of the phonograph case showing the 60
recessed_ receptacle in the bottom of the case
for storing the turn table or tablet support,
when not in use. Fig. 13 is an under plan
view of the thimble or sleeve by which the
record tablet support or table is secured to 65
the driving shaft. Fig. 14 illustrates an
aperture in the bottom of the case showing
the diametrical slots to receive correspond-
ing lugs or tangs upon the tablet supporting
sleeve. Fig. 15 is a sectional view showing 70
the tablet support or table in the stored posi-
tion in the bottom of the case.

Similar reference numerals refer to like
parts throughout the specifications and
drawings. 75

The case 1 of the phonograph is of the
usual rectangular form and is illustrated in
the drawings as having the cover 2, bottom
3, and two sides 4 and 5. I also provide a
single supporting post 6, as shown in Fig. 4, 80
for the purpose of supporting the overhang-
ing angle of the cover and connecting the
same to the bottom, so as to render the case
rigid. The two remaining sides of the case
may be left open. 85

The sound box and sound conveyer tube
may be of any usual or preferred type, as
for example, such as are illustrated in my
prior patent applications, Ser. Nos. 693,352
and 693,353, or the conveyer tube itself may 90
be constructed as illustrated in Fig. 3 anci
several of the other figures. In this case,
T provide the tubular standard 9 secured to
the cover of the case in any convenient man-
ner, but preferably in one corner of the cover 95
as illustrated in Figs. 1 and 3. The interior
of this standard is provided Avith the upper
and lower bearings 10 and 11 for the ver-
tical portion of the elbow 12, so that said
elbow may freely revolve or oscillate within 100
said bearings. Projecting forward from the
elbow 12 is the supporting tube 13 from the
outer end of which projects the tapering
bearing section 14. Extending within the
horizontal parts, as thus described, is the 105
sound box tube section 15, to the inner end
of which is coupled the bearing section 16,
the diameter of the latter being such as to

2

1,067,405

nicely fit the horizontal section of the elbow,
12. The sections 15 and 16 may be secured
together in any convenient manner so as to
be substantially rigid, as for exampfe, by
5 means of the rivet 17. The inner section 16
is provided with a circumferential slot 18
into which extends the reduced end of the
screw 19, Avhich latter is screw threaded into
the horizontal section of the elbow 12, the

10 purpose of which is to axially limit the oscil-
lations of the tube section 15 and 16.

The parts of the motor are the same in
general as usually found in phonograph
motors, and the details thereof are omitted.

15 The record tablet support 45, is detach-
ably mounted upon the upper end of shaft
44, which latter is driven by the motor and
projects through the cover 2. This support
consists simply of a disk of metal pressed to

20 shape with the overhanging flange 55. but
depressed central portion 56 in the center of
which is mounted the thimble or sleeve 57,
as shown in Fig. 15. This thimble or sleeve
may be secured to the center in any suitable

25 or preferred manner, but I have found it
convenient to provide a shoulder 58 upon
the same and then rivet or spin the extended
})ortion of the thimble over upon the flat
plate, as at 59.

30 In Fig. 12 I have shown the bottom of the
case as provided with a recess 60 to receive
the record tablet support 45 for packing and
shipping purposes, for it Avill be seen from
a reference to Fig. 1, that the tablet support

35 overhangs the case for a considerable dis-
tance. When in use this is not objection-
able, but for shiiDment or storage, it only
adds to the bulk of the package necessary to
contain the same, and one of the objects of

40 the invention is to reduce the size of the case
to the smallest possible limit and thereby
reduce the cost of the shipping or packing
case, which must be used for packing or
shipping the same. The tangs or lugs 61

45 ]:)rojecting laterally from the end of the
sleeve or thimble 57 are designed to pass
through the diametrical slots 62 of the aper-
ture 63 in the bottom of the case, and when
the tablet support is given a partial turn,

50 these lugs 61 will overhang the solid body
of the case bottom, as shown in Fig. 15.
Thus the tablet support 45 may be safely
secured in the bottom of the case. I may
also provide the lateral slot 64 in the sleeve

55 or thimble 57, so that when the tablet sup-
port is mounted upon the shaft 44, said slot
will take OA^er the diametrical pin 65, Avhich
latter is fixed at a suitable point in the shaft
44. This pin serves the double purpose of

60 limiting the distance to which the record
tablet support will slide down upon the shaft
44 and also as a means for driving the tablet
support when in position. As a means for
quickly stopping the motor and consequent]}^

65 the rotation of the tablet support, I locate a

brake beneath the outer margin of the tablet
support, as clearly shown in Fig. 9. This
brake structure consists of a plate 66 cut
substantially to the shape shoAvn in Fig. 9
and held in position hj means of the screws
67 and 68. The screAV 68 serves the double
purpose of fastening the plate 66 and also
securing a spring brake 69 to the upper face
of the cover in position for contact with the
imder face of the record tablet support 45.
This brake 69 consists of a strip of spring
metal 70 and a strip of leather or other good
friction material 71 superposed upon the
spring brake piece 70. PiA'oted at 72, upon
the plate 66 is the brake lever 73, the latter
extending outAvardly beyond the periphery
of the tablet support 45 and having a twist
as at 74 in the same to provide convenient
means for hand manixDulation. I also pro-
vide a pair of tangs 75, uj)on the outer end
of the plate 66, bending such tangs at right
angles to the plane of the plate to form stops
to limit the movement of the lever 73. This
lever has at a point midway of its length, a
lateral upturned cam projection 76 for con-
tact Avith the under side of the inclined por-
tion of the brake spring 70. The nornial
bias of the spring 70 is such as to hold it
and the brake material 71, aAvay from the
under side of the tablet support 45. With
the brake lever thrown in the position illus-
trated in Figs. 9 and 10, the brake spring
and its brake leather 71 are shown out of
contact Avith the tablet support 45. When,
hoAvever, the brake lever 73 is swung to the
right as represented in Fig. 11, the offset
cam projection 70 Avill engage the under in-
clined face of the brake spring 70 and thus
press it upwardly against the under side of
the record tablet support 45, and the fric-
tion of the parts Avill cause a complete stop-
page of the rotation of the tablet support.

From the description of the sound con-
ductor tube, above referred to, in connec-
tion Avith Fig. 3 of the draAvings, it Avill be
noted that the tube proper terminates at the
loAver side of the cover 2 of the case. Thus
the sound waves are projected into the open
space Avithin the case and are not as has
hitherto been the case conducted Avithin con-
fined Avails to the open atmos])here. The
projection of the sound Avaves into the open
case noAV requires some means by which they
may be deflected into the open atmosphere.

I obtain very admirable sound effects from
using a simple plane deflector 80, extending
the same into the angle between the two
closed sides of the case, as illustrated in
Figs 3 and 4 Avith its upper face l3^ing in a
plane tangent to the theoretically correct
conic section curve. This may be a piece
of plane Avood properly shaped to fit the cor-
ner, or it niay be constructed of fiber, metal,
rubber, papier mache, or any suitable, ma-
terial either with or without inherent res-

70

75

80

85

90

95

13:

105

110

115

120

125

130

1,067,405

onant qualities. I regard this latter new
improvement as very radical and desire to
cover the same in the broadest possible
manner.
5 It might be thought that the location of
the motor within the path of the soimd
waves from the reflector amplifier, would in-
terfere with the clearness of the same, or
that the slight noise or rattle of the same

10 would interfere with the soimd waves com-
ing from the record. This however, is not
the case, and in practice there seems to be no
interference whatsoever even though the
motor is located in substantially the direct

15 line of the sound. In order, however, to
protect the motor from the access to dust
and dirt and the like, which may be floating
in the atmosphere, T may provide a cover
85 for the same such cover completely in-

20 closing the motor against the under side
of the cover of the case.
I claim:

1. In a phonograph, a rectangular sup-
porting case having a top, a bottom and two

25 closed sides, two of its adjacent sides being
open and a motor within said case, a record
tablet sujDport driven by said motor, a sound
conve^'er tube pivotally mounted upon one
corner of the case and communicating with

30 the interior thereof, at a point adjacent to
its closed sides, an inclined triangular sound
reflector within said case and extending into
the corner thereof between the closed sides
and adjacent to the inner end of said con-

35 veyer tube.

2. In a phonograph, the combination of a
rectangular case closed at its top, bottom and
two adjacent sides and having its two re-
maining sides open, means for conveying

40 sound through said top to the interior of
the case at a point adjacent to the angle
between said adjacent closed sides, and a
triangular sound reflector within said case
and extending into the angle of said closed

45 sides and beneath the point where the sound
waA'es enter.

3. An amplifier and reflector for sound
producing devices, comprising a rectangular

case open upon two adjacent sides, and
closed upon its remaining sides, means for 50
conveying sound waves to the interior of
said case at a point adjacent to the angle
between the closed sides of said case and an
inclined triangular reflector extending into
the angle between said adjacent closed sides. 55

4. An amplifier and reflector for sound
producing devices, comprising a rectangular
case open upon two of its adjacent sides and
closed upon its remaining sides, an external
sound tube communicating with the interior 60
of said case at a point adjacent to the angle
between the two closed sides thereof, and a
triangular sound reflector extending into
said angle opposite the open end of said
sound tube. " 65

5. In a phonograph, a combined support-
ing and sound amplifying case, having its
top, bottom and two adjacent sides closed
and its remaining sides open, and an inclined
triangular sound reflector extending into 70
the angle between the closed sides.

6. In a phonograph, the combination of a
sound producing means with amplifying
means comprising a i-ectangular case, closed

at its top, bottom and two adjacent sides and 75
having the remaining two sides open, and
an inclined triangular reflector extending
into the angle between the two closed sides.

7. In a phonograph, a case having an open
recess with a central aperture in its bottom, 80
and a record tablet support having means
thereon for engagement with the walls of
said aperture to hold said tablet support, in
said recess.

8. In a phonograph, a phonograph case 85
having an open recess in the bottom there-
of, having attaching means therein, a de-
tachable record tablet support, and means
upon said support for securing the same to
said attaching means in said recess. 90

In testimony whereof I have hereunto set
my hand this 14th day of February, 1913.
PLINY CATUCCI.
"Witnesses :

Louis M. Sanders,
W. B. Waltzinger.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

"Washington, D. C."

i

i

0. LINDSTROM.

TALKING MACHINE.
APPLIOATION FILED MAE, 11, 1910.

1,067,530.

Patented July 15, 1913.

2 SHEETS-SHEET 1.

^f2.

by

JiUys,

<>0RAP11 CO., WASHINQTON, I>.

C. LINDSTROM.

TALKING MACHINE.

APPLIOATION FILED MAE. 11, 1910.

1,067,530.

Patented July 15, 1913.

2 SH££TS-SH£i;X 2.

J^'f.3.

^'f^-

-^5 ^6

/ J9Ups.

COLUMBIA PLANOCHAPM CO., WASHINGTON. D. C.

UISflTED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

CARL LINDSTE.OM, OF BERLIN, GERMANY.
TALKING-MACHINE.

1,067,530.

Specification of Letters Patent. Patented July 15, 1913.

Application filed Marcli 11, 1910. Serial No. 548,570.

To all whom, it may concern :

Be it knoTrn that I, Carl Lindstrom, a
subject of the King of Sweden, and a resi-
dent of Grosse Frankfuiterstrasse 137, Ber-
5 lin. Germam', have invented a certain new
and useful Improvement in or Relating to
Talking-Machines; and I do hereby declare
the following to be a full, clear, and exact
description of the invention, such as will

10 enable others skilled in the art to which it
appertains to make and use the same, ref-
erence being had to the accompanying
drawings, and to letters of reference marked
thereon, which form a part of this specifica-

15 tion.

My invention relates to talking machines
and has for its object to provide an iin-
pi'oved arrangement of mechanism for
changing the positions of the recording and

20 reproducing points or needles especially
suitable for use in connection with the sin-
gle sound box of dictating machines and
whereby the recording and reproduction of
the sound are improved.

25 Dictating machines, as heretofore usually
constructed, are objectionable in that the re-
production of the dictated matter is notice-
ably lacking in clearness. This is mainly
due to the construction of that portion of

30 the recording mechanism adapted for chang-
ing the positions of the recording and re-
producing points or needles, these points or
needles being commonly pressed against the
record cylinder with the same degree of

35 pressure for both recording and reproduc-
ing.

A further defect of the common forms of
construction consists in the fact that both
the points or needles are arranged directly

40 on the sound diaphragm of the talking ma-
chine so that for effecting the various ad-
justments, namely putting into action the
reproducing point or needle, putting both
the points or needles entirely out of action,

45 and finally putting the recording point or
needle into action, a movement of the whole
sound box in a plane at right angles to the
record cjdinder is necessary. This con-
struction is attended with the draw-back

50 that uncertainty in the reception of sound
is caused through the sound box being
bodily movable in this transverse plane,
apart from the fact that the transmission of
the sound waves both in the act of recording

55 and reproducing thereof is imperfect owing
to the recording point being mounted di-

rectly on the diaphragm. Moreover, with
this arrangement, contrary to the necessary
and natural one, according to which the re-
cording points or needles must be positioned go
in the center of the diaphragm, they are po-
sitioned eccentrically to the center of the
diaphragm.

Now the present invention is, as its prin-
cipal object, directed toward obviating ;the gs
aforesaid defects and this is accomplished
b}- so arranging the soimd box together with
the diaphragm, that it shall be unnecessary
to change its position in a plane at a right
angle to the record cylinder and shall only 70
be adapted to perform the obviously neces-
sary movements in a direction parallel to
the record cylinder. The shifting of the
points or needles into the recording; inop-
erative, and reproducing positions respec- 75
tively is effected in the embodiment of the
invention shown therein by adjustment of
the recording and reproducing device while
the position of the diaphragm itself is not
changed. The construction of the record- go
ing and reproducing device is such that the
two points or needles for recording and re-
producing respectively, are mounted on a
lever mechanism attached to the central
point of the diaphragm. In this Avay the 35
usual and objectionable eccentric "arrange-
ment of the points or needles is obviated.
With the object of avoiding horizontal or
lateral swinging movement provision is fur-
ther made for rigidly holding the recording 90
point or needle against such movement when
acting on the record cylinder thereby en-
abling it to respond to the action of the
sound- wa-\es effectually in a vertical direc-
tion and while so doing to trace as straight 95
a record-line as possible. On the other
hand, during rexDroduction of the record the
point or needle must be loosely held while
being pressed against the record cylinder so
tliat it may follow both the depressions and 100
the lateral deviations of the sound scores or
record lines. It is furthermore essential
that the pressure shall be inoperative dur-
ing tlie recording operation and on the con-
trary operative during the reproducing op- 105
eration.

One construction of mechanism for chang-
ing the positions of the recording or re-
producing points or needles embodying the
invention is illustrated in the accompany- no
ing drawings.

Figures 1 to 3 of such drawings are side

2

1,067,530

elevations of the mechanism showing it in
different positions. Fig. 1 shows the point
or needle in the receiving or recording posi-
tion; Fig. 2 the middle position in Avhich
- both recording and reproducing points are
raised clear of the record cylinder, and Fig.
3 the point or needle in reproducing posi-
tion. Fig. 4 is a front elevation of the
mechanism.

;^0 Mounted on a tubular guide 1 is a cam
disk 2 furnished with a handle 3. Pivotally
attached to the box 5, serving to hold the
diaphragm 4, is a yoke 6 which, at its middle
part, is provided with a downAvard exten-
*15 si on in the form of a pin or post on which
is mounted to turn a sleeve 7. A projection
8 formed integral Avith the sleeve 7 is caused
to bear against the cam disk 2 by a blade
spring 9, and a weight 11 is pivotally at-

20 tached to the projection 8 at a point 10. At
its lower end the sleeve 7 has pivoted to it
a dog 12 the front end of which, is of less
width than, the other part and projects
through a slot in a guide plate 14 fixed to

25 the box .5. Pivoted to the dog 12 is a needle
supporting lever 15 carrying at one end the
recording and reproducing points or needles
16 and 17 for the recording and reproducing
operations respectively, and connected at its

30 other end to the diaphragm 4 by a link 18.
Fixed to the yoke 6 is a catch 19 adapted
to be depressed b}'' a pin 20 provided on the
cam disk 2.

In the recording position. Fig. 1, the

35 handle 3 is pressed downward. In this po-
sition the spring 9 forces the projection 8
into a recess in the cam disk 2, by which
means the sleeve 7 is positively guided, that
is to sa}^, such sleeve and attached members,

40 namely the dog 12 and lever 15 with the
tAvo points or needles 16 and 17, are pre-
vented from oscillating to the right and left
Avhile free to do so in an upward and down-
ward direction. At the same time a projec-

45 tion 21 on the cam disk presses against an
extension piece 22 secured to the weight 11
thereby causing the latter to be held in a
raised position as shoAvn, Fig. 1. In this
position the recording point or needle 16

50 is accordingly pressed comparatively lightly
against the record cylinder while being how-
eA'er effectually held against lateral move-
ment.

To lift both points 16 and 17 clear of the

55. record cylinder the handle 3 is raised till
it comes flush or on a level with an abut-
ment or projection 23, see Fig. 2, therebj'
causing the cam disk projection 21 to re-
lease the Aveight 11, Avhich then falls and

60 rests on the dog 12, see Fig. 2. At the
same time the cam disk 2 bears against the
projection 8 and pushes the dog 12 for-
Avard, thereby causing it, along with the
points or needles 16 and 17, to be raised by

65 the inclined face or lug 13 of the narroAv

part of the dog riding at the end of the
slot ujion the guide 14. No special recess
in the cam disk 2 is necessary for this mid-
dle position, as the weight 11 presses the
part 13 firmlj' into the guide 14. 70

For the reproducing position the handle
3 is pressed upwardly to the full extent
beyond the abutment or projection 23, see
Fig. 3 thereby causing the dog 12 to be
pushed still farther forward through the 75
slot of the guide and the reproducing point
or needle 17 to be brought into contact with
the record cjdinder. At the same time the
pin 20 presses down on the catch 19, so that
the sleeA^e 7 on which the dog 12 is carried go
is free to oscillate to the right and left and
thus enable the reproducing point or needle
to foUoAV the sound score or record line in
a perfectly free and unhampered manner.
In this position the Aveight 11 lies on the 35
dog 12, its pressure thus causing the point
or needle 17 to effectually' follow the de-
pressions in the sound scores or record lines.

Instead of the dog 12 being acted upon
by the pressure of a Aveight obviously other 90
means such as springs may be em.ployed for
this purpose.

What I claim is: — ■

1. In a dictating machine, a single sound
box comprising a diaphragm, a lever pro- 95
vided at one end thereof with recording and
reproducing needles and means for connect-
ing said needles to the diaphragm and ad-
justing said needles including a lever-carry-
ing dog longitudinally adjustable in a plane 100
transversely of the sound box.

2. In a talking machine, a sound box com-
prising a diaphragm, a lever provided with
a plurality of needles, a link connecting
said lever to the diaphragm, a fulcrum 105
member for said needles piA^otally supported
from said sound box and movable in a plane
substantially parallel Avith said sound box
and transversely thereof, and means to ap-
ply yielding pressure to one of said needles no
in operative position and to said fulcrum
member when said needles are in inopera-
tive position.

3. In a dictating machine, a fixed sound
box, a diaphragm therein, a leA^er provided 115
at one end thereof Avith recording and re-
producing needles in relative juxtaposition
and in substantially the same transverse
plane of the diaphi-agm and means for con-
necting said needles' to the center of said 120
diaphragm and adjusting said needles in-
chiding a leA'er-carrying dog longitudinally
adjustable in a plane transA'ersely of the dia-
phragm.

4. In a sound recording and reproducing 125
machine, a sound box, a diaphragm, a needle
carrying lever having a SAvinging connection
Avith said diaphragm, a leA^er carrying dog
having a swinging connection with said
sound box, an angailar adjusting lug on said 1.33

1,067,530

dog, a positioning guide therefor, a pressure
member pivotally secured to said sound box,
a needle and pressure adjusting member,
means for retaining said pressure member
5 and needles in operative connection with
said adjusting member, means, including
said swinging connection for said dog, con-
necting said pressure member and needle le-
A'er with said needle adjusting member

10 whereby said angular lug may be positioned
in said guide to operatively position said
needles respectively and nonoperatively po-
sition them, and to move said pressure mem-
ber transversely of said box to cause said

15 pressure member to be effective relative to

said needle lever in a plurality of positions.

5. In a dictating machine, a sound box

comprising a diaphragm, a lever provided

at one end thereof with recording and repro-

20 ducing needles in relative juxtaposition
thereon and in substantially the same trans-
verse plane of the diaphragm, a link con-
necting said lever to said diaphragm and
movable with relation thereto, means for im-

25 parting movement to the needles in a plane
substantially transverse of the sound box
and means for holding the recording needle,
when in use, rigidly against lateral move-
ment thereof.

30 6. In a dictating machine, a sound box
provided with a diaphragm, a needle lever,
a fidcrum therefor, said lever provided at
one end thereof and in relative juxtaposition
thereon with recording and reproducing

35 needles, a link connecting said needles to
the diaphragm and movable with relation to
the sound box, means for imparting such
movement to the needles by changing the
position of the fulcrum of said lever in a

40 plane transverse to the axis of the sound rec-
ord, means for exerting pressure upon the
needle lever in the inoperative and repro-
ducing positions.

7. In a talking machine, a sound box com-
45 prising a diaphragm, a lever provided at

one end thereof and in relative juxtaposi-
tion thereon with recording and reproducing
needles, a fulcrum for said lever, a link con-
necting said needles with the diaphragm,

50 said needles and lever being movable trans-
versely of the sound box, means for impart-
ing said movement to the needles by chang-
ing the position of the fulcrum of said lever
in a plane transverse to the axis of the sound

55 box, and means permitting free lateral move-
ment of the reproducing needle when in use.

8. In a dictating machine, a sound box
comprising a diaphragm, a lever provided at
one end thereof and in relative juxtaposition

CO thereon with recording and reproducing
needles, a fulcrum for said lever, a link con-

necting said needles with the diaphragm,
said link and needles being movable trans-
versely of the sound box, means for impart-
ing such movement to said needles, means 65
for yieldingly exerting pressure upon the
fulcrum member in the inoperative and re-
producing positions of the needles and
means for withholding said pressure from
said recording needle when said needle is 70
in use.

9. In a dictating machine, a sound box
comprising a diaphragm, a lever provided
with recording and reproducing needles, a
link connecting said lever to the diaphragm, 75
said link and needles being movable trans-
versely of the diaphragm, means for impart-
ing such movement and means for holding
said lever rigidly against lateral movement

in the recording position and permitting 80
free lateral movement thereof in the repro-
ducing position.

10. A sound recording and reproducing
machine comprising a sound box, a dia-
phragm, a yoke pivoted to said box and pro- 85
vided with a post, a movable member carried
by said post, said movable member being
provided with a projecting portion, a pres-
sure member carried by said projection, a
needle carrying lever movably secured to 90
said movable member and connected with
said diaphragm, an auxiliary needle posi-
tioning member, a guide cai-ried by said box
and means to adjustably position said needle
lever. 95

11. In a talking machine, a sound box, a
diaphragm, a needle carrying lever provided
with a plurality of needles, said lever pivot-
ally mounted on a dog, said dog movably se-
ciired to a post movablj^ connected to the 100
sound box, a sleeve on said post provided
with a cam engaging projection, a handle
provided with a cam adapted to engage said
projection to position the needles.

12. A sound recording and reproducing 10a
machine comprising a sound box, a dia-
phragm, a yoke depending from said box
and provided with a post, a pressure ex-
erting member on said post, a needle posi-
tioning dog pivotally secured to said post, no
a lever provided with a sound recording and

a sound reproducing point carried by said
dog, and a cam lever adapted to position
said post and thereby said needles relatively
to the cylinder. 115

In testimony whereof I affix my signature
in presence of two witnesses.

GAEL LINDSTEOM.

Witnesses :

Henry Hasper,

WOLDEMAR HauPT.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

Washington, D. C."

1,067,569.

W. W. ZAOKEY.

SOUND BECOEDING AND REPRODDCINQ MACHINE.
APPLICATION FILED JAN. 4, 1912.

Patented July 15, 1913.

^I^^^^Z^C^'^.

WITNESSES

^=^\~^ ^i^-^'^^ij^.^^'z^^^C',

BY

.r ^VENTOR

0. ^^le/du

fA]ilJ!CUAMonjj fm4A/a^c

ATTORNEYS

COLUMBU PLANOORAPH CO.. WASHlNa|ON. D. C.

UKITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

WILLIAM W. ZACKEY, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR OF FORTY-NINE
ONE-HUNDREDTHS TO CHARLES B. HEWITT, OF BURLINGTON, NEW JERSEY.

SOUND RECORDING AND REPRODUCING MACHINE.

1,067,569.

Specification of Letters Patent. Patented July 15, 1913.

Application filed January 4, 1912. Serial No. 669,500.

To all whom, it may concern:

Be it Icnown that I, William W. Zackey,
a citizen of~the United States, residing in the
city and county of Philadelphia, State of
5 Pennsylvania, have invented a new and use-
ful Sound Eecording and Eeproducing Ma-
chine, of which the following is a specifica-
tion.

This invention relates to sound recording

10 and I'eproducing machines, and more par-
ticularly to an improvement in sound boxes
such as shown in my former Patent No.
930,715, patented Angxist 10, 1909.

The object of my invention is to provide a

15 sound box which reduces metallic or scratch-
ing noises common to instruments of this
type, and which noises mar and destroy the
reproduction of the sound and cause the
quality of the tone to be impaired.

20 It has for a further object to j)rovide a
sound box which produces a tone rich in
quality, clearness and purity, and further-
more a tone which may be varied or adjusted
so that the voice timbre may be accurately

25 simulated and reproduced.

It further consists of other novel features
of construction, all as will be hereinafter
fully set forth.

Eef erring to the drawings: — Figure 1

30 represents a perspective of a "sound box em-
bodying my invention. Fig. 2 represents a
rear elevation of the same. Fig. '6 repre-
sents a vertical section on line x — x Fig. 2.
Fig. 4 represents a perspective detail of the

35 controlling member. Fig. 5 represents a de-
tail of one of the ears for supporting the
stylus.

Similar numerals of reference indicate
corresponding parts in the figures.

40 1 designates the sound box of a sound re-
cording and reproducing machine, prefer-
ably of ordinaiy shape and size, and, in the
present instance, consisting of a ring 2 hav-
ing an annular flange 3, preferably integral

45 therewith, the tAvo members forming a cas-
ing or retaining chamber in which is located
a diaphragm 4, the latter being of suitable
material for receiving and transmitting
sound waves. This diaphragm 4, as here

50 shown, is secured within the flange 3 by
means of tubular members 5 and 6 which are
preferably of rubber or like sound deaden-
ing material, between which the diaphragm
4 is located, and thus insulated from the

55 walls of the box proper.

7 designates a cap having a central open-
ing 8 therein, and suitably secured by screws
9, or like fastening means, to the ring 2
whereby the diaphragm member 4 is pro-
tected on one side and the vibrations thereof 60
concentrated so as to pass thi'ough the open-
ing 8 to the amplifying devices.

10 designates the stylus bar composed, in
the present instance, of an arm 11 and body
portion 12 which are preferably secured to- 65
gether by providing a groove 13 in the mem-
ber 12 and within which the arm 11 is seat-
ed and securely fastened by solder 14, or the
like means, and as here shown, I have pre-
ferred to use also a pin 15 as an additional 70
fastening for this arm, since any looseness of
the stylus bar causes imperfections to at
once be noted in the tone of the box, and it is
therefore essential that the same should be
firmlj^ fixed to its supporting member. The 75
arm 11 is preferably secured at one end to
the diaphragm 4 by wax or like means and,
as here shown, the end of the said arm is
suitably bent as shown at 17, to bring the
same into position at the center of the dia- 80
phragm 4.

The body portion 12 of the stylus bar 10
is suitably pivoted upon a pin or arbor 18,
the latter being mounted as here shown, in
ears 19 attached to the flange 3 of the ring 85
2, and it will be noted that these ears are
preferabl}'^ provided with a rounded corner
20, for a purpose presently to be described.
These ears form bearings in which the ar-
bor 18 is mounted and the body member 12 90
is fixedly secured to the arbor 18 by means
of a set screw 21 or the like.

22 designates an opening formed in the
body portion 12 for the purpose of receiving
the playing needle and the latter is held in 95
position by means of the thumb screw 23 as
is customary.

24 designates a stud secured in any suit-
able manner to the body portion 12 of the
stylus bar 10, and in the present instance, 100
passes through a slot 25 formed in a spring
plate 26, the latter being held in adjustable
position on the said pin 24 by means of nuts
27 as will be apparent. This plate 26 is
pi-eferably provided Avith spring fingers 28 105
outwardly disposed on the same side of the
plate 26 and located so as to engage respec-
tively the rounded corners 20 of the ears 19
heretofore referred to. The function of this
spring plate will be readily apparent as it HO

1,067,569

serves to return the stylus bar to normal
position after the sound wave has been re-
ceived on the diaphragm 4, and by which
the latter is deflected from its usual position
5 and the adjustment of the nuts 27 iDennits
regulation of the spring plate so as to deter-
mine the degx'ee of flexibility of the dia-
phragm. Of course it Avill he miderstood
that the slot 25 in the spring plate 26 allows

10 for variation in the position of the spring
fingers 28, thereby varying the effective
pressure of these two members.

It Avill now be apparent that I have pro-
vided a soimd box, having a stylus bar

15 mounted on a single support and operated
by a spring member in such a manner as to
permit correct oscillating movement of the
stylus bar and diaphragm, and furtheraiore
the parts are so arranged as to obtain con-

20 trol of the quantity of the sound as well as
the quality.

It will now be apparent that I have de-
vised a novel and useful construction of a
sound recording and reproducing machine

25 which embodies the features of advantage
enumerated as desirable in the statement of
the invention and the above description, and
while I have, in the present instance, shown

and described a preferred embodiment
thereof Avhich has been found in practice to
give satisfactory and reliable results, it is
to be understood that the same is susceptible
of modification in various particulars with-
out departing from the spirit or scope of
the invention or sacrificing any of its advan-
tages.

Having thus described my invention, what
I claim as new and desire to secure by Let-
ters Patent, is : —

In a sound recording and reproducing ma-
chine, a sound box, a diaphragm operatively
mounted therein, an arbor suitably mounted
for oscillating movement, a stylus bar fix-
edly carried by said arbor, a spring plate
carried by said stylus bar and projecting on
either side thereof, a spring finger integral
Avith each end of said plate, an ear fixed to
said box at each side of said bar forming an
abutment for each spring finger, and means
to vary the tension of said spring fingers
whereby the vibratorAT^ action of said dia-
phragm is regulated.

WILLIAM W. ZACKEY.

Witnesses :

Egbert M. Baer,
C. D. McVay.

30

35

40

45

50

Copies of this patent may "be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

Washington, D. C."

J. 0. ENGLISH.

SODND AMPLIFYING DEVICE.
AFFLIOATION FIL£D JUNE 29, 1907.

1,067,905.

Patented July 22, 1913.

2 8E££TS-SH££T 1.

^G

WITNESSES

J^^. jC.

yo

INVENTOR

i^A/t C.^^/j^A.

ATTORNEY

COLUMBIA PLANOOMAPM CO.. WASHtNCTON, D. C.

J. 0. ENGLISH.

SOUND AMPLIFYING DEVICE.

AFFLIOATION FILED JTTN£ 29, 1907.

1,067,905.

Patented July 22, 1913.

2 8HEET8-SE££T 2.

J^^.i^.

^O'

iji illlflfMiUIIIJIJiiiiilililliiliniilii vfaUilllifiJIJIiiliHiilJinBHiiiiilliiillinniUilllllllili iliilinHullli

/^

^^

/

^^'

^^3

^-^/

-^G

^^<o~

WITNESSES

BY

INVENTOR

t^/fa Cj^yi^^'sA.

ATTORNEY

COLUMBIA PLANOOKAPH CO., WASHINGTON, U. C. .

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE

JOHN C. ENGLISH, OF CAMDEN, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR TO VICTOR TALKING
MACHINE COMPANY, A CORPORATION OP NEW JERSEY.

SOUND-AMPLIFYING DEVICE.

1,067,905.

Specification of letters Patent. Patented July 32, 1913.

Application filed June 29, 1907. Serial No. 381,403.

To all xoTiom it may concern: '

Be it known that I, John C. English, a
citizen of the United States, and a resident
of the city of Camden, county of Camden,
5 State of New Jersej', have invented certain
new and useful Improvements in Sound-
Amp] if ^ang Devices, of which the following
is a specification.

The main objects of this invention are, to

10 provide an improved sound amplifier of sim-
ple, compact, and durable construction, and
of relatiA'ely great efficiency; to provide an
improved sound amplifier particularly
adapted for use in a tallring machine which

15 will obviate hollow and other objectionable
effects, such as are produced by megaphones
and some other amplifying devices, and
which will act to increase the sonority, bril-
liancy, and other good qualities in sounds;

20 and ito provide other improvements as will
appear hereinafter.

In the accompanying drawings. Figure 1
is a fragmentary central vertical section of
a talking machine provided with a sound

25 amplifier constructed in accordance with
this invention; Fig. 2 an enlarged perspec-
tive of the said amplifier; and Figs. 3, 4 and
r> are longitudinal central vertical sectional
views of modified forms of this invention.

30 Referring to the drawings, one embodi-
ment of this invention is shown applied in
a talking machine comprising a cabinet 1
having a horizontal partition 2, from which
depends a motor 3 for actuating the usual

35 turn-table 4 arranged above the partition 2.
Above the turn-table, a sound box 5 is car-
ried by and communicates with the free
smaller end of a hollow tapering tone arm
0. the larger end of which is turned down-

40 wardly and telescopes rotatiA-ely in the up-
per end of a hollow vertical bushing 7 sup-
l)orted by and extending through the parti-
tion 2. A bracket 8 carries a pivot 9 which
holds the tone ai'm rotatively in position.

45 For amplifying the sounds reproduced by
this machine and delivered through the
bushing 7. there is provided an improved
sound amplifier or resonator constructed in
accordance with this invention. This am-

50 plifier includes a longitudinally curved
downwardly depending and downwardly
flaring substantially rigid and substantially
non- vibratory bracket 10 having a longitu-
dinally curved opening 11 extending longi-

55 tudinally therethrough. The opening 11

throiigh the bracket flares downwardly and
gradually changes in transverse section from
a substantially circular shape at the upper
or smaller end of the bracket to an oblong,
substantially rectangular shape, having a 60
substantially horizontal major axis, at the
lower or larger end of the bracket. The up-
per smaller or inlet end of this bracket is
provided with a substantially horizontal
flange or base plate 10' integral therewith, 35
and the bracket and its base plate may be
braced by webs 10" integral therewith and
preferably extending longitudinally upon
the front and rear sides of the bracket re-
spectively. The bracket 10 is clamped rig- 70
idly to the under surface of the partition 2
by any suitable means; for instance, by
screws 12 extending through the base plate
and into the partition. Tlie lower or deliv-
ery end of the bracket 10 is slightly enlarged 75
exteriorly and interiorly to form a flange
or socket 13 which is oblong and substan-
tially rectangular in transverse vertical sec-
tion and which flares and opens forwardly
in a horizontal direction, the major trans- 80
verse axis of the socket being substantially
horizontal. Fitting snugly and rigidly se-
cured in any suitable manner in the socket
13 of the bracket 10, is the inner end of a
hollow body or resonator which forms the 85
major portion or delivery end of this ampli-
fier, the neck or inlet end of which is formed
by the bracket 10. This bod,y consists, in
this instance, of a structure taj'tering lon-
gitudinally externally, and having a sub- 90
stantially horizontal longitudinal axis form-
ing a forward extension of the longitudinal
axis of the hollow bracket 10. In trans-
verse vertical section, this body is externally
oblong and substantially rectangular, the 95
major transverse axis being substantially
horizontal and parallel to the major trans-
verse axis of the socket 13. The upper and
lower external walls of this body, or reso-
nator are formed by two substantially flat lOO
comparatively thin sounding beards 14 di-
verging slightly forwardly. These boards
are spaced in vertical alinement. and are
preferably similar in shape and of equal
areas, each being in the form of a truncated 105
triangle. The external side walls of this
body are formed of two horizontally spaced
and forwardly diverging comparatively
heavy and non-resonant substantially flat
boards or supports 16, each in the form of a lir>

2

1,067,905

15

truncated triangle, Avhich are interposed be-
tween the upper and lower external sound-
ing boards 14, the longitudinal edges of the
sounding boards overlapping and being rig-
idly secured to the longitudinal edges of the
side walls.

Arranged in vertical alinement between
the upper and lower external sounding-
boards 14 and preferably diverging for-
wardly from the common axis of divergence
of these sounding boards are a plurality of
intermediate or internal sounding boards 15
similar in shape and construction to and
substantiall}^ equal to in length but slightly
less than in width than the external sound-
ing boards. These internal soundino- boards

20

30

are rigidly secured to the side walls 16 in
any suitable manner, for instance by hav-
ing their longitudinal edges glued tightly
in place in grooves 16' provided therefor
in the inner surfaces of the side walls, and
preferably divide the entire interior of the
resonator into a plurality of sound passages
which are preferably substantially equal to

25 each other in transverse section at any point
in the length of the resonator. To permit
a smooth and uninterrupted flow or trans-
mission of sound Avaves from the delivery
end of the hollow bracket 10 through the
resonator, the inner ends of these internal
sounding boards are preferably tapered and
terminate in sharp horizontal edges 15'.
Also, for this purpose, the inner surfaces of
the inner ends of the external walls of the

35 resonator are arranged flush with the ad-
jacent corresponding inner surfaces of the
bracket. The construction is such that the
transverse sectional area of the inclosed
spaces or inlets between the sounding boards

4Q at the point of junction with the bracket
will be substantially equal to and not less
than the transverse section of the opening in
the bracket at substantialh^ the same point.
Each of the sounding boards 14 and 15, in

45 this resonator is preferably constructed of
a pluralitj^ of comparatively narrow oblong
flat straight strips of Avood of equal thick-
nesses and arranged in the same plane, the
grain of the wood ip-inning longitudinally

50 of the strips, and the straps being secured
together consecutively at their longitudinal
edges. Preferably the longitudinal connect-
ing edges of each pair of adjacent strips are
oppositely scarfed or acutelj'- beveled and

55 are overlapped and cemented together. The
boards 16 forming the side walls of the
resonator may also be made in the same
manner. The sounding boards and side
walls are preferably arranged so that the

60 longitudinal ■ axes of the strips Avill extend
transversely of the resonator.

The talking machine casing is provided
with the usual sound outlet closed by the
usual doors 17 and with a cover 18 hinged

6£ as at 19 to permit access to the turn-table.

In Fig. 3 is shown a modified form of this
invention Avhich is similar to the form here-
inbefore described but in Avhich the upper
and loAver external sounding boards 14 and
the intermediate sounding boards 15 are sub-
stantialh^ parallel. In Fig. 4 is shown a
further modified form of this invention con-
structed as hereinbefore described, but in
which six substantially parallel closely
spaced soundiiig boards are used. It has
been found that good results may be ob-
tained in this form even when the distance
betAveen the sounding boards is as small as
one-fourth of an inch. In Fig. 5 is shown
a further modification of this invention con-
structed as hereinbefore described, but in
Avhich se\'en sounding boards are used and
the angle of cliA'ergence between the upper
and loAver external sounding boards is in-
creased. It has been found that these
various forms of this inA'^ention when in oi>
eration produce different results, and that
the sounds transmitted by any one of these
forms may be modified by slight variations
in the angles of divergence betAveen the
sounding boards, or by varying the sound-
ing boards in shape, area or thickness, or
by varying the number of intermediate
sounding boards used, or by vaiying the
Avidths of the spaces between the sounding
boards, or by other changes in the construc-
tion.

When in use this amplifier is preferably
supported, as shown, entirely from the inlet
end of the hollow bracket 10, the body por-
tion of the amplifier being entirely sup-
ported from its inlet end by the delivery end
of the bracket. This permits the sounding
boards to vibrate throughout substantially
their entire areas, greatly increasing the
sonority of the sounds transmitted through
the amplifier in the spaces or passages be-
tAveen the sounding boards. The amplifier
ma}' be arranged, howeA'er, in any other suit-
able way to meet A^arious conditions, as for
instance, so that the major transverse axis
of the delivery end of the amplifier Avill be
A^rtical instead of horizontal with good re-
sults.

In applying this invention the particular
form to be used in any case to give the best
results may be determined experimentally.
By having scA-eral sounding boards spaced
comparatively close together and by having
the body portion of the amplifier oblong m
transverse section, as described, a relatively
large area of sounding board surface, in
proportion to the cubic space occupied by
the amplifier, is provided, and the efficiency
of the amplifier is inci'eased. In any case
an amplifier constructed in accordance with
this invention, AA'hen used in a talking ma-
chine, is relatiA^ely compact and is efficient
in reducing, or practically eliminating sharp,
harsh, hollow, or other unpleasant qualities

75

80

85

90

95

too

105

110

115

120

125

130

1,067,905

from the sounds transmitted and in giving
a clear, brilliant, broad, and mellow quality
to the reproduction.

Only a few of the various forms in which
g this invention may be applied have been
illustrated herein and it is obvious that the
invention is not limited to any particular
form but may be varied as hereinbefore
noted to meet various conditions and re-

j^Q quirements without departing from the
spirit of this invention or the scope of the
appended -claims.

Having thus described my invention, what
I claim and desire to protect by Letters Pat-

25 ent of the United States is:

1. A sound amplifying device, comprising
a heavy substantially non-vibratory section
and a hollow vibratory body section com-
municating therewith, said vibratory section

20 comprising exterior resonant boards and in-
terior resonant boards spaced apart from
each other.

2. A sound amplifying device, compris-
ing a heavy substantially non-vibratory sec-

25 tion and a hollow vibratory body section
communicating therewith, said vibratory
section being composed of exterior and in-
terior sounding boards having their side
edges rigidly secured together and the space

30 between said sounding boards communicat-
ing with said non-vibratory section.

3. An amplifying device comprising a
series of resonant sounding boards, includ-
ing a plurality of inner sounding boards,

35 separated at a slight distance from each
other, each of said inner sounding boards
being provided with a sharp edge at one end
thereof.

4. An amplifying device comprising a
40 plurality of resonant sounding boards sep-
arated at a slight distance from each other
and arranged in substantially parallel
planes, each of the boards between the outer
boards being provided with a sharp edge

45 at one end thereof.

5. In an amplifying device, the combina-
tion with a heavy supporting bracket pro-
vided with an opening therethrough, of a
resonator comprising a series of resonant

50 sounding boards separated at a slight dis-
tance from each other and arranged in sub-
stantially parallel planes, and means for con-
necting the outer edges of said boards rig-
idly together, said boards being supported

55 at one end by said rigid bracket, and said
series including outer boards and interme-
diate boards arranged between the outer
sounding boards and provided with sharp
inner edges, so that the cross sectional area

60 of the spaces between the boards at their
junction with said bracket will not be less
than the cross sectional area of the opening
in said bracket at said point.

6. A sound amplifying device comprising
65 a substantially non-vibratory section and a

70

hollow body-section communicating there-
with, said body having exterior sides com-
posed of resonant sounding boards and the
interior of said body being provided with
intermediate sounding boards of resonant
material.

7. A sound amplifying device comprising
a substantially non-vibratory section and a
hollow body-section communicating there-
with, said body having exterior sides com- yg
posed of resonant sounding boards and the
interior of said body being provided with
intermediate sounding boards also of reso-
nant material, the passage for sound through
said sections being of constantly increasing gg
cross sectional area.

8. A sound amplifier for talking machines
comprising a hollow body portion provided
Avith a plurality of spaced sounding boards
inclosed thereby. 35

9. A sound amplifier for talking machines
comprising a hollow body portion provided
Avith a plurality of spaced sounding boards
inclosed thereby and extending longitudi-
nally thereof. 90

10. A sound amplifier comprising a hol-
low body, and a sounding board inclosed
thereby and dividing the interior thereof
into a plurality of sound passages, said
board having a sharpened edge arranged 95
to divide the sound waves when said ampli-
fier is in operation.

11. A sound amplifying device compris-
ing a hollow body exteriorly oblong in trans-
A'Crse section and a plurality of sounding jqo
boards inclosed thereby, and extending sub-
stantially the full width thereof.

12. A sound amplifying dcAdce compris-
ing a hollow body exteriorly oblong in
transverse section and a plurality of sound- 305
ing boards inclosed thereby and extending
substantially the full Avidth thereof and in
planes substantially parallel to a transverse
major axis of said body.

13. A sound amplifying device compris- jjq
ing a hollow body exteriorly oblong in trans-
verse section and a plurality of sounding
boards inclosed thereby and extending sub-
stantially the full width thereof and in the
direction of a major transverse axis of said jj5
body.

14. A sound amplifying device compris-
ing a hollow major portion exteriorly ob-
long in transverse section and a plurality

of spaced intermediate sounding boards in- ,20
closed thereby.

15. A sound amplifying device compris-
ing a hollow major portion exteriorly ob-
long in transverse section and a plurality

of spaced intermediate sounding boards in- 125
closed thereby and extending longitudinally
thereof.

16. A sound amplifying device compris-
ing a hollow major portion exteriorly ob-
long in transverse section and a plurality 130

1,067,605

of spaced intermediate sounding boards in-
closed thereby and extending longitudinally
thereof and substantially the full width
thereof and dividing the interior of said
5 major portion into as many sound passages
as there are intermediate sounding boards
plus one.

17. A sound amplifier comprising op-
positely disposed relatively thick and rigid

20 exterior walls, two oppositely disposed rela-
tively thin sounding boards connecting said
walls and a plurality of sounding boards
arranged between said first mentioned
sounding boards.

15 18. A sound amplifier comprising oppo-
sitely disposed relatively thick and rigid
diverging exterior walls, tAvo oppositely dis-
posed relatively thin parallel sounding
boards connecting said walls and a plurality

20 of sounding boards arranged between said
first mentioned sounding boards.

19. A sound amplifier comprising oppo-
sitely disposed relatively thick and rigid
diverging exterior walls, two oppositely dis-

25 posed relatively thin parallel sounding
boards connecting said walls and a plurality
of sounding boards arranged between and
parallel to said first mentioned sounding
boards.

30 20. A sound amplifier comprising oppo-
sitely disposed relatively thick and narrow
exterior supports, two oppositely disposed
relatively broad and thin exterior sounding
boards connecting said supports and a plu-

35 rality of sou.nding boards arranged between
said first mentioned sounding boards.

21. A sound amplifier comprising oppo-
sitely disposed relatively thick and narrow
exterior supports, tAvo oppositely disposed

40 relatively broad and thin exterior sounding
boards connecting said supports and a plu-
rality of sounding boards arranged between
said first mentioned sounding boards and
dividing the interior of said amplifier into a

45 plurality of sound passages.

22. A sound amplifier comprising oppo-
sitely disposed relatively thick rigid ex-
terior walls, two oppositely disposed rela-
tively thin sounding boards connecting said

50 walls, and a sounding board aiTanged be-
tween said first mentioned sounding boards
and connecting said walls.

23. A sound amplifier comprising oppo-
sitely disposed relatively narrow supports,

55 two oppositely disposed relatively broad
sounding boards connecting said support,
and a plurality of sounding boards spaced
between said first mentioned sounding
boards and connecting said supports.

60 24. A sound am.plifier comprising a trans-
versely oblong hollow major portion con-
sisting of oppositely disposed relatively
narrow exterior spaced supports, and two
oppositely disposed relatively broad ex-

65 terior sounding boards coimecting said sup-

ports, and a plurality of sounding boards
spaced between said first mentioned sound-
ing boards and connecting said supports and
extending substantially the full width and
length of said major portion. .^q

25. A sound amplifier comprising a hol-
low transversely oblong major portion pro-
vided with an inlet and with an outlet at
opposite ends respectively, and a plurality

of sounding boards inclosed by said major ^g
portion and extending substantially the full
width and length thereof and dividing the
interior of said major portion into a plu-
rality of passages arranged to conduct
sound waves from said inlet to said outlet, go

26. A sound amplifier having a sound
passage therethrough, and a sounding board
located Avithin the passage and bounded by
two diverging restrained edges and two free
edges, the free edges being adjacent to the 35
ends of the passage.

27. A sound amplifier having a sound
passage extending therethrough, and a
sounding board located within the passage
and bounded by two oppositely disposed re- 99
strained edges and two oppositely disposed
free edges, the free edges being adjacent to
the ends of the passage.

28. A sound amplifier for talking ma-
chines comprising a hoUoAV body portion 95
provided with a plurality of spaced sound-
ing boards inclosed thereby and dividing
the interior of said body portion into a
greater number of sound passages than the
number of said sounding boards. iqq

29. A sound amplifier for talking ma-
chines comprising a hollow body portion
having an inlet and outlet and forming a
sound conduit between said inlet and said
outlet, and a plurality of spaced soimding io5
boards inclosed thereby and dividing the
interior of said body portion into a greater
number of sound passages than the number

of said sounding boards.

30. A sound amplifier for talking ma- no
chines comprising a hollow longitudinally
tapering body portion having an inlet and
outlet and forming a sound conduit between
said inlet and said outlet, and a plurality of
spaced sounding boards inclosed thereby 115
and dividing the interior of said body por-
tion into a greater number of sound pas-
sages than the number of said sounding
boards.

31. A sound amplifier for talking ma- 120
chines comprising a substantially non-
vibratory section, and a holloAv vibratory-
section communicating therewith, said vi-
bratory section being provided Avith an in-
terior sounding board forming a partition 125
therein.

32. A . sound amplifier for talking ma-
chines comprising a substantially non-
vibratory section, and a holloAV vibratory
section communicating therewith, said vi- iso

1,067,905

5

bratoi^ section being provided with interior
sounding boards forming partitions therein.

33. A sound amplifier inckiding a sound-
ing board bounded by tAvo opposite re-

5 strained edges, and ha^dng its remaining
edges free, the sounding board being de-
creased in thickness along one of its free
edges.

34. A sound amplifier including a sound-
10 ing board bounded by two opposite diverg-
ing restrained edges and two free edges, and
being decreased in thickness along its
shorter free edge.

35. A sound amplifier including a hollow
15 hodj having a sound passage therethrough

and a sounding board within said passage,
said sounding board having oppositely dis-
posed restrained edges and being supported
thereby in said body, the remaining edges
20 of said sounding board being free to vibrate.

36. A sound amplifier comprising a hol-
low body having a sound passage there-
through, elongated in transverse section, and
a sounding board disposed within said body

25 in the direction bf said elongation.

37. A sound amplifier comprising a hol-
low body having a sound passage there-
through, elongated in transverse section,
said body having its major transverse axis

30 considerably greater than its minor trans-
verse axis, and a sounding board disposed
within the said body in the direction of said
major transverse axis.

38. A sound amplifier comprising a hol-
35 low body having a sound passage there-
through, elongated in transverse section,
said body having its major transverse axis
considerably greater than its minor trans-
verse axis, and a sounding board disposed

40 across said sound passage and of greater
width than the minor transverse axis of
said body.

39. A sound amplifier comprising a hol-

low body having a sound passage there-
through, elongated in transverse section, a 45
sounding board disposed within said body
in the direction of said elongation and di-
viding said passage into a plurality of
sound conduits, and means adjustable with
respect to said body and arranged to ex- 50
tend across the delivery ends of all of said
conduits to modify the sound issuing there-
from.

40. A sound amplifier comprising a hol-
low body having a sound passage there- 55
through, elongated in transverse section,
said body having its major transverse axis
considerably greater than its minor trans-
verse axis, a sounding board disposed with-
in said body in the direction of said major 60
transverse axis and dividing said passage
into a plurality of sound conduits, and a
member adjustable with respect to said body
and arranged to extend across the delivery
ends of all of said conduits to modify the 65
sound issuing therefrom.

41. A sound amplifier comprising a hol-
low body having a sound passage there-
through, elongated in transverse section,
said body having its major transverse axis 70
considerably greater than its minor trans-
verse axis, a sounding board disposed within
said body in the direction of said major
transverse axis and dividing said passage
into a plurality of sound conduits, and a 75
sound deflecting member mounted to swing
about a predetermined axis with respect to
said body and arranged to extend across the
delivei-y ends of all of said conduits to act
upon the sound issuing therefrom. 80

In witness whereof I have hereunto set
my hand this 27th day of June, 1907.

JOHN C. ENGLISH.
Witnesses :

Alston B. Moalton,
AusxANDER Park.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

Washington, D. C."

1,067,933.

T. H. MAODONALD.

GRAPHOPHONE ATTACHMENT,
APPLICATION PILED SEPT. 23, 1911.

Patented July 22, 1913.

r

Mg.Z a

Mgr.S

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

THOMAS H. MACDONALD, OF BBIDGEPOBT, CONNECTICUT, ASSIGNOR TO AMERICAN

GRAPHOPHONE COMPANY, OP BRIDGEPORT, CONNECTICUT, A CORPORATION OP

WEST VIRGINIA.

GRAPHOPHONE ATTACHMENT.

1,067,933.

Specification of Letters Patent. Patented July 33, 1913.

Application filed September 23, 1911. Serial No. 650,939.

iO

15

25

30

35

40

45

50

55

To all tohovi it may concern :

Be it known that I, Thomas H. Mac-
DOKALD, a citizen of the United States, and
a resident of Bridgeport, Connecticut,
(whose post-office address is care of Ameri-
can Graphophone Company, Bridgeport,
Connecticut,) have invented a neAv and use-
ful Improvement in Graphophone Attach-
ments, which improvement is fully set forth
in the following specification.

My invention relates to graphophones or
other talking-machines of the type intended
for dictation as well as for reproducing, par-
ticularly machines of the type where there
is a single diapliragm which carries both
the recording-stylus and the reproducing-
stylus, with means for throwing either sty-
lus into engagement to the exclusion of the
other. In using such machines, it is usual
to have one machine for the person who
does the dictating upon the blank cylinder,
and another machine for the operator who
transcribes the dictation from the recorded
cylinder. In the use of the latter machine,
there is liability to throw the recording-
stylus into engagement, by mistake, when
one desires to listen to reproduction, with
the result that the recording-stylus will
shave off and obliterate the record upon the
cylinder.

The object of the present invention is to
provide means for preventing such unin-
tentional use of the recording-stylus. My
invention, then, maj^ be described as a re-
cording eliminator for dictation grapho-
phones.

My invention consists broadly of means
for eliminating, at will, the possibilitj'^ of
using the recording-device.

My invention further consists of the par-
ticular construction and arrangement of the
various features hereinafter set forth and
claimed.

My invention will be best understood by
reference to the annexed drawings, which
illustrate a preferred embodiment thereof,
as applied to the particular talking-machine
known as the " Dictaphone ", — though it
will be understood that my invention is ap-
plicable to other types of talking-machines
equipped with the two styluses.

In the di'awings, Figure 1 is -a side view,
partly broken away, illustrating a talking-
machine equipped with my invention; Fig.
2, is a detail, on a larger scale, viewed from

the rear (right hand) of Fig. 1; and Fig.

3 is a horizontal section through the line
III— III of Fig. 2.

Referring to the drawings, 1 represents
the mandrel Avith its jcylindrical sound- 60
record or " blank ", as the case may be.

2 is the feed-screw.

3 is the casing of the carriage.

4 is the recording-stylus, and 5 is the re-
producing-stylus, both carried by the same 65
diaphragm in the head 6, — the reproducing-
stylus being shown in Fig. 1 as in operative
engagement.

7 is the operating-lever, which serves not
only to engage and disengage the partial 70
feed-nut from the feed-screw, but also to
disengage the reproducing-stylus and en-
gage the recording-stylus (and vice versa)
by means of the link 9, and other connec-
tions. 75

10 is the upright centering-arm carried b}'
the carriage 3, for indicating the proper po-
sitions of adjustment of the controlling-le-
ver 7. To cause the reproducing-stylus 5
to be in engagement, the lever 7 is pushed 80
baclavard into the position shown in full
lines in Fig. 1 ; to cause the recording-stylus

4 to operate (while disengaging the re-
producer) the lever 7 is pulled to the ex-
treme limit forward, into the position shown 85
in dotted lines 7' ; while the intermediate
position 7" of the lever disengages both
styluses from the cylinder 1. All this is
well known, and forms no part of my inven-
tion, which consists of providing means to 90
prevent the lever 7 being thrown into the
position indicated at 7', such means being
capable of embodiment in various forms.

As a preferred embodiment of the elimi-
nation-device, or means, which constitute 95
my present invention, I provide on the
bracket-arm 10 a bolt or plunger, or other
similar device, adapted to be moved into
the path of the lever 7, to prevent putting
the latter into position 7' (for operating 100
the recording-stylus), with means for lock-
ing said bolt or shifting-device in its oper-
ative, and also in its inoperative, position.

More specifically, an arm 21, having a
counter-sunk bore and a transverse aper- 105
ture communicating therewith, extends lat-
erally from tlie centering-arm 10, and car-
ries the shifting bolt and means for locking
the same in its two positions of adjustment.
The shifting bolt comprises the stem 22 HO

1,067,033

(which lies snugly within the smaller por-
tion of the bore of the arm) , the enlarged
portion containing the two annular grooves
23 and 24, and the enlarged head 25 which
5 is secured (by screwing or otherwise) upon
the opposite end of the bolt. The trans-
verse aperture in the arm (referred to as
communicating with its bore) is a continu-
ation of a transverse bore 26 passing hori-

10 zontally through the arm 10 from front to
rear. At the forward or inner end of this
bore 26, is the hardened steel ball 27, adapt-
ed to engage either of the two grooves 23
and 24; and in the outer end of the bore

15 is the screw 28; while the tension spring
29 is interposed between the face of the
screw and the ball aforesaid.

30 indicates a lug extending rearwardly
from the arm 10, and flanged to lie in the

20 path of the lever T; and 31 is a set screw
carried bj^ this flange, as an adjustable stop
to limit the backward travel of the lever.

In the position indicated in Fig. 3, the
head 25 of the sliding bolt 22 has been

25 shoved clown to its limit, and the spring 29
forces ball 27 into the inner groove 23, there-
by' locking the bolt in its protruded position.
In this adjustment, the end of the bolt ex-
tends into the path of the lever 7 (as indi-

30 cated in dotted lines in Fig. 2) ; and the
lever 7 cannot be brought forward into the
recording-position 7' (of Fig. 1). Under
this adjustment, the talking-machine can be
used for reproducing alone, and cannot be

35 used for recording. In order to restore the
latter function, the head 25 of the sliding
bolt is drawn out (the sloping walls of the
groove 23 forcing ball 27 rearward against
the tension of spring 29) until the groove

40 24 comes opposite the ball, whereupon the
spring forces the latter forward into groove
24, — and the bolt is thereby locked in its
retracted position. In this latter position,
lever 7 can swing into all its positions, and

45 the machine is capable of recording as well
as of reproducing.

It is readily understood that the elimina-
tion-device might be carried upon the lever
7, so as to protrude into the path of the sta-

50 tionary arm 10; or it might be located be-
tween any two relatively movable parts
which are shifted in changing from repro-
ducing-position (or from neutral position)
into the recording-position. Further, other

55 shifting devices might be employed in place
of the specific sliding bolt; other means

might be utilized for holding the bolt in its
two positions of adjustment, — in fact, the
ball and spring might be omitted altogether,
and friction alone relied on to hold the
shifting device in proper position. And
other changes and transpositions will occur
to persons skilled in this art.

Having thus described my invention, I
claim :

1. In a talking machine, the combination
of two styles on a single diaphragm, and a
record tablet, with shifting mechanism for
throwing either stjde at will into operation,
and adjustable means for preventing at will
the movement of one of the styles into oper-
ative position while leaving the other free
to be thrown into and out of operative posi-
tion.

2. In a talking machine, the combination
of a recording-style, a reproducing style, and
a record tablet, with mechanism shifting
either style into operative position or both
styles into inoperative position, and means
adjustable at will to prevent the recording
style being thrown into operative position,
while leaving the reproducing style free to
be thrown into and out of operative posi-
tion.

3. In a talking machine, the combination
of a recording and a reproducing style on
a single diaphragm, and a record tablet,
with shifting mechanism for throwing either
Style at will into operation, a shifting lever
for operating said mechanism which in one
position throws the reproducing style into
and the recording style out of operation, in
another position throws the reproducing
style out of and the recording style into op-
eration, and in an intermediate position
throws both styles out of operation, and
means operated at will to limit the throw of
said lever between the operative position of
the reproducing style and the said interme-
diate position, Avhereby the reproducing
style is free to be thrown into and out of
operative position and the recording style is
prevented from being thrown into operative
position.

In testimony whereof I have signed this
specification in the presence of two subscrib-

60

G5

70

75

80

85

90

95

100

105

ing Witnesses.

THOMAS H. MACDONALD.

Witnesses :

Sophie B. Macdonald,
Margaket Murray.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents.

Washington, D. C."

G. E. EMERSON.

STYLUS ADJUSTING DEVICE.

AFFLIOATION FILED DEC, 11, 1911.

1,068,231.

Patented July 22, 1913.

•t'-^,

28

COLUMBIA PLANOORAPH CO., WASHINGTON, D. C.

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

GEORGE E. EMERSON, OF NEWARK, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR TO HENRY WATERSON,
TRUSTEE, OF RICHMOND HILL, NEW YORK.

STYLUS-ADJUSTING DEVICE.

1,008,231.

Specification of Letters Patent. Patented July 33, 1913.

Application filed December 11, 1911. Serial No. 665,073.

To all 'whotti it may concern:

Be it known that I, George E. E^rERSO^^
a citizen of the United States, and a resi-
dent of Newark, in the count}' of Essex and
5 State of New Jersey, have invented certain
new and useful Improvements in Styhis-
Adjnstiuir Devices, of wliich the following
is a specification.

This invention relates to a stylus adjust-

10 ing device for a .sound reproducing appa-
ratus, to obtain sounds of various ampli-
tudes.

The invention comprises means for easily
locating a .stylus, so that it will protrude at

15 dijferent lengths from its socket member.
In the accompanying drawings Figure 1
represents a front elevation of a sound re-
producer and a fragmentary view of a sound
record and supporting disk, with an exem-

20 plification of the invention. Fig. 2 shows a
partial section of Fig. 1 on the line 2, 2,
Fig. 3 is an enlarged fragmentary portion
of Fig. 2, Fig. -1 shows a top view of the
elements shown in Fig. 3, with a partial sec-

25 tion thereof as in the line 4, 4, Fig. 5 is a
rear view of Fig. 1, and Fig. 6 shows a left
hand side view of Fig. 5.

The reproducer is shown with its casing
20 having the flange 21, which latter is some-

30 what extended at one end to form a support-
ing table 22. Witliin the said casing the vi-
brating disk 23 is supported in the usual
way. Above the table 22 is located the
socket member 26 with the triangular longi-

35 tudinal opening 27 and outer end 28. It has
extending from its sides a pair of lugs 31 in
Avhich are secured a pair of bearings 32.
The latter are supported on a pair of taper-
ing pins 33, that extend from the table 22.

40 A tightening screw 35 extends through the
shell of the socket member to clamp the
stylus 36. A screw bolt 37 has its threaded
end in threaded engagement with the bot-
tom of the socket member 26 and passes

45 through an opening in the table 22. A
curved sjDring 40 has an opening in its
crown for said bolt and the ends thereof
bear on the lower face of said table 22. A
vibrating bar 42 at one end extends from

50 the socket member 26, and has the other end
fastened to the vibrating disk 23 of the
sound re]iroducer. A lever 43 is pivoted by
means of the pin 44 to the bar 42. and has
preferably an elongated opening which en-

55 gages a pin 48 extending from the sliding

plunger 50 having the abutting end 51. The
sliding plunger 50 is located in the central
opening 27 of the said socket member 26,
and is axially in line with the stylus 36 and
can bear against the end of the latter within 60
the socket member 26. A plurality of open-
ings 51. 52, 53 are formed in the vibrating
bar 42. to lock the lever 43 in different angu-
lar positions by means of pin 47.

The invention is used by locking the lever 65
43 in any of its \arious positions by means
of .said pin 47, thereby locating the plunger
50 in different positions in the opening 27,
so that the end 51 of the latter will be lo-
cated at different distances from the outer 70
end 28 of the socket member 26. The stylus
36 is then secured in the socket member 26
to abut against the sliding plunger 50 and
the screw 35 is tightened in place. By this
means the stylus 36 can be made to protrude 75
at different lengths from the socket mem-
ber 2(). and with its varying lengths it re-
ceives vibrations of varying amplitudes, as
it comes in contact with a sound record 55
supported on the table 56. The varying am- 80
plitudes are transmitted to the vibrating
disk 23 to vary the sounds produced by the
latter. With this inventicn one stylus takes
the place of several when different sounds
are to be obtained by the reproducer. 85

It is to be understood that tlie invention
as described in this specification and shown
in the draAvings can be modified from the
particular exemplification represented with-
out departing from the spirit of the inven- 90
tion.

Having described my invention Avhat I
desire to secure by Letters Patent and
claim is:

1. In an apparatus of the character de- 95
scribed the combination of a casing of a
sound reproducer, a vibrating bar for the
apparatus, a .stjdus for the apparatus coact-
ing with the vibrating bar, a plunger bear-
ing against said stydus to cause it to pro- 100
trude at various lengths from its support,
and means to move said plunger in one di-
rection and in a direction opposite thereto.

2. In an apparatus of the character de-
scribed the combination of a casing of a 105
sound reproducer, a vibrating bar for the
apparatus, a stylus coacting Avith said bar,

a plunger bearing against said stylus, means
connected to the plunger to move it in one
direction and in a direction opposite there- HO

2

1,068,231

to and means to lock said plunger in dif-
ferent positions to protrude the stylus at
various lengths from its support to cause
the apparatus to produce sound vibrations
5 of different amplitudes.

3. In an apparatus of the character de-
scribed the combination of a casing of a
sound reproducer, a vibrating disk for the
casing, a socket member for the casing, a

10 vibrating bar connecting the socket member
and the vibrating disk, a plunger witliin
said socket member, means connected to the
plunger to move it in opposite directions,
means to lock said pkmger in different po-
lo sitions and a st5'lus in the socket member
abutting against said plunger.

4. In an apparatus of the character de-
scribed the combination of a casing of a
sound reproducer, a vibrating disk for the

20 casing, a socket member for the casing, a
plunger within the socket member, a lever
pivoted in the apparatus with one end there-
of pinned to said plunger, means to lock the
lever in different positions and a stylus in

25 said socket member abutting against said
plunger.

0. In an apparatus of the character de-
scribed the combination of a casing of a
sound reproducer, a vibrating disk for the

30 casing, a socket member for the casing, a
vibrating bar connecting the socket member
and the vibrating disk, a table formed Avith
the casing, a pair of pins extending from
the table, a pair of lugs on the socket mem-

35 her supported on said pins, a flexible con-
nection between said socket member and
said table, a sliding plunger located within
the socket member, means to move the plun-
ger in one direction and in a direction op-

40 posite thereto and a stylus in the socket
member abutting against said plunger.
6. In an apparatus of the character de-

scribed the combination of a casing of a
reproducer, a socket member flexibly con-
nected to the bodj'- of the reproducer, a vi- 45
brating disk within the body of the I'epro-
ducer, a vibrating bar connecting said disk
and socket member, a movable plunger within
the socket member, a lever pivoted to the vi-
brating bar with one end pinned to said 50
plunger, means to lock said lever in different
angular positions on said vibrating bar, a
stylus in the socket member abutting
against said plunger and means to clamp
said stylus in different operative positions. 55

7. In an apparatus of the character de-
scribed the combination of a casing of a
reproducer, a table extending from tne cas-
ing, a pair of tapering pins supported on
said table, a socket member, lugs extending 60
from said member bearing on said pins, a
bolt extending from said socket rnember and
passing through an opening in said table,
a spring bearing between the head of said
bolt and said table, a movable plunger with-
in the socket member, a vibrating disk with-
in the casing of said reproducer, a vibrating
bar having a plurality of openings connect-
ing said disk and the socket member, a le-
ver with an opening pivoted to said bar and
one end thereof j)inned to said plunger, a
pin to engage the opening in the lever Avith
any of the openings in the vibi-ating bar, a
stylus in the socket member abutting
against said j>lunger in various positions 75
thereof and a screw to clamp the stylus in
place.

Signed at the borough of Manhattan in
the county of New York and State of ISTew
York this 5th day of December A. D. 1911,
GEOEGE E. EMERSON.

Witnesses :

A. Ade Bonneville,

P. A. RlTGER.

65

70

80

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

Washington, D. C."

1,068,441.

W. H. MILLER.

SOUND BOX.

APPLIOATIOH FILED APE. 20, 1911.

Patented July 29, 1913.

J^J

^I'&^Z

Tiesje^:

32'

Jt^e-^c^e^u-^'^

COLUMBIA PLANOdRAPH CO.. WASHINOTON, D. C.

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

WALTER H. MILLER, OF ORANGE, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR TO THOMAS A. EDISON,
INCORPORATED, OF WEST ORANGE, NEW JERSEY, A CORPORATION OF NEW JERSEY.

SOUND-BOX.

1,068,441.

Specification of Letters Patent. Patented July 39, 1913.

Application filed April 20, 1911. Serial No. 622,397.

To alt whom it may concern :

Be it known that I, Walter H. Miller,
!i citizen of the United States, and a resi-
dent of Orange, in the county of Essex and
5 State of New Jersey, have invented certain
new and useful Improvements in Sound-
Boxes, of which the following is a descrip-
tion.
My invention relates to sound boxes par-

10 ticularly of the type adapted for use in con-
nection with disk records having vertically
undulating grooves, although its use is not
limited to that type.
The principal object of my invention is to

15 provide a sound box having means for regu-
lating the tone or loudness of the reproduc-
tion; and in conformity with this object I
preferably make the arm or lever connecting
the stylus to the diaphragm of a plurality

20 of sections provided with means for yield-
ingly limiting the relative movement be-
tween the same, this means being adjustable
or movable, to regulate the extent of move-
ment permitted between the sections of the

25 arm. In my preferred construction, I
mount a stop adjustably in one of the sec-
tions and secure to this stop a plurality of
pieces of yielding elastic material, each of
the pieces being of a different elasticity from

30 the others; so that by adjusting the stop, a
member of desired elasticity may be inter-
posed between the stop and the section of
the arm adapted to abut against the same.
During the reproduction, the arm moves

35 niore or less as a unit, but the yielding ma-
terial above referred to according to its elas-
ticity permits a slight relative movement of
the sections of the arm to retard or dampen
to a desired degree the excessively loud vi-

■^0 bvations and thereby modify the tone of the
reproduction.

Other objects of my invention will appear
more fully in the following specification
and appended claims.

^5 In order that my invention may be more
fully understood, attention is hereby direct-
ed to the accompanying drawings forming a
part of this specification and in which —
Figure 1 represents a vertical section

^^ taken on the line 1 — 1 of Fig. 2 of a sound
box embodying my invention; Fig. 2 rep-
resents a front elevation of the same; Fig.
3 represents a central vertical section of a
sound box embodying a modification of my

^^ invention, the stylus arm being shown in

side elevation and partly broken away ; Fig.
4 represents a bottom plan view of the stylus
and stop employed in the modification
shown in Fig. 3.

In all the views, like parts are designated 60
by the same reference numerals.

The diaphragm support is of common con-
struction and comi^rises an annular member
1 provided with an inturned flange 2, an
outwardly curved disk shaped member 3 65
extending within the member 1, and an an-
nular ring 4 threaded into the interior of
the member 1 in engagement with the pe-
riphery of the outer surface of the member
3. The diaphragm 5 is preferably held at 70
its periphery between two gaskets 6 of rub-
ber or other suitable material, these gaskets
being clamped between the flange 2 and the
periphery of the member 3 by the threaded
ring 4. 75

Referring more particularly to Figs. 1
and 2, the stylus arm or lever comprises an
upper section 7 secured to the diaphragm
substantially centrally thereof and a lower
section 8. The latter section is provided at 80
its lower end with a socket 9 in which is ad-
justablv mounted a stylus 10. a set screw 11
being threaded into the socket 9 and adapted
to engage the stylus to secure the latter in
adjusted position. Depending from the 85
lower portion of the member 1 are a plural-
ity of spaced parallel lugs or projections 12
provided with alined openings adapted to
receive a pivot 13, the opening in the left
hand lug being larger than that in the right 90
hand lug and being screw threaded to co-
operate with the enlarged threaded portion
14 on the pivot. At its extreme left hand
end, the pivot is provided with a headed
portion 15 which engages the outer surface ^5
of the left hand lug 12, a slot 16 being pro-
vided in the said headed portion to facilitate
adjustment of the pivot. The lower portion
of the arm 7 is provided with a rearwardly
extending projection 17 (see Fig. 1) pro- ^^^
vided at its end with a hub-like portion 18
pivotally mounted on the member 13 be-
tween and in engagement with the parallel
ears or lusrs 19 at the upper end of the sec-
tion 8. These last named ears or lugs are ^^^
likewise mounted on the pivot 13 and ex-
tend in close proximity to the inside faces
of the lugs 12, being held against movement
longitudinally of the pivot by these last
named lugs. With this construction the ^^^

1,068,441

axis of the relative pivotal movement of the

sections 7 and 8 is coincident with the axis
of the bodily pivotal movement of the stylus
arm or lever during the reproduction of a
5 record.

In orde)' to limit the relative movement
between the sections 7 and 8 of the stylus
arm during the reproduction, the section 7
is provided at its lower end with a for-

10 wardlv extending forked portion 20 within
which is rotatably mounted a stop 21 hav-
ing a plurality' of flat faces to which are re-
spectively secured pieces or strips 23, 23 and
24 of yielding elastic material. In order to

15 permit rotation of the member 21 from the
knurled head 25 secured to the end of the
pivot 26 which supports the member 21, the
said pivot is preferably made angular be-
tween its ends as shown in Fig. 1 and cylin-

20 drical at its ends 'where it engages in the
fork 20, the central portion of the pivot in-
terfitting closely with the member 21. In
the drawing I have shown the member 21 as
provided with three fiat faces for support-

25 ing the yielding elastic material, but obvi-
ously I may provide the said member with
any desired number of faces for this pur-
pose. By rotating the knurled head 25 any
desired one of the pieces 22, 23 and 24 may

30 be brought into engagement with the upper
horizontal surface of the socket 9. During
the reproduction of a record, the stylus arm
normally moves as a unit, the vibrations be-
ing transmitted through the strip of yield -

35 ing material to the upper section of the
stylus arm and thence to the diaphragm;
but by reason of the interposition of the
yielding elastic strips or pieces between the
sections of the said ai'm, the loud vibrations

40 are partiallv retarded or dampened by the
said strip, the extent of such dampening de-
pending upon the elasticity of the yielding
material. I have found that cork, rubber
and felt are suitable materials for the yield-

45 ing elastic pieces 22, 23 and 24.

In the modification shown in Fig. 3, the
upper section 27 of the stylus arm is secured
to the diaphragm substantially at the center
thereof and is mounted on a pivot 28 sup-

50 ported by spaced downturned lugs 29 in a
manner similar to that described above for
the form of my invention shown in Fig's. 1
and 2. The lower portion of the section 27
of the stylus arm is provided with a for-

55 wardly extending horizontal portion 30 pro-
vided with a downwardly clirectecl forked
portion 31 between which the support 32
for the stylus 32' is pivotally supported by
a pivot 33. Secured to and extending

60 downwardly from the portion 30 of the
stylus arm is a tubular member 34 in which
is rotatably mounted a rod or spindle 35
provided at its upper end with a knurled
head 36 engaging the upper surface of the

65 portion 30ii- This spindle has secured there-

to at its lower end by friction or in any
other suitable manner, a rectangular block
37 having in its lateral faces, a plurality of
recesses in which are respectively mounted
inserts 38, 39, 40 and 41 of yielding material
similar to that described above in connec-
tion with Figs. 1 and 2, each nf the inserts
being of different elasticity from the others.
The lower end of the spindle 35 is upset as
shown at 42 to prevent downward move-
ment of the block 37. A spring 43 or other
suitable means is secured to the portion 30
of the section 27 and engages the stylus sup-
port 32 to yieldingly hold the stylus in en-
gagement with the strip of yielding mate-
rial adjacent the same. As in the operation
of the device shown in Figs. 1 and 2, the
stylus arm in the modified structure de-
scribed above normally vibrates as a unit
during the reproduction of 'the record, the
Wbrations except so far as they are dam-
pened by the elastic yielding material being
transmitted through the said yielding mate-
rial to the upper section 27 of ' the stylus
arm and thence to the diaphragm. By ro-
tation of the knurled head 36 any one of the
pieces of yielding material may be brought
into operative position so that the tone or
loudness of the reproduction may be varied
at will. ■

While I have shown certain preferred em-
badinients in ■ my invention, numerous
changes may be made therein without de-
parting from the spirit of my invention ;
and I wish, therefore, not to be limited to
the exact details shown and described.

What I claim as new and desire to secure
by Letters Patent of the United States is as
follows :

1. In a device of the class described, the
combination of Aabratory means, means sup-
porting the same, a stylus, and means for
transmitting the vibrations of said stylus
to said vibratory means, said vibration
transmitting means comprising a plurality
of elastic means arranged to be selectively
placed in operative position to modify the
vibrations transmitted from the stylus to
the vibratory means, said elastic means be-
ing adapted to modify said vibrations to
different extents, substantially as described.

2. In a sound box, the combination of vi-
bratory means, means supporting the same,
a stylus, and means for transmitting the vi-
brations of said stylus to said vibratory
means, said vibration transmitting means
comprising a plurality of elastic means of
different elasticities arranged to be selec-
tively placed in operative position to modify
the vibrations transmitted from the stylus
to the vibratory means, substantially as de-
sci'ibed.

3. In a sound box, the combination of vi-
bratory means, means for supporting the
same, a stylus arm connected With said vi-

70

75

80

85

90

95

lOff

105

110

115

120

125

130

1,068,441

bratory means and having a plurality of
movably connected sections, and a stop
mounted on one of said sections and pro-
vided with a plurality of elastic means, each
5 of different elasticity from the others, said
stop being adjustable to place any desired
one of said elastic means in contact with
the adjacent section of said arm, substan-
tially as described.

10 4. Tn a sound box, tlie combination of vi-
bratory means, means for supporting the
same, a stylus arm connected with said vi-
bratory means and having a plurality of
pivotally connected sections, and a stop

15 mounted on one of said sections and pro-
vided with a plurality of elastic means, each
of different elasticity from the others, said
stop being adjustable to place any desired
one of said elastic means in contact with the

20 adjacent section of said arm, substantially
as described.

5. In a sound box, the combination of vi-
bratory means, means for supporting the
same, a stylus arm connected with said vi-

25 bratory means and having a plurality of
movably connected sections, a stop mounted
on one of said sections and provided with
a plurality of elastic means each of differ-
ent elasticity from the others, and means

30 for adjusting said stop to place any desired
one of said elastic means in contact Avith the
adjacent section of said arm, substantially
as described.

6. In a sound box, the combination of
35 vibratory means, means for supporting tlie

same, and a stylus arm connected with said
vibratory means, and having a pluralitj'^ of
movably connected sections provided with
means for limiting the relative movement

40 between the same, the said means compris-
ing an adjustable member carrying a plu-
rality of pieces of elastic yielding material
each of different elasticity from the others,
any one of said pieces being adapted to be

45 placed in contact with the adjacent section
of the arm, substantially as described.

7. In a sound box, the combination of
vibratory means, means for supporting the
same, and a stylus arm connected with said

50 vibratory means, and having a plurality of
movably connected sections provided with
means for limiting the relative movement
between the same, the said means compris-
ing a rotatable member carrying a plurality

55 of pieces of elastic yielding material each

. of different elasticity from the others, any

one of said pieces being adapted to be

placed in contact with the adjacent section

of the arm, substantially as described.

60 8. A stylus arm having a plurality of

movably connected sections provided with
means for limiting the relative movement
between the same, said means comprising a
member carrying a plurality of elastic
means, each of different elasticity from the 65
others, said member being adjustable to
place any desired one of said elastic means
in contact with the adjacent section of said
arm, substantially as described.

9. A stylus arm liaving a plurality of piv- 70
otally connected sections provided with
means for limiting the relative movement
between the same, the said means compris-
ing an adjustable member carrying a plural-
ity of pieces of elastic material each of dif- 75
ferent elasticity from the others, and means
for adjusting the said member. to place any
desired one of said pieces of elastic material

in contact with the adjacent section of the
arm, substantially as described. 80

10. In a sound box, the combination of
vibratory means, means supporting the
same, a stylus arm connected with said
vibratory means and arranged to oscillate
about a given axis, said stylus arm com- 85
prising sections pivotally movable relatively

to each other about said axis, one of said
sections being provided with a stop, and
elastic means interposed between said stop
and a second section of said arm, substan- 90
tially as described.

11. Tn a sound box, the combination of
xibratory n)eans, means supporting the
same, a stylus arm connected with said
vibratory means and arranged to oscillate 95
about a given axis, said arm comprising
sections pi'^-otally movable relatively to each
other about said axis and one of said sec-
tions being provided with a stop yieldingly
coacting with another section of said arm 100
to limit the relative movement of said sec-
tions, substantially as described

12. In a sound box, the combination of
vibratory means, means supporting the
same, a stylus arm connected with said 105
vibratory means and arranged to oscillate
about a given axis, said arm comprising
sections pivotally movable relatively to each
other about said axis and one of said sec-
tions being provided with a stop coacting no
with another section of said arm to limit
the relative movement of said sections, sub-
stantially as described.

This specification signed and witnessed
this 18th day of April, 1911.

WALTER H. MILLER.

Witnesses :

Frederick Bachmann,
Anna R. Kxehm.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

Washington, D. C,"

1,068,591.

E. R. JOHNSON.

TALKING MACHINE.

APPLICATION PILED JAN. 28, 1911,

Patented July 29, 1913.

2 SHEETS-SHEET 1,

jf:u7.i

WITNESSES

ey

INVENTOR

'illdnldQ.elt.JoAns.ow.

/^/m^

ATTORNEY

COLOMBIA P1.ANOQRAPH CO.. WASHINGTON, D. C.

1,068,591.

E. R. JOHNSON.

TALKING MACHINE.

-APPLICATION PILED JAN. 28, 1911.

Patented July 29, 1913.

2 SE£ETS-SH££I 2.

WITNESSES

INVENTOR

K/djy^^Ii.jQJij7^afz.

BY

^(/t^^

ATTOfiNEY

COLUMBIA PLANSgRAPH CO.. WASHINGTON. D. C.

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

ELDRIDGE R. JOHNSON, OF MEUION, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR TO VICTOR TALKING-
MACHINE COMPANY, A CORPORATION OF NEW JERSEY.

TALKING-MACHINE.

1,068,591.

Specification of Letters Patent. Patented July 39, 1913.

Application filed January 28, 1911. Serial No. 605,150.

To all whom it may concern:

Be it known that I, ELDRiDdEK. John-
son, a citizen of the United States, and a
resident of IMerion, county of Montgomery,
0 and State of Pennsylvania, have invented
certain new and useful Improvements in
Talking-Machines, of which the following
is a full, clear, and complete disclosure, ref-
erence being had to the accompanying draw-

10 ings, forming a part of this specification.

This invention relates to certain new and

useful improvements in talking machines, as

will be hereinafter fully described, and par-

ticularlj' pointed out in the appended claims.

15 In the accompanying drawings. Figure 1
is a side elevation, partly in vertical central
section of a talking machine constfucted in
accordance with this invention; Fig. 2 a
front elevation of the same, but with the

20 doors open; and Fig. 3 a top plan view
partly in horizontal section of the same with
the top portion and reproducing and actuat-
ing mechanism omitted, and the doors closed.
Referring to the drawings, one embodi-

25 ment of this invention comprises a substan-
tially rectangular casing 1, having a bottom
wall 2, side walls 3 — 3, a rear wall 4, a top
or cover 5, which may or may not be made
removable, and two movable doors or in-

30 closures G, mounted upon pintles 7, between
the top and bottom of the casing, and form-
ing the front of the casing.

Mounted upon the casing 1, is a turntable
or rotary record support 10, for supporting

35 the usual disk record 11, and arranged above
the turntable in cooperative relation there-
with is the usual sound box 12, or other suit-
able sound reproducing means carr3dng a
stylus 13, adapted to cooperate Avith the

40 record 11.

The sound box 12, is carried by and com-
municates with a U-tube 14, which is piv-
otally supported upon the free smaller end
of a hollow tapering tone arm 15, with

45 which it communicates. The outer and
larger end of the tone arm 15, curves down-
wardly and engages rotatably in the upper
free end of a downwardly extending and
downw^ardly flaring hollow curved bracket

50 20, the lower end of which is rigidly secured
to the back 4 of the casing and registers
with an aperture 22, provided in the back
of the casing through which it communicates
with the interior of the casing.

65 The turntable 10 is removably mounted

upon the upper end of a spindle 30, which
projects downwardly through the cover 5 of
the casing, and the spindle is rotatably sup-
]:)orted in a plate 33, which is secured to the
under side of the cover 5. A suitable motor 60
or actuating mechanism 35, depends down-
wardly within the casing from the plate 33
and is operatively connected to rotate the
spindle 30. A suitable governor 36 also de-
pends in the casing from the plate 33 for 65
controlling the speed of the motor.

For amplifying and deflecting the sound
waves in the casing 1, one or more sounding
boards may be arranged in the casing, for
instance, one sounding board 40 may be in- 70
clined from the front edge of the bottom 2
of the casing, rearwardly and upwardly to
the back 4 of the casing, abutting against
the inner surface of the back in a horizontal
line slightly below the sound conducting 75
opening 22, through the back of the casing,
the front edge of this board resting upon the
upper surface of the bottom 2, of the casing,
and the side edges 41 of the board converg-
ing rearwardly. 80

Other sounding boards, in addition to the
sounding board 40 already described, may
be arranged within the casing, for instance,
two rearwardly converging vertical boards
46 may be located upon opposite sides re- 85
spectively of the downwardly inclined sound-
ing board 40, and in abutment with the rear-
wardly converging edges 41 thereof, the top
and bottom edges .of these vertical boards
abutting against the top and bottom walL 90
of the casing, and the rear ends of these ver-
tical boards either extending through or
abutting against the rear wall 4 of the cas-
ing and being arranged upon opposite sides
respectively and adjacent to the sound con- 95
veying opening 22, in the rear wall of the
casing. The forward ends of these vertical
boards are preferably beveled and abut
against the inner surfaces of the side walls
of the casing resl)ectivelJ^ lOO

In the above described embodiment of this
invention, the motor or actuating mechanism
and its governor are suspended in a sound
conduit or sound amplifier 50, formed by
the souiiding boards 40 and 46. and tlie cover 105
5 of the casing, and this conduit or ampli-
fier is in communication with the sound re-
producer 12, through the opening 22, in the
rear wall of the casing, the hollow bracket
20, the tone arm 15, and the U-tube 14. no

2

1,068,591

For concealing the actuating mechanism
of the machine from view when the doors 6
are open, a deflecting screen is arranged
across the delivery end or mouth of the
5 conduit or amplifier 50, and in the rear of
the doors 6. One form of this screen com-
prises two oppositely disposed vertical end
pieces 55, the outer vertical walls 5G of
Avhich converge rearAvardly and fit snugi}^

IQ against the outer ends of the inner walls
41, of the vertical sounding boards 46, the
loAver ends 57 of these end pieces being bev-
eled to fit snugly against the upper surface
of the forward end of the downwardly in-

15 clined sounding board 40, and the upper
ends 58 of these end pieces being rectangu-
lar and fitting snugly against the under
surface of the top 5 of the casing. Each of
these end pieces 55 preferably converges

20 rearwardly in horizontal section and their

inner walls 59 preferably diverge forwardly

to give the proper outward deflection to the

sound waves.

Extending between the vertical end pieces

25 55 of the screen are a plurality of spaced
fixed strips or slats 65, which are preferably
parallel and horizontally arranged, the
sj)aces between the slats forming passages
for the exit of sound waves from the ampli-

30 fier. The ends of these slats are secured to
the end pieces 55 respectively, in any suit-
able manner, for instance, the end pieces 55
may be provided with spaced grooves 66 to
receive the ends of the slats. These slats

35 65 may be made of wood or metal or any
other suitable material, and each slat pref-
erabljr comprises a front substantially flat
horizontal portion 67, and a rear substan-
tially flat portion 68, inclined rearwardly

40 and upwardly from the front portion 67 and
oblique to the longitudinal axis of the de-
livery end of the amplifier, the rear upper
edge 69 of each slat being preferably slightly
above the lower surface of the horizontal

45 portion 67 of the next slat above, and the
front upper edge of each slat being prefer-
ably slightly above the inclined plane of
the lower surface of the rear portion of the
next slat above. The passages between the

50 slats are thus made tortuous and the slats
thvis effectively screen the actuating mechan-
ism from view. Each of these slats may be
made of a single piece of wood or other
material or may be made of two or more

55 strips or pieces of material glued or other-
wise secured together.

Any suitable number of slats 65 may be
used, the dimensions and shape, however,
of each slat being varied to suit the number

60 of slats used in each instance. The trans-
verse sectional shape of the slats may be
varied to suit various purposes, the slats,
hoAvever, being preferably so shaped as to
screen the actuating mechanism of the nia-

65 chine from view and at the same time to

75

90

deliver the sound waves in a substantially
horizontal direction, or in a slightly up-
AAardh" inclined direction from the machine.

The slats 65, together Avith their end pieces
55, constitute a frame or screen or closure ^q
Avhich is retained in the casing, and, there-
fore, readily removable therefrom when the
doors are open, the doors being pivoted on
axes spaced away from the ends of the
screen in a direction longitudinal of the
screen, so that when the doors are open, a
free space will be left for the withdrawal of
the screen.

In the operation of this form of the in-
A^ention. the sounding boards 40 and 46 g^
forming the bottom and sides of the sound
conduit or amplifier 50 act to amplify and
to deflect the sound waves which are trans-
mitted and delivered from the reproducer
12 through the amplifier 50 in a given di- g^
rection, and the sound waves are further
deflected downwardly at the mouth of the
amplifier by the slats 65 and again horizon-
tally by the portion 67 thereof to deliA^er
the sound in the original direction from the
machine while at the same time screening
the interlior of the amplifier from view and
easy access thereto.

The doors 6 forming the front of the cas-
ing may be opened outwardly to any extent -^
desired to vary the intensity of the sound
issuing from the casing or to deflect it after
amplification in any desired direction, but
the doors may obAdously be omitted if pre-
ferred, and the front of the casing left per- ,^„
manently open, and the screen also may be
easily removed when desired.

The casing used in applying this inven-
tion may obviously be modified from that
described above, to suit A^arious purposes, ,„g
and the invention might also be applied to
any sound conduit or amplifier either con-
taining or not containing actuating mech-
anism.

Although only a single form has been .^jq
shown in which this invention has been em-
bodied, it is obvious that A^arious changes
might be made in the details of construc-
tion without departing from the spirit of
this invention, or the scope of the appended j^jg
claims.

Having thus fully described this inven-
tion, I claim and desire to protect by Letters
Patent of the United States :

1. In a talking machine, the combination 120
with sound reproducing means, of a soimd
conduit communicating therewith, and a
screen for said conduit comprising a series
of slats spaced apart and extending trans-
versely of said conduit to provide sound 125
exits and arranged to cooperate to deliver
substantially all of the sound from said con-
duit outAvardly in the general direction of
the longitudinal axis of said conduit and to
simultaneously render the interior of said 3 30

1,068,591

conduit invisible in the direction of said
axis.

2. In a talking machine, the combination
with sound reproducing means, of a sound
5 conduit communicating therewith, and a
screen for said conduit comprising a series
of stationary slats spaced apart and extend-
ing transversely of said conduit to provide
sound exits and cooperating to deliver siib-

10 stantially all of the sound from said conduit
outwardly in the general direction of the
longitudinal axis of said conduit and to
render the interior of said conduit invisible
in the direction of said axis.

15 3. In a talking machine, the combination

with a sound conduit,

of actuating

means

for said machine located in said conduit,
and a screen for said conduit comprising a
series of stationary slats spaced apart and

20 extending transversely of said conduit to
provide sound exits and cooperating to de-
liver substantially all of the sound from
said conduit outwardly in the general di-
rection of the longitudinal axis of said con-

2^ duit and to render the said actuating means
invisible in the direction of said axis.

4. In a talking machine, the combination
with sound reproducing means, of a sound
conduit communicating therewith, and a

^^ screen for said conduit comprising a series
of stationary slats spaced apart and extend-

ing transversely of said conduit to pro-
vide sound exits and cooperating to deliver
substantially all of the sound from said con-
duit outwardly in the general direction of 35
the longitudinal axis of said conduit and to
render the interior of said conduit invisible
in the direction of said axis, each of said
slats comprising a plane outer portion and
an inclined plane inner portion. 40

5. In a talking machine, the combination
with sound reproducing means, of a sound
conduit communicating therewith, and a
screen for said conduit comprising a series
of stationary slats spaced apart and extend- 45
ing transversely of said conduit to provide
sound exits and cooperating to deliver sub-
stantially all of the sound from said con-
duit outwardly in the general direction of
the longitudinal axis of said conduit and to 50
i-ender the interior of said conduit invisible
in the direction of said axis, each of said
slats comprising a plane horizontal outer
portion and an inclined plane inner portion.

In witness whereof, I have hereunto set ^^
my hand this 13th day of January, A. D.
1911.

ELDRIDGE E. JOHNSON.

Witnesses :

Frank B. Middleton, Jr.,
Ralph L. Freeman.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

Washington, D. C."

A. FILSS.

TALKING MACHINE AND THE LIKE.
APPLIOATIOH riLED APE. 25, 1912.

1,068,877.

Patented July 29, 1913.

-J^icf.J.

^i

i^.S'

CL ^^A

^c^.3.

d^ a

^i^e^-e^ ts <s. <scs. . '

^

:g^

ryrviA^

COLUMBIA PLANOORAPH CO.. WASHINGTON, D. C.

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

AUGUST riLSS, OF ERFURT, GERMANY,
TALKING-MACHINE AND THE LIKE.

1,068,877.

Specification of Letters Patent. Patented July 39, 191 3.

Application filed April 25, 1912. Serial No. 693,171.

To all xohorri' it may concern :

Be it known that I, August Filss, a sub-
ject of the German Emperor, residing at Er-
furt, Kingdom of Pru.ssia, Germany, liave
b invented certain new and useful Improve-
ments in Talking-Machines and the Like, of
which the following is a specification.

This invention has reference to talking
machines, and it comprehends, briefly, cer-

10 tain hereinafter-described improvements in
or relating to the mounting of the sound-
box and its carrier, whei'eby the defects ordi-
narily present in the parts just specified, as
now constructed and arranged are, to all

15 intents and purposes, completely obviated.
The known sound-arms, which have re-
cently been used for talking machines, are
adjustable, and have the draAvback that the
parts movable relatively to each other wear

20 out very quickly, which results in rattling,
whizzing and other unpleasant noises ; more-
over, they are further objectionable in that
they occasion an unintentional Aveakening of
the sound-waves and, also, interfere with

25 the same. The chief cause of these draw-
backs is that the goose-neck or other bend,
which carries the sound-box, is rotatably
mounted in a cylindrical sleeve, so that it
is necessary, in changing the disks and

30 needles and, generally, when stopping the
machine, to turn the bend completely oA'er
until either the sound-box or the free end of
the bend itself rests upon the sound-arm.
This movement of the sound-box causes its

35 bearing to become affected in the manner
above referred to, in consequence Avhereof,
a loosening is produced, owing to wear,
which causes the aforesaid noises and, fur-
ther, Aveakens the intensity of the sound-

40 waves.

The afore-mentioned objectionable features
are entirely, or substantially, avoided by the
present invention, Avhich proposes an effec-
tive mounting for the sound-box for the

4S purpose of firmly connecting it to the sound-
arm. This mounting is in the nature of a
ball-and-socket joint, consisting, chiefly, of
a ring of rubber or other suitable material of
a like character, and a hollow ball. The

50 first-named element is mounted on the end
of the .sound-arm and receives the com-
panion element within its central opening,
the latter element being fixed to the bend
and being yieldingly pressed or forced into

55 the aforesaid opening through the agency of

a spring-connection betAveen the tAvo ele-
ments, so as to effect the requisite tight joint.
The ring or socket may be encircled by a
metal clamp on Avhich latter are pivotally
arranged two straps having longitudinal 60
slots for the reception of the ends of the pin
or pins on the ball element. The bend will
then be moA'able in two directions, (upward
and downward,) and will be held in any de-
sired position, owing both to the use of the 65
springs and to the friction of the metal ball
against the wall of its rubber socket. The
bend, however, may be easily detached. The
subject matter of this invention has, there-
fore the important advantage that the neces-i 70
sity of turning the sound-box completely
back upon the sound-arm, for the purpose
of stopping the machine and changing the
disks and needles, is obviated, as it is suffi-,
cient merely, to turn the bend a slight dis-l 76 '
tance upward, whereupon it Avill be held
automatically in position in the manner
above set forth. Moreover, there is pro-
duced, automatically, a tight joint betweeUj.
the bend and sound-arm, which is improved; 80
by its two component parts or elements be-
ing drawn together by the springs, Avhereby
additional noises and weakening of the
sound Avaves are obviated and rendered im-
possible. 85

An embodiment of the invention is illus-
trated in the accompanying drawing, of
which :

Figures 1 and 2 are, respectivel,y, a part-
sectional bottom plan vieAv, and a side eleva- 9C
tion of the improved sound arm and bend,
the latter being shown in the position which
it assumes when the sound-box is in opera-
tion; and Fig. 3 is a bottom plan view,
showing the bend in inoperative position. 95

xVs will be seen from the drawing, the
joint, Avhich presents the chief features of
the invention, comprises a ring a Avhich is
fitted upon the outer end of the sound-arm
h, and a hollow ball c secured to, or made in 100
one piece Avith, the bend d. The ring a is
preferably made of rubber, or other suitable
elastic material that Avill produce automati-
cally, a tight, and, at the same time, yield-
ing joint. Between the ring a and the ball 105
c of the bend d are provided springs /, /
Avhich tend to force said ball into the adja-
cent end of the central opening or bore of
ring a, and in that way a thoroughly effec-
tive joint is insured between the two rela- HO

^

1,068,87V

tively movable elements, any wear of the
material being practically precluded. The
bend d is, therefore, rotatable in two direc-
tions, and, as shown in Fig. 3, it is sufficient
5 to turn the said bend through an arc of
about 90°, or an even smaller arc, in order
to bring the sound-box and its needle into a
position in which the latter and the disk can
at once be changed. Unlike the construc-

]0 tions now in general use, a sound-box, when
applied to the improved construction of the
present invention, need not be swung com-
pletely back upon the sound-arm, in order
to be supported in inoperative position, but

15. merely through a comparatively small arc,
as above stated, since it will be held in posi-
tion owing to the arrangement of the springs
and to the friction of the metal ball against
the slightly yielding wall of its socket.

20 Hov,"ever, this frictional engagement will
not act to hold the sound-box in raised and,
consequently, inoperative position after the
needle has passed over and beyond any pro-
jecting surface irregularity in the disk, for

25 the reason that when the sound-box rises in-
cidental to the passage of the needle over
such irregularit}'. the turning movement of
the ball in its socket and resultant frictional
engagement of the ball and socket surfaces

30 will have the effect of slightly compressing
the socket, which latter, owing to its elas-
ticity, will expand as soon as the needle
leaves the irregularity and thus depress the
sound-box and needle to initial position.

35 Accordingly, there is no danger of the needle
being held in elevated position, out of con-
tact with the wall of the sound-gTOove, after
passing over any irregularity on the disk
surface, which would otherwise be a most

40 serious defect, by reason of the tendency of
the disks to warp and, generally, the diffi-
culty of obtaining disks Avith perfectly true
surfaces. In the construction illustrated,
there is further provided, for the engage-

45 ment of the springs /, a split metal ring g^
which may be tightened, like the ordinary
clamping collar, by means of a screw h, both
to hold it upon the ring a and, also, to im-
prove the joint between said ring and the

50 end of the sound-arm 1). At their front
ends, these springs are firmly connected to

the ball c by pins or bolts «', or, if desired, —
as is the case in the construction illus-
trated,— a single pin may be passed through
the said ball. Straps k. bent in a suitable 55
manner, are preferably employed, for pre-
venting the springs from contacting with
the ring or socket by forming supports for
said springs. These straps are arranged
transversely of the rings a and g^ and ex- 60
tend across the same, as shown. They are
formed at their front ends with longitudinal
slots m through Avhich the ends of pin i
l^roject, and they may, if desired, be pro-
vided at their rear ends with similar slots Z, 65
to permit their effective length to be in-
creased as required.
I claim :

1. The combination of a talking machine
sound-arm; a socket of yielding material 70
fitted on the front end thereof; a movable
sound-box carrier provided at its rear end
with a hollow ball movabh^ fitted in the
socket; and resilient connections between
said ball and. said socket for holding said 75
carrier in adjusted position.

2. The combination of a talking machine
sound-arm; a rubber ring fitted on the
front end thereof; a movable sound-box car-
rier provided at its rear end with a holloAV 80
ball movably fitted in the outer end of saitl
ring and having a pin; and a pair of dia-
metrically-opposite springs connected at
their rear ends with said ring and at their
front ends with the ends of said pin for 85
holding said carrier in adjusted position.

3. The combination of a talking machine
soiuid-arm ; a rubber socket fitted on the
front end thereof; a movable sound-box-
carrying bend provided at its rear end with 90
a hollow ball movably fitted in said socket;
and resilient connections between said socket
and said ball for holding said bend in ad-
justed position.

In testimony whereof I have hereimto set 95
my hand in presence of two subscribing wit-
nesses.

AUGUST FILSS.

Witnesses :

Ernst Ebeehaedt,
Am^red Hoffmann.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

Washington,D. C."

M. A. POSSONS.

TALKINa MiOHINE.
APPLICATION FILED OCT. 7, 1909,

1,069,464.

Patented Aug. 5, 1913.

2 SHEETS-SHEET 1.

Fi^.2.

F'i^.^..

^Wi^|>ne<^3-cc>

'!::^/rayi^^:c:^^ic^^^^.

i^i^.^:

dttovm^

M. A. POSSONS.

TALKING MACHINE.
APPLICATION FILED OCT. 7, 1909,

1,069,464.

Patented Aug. 5, 1913.

2 SHEETS-SHEET 2.

llHIIIIIIHIIIIIllllllllllHlllllllglllllHHIIIimillHllllllilllllllllllllllllllll

^wMA^Xcyv

^}X)Vc-v

;^^2>^/^i^— -e

O— C-^A-fAA.^

QXioMW^

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE,

MINARD ARTHUR POSSONS, OF CLEVELAND, OHIO.
TALKING-MACHINE.

1,069,464.

Specification of letters Patent. Patented Allg. 5, 1913.

Application filed October 7, 1909. Serial No. 521,566.

To all whom it may concern :

Be it known that I, Minaed A. Possons, a
citizen of tlie United State.s, residing at
Cleveland, _iu the county of Cuyahoga and
5 State of Ohio, have invented certain new
and useful Improvements in Talking-Ma-
chines, of which the following is a specifica-
tion, reference heing had therein to the ac-
companying drawing.

10 My invention relates to improvements in
talking machines.

The object of my invention is to provide
a winding device for talking machines of
the character that have a cover to let down

15 over the record while playing, and the rais-
ing and lowering of the cover winds the
talldng machine so that when the cover is
raised and a new record placed thereon and
the cover lowered the talking machine has

20 been sufficiently wound to play the record.
Another object of my invention is to pro-
vide a winding device of this character
which can be readily attached to any av ell-
known talking machine and at the same time

25 allowing of the usual crank winding thereof.

In the accompanying drawing: Figure 1

is a side elevation of a talking machine

showing my device applied thereto. Fig. 2

is a vertical sectional view of Fig. 1. Fig.

30 3 is a transverse sectional view of Fig. 2.
Fig. 4 is an enlarged plan view of the gear-
ing showing the gear case removed. Fig. 5
is an enlarged plan view of the ratchet gears
for winding the talking machine on both

35 the upward and downward movement of the
cover.

Eeferring now to the drawings, 1 repre-
sents the body of a talking machine which is
provided with a cover 2, to inclose the record

40 and the reproducer and arm when the ma-
chine is in operation, and whereby the rec-
ord is protected while playing and thus
saving the record against scratches caused
by striking the reproducer or its arm. In

45 such machines the cover is raised when a
new record is placed on the machine and it
is the intention of m}' invention to wind
the machine by the raising and lowering of
the cover. The bodj^ 1 and cover 2, forming

50 a motor and record receiving member case.
Machines of this character are driven by a
spring and said spring wound by the crank
3. The crank being threaded upon the
spring drum shaft 4 so that it will tighten

55 when winding the machine, but can be I'e-
moved or unscrewed by turning it backward.

My device, as heretofore stated, is con-
structed to be applied to the ordinary ma-
chine and will not have to abandon any
part thereof, nor no new parts will be I'e- qq
quired except what is absolutely necessary
for winding the machine.

My improved device is wholly inclosed in
a casing 5, which is readily secured to the
inside of the body 1 of the talking machine §5
adjacent the drum-shaft 4 and crank-shaft
3, in any desired manner. The cover 2 has
rigidly secured thereto the downwardly ex-
tending segmental rack 6, which extends
through the housing 5, and operates a train 70
of gear for rotating the shaft 4, which will
be hereinafter more fully described.

The housing 5 is provided with a trans-
verse longitudinal shaft 7, upon which is
mounted a gear wheel 8, which is at all 75
times in mesh with the segmental rack 6,
and whereby the gear 8 is driven in one di-
rection by the upward movement of the rack
6, and in the reverse direction upon the
downward movement of the rack. The cas- 80
ing 5 on the inside of the gear 8 is provided
with a transverse horizontal shaft 9, which
is free to rotate in the frame and upon which
is loosely mounted a gear 10, which is at all
times in gear with the gear 8, whereby the 85
direction of rotation of said gear is reversed
by the gear 8 as heretofore described.
Loosely mounted upon the shaft 9, on each
side of the gear 10 is a gear 11 and 12. The
center gear 10 on each side is provided Avith 90
plates 13 and 14 held upon the gear by
rivets 15, the two plates being held by the
same rivets. The outer edge of the plates

13 and 14 are provided with tapering cut-
away portions 16. The cut aAvay portions 95
of one plate tapering in one direction, w^hile
those of the other plate taper in the opposite
direction. The gears 11 and 12 are of rim-
like form having secured to their outer faces
the plates 17 by means means of riA^ets 18. 100
The central openings of said gears 11 and

12 are slightly larger than the plates 13 and

14 and the said plates fitting in said open-
ings. Within the tapering cutaway por-
tions 16, which are arranged at equal dis- 105
tances around the periphery of the i)lates
are steel rollers 19. These rollers Avhen in

the deep portion of the tapering cutaAvay
portions alloAv the free rotation of the gear,
but AA'hen caused to travel toward the shal- 110
loAv end. the gear is locked to the plate or to
the central gear 10. These cutaway por-

1,069,464

tions of one plate tapering in opposite di-
rection to those of the other plate it will
be seen that when the gear 10 is rotated in
one direction the gear 11 is locked thereto,
5 and when rotated in the opposite direction,
the gear 12 is locked thereto. The rollers
19 are held against inward movement by the
gear 10 and against outward movement hj
the plates 17.

10 The gear 12 is slightty larger in diameter
than the gear 11, and meshes with an idle
gear 21, mounted in the casing. The idle
gear 21 meshes with the large gear 22,
mounted upon the shaft 23 carried by the

15 frame 5, and said gear 22 meshing with the
gear 24 loosely mounted upon the shaft 4
of the spi'ing drum. The gear 11 is smaller
in diameter than the gear 12, and meshes
directly with the gear 22. The gear 24 be-

20 ing loose upon the shaft 4, it will be seen
that the said shaft can be rotated by the
crank 3, as heretofore described without
operating the train of gearing.

In order to lock the gear 24 to the shaft

25 4, or crank- 3, I provide a sleeve 25, which
is slidable upon the shaft 4 or crank 3. Sur-
rounding the sleeve is a plate 26, secured
to the cuter face of the body 1, and sur-
I'ounding the sleeve on the inside of the

30 plate 26 is a coil spring 27, the outer end
of which bears against the plate and the
inner end secured to the sleeve and normally
holding the sleeve in an inward position.
The inner end of the sleeve is provided

35 with notches 28, into which extend the lugs
29 carried by the gear 24, whereby the
gear is locked to tlie sleeve. The sleeve is
held upon the shaft 4 by means of a pin 30,
working i]i a bayonet -slot 31 in the sleeve.

40 When the pin is in the position shown in
the drawings, the gear 24 is locked in the
shaft 4 through the medium of the sleeve
25. Drawing the sleeve outwardly against
the tension of the spring and turning it

45 locks the sleeve in its outward position and
uncouples the sleeve 25 from the gear 24.
In devices of this character, as hereto-
fore stated, a cover protects the record while
playing, and whenever a new record is

50 placed on the machine the cover is raised
and lowered. When the cover is raised the
rack 6 rotates the gear 8, and this gear in
turn rotates the central gear 10 in the re-
verse direction. The rotation of this gear

55 10 in this direction by means of the rollers
and tapering slots locks the lower or inner
gear 11 to the gear 10, so that they rotate
in the same direction. This gear 11 meshes
with the large gear 22 and rotates the same

60 in the opposite direction. This gear 22
meshes with the gear 24, which when locked
to the shaft 4, winds the spring of the ma-
chine. A new record is then placed upon
the machine. The downward movement of

65 the rack in closing the cover rotates the sear

8 in the opposite direction; this rotates
the gear 10 in the opposite direction and
by the clutch mechanism the gear 10 is dis-
connected from the gear 11 and connected
to the gear 12. This gear 12 meshes with -jq
an idle gear 21, which meshes with the gear
22, which meshes with the gear 24, where-
by said gear through the medium of the
idle gear 24 is rotated in the same direction
upon both the upward and downward move- 75
ment of the rack.

By locking the sleeve 25 in the outward
position, as heretofore described, the gear 24
is disconnected from the shaft 4 and the
shaft may be rotated by the crank 3, inde- go
pendent of the rack and its operating mecha-
nism. While I have shown and described
this specific means of operating the spring-
drum shaft, it will be understood that the
same can be vastly varied without depart- 85
ing from my invention.

I claim —

1. The combination with a talking ma-
chine cabinet having a motor therein, of a
record holding member and a reproducer 90
carried by the cabinet, a cover closing tlie
cabinet for inclosing the record holding
member and the reproducer, a winding crank
carried by the motor, means operated by the
movement of the cover for winding the 95
crank and means for disconnecting said
winding means from the crank.

2. The combination with a talking ma-
chine cabinet having a motor therein, of a
record holding member and a reproducer loo
carried by the cabinet, a cover closing the
cabinet for inclosing the record holding
member and the reproducer, a winding crank
for the motor, means operated by the cover
for rotating the winding crank during both 105
the upward and downward movement there-
of, and means for disconnecting the cover
operating means from the crank, whereby
the motor may be wound by the crank.

3. The combination with a talking ma- 110
chine cabinet having a motor therein, of a
record holding member and a reproducer
carried by the cabinet, a hinged cover clos-
ing the cabinet for inclosing the record hold-
ing member and the reproducer, a usual 115
winding shaft carried by the motor, a gear
loosely mounted upon the winding shaft, a
clutch mechanism carried by the shaft and
held in engagement with the gear hj a
spring, a bayonet slot connection between 120
the clutch and the shaft for holding the
clutch mechanism against rotation on the
shaft and locking it in its outward position
out of engagement with the gear, a train of
gearing meshing with the said loose gear, 125
and a rack carried by the cover for oper-
ating the train of gearing.

4. The combination with a talking ma-
chine cabinet having a motor therein, of a
record holding member and a reproducer 130

1,069,464

carried by the cabinet, a hinged cover clos-
ing the cabinet for inclosing the record hold-
ing member and the reproducer, a crank for
winding the motor, a loose gear carried by
5 the crank, a clutch mechanism for locking
the gear to the crank, a gear meshing with
said loose gear, a train of gearing meshing
with the last mentioned gear, and a seg-
mental rack carried by the cover and adapt-
10 ed to operate said train of gearing, substan-
tially as shown and described.

5. The combination" with a talking ma-
chine cabinet having a motor therein, of a
record holding member and a reproducer

15 carried b}^ the cabinet, a hinged cover clos-
ing the cabinet for inclosing the record
holding member and the reproducer, a crank
for winding the motor, a segmental rack
carried by the cover and extending down-

20 wardly, a gear carried by the cabinet and
meshing with said rack, a large gear mesh-
ing with the first mentioned gear, plates
secured to both sides of said large gear and
having tapering recesses in their outer edges,

^^ said recesses of one plate tapering in oppo-
site direction to that of the other plate, roll-
ers in said recesses, a gear surrounding each
plate and adapted to be locked thereto by
the rotation of the large gear in different
directions, and a train of gearing mesh-
ing with the outside gears and adapted
to rotate the crank in the same direction by
the upward and downward movement of the
cover.

6. The combination with a talking ma-
chine cabinet having a motor therein, of a
record holding member and a reproducer

carried by the cabinet, a hinged cover clos-
ing the cabinet for inclosing the record hold-
ing member and the reproducer, a winding 40
crank connected to the motor, a segmental
rack carried by the cover, a gear carried by
the cabinet and meshing with the said seg-
mental rack, an intermediate gear meshing
with the first mentioned gear, a gear on each 45
side of the intermediate gear and of different
diameters, means for coupling the larger
gear to the intermediate gear when revolv-
ing in one direction, and the smaller gear
to the intermediate gear when revolving in 50
the opposite direction, an idle gear meshing
with the larger gear beside the intermediate
gear, a gear meshing with the smaller gear
beside the intermediate gear and the idle
gear, and a gear carried by the winding 55
crank and meshing with the last mentioned
gear, whereby the rack revolves the motor
shaft in the same direction on the upward
and downward movement.

7. In a talking machine, the combination 60
with a motor and talking machine cabinet,
of a motor within the cabinet, two winding
mechanisms for the motor, one operative in-
dependently of the other, the cabinet having
a movable portion operatively connected 65
with one of the winding mechanisms and a
handle operatively connected to the other
winding mechanism.

In testimony whereof I hereunto affix my
signature in the presence of two witnesses. 70
MINARD ARTHUR POSSONS.

Witnesses :

Edward A. Schneider,
Fred. T. Batcheloe.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

Washington, D. C."

R. PRESZTER.

CABINET FOR TALKING MACHINES.

APPLICATION PILED MAE. 8, 1913.

1,069,578.

Patented Aug. 5, 1913.

2 SHEETS-SHEET 1.

Tlsr.3

CflLUMBIA PLANOORAPH CO., WASHINGTON. I

K. PKESZTEK.

CABINET FOR TALKING MACHINES.

APPLIOATION PILED MAE. 8, 1913.

1,069,578.

Patented Aug. 5, 1913.

2 SHEETS-SHEET 2.

IFJff.J

(^//////////////^//////, ,

' ^^

/

, ^^

/

/ ff

o ^

/ If JT^S

=a*^ iLs ^

' M j^^

^^'^^^s*^ ''

; U j^

/ a M

^^^^^ /

/ u ff

^^^^^^ /

/ 7 ff

^^^h. /

^*'**''*%.. ;

'^^

^^,^

^^/l*''^'*^ ',

/ fl w

.^t^^^^ ^

' ft y^

^^^^^ /

' u ^>

^^^^^ "^

; \ ^^

=*'*^ £. ^

' Xv

/

' ^^

/

^^^".^

'

_

-Fi^.6

ZFi^.y

j-zsrs

li ////// ul

''^rv.^^ -^I'iUjm^

^^l/i^'Zti^'^^^^k^^^^:^^

J/iiPeniffjr

COLUfllBIA PLANOORAPU CO., WASHINGTON, D. (

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

REZSO PRESZTER, OF BUDAPEST, AUSTRIA-HUNGARY.
CABINET FOR TALKING-MACHINES.

1,069,578.

Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Aug. 5, 1913.

Application filed March 8, 1913. Serial No. 753,080.

To all whom it may concern:

Be it Imown that T. Eezso Presztee, a
subject of the King of Hungary, and resid-
ing at Budapest, Austria-Hungary, have in-
5 A^ented certain new and useful Improve-
ments in Cabinets for Talking-Machines, of
which the following is a specification.

My invention relates to cabinets or cases
consisting of a box and a box-like cover

10 for talking-machines.

The cabinet according to my invention,
has two separate conduits conjointly con-
nected with horns, said horns and conduits
branching off at the sound arm joint, one

15 conduit and its horn being arranged in the
box-like lid of the cabinet, the other horn
being arranged in the box.

Two separate resonance chambers are
tliereby formed, to which, as experiments

20 have shown, special resonance effects are
due corresponding, say, to the head reson-
ance and to the chest resonance of the hu-
man voice.

The horns may be made of wood, metal

2.5 or other material of a round or angular
shape, assembled of several parts, or made
in one piece with a smooth surface or lac-
quered.

Several illustrative embodiments of my

30 invention are represented by way of ex-
ample, in the accompanying drawings,
wherein : —

Figure 1 is a vertical section through one
form of lid according to my invention. Fig.

35 2 is a vertical section through the box. Fig.
3 is a horizontal section through the lid
showing the sound-arm with the sound-box
arranged thereon, and Fig. 4 is a horizontal
section through the box taken directly be-

4 0 low the lid; Fig. 5 is a horizontal section
through a box like lid for illustrating a
multiple arrangement of the horns; Fig. 6
shows a form of the subject-matter of my
invention wherein the conduit enters from

45 the outside; Fig. 7 is a vertical section
through the lid and box of another form of
cabinet, in which the conduit is led from
the outside into the box, and Fig. 8 is a
vertical section showing another embodi-

50 ment.

In the embodiment represented in Figs.
1 to 4 the clockwork mechanism of the talk-
ing-machine is accommodated in the box 5
which is closed aboA'e by a lid 1 containing
the horn 2. Part of the horn 6 is formed 55
as a sound-arm support 4 which passes
through the top of the box and unites with
the neck of the horn 2 in the lid. The sound -
arm 3 is common to the two horns 2 and C.

In the embodiment shown in Fig. 5 two 60
horns 2 are arranged in the lid 1 and two
horns in the box 5, said horns being con-
nected to the common sound-arm. In the
form shown in Fig. T the upper horns are
entirely within the lid, while the lower 65
horns project out of the box 5 and are con-
nected by a curved portion 7 outside the
box with the horns in the lid. As shown in
Fig. 8, however, the arrangement may be
such that both the horns, i. e. the horn 2 70
and the horn 6, are connected by bends 7,
outside the cabinet with the fork which
connects them with the common sound-
arm.

In the form illustrated in Figs. 7 and 8 75"
it will of course be understood that the
lid is formed with slots to permit the rais-
ing thereof.

The more horns are provided the more
the effect of the sound is increased. In this 8(
manner the clearness and strength of the
sound can be doubled or trebled according
as a smaller or larger number of horns is
used,

I claim: — 85

A device of the type described including
a sound box, an inclosure, a movable closure
therefor, duplicate horns arranged in said
inclosure and duplicate horns arranged in
said closure, all of said horns being con- 90
nected to a common sound arm, said sound-
arm connecting said sound box with said
horns.

In testimony whereof, I affix my signature
in the presence of two witnesses.

KEZSO PKESZTER,

Witnesses :

John J, Ronto,
Andrew Kelemen,

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

Washington, D, C,"

F. W. HOULSTON.

PHONOGRAPHIC HOEN.

APPLICATION PILED APE. 2, 1913,

1,069,642.

:p^.j.

Patented Aug. 5, 1913.

ja^.s.

:pu^. ^

T.W:ifoulstoTV

PLANOORAPH CO., WASHINGTON. D. C.

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE,

FREDERICK WILLIAM HOULSTON. OE TORONTO, ONTARIO, CANADA.
PHONOGRAPHIC HORN.

1,069,642.

Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Aug. 5,1913.

Application filed April 2, 1913. Serial No. 758,429.

To all whom it may concern :

Be it known that I, Frederick AVh^liam
Hoi'i>.STON, a subject of the King of Great
Britain, residing at Toronto, in the Province
5 of Ontario and Dominion of Canada, haA^e
invented new and useful Improvements in
Phonographic Horns, of which the follow-
ing is a specification.

This invention relates to an improved

10 phonographic horn or trumpet, its object be-
ing to provide a sectional horn which may
be taken apart and its sections nested with-
in one another for compact storage or ship-
ment, and which is provided with simple

15 means for fastening the sections, permitting

of their ready connection and disconnection.

The invention consists of the features of

construction, combination and arrangement

of parts hereinafter fully described and

20 claimed, reference being had to the accom-
panying drawing, in which : —

Figure 1 is a side elevation of the horn as
set up and supported for u.se. Fig. 2 is a
bottom i)lan view of one of the sections of

25 the horn. Figs. 3 and 4 are longitudinal
sections through the top and bottom por-
tions of the meeting ends of horn sections,
showing the connecting means. Fig. 5 is a
top plan view of one of the horn sections.

30 Referring to the drawing, 1 designates a
tapering horn composed of a number of sec-
tions 2. The enlarged forward end 3 of each
section has an external annular bead 3^" while
the reduced end 4 thereof has an annular

35 shoulder 5 set back from the edge thereof.
The end 4 of each section is adapted to fit
within the enlarged end of the next adja-
cent smaller section, so that the bead and
shoulder thereon will abut and limit their

40 telescopic connection. A handle 6 is pro-
vided on one of the sections for convenience
in carr3'ing the horn. Said section is also
provided at opposite sides with trunnions 7
to engage the forked arms of a forked

45 bracket 8 carried by a folding stand 9.

On the bottom of the enlarged end of
each section is an outwardly extending
spring keeper loop 10, which projects be-

yond the bead S'^ to bear against the same
and the shoulder 5 on the reduced end of 50
the next section, and to be engaged beyond
said shoulder by a retaining hook 11 on the
reduced end of the latter named section.
The top of each section carries a spring
catch 12 having a hooked end 13 and a ter- 55
minal finger piece 14, said hooked end being
adapted to snap into engagement with the
bead 3^ on the next adjacent section to fas-
ten the sections together.

In assembling the sections for use, the 60
base of the reduced end of each section is in-
serted into the base of the enlarged end of
another section, the hook 11 snapping into
engagement with the loop 10, and then the
sections are given a relative pivotal move- 65
ment by which their ends are fully engaged
and the catch 12 made to .>nap over the
shoulder 3\ To disconnect the sections, the
catch 12 on each section is retracted, where-
upon said section may be freed from the 70
other section hj a downward pivotal move-
ment, whereby the hook 11 will be disen-
gaged from the loop 10. It will thus be
seen that the sections of the horn may be
readily connected and disconnected, so that 75
the horn may be set up for use or taken apart
and the sections packed closely within one
another for storage or shipment. The ad-
vantages of the construction will accord-
ingly be apparent. 80

I claim : —

A phonographic horn of tapered form and
comprising a series of telescopic sections,
each of said sections having at its wider end
a terminal, annular external bead or enlarge- 85
ment. and each of said sections except the
smallest also having adjacent to and spaced
from its reduced end an external annular
abutment shoulder, whereby the enlarged
ends of the respective sections are adapted 90
to receive and overlap the reduced ends of
adjacent sections and the beads thereof to
abut against the shoulders thereon, a re-
taining projection upon each section of
larger diameter adjacent to the shoulder, a 95
looped engaging member upon each section

2

1,069,643

of smaller diameter to pivotally interlock
with the adjacent retaining member, and a
spring metal fastening member on each sec-
tion of larger diameter having a bent free
end adapted to engage over the shoulder and
bead of the coacting sections and to inter-
lock with said bead.

In testimony whereof I affix my signature
in presence of two witnesses.

fREDEKICK WILLIAM HOULSTON.

Witnesses :

Sidney Feedeick Houlston,
Florence May Topley.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the

Washington, D. C."

Commissioner of Patents,

1,069,784.

W. J. HODGES.

SOUND REPRODUCING MACHINE.
APPLIOATION PILED SEPT. 12, 1912.

Patented Aug. 12, 1913.

2 SHEETS-SHEET 1.

sa

£i.~r

^^

x<?M\^\\\\\V\\-;^^^^^^^

y^

c^wvucW^otJ

'^^^\^A^/Q/>ye^

TPTtj^JFici^oG^s

y

§Sif

MlllA I'l-ANOOHAPH \

W, J. HODGES.

SODND REPRODOCING MACHINE.
APPLICATION PILED SEPT. 12, 1912.

1,069,784.

Patented Aug. 12, 1913.

2 SHEETS-SHEET 2.

C^S'^'

^7

^V^^^:^-^VVXXVX>.^V-^^K^.V^^^^

^VVVV^VVVV^<-v-^^XV^x^

^^isf'^'

XX^

J?^

^^.^.

"^W-^tM-COO-ftO

alS-v

£lttoM«»U

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

WILLIAM J. HODGES, OF ATLANTA, GEORGIA.
SOUND-REPRODUCING MACHINE,

1,069,784.

Specification of Letters Patent. Patciltctl Aug. 13, 1913.

Application filed September 12, 1912. Serial No. 720,038.

To all whom it may concern:

Re it known that I, William J. Hodges, a
citizen of the United States, residing at At-
lanta, in the count.y of Fulton and State of
5 Georgia, hars'e invented certain new and use-
ful Iin[)rovenients in Sound - Reproducing
]\fachine.s, of which the following is a speci-
fication, reference being had to the accom-
panying drawings.

IC This invention relates (o improvements in
sound repi'oducing machines and has for
its primary object to provide a device of
this character wherein the sound reproduc-
ing means including the amjilifying horn is

15 arranged within a single inclo.sed chamber
wherel)y the f)bjectionable scratching noise
of the stylus wynrn the reproducing record
is rendered inaudible.

Another and very important object of the

20 iuventi(ui resides in the provision of means
for mounting the reproducing disk record
and positioning the tone arm whereon the
sound box is arranged so as to eliminate the
leakage of sound waves and thereby secure

^5 a maxinunn volume of sound.

Another and more sjiecific object of the
invention is to provide a simple and novel
holdei" for the record disk so that the same
may be easil.y and quickly secured in or

30 removed from the holder.

Still another object of the invention is
to provide a casing or housing for all of the
operating ])arts having a hinged top or
cover, and improved means for connecting

35 the disk holder to the cover so that said
holder may be raised or elevated therewith.
Another object of the invention is to pro-
vide a sound reproducing machine wherein
the I'ecord disk is so mounted and supported

40 in operative position that material economy
may be effected in the manufacture of the
disks.

AVith the above and other objects in Anew
as will become apparent as the description

■^S proceeds, the invention consists in certain
constructions, combijiations and arrange-
ments of the parts that I shall hereinafter
fully describe and claim.

For a full understanding of the inven-

50 tion, reference is to be had to the following
description and accompanying drawings, in
which —

Figure 1 is a perspective view of a sound
reproducing machine embodying the pres-

55 ent invention: Fig. 2 is a vertical section
thereof; Fig. 3 is a top plan view, the cas-

ing being shown in section and the disk
holder roniove<l: Fig. 4 is an inverted plan
view of the disk holder; Fig. 5 is an en-
larged detail section showing the means for 60
connecting the disk holder to the hinged
top of the case or cabinet.

Referring in detail to the drawings, 5
designates a case or cabinet, Avhich may be
constructed of any desired kind of wood, 65
and may be manufactured in various
ornamental shapes and sizes, and may
also be provided with surface ornamen-
tation if desired. The top of this cabi-
net is provided with a circular opening 6 70
and within the cabinet the horizontal sup-
porting bars 7 are mounted at their ends
upon cleats S fixed to the side walls of said
cabinet. These supporting bars 7 have se-
cured thereto in any preferred manner the 75
spring motor indicated at 9. This motor
may be of any api^roved construction and
drives a vertical sjiindle 10 which extends
upwardly through a top plate 11 arranged
upon the supports 7. A shield plate 12 ex- 80
tends from this top plate 11 to the front
wall of the casing and protects the parts of
the motor against dust and dirt accumulat-
ing thereon.

In the preferred embodiment of my in- 85
vention, the amplifying horn 13 is of rec-
tangular form in cross section and its flar-
ing wider end is fixed to the inner surface
of the front wall of the case or cabinet 5.
This front wall of the cabinet is provided 90
with an elongated opening indicated at 14
which may be of any desired size or orna-
mental shape, and said casing wall may also
have additional sound outlet openings 15 at
<)]:)posite sides of the main opening 14. The 95
top wall of the casing is provided with a
hinged cover 16 to close the opening 6 there-
of, said coA-er being supported in its open
position by the usual movable links 17. This
coA^er will be later referred to in detail and 100
the purpose thereof more specifically point-
ed out.

The inner end of the amplifying horn is
dis])osed adjacent to the rear or back wall
of the case or cabinet and is provided with 105
the usual socket fixed to said cabinet wall
in Avhich one end of the tone arm 18 is
mounted for vertical and lateral movement.
The other end of this tone arm is provided
with the usual sound box 19 which is provided HO
with the needle or st3dus 20. To one of the
side Avails of the case or cabinet, an in-

Q

1,069,784

Avardly projecting yieldable abutment mem-
ber 21 is secured with which the sound box
is adapted to engage to position the tone
arm and the needle of tlie sound box Avhen
5 it is desired to start the machine so that the
needle will contact with the reproducing
surface of the disk at the proper point.
The tone arm 18 is adapted to be raised and
lowered by means of a toothed bar 22 which

xo is loosely connected to said arm adjacent
its pivoted end by means of the link 23.
This toothed bar extends through a slot 24
provided in the rear Avail of the case or
cabinet 5, and with the teeth of the bar a

15 pivoted latch plate 25 is adapted to engage,
whereby the arm 18 may be held in an ele-
vated position. One end of a coil spring 26
is connected to the arm 18, the other end of
said spring being fixed to the inner end of

20 the bar 22. This spring yieldably supports
the arm in its playing position and permits
of the usual vibratory movement thereof
which is clue to the oscillation of the rotat-
ing record disk.

25 The disk holder designated at 27 consists
of a circular plate preferably constructed
of aluminum and pi'ovided at its outer edge
with a circumferential flange 28, from which
flange a short arcuate iuAvardly projecting

30 lateral flange 29 extends. The bottom face
of this aluminum plate is covered Avith felt
or other suitable fabric upon Avhich the disk
record indicated at D is adapted to be en-
gaged, a portion of the edge of said record

35 being fitted betAveen the flange 29 and the
body of the holder. This record disk D is
in the form of an annulus the central por-
tion thereof being cut away as indicated at
D'. Thus a material saving in the manu-

40 facture of the disks may be eifected, as it
has heretofore been necessary to manufac-
ture the same as a substantiality solid disk
having an aperture or small opening at its
center to receive the perpendicular shaft

45 or spindle upon Avhich the disk is mounted.
In a machine embodying the improve-
ments of the present inA^ention, the body of
the holder is provided Avith a short taper-
ing stud 30 projecting from its under sur-

50 face which is adapted to be fitted in a socket
31 provided in the upper end of the rotary
spindle 10. Upon the circumferential
flange 28 of the holder plate 27 at a point
diametrically opposite the flange 29 a catch

55 32 of any suitable form is mounted. This
catch is adapted to be engaged over the edge
of the disk record to retain the same in the
holder. Upon the opposite or upper sur-
face of the holder plate 27, a tubular boss 33

60 is centrally formed. This boss is adapted
to be received in a central opening 34 pro-
vided in the hinged cover or top 16, the
upper end of said opening being diametri-
cally enlarged to provide an annular recess

65 35 in which the circular plate 36 is secured

by means of suitable screAVs. This plate is
provided Avith a central threaded opening

38 to register Avith the threaded bore of
the tubular boss 33. A scrcAv threaded pin

39 is adapted to be engaged with the threads ^q
of the plate 36 and of the boss 33, Avhereby
the disk holder Avill be connected to the
hinged top 16 of the cabinet. The upper
end of the threaded pin 39 has pivotally
connected thereto a Aving or finger piece 40 ^g
Avhich, Avhen the machine is not in use is
adapted to be turned down into the amiular
recess 35 at the upper end of the opening

34 in the cover. It Avill be noted that Avhen
the disk holder is in position upon the upper gQ
end of the spindle 10, the upper surface of
said holder is flush with the upper surface
of the top of the cabinet. Thus Avhen the
cover is moved downwardly upon the
holder, it will lie perfectly flat upon the g5
top Avail of the cover. The edges of this
hinged top are preferably provided Avith
strips of felt or other fabric to proA'ide an
air-tight closure and also prevent marring
of the surface finish of the cabinet. qq

41 indicates the starting rod Avhereby the
spring motor is controlled. This rod pro-
jects through an opening in the front Avail
of the cabinet. The motor shaft 42 extends
through an opening in the side Avail of the 95
cabinet, the end of said shaft being flush
Avith the outer surface of said Avail and en-
gaged by a facing plate 43.^ This outer
end of the motor shaft is provided Avith a
rectangular socket to receive the squared jOO
end of a Avinding crank 44. By mounting
the motor shaft in the wall of the cabinet in
this manner, the escape of the sound Avaves
through the opening in the cabinet Avail is
obviated and the Avinding crank may also be 105
easily and quickly attached to or detached
from said shaft.

From the aboA^e description taken in con-
nection Avith the accompanying drawings, it
is thought that the construction and manner no
of operation of my improved sound repro-
ducing machine Avill be fully understood.

As the tone arm and sound box are en-
tirely inclosecl Avithin the casing or cabinet,
substantially the entire volume of sound Avill 115
escape from the machine through the ampli-
fying horn 13 and the openings 15 in the
front Avail of the cabinet. In the use of the
device, Avhen it is desired to change the rec-
ord disks, the pin 39 is simply threaded into 120
the boss of the disk holder and said holder
together Avith the hinged top of the cabinet
raised. The disk may be readily removed
from the holder and another substituted
therefor. The cover is now lowered upon 125
the cabinet and upon removing the pin 39,
the disk holder will be suppoi'ted wholly
upon the upper end of the spindle 10. The
toothed bar 22 is noAv pulled outwarclly
through the rear wall of the cabinet so as 130

1,069,784

to raise the tone arm and engage the styhis
or needle with the record disk. The machine
is then in condition to be started and the op-
erator simply pulls outwardly upon the rod
5 41 to put the motor in operation. During
the plajnng of the machine, the hinged
cover is moved to its closed j^osition upon
the top of the cabinet so that the> entire ma-
chine presents the appearance of a closed

10 case, none of the operating parts being
visible. It will also be obvious that the rec-
ord will be protected against liability of in-
j^uy through objects being dropped thereon.
By entirely-inclosing the operating parts in

15 the cabinet, the objectionable scratching
noise commonl}' noted in similar machines
of the present construction which is caused
by the st3'lus of the sound box moving upon
the face of the record, is rendered inaudible,

20 so that a smooth even and uninterrupted
volume of sound issues from the machine.

It will of course be readily understood
that the invention is susceptible of consider-
able modificaticm in the form, proportion

25 and arrangement of the several elements
without departing from the essential fea-
tures or sacrificing any of the advantages
thereof.

Having thus described the iuveiition,

30 what is claimed is:

1. The combinatioii with a cabiuet having
a single chamber and a hinged cover there-
for, of sound reproducing means including
an amplifying horn located entirely within

35 said chamber, and means for removably at-
taching a record in its operative position
to the under side of said cover.

2. The combination with a cabinet, of a
movable tone ai'm and an amplifying horn

40 arranged within the cabinet, said horn open-
ing at one end through one of the cabinet
walls, a rotary spindle and a motor to op-
erate the same, a record holder removably
mounted upon the u])per end of said spindle,

45 to support a record for engagement by a
stylus on the tone arm. said holder being dis-
posed in an opening in the top wall of the
cabinet, a cover for said cabinet to close said
opening when the record holder is in posi-

50 tion, and means for connecting the record
holder to said cover whereby said holder and
record are elevated when the cover is raised.

3. The combination with a cabinet, of a
movable tone arm and an amplifying horn

55 arranged within the cabinet, said horn open-
ing at one end through one of the cabinet
walls, a rotary si^indle and a motor to op-
erate the same, a record holder removablj'^
mounted upon the upper end of said spin-

60 die to support a record for engagement by
a stylus on the tone arm, said holder being
disposed in an opening in the top wall of
the cabinet, a cover for said cabinet to close
said opening when the record-holder is in

65 position, said cover having an opening, and

70

a pin adapted to be disposed through said
opening and having threaded engagement
with the record holder to connect the same to
the cover wherebj^ the holder and record are
elevated when the cover is raised.

4. The combination with a cabinet, of a
tone arm pivotaliy mounted at one end for
universal movement and an amplifjdng horn
arranged within said cabinet, one end of said
horn opening through one of the cabinet yg
walls, a stylus carried by the tone arm, a
rotary disk supporting spindle, a motor to
operate the same, a rack bar loosely connect-
ed to the pivoted end of the tone arm and
movable through one of the cabinet walls, gQ
and a latch i:)late to engage the teeth of the
rack bar and retain the tone arm in an ele-
vated position and maintain the stylus
thereon in engagement with the reproducing
surface of the disk. gg

5. The combination with a cabinet, of a
tone arm and an amplifying horn arranged
therein, one end of said horn opening
through one of the cabinet walls, a rotary
spindle, an operating motor therefor, a qq
disk holder having a centrally bored and
interiorly threaded boss adapted to be
mounted upon the tipi^er end of the spindle

to be rotated thereby, tlie top wall of the
cabinet having an opening therein, the up- 95
per surface of the disk holder in its op-
erative position being flush with the upper
surface of said wall, a hinged cover for
the cabinet provided with a central opening
having an enlarged upper end fonning an loo
annular recess, a plate arranged in said re-
cess and secured to the cover, said plate
having a threaded opening coinciding with
the bore of said threaded boss, and a screw
threaded pin to be engaged in said threaded io5
opening and the threaded boss to connect
the holder to said hinged cover whereby
the holder and disk are elevated when the
cover is raised.

6. A holder for sound reproducing disks no
comprising a plate having a circumferen-
tial flange and an arcuate inwardly extend-
ing lateral flange formed on said circuni-
ferential flange, the disk being adapted for
engagement at its edge between said lateral 115
flange and the body of the plate, and a
holding element mounted upon the circum-
ential flange at a point diametrically oppo-
site said lateral flange to engage over

the edge of the disk and retain the same in 120
the holder.

7. In sound reproducing machines, the
combination with a cabinet to receive the
reproducing mechanism and a hinged cover
for said cabinet, of means for securing a 125
record in operative position to the luider
side of said cover for movement therewith
from its operative to an inoperative po-
sition.

8. In sound reproducing machines, the 130

1,069,784

combined with a cabinet to receive the
reproducing mechanism and a hinged coA-er
for said cabinet, of a record hokler and
means for detachably connecting said
5 holder to the coA^er whereby the holder is
moved out of its operative position when
the cover is raised.

9. In sound reproducing machines, the
combination with a cabinet to receive the

10 reproducing mechanism and a hinged cover
for said cabinet, of a holder for disk rec-
ords, and means for detachably connecting
said holder to the under side of the cover
Avhen the latter is in closed position Avhere-

15 by the holder is moved to an inoperatiA^e
IDOsition when the cover is raised.

10. In sound reproducing machines, the
combination Avith a cabinet to receive the
reproducing mechanism and a hinged cover

20 therefor, said cover being provided with a
central opening, of a disk record holder
l^rovided Avith a boss for disposal in the
ojoening of said cover, and means removably
secured to said boss to retain the holder on

25 the cover for movement thereAvith.

11. The combination with a cabinet pro-
A'ided with an opening in one Avail, and
sound reproducing mechanism permanently
arranged Avholly within said cabinet includ-

30 ing a moA'able sound box provided with a
stylus, of a record mounted for movement
into and out of the opening in the cabinet
wall Avithout disturbing the position of the
stylus carried by the sound box.

12. The combination with a cabinet, of
sound reproducing means arranged Avithin
said cabinet including a movable sound
box provided with a stylus, a record disk
removably mounted in the top wall of the

■*0 cabinet above the sound box when said disk
is in its operatiA^e position, and means op-
erable from the exterior of the cabinet to

35

45

50

60

engage or disengage the stylus carried by
the sound box with the surface of the rec-
ord disk.

13. The combination with a cabinet hav-
ing a hinged cover, of sound reproducing
means arranged within the cabinet and in-
cluding a movable sound box provided with
a stylus, n^eans for detachably connecting
a record disk upon the under side of the
cover for moA^ement with said cover into
or out of operative position, and means
manually operable from the exterior of the
cabinet to engage or disengage the stylus g^
on the sound box with the surface of the
record disk.

14. In sound reproducing machines, the
combination with a cabinet having an open-
ing in its top Avail and reproducing mecha-
nism including a stylus arranged within
said cabinet, of a cover for the opening in
the cabinet wall, and means for mounting
a record upon said cover Avhereby the same
may be moved Avith the cover into or out 55
of operatiA^e relation to the stylus of the
reproducing mechanism.

15. In sound reproducing machines, the
combination with a cabinet having an open-
ing in its top Avail and reproducing mecha- 70
nism including a sound box provided with

a stylus, of a record mounted in the open-
ing of the cabinet wall when in playing po-
sition, the stylus of the sound box engaging
the under surface of said record, and means 75
mounted upon the cabinet to moA'e said
record out of engagement with the stylus.

In testimony Avhereof I hereunto affix my
signature in the presence of two witnesses;

WILLIAM J. HODGES.

Witnesses :

M. C. Lyddane,

Geo. S. Livingston.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

Washington, D. C,"

1,070,959.

C. L. HIBBARD.

TALKING MACHINE.

APPLICATION PILED MATS, 1913.

Patented Aug. 19, 1913.

j^i^.^.

6 S

^\\^j<.\\\\\\v\\\\\\v\\\\\v\\\y^^^

ZEnxjo.^.

COLUMBIA PLANOflRAPH CO., WASHINGTON. D. C.

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

CHARLES L. HIBBAKD, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA.
TALKING-MACHINE.

1,0T0,959.

• Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Avig. 19, 1913.

Application filed May 3, 1913. Serial No. 765,221.

To all whom, it mdy concern:

Be it known that I, Chakles L. Hibbard,
a citizen of the United States of America,
residing at Phihidelphia, in the county of
5 Phihidelphia and State of Pennsylvania,
have invented certain new and useful Im-
provements in Talking-Machines, of which
the following is a .specification.
My invention relates to talking machines

10 of the class termed "' hornless "' but which, as
a jnatter of fact, have a horn or sound-am-
])lifier inclosed with the machine in a suit-
able cabinet or casing. Differing from the
so-called " hornless " type in construction

15 and arrangement, the cabinet or casing in
my present machine is utilized as a sound-
amplifier and is intended to serve no other
jjurpose, the reproducing mechanism being
mounted exteriorly thereof but in such re-

20 iation as to cooperate therewith. This ar-
rangement of elements enables me to give
the cabinet or casing the form best adapted
to serve as an amplifier of the reproduced
sound and permits a machine to be produced

25 having good lines, a graceful appearance
and which occupies comparatively small
space and i.s highly efficient in reproducing
sound and imparting the required amplified
effect to render it clearly audible and pleas-

30 ing to the ear. In the present machine, no
attempt is made to obtain a " concealed
horn " effect but, on the contrary, the ampli-
fier is in full view and accessible for pur-
poses of examination, repair, cleaning, etc.

35 A preferred form of machine embod^dng
my invention is illustrated in the accom-
panying drawing. I wish it understood,
however, that I do not limit myself to the
same, as various changes may be made there-
to in or other forms employed without depart-
ing from the spirit and scope of the present
invention.

In the drawings — Figure 1 is a vertical
longitudinal section, and Fig. 2 is a plan

45 view, showing the sound amplifying passage
by dotted lines.

Referring now to the drawings, 1 repre-
sents a rotatable record support in the form
of a turn-table carried by a shaft 2 which

^0 is driven by a motor, indicated diagram-
matically at 3, and 4 is a disk record on the
table. Cooperating with the record 4 there
is a sound-box 5, suitably mounted to have
the necessary freedom of movement to adapt

^5 itself to inequalities of the record and track
in the groove thereof.

The particular form of sound reproducing
mechanism above described forms no part of
the present invention, being well known in
the art and here employed for purposes of 30
illustration only.

As shown, the reproducing mechanism is
arranged exteriorly of a casing or cabinet
G, and mounted on a front bracket or exten-
sion 7 thereof. §5

As above stated, the casing or cabinet is
intended to be utilized as a sound-amplifier
and to serve no other purpose, being shaped
or divided interiorly to provide a continuous
and gradually enlarging back and forth pas- 70
sage 8, leading from the sound-box rear-
wardly throughout the entire length of the
casing and returning and terminating at the
front thereof for the deli^'ery of amplified
sound either or both above and below the 75;
turn-table, as indicated by arrows.

While I have shown a straight back and
forth sound-amplifying passage leading
from the front to the rear of the casing and
returning to the front thereof for the de- 80'>
livery of sound, it will be understood that
I do not limit myself to the same, as it may
be modified in various ways if desired by
introducing bends, turns, curved sections or
causing the sound to travel back and forth 85>
a number of times before delivery, as will
be apparent.

The extreme simplicity and inexpensive-
ness of construction of this machine, its com-
pact form, graceful and pleasing appear- 90'
aiice, the convenience with which it may be
examined, repaired, operated, etc., and its
high efficiency in reproducing and amplify-
ing sound, give it important advantages
over many machines now on the market and 95
in use.

As the operation will be apparent from
the foregoing, further description of the
same will not be given.

Having, therefore, described my inven- 100
tion, I claim :

1. In a talking machine, a casing, sound
reproducing means located exteriorly of and
supported by the casing, means within the
casing dividing the interior thereof into a 105
back and forth sound amplifying passage
providing a plurality of exit portions, and

a tone-arm communicating with said pas-
sage, operatively connected to said repro-
ducing means, the inlet portion of said pas- HO
sage being intermediate said outlet portions.

2. In a talking machine, a casing, sound

1,070,959

reproducing means located exteriorly of and
supported b.y the casing, means within the
casing dividing the interior thereof into a
back and forth sound amplifying passage
5 providing a plurality of exit portions, and
a tone arm operatively connecting said pas-
sage with said sound reproducing means,
the inlet portion of said passage being in-
termediate said outlet portions and one of
10 said outlet portions extending beneath said
reproducing means.

3. In a talking machine, a casing, exte-
riorly located sound reproducing means sup-
ported by the casing, a back and forth sound

amplifying passage formed interiorly of the
casing comprising an inner section extend-
ing toward the rear of the machine, a con-
tinuation of said section formed as reversely
extending outer sections terminating at the
forward end of the casing on either side of
the reproducing means, and a tone-arm op-
eratively connecting the reproducing means
with the inner rearwardly extending sec-
tion of the sound amplifying passage.

CHARLES L. HIBBARD.
Witnesses :

Feed W. Hagee,

Andeew Setuee.

15

20

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

Washington, D. C."

J. C. EN&LISH.

TALKING MACHINE.
APPLIOATIOH riLED FEB, 20, 1911.

1,071,033.

Patented Aug. 26, 1913

3 SHEETS-SHEET 1.

^G^

INVENTOR

WITNESSES

ay

/(/m^

ATTORNEY

COLUMBIA PLANOORAPH CO., WASHINGTON, D. C.

J. 0. ENGLISH.

TALKING MACHINE.
APPLIOATION PILED FEB. 20, 1911.

Patented Aug. 26, 1913.

3 SHEETS-SHEET 2.

WITNESSES

BY

INVENTOR

John C.£ji^U^.

ATTORNEY

COLUMBIA, Pl,Ar^fMlAPH CO., WASHINOTON, D. C.

1,071,033.

J. C, ENGLISH.

TALKING MACHINE.
APPLIOATIOH PILED rEB.20, 1911.

Patented Aug. 26, 1913.

3 SHEETS-SHEET 3.

'^G-

Jii^.^.

\^j

■^s

J^.^.^.

WITNESSES

(5i?

&0

INVENTOR

BY

ATTORNEY

COLUMBIA PLANOGRAPH CO., WASHINQTON, U. C.

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

JOHN C. ENGLISH, OF CAMDEN, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR TO VICTOR TALKING MACHINE
COMPANY, A CORPORATION OE NEW JERSEY.

TALKING-MACHINE.

1,071,033.

Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Aug. 36, 1913.

Application filed February 20, 1911. Serial No. 609,589.

To all tohom it may concern:

Be it known that I, John C. English, a
citizen of the United States, and a resident
of Camden, county of Camden, and State of
6 New Jersey, have invented certain new and
useful Imi^rovements in Talkin<i-Machines,
of which the followinfj is a specification.

The main objects of tlais invention are to
provide a talkinjj machine having a rela-

10 lively long: and larsre sound amplifier and a
com)5aratively Ions: tubular sound conveyer
interposed between the major portion of the
sound amplifier and the sound reproducino-
means; to provide an inclosed talkin": ma-

15 chine havins; an uprifrht vertically oblonj?
casino:, a relatively long and large amplifier
convenientlv arranged to deliver sounds
from the upper front portion of the casing,
and to permit a relatively large amount of

20 space to be reserved in the casing for the
storage of sound records; and to provide
other improvements as will appear herein-
after.
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1

25 is a fragmentary front elevation of a talk-
ing machine constructed in accordance with
this invention; Fig. 2 a fragmentary side
elevation of the same partly in vertical sec-
tion; Fig. 3 a top plan view of a portion

30 of the same and Fig. 4 a fragmentary ver-
tical section of a modified foi-m of a portion
of this invention.

Keferring to the drawings, one embodi-
ment of this invention comprises an upright

35 vertically oblong cabinet 1, consisting of a
main or body portion 2, and a superimposed
smaller portion 3. The main portion of the
cabinet comprises a vertical exterior front
wall 10, two parallel vertical exterior side

■^O walls 11 and 12, and a vertical back wall 13.
These vertical exterior walls are connected
at their lower ends by a horizontal exterior
wall 14, forming the bottom of the cabinet,
and the upi:)er end of these vertical walls

■^5 are connected b}' a horizontal wall 15 form-
ing the top of the body of the cabinet.
Suitable standards 16 depend from the lower
end of the cabinet for supporting the same.
The portion 3 of the cabinet superimposed

^^ upon the top wall 15 comprises the usual

vertical walls 17 forming a rectangular in-

closure, and the usual hollow cover 18 hinged

thereto.

In the space above the horizontal top wall

^^ 15 and the cover 18, is inclosed the usual

turn-table 25, which is mounted as usual
upon a vertical spindle 26 extending down-
Avardly through the top wall 15 and actuated
b_y the usual mechanism 27 depending down-
wardly within the body of the cabinet from 60
the top wall. The central portion of the top
Avail 15, which carries the turn-table and ac-
tuating mechanism, is preferably divided
from the remainder of the top wall and is
removable therefrom, together with the 65
turn-table and actuating mechanism, the re-
movable portion being supported on cleats
28 secured to the underside of the outer por-
tion of the top wall.

Arranged above the turn-table 25 and in 70
the space beneath the cover 18 is the usual
or any suitable sound box 30 which coop-
erates with the turn-table. This sound box
is preferably pivotally connected to the free
end of a hollow tone arm 35 with which it 75
communicates and the other end of the tone
arm is turned downwardly and is pivotally
sup])orted by and upon the upper end of a
vertical tubular sound conveyer 36, with
which it communicates, the tone arm being 80
restrained to swing about a fixed vertical
axis by any suitable means, such, for in-
stance, as a pivot 37 carried by a bracket 38
rigid with the tubular conveyer 36.

The tubular sound conveyer 36 extends 85
downwardly in a vertical direction through
an aperture 40 through the top wall 15 in
the left hand rear corner thereof, and is ter-
minally secured at its lower end to the inlet
end of a hollow substantially U - shaped 90
metal bracket 41 with which it cormnuni- --^
cates.

The U-shaped bracket 41 extends obliquely
across the bottom wall 14 of the cabinet from
the lower end of the sound conveyer 36, ter- 95
minating at its forward or outlet end mid-
way between the side walls of the cabinet
comparatively close to the front wall of the
cabinet, and is rigidly secured to the upper
surface of the bottom wall by bolts 42, or 100
otherwise. Secured to the front or outlet
end of the bracket 41 and communicating
therewith, is the lower end of an upwardly
flaring elongated hollow metal socket 50
communicating therewith, and the upper 105
end of which supports a plurality of up-
wardly diverging sounding boards 51 which
are secured between two upwardly diverg-
ing sounding boards 52 and forming there-
with the major portion of a sound amplifier, 110

1,071,033

the neck of which is formed by the socket 50.
This sound amplifier preferably terminates
at a suitable distance below the top wall 15
of the cabinet in a mouth or delivery end,
5 the end edges of Avhich are preferably in-
clined from its front portion rearwardly and
upwardly as at 53.

Immediately above the front portion of
the delivery end of the amplifier, the front

10 of the casino- is ]3rovided Avith an aperture
55 extending- substantially the full Avidth of
the casing and from the horizontal plane
substantially level Avith the front edge of the
delivery encl of the amplifier to the under-

15 surface of the top wall 15 of the cabinet and
forming an outlet for sound Avaves trans-
mitted from the amplifier. This opening is
provided Avith the usual doors 5C, hinged as
at 57 to open outwardly, or with other suit-

20 able means to form a closure.

For deflecting sound waA^es through the
outlet 55 in the front of the casing after
issuing from the amplifier, an inclined de-
flecting wall or plate 58 may be arranged

25 Avithin the cabinet above the delivery end
of the amplifier and beneath the top Avail
15. The upper edge of this inclined Avail
contacts with and is secured to the under-
surface of the top Avail 15 and the end edges

30 of this plate contact with and are secured
to the inner surfaces of the opposite side
Avails 11 and 12 respectively. This deflect-
ing wall 58 may be either flat as shown in
Fig. 2 and inclined substantially at an an-

35 gle of 45°, or may have a curved concave
inner surface as shown at 59 in Fig. 4.

To provide a receptacle for the storage
of records, the cabinet 1 is. diAaded into com-
partments by a A^ertical partition 60 ar-

40 ranged parallel to the front wall and im-
mediately in the rear of the major portion
51, 52, of the amplifier, but spaced there-
from ; a A'^ertical partition 61, parallel to the
side walls of the cabinet and extending

45 from the first mentioned A^ertical partition
to the rear wall of the cabinet ; a horizontal
partition 62 arranged beneath the actuating
mechanism 27 and connecting the upper
edges of the A'^ertical iDartitions 60 and 61

50 Avith the back Avail 13 and side wall 12 and
forming the upper end of the receptacle
for records; a horizontal partition 63 ar-
ranged immediately aboA^e the hollow
bracket 41 at the lower end of the cabinet

55 and connecting the lower edges of the ver-
tical partitions 60 and 61, and the back wall
13, and side wall 12 of the cabinet and
forming the bottom of the receptacle for rec-
ords. A horizontal partition 64 may be ar-

60 ranged midway between the horizontal par-
titions 62 and 63 to divide the receptacle for
records into tAvo compartments, and other
partitions may be used if desired to form
further compartments in the receptacle.

65 The side 12 of the cabinet is jDrovided Avith

an opening 65 extending from the back
Avail 13 to the opposite vertical partition 60
and from the top horizontal partition 62
to the bottom hoi'izontal partition 63.
Doors 66, hinged as at 67 to open outwardly, „_
may be used to form a closure for this open-
ing 65.

To increase the efficiency of the amplifier
two upAvardly diverging boards or parti-
tions 70 are arranged uj^on opposite sides „g
respectively of the major portion of the am-
plifier. These diA^erging partitions extend
from the front Avail of the cabinet to the
vei-tical partition 60 parallel thereto, and
diverge from the lower portion of this A^er- gQ
tical partition 60 adjacent to the lower por-
tion of the socket 50 of the amplifier to the
side walls 11 and 12 respectiA'ely, terminat-
ing preferably slightly below the plane of
the mouth of the amplifier. The loAver edge gg
of the inclined deflecting plate 58 above the
mouth of the amplifier is preferably in con-
tact with and secured to the upper portion
of the front surface of the A'^ertical partition
60 immediately in the rear of the major qq
portion of the amplifier. These diverging
partitions 70 act to deflect soimd waves
transmitted from the sides of the amplifier
toAvard the outlet 55 through the front Avail
of the cabinet. By this construction, the ^5
major portion or delivery end of the sound
amplifier communicates with the sound re-
producer 30 through the usual tone arm 35
and through a relatively long tubular sound
conveyer 36 Avhich is supported only adja- jqc
cent its ends, and which is free from con-
tact with the cabinet, and this arrangement
is thought to have certain acoustical advan-
tages.

It is obvious that this invention is not io5
limited to the particular construction shoAvn
and described, but may be embodied in other
forms Avithout departing from the spirit of
this invention, or the scope of the appended
claims. no

Having thus fully described this inven-
tion, I claim and desire to protect by Letters
Patent of the United States : _

1. A talking machine, comprising a cabi-
net provided Avith an outlet, a holloAV sound 115
amplifier in said cabinet and having a de-
livery end opening toward said outlet, sound
reproducing means communicating Avith said
amplifier, and Avails inclosed within said
cabinet and spaced \ipon opposite sides of 120
said amplifier i-espectively, said walls di-
A'erging toward said outlet and forming a
portion of a compartment surrounding said
amplifier and communicating with said
sound reproducing means only through said 125
amplifier.

2. A talking machine, comprising a cabi-
net proAdded Avith an outlet, sound repro-
ducing means carried by said cabinet, a hol-
low longitudinally tapering sound amplifier 130

1,071,033

ll

10

15

20

25

30

35

opening at its larger end toward said outlet,
said sound reproducing means communicat-
ing with said amplifier, and walls rigid with
and inclosed within said cabinet, and spaced
upon opposite sides of said amplifier respec-
tively, said walls diverging toward said out-
let and forming a portion of a compartment
surroimding said amplifier and communicat-
ing with said sound reproducing means onl^
through said amplifier.

3. A talking machine, comprising a cabi-
net having a top wall and a bottom wall,
sound reproducing means arranged above
said top wall, a hollow bracket adjacent said
bottom wall and rigidly secured thereto and
provided with an inlet and an outlet, an up-
wardly extending tubular sound conveyer
communicating at one end wath said sound
reproducing means and at its other end with
said bracket through said inlet, and sound
amplifying means extending upwardly from
said bracket and communicating therewith
through said outlet.

4. In a talking machine, the combination
with a cabinet having an upright exterior
Avail provided with an outlet, of sound am-
plifying means having an upwardly open-
ing delivery end arranged in said cabinet
adjacent said outlet, the end edges of said
delivery end being inclined inwardly and
upwardly from adjacent said upright wall,
sound deflecting means arranged above said
deliA'ery end and inclined upwardly and to-
Avard said wall to deflect sound waves de-
livered by said amplifier through said out-

let, and sound reproducing means arranged
aboA^e said sound deflecting means and com-
municating Avith said amplifying means.

5. A talking machine comprising a verti-
cally elongated cabinet, sound reproducing 40
means arranged adjacent the upper end of
said cabinet, a holloAV bracket rigidly se-
cured in position adjacent the lower end of
said cabinet, means of communication be-
tween said sound reproducing means and
said bracket, hollow sound amplifying
means secured to and communicating with
said bracket and extending upwardly there-
from and opening through an outlet pro-
A-ided therefor adjacent the upper end of
said cabinet.

6. A talking machine, comprising a cabi-
net, having ah outlet in an external wall
thereof, sound reproducing means cai'ried
by said cabinet above said outlet, and a
sound conduit extending from said repro-
ducing means doAVUAvardly below said out-
let and into close proximity to the lower end
of said cabinet, and then upAvardly toward
said outlet and arranged to deliver sounds
through said outlet, the lower portion of
said conduit being rigidly secured to an ad-
jacent loAver portion of said cabinet.

In witness whereof, I have hereunto set
mv hand this 3rd day of February, A. D. ^5
1911.

JOHN C. ENGLISH.
Witnesses :

Frank B. Middleton, Jr.,
Charles F, Willard.

45

50

55

60

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

Washington, D. C."

E. E. JOHNSON.

SOUND CONVEYIN& TOBE FOR TALKING MACHINES.

APPLICATION FILED DEO. 24, 1903.

1,071,055.

Patented Aug. 26, 1913.

mrNESSES:

Y\o^

r

^^ \\

INVENTOR

BY

ATTORNEY.

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICK

BLDRIDGE R. JOHNSON, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR TO VICTOR
TALKING MACHINE COMPANY, A CORPORATION OF NEW JERSEY.

SOUND-CONVEYING TUBE FOR TALKING-MACHINES.

1,0T1,055.

Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Aug. 36, 1913.

Application filed December 24, 1903. Serial No. 186,481.

To all whom it may concern :

Be it known that I, Eldridge R. Johnson,
a citizen of ihe United States, and a resident
of the city of Philadelphia, State of Penn-
5 sylvania liave invented certain new and
useful Improvements in Sound-Conveying
Tubes for Talking-Machines, of which the
following is a specification.

The main objects of this invention are to

10 provide in a talking machine simple arid
efficient means for supporting a sound box
and for conveying sound waves therefi'om ;
and to provide other improvements, as will
appear hereinafter.

15 In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1
is a side elevation of a talking machine con-
structed in accordance with this invention;
Fig. 2 a fragmentary top plan view partly
in section of a portion of the same; and Fig.

20 3 an enlarged fragmentary rear end eleva-
tion of a portion of the same.

'Referring to the drawings, one embodi-
ment of this invention comprises the usual
casing or cabinet 1, containing the usual

25 talking machine motor. Mounted upon the
casing 1 is the usual turn-table 2, which is
actuated b}'^ the motor in the casing, and over
which is mounted a tubular radial sound box
arm or member 4, to one end of which is

30 attached the usual sound box 5 communicat-
ing therewith.

The outer end 6 of the sound box arm 4 is
curved or bent horizontally substantially at
right angles to the main portion of the arm

35 and is connected with the sound box so as
to carry the diaphragm thereof in a vertical
plane substantially parallel with the longi-
tudinal axis of the main portion of the arm
4. The inner end 7 of the arm 4 is turned

40 or curved upwardly or away from and sub-
stantially at right angles to the main por-
tion of the arm and telescopes tightly but
removably in the enlarged end 9 of a curved
tubular elbow or member 8, the inner diame-

45 ter of the enlarged end of the elbow being
substantially the same as the outer diameter
of the end 7 of the sound box tube tele-
scoping therein.

For supporting the sound box arm upon

50 horizontal and vertical axes, the enlarged
portion 9 of the tubular elbow 8 is provided
with horizontal trunnions 10, which enter
a U-shaped yoke 11, which is pivoted on a
vertical axis on a fixed bracket 12, by means

of a stud or pintle 13 which enters a suitable 55
hollow or recess in the fixed bracket 12.

The usual flexible ear tube 14, provided
with the usual ear pieces, may be connected
to the upper end of the tubular elbow 8, but
an amplifying horn might be substituted for 60
this ear tube.

One advantage of the construction above
described is that when used in combination
with the flexible ear tube, the point of at-
tachment of the ear tube is in such a posi- 65
tion that in the ordinary operation of the
machine any tension upon the ear tube will
be substantially in a line through the hori-
zontal and vertical pivots supporting the
sound box tube, thus permitting the user of 70
the machine to move about freely without
interfering with the travel of the sound box,
or bringing any pressure to bear upon the
sound box, that would lift the sound box
from the record or cause a perceptible 75
change in the character of the reproduction.
On account of this advantage this construc-
tion is particularly adapted for use in con-
nection with the study of foreign languages
f rom soimd records, as it enables the user to 80
rernain in communication with the machine
while moving about to consult text books
or references, without interfering with the
operation of the machine.

This invention may be applied either to 85
the disk form or to the cylindrical form of
talking machine. Furthermore, although
only one form has been shown in which this
invention may be embodied, various changes
might be made in the construction set forth, 90
without departing from the spirit of thi?
invention or the scope of the appended
claims.

Having thus fully described my inven-
tion what I claim and desire to protect by 95
Letters Patent of the United States is :

1. In a talking machine, a sound box, a
sound box tube connected therewith having
an upwardly turned portion, a tubular mem-
ber telescoping with said portion and form- 100
ing an integral sound conduit, trunnions dis-
posed substantially at the joint between said
sound box tube and said tubular member,
pivoted means for supporting said trun-
nions, and a sound conveying device com- 105
municating with said tubular member, said
sound box tube being free to swing about
said trunnions as an axis.

2

1,071,055

2. In a talking machine, a soimd box, a
tubular sound box arm or member connected
therewith having an upwardly turned por-
tion, a second tubular member telescoping

5 with said portion and forming an integTal
sound conduit, one of said members being
enlarged to receive the other of said mem-
bers, trunnions carried by said enlarged
member, pivoted means for supporting said
10 trunnions, and a sound conveying device
cfmnected to said second tubular member
said sound box arm being free to swing
about said trunnions as an axis.

3. In a talking machine, a sound box, a
15 tubular sound box arm or member connected

therewith having an upw'ardljr turned por-
tion, a second tubular member telescoping
with said portion, one of said members be-
ing enlarged to receive the other of said

20 members, trunnions carried by said enlarged
member, vertically pivoted means for sup-
porting said trunnions, and a flexible tube
connected wnth said second tubular member,
said sound box arm and said tubular tele-

25 scoping member being free to swing about
said trunnions as an axis.

4. In a sound recording or reproducing
machine, a sound conveying means compris-
ing a hollow^ arm bent upwardly at its

30 inner end and carrying a sound box at its
outer end, and a hollow elbow having a ver-
tical portion telescoping and frictionally
engaging said upwardly bent portion of the
hollow arm, the said telescopic and bent

35 portions being mounted upon a fixed part of
the machine to swing horizontally and ver-
tically.

5. In a sound recording or reproducing
machine, a sound conveying tube compris-

40 ing a holloAV arm bent upwardly at its in-
ner end and carrying a sound box at its
outer end, and a hollow elbow mounted to
swing horizontally and vertically upon a
fixed part of the machine, the said upwardly

45 bent portion of the hollow arm being tele-
scopic with and frictionally engaged with
said elbow.

6. In a talking machine, the combination
with a sound box, of a tubular sound box

50 arm having its outer end connected there-
with and having its inner end turned at an
angle to the main portion of said arm, and
a tubular elbow connected to and communi-
cating with said inner end said arm and

55 said elbow being mounted to swing on hori-
zontal and vertical axes.

7. In a talking machine, the combination
with a sound box, of a tubular sound box
arm having its outer end connected there-

60 with and having its inner end turned at
an angle to the main nortion of said arm,
and a tubular elbow telescoping with said
inner end said arm and said elbow being
mounted to swing on horizontal and ver-

65 tical axes.

8. In a talking machine, the combination
with a sound box, of a tubular sound box
arm having its outer end connected there-
with and having its inner end' turned at an
anp'le to the main portion of said arm, and y-
a tubular elbow connected to and support- -
ing said arm by frictional engagement.

9. In a talking machine, the combination
with a soimd box, of a tubular sound box arm
having its outer end connected thereto and „g ■
its inner end turned at an angle to the main ■
portion of said arm, and a tubular elbow rig-
idly connected to and communicating with
said inner end, said elbow being mounted

to oscillate on transverse intersecting axes, oq

10. In a talking machine, the combination
with a sound box, of a tubular sound box arm
having its outer end connected thereto and
its inner end turned at an angle to the main
portion of said arm, and a tubular elbow gg
rigidly but detachably connected to and.
communicating with said inner end.

11. In a talking machine, the combination
with a sound box, of a tubular sound box
arm having its outer end connected thereto, qq
and its inner end turned at an angle to the
main portion of the arm, a tubular elbow
detachably connected to and supporting said
arm by frictional engagement and means
mounted to swing upon a fixed axis for sup- gj
porting said elbow.

.12. In a talking machine, the combination
wdth a sound box, of a tubular sound box
arm having its outer end connected thereto,
and its inner end turned at an angle to the joo
main portion of the arm, a tubular elbow
detachably connected by frictional engage-
ment to and supporting said arm, and means
mounted upon a fixed axis for supporting
said elbow, said elbow being free to oscil- ^qs
late with respect to said means.

13. In a sound reproducing machine, a
support, a yoke rotatably mounted in said
supi)ort, a sound conducting arm mounted

at one end in said yoke to swing vertically, no
and means rigidly connected with said arm
for carrying the sound away from said sup-
port.

14. In a sound reproducing machine, a
support, a yoke rotatably mounted on said 115
support, means for conducting sound to
said support, said means being mounted in
said yoke to swing vertically, and means
firmly connected with said first mentioned
means for carrying the soimd away from 120
said support.

15. In a sound reproducing machine, a
support, a yoke rotatably mounted on said
suppoi-t, means for conducting sound to said
support, and means for conveying sound 125
away from said support, said means being
mounted in said yoke to swing vertically and
said two means being firmly connected to-
gether.

16. In a sound reproducing machine, a 130

1,071,055

support, a yoke rotatably mounted in said
support, means for conducting sound toward
said support and means for conveying sound
away from said support, said last men-
5 tioned means being mounted in said yoke
to swing vertical!}^, and said first mentioned
means being telescoped into said last men-
tioned means and frictionally held in the
same.

10 17. In a sound reproducing machine, a
sound conveyer comprising two substan-
tially parallel telescopic sections, each hav-
ing a portion turned toward the other of
said sections, said portions being firmly

15 joined in telescopic relation, a support for
said sound conveyer, and means providing
an axis of oscillation for said conveyer at
the telescopic junction thus formed.

18. In a sound reproducing machine, a
20 support, a sound conveying arm comprising

a vertical portion at said support, a portion
for conducting sound toward said support
and a portion telescoped wath said A^ertical
portion and frictionally engaged therewith
25 for conA'eying sound away from said sup-
port, and means for mounting said arm on

ML said support to swing horizontally and ver-

™ tically.

19. In a sound reproducing machine, a
30 support, a sound conducting arm mounted

thereon to swing vertically and horizontally,
said arm consisting of a portion extending
upwardly and then horizontally from said
support and a second portion extending
35 downwardly and then horizontally from
said support, said portions being firmly con-
nected wdth each other.

20. In a sound reproducing machine, a
support, a sound conducting arm mounted

40 thereon to swing vertically and horizontally.

said arm consisting of a portion extending
upwardly and then horizontally from said
support and a second portion extending
downwardly and then horizontally from
said support and said portions being tele- 45
scoped and frictionally engaged with each
other.

21. In a sound repi'oducing machine, the
combination with a support, of a sound con-
duit pivoted intermediate of its length and 50
comprising relatively movable portions
frictionally connected to form an integi-al
substantially rigid structure arranged to
rock as a whole on said pivot.

22. In a sound reproducing machine, the 55
combination with a support, of a sound con-
duit pivoted intermediate of its length and
comprising relatively adjustable portions
frictionally connected to form an integral
substantially rigid structure and arranged 60
to be relatively shifted into dilfferent inter-
secting planes, and arranged to rock as a
whole on said pivot independently of their
respective positions.

23. In a sound reproducing machine, a 65
sound conveyer comprising horizontally
disposed sections, each having a portion op-
positely turned substantially normal there-
to and firmly joined in telescopic relation, a
support for said sound conveyer, and means 70
providing an axis of oscillation for said
conveyer at the telescoped junction thus
formed.

In witness whereof, I have hereunto set
my hand this 21st day of December, 1903.

ELDEIDGE R. JOHNSON.

Witnesses :

Fredk. C. Eberhardt,
Chas. K. Bennett.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

Washington, D. C."

T. H. MACDONALD.

CABINETED GEAPHOPHONE.

APPLIOATIOH FILED AUft. 26, 19X0.

1,071,067.

Patented Aug. 26, 1913.

3 8H££IS-BH££T 1.

T. H. MACDONALD.

OABINETED GEAPHOPHONE.
APPLICATION FILED AUG. 26, 1910.

1,071,067.

Patented Aug. 26, 1913.

3 SHEETS-SHEET 2.

COLUMBIA PLANOGRAPH CO.,

T. H. MACDONALD.

OABINETED GEAPHOPHONE.

APPLICATION PILED AUG. 25, 1910.

1,071,067.

Patented Aug. 26, 1913.

3 SE££TS-SE££T 3.

Mff.^

*3Wit-

44-e&&eo :

SjJUuut. S A/e^^ex^^

COLUMBIA PLANOORAPH CO., WASHINOTON. D. C.

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

THOMAS H. MACDONALD, OF BRIDGEPORT. CONNECTICUT, ASSIGNOR TO AMERICAN
GRAPHOPHONE COMPANY, OF BRIDGEPORT, CONNECTICUT, A CORPORATION OF
WEST VIRGINIA.

CABINETED GRAPHOPHONE.

1,071,067.

Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Aug. 36, 1913.

Application filed August 25, 1910. Serial No. 578.916.

To all whom it may concern:

Be it known that I, Thomas H. IMacdon-
ALD, a citizen of the United States of
America, and a resident of Bridgeport, Con-
5 necticut. have invented a new and useful
Improvement in Cabineted Graphophones,
which invention is fully set forth in the fol-
lowing specification.
My invention relates to talking-machines,

10 and is especially adapted to the type em-
ploying disk sound-records.

Among the objects of the invention is the
production of a combined graphophone and
table or desk (or " cabineted grapho-

15 phone ") , so constructed and arranged that
the graphophone may be utilized without in-
terfering with the use of the device as a
table, and vice versa, while the table" serves
as a casing or cabinet to support and inclose

20 the graphophone.

Other objects of my invention are to sim-
plify the construction and arrangement of
the parts; to provide a dust-proof cabinet
which is neat and attractive in appearance,

25 and at the same time improves the quality
of the audible reproduction from the
graphophone ; and to render the parts of the
graphophone readily accessible when de-
sired, while normally concealing the same.

30 One form of my invention comprises the
mounting of the graphophone upon a mov-
able support, whereby it may be shifted into
exposed position or restored to concealment
as desired.

35 My invention further consists of the va-
rious features of construction and arrange-
ment, as hereinafter pointed out and
claimed.

The invention will be best understood by

40 reference to the annexed drawings that illus-
trate a preferred embodiment thereof.

In the drawings — Figure 1 is a plan view-
partly broken away, showing the cabineted
graphophone in its exposed position, the

45 dotted lines indicating its position when in-
closed within the cabinet ; Fig. 2 is a vertical
section of the same, taken through line
II — II of Fig. 1, showing the graphophone
inclosed within its cabinet, indicating its ex-

50 posed position by dotted lines ; and Fig. 3 is
an end elevation, viewed from the right of
Figs. 1 and 2.

In the drawings 1 is the flat top of a table
or cabinet, of any desired or suitable type

55 or style, having the usual corner posts or

timbers 2 which may be continued as legs if
desired. Secured to the posts are two side-
pieces or aprons 3 and 4, and the " floor " 5.
The floor 5 is shown as cut away at one end,
in substantially the sector of a circle, at 60
6 — 7 — 8, and the movable support for the
talking-machine is mounted to swing into
and out of the space thus provided, serving
both as the graphophone-support and also
as a door for closing that end of the cabinet. 65
But, instead of locating the graphophone to
swing in and out of one end of the cabinet,
it may be located in the side, or in one end
of the side. The principle of the invention
is to provide a construction which leaves the 70
top of the cabinet free for use as a table,
Avhile affording means for at will concealing
or exposing the graphophone.

A preferred form of movable support
comprises the sector-shaped horizontal shelf 75
9 and the vertical portion 10. the former cor-
responding to the cut-away space 6 — 7 — 8 of
floor 5, and the latter serving as a door to
close the end of the cabinet. This door 10
is hinged to the cabinet adjacent the apex G 80
of the cut-awaj^ portion referred to, and
.shelf 9 is rigidly secured and braced to it, so
that the shelf and door can swing freety
into and out of the end of the cabinet as a
single integral device. A convenient hing- 85
ing comprises two pintle-plates 11 and 12,
one secured at the upper end of the post 2
(adjacent the apex of the cut-away portion)
where it is concealed by the table top 1, and
the other secured beneath it, as to the same 90
post 2 or a timber secured thereto, the two
pintles being in vertical alinement; and
upon the adjacent end of the inner face of
door 10 is secured the vertically-disposed U-
shaped strip 13, whose horizontal ends pro- 95
vide seats for engaging the pintles 11 and
12. 14 indicates the handle of any con-
venient latch or fastening device for secur-
ing the door 10 in closed position, and for
opening the same. 100

The graphophone-motor is secured to the
under face of shelf 9. being concealed from
view by the apron 1.5 depending from the
circular edge of said shelf; and 16 is a
winding key or crank that may be inserted 105
through an opening in the door 10. The
usual turn-table 17, driven from said motor,
is located above shelf 9, in plain sight when
the door is swung outward. The hollow
sound-conveyer or tone-arm 18, having the 110

s

1,071,067

usual soiind-box (and stylus) at its outer
end, is mounted within the cabinet to swing
liorizontally across the turn-table; and pref-
erably it has the same vertical axis 11 — 12
5 as the movable support 9 — 10, so that it will
always have the same relation to the turn-
table, whether the latter is inclosed within
the cabinet or swung out therefrom. It is
shown as having a down-turned elbow jour-

10 naled in an annular plate 19 that constitutes
a stationary bearing which is supported in
any convenient manner, eithei' by the inner
end of the stationary sound-conveyer, or
preferably upon a ledge extending from the

iri side wall and corner post of the cabinet.
From this joint in annular plate 19 extends
the stationary soimd-conveyer or " horn "
20, shown as of thin Avcod or A'eneering ar-
ranged with substantially flat sides, and ex-

20 tending in a general horizontal direction to-
ward the far end of the cabinet or table,
where its mouth is shown as flush Avith an
opening in that end of the cabinet. This
opening may be closed partly or entirely, as

25 by two hinged doors 21 — 21.

Although in the preferred construction
the tone-arm is pivoted concentrically Avith
the motor-support, yet this is not essential;
because the stylus may make contact with

30 the surface of the disk sound-record, and
may travel across the zone of I'ecorcl-grooves
thereon, through an indefinite number of
paths. All that is essential is that the tone-
arm be so mounted that it can be fed by the

35 record-groove, in operative rehition thereto.
If desired the horn 20 might l)e of differ-
ent shape, and it might present its mouth iii
some other direction tiian that shoAvn. If
desired, the cubical boxings 22 maA' be em-

40 ployed, one beneath each end of the cabinet,
to conform to the usual library table; and
spaces in these parts may be cmjDloyed for
storing records etc. 23 denotes a A^ertical
Avail or partition in the horn-compartment;

45 and, if desired, this compartment may be

further inclosed by a vertical partition
shaped to conform to the contour of the cut-
aAvay portion, along the lines fi — 7 and 7 — 8.

If desired, a drop door 2-1: may be pro-
vided in the SAvinging door 10, being hinged 50
at 2.5 about the level of turn-table 17, and
having a fastening or catch 26. By this
construction access may be obtained to the
graphophone by merely swinging out this
little drop door, instead of SAvinging the en- 55
tire graphof)hone out from the compart-
ment ; Avhen this drop door is open the tone-
amn 18 can be SAvung out and a fresh needle
substituted, and a fresh sound-record can at
the same time be substituted upon turn-table 60
17. When the drop door is employed, the
graphophone need not have a movable sup-
port, since access can be obtained for oper-
ating the same through the opening of the
drop door, and access can be had to the 65
mechanism by merely opening the larger
door. But I prefer the construction in
Avhich the graphophone is mounted upon a
swinging shelf or support as shown.

Having thus described my invention, 1 70
claim :

In a talking machine mounting, the com-
bination of a rectangular-shaped boxing, a
segmental-shaped shelf pivotally mounted
in one corner of said boxing, a graphophone 75
mounted on said shelf, a tone-arm pivotally
mounted in axial alinement Avith the pivot
of said shelf, and a stationary horn within
said boxing Avith its small end lying be-
tween one side of the boxing and said shelf 80
and its large or flared end opening out
through the end of the boxing opposite said
shelf.

In testimony whereof I have signed this
specification in the presence of Iavo subscrib- 85
ing witnesses.

THOMAS H. MACDONALD.

Witnesses :

M. E. Thorpe,
C. W. Hedberg.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

Washington, D. C."

B. L. RINEHART.

SOUND BOX FOR TALKING MACHINES.

APPLICATION PILED DEO. 22, 1905.

1,071,089.

Patented Aug. 26, 1913.

*^^^.n^.

C^t^.2.

^l5-i

INVENTOR

^entlei/JL.I^insliai^P'

ATTORNEY.

COLUMBIA PLANOGRAPH CO., WASHINGTON, D. C.

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

BENTLEY L. RINEHART, OF CAMDEN, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR TO VICTOR TALKING
MACHINE COMPANY, A CORPORATION OF NEW JERSEY.

SOUND-BOX FOR TALKING-MACHINES.

1,071,089.

Specification of letters Patent. Patented Aug. 36, 1913.

Application filed December 22, 1905. Serial No. 292,919.

To all whom, it may concern:

Be it known that I, Bentley L. E.ine-
HART, a citizen of the United States, and a
resident of the city and county of Camden,
5 State of New Jersey, have invented certain
new and useful Improvements in Sound-
Boxes for Talking-Machines, of which the
following is a full, clear, and exact de-
scription.

10 My invention relates to certain improve-
ments in sound boxes for talking machines,
and particularly to the yielding support on
which the stylus bar is mounted.

The object of my invention is to provide

15 a sound box in which the quality and volume
of the tone of reproduction are rendered
clearer, more distinct and more natural, than
it has heretofore been possible to do.

A further object of my invention is to

20 provide a spring support for the stylus bar,
so disposed with I'espect to the diaphragm
and to the plane of oscillation of the stylus
that the quality of reproduction of sounds
is greatly improved.

25 A further object of my invention is to
provide a means for varying the tension to
which the spring support for the stylus bar
is subjected.

Briefly, my invention consists in mount-

3 0 ing the stylus bar upon a spring support,
the axis of which is disposed at right angles
to the plane of the diaphragm, and coinci-
dent with the plane of oscillation of the
stylus bar, said spring being mounted upon

35 the free ends of a bow provided with means
for varying the distance between the free
ends of said bow, and consequently the ten-
sion to which the spring is subjected.

In the accompanjdng drawings, forming

40 a part of this specification. Figure 1 is an
elevational view of a sound box provided
with my invention, the lower portion ol
said box being shown in section; Fig. 2 is
a plan view of the lower part of the sound

45 box, showing the sj^ring support mounted
thereon; Fig. 3 is a longitudinal section of
same; and Figs. 4 and 5 are enlarged views
of the details of my stylus bar and support
therefor.

50 The sound box 1 comprises a diaphragm
2 and a stylus bar 3, which passes through
an opening 3' in the under side of the sound
box casing, and, at its inner end, is attached

to the center of the diaphragm through jthe
connection 4. '55

To the inner side of the sound box with its
free ends in alinement with the opening 3'
is mounted the bow or U shaped spring 5,
carrying a block or support 6 by which said
bow is attached to the sound box by the 60
screw 7 passing through the said block and
into the casing. On the opposite side of the
opening 3' is a second block or support 8
carrying a threaded lug or projection 9 and
secured to the sound box casing by means of 65
screws 10 — 10.

The outer ends of the bow are provided
with transverse holes 11 — 11 adapted to be
engaged by the pointed ends of the spindle
12 arranged between the outer ends of said 70
bow. This spindle 12 is composed of two
members, the larger of which 13 is tubular
for the greater portion of its length and is
provided on the outside and inside thereof
with threads 13' and 13" respectively. The 75
other and smaller member 14 is provided
with external threads 14' and is adapted to
be secured within the larger member 13 in
the manner indicated in Fig. 4. The outer
ends of the members 13 — -14 are provided 80
with collars 15 — ^15 having spanner holes
15', by which the effective length of the
spindle 12 may be varied. The member 13
is screwed into the threaded lug 9 of the
block or support 8, while said member a jam 85
nut IG is provided to hold the block 8 firmly
in its position with respect to said member
13, and similarly upon the member 14 is an-
other lock nut 17, adapted to engage the end
of the member 13 to prevent any relative 9(>
movement of said members when they are in
their adjusted position.

The spring 18, upon which the stylus bar
3 is mounted, is composed of any suitable
material of any form in cross section. In 95
the form of my invention illustrated in the
drawing the spring 18 is of steel wire, and
is formed by passing the wire through an
opening or hole 19 in the stylus bar, and
then drawing the ends thereof again through 100
said opening in opposite directions to form
a loop on each side of the stylus bar, the
ends being secured to the stylus bar in any
suitable manner, as by wrapping or twist-
ing them about the stylus bar in the mannor 105
indicated at 20, and then soldering the same

£S

1,071,089

in such position. The ends of the bow 5
are adapted to be passed through the loops
of the spring, Avhich are retained in a pre-
determined position upon the bow by notches
g 21 near the ends thereof.

It will be seen from the above disclosure,
that when the tension of the spring wire
support 18 is varied by a simultaneous ad-
justment of the nuts 15 on the outer ends of

JO the spindle 13 — 14, the position of the axis
of the stylus bar will not be changed, and
that even when the tension of the said wire
spiking mounting is varied by turning one
of the nuts without turning the other, the

15 tension of the spring does not of itself tend
to move the stylus bar about its axis of oscil-
lation, except in so far as the lateral displace-
ment of the axis of oscillation causes a rela-
tively slight movement of turning of the

20 stylus bar about its other end ; that is to say,
the end of the stylus bar which is attached
to the diaphragm.

A sound box provided with my spring
support for the stylus bar may be assembled

25 in the following manner : — The bow 5 is
first screwed to the side of the sound box
by the screws 7 passing through the block
or support 6. The stylus bar is then insert-
ed through the hole 3 in the casing, and the

30 loops of the spring 18 passed over the ends
of the bow and into engagement with the
notches 21 provided thereon. The spindle
12 carrying the block 8 is then placed be-
tween the ends of the harp with its pointed

35 ends in engagement with the holes 11 and
th? block 8 secured to the casing by screws
10 — 10. Tlie proper tension is then placed
upon the spring 18 by turning the members
13 — 14, by means of a key or spanner in-

40 serted in the spanner-holes 15' in the shoul-
ders 15, to spring the ends of the bow apart
and after the proper tension has been applied,
the jam nuts 16 and 17 are turned to hold
the members in their adjusted positions.

45 The inner end of the stylus bar is then se-
cured to the connection 4 in any suitable
manner. Further adjustment of the tension
on the spring 18 may be obtained by simply
loosening the jam nuts 16 and 17 and tum-

50 ing the members 13 — 14 to vary the length
of the spindle.

Having thus described my invention what
I claim and desire to protect by Letters
Patent, is : —

55 1. In a sound box for talking machines,
the combination with a stylus bar and a
spring on which said stylus bar is mounted,
the longitudinal axis of said spring lying
within the plane of oscillation of the stylus

^0 bar, a bow carrying said spring, and means
comprising an axially extensible spindle to
spring the ends of said bow apart to vary
the tension to which said spring is sub-
jected.

66 2. In a sound box for talking machines.

the combination with a casing and a bow-
shaped support mounted on said casing, of
a stylus bar, a spring on Avhich said stylus
bar is mounted, the outermost portions of
said spring being secured to the arms of ,,q
said support, and means for adjusting the
distance between the ends of said bow-
shaped support, comprising a spindle ad-
justable with respect to said casing and
having relatively movable members respec- -g
tively engaged with the opposite arms of
said bow-shaped support.

3. In a sound box for talking machines,
the combination with a stylus bar, of a
spring on which said stylus bar is mounted, qq
and means to vary the tension of said spring,
said means comprising a spindle of variable
length.

4. In a sound box for talking machines,
the combination with a stylus bar, of a g^
spring on which said stylus bar is mounted,
and a spindle of variable length for varying
the tension of said spring, said spindle be-
ing composed of two telescoping members
and means for adjusting said members. qq

5. In a sound box for talking machines,
the combination with a stylus bar, of a
spring on which said stylus bar is mounted,
a resilient bow carrying said spring, and
means to vary the distance between the ends gg
of said bow to apply tension to said spring,
said means consisting of a spindle of vari-
able length mounted upon the sound box
and having its ends journaled in the ends

of said bow. joo

6. In a sound box for talking machines,
the combination with a stylus bar, of a
spring on which said stylus ha.Y is mounted,
and means to vary the tension of said spring
without tending to distort said bar from its ^05
normal position, the longitudinal axis of
said spring lying within the plane of oscil-
lation of said stylus bar.

7. In a sound box for talking machines,
the combination with a diaphragm, of a uq
stylus bar, a spring on which said stjdus
bar is mounted, and means to vary the ten-
sion of said spring, said spring having its
longitudinal axis at an angle with respect

to said diaphragm and being arranged to 135
maintain said stylus bar in its normal posi-
tion irrespective of the tension of said
spring.

8. In a sound box for talking machines,
the combination with a diaphragm, of a sty- 120
lus bar, a spring carrier for said stylus bar,
and means to vary the tension of said spring
carrier, said spring carrier being arranged

to maintain said stylus bar in its normal
position irrespective of its tension. 125

9. In a sound box for talking machines,
the combination with a stylus bar and a
spring on which said stylus bar is mounted,
of a resilient U shaped member to the arms

of which the outermost portions of said 180

l,071,08d

spring are secured, and means for varying
the distance between the ends of the arms of
said members, comprising a spindle inter-
posed between said ends and having thread-
5 ed portions relatively movable axially.

In witness whereof I have hereunto set

my hand this nineteenth day of December,
A. D. 1905.

BENTLEY L. RINEHAKT.
Witnesses :

Wm. Early,

Chas. K. Bennett.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

Washington, D. C."

F. S. KINNEY, DEC'D.

THE TAEMEES LOAN AND TfiUST COMPANY, OP NEW TOEK, N. T., EXEOUTOE.

SOUND EEPEODUCING INSTRUMENT.

APPLICATION FILED APE. 9, 1904.

1,071,436.

Patented Aug. 26, 1913.

t^^/.

^ ^nUlllllllh^

ZS

*^^

^^^3

23

^V

*^x^ 6

^l^iti4«^c>-e!^

UNITED STATES PATENT OFE ICE.

FRANCIS S. KINNEY, OF BUTLER, NEW JERSEY; THE FARMERS LOAN AND TRUST
COMPANY, OF NEW YORK, N. Y.. EXECUTOR OF SAID KINNEY, DECEASED.

SOUND-REPRODUCING INSTRUMENT.

1,071,436.

Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Aug. 36, 1913.

Application filed April 9, 1904. Serial No. 202,320.

To all tohom it may concern :

Be it knewn that I, Frj^ncis S. Ktnney,
a citizen of the TTnited States, residing at
Butler, county of Morris, and State of New
5 Jersej', have invented certain new and use-
ful Improvements in Sound - Reproducing
Instruments, fully described and represented
in the following specification and the accom-
panying drawings, forming a part of the

10 same.

This invention relates to certain improve-
ments in recorders for machines for repro-
ducing sound, such as phonographs and
gi'aphophones.

15 In recorders as now ordinarily con-
structed, the diaphragms are formed of a
thin piece of glass held in position at its
edges in tlie holder of the recorder, this
diaphragm being thrown into vibration by

20 the sound waves. The character of the vi-
brations, of course, depends upon the quality
of the tones, and it sometimes happens that
<vhere a sound has been such as to produce a
vibration of great amplitude, the diaphragm

25 will, after the reproducer has operated on
the recording surface, be given a secondary
vibration, producing a secondary indenta-
tion where none should be made, or the
rebound of the diaphragm, after the repro-

30 ducer has operated, will be of such ampli-
tude that a weaker sound will fail to over-
come it and force it down in time so that
the reproducer may properly record it.
Furthermore, in sound recording machines

35 as now ordinarily constructed, the repro-
ducer which is actuated b}' the diaphragm
and which acts upon the recording surface,
is braced by a comparatively stiff brace ex-
tending back from the reproducer to the

■*3 wall of the diaphragm casing or to the
securing device by which the diaphragm
is retained in the casing. This stiff brace,
while it permits the reproducer to move
under the actuation of the diaphragm, re-

^5 quires that the reproducer always move in
the arc of a circle. The movement of the
reproducer is so slight, however, with re-
spect to the radius of the arc, that the move-
ments may be considered as substantially

50 right line moA'ements, and there being prac-
ticallj' no elasticitj^ or resiliencj" in the brace
the tone value of the diaphragm vibrations
are not always transmitted to the cutter.
Furthermore, in sound recording instru-

^^ ments the opening in the holder of the re-

corder for the pipe or tube through which
the sound waves are conducted to the dia-
phragm has been heretofore led into the cas-
ing substantially centrally thereof and the
tube extends down thereinto, so that a ver- 60
tical column of what may be termed dead
air has to be overcome by the sound waves
before they reach the air chamber between
the top of the diaphragm and the recorder.

It is one of the objects of this invention to 65
provide an improved controller for the dia-
phragms of sound recording instruments,
this controller operating, after the record
has been made by the reproducer, to prevent
the diaphragm in return vibration from 70
passing too far beyond its normal plane.

A further object of the invention is to
produce an improved reproducer holder
which shall be more sensitive to the vibra-
tions of the diaphragm and transmit them 75
more accurately to the reproducer cutter.

A further object of the invention is to
produce an improved brace by which the re-
producer is held in position.

A further object of the invention is to 80
produce an improved recorder in which the
sound waves shall be directed to the dia-
phragm in such a manner as to make it un-
necessary to overcome a column of dead air
before the vibrations reach the chamber be- 85
tween the diaphragm and the recorder cas-
ing- .

With these and other objects in view, the

invention consists in certain constructions
and in certain parts, improvements and com- 90
binations, as will be hereinafter fully de-
scribed and then specifically pointed out in
the claims hereunto appended.

Referring to the drawings: Figure 1 illus-
trates in side elevation a recorder embody- 95
ing certain features of the invention. Fig.
2 is a plan view of a part of the construc-
tion shown in Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a sectional
view illustrating the preferred form of vi-
bration controller. Fig. 4 is a plan view of 100
the construction shown in Fig. 3. Fig. 5
is a view of another form of vibration con-
troller. Fig. 6 is a detail sectional view of
the recording stylus, illustrating its means
of attachment to the diaphragm. 105

Referring to said drawings, the usual sup-
port for the recording surface is indicated
at 1, this being a mandrel on which the sur-
face 2, on which the record is made, is
mounted. These elements are or may be 110

^

1,071,436

the ordinary well-known elements in com-
mon use, the recording surface being the
usual wax cylinder.

The recorder comprises a casing 3, which
jj may be of any suitable construction. As
illustrated it is circular in form, the dia-
phragm 4 being mounted in the usual man-
ner. This diaphragm preferably consists,
as is usual, of a thin piece of glass, the dia-

10 phragm being spaced from the top of the
casing by means of a gasket 5, a chamber 6
being thereby formed, into which the sound
waves pass. The diaphragm may be re-
tained in position in any suitable manner,

15 as, for instance, by a wax annulus 7.

The sound waves are introduced into the
chamber through an opening 8 with Avhich
connects a pipe or tube 9. In the usual com-
mercial construction the opening and tube

20 are centrally located with respect to the
diaphragm and the ordinary speaking tube,
not shown, being connected to this central
tube 9. With this construction, tiie enter-
ing sound waves meet a vertical column of

25 air which is dead in the tube, and this ver-
tical column, to a certain extent, apparently
prevents the dispersion of the waves
throughout the chamber above the dia-
phragm. While this form of recorder may

30 be employed with certain features of the
invention, in the preferred construction, the
opening 8 will be located to one side of the
recorder casing and near its perimeter, the
end of the tube being enlarged somewhat so

35 as to form a chamber 10, this chamber be-
ing in open communication with the cham-
ber 6 formed by the diaphragm and re-
corder. With this construction the sound
waves enter sidewise into the chamber, and

40 practical experience has shown that better
results are obtained by this construction
than by the usual commercial construction.
The chamber 10 may, however, be omitted,
if desired, the tube connecting with the

45 chamber in the recoi'der, as illustrated in

Fig- 3.

The tube or pipe 9 is or may be joined

to a section 11, this section being supported

in a hanger 12. The usual rubber tube is

50 indicated at 13, the speaking tube 14 being

connected to this tube.

An adjustable counterweight is or may be
provided for determining the force with
which the recorder bears on the recording
55 surface. In the construction shown, this
coimterweight is marked 9^ and is mounted
on a pin 9'' connected to the tube 9.

In the best constructions, the recorder
will be provided with a vibration controller
60 which may be varied in its construction.
This vibration controller will be spring con-
trolled in order that it may perform its
function and at the same time not inter-
fere with the required resilienc}^ of the clia-
6 phragm. One form of this controller is

70

75

shown in Fig. 3, in vi^hich a threaded post
15 passes through an opening in the top of
the elongated end of the pipe 9, the threaded
portion of the post engaging a nut 18 which
is kept from turning by pins 19 which ex-
tend upward from the end of the tube. The
post is provided with a collar 20 which is
engaged by a bent spring 21, this spring
being mounted in a short standard 22 ris-
ing from the end of the tube 9. This stand-
ard is provided with an overhanging arm
which carries a set screw 23 by which the
force of the spring may be adjusted.

In the best constructions, the post will
engage the diaphragm at a point substan- gg
tially opposite the attachment of the re-
cording stylus, though it may engage the
diaphragm at another point or points in
the sound wave field, that is to say, it may
engage that part of the diaphragm which 35
is inside the diaphragm retaining means
and upon which the sound waves act. An-
other form of this spring controlled vibra-
tion controller is illustrated in Fig. 5 in
which the post 15 is carried on the end of 90
a lever 24, this lever being mounted on a
bearing 25 extending upward from the elon-
gated end of the tube 9. This lever pro-
jects under a standard 26 having an over-
hanging arm in which is mounted a set 95
screw 27. The end of the lever bears upon
a spring 28 secured to the elongated end
of the tube 9, the action of the spring be-
ing limited by the set screw 27. A rubber
disk 29 is secured to the under side of the 100
opening through Avhich the post works, this
disk serving to close the opening through
which the post works and keep the chamber
above the diaphragm tight.

It will be seen that the vibration control- io5
ler in whatever form it may be embodied
while in no way interfering with the move-
ment of the diaphragm toward the repro-
ducing surface prevents undue movement
of the diaphragm away from the said sur- no
face, so that its returning movements will
not be excessive. Furthermore, in the
forms illustrated, the vibration controller
is adjustable so that its position may be
varied according to the different voices or 115
sounds to be reproduced. It is further-
more remarked that this feature of adjusta-
bility will preferably be retained whatever
form or construction of vibration controller
be employed. 120

The recording stylus and holder may be
varied widely in form and construction. As
shown, the reproducer consists of the usual
jeweled cutter point 31. The holder in its
preferred form consists of a block 32 which 125
may be of any suitable material, but experi-
ment has shown that the best results are ob-
tained when this block is made of ivory.
The cutter point 31 is mounted in the end
of the block and the connection between the 130

1,071,436

block and the diaphragm is, in the pre-
ferred construction, established by means
of an arm 33 which extends from the block
toward the diaphragm and contacts there-
5 wuth. While the contact end of this arm
may be variously shaped, the arm prefer-
ably terminates in a ball 34. The curved
surface of the ball enables a firm contact of
the ball and diaphragm to be established

IC and with a limited area of contact. The
ball may be secured to the diaphragm in
any desired manner, but in the preferred
construction, it is connected thereto by an
adhesive such as wax or stratena, the ad-

15 hesive being indicated at 35.

With a construction such as has been de-
scribed, it is apparent that a brace must be
provided to prevent the cutter, in the op-
eration of the mecTianism, from being de-

20 tached from the diaphragm. While this
brace might be of any suitable construction,
in the preferred construction it will con-
sist of a thin piece of resilient material 36.
While the material may be varied, the best

25 results have been obtained where this brace
is formed of the same material as the dia-
phragm and as glass is now usually em-
ployed for that purpose, glass about the
thickness of the diaphragm will preferably

30 be employed for the brace. Experi-
ment has developed the fact that a cutter
braced in this manner gives better results
than with the ordinary rigid brace, the rea-
son apparently being that the brace, by rea-

35 son of its resilience, permits the cutter to
follow with greater accuracy the complex
movement of the diaphragm produced by
the sound waves.

The shape of the brace, the means for

40 connecting it to the cutter carrying block,
and the means by which it is supported,
maj' be widely varied. A simple way of
connecting and supporting it is illustrated
in Fig. 6, in which the ivory block 32 is pro-

45 vided with a slit in which one end of the

brace is inserted, the other end of the brace

being led back and held by the wax annulus

7 wdiich holds the diaphragm in position.

Wliile several modifications haA^e been

50 illustrated, it is to be understood that
the invention may be embodied in construc-
tions which differ widely from those illus-
trated. It is further to be understood
that, under certain circumstances, certain

55 features of the invention may be used in-
dependently of other features and that such
independent use is contemplated. The in-
vention is not, therefore, to be limited to
the specific constructions hereinbefore de-

60 scribed and illustrated in the accompanying
drawings.
What is claimed is : — ■
1. In a recorder the combination with a
glass diaphragm, means for supporting the

65 same in position, a recorder holder at-

tached to and actuated by the diaphragm,
and a brace for the holder comprising a
thin piece of glass, substantially as de-
scribed.

2. In a recorder, the combination w^ith a 70
diaphragm, of means for holding the same

in position, a recording stylus, a holder
therefor, an arm on the holder, means for
attaching the arm directly to the dia-
phragm, a brace of thin resilient material 75
connected to the holder, and an adjustable
spring controlled vibration controller act-
ing on the diaphragm in the sound wave
field.

3. In a recorder, the combination with a sO
casing, of a diaphragm mounted therein be-
tween which and the casing an air chamber

is formed, a sound conducting pipe, the
delivery opening of which is located near
the jDerimeter of the casing, a secondary 85
chamber in open communication with the
pipe and the air chamber, this secondary
chamber being of greater area than the
opening of the pipe and of less area than
the air chamber, and a recorder mounted on 90
the diaphragm.

4. In a recorder, the combination with a
casing, of a diaphragm mounted therein be-
tween which and the casing an air chamber

is formed, a sound conducting pipe, the de- 95
livery opening of which is located near the
perimeter of the casing, a secondary cham-
ber in open communication Avith the pipe
and the air chamber, this secondary cham-
ber being of greater area than the opening 100
of the pipe and of less area than the air
chamber, a recorder mounted on the dia-
phragm, and an adjustable vibration con-
troller bearing on the side of the dia-
phragm opposite the recorder. 105

5. In a recorder, the combination with a
casing, of a diaphragm mounted therein be-
tween which and the casing an air chamber
is formed, a sound conducting pipe, the de-
livery opening of which is located near the 110
perimeter of the casing, a secondary cham-
ber in open communication with the pipe
and the air chamber, this secondary chamber
being of greater area than the opening of

the pipe and of less area than the air cham- 115
ber, a recorder mounted on the diaphragm,
a glass brace for the recorder, and an ad-
justable vibration controller bearing on the
side of the diaphragm opposite the re-
corder. 120

6. In a recorder, the combination with a
glass diaphragm, of means for holding the
same in position, a recorder holder compris-
ing a block, an arm extending from the
block, a ball on the arm, said ball bearing 125
against the diaphragm, an adhesive connec-
tion between the ball and the diaphragm, a
recorder mounted in the holder, and a thin
glass brace for the holder, said brace op-
erating to prevent the holder from becom- 130

1,071,436

10

ing detached from the diaphragm during
the recording operation, substantially as de-
scribed.

7. In a recorder, the combination with a
diaphragm, of means for holding the same
in position, a recorder holder comprising a
block, an arm extending from the block,
a ball on the arm, said ball bearing against
the diaphragm,' an adhesive connection be-
tween the ball and the diaphragm, a thin
resilient brace for the holder, said brace op-
erating to f)i'event the holder from becom-
ing detached from the diaphragm during

the recording operation, a recorder mounted
in the holder, and an adjustable vibration la
controller bearing on the diaphragm on
the side ojoposite the recorder and in the
sound wave field, substantially as described.
In testimony whereof, I have hereunto set
my hand, in the presence of two subscribing 20
witnesses.

FRANCIS S. KINNEY.

Witnesses :

J. A. Travis,
W. H. Kennedy.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents.

Washington, D. C."

I

J. C. ENGLISH.

SOUND AMPLIFIER.

APPLIOATIOK. PILED MAT 29, 1909.

1,071,610,

Patented Aug. 26, 1913.

3 SHEETS-SHEET 1.

30 3J.//^ ^O

^6^

^e

3S

3S^

J^^J.

J3.

yyiTNEsses:

BY

WyENWR

j(TroffN£Y.

J. C. ENGLISH.

SOUND AMPLIFIEE.

AFFLIOATION FIL£D MAT 29, 1909.

1,071,610.

Patented Aug. 26, 1913.

3 SHEETS-SHEHI 2.

J^Z^,

^

J^l^. ^.

■3s^jS' <5

36'

35-

_/v?

WITNESSES

By

INVENTOR

ATTORNEY

COLUMBIA PLANOGRAPH CO., WASHINOTON, D- C.

J. 0. ENGLISH.

SOUND AMPLIFIER,
APPLICATION FILED MAT 29, 1909.

1,071,610.

Patented Aug. 26, 1913.

3 SHEETS-SHEET 3.

Jtih. 7.

SG

3^ ^ &

'Se

•36--

3S-

^^

WITNESSES

ey

INVENTOR

ATTORNEY

COLUMBIA PLANOORAPH CO.. WASHINO'mN, D. C.

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

JOHN C. ENGLISH, OF CAMDEN, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR TO VICTOR TALKING MACHINE
COMPANY, A CORPORATION OP NEW JERSEY.

SOUND- AMPLIFIER.

1,071,610. Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Allg. 36,1913.

Original application filed February 20, 1909, Serial No. 479,105. Bivided and this application filed May 29,

1909. Serial No. 499,079. .

To all whotn it may concern :

Be it kuoAvn that I, John C. Emglish, a
citizen of the United States, and a resident
of the city of Camden, county of Camden.
0 and State of New Jersey, have invented cer-
tain new and useful Improvements in
Sound-Amplifiers, of which the following is
a specification, this application being a di-
vision of an earlier application filed by me

10 Februarj' 20, 1909, and upon which were
granted, on February 6, 1912, United States
Letters Patent No. 1,016,255.

It is generally understood that sounds or
tones dili'er, not only in pitch, which is high

15 or low according to the number of vibra-
tions per second in the sound, but also in
qualit}^ or timber, which is the property by
which sounds of the same pitch may be dis-
tinguished from each other, and which

20 makes the differences between the same note
as played on different instruments, or as
produced by different voices. These differ-
ences in the (jualit}^ or timber of tones are
generally attributed to the fact that each

25 .single note produced is in general a com-
pound note consisting of a fundamental
tone which gives the prevailing character-
istic pitch to the note, and also with a num-
ber of higher tones known as over-tones or

30 harmojiics, or relatively small intensity,
arid of higher pitch than the fundamental
t(me, and that these over-tones or harmonics,
varying in number and intensity, according
to the source of the note, blend with the

35 fundamental tone and the resulting com-
pound effect gives the peculiar qualit}^ or
timber to each note. In the reproduction
and amplification of sounds, it is therefore
obviously desirable that the various tones

■^O iiud over-tones composing the sounds should
be faithfully reproduced.

One of the objects of this invention is to
provide an amplifier or resonator particu-
larly adapted for use with sound reproduc-

4^ ing machines, which will respond sympa-
thetically and faithfully to all of the vari-
ous tones and over-tones and vibrations
which make up the great variety of sounds
usually reproduced by such machines and

^^ to augment the volume of sound delivered
to said amplifier.

Further objects of this invention are, to
])rovide an amplifier which will direct and
diffuse sound waves substantially uniform-

^^ ally through a predetermined space to in-

' crease the field in which a good reproduc-
tion may be heard; to provide an amplifier
having a relatively large sounding board
surface; to provide an amplifier of simple
and compact construction; and to provide 60
other improvements as will appear herein-
after.

In the accompanying drawings. Figure 1
is a side elevation partly in section of an
amplifier constructed in accordance with 65
this invention; Fig. 2 an end elevation of
the same; Fig. 3 a longitudinal central sec-
tional view taken transversely^ Avith respect
to the sounding-boards; Figs. 4 and 5 side
and end elevations respectively, of a modi- 70
fied form of this invention ; and Figs. G and
7 are side and end elevations respectively
of a second modified form of the invention.

Referring to the drawings, one embodi-
ment of this invention comprises a hollow 75
rigid gooseneck bracket 1 having a tubular
portion, the longitudinal axis of which is
substantially in the form of a compound
curve, extending wholly in the axial plane
of the bracket. The opening 2 which ex- 80
tends axially through the bracket, is sub-
stantially circular in cross section, and grad-
ually increases in diameter from the outer
end of the bracket inwardly. The bracket

I is provided adjacent its outer end 3, with 85
an oblong transverse plate 4, integral there-
with and having a flat outer surface 5, for
holding the bracket against a flat support.
The outer end 3 of the tubular ]Dortion of
the bracket is open and extends slightly 90
outwardly from the flat surface of the plate

4. Between the plate 4 at the outer end
of the bracket, and the tubular portion of
the bracket are substantialh^ flat v.ebs (i
and 7, arranged in the axial plane of the 95
bracket and centrally of the plate 4. The
plate 4 is provided with holes 8 to receive
bolts or other attaching means whereby the
bracket may be secured -in a fixed position.
The lower end of the bracket 1 terminates 100
in a substantially flat base 10, preferably ar-
ranged in a plane substantially perpendicu-
lar to the longitudinal axis of the bi'acket
at this end. This base 10 is integral with
the bracket and is braced b}^ means of webs 105

II and 12, between the base and the tubular
portion of the bracket, and is provided with
a centrally arranged rectangular opening
13, communicating with the interior of the
bracket, the circular walls of which gi-adu- HO

s

1,071,610

10

15

20

25

all}^ slope to meet the rectangailar walls of
the opening.

Secured to the base 10 of the bracket 1
is an oblong substantially rigid support 15,
preferablj^ made of wood, forming the back
of the amplifier. This support is substan-
tially rectangular in transverse section, and
preferably substantially curved longitudi-
nally from end to end, and may be substan-
tially semi-cjdindrical in shape externally
and internally and of substantially uniform
thickness, as shown in Figs. 1 to 3, or it may
be substantially parabolic or in the form of
the end of an ellipse, as shown in Figs. 4
and 5, or substantially in the form of the
side of an ellipse, as shown in Figs. 6 and 7.
The central portion of this support is pro-
vided with a boss 16, having a flat outer
surface which fits against the flat surface of
the base 10 of the bracket, and is rigidly
secured to the bracket by means of screws
17, fitting through apertures provided there-
for in the base 10 of the bracket, and
threaded into the boss 16 of the support.
The support 15 is also connected to the
bracket 1 b}^ means of screws 20, which ex-
tend through oppositely disposed lugs 21,
integral with the bracket, the lugs resting
in recesses provided therefor in the support
30 between one end of the support and its cen-
tral portion. The support is provided with
a centrally arranged substantially rectangu-
lar aperture 22, which registers with the cor-
responding oxoening 11, in the adjacent end
of the bracket, and forms the inlet of the
amplifier. The opposite ends or arms of
the support diverge outwardly from the base
10 of the bracket, and each of these arms
may be oblong and may diverge outwardly
in width, and the longitudinal axis of each
arm is preferably in the axial plane of the
bracket.

Secured to each side of the curved sup-
joort 15, and projecting forwardly there-
from is a substantially semi-circular flat
resonant sounding board 25, the inner edge
26 of which is shaped to conform to the ex-
ternal convex surface of the support, and
the outer edge 27 of Avhich is a substantially
straight line betAveen the outer ends of the
support. Each of these boards taj)ers in
thickness from its inner or convex edge out-
wardly, and is secured in position by "means
of screws 28, or other suitable fastening de-
vices extending through the board and into
the support. A cleat 30 is provided outside
of each board, adjacent and parallel to the
flat base of the bracket, to further hold the
boards in place, each cleat being held in po-
sition by means of suitable fastening de-
vices 31, extending through the cleat and ad-
jacent sounding board and into the support.
The space between the outer straight edges
of these sounding boards and the ends of the
snpport forms the mouth of the amplifier,

35

40

45

50

55

60

70

75

■>: 80

85

90

and is oblong- in shape, the straight edges of
the sounding boards being longer than the
transverse edges of the ends of the support.

The space between the external sounding
boards 25, may be divided by means of a
plurality of internal sounding boards 35,
which are substantially similar in form to
the external boards heretofore described,
and the inner edges of which may be secured
in longitudinal grooves 36, provided there-
for on the interior surface of the support 15.
The central portion of the inner edge of
each of these internal boards is preferably
tapered inwardty as at 37 to form sharp
edges 38, extending across the opening 22
leading from the bracket. The remai _
portion of each internal sounding board is
tapered outAvardly in thickness.

The construction is preferably such that
the external and internal sounding boards
diverge or radiate outwardly, but good re-
sults may be obtained, however, when the
boards are all arranged in parallel planes
and also when each board is of uniform
thickness.

Wax or other suitable fastening and seal-
ing means may be used in the joints be-
tween each sounding board and the support,
and between the support and the bracket,
and the external surfaces of each part of 95
the device may be given a suitable treatment
and finish.

The modified form of the invention shown
in Figs. 4 and 5, and the modified form
shown in Figs. 6 and 7, are similar in con-
struction to the form just described, except
that the support 15 of the amplifier is curved
diilerently as previously described. A lujr
40 may be provided ujDon the bracket hav-
ing a threaded aperture 41 for the reception
of a bolt for securing the bracket to a sup-
port.

In the operation of this device, the bracket
1 is connected to a talking machine to com-
municate with the usual sound reproducing
means, and the sound waves are conducted
through the bracket and into the space be-
tween the sounding boards, causing the
sounding boards to vibrate in sympathy
with the sound waves, thus amplifying the
effect of the waves. As each sounding board
tapers in width, it presents transverse por-
tions of every length between the substan-
tially infinitesimal length corresponding to
the narrowest portion of the board and" t^ie
length of its broadest portion, which is the
length of the straight line forming its outer
edge. Furthermore, owing to the tapering
thickness of each board, the longer trans-
verse portions of the board are thinner than 125
the shorter portions. Therefore, according
to the laws of sympathetic vibration, each
sounding board thus constructed Avill re-
spond to and amplify all of the various
sound waves which make up the tones and 13 o

100

105

110

115

120

1,071,610

over-tones of any sound, the shorter and
thicker portions of the board responding to
the higher tones or to the waves of greater
frequency, and the h)nger or thinner por-
5 tions of the board responding to the lower
tones or waves of less frequency, and the
full and true timber or quality of the origi-
nal sounds will be thus delivered by the
amplifier. By having several sounding

IQ boards spaced comparatively close together,
and by having the mouth of the amplifier
oblong as described, a relatively large area
of sounding board surface in proportion to
the cubic space occupied by the amplifier, is

15 provided; and the form and construction of
the sounding board, the support, and the
gooseneck are such as to pro-\'ide a simple
and compact amplifier in which the curved
back, or support, will act as a deflector to

20 diffuse the sound waves through a prede-
termined space.

Although only three of the various forms
in which this invention may be embodied
have been illustrated, the invention is not

25 limited to these particular constructions, as
various changes might be made in the con-
structions shown without departing from
the spirit of this invention or the scope of
the appended claims.

30 Having thus fully described this inven-
tion, I claim and desire to protect by Let-
ters Patent of the United States:

1. A sound amplifier comprising a sound-
ing-board tapering oppositely in thickness

35 to its ends.

2. A sound amplifier comprising a sub-
stantially flat sounding-board tapering from
a region of maximum thickness to its oppo-
site ends.

40 3. A sound amplifier comprising a sound-
ing-board tapering from a region of maxi-
mum thickness adjacent to one end, to its
respectively opposite ends.

4. A sound amplifier comprising a sound-
45 ing-board having an edge curved in a plane

with said board, and diminishing in thick-
ness from said curved edge, substantially in
the direction of the axis of said amplifier.

5. A sound amplifier comprising a sub-
50 stantially segment-shaped sounding-board

diminishing in thickness away from its
curbed edge, substantially in the direction
of the axis of said amplifier.

6. A sound amplifier comprising a sup-
55 port having a concave inner face and a

sounding board secured to said support pro-
jecting from the inner face thereof and
tapering in thickness from said face, sub-
stantially in the direction of the axis of said
60 amplifier.

7. A sound amplifier comprising a sup-
port having a concave inner face, and a
sounding board seciu-ed to each side of said
support and projecting forwardly and ta-

65 pering in thickness from said face, substan-

tially in the direction of the axis of said
amplifier.

8. A sound amplifier comprising a sup-
port having a substantially concave inner
surface, a pair of sounding boards secured ^q
one on each side of said support and pro-
jecting forwardly from said face, and a
sounding board between said pair of sound-
ing boards.

9. A sound amplifier comprising a sup- 75
port having a substantially concave curved
inner face provided with a groove, a pair

of sounding boards, secured one on each
side of said support, and projecting for-
wardly from said face, and a sounding gQ
board between said pair of sounding boards
and secured to said support in said groove.

10. A sound amplifier comprising a sup-
port having a substantially concave inner
face, a pair of sounding boards secured, one 35
on each side of said support and projecting
forwardly from said face, and a sounding
board between said pair of sounding boards,
said sounding boards each tapering in thick-
ness awaj^ from said support, substantially 90
in the direction of the axis of said amplifier.

11. A sound amplifier comprising a sup-
port having a substantiall}^ concave inner
face, a pair of sounding boards secured, one

on each side of said support and projecting 95
fcrwardl}' from said face and a sounding
board between said pair of sounding boards
and secured to said support, said sounding
boards each tapering in thickness away from
said support, substantially in the direction lOO
of the axis of said amplifier.

12. A sound amplifier comprising a sub-
stantiall}' semi-cylindriform support and a
plane sounding board secured to said sup-
port and tapering in thickness and increas- 105
ing in width away from said support, sub-
stantially in the direction of the axis of said
amplifier.

13. A sound amplifier comprising a hol-
IcAV support, and sound amplifying means 110
carried thereby and communicating there-
with, said amplifier being rigidly connected

to one end of and to an intermediate portion
of said support.

14. A sound amplifier comprising spared US
sounding boards, and a hollow gooseneck
comm.unicating with the s])ace between said
boards, said amplifier being rigidly con-
nected to one end of and to an intermediate
l^orlion of said gooseneck. 120

15. A sound amplifier comprising a sup-
port provided witli an aperture, a pair of
spaced sounding boards carried by said
support, and a hollow gooseneck secui-cd to
said support and communicating through 12o
said aperture therein with tlie space between
said boards, said amplifier being I'igidly
connected to one end of and to an interme-
diate portion of said gooseneck.

IG. A sound amplifier comprising ampli- 'i^'^

1,071,610

fying means comprising a semi-cylindrical
wall having a substantially flat portion pro-
^'ided with a rectangular aperture and a tu-
bular member terminating at one end in a
5 flat plate secured to said flat portion and
communicating Avith said amplifying means
through said aperture.

17. A sound amplifier comprising a hol-
low gooseneck and sound amplifying means

TO rigidly secured to one end and to an inter-
mediate portion of said gooseneck and com-
municating therewith.

18. A sound amplifier comprising a sound-
ing board having a portion of one edge

15 sharpened to divide sound Avaves and taper-
ing in thickness aAvay from said sharpened
portion.

19. A sound amplifier comprising a sound-
ing board having one edge curved from end

20 to end and having a straight edge connect-
ing the ends of the curved edge, said board
being held fixed at its curved edge and be-
ing free at its straight edge, and tapering in
thickness from its curved edge toward its

25 straight edge.

20. A sound amplifier comprising a pair
of forwardly diverging symmetrically
curA^ed arms and a sounding board extend-
ing betAveen said arms and secured thereto,

?>0 said sounding board tapering forAvardly in
thickness, and curA'edly increasing in Avidth.

21. A sound amplifier comprising an ob-
long symmetrically curved support widen-
ing toward its ends and a sounding board

35 secured upon each side of said support, and
tapering forwardly in thickness.

22. An am]:)lifier for sound AvaA^es com-
prising a substantially semi-cylindrical hol-
low body having diverging sides tapering

40 forAvardiy in thickness, and curvedly in-
creasing in Avidth.

23. A sound amplifier comprising a body
portion having opposite Avails curved longi-
tudinally and symmetrically, the axis of

45 symmetry being substantially coincident
Avith the longitudinal axis of the said body
portion of the amplifier, and the body por-
tion being entirely open between said curved
Avails, and flat Avails connecting said curved

50 walls to form a sound conduit.

24. A sound amplifier comprising a body
portion having opposite substantially rigid
Avails curved longitudinally and symmetri-
cally, the axis of symmetry being substan-

55 tially coincident Avith the longitudinal axis
of said body i>ortion, and the body portion
being entirely open between said curved
walls, and sounding boards connecting said
curved walls to form therewith a sound con-

60 duit.

25. A sound amplifier comprising a body

portion having opi:)osite walls curved longi-
tudinally and symmetrically with their in-
ner faces concaA'^e, the axis of symmetry be-
ing substantially coincident with the longi- 65
tudinal axis of said body portion, and the
body portion being entirely open between
said curved Avails, and flat Avails connecting
said curved Avails to form thejeAvith a sound
conduit. 70

26. A sound amplifier comprising a sup-
port having a symmetrical concave inner
face, said support haAdng an inlet aperture
about midAvay betAveen its ends, and flat
Avails on each side of said support forming 75
in conjunction thercAvith a sound conduit en-
tire!}' open between the sides of said sup-
port and from said inlet aperture to its
mouth.

27. A sound amplifier comprising a hoi- 80
low body portion provided with an inlet and
an outlet and forming a straight passage
for sound betAveen said inlet and said outlet,
said body portion comprising opposite walls
diA^erging rapidly away from said inlet 85
toAvard said outlet, said walls decreasing in
divergence as they approach said outlet, and
said body portion also comprising substan-
tially flat Avails connecting said first men-
tioned walls. 90

28. A sound amplifier comprising a hol-
loAv body portion provided with an inlet and
an outlet and forming a straight passage for
sound between said inlet and said outlet,
>said body portion comprising opposite Avails 95
diverging rapidly away from said inlet
toAvard said outlet, said walls decreasing in
diA'ergence as they approach said outlet, and
said body portion also comprising spaced
sounding boards connecting said Avails, said 100
body portion being substantially rectangu-
lar in transverse section.

29. A sound amplifier comprising, a sup-
port having flat sounding boards on oppo-
site sides thereof providing a relatively shal- 105
loAV chamber having an inlet and an outlet,
said chamber being oblong in transverse sec-
tion and haA'ing its major transverse axis
relatively great as compared Avith its minor
transAxrse axis throughout the major por- HO
tion of the length of said chamber, and pro-
viding a straight passage from said inlet to
said outlet, the extreme major transverse
axis of said chamber being relatively great

as compared with the length of said cham- 115
ber.

In witness whereof I have hereunto set
my hand this 2rth day of May A. D., 1909.
JOHN C. ENGLISH.
Witnesses :

Edavaed Kaecher MacEwan,
Fkank Barclat Middlleton, Jr.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

Washington, D. C."

I

A. HAYES.

SODND BOX.

APPLICATION FILED JULY 10, 1913.

1,071,667.

Patented Aug. 26, 1913.

Fin . I.

QMot/vytA^

COLUMBIA PLANOQRAPH CO., WASHINGTON, D. C.

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

ALBERT HAYES, OE SALT LAKE CITY, UTAH, ASSIGNOR TO VOCATONE M'E'G. CO. INC.,

A CORPORATION OE NEW YORK.

SOUND-BOX.

1,071,667.

Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Aug. 36, 1913.

Application filed July 10, 1913. Serial No. 778,244.

To all whom it may concern :

Be it knawn that I, Albert Hayes, a citi-
zen of the United States, residing at Salt
Lalie City, in the county of Salt Lake, State
5 of Utah, have invented certain new and use-
ful Improvements in Sound-Boxes, of which
the following is a description, reference be-
ing had to the accompanying drawings,
forming a part hereof.

10 My invention relates to sound boxes for
graphophones or gramophones and has for
its object to produce a sound box in which
the vibrating disk shall be so held that it
will be permitted to vibrate only within such

15 limits that the production of undesirable
overtones is avoided and the sound repro-
duced is clear, strong and pure.

With these and other objects hereinafter
set forth in Adew my invention consists in

20 the construction and combination of ele-
ments hereinafter described and particularly
pointed out in the claims.

Referring to the drawings: Figure 1 is a
vertical sectional view of a sound box em-

25 bodying my invention taken in a plane in
line with the reproducer lever. Fig. 2 is a
similar view taken on a plane at right angles
to that on which Fig. 1 is taken ; and Fig. 3
is a top plan view partly broken away of the

30 sound box.

In the drawings 1 indicates the body or
main member of the sound box having cen-
tral opening 2 for the outlet of the sound
produced by the vibration of the disk or

35 diaphragm 3. 4 indicates the cover member

of the sound box which in the construction

shown fits into the main member 1 and is

retained therein by screws 6.

The inner faces of the members 1 and 4

40 are waved or corrugated as shown, the cor-
rugations of the cover 4 extending from the
periphery inward to the central opening 7.
These corrugations are preferably formed
on curved lines such as the arcs of circles

45 drawn from centers located in a circle con-
centric with the disk or diaphragm 3 and
between its center and its periphery.

The disk or diaphragm 3 has its periphery
inclosed in a gasket 8 of yielding material

50 such as semihard rubber and this gasket i?-
held between the members 1 and 4 of the
sound box, the corrugations 0 serving to
cause the gasket to be compressed at regular
intervals along lines which are on the arcs

65 of circles not concentric with the disk or

diaphragm. The compression of the gasket
necessarily transmits pressure to the disk or
diaphragm 3 so that the disk or diaphragm
is held at its periphery between surfaces
which are subjected to relatively high pres- 60
sure at successive points while between such
points the pressure is relatively low, the re-
sult being that the vibration of the disk or
diaphragm is materially modified or con-
trolled with the effect of eliminating objec- 65
tionable overtones and giving clear, pure
tones free from harshness.

The means for vibrating the disk or dia-
phragm may be of any usual form. As here
shown it consists of a lever 10 connected 70
Avith the center of the disk or diaphragm
and having trunnions 11 carried in bearings
formed in ears 12 on the periphery of the
body or main member of the sound box.
This lever is provided at its free end with 75
a socket 13 for the usual needle or stylus.

While the apparatus as thus described
produces very satisfactory results I prefer
to use with it a damper or buffer, prefer-
ably in the form of a disk 15 of paper or 80
other non-reverberant material. This dam-
per or buffer is arranged between the disk
or diaphragm 3 and the face of the body or
main member 1 of the sound box resting on
the corrugations 6. This damper is prefer- 85
ably cut away centrally, the cut out portion
corresponding in diameter with the diame-
ter of the central opening 2 and is glued or
otherwise secured to one of the plates.

It will, of course, be understood that I do 90
not desire to be limited to the details of con-
struction shown and described as it is obvi-
ous that changes in form and construction
may be made without departing from the
spirit of the invention. 95

Having thus described my invention what
I claim is :

1. In a sound box a body member having
a central opening, and having its inner sur-
face surrounding the central opening corru- ^^^
gated, a gasket resting on the corrugations,
and a disk supported by the gasket.

2. In a sound box the combination with a
disk and means for vibrating it of means for
clamping the disk comprising two plates ^^^
having their adjacent faces waved or corru-
gated, and a gasket compressed between the
corrugations and supporting the disk.

3. In a sound box the combination with
the disk and means for vibrating it, of ■'•^^

1,071,667

means for clamping the disk comprising two
plates having adjacent faces waved or cor-
rugated, a gasket on the periphery of the
disk and compressed between the corruga-
S tions of the plates, and a damper of non-
reverberant material attached to one of the
plates.

This specification signed and witnessed
this 10th day of July, A. D. 1913.

ALBEET HAYES.

In the presence of —
Wm. F. Doyle,
Parker Cook:.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cent^ each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

Washington, D. C."

A. HAYES.

METHOD OF CONTROLLING THE VIBRATION OF DIAPHRAGMS.

APPLIOATION FILED JTILT 10, 1913.

1,071,668.

Patented Aug. 26, 1913.

FIB - / .

Albert Ho^es,

^ aM^^-c^

SUtoz^toij

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

ALBERT HAYES, OF SALT LAKE CITY, UTAH, ASSIGNOR TO VOCATONE M'E'G. CO. INC.,

A CORPORATION OF NEW YORK.

METHOD OF CONTROLLING THE VIBRATION OF DIAPHRAGMS.

1,071,668.

Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Aug. 36,1913.

Application filed Jtily 10, 1913. Serial No. 778,245.

To all xohom it may concern :

Be it known that I, Albert Hayes, a citi-
zen of the United States, residing at Salt
Lake City, in the county of Salt Lake, State
5 of Utah, have invented certain new and use-
ful Improvements in INIethods of Control-
ling the Vibration of Diaphragms, of which
the following is a description, reference
being had to the accompanying drawings,

10 forming a part hereof.

My invention relates to methods of con-
trolling the vibration of diaphragms of
sound reproducing devices such as gramo-
phones, graphophones and other devices in

15 which sound is reproduced by the vibration
of the diaphragm, and the invention has for
its object to permit the effective use of
larger diaphragms than those ordinarily
used, to control the vibration of the dia-

20 phragm, to provide channels for the sound
waves, and to so control the vibration of the
diaphragm as to produce clear well defined
tones, to eliminate blasting and whirring
from the tones produced, to prevent blurring

25 and mixing or confusion of successive tones,
to reproduce the tones of the human voice
and of musical instruments in a natural way
and with a minimum of mechanical sugges-
tion, to give precision and clearness to the

30 reproduction of the enunciation of words,
and in general, to secure improved results in
the reproduction of sounds.

With these and other objects hereinafter
set forth in view my invention consists in

35 the method hereinafter described and par-
ticularly pointed out in the claims.

Referring to the drawings which illus-
trate a form of device capable of use to
carry out my improved method: Figure 1

■*0 is a vertical sectional view of a sound box
embodying my invention taken in a plane in
line with the reproducer lever. Fig. 2 is a
similar view taken on a plane at right angles
to that on which Fig. 1 is taken ; and Fig. 3

^5 is a top plan view partly broken away of
the sound box.

In the drawings 1 indicates the body or
main member of the sound box having cen-
tral opening 2 for the outlet of the sound

50 produced by the vibration of the disk or
diaphragm 3.

4 indicates the cover member of the sound
box which in the construction shown fits
into the main member 1 and is retained

55 therein by screws 5.

The inner faces of the members 1 and 4
are Avaved or corrugated as shown, the cor-
rugations of the cover 6 extending from the
periphery inward to the central opening 7
which is about the diameter of the central 60
opening 2. These corrugations are formed
on curved lines preferably the arcs of circles
drawn from centers located in a circle con-
centric with the disk or diaphragm 3 and
between its center and its periphery. «5

The disk or diaphragm 3 has its periphery
inclosed in a gasket 8 of yielding material
such as semihard rubber and this gasket is
held between the members 1 and 4 of the
sound box, the corrugations 6 serving to 70
cause the gasket to be compressed at regular
intervals along lines which are on the arcs
of circles not concentric with the disk or
diaphragm. The compression of the gasket
necessarily transmits pressure to the disk 75
or diaphragm 3 so that the disk or dia-
phragm is held at its periphery between sur-
faces which are subjected to relatively high
pressure at successive points while betAveen
such points the pressure is relatively low, 80
the result being that the vibration of the
disk or diaphragm is materially modified or
controlled with the effect of eliminating ob-
jectionable overtones and giving clear, pure
tones free from harshness. 85

The means for vibrating the disk or dia-
phragm may be of any usual form. As
here shown it consists of a lever 10 con-
nected with the center of the disk or dia-
phragm and having trunnions 11 carried in *0
bearings formed in ears 12 on the periphery
of the body or maiii member of the sound
box. This lever is provided at its free end
with a socket 13 for the usual needle or
stylus. 95

While the apparatus as thus described
produces very satisfactory results I prefer
to use with it a damper or buffer, preferably
in the form of a disk 15 of paper or other
non-reverberant material. This damper or ^00
buffer is arranged between the disk or dia-
phragm 3 and the face of the body or main
member 1 of the sound box resting on the
corrugations G. This damper disk is pref-
erably cut away centrally, the cut out por- 105
tion corresponding in diameter with the
diameter of the central opening 2 and is
glued or otherwise secured to one of the
plates.

It will be understood that I do not herein HO

1,071,668

10

cLaiin the apparatus described and shown as
that forms the subject matter of a separate
application filed by me of even date here-
Avith.

Having thus described my invention what
I claim is :

1. The method of mounting a diaphragm
comprising the provision of a peripheral
resilient gasket for the diaphragm and sub-
jecting the diaphragm and gasket to regu-
larly recurring relatively high and low pres-
sures at right angles thereto.

2. The method of controlling the vibra-

tion of a diaphragm comprising the pro-
vision of a pheripheral resilient gasket for
the diapliragm and subjecting the dia-
phragm and gasket to regularly recurring
relatively high and low pressures at right
angles thereto and vibrating the center of
the diaphragm.

This specification signed and witnessed
this IGth day of July A. D. 1913.

ALBEKT HAYES.

In the presence of —

Wm. F. DoTIiE,

Pakkee Cook.

15

20

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, hy addressing the

Washington, D. €."

•Commissioner of Patents

/o

-? p. 5 4 (^

G. MELING.

GRAMOPHONE,
APPLICATION FILED JAN. 18, 1912.

1,072,346.

Patented Sept. 2, 1913.

2 SHEETS-SHEET 1.

1,072,346.

G. MELING.

GRAMOPHONE,
APPLICATION FILED JAN. 18, 1912.

Patented Sept. 2, 1913.

2 SHEETS-SHEET 2.

^J-^

J^t^. ^

y^y.6

^9

A9

!Z^^:^^

35

(x vvs\; cw e JVl e\ uv^ ,

COLUMBIA PLANOGRAPH CO.. WASHINGTON, D. C.

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

GUSTAVE MELING, OF- OHIGAGO, ILLINOIS.
GRAMOi»HON!E.

1,0^2,34(5.

^ecification of letters- Patent. ]Patented Sept. 2, 1913*

i^^1ieati<ynftflie'd jAirtia'ry ISJ 1912. Serial No. 671,838.

To all whom it may concern:

Be it known that I, Gus^Ti^-sTi MEi:j>fG, a
citizen of the United States, residing at
Chicago, in the count}^ of Cook and State of
5 Illinois, have invented certain new and use-
ful Improvements in Gramophones, of
^\ilich the following is a specification.

This inA'ention relates to machines for re-
producing sound, such as gramophones,

10 graphophones or the like, aoid is particu-
larly directed toward providing means for
operating such devices, so that they may be
caused to repeat the' piece or tune which is
being produced as many times as rtiay be' de-

15 sired.

The objects of my invetition are to pro-
vide a' simple and efficient operating mecha-
nism for gramophones including means for
causing said gramophone to repeat one; or

20 more times ; means for causing' the gTkmo-
phone to repeat a portion of the piece being
produced; means for causing it to stop a'nto-
matically after a piece has been completed;
means for causing it to' repeat automati-

26 cally ; and in general to' provide such novel
features and improvements as will appear
hereinafter.

In the accompaniying drawings illustrat-
ing my invention. Figure 1 is a side view

30 of a gramophone embodjdng the same, the
side of the box or casing being removed
and parts being broken aWay or shown dia-
grammatically for convenience in the illus-
tration; Fig. 2 is a plan view showing the

35 principal operating mechanism, parts also
being omitted or shown diagrammatically ;
Fig. 3 is a plan view showing certain details
of construction ; Fig. 4 is an enlarged detail
vieAV of the wiper and controlling devices

40 for controlling the current to the magnet;
Figs. 0 and C jire enlarged details of the
screw and nut used for returning the re-
producer device to starting or other desired
position.

45 As illustrated in these drawings, I have
showed my invention as applied to a gramo-
phone having a swinging arm mounted on a
universal joint which pennits the record-
groove to move the stylus across the face of

50 the record, such form of instrument being
in common and well known use, although
certain features thereof may be utilized in
other forms of instruments. In accordance
Avith these drawings, 8 indicates any suitable

55 casing or frame work for the various parts,
which casing supports a- rotatable holder 9,

for receiving the disk record 10. This plate
may be driven in any desired manlier, foi-'
instance by means of a shaft 10', which
has a worm gear 11 thereon, this gear being go
driven by a worm 12 on the driving' shaft
of a- motor 13. The swinging arm 14 is"
mounted on a pivot or pin 15, having its
ends fitting in a groove IG in a circular base
17, so as to provide a substantially univer- 55
sal joint. At the opposite end of the swing-
ing arm 14 is the sound reproducing de-
vices; which for convenience wilf be called
the head 18. This head is arranged in
proper position over the disk 10, so that' 70
the arm may swing horizontally as the head'
moves across the record portion of the disk'
under the influence of the stylus. The prin-
cipal feature of my invention as illustrated
in this preferred form, consists in provid- 75
ing means for swinging the arm 14 to raise
the head 18, then to swing the arm horizon-
tally in order to bring the head back to the
desired position for reproducing all or a
portion of the record. To this end, I pivot go
a vertical sha-ft or ann 19 on the horizon-
tal pin or pivot 15, so that said arm is free
to swing within certain limits in a vertical
plane, but rotates- with the arm 14 when
said arm is swung in a horizontal plane, gs
At the upper end of the shaft 19 is a foot
or projection 20, which is adapted to engage
with a lug 21 in the tubular arm 14, the ar-
rangement being such that when the lower
end of the shaft 19 is swung inwardly, the 90
projection 20 will strike against the lug 21
and raise the outer or free end of the arm
14 so as to raise the head 18 out of engage-
ment with the disk. When the lower end
of the shaft 19 again swings to the right 95
it will free the arm 14 so that the stylus
may again engage with the disk. It will
also be observed that the arm 14 may be
swung upwardly by hand without disturb-
ing the shaft 19. This shaft however, must 100
always rotate with the arm 14 when the arm
is swinging in a horizontal plane. It will
therefore, be seen that by properly manipu-
lating the lower end of the shaft 19 the arm
14 may be raised to raise the head 18 away 105
from the disk and then rotated so as to
bring the head back to the starting position
and then lowered to bring the stylus in en-
gagement Avith the disk. These operations
are performed by means of the following no
devices. At the lower end of the shaft 19
is an arm 22 pivotally mounted oil said

2

1,072,346

shaft and guided to prevent rotation by
means of a forked or slotted bearing 23.
At the opposite or free end of this arm 22,
is an armature 24, which is acted upon by
5 means of an electromagnet 25, this electro-
magnet being supported in any convenient
manner, as by means of a bracket 26 from
the box or casing 8. When there is no
current passing through the magnet 25, the

10 armature 24 will be freed, which will allow
the shaft 19 to swing to the right under
the influence of the weight of the arm 14,
thereby permitting the arm 14 to swing
down until the stylus comes in contact with

15 the disk. "VVlien a current is passed through
the magnet 25, the armature 24 will be at-
tracted which will swing the shaft 19 to
the left, thereby swinging the arm 14 up-
wardly until the stylus is raised away from

20 the record disk 10.

In order to rotate the shaft 18 so as to
swing the arm 14 in a horizontal plane, I
provide said shaft with a second arm 27,
the free end of which is adapted to engage

25 with a threaded member or half -nut 28.
This half-nut 28 is adapted to engage at
times vv^ith a screw 29, while at other times
it is free therefrom. This screw is mounted
in suitable bearings 30 from the main frame

30 and is constantly driven, while the machine
is in operation, by the motor 13. The mo-
tor is provided with a pulley 31 from which
a belt 32 runs to a pulley 33 on the end of
the worm 29. In order that the half -nut 28

35 may swing down out of engagement with
the worm 29, it is provided with an arm 34
which is pivoted on a rod 35, which extends
substantially the full length of the screw 29,
such arrangement being clearly shown in
Figs. 6 and 6. This half-nut or threaded
member 28 is also provided with down-
wardly extending projections or fingers 36
on either side of the arm 27, the inner
faces of these projections being arranged so
that they will not bind the ai-m as the nut
travels along the screw. This arrangement
is such that, when the arm 27 is swung up-
wardly, which is done by the magnet 25, its
outer end, which is in constant engagement

50 with the threaded member 28 will raise this
member into engagement with the screw 29,
which screw then causes the nut to move lon-
gitvidinally thereof, sliding along on the rod
35, and the arms or projections 36 will swing

55 the arm 37 causing the latter to rotate the
shaft 19 and thereby swing the gramophone
arm 14 back to initial position. In order
that these operations may be performed aii-
tomatically, I provide certain electrical con-

60 nections and switches which will now be de-
scribed. The shaft 19 is provided with a
third arm which may be designated a wiper
arm 37 having an upwardly extending
spring contact finger 38 and a horizontally

65 extending finger 39. A bearing 40 from the |

40

45

main frame supports a tubular contact mem-
ber 41 arranged transversely to the arm 37.
This tubular member carries an adjustable
sleeve 42 having a downwardly extending
contact arm 43 with which the contact finger
39 is adapted at times to make connection.
An upwardly extending arm 44 from the
sleeve 42 passes through a slot 45 in the top
of the casing, and provides means whereby
the sleeve is prevented from rotating and is
also readily adjusted.

A rod 46 passes through the tube 41 and
has an extension 47 at one end of substan-
tially the same outer diameter as the tube.
At the opposite end of the rod is a spring

48 tending to hold the rod with its end 47
pressed against the end of the tube 41. The
extension 47 is provided with a projection

49 of insulating material, which projection
is adapted to open a double pole switch 50
when the rod 46 is moved to the left as in-
dicated in Fig. 4. The projection 47 is pro-
vided with a horizontal pin 51 which is
adapted to be engaged at times by a pin 52
projecting at right angles from a shaft 53
which shaft is mounted in suitable bearings
in the frame, and extends out through the
front thereof where it is provided with an
arm 54 by means of which it may be ro-
tated. Stops 55 and 56 are provided for
the arm 54 to limit its movement. The op-
eration of this portion of my invention will
be most readily understood from Fig. 4.
When the wiper arm 37 moves toward the
right, as it v/ill be when it follows the nor-
mal swinging movement of the gramophone
arm 14, the contact finger 39 will finally
come in contact with the contact arm 43,
which is preferably adjusted so that such
contact occurs at substantially the same time
that the piece is finished. This contact closes
a circuit through the mag-net 25, thereby
causing the shaft 19 to be swung inwardly
and simultaneously raising the free end of
the wiper arm 37. This causes the contact
finger 38 to make contact with the tube 41
so as to keep the circuit closed through the
magnet 25 while the screw 29 causes the
shaft 19 to rotate, which also causes the
wiper arm 37 to swing to the left as indi-
cated in Fig. 4. When it is desired to have
the piece repeated, this contact arm moves
to the left until the finger 38 passes beyond
the end of the extension 47 when the cii*-
cuit through the magnet will be broken and
the arm 14 will be pei^mitted to swing down
so that the stylus again comes in contact
with the record and the piece is again
played. It will be noted that this action
will keep on indefinitel,y, the piece being
repeated as many times as desired or until
the machine is finally stopped. However, if
it is desired to cause the machine to stop
after the piece has been played, the operator
turns the arm 54 up until it engages the

70

75 V

80

85

90

95

100

105

110

115

120

125

130

1,072,346

stop 55 which swings the pin 52 up against
the pin 51 and brings the pin 52 within the
path of the wiper arm 3'7, so that the ami
strikes this pin before the contact finger 38
g passes off from the end of the extension 47.
WHien the arm 37 strikes the pin 52, the lat-
ter will press against the pin 51 and thereby
move the rcxl 46 to the left until the pro-
jection 49 strikes the switch 50 and opens

j^Q the circuit through the motor and through
the magnet, thereby stopping the machine
and restoring it to its normal position. This
movement of the rod 46 is comparatively
slight, so that a slight flexibility of the pin

15 52 and its connections will permit such
movement even thougli the arm 54 is in con-
tact with the stop 55. The electric connec-
tions may be arranged in any convenient
manner to accomplish the purpose above set

20 forth. For instance the battery 57 is pro-
vided with wire 58 leading to the pole 59
of the double switch 50. Another wire 60
leads from the other terminal of this switch
and is connected Avith the rod 46 or some of

25 the parts in contact therewith, these parts
being insulated from the remainder of the
machine. Another Avire 61 leads from the
battery 57 to one of the terminals of the
magnet 25, and the other terminal of tliis

3Q magnet is connected by means of a wire 62

with the wiper arm 37. This will permit

the necessnry circuits to be made to operate

the magnet as above set forth.

The motor 13 may be driven from the

c;5 same source of electricity as used for con-
trolling the magnet, but is preferabl.y driven
by means of a current from an electric light
or power service system. In this case one
wire 63 leads to one terminal of the motor

40 while another wire 64 leads from the other
tertniniil to one of the poles of the switch
50, the third wire 65 leading from thence to
tlie source of electricity.

In some instances it may be desirable to

45 stop the instrument before it completes the
piece it is reproducing, and cause it to re-
peat the portion it has already reproduced.
In order to do this, I provide a wire 66
leading from the wiper arm 37, or the ter-

50 ii'.inal of the magnet which is connected with
said AAiper arm, to an open key 67. Another
wire C8 leads from said key to the rod 46
and its ci-nnected parts so tliat when this key
is closed, a circuit is com]3leted frora the bat-

55 teries through the magnet, thereby causing
the inagntt to operate and attract the arma-
ture 24 which raises the head of the instru-
ment and permits the screw 29 to swing the
in'ilrument back to initial position in the

60 manner abo\ e specified, the contact finger 38
maintaining the contact so that the ke}' 67
does not need to be held closed.

It will be obser\ ed that various changes
may be made in my invention to accommc-

65 date the same to clifTerent forms of gramo-

phones or similar devices and, I, therefore,
do not wish to be limited to the particidar
form or arrangement of apparatus hereinbe-
fore described, further than pointed out in
the appended claims, in Avhich I claim: ,-,q

1. The combination Avith a SAvinging arm
of a gramophone, of a reproducer carried
tiiereby a shaft or bar connected with said
arm and adapted to actuate the same, an
electro-magnetic device for swinging said ^^
shaft to raise the reproducer aAvay from the
record, means coacting Avith said shaft for
rotating the same to sAving the reproducer
back or toward its starting position, Avhich
means is actuated Avhen the shaft is swung gQ
by the magnetic device, a source of electric-
ity for said electro-magnetic device, and
circuits and contacts arranged so that the
current supplied to said device will be au-
tomatically stopped Avhen the reproducer gg
returns to initial position, but may be con-
trolled or regulated by the operator after the
reproducer has moved forward from its ini-
tial position.

2. The combination with the arm of a go
gramophone mounted Avith a universal joint
having a pin forming a part thereof, of a
shaft pivotally mounted on said pin, a pro-
jection on said shaft, a lug on said arm Avith
which said projection engages, means for 95
SAvinging said shaft, and means for rotating
said shaft.

3. The combination with the SAvinging
arm of a gramophone, of a shaft connected
therewith and adapted to raise and swing ^qO
said arm, a magnet for causing said shaft to
swing, a driven worm, a threaded member
adapted to engage at times Avith said worm,
and a connection betAveen said shaft and saicl
member for swinging said shaft. 3^05

4. The combination Avith the movable
sound reproducing member of a gramophone,
of a shaft for raising and SAvinging said
member, means connecting said shaft and
said reproducing member, a magnet adapted hq
to cause said shaft to swing, an arm on said
shaft, a threaded member Avith which said
arm engages, a driA'en worm Avith which said
threaded member engages Avhen the magnet
actuates said arm, a source of electricity, an 115
electrical contact device operated by said
shaft, circuits from said som'ce of electricity

to said contact, device and magnet, the ar-
rangement being such that Avhen said shaft
has moved a predetermined distance, said 120
contact device Avill close the circuit through
the magnet, and the reproducer will be re-
turned to starting position when said con-
tact device will again open the circuit
tiirongh said magnet. 125

5. In a gramophone, the combination of
n.eans for turning the record, a SAvinging
arm carrying the reproducer head, a shaft
connected Avith said arm Avhereby the arm
may be raised and swung, a magnet for ac- 130

1,072,346

tuating said shaft to raise the arm, means
for turning said shaft for swinging said
arm, a source of electricity connected with
said magnet, and a contact device operated
6 by said shaft whereby the circuit througli
said magnet may be closed and opened at
predetermined times.

6. The combination with the swinging
arm of a gramophone, of a shaft connected
10 therewith for raising and swinging the
same, a magnet for swinging said shaft, a
driven worm, connections between said worm
and said shaft for turning the latter at pre-
determined times, an arm from said shaft, a

contact finger on said arm, an adjustable 15
contact member with which said finger is
adapted to make contact to close a circuit
through said magnet, a second finger on said
arm, a horizontal contact member with which
said finger maintains contact as the arm is 20
^wung, said finger remaining in contact
therewith until the gramophone arm returns
to starting position.

GUSTAVE MELING.

Witnesses :

Irene Forkest,
Edward M. Tellso.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

Washington, D, C."

L. LUMIERE.

ACOUSTICAL INSTRUMENT.
APPLICATION FILED MAT 18, 1910,

1,072,477.

Patented Sept. 9, 1913.

-F/c.I:

-F/C.2.

F/G.4. F/C.3. F/C.5.

3i/

CO.. WASHINGTON, D. C.

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

LOUIS LUMIERE, OF LYON, FRANCE, ASSIGNOR TO VICTOR TALKING MACHINE COM-
PANY, OF CAMDEN, NEW JERSEY, A CORPORATION OF NEW JERSEY.

ACOUSTICAL INSTRUMENT.

1,072,477.

Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Sept. 9, 191.3.

Application filed May 18, 1910. Serial No. 561,S28.

To all ivhoiii it may concern :

l>e it knoAvn tlint I, Loi is Limiere, a citi-
zen of the Republic of Fiance, residing at
Lyon, in the Republic of Fritnce, have in-
N-ented certain new and u.sefid Improve-
n ents in Acou.stical Instruments, of which
the following is a full, clear, and complete
disclosure.

This invention relates to improvements in
acoustical instruments such as telephones,
nucrophones, stethoscopes, talking ma-
chines, musical instruments, and in general
aiw instrument used for the reception or
transmission of sounds.

The invention consists in a certain con-
struction of sound box for such instruments,
the details of which will be giA'en below.

The essential features of the invention are
an extensible chamber Avith a stationary
wall, a movable wall adapted to be recipro-
cated toward and away from the stationar})
wall, and means between the two Avails for
preventing the escape of air betAveen them
bu.t alloAving perfect freedom of the mov-
able wall to move in unchanged form and
to any extent that may be practically re-
([uired.

According to this invention a sound box
for acoustical instruments is obtained com-
prising a stationary Avall, huAing an open-
ing therein for the passage of the sound
waves, a movable wall adapted to be recip-
rocated toAvard and away from the station-
ary wall, and means betAveea the edges of
the movable wall and the stationary Avail
to prevent the escape of air between them,
snch means, hoAvever, leaving the movable
wall free to move as a whole in substantially
unchanged form to aiw extent that may
pi'actically l)e recjuired, and offering sub-
stantially no resistance to the moA^ement of
the movable wall Avhatever the position of
the latter Avith regard to the stationary Avail,
so that the position and moAement of the
45 moA'able wall is regulated entirely by the
sound AvaA'es or means through which the
movable Avail is reciprocated. Further, ac-
cording to this invention the whole of one
side of the extensible chamber moAes, and
not merely the central portion thereof, thus
producing a more effective reproduction.

In the accompanA'ing drawing the iuA^en
tion is illustrated as applied to the sound
box of a talking machine.

is a sectional elevation of one

20

zo

30

35

40

50

55

Figure 1

60

65

ciuistr action of talking machine sound box
embodying the invention ; Fig. 2 a similar
vieAV of the modified form of this inven-
tion. Fig. 3 is a similar vicAV of a further
modification of this invention. ,Fig. 4 illus-
trates a modified form of this invention
Avhich has been found of value for obtaining
rigidity in the movable Avail; Fig. 5 shoAvs
a further modified construction of this in-
A-ention for the same purpose.

The sound boxes which are usually em-
ployed in talking machines and manj'' other
acoustical instriuuents are at present con-
structed Avith a chamber closed u])on one
side by means of a thin diaplu-agm held at 70
its edges. This diaphragm, Avhich may be
of glass, mica, metal or other suitable ma-
terial, is set in A'ibration in the case of talk-
ing machines by means of a suitable trans-
mitting device connecting it Avith the needle 75
or sapphire, Avhich folloAvs the grooA'e in the
disk or cylindei' cari-ying the phonogram.
In this arrangement, certain effects due to
the elasticity of the diaphragm and the
formation of nodal lines render unnatural 80
the quality of the sound obtained and limit
the practical dimensions of the apparatus.

The sound box forming tlie subject of
tins in\ention does not present these ob-
jections, consisting as it does of an extensi- 85
ble chamber closed upon its tAvo opposite
^ides by rigid Avails Avhich can approach or
recede from one another. These opposite
sides may be connected together and the
space betAveen them closed in a substantially 90
air tight manner by a suitable integumental
mounting, and in this form of my inven-
tion that may be luiited by means of a flexi-
ble folding joint of any suitable thin in-
elastic, solid material in the manner of a 95
bellows or accordion. I may, hoAvever, dis-
pense Avith the said flexible mounting be-
tween the said Avails and arrange one wall
to slide Avithin the other like a piston.

Under the action of the stylus folloAving 100
the phonographic sound line, the said Avails
are caused to approach or recede from one
another, and these movements produce va-
riations of the pressure of the air within the
sound box. It is these variations Avhich are 105
the essential cause of the production of
sound. The interior of the sound box so
constructed may be connected to an ampli-
fying horn as in other Avell knoAvn appa-
ratus. 110

^

1,072,477

In Fig. 1 the rigid sides a and 5 of the
sound box are connected together by means
of an integumental mounting which may
consist of a joint of folding solid, substan-
g tially inelastic material e in the manner of
a bellows and are of any convenient form.
This folding closure for the space betAveen
the stationary and movable Avails permits
the movable wall to move, uninfluenced by

■j^Q the said closure, and the fold of the closure
will be disposed at an angle to the plane of
the movable wall Avhen unstressed. When
the movable wall is vibrated, however, to
cause it to approach and recede from the

j^5 stationary wall, said closure will vary in
distance from the axis of the sound box,
changing or altering its position and shape
without being extended or stretched. The
side a is stationary, its mass being sufficient

20 ^'^ S^^^^ ^^ considerable inertia relatively to
the movable parts of the sound box. The
side &, on the other hand, is very light, and
is connected Avith the stylus c by means of
the stylus bar d^ Avhich amplifies the move-

25 ments of the stylus. The interior of the
sound box connects Avith the amplifying
horn of the machine through the opening /.
The material e extends around three sides
of the sound box, the movable wall h being

30 hinged to the stationary side a at the top
by a suitable flexible joint.

The arrangement shown in Fig. 2 differs
from that illustrated in Fig. 1 only in that
the material e in this construction extends

35 around the whole perimeter of the sides a
and h. These sides are arranged parallel
to one another and they may be circular or
of any other convenient form.

It is pointed out that the flexible connec-

40 tion which, according to the present inven-
tion, is used between the movable Avall and
the stationary wall of the sound box occu-
pies a position in which the movement of
the moA^able wall occasions practically no

45 strain or tension whatever to be put upon
the flexible connection, and that conse-
(}uently there is practically no resistance to
be overcome by the movable wall in foUoAV-
ing the A'ibrations of the stylus. In this re-

50 spect the present iuA^ention differs materially
from previously known constructions of
sound box, and in particular from the con-
struction in Avhich a rigid diaphragm is fur-
nished Avith a surrounding border of flexible

55 or elastic material such as membrane or
rubber, which lies in substantially the same
plane as the diaphragm, i. e., in a plane at
right angles to the direction of the vibra-
tions of the diaphragm, or movable Avail.

60 This annular border is held between the dia-
phragm on one side and some such device
as clamping rings on the other side. If the
clamping rings are close to the edge of the
diaphragm, the flexible connection Avill not

65 be of sufficient extent to alloAV of entire f ree-

85

9C

95

dom of movement of the diaphragm without
some strain or tension being put upon the
flexible connection; if some distance is
placed between the diaphragm edge and the
clamping means, there is a loss of efficiency y^
in reproduction by reason of the space sur-
rounding the edge of the diaphragm, the
air in this space not being subject to com-
pression and rarefaction under the action of
the diaphragm in the same degree as the air K,g
occupying the central space within the
sound box. According to the present inven-
tion, however, the whole of one side of the
chamber approaches the opposite side, and
this effect is secured without abandoning an ^g
efficient and absolute closure betAveen the
movable and stationary Avails, without which
a satisfactory and efficient reproduction is
impossible, as an escape of air at the edges
results in less efficient reproduction.

In Fig. 3 is illustrated a construction in
Avhich the folding joint e is rej)laced by a
rubber packing g adapted to roll between
the cylindrical surfaces of the tAvo sides a
and b. This rubber packing is made to lie
lightly between the tAvo surfaces so as
to be only just in contact therewith and
at the same time effect a complete closure.
The friction between the rubber and con-
tacting surfaces is reduced to a minimum
owing to the rolling action of the rubber
packing. Moreover, the resistance to be
overcome is practically constant whateA^er
the extent of the movement of the movable
Avail. It is evident that any other system ^qq
of movable joint offering no ai^preciable re-
sistance may be employed for attaining the
desired end. In order to obtain simultane-
ously sufficient rigidity and lightness in the
movable side &, so that it will reciprocate in jcs
practically unchanged form, it is found de-
sirable to construct this side of very thin
metal and to render it rigid by stamping it
out in some such form as those shown by
Avay of example in Figs. 4 and 5 of the ac- no
companying drawings.

In Fig. 4 the movable Avail is dished in
shape, the side & being stamped in the form
of a spherical cup, thus proAdding a surface,
the parts of which lie in different planes, 115
and is further reinforced around its periph-
ery by a raised edge or flange h. The side a
is recessed to have a profile Avhich may be
made to conform or folloAV substantially the
contour of the adjacent side of the moA^able 120
Avail, but the said side or wall a is not neces-
sarily identical with or parallel to that of
the side &. The diameter of the moA^able
Avail &, hoAvever, should be as great as that
of the adjoining opening in the stationary 12!;
Avail; that is to say, as great in diameter as
the diameter of the concave face of the mov-
able Avail h. The raised edge h may be
turned toward either the convex or the con-
caA^e side of the movable wall h. It has been 130

1,072,47?

d

10

20

30

35

40

50

found that good results are obtained with a
box of the following dimensions. For the
radius of the spherical cup h a distance of
about 120 mm. may be taken and about 40
mm. for the diameter of the cup. The dis-
tance between the walls a and h vavLj be
about 2.5 mm. or approximately ^V of the
diameter of the cup b. The connecting strip
e may be made for instance of gold-beater's
skin, or very thin paper, or any other sub-
stance which oifers a minimum of resist-
ance to folding and possesses but very little
resiliency of its own. The strip e may con-
venienth' be attached to the two surfaces a
and b held at a fixed distance apart, and
Avhen it has i^roperly adhered, the two walls
a and b may be brought closer together to
the position they occupy in actual use, and
the slack of the connecting material ]3ressed
gently inward between the two. With this
arrangement, the slightest movement of the
wall b toward the wall a produces a com-
pression throughout the entire chamber.
The spherical cup form shown in Fig. 4 may
be altered to a parabolic form, or to that of
a right circular cone, or generally speaking
to anv form which Avill give rigidity to the
side b. This rigidity ma}^ also be obtained
by means of moldings or corrugations ar-
I'anged radially as indicated in Fig. 5. The
stationary massive side a may be given any
suitable form, and may form the counter
part to the movable side b. It is to be un-
derstood that this construction of the mov-
able side may be applied to all forms of
sound box mentioned above.

Having thus described my invention,
what I claim and desire to protect by Let-
ters Patent of the United States, is : —

1. A sound box for acoustical instruments
comprising a stationary wall, a movable
Avail, means for reciprocating the movable
wall toward and away fi'om the stationary
wall, and flexible inelastic means uniting the

45 tAvo Avails and completing the chamber of the
sound box, but haA'ing substantially no ap-
preciable influence on the position of the
movable Avail relatively to the stationary
Avail Avithin the ordinary range of the move-
ment of the movable Avail.

2. A .sound box for acoustical instruments
comprising a stationar}'^ wall, a movable
Avail, means for reciprocating the movable
Avail tOAvard and aAvay from the stationary

55 wall, and yielding, inelastic, folding means
Tiniting the two Avails and completing the
chamber of the sound box, but haAdng sub-
stantially no appi-eciable influence on the po-
sitions of the movable Avail relatiA'ely to the

60 stationary wall within the ordinary range
of the movement of the movable wall, and
leaving the movable Avail practicall}^ free to
moA'e as a whole in substantially'unchanged
for«i to any extent that may be practically

65 required, and offering substantially no re-

sistance to the moA^ment of the movable
Avail, AvhateA'er the position of the latter may
be AA'ith respect to the stationary wall within
the limits of the movement of said movable
Avail. '70

3. A somid box for acou.stical instruments
comprising a staticmary wall, a rigid mov-
able wall adapted to be reciprocated toward
and aAvay from the stationary Avail in sub-
stantially unchanged form, and means form- 75
ing a flexible, folding, inelastic joint be-
tAveen tlie tAvo Avails AvhichalloAvs practically
free movement of the movable wall in un-
changed form within the limits of the move-
ment of said movable wall. gO

4. A sound box comprising a stationary
Avail, a moA-able wall and means in the form
of a yielding accordion \A:\\{ connecting
said stationary wall to said moA'able Avail.

5. A sound box for acoustical instriiments 35
comprising a rigid movable wall of dished
form, a stationary Avail, a folding, inelastic,
flexible means uniting the tAvo walls and
completing the chamber of the sound box,
but haA'ing substantially no ap]5i'eciable in- 90
fluence on the position of the inovable wall
relativeh^ to the stationary wall within the
ordinary range of operation of the device.

6. A sound box for acoustical instruments
comprising a stationary wall, a movable Avail 95
means for reciprocating the movable wall
toward and aAvay from the stationary wall
and means in the form of an accordion plait
between the two walls forming a closure at
their perimeters and completing the cham- lOO
ber of tlie sound box but haAnng practically

no appreciable influence on the position of
the movable Avail relatiA'ely to the stationary
Avail Avithin an ordinary range of opera-
tion of the device. 105

7. In a sound box, the combination with a
stationary wall of a movable Avail, and means
connecting said Avails and forming with said
Avails an inelastic flexible folding closure.

8. In a sound box, a fixed wall, a movable lio
Avail, and an integumental mounting for said
movable Avail attached thereto and offering
substantially no resistance to reciprocatoiy
movements of said movable wall under nor-
mal conditions. 11-5

9. In a sound box for acoustical instru-
ments, a relatiA'ely stationarA^ wall, a mov-
able Avail, a member arranged to reciprocate
said movable Avail and a closure of yielding,
solid material attached to both of said Avails, 120
the movable Avail being held in operative po-
sition solely by the member reciprocating
the same.

10. In a sound box for acoustical instru-
ments a relatiA'el}^ stationary Avail, a moA^able 125
Avail, a closure of A'ielding, solid material for
the space therebetAveen attached to both of
said Avails, and a member wholly controlling
the position and moA'ement of the movable
wall. 130

1,072,477

11. In a sound box for acoustical instru-
ments, a relatively stationary wall, a mov-
able wall, and a normally folded closure for
the space therebetween adapted to permit

5 uninfluenced the motion of the movable Avail.

12. In a sound box for acoustical instru-
ments, a relatively stationary wall, a mov-
able comparatively rigid wall and a flexible
normally folded closure arranged in the

10 space therebetween to which the stationary
wall and the movable wall are attached.

13. A sound box for acoustical instru-
ments comprising a relatively stationary
wall provided with an opening, a substan-

15 tially rigid movable wall spaced from said
stationary wall, and a flexible, folding clo-
sure for the space between said Avails ar-
ranged and adapted to permit uninfluenced
the movement of the said movable wall, the

20 movable Avail being of as great area as the
said opening.

14. A sound box for acoustical instru-
ments comprising a relatively stationary
wall provided with an opening, a substan-

25 tially rigid 'movable AA-all spaced from said
stationary wall, and a flexible, folding clo-
sure for the space between said walls ar-
ranged and adapted to permit uninfluenced
the movement of the said movable Avail, the

30 movable AAall being of as great diameter as
the diameter of the said opening.

15. A sound box for acoustical instru-
ments comprising a relatively stationary
wall, a rigid movable wall and a folding clo-

35 sure for the space therebetween, which, as
the movable wall approaches and recedes
from the stationary wall, A'aries its mini-
mum distance from the axis of the sound
box.

40 IG. A sound box for acoustical instru-
ments comprising a relatively fixed wall and
a chamber of which the sides are formed by
said relatively fixed Avail and a moA^able
wall, while the edge of the chamber is

45 formed by a closure disposed between the
said two Avails and adapted to exercise a
compressing action upon the air in the space
between the tAvo Avails upon reciprocation of
the movable wall toward the fixed wall, but

50 not to restrain the free movement of the
movable wall.

17. A sound box for acoustical instru-

ments, comprising a movable wall and a rel-
atiA-ely . stationary wall forming normally
substantially parallel adjoining surfaces, one 55
permanently concave and the other perma-
nently convex, and means for reciprocating
said moA'able wall in accordance with a
sound record.

18. A sound box comprising a stationary 60
wall, a Avail movable toward and away from
said stationary wall, means for reciprocat-
ing said movable wall toward and away
from said stationary wall, and normally
folded means connecting said walls and 65
forming therewith an inclosure said folded
means being arranged and adapted to per-
mit the substantially free movement of said
movable wall in any direction.

19. In a sound box, the combination with 70
a relativelj^ stationary wall, of a moA'able
diaphragm, and solid flexible means con-
necting said diaphragm to said wall and ar-
ranged to permit substantially free move-
ment of said diapliragm in any direction. 75

20. In a sound box, the combination with
a relatively stationary wall, of a moA^able
diaphragm, and solid normally folded flexi-
ble means connecting said diaphragm to said
wall and arranged to permit substantially 80
free movement of said diaphragm in any di-
rection.

21. In a sound box, the combination with
a relatiA'ely stationary Avail, of a movable
diaphragm, and solid flexible means connect- 85
ing said diaphragm to said wall, said means
being proA'ided Avith an annular fold spaced
betAveen said diaphragm and said wall and
arranged to permit substantially free moA"e-
ment of said diaphragm in any direction 90
with respect to said wall.

22. A movable wall, a fixed Avail, a closure
attached to both of said Avails comprising
relatively movable elements, said elements
being re-positioned during the movement of 95
said movable wall by substantially only bod-
ily movements of said elements.

In Avitness whereof I liaA^e hereunto set my
hand this 26th day of April, A. D. 1910.

LOUIS LUMIEEE.

Witnesses :

Gaston Jeanniaux,
Maein Vachon.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

Washington, D. C."

1,072,529.

G. THIEL.

TALKING MACHINE.

APPLICATION PILED JAN. 6, 1911.

Patented Sept. 9, 1913.

^x^.2.

M^/

.._./?.

J^^.3.

■3

fc«^(

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

GXJSTAV THIEL, OF BERLIN, GERMANY.
TAIKING-MACHINE.

1,073,539.

Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Sept. 9, 1913.

Application filed January 5, 1911. Serial No. 600,865.

To all whom it may concern:

Be it known that I, Gustav Thiel, a sub-
ject of the German Emperor, and a resident
of Tilsiter.strasse 67, Berlin, Germany, have
5 invented a certain new and useful Improve-
ment in or Eelating to Talking-Machines;
and I do hereby declare the following to be
a full, clear, and exact description of the
invention, such as will enable others skilled

10 in tlie art to which it apperttiins to make
and use the same, reference being had to the
accompanying drawing, and to letters of
reference mai'ked thereon, which form a
part of this specification.

15 This invention relates to talldng machines.

The invention has particular reference to

the connection of the sound box to the sound

arm by eccentrically connecting the box to

the sound arm.

20 Heretofore, in order to permit the sound
box and needle to rise and fall to follow
closely the record groove, it has been cus-
tomary, for instance, to either pivotally con-
nect the inner end of the sound arm to the

25 horn, construct the sound arm of two
lengths and pivotally connect one to the
other longitudinally, or, in some similar
manner, provide for vertical movement of
the sound box and needle together with a

30 portion of or the whole of the sound arm.
It is well loiown that in talking machines,
the interposition necessary in the common
forms of construction, of loose joints, curves,
or any other obstruction that breaks the de-

35 sirable continuity of smooth surface of the
sound arm between the sound box and the
horn, injures the quality of the sound by
brealring up the regular formation and
transmission of the sound Avaves; such con-

40 struction also diminishes the force of the
sound waves. There is also another serious
objection to the common forms of construc-
tion above referred to, and that is, the
weight of the sound arm which is carried

45 by the needle, causes the needle, as it travels
over the record groove, to produce the dis-
agreeable scratching sound which is so no-
ticeable in machines of this construction.
Consequently, it is desirable to effect a con-

50 struction free, if possible, from the above
defects, and I have succeeded in largely ac-
complishing this purpose by securing the
sound box to the sound arm in such manner,
as by eccentrically mounting it thereon, that

it will rotate freely thereon, thus permitting 55
the needle to rise and fall in response to any
irregularities in the bottom of the sound
groove, and also permitting the needle to
adjust itself to any variation in the plane of
rotation of the record. Owing to this ar- 60
rangement, no separate link is required be-
tween the sound arm and the sound box or
between two sections of the sound arm itself,
or between the sound arm and the horn, thus
providing a sound arm with a con- 65
tinuous smooth inner surface and there-
fore free from the objections above re-
ferred to. Owing to the eccentric mount-
ing, the sound box, under the action
of its own weight, will be pressed against 70
the record disk. The construction is car-
ried out in practice in t^uch manner
that a branch is mounted on the sound box
and introduced into the sound arm, so that
the sound box and branch can rotate on the 75
soimd arm. This construction is improved
according to the present invention by ar-
ranging over the branch of the sound box a
rotatable sleeve, for increasing the mobility
of the sound box and for improving the tight 80
joint for the soimd. The said branch is
provided with a pin guided in the slot of the
sleeve. This sleeve is provided with a pin
which is introduced into a slot of the sound
arm. 85

In the accompanying drawing Figure 1 is
a side elevation of the sound box with the
sound arm in section. Fig. 2 is a section on
the line 2 2, Fig. 1, through the sovmd arm
and the branch of the sound box, and Fig. 3 90
is a plan of a portion of the soimd arm with
the slot.

The sound box is marked a, and the sound
arm 5. Over the branch e of the sound box is
placed a sleeve d provided with a pin ^ by 95
means of which it engages with the slot h
of the sound arm. A pin g on the branch e
of the sound box engages with a slot / of
the sleeve d, so that the sound box and
branch can freely rotate in the sleeve d. 100

What I claim is:

1. In a tallring machine, the combination
of a sound arm. an eccentrically positioned
sound box therein having a neck, and a
sleeve non-rotatably engaging said arm and 105
rotatably engaging said neck.

2. In a tallring machine, the combination
of a sound box with an eccentrically dis-

1,072,529

posed neck thereon provided with a sleeve
engaging member, a sleeve freely rotatable
on said neck and provided with a slot to
receive said member, a sonnd arm engaging
member on said sleeve and a sound arm
slotted to receive said last named member
and sleeve non-rotatably therein.

In testii^iojiy whereof I affix my signature
in presence of two witnesses.

GUSTAV THIEL.

Witnesses :

Henry Hasper,

WOLDEMAR HaUPT.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

Washington, D. C."

1,072,854.

E. E. JOHNSON & J. C. ENGLISH.

TALKING MACHINE.
APPLICATION PILED MAE. 24, 1911.

Patented Sept. 9, 1913.

2 SHEETS-SHEET 1.

_/?^.y.

,^6

J^ytg.3

/NVCNTORS

WITNESSES

By

/(/nu^

ATTORNEY

COLUMBIA PLANOGRAPH CO.. WASHINGTON. D. ■

E. E, JOHNSON & J. C. ENGLISH.

TALKING MACHINE.

APPLICATION FILED MAE. 24, 1911.

1,072,854.

Patented Sept. 9, 1913.

2 SHEETS-SHEET 2.

77 32

JFyt^,Z.

J^^.€^.

-f^ ^G

i

3J-

m

i

jS^7 63

G3

GO_

^^6-

-f~n:

1 fc=i=i=

;^rfff3J±^f^

-3

■32

u

^O _Z^' _5"J"
^7

T

.iS»

WITNESSES

BY

CS^^-* INVENTORS

ATTORNEY

COLUMBIA PLANOORAPH CO., WASHINGTON, U. C.

ITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

ELDRIDGE R. JOHNSON, OF MEEION STATION, PENNSYLVANIA, AND JOHN C. ENGLISH,
OF CAMDEN, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNORS TO VICTOR TALKING MACHINE COMPANY, A
CORPORATION OF NEW JERSEY.

TALKING-MACHINE.

1,073,854.

Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Sept. 9, 1913.

Application filed March 24, 1911. Serial No. 616,678.

To all lohom it may concern ;

Be it known that we, Eldridge R. John-
son and John C. English, both citizens of
the United States, and residents of Merion
5 Station, county of Montgomery, State of
PennsylA'ania, and Camden, county of Cam-
den, and State of New Jersey, respectively,
have invented certain new and useful Im-
provements in Talking-Machines, of which

10 the following is a specification.

This invention relates to certain new and
useful improvements in talking machines,
as will be fully described hereinafter, and
particularly pointed out in the appended

15 claims.

In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1
is a side elevation partially in vertical cen-
tral section of a talking machine constructed
in accordance with this invention; Fig. 2

20 a top plan view of a poi-tion of the same;
and Figs. 3 and 4 are a top plan view and
a fragmentary front elevation respectively
of the machine with parts removed.

Referring to the drawings, one embodi-

25 ment of this invention comprises a substan-
tially rectangular casing 1, including a hori-
zontal top wall 2, vertical side walls 3 and 4
and a vertical back wall 5. These walls are
preferably made of wood and are prefer-

30 ably comparatively thick and rigid. The
bottom of this casing 1 comprises a hori-
zontal rectangular frame consisting of side
strips 10 and 11, and end strips 12 and 13.
These strips are preferably made of wood

35 and are relatively thick and comparative^
rigid and are mitered or otherwise rigidly
secured together at their ends. This frame
is rigidly secured to the lower edges of the
back wall 5 and the side walls 3 and 4, the

40 strips preferably projecting inwardly and
outwardly upon opposite sides of these
walls.

A substantial!}' rectangular sounding
board 14 forms the major portion of the

45 bottom of the casing. The margin of this
sounding board is securely fastened with
glue or otherwise to the side and end strips
of the frame 10, 11, 12, 13 within a rec-
tangular recess 15 in the upper side of the

50 frame and extending around the inner mar-
gin thereof. This sounding board may be

provided with one or more, in this instance
two oppositely disposed scrolled apertures
16. like those in the top of a violin, and ar-
ranged in the rear portion of the board. 55

The casing 1 is supported upon four short
standards 20 projecting downwardly there-
from and rigid with the frame 10, 11, 12,
13 at the bottom of the casing. The lower
ends of these standards are each tipped with 60
rubber 21, or other similar yielding or re-
silient material.

The front of the casing 1 forms the mouth
or delivery end of a sound amplifier, and is
preferably provided with a pair of vertical 65
doors 25 hinged to the opposite side walls 3
and 4 respectively and opening outwardly.
The front of the casing 1 is also preferably
provided with a suitable vertical screen 26
arranged inside of the doors 25 and con- 70
sisting of a plurality of horizontally verti-
cally spaced slats 30 terminally secured to
vertical end strips 31 and is arranged to
conceal the interior of the casing but to
permit of the delivery of sound waves there- 75
through.

The usual or any suitable horizontal turn-
table 35 is arranged slightly above the top
wall 2 of the casing and is mounted upon
the upper end of a vertical spindle 36, which 80
extends rotatably through the top wall 2
and is supported in suitable bearings ar-
ranged within the casing and depending
from the top wall.

Arranged above the turntable 35 is the 85
usual sound box or sound reproducer 45,
which is suitably connected to the free end
of a hollow tone arm 46 with which it com-
municates, the sound box being arranged
to cooperate with a record 38 upon the turn- 90
table.

The outer end of the tone arm 46 curves
downwardly and engages rotatively on the
upper free end of a downwardly flaring hol-
low metal bracket 47 with which it com- 95
municates. The hollow flaring bracket 47
terminates at its lower end in an inwardly
flaring sound amplifier socket integral
therewith and comprising two inwardly di-
verging oppositely disposed flat vertical 100
walls or flanges 50 and an inwardly and
downwardly extending flat longitudinally

2

1,072,854

horizontal wall or flange 61 terminally con-
nected to the lower ends of the vertical
flanges 50 and integral therewith. This
socket fits snugly in a corresponding recess
5 52 in the npper portion of the back wall
5 of the casing and projects inwardly into
the space inclosed by the casing.

Integral with the rear portion of tlie
sound amplifier socket 50, 51 and resting

10 against the outer surface of the back wall
5 are oppositely disposed flat vertical flanges
53 and a flat longitudinally horizontal
flange 64 terminally conriected to the lower
ends of these vertical flanges. Screws 66

15 extending through these flanges 53 and 54
corinect the hollow bracket 47 securely dud
silbstfihtially rigidly to the casing.

l-t'or amplifying and deflecting the sound
\Vaves in the casihg 1, one or more sounding

20 boards may be arranged to project within
the casing from the amplifier socket 50, 51 ;
for instance, one sounding board 60 may be
inclined from the lower portion of the
socket downwardly and forwardly in the

25 form of a truncated triangle, having side
edges 61 diverging forwardly from the
soclvet toward the front of the casing, the
rear end of the sounding board fitting into
the socket and being secured by screws 66

30 or otlierwise to the tipper surface of the
longitudinal horizontal flange 51 of the
socket. Vertical sounding' boards 62 and 63
may be arranged to extend upwardly within
the casing from the side edges 61 respec-

35 tively of the downwardl}^ inclined sounding
board 60. These latter soimding boards 62
and 63 diverge forwardly from opposite
sides respectively of the socket 50, 51 and
their upper edges 64 are preferably parallel

40 to, but spaced slightly below, the inner hori-
zontal surface of the top wall of the casing.
The lower edges of the vertical sounding
boards 62 and 63 are securely connected by
glue or otherwise to the diverging side edges

45 61 respectivelj'^ of the downwardly inclined
sounding board 60, and the rear ends of the
vertical sounding boards are secured by
screAvs 65 or otherwise to the inner surfaces
respectively of the vertical flanges 50 of

50 the amplifier socket. The upper edges 64 of
each vertical sounding board 62 and 63 may
be reinforced by a slender wooden strip 66
flush therewith and secured thereto by glue
or otherwise.

55 The iisual or any suitable actuating mech-
anism 70 for the turntable spindle 36 is ar-
ranged within the casiiig, preferably de-
pending from the top wall 2 thereof and
into the space Yl substantially inclosed by

60 the top wall 2, and the thin diverging sound-
ing boards 60, 62 and 63.

The rigid, vertical bridsre or sound post
75 of wood or other suitable material may
be arranged between the central portion of

65 the downwardly inclined sounding board 60

and the central portion of the horizontal
soimding board 14 between the apertures Ki
of the board, to transmit the sound vibra-
tions between these two boards, the ends of
the post being in contact with the two Ijoards ^q
respectively. The sound post may be omit-
ted, if preferred.

The three sounding boards 60, 02 and 63
inclosed by the casing preferably terminate
at their front ends 76 in a vertical plane ^g
spaced slightly in the rear of the rear edges
of the slats 30* of the screen 26 and the outer
surfaces of these front ends are slightly
beveled as at 77 to permit of the maximum
divergence of the sounding boards and at the 30
same time to leave the ends to vibrate unre-
strained and to provide passages around
these ends to permit communication or the
passage of sound Avaves between the space
surfolmded by these sounding boards and 35
the space between the outer sides of these
boards and the outer walls of the casing.
The three sounding boards 60, 62 and 63
are thus entirely supported by the amplifier
socket 50, 51 and by the sound post 75 and 90
the latter is proportioned so that its upper
end receives only a slight pressure, if any,
from the downwardly inclined sounding
board 60. These three sounding boards
forln a three-sided device which cooperntef-; 95
with the top wall of the casing from the
major portion or delivery end of a sound
conduit or amj^lifier through Avhich sounds
are transmitted from the hollow bracket 47.

In the operation of this form of the in- 100
vention, sound Avaves produced by the sound
box are transmitted through the tone arm
46 and hollow bracket 47 into the space Tl
containing the actuating mechanism 70 and
substantially inclosed by the top Avail 2 and i05
the diA^erging sounding boards 60, 62 and
63. The sound waves in this space cause the
diverging sounding boards to vibrate and
the vibration is transmitted to the bottom
horizontal sounding board through the 110
soiind post 75. The sounds produced are
delivered from the machine mainlj^^ through
the screen 26 Avhen the doors 25 are open,
but some sound is transmitted through the
horizontal sounding board 14 at the bottom 115
of the casino- and is delivered from the ma-
chine througli the spaces between the stand-
ards 20 of the casing.

In vicAv of the fact that the theories of the
operation, and the advantages of this con- 120
struction may not be fully known or appre-
ciated at this time, the right is reserA^ed to
supplement this disclosure by further state-
ments in the specification in regard to the
mode of operation of the device, and in re- 125
gard to the advantages of its A'^arious fea-
tures.

Although only a single form has been
illustrated in which this invention may be
embodied, the invention is not limited to the 130

1,072,854

a

particular form described as the oonstrnc-
tion may be varied to meet various condi-
tions without departing from the spirit of
this invention or the scope of the appended
g claims.

Having tints fully described this inven-
tion, we claim and desire to pz'otect by Let-
ters Patent of the United States:

1. In a talking machine, the combination
jQ with a cabinet providing a compartment

having a sounding-board forming an exte-
rior Avail thereof, of hollow sound amplify-
ing means projecting freely within said com-
partment, a_ rotary record support, and ac-
25 tuating means for said support arranged
within said compartment and within said
amplifying means.

2. In a talking machine, the combination
with a cabinet providing a compartment

20 having a sounding - board ^Drovided with
spaced apertures and forming an exterior
v;all of said compartment, of sound amplify-
ing means, including a sounding-board pro-
jecting freely within said compartment, and

25 a bridge connecting said sounding-boards
and contacting with said first mentioned
sounding-board at a point between said ap-
ertures.

3. In a talking machine, the combination
30 with a cabinet providing a compartment

having a sounding board ]H-ovided with
spaced apertures, of sound amplifying
means, including a sounding board pro-
jecting Avithin said compartment, and a
35 bridge connecting said soimding boards and
contacting with said first mentioned sound-
ing board at the point between said aper-
tures.

4. In a talking machine, the combination
40 with sound reproducing means, of vibratory

sound amplifying means communicating
thereAvith, a sounding board provided with
spaced apertures, and means connecting said
amplifying means to the portion of said
45 sounding board betAveen said apertures.

5. A talking machine comprising a cas-
ing including a sounding board forming a
part of the bottom thereof, and a sounding
board within said casing and forming one

50 wall of a sound conduit, having a delivery
end projecting freely in said casing, a bridge
connecting said sounding boards, and actu-
ating means for said machine located in said
conduit.

55 0. A talking machine comprising a casing
including a sounding board forming part of
the exterior thereof, and a plurality of
sounding boards projecting freely within
said casing and forming part of a sound con-

60 duit having an open side and an open end
and actuating mechanism for said machine
located in said conduit.

7. In a talking machine, the combination
with a cabinet providing a compartment,

65 having a substantially horizontal sounding-

board foriiiiug the bottom wall of said com-
partment and the bottom Avail of said cabi-
net, of lioUoAv sound amplifying means ex-
tending in said compartment and haAdng an
(ipen delivery end facing in a substantially 70
horizontal direction, and having an open
upper side facing in a substantially vertical
direction, and bounded by Avails having lon-
gitudinal edges spaced from the inner sur-
face of the compartment. 75

8. In a talking machine, the combination
with a cabinet providing a compartment,
having a substantially horizontal sounding-
board foi'ming the bottom wall of said com-
partment and the bottom wall of said cabi- go
net, of hollow sound amplifying means ex-
tending in said compartment and having an
open delivery end facing in a substantially
horizontal direction, and having an open
upper side facing in a substantially vertical 35
direction and boimded by walls having lon-
gitudinal edges spaced from the inner sur-
face of the compartment, and a rotary rec-
ord support arranged aboA^e said compart-
ment and actuating means for said support 90
ai'ranged in said amplifying means.

9. In a talking machine, the combination
with a casing including a comparatiA^ely
thick and non-vibratory wall and a com-
pai'atively thin Avail forming a soiuiding 95
board, of vibratory sound amplifying means
secured to said comparatively thick wall
and projecting in said casing, and mean&
connecting said amplifying means and said
sounding board substantially centrally only, ^qo
to transmit sound vibrations from said am-
plifying means to said sounding board.

10. In a talking machine, the combination
Avith a casing including a comparatively
thick and non-vibratory wall and a compar- 105
atiAely thin Avail forming a sounding board,'

of vibratory sound amplifying means se-
cured to said comparatively thick Avail and
projecting in said casing, and means con-
necting said amplifying means and said no
sounding board substantially centrally to
transmit sound vibrations from said ampli- '

fying means to said sounding board, said
amplifying means being otherwise free of
said casing. 115

11. In a talking machine, the combination
Avith a casing including a sounding board, of
soimd amplifying means extending in said
casing and secured to a wall of said casing
other than said sounding board, said ampli- 120
fying means being connected substantially
centrally to said sounding board, and said
amplifying means being otherwise free of
said casing.

12. In a talking machine, the combination 125
with a Anbratory sounding board, of sound
reproducing means arranged to transmit
sound Avaves against said sounding board, a
sounding board provided Avith spaced aper-
tures, and means connecting said sounding 130

^

1,072,854

boards and contacting with said last men-
tioned sounding board at a point between
said apertures.

13. In a talking machine, the combination
6 Avith a vibratory sounding board, of sound

reproducing means arranged to transmit
sound waves against said sounding board, a
soimding board provided with oppositely
disposed free edges, and means connecting
10 said sounding boards and contacting Avith
said last mentioned sounding board at a
point between said free edges.

14. In a talking machine, the combination
Avith sound reproducing means, of a sound-

15 ing board provided with spaced apertures,
and means contacting with said board at a
point between said apertures actuated by and
in accordance with sound waA^es transmitted
by said sound reproducing means.

20 15. In a talking machine, the combination
with sound reproducing means, of a sound-
ing board provided with o]3positely disposed
free edges, and means actuated by sound
waves produced by said sound reproducing

25 means and contacting with said board at a
point between said edges for vibrating said
board in accordance with sound waA^es.

16. A talking machine comprising a cabi-
net pi-oviding a compartment having a

sounding board forming a Avail thereof, a
sounding board Avithin said compartment
and forming one Avail of a sound conduit, a
bridge connecting said sounding boards sub-
stantially centrally only, and actuating
means for said machine located in said con-
duit.

17. In a talking machine, the combination
Avith a cabinet providing a compartment
provided with a sounding board, of hollow
sound amplifying means projecting freely
Avithin said compartment, a rotary record
support, and actuating means for said sup-
port arranged within said compartment and
within said amplifying means.

Signed by me, the said ELDRmoE R. John-
son, at Camden, State of New Jersej'. this
17th day of March, 1911.

ELDRIDGE R. JOHNSON.
Witnesses :

Ralph L. Freeman,
Frank B. MrooLExON, Jr.
Signed by me, the said John C. English,
at Camden, State of New Jersey, this l7th
day of March, 1911.

JOHN C. ENGLISH.
Witnesses :

Frank B. Middleton, Jr.,
Charles F. Willard.

30

35

40

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

Washington, D. C."

1,072,873.

J. ROEVER.

MULTIPLE PHONOGRAPH.
APPLICATION FILED APE. 1, 1912.

Patented Sept. 9, 1913.

12 SHEETS-SHEET 1.

WITNESSES

M^- i

-■V?^ C< •,.-c2!elv*.-05

'uM.,^^.^ /de<^e^ , INVENTOR.
ATTORNEY

, W, (Ttiuc-.^el^t-e-t'i-^ol.t^-

1,072,873.

J. ROEVER.

MULTIPLE PHONOGRAPH,

APPLICATION PILED APE.l, 1912.

>SfSW^

Patented Sept. 9, 1913.

12 SHEETS-SHEET 2.

^ |^(j?i^l.A^^:3:L».rvy;

AUORNEY

COLUftlBIA PLANOGRAPH CO., WASHJNQTON. D. C.

1,072,873.

J. ROEVER.

MULTIPLE PHONOGBAPH,
APPLICATIOH riLED APE. 1, 1912.

rICLl

Patented Sept. 9, 1913.

12 SHEETS-SHEET 3.

— 7 .7 • -^1 INVENTOR
AUORNEY

COLUMBIA PLANOORAfH CO., WASHIN'OTON. D. (

1,072,873.

J. ROEVER.

MULTIPLE PHONOGRAPH,

APPLICATION PILED APE.l, 1912,

Patented Sept. 9, 1913.

12 SHEETS-SHEET 4.

WITNESS E8

jJuJlu<A^ /EoetreT-,

INVENTOR

—"iU-ti- (jL, -<i*-t,.t<.,«»

ly^ XT. 72e*'6£^Xv.».«-cn^,

ATTORNEY

J. ROEVER.

MULTIPLE PHONOGRAPH,

APPLICATION riLED APE.l, 1912.

Patented Sept. 9, 1913.

12 SHEETS-SHEET 5.

/a/

%-^

INVENTOR

o inrtni

BY

AHORNEY

COLUMBIA PLANOGRAPH CO., WASHINGTON, D. <

J. ROEVER.

MULTIPLE PHONOGRAPH.

APPLICATION PILED APE. 1, 1912.

1,072,873.

Patented Sept. 9, 1913.

12 SHEETS-SHEET 6.

— V^o- C<.,-<lc.,,t«,^

Q INVENTOR

(/^^^.''nAUikt^^^'^.^'-'^ .

ATTORNEY

COLUMBIA PLANOORAPH CO., WASHINOTON. D. C.

1,072,873.

J. ROEVER.

MULTIPLE PHONOGRAPH.
APPLICATION FILED APE. 1, 1912.

Patented Sept. 9, 1913.

12 SHEETS-SHEET 7.

WITNESSES.

f^ ■^ —

'uX.^,^ /ttT<^t.4A.. INVENTOR,
AUORNEY

COLUMBIA PLANOORAPH CO., WASHINGTON, D. C.

J. ROEVER.

MDLTIPLE PHONOGRAPH,
APPLICATION PILED APE.l, 1912,

1,072,873.

Patented Sept. 9, 1913.

12 SHEETS-SHEET 8.

WITNESSES

INVENTOR

ATTORNEY

COLUMBIA PLANOORAPH CO.. WASHINOTON, D, C.

J. ROEVER.

MULTIPLE PHONOGRAPH,

APPLICATION PILED APE. 1, 1912.

1,072,873.

Patented Sept. 9, 1913.

12 SHEETS-SHEET 9.

INVENTOR

-&.ff.y^

ru^

ATTORNEY

COLUMHIA PLANOGlJA

J. ROEVER.

MOLTIPLE PHONOGRAPH.

APPLICATION TILED APE.l, 1912.

1,072,873.

Patented Sept. 9, 1913.

12 SHEETS-SHEET 10.

WITNESSES

— 1&«. (jl . ,<Ll-i-t-.-«

\/0t^

5^ /!
3b

^ INVENTOR
AUORNEY

COLUMBIA PLANOORAPH CO.. WASHINOTON. D. C.

J. ROEVER.

MULTIPLE PHONOGRAPH.

APPLICATION PILED APE. 1, 1912.

1,072,873.

Patented Sept. 9, 1913.

12 SHEETS-SHEET 11.

^WITNESSES

A'ft

JkJL-^ Ae^^ou, INVENTOR.

BY

ATTORNEY

COLUMBIA PLANOORAPH CO., WASHINGTON, D. C.

1,072,873.

J. KOEVER.

MULTIPLE , PHONOGRAPH.,
APPLICATION PILED APE. 1, 1912.

Patented Sept. 9, 1913.

12 SHEETS-SHEET 12.

J^c^.J^,

^-Z*^^,J^,

^^JU^..^ /to-e-o«^, cWucM/to^,

0 /

"LANOaRAPH CO., WASHINQTON. D. C.

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

JULIUS ROEVER, OF NEW YORK, N. Y.
MULTIPLE PHONOGRAPH.

1,073,873.

Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Sept. 9, 1913.

Application iiled April 1, 1912. Serial No. 687,849.

To all lohom it may concern:

Be it known that I, Jt)Liu.s Koever, of
New York, borough of Brooklyn, coiintj'- of
Queens, ami State of New York, have in-
5 veJited a new and useful Im^Drovement in
IMultiple Phonographs, of which the follow-
ing is a full, clear, and exact description.

My invention relates to improvements in
multiple 2")honographs such as employ a ro-

10 tatable wheel or plate carrying a plurality
of renewable phonograph records, and in
which the rotation of the wheel brings the
records successively or selectively as desired,
into engagement Avith the reproducing mech-

15 anism.

The object of my invention is to pro-
duce a machine of this kind in which the
mechanism is absolutel}'^ reliable and will
operate successfully and for a long time

20 without getting out of order, and in which
the machine can be adapted for use as a so-
called home machine, that is for use in pri-
vate places, where all the records can be
played consecutively, or selectively as de-

25 sired, or in which slot mechanism can be
used for adapting the machine to public
places Avhere by the dropping of a coin, a
recoi'd or records can be played. I am
aware that a machine of this general kind

30 is not broadh' new, but such a machine is
for its success necessarily dependent on the
construction and arrangement of many of
its parts, and my inventio?i relates espe-
ciall}'^ to certain features of construction or

?5 groups of co-acting parts, which will enable
the beforementioned result to be attained in
a mechanical and reliable manner. These
improved details I will proceed to point out
in the specification and refer to in the claims

40 which follow.

Eeference is to be had to the accompany-
ing drawings forming a part of this speci-
fication, in which similar reference char-
acters indicate corresponding parts in all

45 the views.

Figure 1 is a perspective A'iew of the com-
plete machine Avith the case thrown open so
as to show the general arrangement of the j
parts. Fig. 2 is an enlarged front eleva- i

50 tion of the upper portion of the machine
shoAving especially the arrangement of the
record wheel, the grouping of records, and
the relation of the carriage to the record
Avheel. Fig. 3 is a rear eloA-ation of the

55 structure shown in Fig. 2. Fig. 4 is a plan
vicAv of the record Avheel and carriage. Fisr.

5 is a side elevation of the upper part of the
machine which comprises the greater por-
tion of the mechanism. Fig. 6 is an iuA'ert-
ed plan A'iew of the motor and the mech- gg
anism for starting and stoppi/ig it either by
a coin controlled mechanism or by other
manual means. Fig. 7 is a detail of the
means for starting and stopping the motor,
showing the arrangement of both the coin gs
or slot mechanism, and the secondary or
manual means of stopping and starting.
Fig. 8 is a detail inverted j)lan showing
especially the ordinary manual means of
starting the motor. Fig. 9 is a side elcA'a- 70
tion of the motor and its connected hand
controlling and regulating parts. Fig. 10
is a rear elevation of the upper part of the
machine with a portion of the mechanism
removed, and showing especially a ]:)art of 75
the mechanism for advancing the records
from one position to another. Fig. 11 is a
detail of one of the shifting paAvls and con-
nections used in shifting the records. Fig.

12 is a detail sectional view of the record gO
Avheel, and shoAvs particularly the manner

in AAdiich it is mounted and supported. Fig.

13 is a detail sectional vieAv illustrating in
side elevation, the horn of the machine and
its support. Fig. 14 is a sectional plan vieAv 35
of the horn and its support. Fig. 1.5 is a
detail of the mechanism for controlling the
speed of the motor, and Fig. 16 is a sectional
plan vieAV shoAving means for supporting
the friction Avheel for turning the record 90
wheel for the purpose of selecting a record.

Eeferring to Fig. 1, the machine is pref-
erably provided Avith an inclosing casing 10
Avhich can be of an ornamental nature, and
Avhich can be of any approved design, the 95
casing having preferably a lower compart-
ment containing drawers 11 in Avhich the
records can be stored, and the upper com-
partment carrying the record Avheel A and
the greater part of the operating mecha- 100
nism. The casing is also preferably pro-
vided Avith doors 12 and 13 to close in the
aforementioned parts, and has at the top an
opening 14 which registers with the mouth
of the horn 15. This arrangement is shoAvn 105
clearly in Figs. 1, 13 and 14. The horn 15
has a goose-neck bend as shoAA^n at 15^ in
Fig. 13, and is enlarged at this point and
then extended forward in a practically hori-
zontal direction as shown at 15''. This al- no
lows the sound vibrations to be collected at
the back of the horn and then thrown for-

1,072,873

ward in an effective manner. In the ma-
chine as will be hereinafter seen, the re-
producer connected with the horn moves
backward and forward, and so provision is
Q made for a slight oscillation of the horn.
This is shown clearly in Fig. 14, where a
fork 16 is illustrated as straddling the horn,
with its ends pivoted to the horn near the
mouth of the latter as shown at 17, while

10 the base of the fork 16 is pivoted in a
bracket 18. The record wheel which I have
referred to in a general way as A, and most
of the mechanism associated and connected
with it, are arranged in the upper part of

15 the casing and upon the floor or table 19.
The mechanism of the machine is all driven
by a motor B v/hich is shown clearly in
Figs. 6 and 9, and which can be any ap-
proved type of motor, though a spring mo-

20 tor is generally used. I do not refer to the
details of the motor as they have nothing
to do with this invention, though the means
for stopping and starting it, and for regu-
lating its speed, will be hereinafter referred

25 to. The motor, as is usual in such cases, is
supported beneath the table 19 and has a
shaft 20 projecting forward through the
casing 10, and to Avhich a removable crank
21 is affixed for winding up the motor at

30 necessary intervals. The motor carries a
pulley 22 from which extends a belt 23,
this passing up throiigh the table 19 and
connecting Avith a pulley 24 on the shaft 25
at the top of the machine, this shaft being

35 loosely supported at one end as shown at
26 in the horizontal or carriage frame 27
which extends across the top of the wheel
A and parallel with the axis of the wheel.
The shaft 25 carries also a fly-Avheel 24^ at

40 the side of the pulley 24, and is held loosely
at 26 so that its opposite end can be lifted,
and to this end the shaft near the inner or
front end rests in a suitable bearing 28 on
a part of the frame 27, and is provided with

45 a friction wheel 29 for driving the indi-
vidual records, as will presently appear.
This loose support for the shaft is not shoAvn
in detail, as it is common to machines of
this class and is not here claimed. The

50 frame 27 just referred to is supported on
the main frame or pedestal 27"", which rises
from and is secured to the table 19. The
belt 23 just referred to has one member
preferably extended over the pulley 30 on

55 the swinging arm 31 which is pivoted to the
frame 27, and has a weight 32 at its free
end so that the arm serves to take up the
slack of the belt 23. The shaft 25 which is
driven by the belt 23, has its free end held

60 down by the weighted arm 33 which is piv-
oted as shown at 34 on a part of the frame
27. The shaft 25 carries the friction wheel
29 as stated, and this is adapted to severally
or individually engage the friction disks 35

66 which are secured to the shafts 36, these

being circumferentially arranged and jour-
naled in the back 37 of the record wheel A.
This back can be of any configuration, but
is shown as formed of a spider construction
having concentric rings. All this construc-
tion is not here claimed as novel. Each
shaft 36 carries a record holder 38 which
can be of any approved or preferred con-
struction, and on which the cylindrical rec-
ords 39 are slipped on and off as desired.
The back 37 of the Avheel A has a hub 40
which is pivoted on the shaft 41, this being
secured in the main frame or pedestal 27^^,
and the front of the wheel is formed of a
removable spider or index plate 42, having
suitable surfaces 42*^ (see Fig. 2) spaced
apart and numbered to correspond with the
records. The hub 42"^ of the index plate 42
slides freely on and off the shaft 41, and has
a match joint as shown at 43 in Fig. 12 by
which it engages the hub 40, so that the two
parts will turn together. The index plate
42 is held in place by the plug 45 (see Fig.
12) which fits in the hollow of the hub 42"^,
and is screwed to the threaded end 46 of
the shaft 41. A spring 44 is arranged with-
in the holloAv of the hub 42^, and presses
against the plug 45 so that the latter is held
stationary Avhile the wheel A, including the
back 37 and the index plate 42, rotates. The
plug 45 has a finger or pointer 47 which
points a little to the right of the upper per-
ipendicular part of the record wheel, as
shown in Fig. 2, and Avhen a certain record
is desired, the wheel A is rotated until the
record comes opposite the pointer, then if
the machine is started, this record will be
the next one played, as will be hereinafter
described. The record wheel A rotates
freely and independently of the mechanism
which turns it to play a record, and to pro-
vide for turning the wheel to the desired po-
sition, a friction wheel 48 (see Fig. 5) is
arranged to engage the rim of the back 37,
and is carried by a shaft 49 which is ar-
ranged parallel Avith the shaft 41 and be-
neath the wheel A, the shaft 49 being
mounted in suitable supports and having a
pulley 50 thereon which is driven by a
flexible belt 51 connecting with a pulley be-
neath the table 19, which pulley is not
shown, as this means for turning the record
wheel is not claimed, but the parts are dis-
closed for clearness. The pulley driving
the belt 51 is turned either by a crank 52 on
the front of the machine, or a milled wheel
52^^, as shown in Fig. 1.

Referring to Fig. 12, it will be seen that I
shoAv the brush 48"^ having bristles 49^ which
project upward and engage the surface of
the record 39 which happens to be directly
above the brush, and the shank SO'' of the
brush is pivoted on the shaft 40, and the
lower end is made sufficiently heavy to re-
tain the brush in a substantially vertical

70

80

85

90

95

110

115

120

125

13fi

1,072,873

8

10

15

position, while at the same time permitting
it to oscillate as it is struck by the record so
as to have a brushing effect thereon and
clean off the dust which may be on the rec-
ord, or which may be loosened by the stylus.
The machine is driven from the motor B,
and the controlling mechanism is shown in
Figs. 6 to 9. As here illustrated, the motor
is provided with a shaft 53 from which
power is taken and which carries the pulley
22 already referred to. This shaft is also
provided wtth a drum 54 on which is a
strap 55, one end being secured to the drum
and the free end projecting radially as
shown at 56 in Figs. 7 and 9. The machine
is prevented from starting by a trip or foot
57 which swings into the path of the pro-
truding end 56 of the brake strap. It will
be seen that this will stop the machine, and

20 it will prevent it from stopping with a vio-
lent jerk, as the brake strap 55 will first
tighten itself around the drum, and finally
stop the machine altogether. The trip or
foot piece 57 is carried on the end of the
swinging arm 58 which projects upward
through the table 19, and is pivoted as
shown at 59 in Fig. 9, upon a part of the
motor frame 60. The arm 58 is in the na-
ture of a bell crank lever, and has an offset
58-'^ as shown in the aforesaid figure.

When the machine is used as a so-called
home machine, that is without the slot at-
tachment, the construction shown in Fig. 8
is used for starting, and here the arm 58 is
I^ivotally connected by a rod 61 with a crank
62 on the shaft. 63 which is mounted in
suitable supports 61 and the front end of
which projects to the front part of the ma-
cliine, where it terminates in the milled
wheel 65, so that by turning the milled
Avheel and shaft, the rod 61 pulls the foot
piece or trip 57 out of the path of the break
straj:) 56, and permits the machine to start.
Obviously other means can be used for ac-
tuating the trip 57, and in Figs. 6, 7 and 9
I have shown a means which can be substi-
tuted for the particular arrangement of the
shaft 63, and which is especially adapted for
use where the machine is used as a combina-
tion home machine and coin operated ana-
chine. In this case, the end of the rod 61
is attached to the long arm 66 of the bell
crank lever 67, which is pivoted beneath the
table 19 as shown at 68, and the other arm

55 69 of which is provided with a pin 70 sliding
in the slot 71 of the slide bar 72, which also
connects Avith the arm 66 near the base of
the latter by a spring 73 which serves to
hold the slide plate 72 retracted. To start

60 the machine independently of the coin mech-
anism, an ann 74 is arranged to strike the
end of the arm 66, the arm 74 being secured
to the post 75 which turns in the table 19
and is provided with a finger piece or but-

65 ton 76 by which it can be turned. Thus by

25

30

35

40

'45

-50

turning the part 76 and post 75, the arm 74
engages the free end of the lever arm 66,
pulls on the rod 61, and permits the motor
to start. The motor is also adapted to be
started by the coin controlled mechanism C >jq
shown in Fig. 6, and which I do not here
describe, as it has nothing to do with the
invention, but when this is used, a push
plate shown by dotted lines at 77, is forced
into engagement with the end 72^ of the 75
slide bar 72 so as to push the bar inward.
To provide for guiding the bar and also for
carr3dng out the functions presently de-
scribed, it is provided with a second slot
78 which receives the pin 79 on the tilting go
lever 80 which is arranged horizontally be-
neath the table 19, being pivoted as shown
at 81 and having a hub 82 (see Fig. 9) which
turns on the face plate 83, this serving as a
support beneath the table top for the several 85
IDarts of the motor starting mechanism.
The lever 80 is arranged at nearly right
angles to the plate 72, and it has an in-
wardly extending arm 84 Avhich connects by
a spring 85 with an off-set 86 near the end 90
of the slide bar 72, while the free end of
the lever 80 is adai^ted as shown at 87, to
tip into engagement with a foot 56 of the
brake strap 55, thus at the desired time
checking the motor. Y/hen the slot or coin 95
mechanism is used to start the machine, the
part 77 pushes the slide plate 72 inward
against the tension of the springs 73 and 85,
and the pin 70 (see Fig. 6) striking the end
wall of the slot 71, tilts the lever 67 and loo
pulls on the rod 61, thus removing the trip
or abutment 57 from the brake foot 56, while
at the same time the lever 80 will be tilted
to bring the end 87 in front of the foot piece
56, but this is only momentarily, as the lever 105
80 springs back to the position shown in
Fig. 6, thus leaving the motor in operation
until stopped automatically by the mecha-
nism which will be hereinafter described.

The following mechanism is used for stop- no
ping tlie machine automatically : Referring
to Figs. 3 and 9, it will be seen that the off-
set 58"" of the arm 58 is provided with an -
extension arm 88 which is pivoted on the
off-set 58^ as shown at 89, and is transversely 115
slotted as at 90 to receive the screw 91 which
extends into the off-set 58* and by means
of which the extension arm 88 can be ad-
justed and secured at a desired angle. The
arm 88 is adapted to engage the raised end 120
92 on the off -set 93 of a tilting lever 94
(see Figs. 3 and 5) which lever is fulcrumed
as shown at 95 on the back of the main
frame or pedestal 27% and the upper end 96
of which projects above the frame 27 (see 125
Fig. 4) and is connected to a rod 97 ex-
tending horizontal^ along the frame 27
and having at the end nuts 98 which are
engaged by the traveling carriage 99 carry-
ing the reproducer 120 hereinafter referred 130

1,072,878

to, so that when a record is played and the
carriage nears the end of its stroke, it will
engage the nnts 98, pull on the rod 97, tilt
the lever 94 — 9G, and push the part 92 from
5 beneath the arm 88, thus permitting the arm
58 and trip 57 to SAving back by gravity
into position for the latter to engage the
brake foot 56 and stop the machine, but
during the playing the arm 88 is held raised

IQ by the part 92, thus holding the trip 57 re-
tracted in the position shoAvn in Fig. 7. Re-
ferring to Figs. 3 and 5, it will be seen that
the lever 94 is connected by an arm 100 with
the pin 101 which slides in the bushing or

15 bearing 102 on the frame 27^, and is adapted
to enter one of the holes 103 in the wheel
plate 37 (see Fig. 2) thus holding the record
wheel A steady while a record is being
played. The pin 101 has a shoulder 101"

20 (Figs. 5 and 10), which at certain times
engages the member 157 hereinafter referred
to, and stops the inward movement of the
pin 101 so that Avhile the pin is so stopped
the record wheel may turn freety. The

25 pin 101 is normally pressed into engage-
ment with the aforesaid holes by a flat
spring 104, though of course other forms
of springs might be used, this spring as
shown in Figs. 5 and 12 being secured

3.0 to posts 105 on the frame 27^^. It will
thus be seen that the locking pin 101 moves
Avith the leA^er 94, so that Avhen the leA'er is
tilted to hold the machine in playing posi-
tion, the pin 101 locks the wheel as just de-

35 scribed, and when it is tilted into position to
lock the motor, it pulls out the pin 101 and
releases the Avheel A so that the latter can
turn freely.

In Fig. 9 I have shown a safetji' attach-

40 ment adapted to the coin operating machine
to preA'ent the machine from being started
by tipping it to one side so as to release the
foot piece 66 from the trip 57. This com-
prises a freely hanging arm or pawl 106

45 v/hich is pivoted on the frame 60 as shoAvn

at 107, and has an in-turned end 108 Avhich

in case of such tipping will swing against

tlie drum 54 and engage the brake foot 56.

Referring to Fig. 4, it will be seen that

&0 the shaft 25 which is driven direct from the
motor as already described, is provided Avith
tAvo pinions 109 and 110 meshing re-
spectively AA'ith the gear wheels 111 and 112
Avhich are carried on the sliding sleeve 113

55 Avhich is mounted on the screAV shaft 114,
this carrying the screw 115 which moves
the carriage 99 and the reproducer 120. I
do not refer to the screw and carriage mech-
anism in detail, for these are similar to the

60 construction shoAvn in Letters Patent of the
United States No. 883,971, dated April 7,
1908. The sleeve 113 has a limited move-
ment because of the slot 116 in the sleeA'e
Avhich receives the pin 117 which enters the

65 shaft 114. The sleeve is provided with a

milled surface 118 by which it can be easily
grasped, and it may be readily moved end-
Avise so as to bring the pinion 109 and gear

111, or the pinion 110 and gear 112 into en-
gagement. The object of this arrangement
is to adapt the machine to fast or slow feed,
according as to Avhether it is to play so-
called tAvo minute or four minute records.
In one case it is driven at high speed by
the pinion 109 and gear 111, and in the other
case it is driA'en by the pinion 110 and gear

112. The carriage 99 is proAuded with a
blade 119 Avhich engages the screw 115, and
the reproducer 120 is thus moA'ed across the
record 39, and Avlien this is finished, the re-
producer is returned free of the record by
the screw, the reproducer being lifted by the
mechanism shoAvn at C in Figs. 4 and 10.
This mechanism I do not refer to in detail,
because it is shown, described and claimed
in the prior patent referred to.

The folloAving mechanism is used for giA'-
ing to the motor a sIoav or fast speed as de-
sired. To regulate the speed of the motor
I use an arrangement described below. A
shaft 121 (see Fig. 4) is A^ertically arranged
in the top of the machine and is provided
with a hand 122 which can be turned to in-
dicate fast or sloAV, as shoAvn on the dial 123
of the draAving. The shaft is connected at
its loAver end Avith a Avire 124 (see Fig. 3)
AA'hich extends doAvuAvard through the table
19 and is connected Avith a tilting bell crank
125 having a buffer 126 to contact with the
disk 127 of the regulator shaft of the mo-
tor. The bell crank 125 is bent at right
angles, is pivoted as shown at 125", and one
arm 125'' carries the buffer 126 above re-
ferred to. The bell crank is normally tilted
by the spring 125"= (see Fig. 15) so as to hold
the buffer 126 out of contact Avith the disk
127 of the motor, but the bell crank is pro-
Added Avith an arm 125^ which serves as an
abutment against which the end of the screw
125^ presses. This screAv is threaded into the
motor frame as shown in the drawing, and it
Avill be seen that by turning the rod 124 the
bell crank may be tilted doAvn so as to push
the buffer 126 against the disk 127. At the
upper end the rod 124 is fastened to. a plug
125' (see Fig. 3) which enters the rod 121
above referred to, and is held by a set screAV
125°. It will be seen, therefore, that the rod
124 may be turned by hand before tighten-
ing the set screAV 125°, so as to set the bell
crank 125, and then the set screAV 125^ niaj''
be tightened, after Avhich the speed can be
regulated by ttirning the button or finger
piece 121 and operating the screw 125^ as de-
scribed.

The folloAving mechanism is used for au-
tomatically turning the record Avheel A and
advancing a new record 39 to position to be
played : Referring to Fig. 4, it will be seen
that the carriage 99 is provided with a stud

70

75

80

85

90

95

100

105

110

115

12c

125

130

1,072,873

128 to which is attached a chain or cable 129
Avhich runs over guide pulleys 130, 131 and
132, and is connected to the end of the rod
133 (see Fig. 10) which rod slides through
g, the end 134 of a tilting arm 135, the rod 133
having a loose collar 136 abutting with the
part 134 of the arm 135, and the collar being
pressed by a spring 137 which is wound
around the rod and abuts with the nuts 138

10 on the ends of the rod. Thus the return
movement of the carriage after playing a
record will pull on the cable 129 and lift
the arm 135, the movement being cushioned
by the spring 137. The arm 135 (see Fig.

15 11) is provided with a hub 139 which turns
on the main shaft 41, and the arm is forked
as shoAvn at 140 in Fig. 11, to receive the
pivot 142 of the pawl 141 which swings ver-
ticalW in the arm and which has a weighted

20 lower end 143 adapted to normally swing
the head 144 of the pawl into engagement
with one of the pins 145 of the record wheel
A. These pins are shown in Fig. 5 extend-
ing rearwardly from the back plate 37 of the

25 wheel A. and there is a pin for every record,
the pins being spaced apart a distance corre-
sponding to the space between the several
records. The head 144 has a laterally ex-
tending pin 146 which is adapted to slide

30 doAvn the curved arm 147 during the for-
ward movement of the carriage, and guide
and tilt the pawl 143 so that the head 144
will be out of the path of the pins 145, thus
permitting the record wheel to turn freely.

35 When the arm 135 is pulled forward to ad-
vance the record wheel, the pawl 141 is car-
ried away from the guide 147 and swings
by gravity so as to bring the head 144 into
engagement with one of the pins 145 of the

40 record wheel. The pin 146 also extends in
front of one fork of the arm 135 so that
when the latter is pulled forward and up-
ward, it will strike the pin 146, hold the
pawl rigid, and carry forward the record

45 wheel which is engaged by the pawl. The
arm 147 is carried in a socket 148 (see Fig.
10) on the main frame 27*, but the arm can
be supported in any convenient way. The
arm 135 is in the form of a bell crank, and

50 has a short arm 149 (see Fig. 10) which con-
nects by means of the link 160 with the
weighted lever 153. The link 150 is slotted
as shown at 151 to receive a pin 152 extend-
ing from the lever 153 so as to permit a cer-

55 tain amount of movement of the link before
the lever 153 is actuated. The lever 153 is
pivoted as shown at 153*^ to the post 27", and
at the longer end of the lever is a weight 154.
The shorter end of the lever supports as

60 shown at 153'' in Fig. 16, one end of the
shaft 49, which carries the friction wheel 48
for tui-ning the record wheel into a desired
position, as already described. Thus it will
be seen that when the arm 153 is actuated to

66 cause the pawl 141 to engage one of the pins

145, the lever 153 Avill be raised so as to
drop the slioi-t end of the lever and bring
the friction wheel 48 out of engagement with
the rim of the record wheel A, and this pre-
vents any one from turning the shaft 49, ,jq
and so moving or disjilacing the record
wheel Avhen it is in playing position or ap-
proaching playing position. The journal of
the shaft 49 in the bracket 51=^ is narrow,
and sufficiently loose to permit the tilting of 75
the shaft as above described. On the shaft

41 at the side of the arm 135, is a tilting
lever 155, the upper end 156 of which en-
gages the pin 146 and prevents the pawl 141
from going too far forward, Avliile the loAver gg
end 157 of the leA'er 155 moves into the path
of the pin or arm 101 above referred to.
The leA^er 155 is provided Avith a Aveight 159
Avhich causes the IcA^er to normally sAving to
the position shoAvn in Fig. 10. When a 35
record has been played, the carriage 99 will
be at the front of the frame 27, and on its
return stroke to carry the reproducer back
to position to play a neAV record, the carriage
Avill pull on the cable 129, thus SAvinging up- 90
ward and forAvard the arm 135 and the paAvl
141, and the head 144 of the pawl Avill en-
gage one of the pins 145 and Avill carry the
record Avheel A forward so as to bring a new
record into jDosition to engage the repro- 95
ducer. At the same time the lever 155 Avill
be struck and carried forward by the pin

146, thus tilting the member 157 out of the
path of the pin 101, so that the pin can enter
one of the holes 103 and lock the record 100
Avheel; and the link 150 and lever 153 will

be raised, thus dropping the friction Avheel
48 out of engagement Avith the rim of the
record Avheel. On the opposite or forward
movement of the carriage, the Vi-eights 154 105
and 159 bring the aforesaid parts back to
the first position, the pin 146 slides down
the abutment or arm 147, thus bringing the
head 144 of the pawl out of the path of the
pins 146 while the friction wheel 48 is again no
in engagement with the Avheel rim 37, and
the wheel can be turned by means of the
shaft 49 so as to bring another record be-
sides the next one in sequence, into position
if so desired. 115

When the records 39 are placed on the
record holders, the records are adjusted so
that the beginning of the reproduction will
come opposite the end of the gage 160 (see
Figs. 3 and 5) which is supported in the up- 120
per part of the machine as a gage or indi-
cator to tell Avhen the records are in correct
position.

The general operation of the machine is
as follows: When the machine is to be 125
started, the carriage 99 will ahvays be at
the front end of the screAV 115 as shown in
Fig. 4, and the part or member 157 will be
in the path of the shoulder lOl'' of the pin
101, thus preventing the pin from locldng 130

1,073,873

the record wheel, and leaving the latter free
to turn. The machine Avill then be started
by turning the button 65 and tripping the
motor by moving the part 57 from in front
5 of the member 56 of the motor spring. This
action starts the bell-crank 58 — 58^ and
raises the arm 88 to a point above the end
92 of the lever 94. Meanwhile the inward
movement of the carriage pulling on the

10 cable 129, will have pulled on the arm 135,
and through the connections already de-
scribed, tilted the part 157 out of the path
of the shoulder 101"^, so that when a hole in
the wheel A comes opposite the pin 101, the

15 latter will spring in and lock the wheel,
during Vv^hich movement the lower part of the
lever 94 will move inward slightly, but not
enough to remove the end 92 from under the
arm 88. The weight of this lever 94, as-

20 sisted by the spring 101, causes the end 92
of the lever 94 to move under the arm 88
as stated, thus sustaining the arm until a
record has been played, and holding the
part 57 out of the path of the member 56

25 of the motor spring. During the inward
movement of the carriage 99 as above noted,
the pull on the cable ]29 and arm 135 and
its connecting mechanism, brings said mech-
anism forward and carries with it the record

30 wheel so as to bring the next cylinder to its
playing position where it is locked by the
action of the pin 101 just above described.
The same action will have raised the link
150 and the lever 153 so as to drop the short

35 end of the lever and move the friction wheel
48 out of engagement Avith the rim of the
wheel A. At this moment the carriage be-
gins to move forAvard in the act of playing,
thus loosening the cable 129, as the carriage

40 99 progresses, and the arm 135 and con-
nected parts move back to the former posi-
tion as already described. The moA^eraent
of the carriage through the pull on the rod
97, tilts the lever 94 so as to move out the

45 lower end of the lever, thus moving the part
92 from beneath the arm 88, and the latter
drops by gravity so that the part 57 again
swings into the path of the spring end 56,
thereby stopping the machine, while the part

50 157 at the same movement sAvings in front
of the shoulder 101''' and prevents the in-
ward moA'ement of the locking pin 101.

From the foregoing description it will be
seen that I haA^e shown a machine in which

55 the pai'ts are very complete and simple, and
in which they co-act in such a way as to
make an absolutely reliable machine in
Avhich the records can be automatically
played in sequence, or in which any record

60 can be selected if preferred.
I claim : —

1. The combination with a rotatable
record wheel having holes in the rim, of a
spring pressed locking pin or arm slidable

65 in a support and adapted to enter the holes

to lock the wheel while a record is in play- ,

ing position, the reproducer carriage, a tilt-
ing lever actuated by the movement of the
carriage, and pressing against the aforesaid
locking pin, means controlled by the lever ^q
for stopping and starting the motor, means
for restraining the locking pin against the
action of the aforesaid lever, and an opera-
tive connection between the carriage and the i
means for restraining the movement of the 75 ■
locking pin, Avhereb}^ the locking pin is re-
leased at a certain point during the move- \
ment of the carriage.

2. The combination with the rotatable
record wheel, of a spring pressed pin or arm go
adapted to engage and lock the Avheel while

a record is in plajang position, the reproducer
carriage, a moA'able member adapted to ex-
tend into the path of the aforesaid locking
pin, means controlled by the carriage to 35 '
move the said member and release the pin
or arm, and means also controlled by the
moA'ement of the carriage for AvithdraAving
the aforesaid pin or arm.

3. The combination Avith the rotatable 90
record AAdieel, of a sliding pin or arm adapt- '
ed to engage and lock the wheel while a
record is in playing position, the reproducer
carriage, a movable member arranged to en-
gage the locking pin or arm and prevent its 95
movement into locked position Avith the
record Avheel, means controlled by the move-
ment of the carriage for releasing the said
locking pin or arm, and means also con-
trolled by the miovement of the carriage for 100
withdrawing the said pin or arm from en-
gagement with the record wheel.

4. In a machine of the kind described, the
combination of the motor, the brake strap
connected with the motor and provided with i05
a projecting end, the reproducer carriage,

the rotatable record wheel, means for lock-
ing the record wheel when a record is in
playing position, a tilting lever actuated by
the moA^ement of the carriage, a swinging 110
foot piece to engage the strap end and stop
the motor, an operative connection between
the lever and the aforesaid foot piece by
which the moA^ement of the lever actuates
the foot piece, and means also operated by 115
the aforesaid lever for actuating the record
wheel locking mechanism.

5. The combination with the record wheel
having abutments thereon, and the repro-
ducer carriage, of a swinging arm, a pawl 120
carried by the arm and adapted to engage
the abutments on the record wheel to turn
the latter, a cable connected Avith the repro-
ducer carriage, and a cushioned or yielding
connection betAveen the cable and the afore- 125
said SAvinging arm.

6. The combination Avith the record wheel
having pins or abutments thereon, the re-
producer carriage, and a hand operated fric-
tion wheel for turning the record wheel, of 130

1,072,873

a swinging arm, a pawl carried by the arm
to engage the abutments on the record wheel,
a cable connection between the swinging
arm and the reproducer carriage, and means
5 actuated from the swinging arm to carry
the aforesaid friction wheel into and out of
engagement with the record wheel.

7. The combination with the record wheel
having pins or abutments thereon, and the

10 reproducer carriage sliding opposite the rec-
ord wheel, of a swinging arm opposite the
record wheel, a swinging pawl carried by
tlie arm and adapted to engage the abut-
ments on the record wheel, a cable connec-

15 tion between the swinging arm and the re-
producer carriage, whereby the return
movement of the carriage raises the arm and
turns the record wheel, and guiding means
operating on the lowering of the aforesaid

20 arm to tilt the pawl out of the path of the
aforesaid pins or abutments.

8. The combination with the rotatable
record wheel having pins or abutments
thereon, and the sliding reproducer car-

25 riage, of the swinging forked arm opposite
the record wheel, a cable connection between
the swinging arm and the reproducer car-
riage, a pawl adapted to engage the pins or
abutments on the record wheel, said pawl

30 being pivoted in the fork of the aforesaid
swinging arm, a pin extending laterally
from the head of the pawl and above one
fork of the swinging arm, and a guide arm
or abutment supported on the machine

^^ frame and adapted to engage the aforesaid
pin on the downward movement of the pawl,
thereby tilting the pawl.

9. The combination with the rotatable
record wheel having pins or abutments

thereon, and the reproducer carriage, of a 40
swinging forked arm pivoted opposite the
record wheel, a pawl pivoted in the fork
of the arm and provided with a laterally
extending pin, the pawl being arranged to
engage the aforesaid pins or abutments, a 45
guide arm to engage and tilt the pawl on
the downward or return movement of the
latter, a weighted tilting lever at the side of
the aforesaid swinging arm, said lever hav-
ing a limited movement, and an arm on the 50
lever extending into the path of the pin on
the pawl.

10. The combination with the rotatable
record wheel, the reproducer carriage, and
means actuated by the movement of the 55
carriage to turn the record wheel to advance

a record to playing position, of a manually
operated friction wheel to engage and turn
the record wdieel, and means operated by the
actuating means for turning the record 60
wheel to throw the friction wheel into and
out of engagement with the record wheel.

11. The combination with the rotatable
record wheel having holes therein, the mo-
tor, and the reproducer carriage, of a tilt- 65
ing lever, means controlled by the lever for
stopping and starting the motor, means con-
trolled by the movement of the carriage for
turning the record wheel, a pin or arm car-
ried by the aforesaid tilting lever and adapt- 70
ed to enter the holes in the record wheel, and

a tilting member also controlled by the re-
producer carriage and adapted to swing into
the path of the aforesaid locking arm or pin.
JULIUS ROEVER.
Witnesses :

Wakren B. Htjtchinson,
Akthtjr G. Dan NELL.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

"Washington, D. C."

A. 0. DIEHL.

SODND BOX.

APPHOATIOK PILED AUft. 31, 1910.

1,073,408.

Patented Sept. 16, 1913.

J^^.I.

^-^^.-Jl

INVENTCR

WITNESSES

By

ATTORNEY

COLUMBtA PLANOORAPH CO.. WASHINGTON, D. C.

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

albert c. diehl, of camden, new jersey, assignor to victor talking
m:ac:#in'e company, a corporation op new jersey.

SOUND-BOX.

1,0^3,408.

Specification of Letters Pateiit. Patented Sept. 16, 1913.

Application filed August 31, 1910. Serial No. 579,836.

To nil whom it may co)icern:

Be it known that I, Albert C. Diehl, a
citizen of the United States, and a resident
of Camden, county of Camden, and State of
a New Jersej', have invented certain new and
nseful Improvements in Sound - Boxes,
whereof the folloviing is a specification, ref-
erence being had to the accompanying draw-

10 This invention particuhirly rehites to the
mounting or ga.sket which holds the dia-
phragm of a sound box by engaging the op-
posite faces of said diaphragm.

The principal objects of this invention are

15 to provide simj^le and efficient means for
supporting the diaphragm in sound boxes,
comprising a pliant mounting embracing
said diaphragm, and having opposed sharp-
ened bearing edges which lightly engage the

20 opposite faces of said diaphragm in hair
lines concentric with and adjacent to its pe-
riphery, and which provides a uniform free
space surrounding the circumferential edge
of said diaphragm: to provide means to re-

25 tain said diaphragm mounting; and to pro-
vide means to prevent distortion of the
sharpened edges of said mounting, and to
prevent the adjustment of said retainer, ef-
fecting excessive pressure upon each of said

30 Iteariug edges.

The form of stylus mounting herein
shown is merely selected for convenience of
illustration and forms no part of this in-
vention, but is claimed in a separate applica-

35 tion. Serial No. 579.835, filed August 31,
1910.

The form of this invention hereinafter de-
scribed, provides a .sound box diaphragm
with a pliant or elastic mounting which cora-

40

])nses a unitary annular gasket embracino-

45

the edge of said diaphragm, and having an
internal undercut groove, providing a chan-
nel forming annular shoulders, the edges or
rims of which engage lightly the opposite
marginal faces of said diaphragm in hair
lines concentric with the periphery thereof;
a sound box casing, providing a seat for
said mounting; and a back plate or cap for
said sound box provided with a chamfered

SO edge and a gi'oove concentric therewith,
forming a circular ridge arranged to retain
said mounting in the seat provided therefor,
by engaging it between the inner and outer
edges of its lateral wall, thus effecting the

55 maximum pressure centrally around said

80

wall, and permitting the margins of said
mounting to be distorted into the recesses
formed by said groove and chamfered edge,
whereby the sharpened rims of the annular
shoulders lightly engage the opposite faces eo
of the peripheral margin of said diaphragm.

This invention further includes all the
various novel features of construction and
arrangement hereinafter more definitely
specified. 55

In the accompanying drawings. Figure 1
is a side elevational view of a sound box em-
bodying a convenient form of this inven-
tion; Fig. 2 is a central vertical sectional
view of said sound box taken on the line 70
2 — 2 in Fig. 1; Fig. 3 is an enlarged frag-
mentary sectional view of the structure as
shown in Fig. 2 ; Fig. 4 is a fragmentary
sectional view of a slightly modified form
of diaphragm mounting and Fig. 5 is a 75
fragmentary sectional view of another modi-
fied form of mounting.

In the form of this invention shown in
Figs. 1 to 3 inclusive, the sound box casing
7 is provided with the usual circular aper-
ture 8, and comprises a removable back or
retaining cap plate 9 having the hollow boss
10 for its convenient telescopic connection
with the gooseneck of the swinging arm of a
talking machine, (not shown.) Said re- 85
taining i^late 9 is conveniently secured to
said casing 7 by the screws 11 wliich are in
threaded engagement with the casing 7, and
which have their heads preferably counter-
sunk into the exterior surface of said plate.
The sound box casing 7 provides a seat 12
for the gasket 14 which forms the mounting
for the diaphragm 15, and which is annular
in form, and comprises tlie internally broad-
ened or undercut groove IG providing an an-
nular rectangular cliannel 18 forming the
shoulders or rims 19 whose opposed sharjj-
ened edges 20 are formed by the rounded
walls 21 of .said groove IG. Said gasket 11
embraces the margin of the diaj^hragm 15. loo
and tiie sharpened edges 20 are arranged to
engage the opposite faces of the diaphragm
15 in hair lines, and as shown in Fig. 3,
the inner .surface 24 of the outer periph-
eral wall 2y of said mounting is spaced 105
from the circumferential edge 23 of said
diaphragm 15; the oiiter surface 26 of
said wall 25 having only sufficient clearance
betv>-een it and tile concentric inner \<-A\ 30
of the sound box casing, to permit the gasket lio

90

95

2

1,073,408

14 to be readily slipped into the seat pro-
vided therefor in said casing 7. As best
shown in Fig. 3, the mounting 14 is retained
in position by the circular ridge 32 which is
g formed on the inner face of the retaining
plate 9, by the chamfered edge 33 and the
circular groove 34 concentric therewith, thus
affording an annular bearing projection for
engaging the mounting 14 at a compara-

2Q tively narrow region centrally disposed be-
tween the opposite edges of the lateral face
of said gasket. It will be noted that by
reason of the narrow bearing surface of the
ridge 32 which bears upon the mounting 14,

J 5 sufficient space is provided by the groove 34
and the chamfered edge 33 upon the respec-
tively opposite sides of said ridge for the
recei^tion of the portion of the mounting 14
which extends thereover, as best shown in

20 the fragmentary view Fig. 3, and tends to

prevent the pressure effected hj engagement

. of the ridge 32, from materially broadening

the line of contact, of the sharpened edge 20,

with the diaphragm 15, which broadening

25 of contact, if not prevented, would tend to
dampen the vibration of the diaphragm.
The vibration of the diaphragm 15 is
effected by its connection with the stjdus
needle 37 through the stylus mounting 38

30 and stylus bar 39, and it has been found that
by reason of the minimum contacting sur-
face of the mounting constructed as above
described, a greater A^olume of sound, and a
clearer tone is emitted from said diaphragm,

35 than from diaphragms wherein the contact-
ing surface of the mounting is disposed over
a greater surface area, or wherein the edge
of the diaphragm is not free.

The form of this invention shown in Fig.

40 4 is substantially like that shown in Figs. 1
to 3 inclusive, the mounting 40 is provided
with the sharpened edges 41 formed b}^ the
shoulders 42 and the surfaces 43, which
latter conform to the surfaces of opposed

45 conical frustums.

In the form of this invention shown in
Fig. 5, the mounting 50 is provided with
the undercut groove 61 which is formed by
opposite inwardly curved surfaces 52, ex-

50 tending to the bottom of the channel formed
thereby, and is otherwise similar to the dia-
phragm mounting 14, as best shoAvn in the
casing in Fig. 3. It will be noted that when
said diaphragm mounting 50 is engaged in

55 the sound box casing, the ridge 32 of the
plate 9 will be disposed opposite the lines
of contact of the grooved surface 52 with
the opxDOsite sides of the diaphragm 15, and
any pressure of the plate 9 upon said mount-

60 ing will not affect the hair line contact, but
will be effective to distort the mounting
50 in the same manner as the mounting 14
is distorted, as shown in Fig. 3.
': It is to be observed that the groove in

66 the interior face or side of the gasket sub-

75

80

stantially divides the gasket into a base
portion, the outer surface of which is sub-
stantially cylindrical and which extends the
full width of the gasket, and two inwardly
projecting portions lying on opposite sides ^q
of the diaphragm to form clamping mem-
bers. In order to cause the gasket to exert
localized pressure on the diaphragm, the ^
groove for the reception of the diaphragm '
is under-cut, that is to say the groove ex-
tends in a direction parallel to the axis of
the gasket and concentrically of the gasket,
and thus providing in the inwardly extend-
ing portions or clamping members above re-
ferred to, a region or portion which is more
flexible than a portion of said clamping
members nearer the axis or center or in-
terior of the gasket. The said undercut
groove therefore makes a relatively thin
portion in each of the inwardly extending 35
portions above referred to, which thin por-
tion is more flexible, yielding or pliant,
transversely of said gasket, than a portion
of said member nearer the center of the
gasket. This feature of construction is 90
present in all of the A'arious forms or modi-
fications of my invention as illustrated in
the drawings.

It is not desired to limit this invention
to the precise details of construction and ar-
rangement herein set forth, as it is obvious
that various modifications may be made
therein without departing from the essen-
tial features of the invention as defined in
the appended claims.

Having thus described my invention, I
claim and desire to protect by Letters Pat-
ent of the United States : —

1. In a sound box comprising a casing,
the combination with a diaphragm, of a 105
mounting for said diaphragm, comprising

a pliant annulus embracing the margin of
said diaphragm, and having a channel for
the reception of said margin, formed by
opposed transversely convex rims engag- no
ing the opposite faces of said diaphragm
and providing a free space around the cir-
cumferential edge of said diaphragm, and
means comprising a retainer having an an-
nular ridged region in contact with said xi5
mounting opposite the line of engagement
of said mounting with said diaphragm op-
erative to rigidly retain said mounting in
said casing, without varying the line oi en-
gagement of said mounting with said dia- 120
phragm.

2. In a sound box comprising a casing,
the combination with a diaphragm, of a
mounting for said diaphragm, comprising

a plant annulus, loosely fitted in said cas- 125
ing, embracing the margin of said dia-
phragm, and having a channel arranged to
receive said margin, formed, by opposed
semicircular rims, engaging the opposite
faces of said diaphragm, and a wall spaced JSi.

95

100

i, 073)408

from the peripheral edge of said diaphragm,
and a retaining phite having a ridge ar-
ranged to engage the lateral wall of said
mounting between its inner and outer edges,
5 substantially opposite the line of engage-
ment of said mounting with said diaphragm.

3. In a sound box comprising a casing,
the combination with a diaphragin, of a
mounting for said diaphragm, comprising

10 a pliant ga.sket embracing the edge of said
diaphragm, and Raving opposed bearing-
rims engaging the opposite faces of said dia-
phragm in a line, and a retaining plate hav-
ing a chamfered edge, and a groove con-

15 centric therewith, forming a ridge arranged
to engage the lateral wall of said mounting
substantially oj-jposite to said line, the cham-
fered edge and groove providing space for
the lateral distortion of the free edges of

20 said mounting, thereby tending to prevent
distortion of the portions of said rims en-
gaging said diaphragm.

4. In a sound box, the combination with a
casing, providing- a seat, of a diaphragm,

25 and a pliant mounting comprising a uni-
tary annular gasket embracing the circum-
ferential margin of said diaphragm, and
having a groove providing an undercut
channel, having its outer circumferential

30 wall spaced from the circumferential edge
of said diaphragm, and the undercut walls
forming opposed shoulders, which engage
the o])p()site sides of said diaphragm in a
hair line adjacent to its edge, and a retain-

35 ing plate provided with a circular ridge ar-
ranged to engage the side wall of said gas-
ket, substantially opposite said hair line to
retain the same in its seat, and providing
free spaces upon opposite sides of said

40 ridge for the distortion of the edges of the
side wall of said mounting when engaged by
said ridge, and tending to prevent the dis-
tortion of the shoulders at the line of en-
gagement with said diaphragm.

45 o. In a sound box, the combination with
a casing comprising a cylindriform socket
having a plane v.all, of a diaphragm, a pli-
ant momiting for said diaphragm arranged
in said socket and having substantially

50 plane lateral walls, a cylindrical outer wall
and oppositely disposed rims engaging the
opposite sides of said diaphragm adjacent
to its periphery, and a retaining plate pro-
Aided with a ridge arranged to engage one

65 plane face of said mounting opposite its line
of contact with said diaphragm, and ar-
ranged to hold the other plane wall of said
mounting against the plane wall of said
socket, and to impinge the cylindrical wall

60 of said mounting with the cylindrical wall
of said socket.

6. In a sound box, the combination with a
diaphragm, of a flexible mounting therefor
comprising a unitary annulus having an

65 under-cut channel, the sides of said channel

foi'ming semicircular annular rims embrac-
ing said diaphragm, and retaining means
comprising an annular flange in contact
with said mounting substantially opposite
said rims. ^q

7. In a sound' box the combination with a
diaphragm, of a pliant mounting therefor
comprising a unitary member embracing
said diaphragm and provided with an nn-
der-eut channel forming opposed annular ^^
abutments contacting with said diaphragm,
and retaining means comprising an annular
flange in contact with one side of said
mounting substantially in alinement with
said abutments. ^,0

8. In a sound box the combination Avith a
diaphragm, of a flexible mounting therefor
comprising a unitary annular member pro-
A'ided Avith an under-cut channel, the sides

of said channel forming annular rims em- 35
bracing said diaphragm near its periphery
and contacting Avith its opposite sides in
hair lines, and a retaining plate having an
annular ridge in engagement with one of the
lateral sides of said mounting substantially qq
opposite the lines of contact of said mount-
ing with said diaphragm.

9. In a sound box, the combination with a
casing comprising a cylindriform socket
haA^ng a plane Avail, of a diaphragin, a pli- 95
ant mounting for said diaphragm having
substantially plane lateral walls and a cylin-
drical outer Avail, and having oppositely dis-
posed rims engaging the opposite sides of
said diaphragm adjacent to its periphery, 100
and a retaining plate proA'ided with an an-
nular ridge arranged to engage one of the
lateral walls of said mounting opposite the
line of contact of said engaging rims with
said diaphragm and arranged to hold the 105
other of said lateral Avails against the plane
Avail of said socket.

10. In a sound box, the combination with
a casing comprising a cylindriform socket
having a plane Avail, of a diaphragm, a pli- no
ant mounting for said diaphragm having
substantially plane lateral Avails and a cylin-
drical outer wall, and having oppositely dis-
posed rims engaging the opposite sides of
said diaphragm adjacent to its periphery, 115
and a retaining plate provided Avith an an-
nular ridge arranged to engage one of the
lateral Avails of said mounting opposite the
line of contact of said engaging rims Avith
said dia]-)hragm, arranged to hold the other 120
of said lateral walls against the plane wall

of said socket and operative to contact said
cylindrical Avail of said mounting Avith the
cylindrical Avail of said socket without alter-
ing the line of contact of said rims with said 125
diaphragm.

11. In a sound box, the combination Avith
a diaphragm of a comparatiA-ely broad rigid
support and a comparatively narrow rigid
annular support sj)aced from and upon op- 13*>

1,073,408

posite sides of said diaphragm respectively,
annular yielding means having a compara-
tively broad, annular surface in contact with
said comparatively broad support and en-
5 gaging said diaphragm in a substantially
circular line only, and annular yielding
means contacting with said comparatively
narroAv annular support and also contacting
Avith the opposite side of said diaphragm in

10 a substantially circular line only, both of
said yielding means contacting with said
diaphragm and said relatively narrow sup-
port contacting with said yielding means in
engagement therewith in alinement.

15 12. In a soimd box the combination of a
diaphragm an annular gasket comprising a
body portion having a cylindrical outer sur-
face and two portions extending iuAvardly
toAvard the center of said gasket, one of

20 said inwardly extending: portions of said
gasket being proA'ided Avith a channel ar-
ranged concentrically of said gasket and ex-
tending in depth in a direction substan-
tially parallel to the axis of said gasket to

25 form a thin region in said inwardly project-
ing portion between a part thereof nearer
the center of the gasket and the body por-
tion of said gasket, a casing having a cir-
cular recess Avith a flat bottom surface Avith-

30 in which said gasket snugly fits with one
lateral face seated against the said bottom
surface of said recess and means secured
to said casing and in engagement with that
inwardly extending portion of said gasket

35 having the said thin region to press the
said inwardly extending portion adjacent
thereto toward the other of said inwardly
projecting portions of said gasket.

13. A diaphragm mounting consisting of
40 a unitary gasket of yielding material com-
prising transA-ersely spaced clamping mem-
bers adapted to_ engage opposite sides of a
diaphragm, and a- base connecting the outer
portions of said clamping members, one of

45 said clamping members having a region ex-
tending parallel to said base which is more
pliable transversely of said member than a
portion of said member nearer the center of
said gasket, v.'hereby to cause the gasket to

50 exert localized pressure on the diaphras'm.

14. A diaphragm mounting consisting of
a unitary gasket of yielding material, com-
prising a base and transA'-ersely spaced
clamping members extending parallel to

55 said base and providing a groove for the
reception of a diaphrag:m, said gasket hav-
ing a region on one side of said grooA^e ex-
tending around said gasket, Avhich is more
pliable transversely of said gasket than a

60 portion of said member extending substan-

tially parallel to said region on the same
side of said groove betAveen said region and
a free edge of said member, whereby to
cause the gasket to exert localized pressure
on the diaphragm. 65

15. A diaphragm mounting consisting of
a gasket of yielding material adapted to
bear against a side of a diaphragm, said
gasket having a Aveakened region extending
around the same Avhich is more pliable trans- 70
versely of said gasket than a portion of
said gasket extending substantially parallel

to and located inside of said region, Avhere-
by to cause the gasket to exert localized
pressure on the diaphragm. 75

16. A diaphragm mounting consisting of
a gasket of yielding material adapted to
bear against a side of a diaphragm, said
gasket being provided Avith a channel ex-
tending in depth in a direction substantially 80
parallel to the axis of said gasket and form-
ing a weakened region extending around the
gasket which is more pliable transA^ersely of
said gasket than a portion of said gasket
located inside of said region, Avhereby to 85
cause the gasket to exert localized pressure
on the diaphragm.

17. In a sound box the combination with
a diaphragm, a gasket of yielding material
adapted to bear against a side of the dia- 90
phragm, said sasket haA'ing a weakened re-
gion extending around the same which is
more pliable transA'ersely of said gasket
than a portion of said gasket extending
substantially parallel to and located inside 95
of said region, and means for pressing said
inner portion laterally against said dia-
phragm.

18. In a sound box the combination of a
casing including a holloAV member having a 100
substantially cylindrical inner surface and an
open end and formed Avith a flat interior wall
facing said end, a unit^^ gasket of yield-
ing material having a substantially cylin-
drical peripheral surface engas-ing the inner 105
surface of said member, and flat side faces,
one of which bears against said wall, said
gasket being provided in its inner surface
with a grooA^e, a diaphragm seated in said
grooA^e, and means secured to the open end HO
of said member and bearing against the
other flat side of said gasket for pressing
the same against said diaphragm.

In testimony whereof, I hereunto set my
hand this 29th day of Au,gust, A. D. 1910.

ALBERT C. DIEHL.

Witnesses :

Frank B. Middleton, Jr.,
Charles F. Willard.

I

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

Washington, D. C."

1,073,961.

A. C. J. CONSTABEL.

SOUND BOX,
APPLICATION PILED AtlQ. 8. 1912.

Patented Sept. 23, 1913.

TI^I.

Tl:^2.

WITMESSES

///^y

.^.

INVENTOR
/IdoJph C. J. Co-ns-fabel

BY

<»V?2'*'»->^3<»-T^C^

ATTORNEYS

COLUMBIA PLANOOBAPH CO., WASHINOTON. D. C.

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

ADOLPH C. J. CONSTABEL, OF HONOLULU, TERRITORY OF HAWAII.

SOUND-BOX.

1,073,961.

Specification of letters Patent. Patented Sept. 23, 1913.

Application filed August 8, 1912. Serial No. 714,043.

To all whom, it may coyicern:

Be it known that I, Adolph C. J. Con-
STABEL, a subject of the Emperor of Ger-
many, and a resident of Honolulu, Hawaii,
6 have invented a new and Improved Sound-
Box, of which the following is a full, clear,
and exact description.

This invention relates generally to sound-
boxes, and more particularly it is directed

10 to one characterized by the use of a i-eso-
nance-box placed in juxtaposition to the
diaphragm but spaced from the same so that
a thin layer of air is provided between the
resonance-box and the diaphragm within the

15 sound box.

The principal object of my invention is
the provision of a new and improved sound-
box containing a resonance-box the parallel
walls of which are provided with concentric

20 corrugations and an axial opening substan-
tially axial with the diaphragm. This reso-
nance-box serves as a medium whereby the
sound waves set up by the vibrating dia-
phragm are further developed, while the

25 frictional sounds produced by the contact of
the needle on the record are reduced to the
minimum by the same.

Figure 1 is a vertical sectional view on the
line 1 — 1 of Fig. 2 ; Fig. 2 is a horizontal

30 sectional view on the line 2 — 2 of Fig. 1.
The sound-box may be made of any suit-
able material, in any desirable size, and com-
prehends a body member 1 of usual con-
struction having a chamber 2. One side of

35 the sound-box is closed by a diaphragm 3
held in position between the resilient mem-
bers 4, this diaphragm being actuated by a
stylus bar 5 of usual construction. The
other side of the sound-box is partially

40 closed by a metallic plate 6, preferably of
German-silver, having an opening 7 there-
in, the opening being concentric with the
point of attachment of the stylus bar 6 to
the diaphragm 3. The metal plate 6 is pref-

45 erably mounted between resilient gaskets 8,

such as rubber, or other equivalent material.

Adjacent the opening 7 in the plate 6 is

a tube 9 which leads to an amplifying horn

common to talking machines. It will be

50 noted that the central axis of the tube 9 is
identical with the central axis of the dia-
phragm 3 at which point the said stylus bar
5 is secured thereto.

Within the chamber 2 in the body, in close

55 proximity and in juxtaposition to the dia-
phragm 3, spaced from the same by a thin

layer of air, is a resonance-box 10 having
preferably the shape of a flattened drum
the end walls of which are provided with
concentric corrugations, as at 11, and the go
lateral surface of which is preferably
rounded. These end walls provided with
concentric corrugations are' substantially
parallel to the diaphragm and are provided
with axial openings 12 substantially axial 65
with the said diaphragm. The resonance-
box is suspended in position, preferably by
means of a lug 13 on one side thereof held
in position on the body member 11 by means
of a screw 14 positioned adjacent the ful- 70
crum of the stylus bar.

When the sound-box is in use the air be-
tween the resonance-box and the diaphragm
3 is vibrated through the medium of the
stylus bar 5 and the diaphragm, the air set- 75
ting the resonance-box in vibration, where-
by the proper sounds are intensified and
transmitted to the tube 9 which leads to the
horn.

Having thus described my invention, I 80
claim as new and desire to secure by Let-
ters Patent :

1. In a sound-box, a chambered-body
member; a diaphragm closing one end of
the chamber, the opposite end of the cham- 85
ber having an outlet to a horn; a stylus bar
disposed exteriorly to the chamber and as-
sociated with the diaphragm; a resonance-
box in the chambered body in juxtaposition

to the diaphragm but spaced from the same; 90
and means for securing the resonance-box
within the chambered body, said resonance-
box having parallel walls provided with
concentric corrugations and an axial open-
ing substantially axial with the diaphragm. 95

2. In a sound-box, a chambered-body
member having a diaphragm closing one
end of the chamber, the opposite end of the
same having an outlet to a horn; a stylus
bar associated with the diaphragm; a reso- 100
nance-box in the chambered body in jux-
taposition to the diaphragm; and means for
securing the resonance-box within the cham-
bered body, said resonance-box being in the
shape of a flattened drum, the end walls of 105
Avhich are corrugated, its lateral surface
rounded, and having an axial opening.

3. In a sound-box, a chambered-body
member; a diaphragm closing one end of
the chamber, the other end having an out- 110
let to a horn ; a stylus bar associated with
the diaphragm ; a resonance-box in the

2

1,073,961

chambered body in juxtaposition to the dia-
phragm; and means for securing the reso-
nance-box within the chambered body,
said resonance-box having concentrically
5 corrugated walls substantially parallel to
the diaphragm, each of said walls having
an axial opening substantially axial with
the diaphragm.

4. In a sound-box, a chambered-body
10 member; a diaphragm associated with the
chambered body; a stylus bar associated
with the diaphragm and the chambered
body; a resonance-box within the cham-
bered body in juxtaposition to the dia-
ls phragm and spaced from the same; and
means for securing said resonance-box in
said chambered body, said resonance-box

having the shape of a flattened drum the
end walls of which are substantially par-
allel to the diaphragm and provided with 20
concentric corrugations the centers of which
are substantially in the axis of the dia-
phragm, said walls each having a central
opening substantially axial with the axis of
the diaphragm, and the lateral surface of 25
said drum being rounded.

In testimony whereof I have signed my
name to this specification in the presence of
two subscribing witnesses.

ADOLPH C. J. CONSTABEL.

Witnesses :

B. Cleghoen,
F. A. Batcheloe.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

Washington, D. C."

H. B. BABSON & A. HAUG.

TALKING MACHINE.
APPLIOATION FILED JULY 17, 1909.

1,074,080.

Patented Sept. 23, 1913.

COLUMBIA PLANOGBAPH CO.. WASHINOTON. D. i

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

HENKY BLAKE BABSOW, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS, AND ANDREW HAUG, OF CALDWELL,
NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNORS TO UNIVERSAL TALKING MACHINE MANXJEACTURING
COMPANY, A CORPORATION OP NEW YORK.

TALKING-MACHINE.

1,074,080. Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Sept. 33, 1913.

Original application filed March 7, 1905, Serial No. 248,872. Divided and this application filed July 17,

1909, Serial No. 5Q8,U5.

To (ill whom, it may concern:

Be it known that we, Henry Blake Bab-
son and Andkew^ Haug, , citizens of the
TTnited States, residing, respectively, at Chi-
5 cago, in the county of Cook and State of
Illinois, and Caldwell, in the county of Ks-
sex and State of New Jersey, have invented
certain new and useful Improvements in
Talking-Machines, of which the following is

10 a specification.

Our invention relates generally to talking
niacliines and has particular reference to
the mounting of the sound conveying tube
connecting the reproducer and the horn, this

15 applicati(m being a division of that filed b}^
us :March 7, 1905, Serial No. 248,872.

Ordinarily, the sound conveying tube or
taper arm, as it is generally known, is
mounted in a manner to permit free move-

20 ment of the reproducer in planes parallel
and at right angles to the surface of the
record and in providing for such movements
of the reproducer, various constructions
have heretofore been devised which are ob-

25 jectionable owing to complication and re-
sulting cost of manufacture, accuracy of ad-
justment required and liability of getting
out of order, difficulty in assembling parts,
etc.. etc.

30 The present invention is designed to over-
come the objections above pointed out by
producing an extremely simple and effective
form of mounting employing a minimum
number of parts of simple construction, the

35 assembling or removal of which requires
neither skill, experience nor special tools
and may be readily accomplished by the
aA'erage user of a machine.

A construction embodying our invention

40 is illustrated in the accompanying draw-
ings. We wish it understood, however, that
we do not limit ourselves to either the pre-
cise form or arrangement of parts shown, as
A'arious changes may be made therein with-

45 out departing from the spirit and scope of
our invention.

In the drawings, Figure 1 is a view in
side elevation with parts in section, showing
our invention applied to a well l<nown type

50 of talking machine. Fig. 2 is a sectional
view taken on the line s^, s^, of Fig. 1.
Figs. 3 and 4 are detail views in section,
and Fig. 5 is a plan view of one of the parts

employed t© mount the taper arm in the
horn-supporting bracket. 55

Referring now to the drawings, 1 repre-
sents a portion of the cabinet in which the
motor or driving mechanism is contained.

2 is the turn-table carrying the record 3
and connected in the usual manner to be 60
driven by the motor. Secured to the cabinet
and extending outward therefrom, there is
a bracket 4, Avhich terminates in a sleeve-
like off-set 5, liaving the smaller end of the
horn 6 loosely fitted therein as shown. The 65
sleeve is counterbored forming a flange 7
at its lower end and free to rotate therein
there is a ring 8, which is shouldered at 9
to pi'o\ide a cooperating flange 10. The
flanges may come to a direct bearing one 70
upon the other but in order to reduce fric-
tion as much as possible, a spring ring 11 is
preferably employed between them and has
struck-up portions 12 forming a bearing
surface upon which the flange 10 rests. The 75
ring 8 has an extended portion 13 projecting
below the bracket sleeve to receive the
shaped end 14 of the taper arm 15. This
arm 15 carries the reproducer IG at its outer
end and is secured in suspended relation in 80
the ring 8 upon the cone points of diametri-
cally disposed pins, screws or the like 17.

In assembling the parts, the rings 8 and
11, entered through the upper end of the
sleeve, are placed in position upon the sup- 85
porting flange 7 and are held against verti-
cal play by the small end of the horn, which
cooperates therewith as an annular stop
shoulder. The shaped end of the taper arm
is then fitted in the extended portion 13 of go
the ring 8, which projects below the bracket
sleeve and is secured by the screws 17. Thus
mounted, it will be seen that the arm is free
to move in planes parallel and at right
angles to the surface of the record, as re- 95
quired. It will also be observed that by rea-
son of the extremely simple construction
and arrangement of parts, the average user
of a machine can readily and conveniently
disconnect and reassemble the aboA^e de- lOO
scribed members forming the mounting for
the taper arm, for purposes of examination,
repair, etc., thus avoiding the necessity of
shipping the machine to a shop or factory
of the maker. 105

The operation and many important ad-

2

1,074,080

vantages of the invention will be apparent
from the foregoing description.

Having, therefore, described our inven-
tion, Ave claim:

5 In a talking machine, the combination of
a horn supporting bracket provided with an
annular flange, a ring having struck up por-
tions supported by the flange, a sound con-
veying tube extending from the bracket and

!0 terminating in a reproducer, and a member
rotatably mounted in the ring and having a
depending extension in which the sound
conveying tube is held in suspended rela-
tion.

In testimony whereof, I affix my signa- 15
ture in the presence of two witnesses.

HENRY BLAKE BABSON.

Witnesses :

GusTAvus Babson,
Fbedk. Babson,

In testimony whereof, I affix my signature
in the presence of two witnesses.

ANDREW HAUG.

Witnesses :

Walter H. Pumphrey,
M. G. Crawford.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents;

Washington, D. C."

I, KITSEE.

PHONOGRAPHIC REOOED.

APPLIOATION PILED SEPT. 2, 1911,

1,074,873.

Patented Oct. 7, 1913.

^i£'2

z z z Y

x—

8 y

13 ^^ Y /^/^

:>c-

^is-^ .-

TtvoevvtOT

WvtM«©©«»

^cc-^ (^ <;z97e,U.e^

COLUMBIA PLANOORAPH CO., WASHINOTON. D, C.

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE,

ISIDOK KITSEE, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR TO THE CORT-KITSEE

CO., A CORPORATION OE NEW YORK.

PHONOGRAPHIC RECORD.

1,074,873.

Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Oct. 7, 1913.

Application filed September 2, 1911. Serial No. 647,380.

To all xoliorfb it may concern :

Be it known that I, Isidor Kitsee, citi-
zen of the United States, resiclino- at Phila-
delphia, in the county of Philadelphia and
5 State of Pennsylvania, have invented cer-
tain new and useful Improvements in Pho-
nographic Eecords, of which the following is
a specification.
My invention relates to an improvement

10 in phonographic records.

The invention may be practised with rec-
ords of different types, but I will here de-
scribe the same as being adapted to the disk
type and Avherein the lines of record are

15 traced on such disk, the undulations repre-
senting the sound waves.

For the purpose of my invention, it is
immaterial if the disk is covered with an
etch-resisting material and the lines traced

20 by exposing the underlying metal, or if the
lines of record are traced with an etch-re-
sisting material on the surface of a material
adapted to be etched. But I will here de-
scribe my invention as being applied to a

25 record in the shape of a disk consisting of
an etchable material, such as metal, and on
which the lines of record are traced with an
etch resisting fluid, such for instance as dis-
solved resin, etc.

30 In the production of sound records for
commercial use, it was found that the origi-
nal record could only be etched a very mi-
nute depth if copies therefrom should be
taken, for the reason that during the proc-

35 ess of etching, the acid attacks the metal
not only vei'tically but also horizontally in
all directions and, therefore, instead of hav-
ing a groove with perpendicular or paral-
lel sides, these groove.s are "under cut", so

40 to speak, that is, they branch out and pro-
duce a wedge-shaped space with inclined
sides. An original with shallow grooves
produces copies with shallow indentations
and the stylus, therefore, running in these

45 shallow indentations or grooves cannot ex-
ert strong pressure on the diaphragm in ac-
cordance with the undulations of the grooves
and the end of the stylus has to be of such
thinness that a frequent change is necessary.

50 Some manufacturers have, for this reason,
abandoned the etching process and substi-
tuted therefor an electroplating process,

but this process does not overcome the shal-
lowness of the grooves and is, therefore, in
this respect as defective as the etching proc- 55
ess.

It is the aim of my invention to overcome
this difficulty and to produce sound records
in Avhich the lines of record are of required
depth. 60

For the purpose of illustrating one form
my invention may take, I have reference to
the accompanying drawing.

In this drawing; Figure 1 is a plan view
of part of a j^late or disk provided with 65
the lines of record; Fig. 2 is an enlarged
sectional Anew of Fig. 1 showing the lines
of record in relief; Fig. 3 is an enlarged sec-
tional view showing the material etched out
between the lines of record; Fig. 4 is a 70
similar view as Fig. 3 showing the lines of
record with a ncAv surface or plate; Fig. 5
is a similar view as Fig. 4 showing the
original support removed and Fig. 6 is a
sectional view of a commercial record as 7S
formed or molded from the master record.
All of these views are, as said above, en-
larged so as to clearly bring out the differ-
ent phases of the process.

In Fig. 1; 1 is the etchable plate as an 80
entirety, preferably consisting of metal,
such as copper or zinc; 2 are the lines of
record consisting of a suitable etch-resist-
ing material; 3 are the spaces between said
lines. 85

In Fig. 2; 1 is the etchable plate as an
entirety; 2 are the lines of record; 3 the
spaces between said lines. The etchable
plate is here shown as to consist of the parts
4 and 5. The part 4 which lies between the 90
lines of record is designed to be etched out
in the later processes and the part 5 is de-
signed to form the base or support for those
parts of the plate which are not removed
i)y the etching process. X is the line show- 95
ing how far the plate will be etched.

In Fig. 3; 1 is the etchable plate as an
entirety; 2 are the lines of record with their
metal parts 6: 7 the channels produced
through the etching process; ,5 the base for 100
the support of those parts of the plate in-
tervening between the channels.

In Fig. 4; 6 are the metal parts of the
lines of record; 5 the base thereof; 7 the

1,074,873

channels between the lines of record; 8 a
roof or plate for the upper parts of the lines
of record, said plate bridging the channels
7 and forming an adherent coating.
5 In Fig. 5; 8 is the roof or plate; C the
raetal parts of the lines of record and 7
the channels between same.

Fig. 6 is, as said above, a commercial rec-
ord or copy of the master record, and in this

10 figure 10 is the record as an entirety, of
which 12 are the depressed lines of record
and 13 the spaces between same.

In Figs. 2, 3, -4, 5 and 6 ; Y is a line run-
ning vertically at identical places of the rec-

15 ord to denote the character of these places
during the various stages of the process and
of the finished article.

The mode of operation is as follows: —
Taking it for granted that a metallic disk

20 is employed and that the phonographic lines
are recorded on the surface of the metallic
disk with an etch-resisting material, the
plate with the recorded lines is subjected to
the process of etching, whereby the spaces

25 between the lines are etched-out to a re-
quired depth and the lines left in relief, so
to speak.

It is immaterial for the purpose of my in-
vention which method or process of etching

30 is employed, if the plate is subjected to the
etching liquid in bulk, or only to a spray of
same, or to fumes of the required etching
material. It suffices to say that the plate
has to be, from time to time during this

35 process, inspected and proper care has
to be taken so that the process of
etching should not mutilate those parts of
the surface on which the lines are recorded.
It is impossible to give here strict rules, be-

40 cause different metals I'equire different etch-
ing fluids and because, for different pur-
poses, different depths of the etched-in parts
are also required. But it is believed that
for usual commercial purposes, a depth of

45 between tti find yV of an inch suffices. Cer-
tainly, the gTeater the depth, the farther
apart have to be the lines of record, for the
reason that the greater the depth, the greater
the under-cut and great care has to be taken

50 that in the process of etching, the parts of

the plate perpendicular with the lines of

record should not be under-cut or eaten

away.

The record, after having left the etching

55 process, is illustrated in Fig. 3.

When the parts intervening between the
record lines have been eaten or etched away
the desired depth, then the plate is carefully
washed so as to remove all traces of the etch-

60 ing fluid and the surface of the plate cleaned
to prepare the same for the next step. This
next step consists therein that the surface
is provided with a roof or support. This
roof or support may be provided by me-

65 chanical means, such for instance as solder-

ing on a suitable plate of metal, or it may
be provided by the process of electroplating.
If this latter process is employed, then it is
necessary to fill the spaces or channels with
a conducting material, such for instance as 70
a very fusil^le metal or, — as in some cases it
is preferred to do, — wax or paraffin made
conducting by a liberal intermixture of car-
bon and graphite. Care should be taken, if
the wax or paraffin is employed, that no 75
graphite or other foreign substance should
cover the metal part to be plated, as other-
Avise the required adherence of the plate to
the metal parts may not be reached.

When the plate is ready for the electro- go
lytic bath, it is, in the usual way, made the
cathode in an electrolytic apparatus pro-
vided with a suitable electrolyte and a suit-
able anode, and required current passed
through the apparatus. 85

When the deposit has reached the required
thickness and when, after inspection, the de-
posit has been found to adhere properly to
the surface of the record plate, then the same
is taken out of the apparatus, carefully 90
washed and subjected to a process whereby
the loAver part or bottom of the plate is re-
moved.

The following means can be employed : —

First: — chemical means, — by simply etch- 95
inar away the bottom.

Second: — electrical means,— by making
the plate the anode in an electrolytic appa-
ratus, but if such is the case, all parts have
to he carefnllv insulated with the exception loo
of such parts as are intended to be removed.

Third: — mechanical means. — by simply
shaving-off, with the aid of suitable appara-
ratus, the bottom of the plate. This process
is, to a certain extent, preferred, for the rea- 105
son that the shaving-off by traveling Iniives
is easily accomplished and an art well known
in metal turning.

After the bottom has been removed, the
plate is cleaned of all foreign material, such 110
for instance as the filling formerly provided
b^r the electrolytic process and with this re-
moval the master record is complete. In
producing copies from this master record,
the same is placed upside down, so that the 115
former uppermost part now forms the lower
support and the solid material forming the
lines of record is uppermost. In this posi-
tion, the master record represents a lower
solid support and integral therewith the 120
lines of record in relief. When now, a plas-
tic material is pressed into this master rec-
ord, then the lines of record are reproduced
in this plastic material in intaglio. The
former spaces between the lines of record are 125
now in relief. Such a copy can be used for
commercial purposes to reproduce sound.

It is obvious that if the upper support or
roof is made by the electroplating process,
the support or roof may be strengthened, as ISO

1,074,873

is usually the case with electroplating, by
an application of lead or other suitable ma-
terial to the outer surface.

Having now described my invention, what
5 I claim as new and desire to secure by Let-
ters Patent is : —

1. The method of producing a phono-
graphic master record, which consists in
first recording the sound waves on a suitable

10 plate, removing portions of the plate to de-
fine the lines of record, then applj'ing to the
plate an adherent coating to bridge the open-
ings formed by the removal of said portions
and to provide a base for the completed

15 record, and finally removing the bottom of
the plate.

2. The method of producing a phono-
graphic master record, which consists in
first recording the sound waves on a suit-

20 able plate, subjecting the plate to the action
of an etching agent whereby to remove por-
tions of the plate to define the lines of
record, then applying to the plate an ad-
herent coating to bridge the etched-out por-

2') tions and to form a base for the completed
record, and finally removing the bottom of
the plate.

3. The method of producing a phono-
graphic master record, which consists in

30 first recording the sound waves on a suit-
able plate, etching out the portions of the
plate between the lines of record, then apply-
ing to the plate an adherent coating to
bridge the etched-out portions, and finally

35 removing the bottom of the plate.

4. The method of producing a phono-

graphic master record, which consists in first
recording the sound waves' on a suitable plate
with an etch-resisting material, etching out
the portions of the plate between the lines 40
of record, then applying to the plate an ad-
herent coating to bridge the etched-out por-
tions and to form a base for the completed
record, and finally removing the bottom of
the plate. 45

5. The method of producing a phono-
graphic master record, which consists in
depositing on a plate, capable of being
etched, lines of record formed of an etch-
resisting material, subjecting the plate to 50
the action of an etching agent whereby the
portions between said record lines are re-
moved, then applying to the plate an ad-
herent coating to bridge over the etched-out
portions and finally removing the bottom of 55
the plate.

6. The method of producing a phono-
graphic master record, which consists in
first recording the sound waves on a suit-
able plate, removing portions of said plate 60
to define the lines of record, then providing
the upper surface of said original plate with

a permanent cover adapted to serve as the
base of the completed record and finally re-
moving the bottom of the original plate. 65

In testimony whereof I affix my signature
in presence of two witnesses.

ISIDOE KITSEE.

Witnesses :

Edith R. Stilley,
Mary P. Smith.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

Washington, D. C."

1,075,288.

E. E. JOHNSON & J. 0. ENGLISH.

TALKING MACHINE.
APPLICATION FILED OCT. 8, 1910,

t|^

WITNESSES

^ § ^ 55.

Patented Oct. 7, 1913.

3 SHEETS-SHEET 1.

^ ^

^

INVENTORS

By

I

ATTORN EV

COLUMBIA PLANOORAPH CO., WASHINOTON. D. C.

1,075,288.

E. R. JOHNSON & J. 0. ENGLISH.

TALKING MACHINE.

APPLIOATIOH FILED OCT. 8, 1910.

Patented Oct. 7, 1913

3 SHEETS-SHEET 2.

-ze

JCr^Q. ^.

INVENTORS

WITNESSES

7;

BY

m

y.S^a^i^^uA:^

ATTORNEY

COLUMBIA PLANOORAPH CO., WASHINGTON, D. C,

1,075,288.

E. R. JOHNSON & J. C. ENGLISH.

TALKING MACHINE.
APPLICATION PILED OCT. 8, 1910.

Patented Oct. 7, 1913.

3 SHEETS-SHEET 3.

WITNESSES

(^G.^f^AtuixiHy.

f

BY

INVENTORS,

ATTORNEY

COLUMBIA PLANOQRAPH CO.. WASHINGTON. D. C.

UiSriTED STATES! PATENT OFFICE.

ELDRIDGE R. JOHNSON, OF MEKION, PENNSYLVANIA, AND JOHN C. ENGLISH, OE CAM-
DEN, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNORS TO VICTOR TALKING MACHINE COMPANY, A COR-
PORATION OF NEW JERSEY.

TALKING-MACHINE.

1,075,388.

Specification of letters Pateut. Pateiltecl Oct, 7, 1913.

Application filed October 8, 1910. Serial No. 585,975.

To all whoin it may concern :

Be it known that we, Eldridge R. John-
son, a citizen of the United States, and a
resident of Merion, in the county of Mont-
5 gomery and State of Pennsylvania, and
John C. English, a citizen of the United
States, f<nd a resident of Camden, in the
county of Camden and State of New Jersey,
have invented certain new and useful Im-

10 iDrovements in Talking-Machines, whereof
the following is a specification, reference be-
ing had to the accompanying drawings.

This invention particularly relates to the
sound conveyer comiDrising a swinging arm

15 and the parts operatively connected there-
with.

The pi'incipal objects of this invention
are, to provide a sound conveying arm co-
operative Avith a sound record disk, to direct

20 the point of a stylus needle in a rectilinear
path, radial with respect to the axis of the
sound record disk, and operative to main-
tain the vertical plane of the stylus needle
at an invariable angle to a radial plane, and

25 tangent to the respective convolutions of the
spiral groove of the record disk, to reduce
the wear upon the walls of the record groove,
incident to the usual turning action of the
needle relative to said walls; to provide a

30 sound conveyer comprising relatively mov-
able sections and having means to prevent
leakage at the joints between said sections;
and to jDrovide means to reduce the height
of the operative mechanism.

35 The form of this invention, hereinafter
described, provides a talking machine with
a soimd conveyer, comjirising a mounting
for the sound reproducer; a movable sound
conduit or swinging arm connected with

40 said mounting b}^ a relatively movable ta-
pered hollow connecting arm, and a sta-
tionary sound conduit having an elbow con-
necting a sound amplifier wi<:h said movable
conduit or swinging arm; trunnions sup-

45 porting said movable conduit on said elbow;
trunnions supporting said tapered connect-
ing ann with said movable conduit; a link
connecting said tapered arm with said con-
duit elbow, operative to maintain said arm

50 in a substantially horizontal plane; a motor
operative to i-otate a record disk in coop-
erative relation with a st3dus needle carried
by said sound reproducer; a recess in said

stationary conduit arranged to receive said
motor, to reduce the height of the operative 55
mechanism and the casing inclosing the
same ; and balancing mechanism operative
to counterbalance the weight of the movable
parts of said sound conveyer.

This invention further includes all of the 60
various novel features of construction and
arrangement hereinafter more definitely
specified.

In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1
is a central vertical longitudinal sectional 65
view of a talking machine constructed in
accordance with this invention, showing the
inclosed mechanism in elevation, for con-
venience of illustration; Fig. 2 is a trans-
verse vertical sectional view of said machine 70
taken on the line 2 — 2 in Fig. 1; Fig. 3 is
a plan view of the stationary part of the
sound conveyer and its amplifier; Fig. 4 is
a fragTuentai'y vertical longitudinal sec-
tional view of the conduit elbow and the 75
movable conduit or swinging arm carried
thereby, showing the intermediate position
in full Imes, and the opposite extreme posi-
tions in dot and dash lines.

In said figures, the talking machine cas- 80
ing comprises the bottom board 7, the top
board 8, the end walls 9 and 10, the side
walls 12, and the cover 14 hingedly secured
at 1.5 to f-aid end wall 9. The end wall 10 is
provided with an aperture 16 arranged to be 85
closed by the doors 17, which are provided
with hinges 18 and a knob 19 for their con-
venient manipulation, to vary the volume of
sound emitted by the sound amplifier, to be
hereinafter described. 90

The motor mechanism, comprising the
base plate 20, spring barrel 22, wonm-gear
23 and worm 24, is carried by the fi'ame 26,
which has a flange 27 at its perimeter, sup-
ported upon the ledge 28 surrounding the 9 5
aperture 29 in the top board 8, so that, as
may be readily seen, the motor mechanism
is free to be removed trom the casing for
adjustment or repairs. The worm 24 pro-
vides a rotary stud 30, projecting above the lOO
plate 20 and carrying the tuna-table 32, ar-
ranged to support a sound record disk 33,
and to rotate said disk in the chamber 34,
Avhich is formed by the cover 14. The sound
conveyer comprises a mounting 35 for the 105
sound reproducer 36, a tapered arm 37, a

^

1,075,28^

movable conduit 38, a conduit elbow 39, a
stationary conduit 40, and a sound ampli-
fier 41.

The reproducer mounting 35 is arranged
g to turn on a horizontal axis in the barrel 45
at the outer free end of the tapered arm 37,
and said tapered arm is provided with a
substantially spherical flange 46, arranged
to snugly fit the orifice 47 in the end of the

jg movable conduit 38, and said spherical flange
is operative to seal the joint thus formed in
any position which said tapered arm may
occupy relative to the conduit 38, when os-
cillated upon the trunnions 48, which serve

j5 to support said tapered arm 37.

The movable conduit or swinging arm 38
is provided with the curved flange 49, which
conforms to the cylindriform curved flange
50 of the conduit elbow 39, which, as best

20 shoAvn in Fig. 4, has the aperture 51 in said
flange 50, which is embraced by the flange
49, in any position which the swinging arm
38 may occupy, relative to the elbow 39,
when oscillated upon the trunnions 53, and

25 by reason of the close fit between the flanges

49 and 50, the escape of sound passing from

the conduit 38 to the elbow 39 is prevented.

As shown in Fig. 4, the aperture 54 in the

flange 49 is materially smaller than the aper-

3Q ture 51 in the flange 50, whereby substan-
tially the full volume of sound passing-
through the conduit 38 will be received by
the elbow 39 and directed thereby through
the sound conduit 40. The movable sound

35 conduit 38 is provided with the depending
arms 55 ha-^dng bearings 56 supported for
oscillation upon the trunnions 53 which ex-
tend laterally from the elbow 39, each of
said arms 55 having an extension 57, which

40 is provided with a stud 58 iDrojecting lat-
erally therefrom and arranged to carry the
counterweights 60, 61 and 62, operative to
balance the movable portion of the conveyer
comprising the swinging arm 38, tapered

45 connecting arm 37 and mounting 35. The
movable conduit 38 is also provided with a
stud 65 arranged to support the weight 66,
which is arranged to assist the weights 60,
61 and 62 in balancing and which is adjust-

50 able on said stud 65, and secured in any ad-
justed position by the set screw 67.

In order that the oscillation of the mov-
able conduit or swinging arm 38 upon its
trunnions 56 may maintain the tapered arm

65 37 in a horizontal position, a suf)porting link
70 is provided, having a yoke 71 pivotally
connected by trunnions 72 with the tapered
connecting arm 37, and a yoke 73 pivotally
connected by trunnions 74 with the elbow 39.

60 It may be observed that the movement of
the swinging arm 38 upon its trunnions 56
effects a movement of the point of the stylus
needle 75 in a rectilinear path, radially with
respect to the axis of the record disk 33 with

65 which said needle 75 cooperates to reproduce

the vibrations recorded in the grooves there-
of, and which grooves effect the movement
of the needle across the face of said record
disk. The elbow 39 is provided with the
supporting bracket 80, which is secured to 70
the supporting block 81 by suitable bolts 82,
and has the flange 83, which is secured to
the flange 84 of the stationary sound con-
duit 40 by the bolts 85.

As economy of space is an essential fac- 75
tor in machines of the class described, the
stationary sound conduit 40 is provided with
a recess 87 arranged to receive the spring
barrel 22, and the adjacent recess 88 ar-
ranged to receive the worm-gear 23. Said 80
recess 87 is of sufficient extent, longitudi-
nally, to receive the end of the worm 24 and
its bearing, as shown in Figs. 1 and 3. A
bulged projection 90 in the bottom wall of
the conduit 40, substantially corresponding 85
to the recesses 87 and 88, provides ample
space for the passage of the sound waves
through the conduit at the region of the re-
cesses 87 and 88. The sound amplifier 41
is connected with the sound conduit 40 by 90
the flanges 91 and 92 of said conduit, and
comprises the top wall 94, bottom wall 95,
and the side walls 96. Said top and bottom
walls diverge from the mouth of the con-
duit 40, and diverging walls 97, 98 and 99 95
are interposed between said top and bottom
walls 94 and 95 in substantially equally
spaced diverging relation, as best shown in
Fig. 1.

As best shoAvn in Fig. 3, the lateral walls 100
100 of the conduit 40 diverge from the elbow
39, and the side walls 96 of the sound ampli-
fier 41 diverge in ogee curves. It may be
here noted that the movement of the point
of the stylus needle in a plane coincident io5
with the axis of the sound record disk, pre-
vents said needle from being worn by the
undulations in the walls of the record groove
to a constantly changing sharp edge, as when
said needle is progressed in the path of an no
arc; therefore, it is obvious that the life
of the record is not only materially in-
creased, but the slight unavoidable wear of
the walls of the record groove is uniform
throughout the entire length of said groove. 115

It is not desired to limit this invention to
the iDrecise details of construction and ar-
rangement herein set forth, as it is obvious
that various modifications may be made
therein without departing from the essen- 120
tial features of the invention as defined in
the appended claims.

Having thus described our invention, we
claim :

1. In a talking machine, the combination 125
with a horizontal turn-table, of a sound
reproducer, a stylus operatively connected
to said reproducer, a sound conduit, a hol-
low sound conveying arm communicating
with said reproducer and pivotally connect- 130

IjOtSjSSS

ed to and communicating with said conduit
and operative to be swung with respect
thereto in a svibstantially vertical plane by
engagement of said stylus with a record on
t, said support to direct the point of said
stylns in a straight line.

2. In a talking machine the combination
Avith a horizontal tui-n-table, of a sound re-
producer pi-ovided With a stjdus, sound am-

IQ plifying means, a holloAv sound conveying
arm communicating with said rej^roducer
and pivotalh' connected to and communicat-
ing with said amplifying means, and oper-
ative to be swung with respect thereto in a

J 5 substantially vertical plane by engagement
of said stylus with a record on said support
to direct the point of said stylus in a
stl-aight line radial to the axis of rotation
of said recol'd.

20 ^- In a talking machine, the combination
with a horizontal turn-table, of a sound re-
producer, a stAdus operatively connected to
said Reproducer, a sound conduit, a hollow
sound conveying arm communicating with

25 said reproducer, and pivotally connected to
and communicating M-ith said conduit and
operative to be swung with respect thereto
in a Substantially vertical plane by engage-
ment of said stylus with a record on said

30 suppoi't to direct the point of said stylus in
a str'aight line parallel with the plane of
movement of said arhi.

4. In a talking machine, the combination
with a sound reproducer, of a stylus needle

35 carried thereby, a swinging arm arranged to
oscillate in a vertical plane, a hollow con-
nector betAveen said arm and reproducer,
movable with respect to said swinging arm,
and means to maintain said hollow con-

40 nector in a horizontal plane, said ainn being
cooperative with a sound record, to direct
tlie point of said stylus needle in a straight
line radial to said record simultaneously
Avith the vertical oscillation of said arm.

45 5. In a talking machine, the combination
Avith a sound reproducer, of a stylus needle
operatively connected thercAvith, and ar-
ranged to engage a sound record disk, a
sound conveyer, comprising a swinging arm

SO ari'anged to oscillate in a vertical plane, a
holloAv connector pivoted thereto, and ar-
ranged to connect said sound rej^roducer
therewith, and means to maintain said hol-
low connector in horizontal position, said

55 arm being arranged to cooperate Avith said
record disk to direct the point of the stylus
needle in a straight line radial to the axiy
of said disk simultaneously with the SAving-
ing movement of said arm.

60 0. In a talking machine, the combination
with a sound reproducer, of a stjdus needle
carried thereby arranged to engage a sound
record disk, a swinging arm pivoted for os-
cillation in a vertical plane, a hollow con-

65 nector between said reproducer and said

arm, and means arranged to maintain said
connector in a horizontal po.-ition to recip-
rocate in a substantially rectilinear path,
operative to direct the point of the stylus
needle in a straight line, radial Avith respect >jq
to the axis of said record disk simultane-
ously A^ith the swinging movement of said
arm.

7. In a talking machine, the combination
Avith a sound reproducer, of a stylus needle 75
operatiA^ely connected tlierewith, cooper-
atiAe with a sound record to effect the move-
ment of said sound reproducer, a sound con-
A'eyer comprising a stationary section, a
relativel}'^ movable section arranged to oscil- go
late in a vertical plane, and a hollow piv-
oted connection betAveen said moA^able sec-
tion and said reproducer, arranged to recip-
rocate in a substantially straight line and
operatiA'e to direct the point of the stylus 55
needle in a line radial with respect to the
axis of srtid sound record simultaneously
Avith the oscillation of said movable section.

8. In a talking machine, the combination
with a sound reproducer, of a stylus needle jo
operatively connected there\Aith. a soujid
conA^eyer having a stationarA' section, and a
movable section arranged to oscillate in a
A-ertical plane, a holloAv connecting arm piv-
oted to said movable section and arranged 95
to connect said sound reproducer thercAvith,
and a link connecting said arm and the sta-
tionary section of said conveyer, operative

to maintain said connector in a substan-
tially horizontal position, to tlirect the point loo
of the stylus needle in a line radial Avith re-
spect to the axis of the record disk.

9. In a talking machine, the combination
AVith a horizontal disk record support, of a
sound reproducer, a stylus needle cper- 105
atiA-ely connected to said reproducer and ar-
ranged to engage a sound record disk on
said support, a sound conA^eyer having a
stationary section, and a relatively movable
section arranged to operatively oscillate in 110
a vertical plane, and means connecting said
sound reproducer with said movable section,
operatiA'e to direct the point of said stAdus
needle in a line radial to the axis of said
disk, and to maintain said needle perpcn- 115
dicular to said line.

10. In a talking machine, the combination
Avith a sound reproducer, of a stjdus needle
carried thereby, operativeh' engaged with a
sound record disk, a sound conA'eyer com- 120
prising a stationary section, a movable sec-
tion arranged to oscillate in a A'ertical plane

on said stationarj^ section, a holloAV ai'm con-
necting said movable section and said repro-
ducer, arranged to reciprocate horizontally, 12&'
and means to counterbalance said movable
section and the parts carried thereby, dur-
ing tlie simultaneous movement of said mov-
able section and the reciprocation of said re-
producer, 130

1,076,288

11. In a talking machine, the combination
with a sound reproducer, of a stylus needle
carried thereby arranged to engage a sound
record disk, a sound conveyer comprising a

5 stationary section, a movable section, and a
connection between said movable section and
said sound reproducer, a link pivoted to
said connection, and arranged to support
the same in a horizontal position, and to

10 direct the point of the stylus needle in a
straight line radial to the axis of said rec-
ord disk, and counterbalancing means car-
ried by said movable section, operative to
afford a light engagement of said stjdus

15 with the lateral walls of the record groove.

12. In a talking machine, the combination
with a sound reproducer, of a stylus needle
carried thereby operative to engage a sound
record disk, a mounting for said sound re-

20 producer, a hollow connector movably
carrying said mounting, a swinging arm
pivotally supporting said connector, and
arranged to oscillate in a vertical plane,
bearings forming the center of oscillation

25 of said swinging arm, a stationary conveyer
provided with trunnions for said bearings,
and a link pivoted to said stationary con-
veyer, and to said connector in spaced re-
lation from the pivotal supports of said arm

30 and connector, operatitve to maintain said
connector in horizontal position to be re-
ciprocated by the oscillatory movement of
said swinging arm, and to direct the point
of the stylus needle in a rectilinear path.

35 13. In a talking machine, the combination
with a sound reproducer, of a stylus needle
carried thereby operative to engage a sound
record disk, a mounting for said sound re-
producer, a hollow arm movably connected

40 with said mounting, a movable conduit
pivotally supporting said arm, and ar-
ranged to oscillate in a vertical plane, bear-
ings forming the center of oscillation of
said movable conduit, a stationary conveyer

45 provided with trunnions for said bearings,
a link pivoted to said stationary conveyer,
and to said arm in spaced relation from the
pivotal connection of said arm and movable
conduit, and the trunnions of said movable

50 conduit, ojDerative to maintain said arm in
horizontal position to be reciprocated by the
oscillatory movement of said movable con-
duit, and means to counterbalance said
movable conduit, to afford a minimum pres-

55 sure between said stylus and the Avails of the
record gi'oove.

11. In a talking machine, the combination
with a sound reproducer, of a stylus needle
carried thereby, operative to engage a sound

60 record disk, a mounting for said sound re-
i")roducer, a hollow arm movably connected
with said mounting, a movable conduit
pivotally supporting said arm, and arranged
to oscillate in a vertical plane, bearings

65 forming the center of oscillation of said

movable conduit, a stationary conveyer pro-
vided with trunnions for said bearings, a
link pivoted to said stationary conveyer
and to said arm, in spaced relation from
the pivotal connection of said arm and the ^q
trunnions of said movable conduit, opera-
tive to maintain said arm in horizontal posi-
tion irrespective of the position of said
movable conduit, and counterbalancing
means carried by said movable conduit op- 75
erative to counterbalance the same, and to
minimize the pressure of said stylus needle
on the wall of the record groove.

15. In a talking machine, the combination
with a sound reproducer, of a stylus needle go
carried thereby and arranged to engage a
sound record disk, a sound conveyer con-
nected with said reproducer and compris-
ing a stationary conduit, an elbow con-
nected therewith having a curved flange, a 85
swinging arm pivoted to said elbow, and
provided on one end thereof with a curved
flange conforming to the flange of said el-
boAv, and arranged to seal the joint betAveen
said movable conduit and said elbow, a cir- 90
cular orifice in the opposite end of said arm,

a tapered arm having a spherical region
pivotalI.y fitted into said orifice, and a
mounting for said reproducer movably car-
ried by said tapered arm, a link pivoted to 95
said elbow and to said tapered arm, opera-
tive to mantain the latter in a horizontal
position, and AA'eights arranged to counter-
balance the movable parts of said conveyer,
and to reduce the lateral stress on said 100
needle.

16. In a talking machine, the combination
with a horizontal turn-table of a sound con-
veyer comprising a stationary section, a
movable section connected to said sta- 105
tionary section and movable with respect
thereto about a horizontal axis, and a hol-
low arm section connected to said movable
section and movable with respect thereto
about a horizontal axis, a sound reproducer 110
mounted upon said hollow arm section and
provided with a stylus arranged to engage

a disk sound record upon said turntable and
operative to haA'e its point traA^erse a rec-
tilinear path radial with r'espect to the axis 115
of said disk.

17. In a talking machine, the combination
of a sound record disk, a sound reproducer
in engagement with said record, an arm ar-
ranged to swing in a A^ertical plane, and a 12»
supporting link arranged to maintain the
axis of said sound reproducer parallel to
the surface of the record disk throughout its
XDassage in a rectilinear radial path across
said sound record disk during the SAvinging 125
movement of said arm.

18. In a talking machine, the combination
of a sound box, a pivoted sound conveying
tube arranged to oscillate in a vertical plane,

a tube pivotally connected to said sound box 130

1,075,8.88

a

and said pivoted sound conveying tube, and
a supporting link operative to maintain the
axis of said second named tube in liorizantal
position and parallel to to the plajie of oscil-
0 lation of said sound conveying tube through-
out the iDassage of said sound box across a
sound record.

19. In a talking machine, the combination
with a sound reproducer, of a stylus needle

10 carried thereby, a swinging arm arranged to
oscillate in a vertical plane, a hollow con-
nector between said arm and said repro-
ducer, movable with respect to said arm,
and means to maintain said hollow connector

15 in a horizontal plane, said arm being co-
operative with a sound record, to move the
point of the stylus needle in a straight line
radial to said record.

20. In a talking machine, the combination
20 with a sound reproducer, of a stylus needle

operatively connected therewith, and ar-
ranged to operativelj'^ engage a sound record
disk, a sound conveyer, comprising a swing-
ing arm arranged to oscillate in a vertical

25 plane, a hollow connector pivoted thereto,
and arranged to connect said reproducer
therewith, and means operatiA'e to maintain
said hollow connector in a horizontal posi-
tion, said arm being arranged to cooperate

30 with said record disk to move the point of
the stylus needle in a straight line radial to
the axis of rotation of said disk.

21. In a talking machine, the combination
with a sound reproducer, of a stylus needle

35 carried thereby arranged to engage a soimd
record disk, a swinging arm pivoted for os-
cillation in a vertical plane, a hollow con-
nector between said reproducer and said arm,
and means arranged to maintain said connect-

40 or in a horizontal position to reciprocate in a
substantially rectilinear path, operative to
direct the point of the styliis needle in a
straight line radial with respect to the axis
of said record disk, the rotation of said rec-

45 ord disk being operative to move said needle
in said line.

22. In a talking machine, the combination
with a sound reproducer, of a stylus needle
operatively connected therewith arranged to

50 engage a sound record disk, a sound con-
veyer comprising a stationar}^ section, a
relatively movable section arranged to oscil-
late in a vertical plane, and a pivoted con-
nection between said movable section and

55 said reproducer, arranged to reciprocate in
a substantially straight line, and operative
to direct the point of the stylus needle in a
line radial to the axis of rotation of said
sound record, the rotatiton of said record

60 disk being operative to move said needle in
said line.

23. In a talking machine, the combination
with a sound reproducer, of a stylus needle
carried thereby, operatively engaged with a

65 sound record disk, a sound conveyer com-

prising a stationary section and a relatively
movable section respectively having trun-
nions and bearings, and arranged for rela-
tive oscillation in a vertical plane, an arm
connecting said movable section and said re- 70
producer, arranged to reciprocate horizon-
tally, and counterbalancing means carried
by said movable section.

24. In a talking machine, the combina-
tion with a rotary disk record support, of 75
stationary means, an arm connected to said
stationary means and arranged to SAving
with respect thereto in a plane substantially
perpendicular to said support, a connecting
arm pivoted to said first mentioned arm and go
movable with respect thereto, a sound re-
producer connected to said connecting arm
and provided with a stylus arranged to co-
operate with a record on said support, and
supporting means connecting said connect- 85
ing arm and said stationary means.

25. In a talking machine, the combination
with a rotary disk record support, of sta-
tionary means, and arm connected to said
stationary means and arranged to swing 90
with respect thereto in a plane substantially
perpendicular to said support, a connecting
arm pivoted to said first mentioned arm and
movable with respect thereto, a sound re-
producer connected to said connecting arm 95
and bodily movable with respect to said con-
necting arm toward and away from said
support and provided Avith a stylus ar-
ranged to cooperate with a record on said
support, and supporting means connecting 100
said connecting arm and said stationary
means.

26. In talking machine, the combination
with a sound reproducer, of a stylus needle
carried thereby, a swinging arm arranged to 105
oscillate in a vertical plane, a connector be-
tween said arm and said reproducer mov-
able with respect to said arm, and means to
maintain said connector in a horizontal
plane, said arm being cooperative with a 110
sound record, to moA'^e the point of the stylus
needle in a straight line radial to said record.

27. In a talking machine, the combination
Avith a rotary disk record support, of sound
reproducing means provided with a stylus 115
arranged to cooperate with a disk record on
said support, and means including an arm
arranged to oscillate in a plane substantially
perpendicular to a disk record on said sup-
port to direct the point of said stylus in a 120
substantially straight line across a disk rec-
ord on said support and to maintain said
stylus perpendicular to said line, said arm
being operative to be swung in said plane

by the engagement of said stylus with a disk 125
record on said support.

28. In a talking machine, the combination
with a rotary disk record support, of sound
reproducing means provided with a stylus
arranged to cooperate with a disk record on 130

©

1,075,288

said support, and means including a hollow
sound conveying arm arranged to oscillate
in a plane substfintially perpendicular to a
disk record on said support to direct the
5 point of said stjdus in a substantially
straight line across a disk record on said
support and to maintain said stylus perpen-
dicular to said line, said arm being opera-
tive to be swung in said plane by the en-

10 gagement of said stylus with a disk record
on said support.

29. In a talking machine, the combination
with a rotary disk record support, of sound
reproducing means provided with a stylus

1 5 arranged to cooperate with a disk record on
said support, and means including an arm
arranged to oscillate in a plane substantially

perpendicular to a disk record on said sup-
port to direct the point of said stylus in a
substantially straight line across and sub- 20
stantially radially with respect to a disk
record on said support and to maintain said
stylus perpendicular to said line, said arm
being operative to be swung in said plane
by the engagement of said stylus with a 25
disk record on said support.

Signed by us, the said Eldeidge R. John-
son and John C. English, at Camden, State
of New Jersey, this 6th day of October, 1910.
ELDEIDGE R. JOHNSON.
JOHN C. ENGLISH.
Witnesses :

Ralph Lindsat Freeman,
Feank Barclay Middueton, Jr.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cent-: each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents.

Washington, D. C."

K. FROMHOLZ.

TALKING MACHmE,
APPLICATION FILED OOT. 12, 1910.

1,075,708.

Patented Oct. 14, 1913.

*«^ <^^e-«-r^^ ^?^?^

^jite'^.

PLANOGRAPH CO., WASHINGTON, D. C.

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

REIWHOLD FUOMHOLZ, OF BOXHAGEW, GERMANY.
TALKING-MACHINE.

1,075,^08.

Specification of Letters latent. Patented Oct. 14, 1913.

Application filed October 12, 1910. Serial No. 586,812.

To all Loham it may cmu-ern :

Be it known that I, Eeinhold Fromholz,
a subject of the German Empire, and a resi-
dent of Gartnerstrasse 19, Boxhagen, Ger-
5 many, have invented a certain new and use-
ful Improvement in or Rehiting to Talking-
JMachines; and I do hereby declare the fol-
lowing to be a full, clear, and exact descrip-
tion of the invention,, such as will enable

10 others skilled in the art to which it apper-
tains to make and use the same, reference
being had to the accompanying drawing,
and to letters of reference marked thereon,
which form a part of this specification.

15 My invention relates to talking machines
and aims to provide an improved means for
attaching the sound box to the sound arm,
and also aims to improve the quality and in-
crease the volume of sound.

20 While it is desirable that sufficient weight
or pressure should be applied to or carried
by the needle to canse it to follow accurately
ail the indentations both vertical and lateral,
of the sound groove, in the sound record, in

25 order that an accurate and satisfactory re-
production thereof may be produced, the
common construction of talking machines,
wherein the sound arm is adapted for both
lateral and vertical movement is unsatis-

30 factory because the weight of the sound arm
upon the needle is usually more than is nec-
essary to cause the needle to follow the
sound groove properly and is, in part at
least, the cause of the loud scratching noise

35 which is so noticeable while the machine is
in motion and which is so disagreeable.
This trouble may be obviated to a large de-
gree by so constructing the sound arm that
it is capable of horizontal or lateral move-

40 ment only, thereby removing the weight of
the arm from the needle, and by providing
the small end of said arm w'ith an angular
section capable of a vertical motion relative
thereto, and to which the sound box may be

45 attached. This construction, however, still
leaves a section of the sound arm capable
of free vertical movement and the weight of
said section is carried by the needle as it
travels over the record, producing to an un-

50 desirable degree, the scratching noise re-
ferred to.

My invention aims, so far as possible, to
relieve the sound box of all unnecessary
weight, thus reducing to a minimum the

55 scratching sound whiclji has been referred to

as so objectionable and thereby improving
materially the quality of the sound.

In the embodiment of my invention illus-
trated and described herein Figure 1 is a
side elevation of a talking machine. Fig. 2 go
a detail of the small end of the sound arm
showing how the position of the sound box
may be adjusted for more convenient re-
moval and insertion of the needle therein,
J'ig. 3, a miodified coniitruction of the in- 65
vention, Fig. 4, a vertical end view of the
sound arm on the line 4 — 4, Fig. 5, and Fig.
5 a plan of the small end of the sound arm
and sound box.

Referring to Fig. 1, the case A is pro- 70
vided with a suitable horn a, which is sup-
ported at its smaller or lower end by a
bracket Z*, secured in turn to the case A. A
sound arm c is secured to the bracket 5, the
large end thereof being disposed substan- 75
tially opposite the small end of the horn a,
providing a continuation or extension there-
of, said arm c being capable of horizontal
movement only, so that it may be brought
into position over the disk table d of the 80
machine, the weight thereof, however, being
carried by the bracket 1). At its small end,
Fig. .5, the sound arm c is given a lateral
tu.rn to receive the sound box e. The sound
box may be of usual construction with re- 85
spect to the diaphragm and needle, but it is
preferably adapted to be mounted directly
on the sound arm. eccentrically with relation
thereto, as shown in Figs. 1, 2 and 5. This
arrangement improves the quality of the 90
sound materially. Another advantage aris-
ing from this construction is that when so
mounted the weight of the sound box ex-
erts the necessary pressure upon the needle
to cause it to follow the groove of the disk 95
accurately without exerting sufficient pres-
sure thereon to cause the disagreeable
scratching soimd referred to. For detach-
ably securing the sound box e to the sound
arm I provide, Fig. 4, a flange / having at 100
a suitable point thereon a stop /^ and a re-
cess /^. The sound box is provided on the
back thereof. Figs. 4 and 5, with a short
neck g adapted to enter the end of the lat-
eral portion of the sound arm and said box is ^^5
provided with a pin g'^ having a head g'^
to engage the flange / of the sound arm.
To secure said sound box to said arm end
the neck g of the sound box e is inserted into
the end of the arm with the head g- of the 110

2

I,01t5,1f0&

pin g^ opposite this recess /^ By turning
the box e the head g^ will engage the inner
face of the flange / and if turned until said
head g^ engages said stop f^ the box will
5 be securely locked to the arm as if by a
bayonet joint. If desired, the sound box
may be concentrically mounted on the
sound arm, see Fig. 3, and a suitable weight
or pressure member h secured to the box to

10 exert the necessary pressure upon the needle,

or the sound box e may be so proportioned

that it will supply the necessary pressure

for the needle.

When it is desired to attach a needle to

15 or remove it from the sound box it may con-
veniently be done by turning the sound box
about the end of the sound arm until the
needle holding means is in the position
shown in Fig. 2.

20 It may be possible to vary the form of

my invention from the disclosure thereof
herein without departing from the scope
and spirit thereof.

Claim.

In a talking machine, a support, a sound 25
arm thereon having lateral motion only, a
flange on the outer end of said arm, a sound
box provided with a neck eccentrically posi-
tioned thereon and adapted to be received
directly by said arm, and a pin provided 30
with a head on the back of said sound box,
said head adapted to engage the edge of
said flange to lock said box thereto and al-
lowing rotation of said box on said arm.

In testimony whereof I affix my signature s:
in presence of two witnesses.

EEINHOLD FROMHOLZ.

Witnesses :

Henry Hasper,

Woi^DEMAR HaUPT.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the

Washington, D. C."

Commissioner of Patents.

F. L. DYER.

PHONOGRAPH,
APPLIOATIOH PILED JUNE 19, 1909.

1,075,771.

Patented Oct. 14, 1913.

2 SHEETS-SHEET I.

m-j

J^&^

^Tii^e/itor:

1,075,771.

F. L. DYER.

PHONOGRAPH.

AFFLIOATION FILED JUHEIS, 1909.

Patented Oct. 14, 1913.

2 SH££TS-3H££T 3.

J^fff-^

^■^

C?

yimntbr:

tJ!^^*-*— ^

x:. >v^..^,^_.

COLUMBIA PLANOQRAPH CO.. WASHINQTON. D. C.

(JNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

FRANK L. DYER, OF MONTCLAIR, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR TO NEW JERSEY PATENT
COMPANY, OF WEST ORANGE, NEW JERSEY, A CORPORATION OF NEW JERSEY.

PHONOGRAPH,

1,075,771.

Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Oct. 14, 1913.

Application filed June 19, 1909. Serial No. 503,237.

To all whom it may concern:

Be it known that I, Fisank L. Dyer, a
citizen of the United States, and a resident
of Montchiir, in the county of Essex and
5 State of New Jersey, have made a certain
new and useful Invention iu Phonographs,
of which the following is a description.

My invention relates to phonographs,
and the object thereof is to provide an im-

10 proved mounting for the phonograijli horn,
and more particularly to provide such a
mounting for the horn in comiection with
an inclosing cabinet, whereby the horn,
when the machine is in operation, may be

15 positioned in an open part of said cabinet
or outside of the same and connected to the
reproducer of the phonograph, Avhile, when
it is desired, the horn may easily be discon-
nected from the reproducer and swung about

20 a pivot, or otherwise moved witliin the in-
closing cabinet where it is entirely con-
cealed, and in which position it is retained
until it is again desired to place it in op-
erative position. Preferably, the closed

25 cabinet is elevated to leave an open space
below the same, and the horn is adapted to
be positioned within this space with its
mouth forwardly directed below the cabi-
net when it is desired to operate the phono-

30 graph, the horn being swung up through aii
opening in the bottom of the cabinet to be
entirely concealed by the same Avhen the ma-
chine is not in operation.

Other objects of \ny invention reside in

35 the construction of parts and combinations
of elements as hereinafter described and
more particularly pointed out in the ap-
pended claims.

Referring to the accompanying drawings

40 forming part of this specification, and in
which similar parts are denoted throughout
by the same reference characters, Figure 1
represents a front elevation of a cabinet
equipped with my invention; Fig. 2 repre-

45 sents a side elevation of the same, part of
the cabinet being shown in section, the horn
being shown in full lines in operative po-
sition and in dotted lines in inoperative po-
sition; Fig. 3 represents a front elevation

50 of a cabinet equipped with another form
of my invention; and Fig. 4 I'epresents a
side elevation of the same, parts of the cabi-
net being shown in section, and the horn

being shown in full lines in inoperative or
concealed position, and in dotted lines in 55
operative position.

Referring to the drawings, and more par-
ticularly to Figs. 1 and 2, the phonograph
1 is provided with mandrel 2 and with re-
producer 3, to the neck of winch the sound 60
conveyer 4 is connected. As shown in the
drawings, a phonograph is provided hav-
ing a mandrel which is axially movable to
provide the necessary feed, the reproducer
being stationary. It is, however, obvious 65
that my invention might equally well be
api^lied to the type of phonograph in which
the feed is provided for by the movement
of a traveling carriage on which the repro-
ducer is positioned, the mandrel being axi- 70
ally immovable.

The phonograph 1 is preferably mounted
on the top 5 of cabinet 6, the phonograph
being inclosed when not m use by the re-
movable top 7. The cabinet G is supported 75
as by columns 8 which may be mounted
upon any suitable base 9, in which, if de-
sired, space for storing records may be
provided. The sound conveyer 4 prefer-
ably extends to the rear from reproducer 3, 80
and extends thence downwardly through an
opening in top member 5 of cabinet 6, and
thence downwardly from the rear portion
of the said cabinet, ending, as shown at 10,
adjacent to or preferably in the same plane 85
as the bottom member 11 of the cabinet 6.

The amplifjdng horn 12 is positioned to
occupy the space between the columns 8 and
below the bottom member 11 of the cabinet
6, when the phonograph is in operation, the 90
mouth 13 of the horn 12 then extending
forwardly from the small end of horn 12
coimected with the end 10 of sound con-
veyer 4. As shown in Figs. 1 and 2 of the
drawings, the horn 12 is provided at its 95
smaller end with collar 14, which is adapted
to contact the lower end 10 of sound con-
veyer 4, in which position it is secured by
any suitable means, as the spring clip 15
connected to the lower end of conveyer 4 100
and having a hook on the lower end thereof
which catches under collar 14. The horn
12 is supported by means of arms 10, one
on either side of the same, these arms be-
ing rigidly secured at their lower ends to 105
I the horn 12 near the larger end of the same

1,075,771

and preferably approximately at the center
of gravity of the horn 12. The upper ends
of arms 16 embrace the horizontal pin 17
which is mounted in the guide-way 18 ex-
g tending forwardly and baclrwardly in the
lower member ll of the cabinet 6. The
handle 19 is provided rigidly secured to the
rod or pin 17 midAvay of the same for ad-
justing the position of the horn 12. The

30 opening 20 is provided in the bottom mem-
ber 11 of cabinet 6 for the passage there-
through of the horn 12.

When it is desired to operate the phono-
graph, the horn 12 is positioned as shown

15 with the pin 17 at the back of guide- way
18 and with collar 14 clamped in posi-
tion by clip 15 against the end 10 of sound
conveyer 4, the sound conveyer 4 and the
horn 12 thereby forming one continuous

20 passageway for the sound. When it is de-
sired to disconnect the horn, the clip 15 is
released and the horn pushed forwardlj^^ at
an angle to the axis of the small end thereof
sufficiently to disengage said end from the

25 lower end of sound conveyer 4, the pin 17 slid-
ing forward in the guide-way 18. The horn
12 is then swung upwardly and forwardly
about pin 17 as a pivot, the handle 19 being
convenient for this manipulation hj the op-

30 erator. The result of this pivotal movement
of the horn 12 is that the lower end of the
same is brought forwardly and upwardly
until the collar 14 thereof is caught by the
spring clip 21 which holds the horn in its

3S raised position, the mouth 13 of the horn be-
ing in a horizontal position approximately
in a plane with the lower member 11 of the
cabinet 6. The door 22 may conveniently be
provided in the front of cabinet 6 for the re-

40 lease of clip 21 when it is desired to replace
the horn in operative position and for the
manipulation of handle 19. If, in this con-
struction, it were desired to employ a mov-
able reproducer instead of a stationary one,

45 the end of the sound conveyer 4 connected to
reproducer 3 would have to be provided with
a telescoping joint and sufficient opening
would have to be provided in horizontal
members 5 and 11 of the cabinet for the

50 swinging movement of the sound conveyer
caused by the travel of the carriage. Fur-
thermore, supporting members 16 would be
secured to horn 12 in such a manner as to
allow some slight rotation of the horn with-

S5 in such supporting members. This could be
provided for by securing the lower ends of
arms 16 in a band encircling the horn 12,
within which band the horn would be rota-
tably mounted.

SO Referring to Figs. 3 and 4 of the drawings,
the horn 12 is represented as pivoted in a
manner specifically different from that dis-
closed in Figs. 1 and 2. As shown in Figs.
3 and 4, the horn 12 is pivoted at its smaller

65 end by means of hinge 23 to the lower end of

sound conveyer 4. The clip 15' is provided
on the lower end of sound conveyer 4 having
a hook on the lower end thereof to engage
within recess 24 on the smaller end of horn
12 when the latter is in operative position, .-q
when the horn is forwardly directed under
the cabinet 6 as in the case already described.
When it is desired to place the horn 12 in
concealed position, the clip 15' is merely un-
fastened and the horn 12 pushed upwardly 75
and forwardly through the opening 20 in the
bottom of cabinet 6 until the rim 25 of the
mouth of the horn is caught by spring clip
21', the horn 12 then being entirely con-
cealed within tlie cabinet 6. The doors 22 gg
may be provided in this case as in the other,
for couA^enient access to the interior of the
cabinet for releasing the horn 12 from clip
21' when it is desired to again place it in op-
erative position. 85

Having now described my invention, what
I claim and desire to protect by Letters Pat-
ent is as follows:

1. In a device of the character described,
the combination with a phonogi-aph repro- 90
ducer of a cabinet upon which said repro-
ducer is mounted, said cabinet being so sup-
ported as to leave an open space beneath it,

a sound conveyer extending downwardly
from said reproducer through said cabinet, 95
and a horn pivotally mounted adjacent the
lower side of said cabinet to swing into
connection with said conveyer to form a
continuation thereof and occupy the space
beneath said cabinet, or to be swung about 100
its pivot out of connection with said con-
veyer, and up into said cabinet, substan-
tially as described.

2. In a device of the character described,
the combination with a phonograph having 105
a shiftable mandrel and a stationary re-
producer, of a cabinet upon which said
phonograph is mounted, said cabinet being

so supported as to leave an open space be-
neath it, a stationarj^ sound conveyer ex- no
tending downwardly from said reproducer
through said cabinet, a sound amplifying
horn, and supporting means for said horn
permitting shift thereof into operative po-
sition connecting with said conveyer in the 115
space beneath said cabinet, or into inopera-
tive position out of connection with said
conveyer, Avithin said cabinet, substantially
as described.

3. In a device of the character described, 120
the combination with a phonograph repro-
ducer, of a cabinet upon which said repro-
ducer is mounted, said cabinet being so sup-
ported as to leave an open space beneath it,
a sound conveyer extending downwardly 125
from said reproducer through said cabinet,

an amplifying horn adapted to occupy the
space beneath said cabinet and connect with
said conveyer, a bracket secured to said
horn near the larger end thereof, and a 130

1,075,771

slidable member by which said bracket is
pivotally supported, adjacent the lower edge
of the cabinet, substantially as described.
4. In a device of the character described,
5 the combination with a cabinet of a sound
conveyer extending through the same to
the lower side thereof, a horn adapted to
occupy the space beneath said cabinet and
connect with said conveyer, means for so

10 holding it in position, a pivotal mounting
for said horn whereby it may be swung out
of connection with said conveyer and en-
tirely within said cabinet, and means for
so holding it, substantially as described.

15 5. In a device of the character described,
the combination with a cabinet of a sound
conveyer extending through the same to the
lower side thereof, a horn adapted to occupy
the space beneath said cabinet and connect

20 with said conveyer, a horizontally slidable
member, and horn supporting means at-
tached to said horn and pivotally supported
by said slide, whereby said horn may be
moved out of connection with said conveyer

25 and swung within said cabinet, substantially
as described.

6. In a device of the character described,
the combination with a reproducer, of a
horn adapted to be connected with said re-
producer, and means pivotally and slidably 30
supporting said horn, sliding movement of
said horn serving to move the same trans-
versely with respect to the axis of the
smaller end thereof, substantially as de-
scribed. 35

7. In a device of the character described,
the combination with a cabinet, of a sound
conveyer extending through the same to
the lower side thereof, a horn adapted to
occupy the space beneath said cabinet and 40
to connect with said conveyer, and pivotal
means about which the horn may be swung
into inoperative position within the cabinet
and entirely out of connection with said
conveyer, substantially as described. 45

This specification signed and witnessed
this 17th day of June 1909.

FEANK L. DYEK.

Witnesses :

Dyer Smith,
John M. Canfield,

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

Washington, D. C."

H. C. MILLER.

AUTOMATIC STOPPING DEVICE FOR SOUND REPRODUCING MACHINES.

APPLIOATIOir FILED JUNE 9, 1906,

1,076,385.

Patented Oct. 21, 1913.

2 SHEETS-SHEET 1,

J^XjC^,^.

B^

S3'

^^

uc/^e.-^y

£1 ttotnew

COLUMBIA r..ANOaiIAPH CO., WASHINGTON. D. C.

H. C. MILLER.

AUTOMATIC STOPPINa DEVICE FOR SOUND REPRODUCING MACHINES.

APPLICATION PILED JUKE 9, 1906.

1,076,385.

Patented Oct. 21, 1913.

2 SHEETS-SHEET 2.

"Wihicaiea

3 o- Snuetil'ot

COLUMBIA PLANOOHAPH CO.. WASHINQTON. D. C.

IJNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

HENRY C. MILLER, OF WATERFORD, NEW YORK.
AUTOMATIC STOPPING DEVICE FOR SOUND-REPRODUCING MACHINES.

1,076,385.

Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Oct. 31, 1913.

Application filed June 9, 1906. Serial No. 321,014.

To all whoTYh it may concern:

Be it known that I, Henry C. Miller,
a citizen of the United States, residing at
Waterford^ in the county of Saratoga and
6 State of New York, have invented certain
new and useful Improvements in Automatic
Stopping Devices for Sound-Eeproducing
Machines, of which the following is a speci-
fication.

10 This invention relates to an improved au-
tomatic stopping device for use in connec-
tion with talking machines.

According to my invention I j)ropose to
provide means carried by a record to coop-

15 erate with mechanical mechanism carried
by the sound box supporting arm, to op-
erate a device which controls a brake, and
stopping mechanism, whereby to stop the
motor at the termination of a selection, irre-

20 spective of its length.

The invention also comprehends improve-
ments in the specific means employed for
holding a record to the platform to prevent
dragging, etc., so common in present known

25 talking machines.

In the organization of my invention I
have also materially improved the details of
construction, and the arrangement of parts
to prevent binding, and permit accessibility

30 for repairs, etc.

Other objects and advantages will be
hereinafter referred to and particularly
pointed out in the claims.

In the drawings — Figure 1 is a plan view

35 of a portion of a talking machine, showing
my improvement applied thereto. Fig. 2
is a side elevation of the same. Fig. 3 is
an enlarged detail view of one end of the
brake controller. Fig. 4 is an enlarged de-

•*0 tail view of the means I employ for holding
the record on the motor rotating disk. Fig.
5 is an end elevation. Fig. 6 is a detail
^iew of a record having a lug, instead of
an opening to operate the automatic stop-

^5 ping mechanism. Fig. 7 is a detail view
of a coupling I employ between the sound
conveyer and the horn.

The same numerals refer to like parts in
all the figures.

^^ 1, indicates a talking machine, of the disk
t3'^pe, but it is to be understood the invention
is not limited to machines having this char-
acteristic, as it will operate equally well in
connection with cylinder records. The

^^ numeral 2 indicates a motor disk, provided

with a central post 3, having preferably
three splines to cooperate with notches 4,
communicating with the centrally disposed
opening 6, of a disk record 6. The record
disk is provided with the usual record waves 60

7, and adjacent the end of the latter and
preferably spaced therefrom is an opening

8, or if desired a lug 8^, may be substituted
ir desired.

9, represents a stem of a motor of a talk- 65
ing machine, or may be a post on the frame,
but as the motor has nothing to do with my
present invention I have not deemed it nec-
essary to illustrate or describe it. Secured
to the stem 9, is a latch lever 10, having a 70
finger operating end 11, and a notch 12, at
the opposite end, a spring 13, normally ex-
erting pressure against said lever to force '
the notched .side to a latch 14. Latch 14,
is mounted on a spring actuated brake shoe 75

15, secured to the frame of the machine at

16, and bent out at one end to form a fin-
ger grip 16*. On one face of the shoe 15,
is a layer of leather 18, adapted to bear on
the periphery of the motor disk 2. 80

Connected to the notched end of the lever
10, is a rod 19, pivotally attached at its
opposite end to a lever 20, mounted on a
post 21. The free end 22, of the lever 20,
extends somewhat beyond the post 20, to co- 85
operate with the brake controlling means.

The brake controller is mounted on a
sound conveyer 23, mounted to turn hori-
zontally on a coupling, indicated at 24.
On the outer end of the sound conveyer 90
is attached the usual sound box 25, having
a stylus 26. Two bearings 27, and 28, sup-
port the controller lever 29, the latter hav-
ing a slight lateral movement in its bearings
toAvard and from the record disk, as well as 95
a slight movement in direction of the record
waves, and longitudinal movement for op-
erating the automatic brake. The control-
ler lever therefore is mounted indei^endent
of the stylus, and does not interfere with the 100
movement of the latter. The rear end 31,
of the controller lever is enlarged to pro-
vide a substantial bearing, and is turned
down at 32, in a plane with the free end of
the lever 20, but is not connected thereto. The 105
front free end of the controller lever has
attached to it a downwardly inclined rub-
ber tip 33, adapted to cooperate with the
opening 8, or a lug if one be employed.
The controller lever is normally forced to- HO

s^

1,076,385

ward the front of the maqhine by a spring
34, confined between the collar 36 thereon,
and bearing 27, the movement of the lever
toward the rear being limited by a stop 37.
5 To start the machine, the finger grip 16"^,
of brake shoe 15, is drawn away from
the periphery of motor disk 2, which frees
the motor. The latch 14, catches in the
notch 12, and the spring brake shoe is held

10 away from disk 2. This permits the le-
ver 10, to tui^n slightly which, through the
connecton 19, moves the free end 22 of
lever 20, toward the turned down end 32
of the controller lever 29. As the stylus

15 follows the waves in the record, the rubber
tip likewise travels the same course, but in
advance of the stylus. The rubber tip is
supported on the record, but because of its
being of resilient material it does not mar or

20 destroy the waves. The tipped end of the
controlling lever being to one side of and
spaced from the stylus it necessarily fol-
lows that it will leave the zone of the record
waves first. This relationship of parts is

25 preferable to enable me to locate the open-
ing 8, some distance from the end of said
record waves.

When the stylus reaches the end of the
sound record wave, the tipped end 33, of

30 lever 29, drops into opening 8, and the end
32, engaging lever 20, rocks it, and through
connection 19, the notch 12, is disengaged
from the latch 14, and the spring brake
shoe 15, springs toward the motor disk and

35 stops the motor. When the rear edge of
opening 8, engages the tipped end 33, and
pulls it forward, spring 34, is compressed,
but the parts are so arranged that before the
shoe 18, finally brings the motor to a stand-

40 still, the pull on the beveled end of the tip
will cause the latter to rebound or become
disengaged, and the spring 34 will return
it to normal position. The spring 34, there-
fore tends to act as a retarder, as it causes

45 a pull on the motor, before the shoe finally
stops the machine. Furthermore by the par-
ticular construction and arrangement of
parts, the motor is stopped without jarring
the mechanism as would be the case if the

50 controller lever were held fast when the
spring brake shoe is applied.

By the use of this invention it is not neces-
sary for an operator to be positioned adja-
cent a machine, as the attachment will auto-

55 matically stop the motor, after the selec-
tion has been produced. To restore the
stylus to its normal position, or for the in-
sertion of another record, the sound con-
veyer is raised in the usual manner and

60 turned toward the right, as will be under-
stood.

The sound conveyer 23, is formed inter-
mediate the sound box, and the coupling 24,
with a truncated enlargement 23^, as shown

65 in Fig. 1, to augment the sound. The cou-

pling 24, comprises a support 24^, secured at
its ends, and a conveyer support 24*^, has a
centrally disposed bearing 24^, to receive a
j)ost 24"^, on support 24^, and laterally dis-
posed journals 24% having bearings at 24*, ^q
in the sides of the sound conveyer. By this
construction the sound conveyer is coupled
to a horn 24^, and may be raised or low-
ered, or turned horizontally over the record.
What I claim is: 75

1. In a talking machine, the combination
with a stylus, a record having means for
pulling a brake controller, and a brake con-
troller movable with and spaced from the
stylus and adapted to be pulled by the means gg
aforesaid on the record to apply the brake to
stop movement of the record upon comple-
tion of the reproduction of a selection.

2. In a talking machine, the combination
with a record carrying means, a record hav- g5
ing brake cooperating means, a sound box
having a stylus, means for supporting the
sound box, a movable controller mounted on
the sound box supporting means, and a
brake, the latter being operated when the 90
controller is moved by the brake cooperating
means, on the record.

3. In a talking machine, the combination
with a sound box having a stylus, means
carrying the sound box, a record having a 95
brake cooperating means, a controller car-
ried by the sound box supporting means, and
having movement independent of the stylus
toward and from a record being reproduced

to engage said brake cooperating means, and 100
a brake, the latter being operated by the
brake cooperating means after a selection is
rendered.

4. In a talking machine, the combination
with means for revolving a record, and an 105
automatic brake for stopping the movement

of the record at the end of the sound record
grooves therein including a controller hav-
ing a non-abrasive contact tip to contact
with a brake cooperating device on a record, no
and a record having a brake cooperating
dcAdce.

5. In a sound reproducing machine, the
combination Avith a motor, a brake therefor,

a controller and sound box having a stylus 115
carried by a movable support, the controller
being spaced from the stylus and having in-
dependent movement toward and from a rec-
ord, means for releasing the brake by move-
ment of the controller, and means carried 120
by a record for operating the controller at
the termination of a selected record.

6. In a sound reproducing machine, the
combination with a motor, a brake therefor,
a record having controller operating means, 125
a movable controller adapted to be operated
by the operating means on the record, means
between the controller and the brake for
applying the latter after a selection has
been rendered, and automatic means for re- 130

1,076,385

8

turning the controllei* to normal position
after the brake has been applied.

7. In a sound reproducing machine, the
combination with a motor, means carried bj-
5 a sound record for operating a reciprocat-
ing controller, a reciprocating controller
adapted to be engaged by the controller
operating means, and a brake operable by
the controller.

10 8. In a sound reproducing machine, the
combination with a motor, a sound box hav-
ing a stylus, a reciprocal controller moA'able
with the sound box, means carried by a rec-
ord for operating the reciprocal controller

15 the end of which follows the sound record
grooves adjacent the stylus, a brake, and
means between the controller and brake for
operating the latter.

9. In a sound reproducing machine, tlie
20 combination with a motor, a record, a sound

box, means on the record for operating a
controller, a controller mounted to move
with the sound box and adapted to be drawn
in the direction of the gi'oove of a record

25 hj the operating means and automatically
disengaged from the operating means by
movement of the record, means automati-
cally returning the controller to normal po-
sition, a brake, and means between the con-

30 troller and the brake to apply the latter.

10. In a sound reproducing machine, the
combination with a sound box, a record
support, a motor for moving said record
support, a brake therefor, a controller mov-

35 able with the sound box to apply the brake
to stop the record support at a determinate
point in its movement, means for operating
the controller at a predetennined point, and
automatically releasing the controller after

40 it has applied the brake, and means for re-
turning the controller to normal position.

11. In a sound reproducing machine, the
combination with a sound box, a record sup-
j)ort, a motor for moving said record sup-

45 port, a brake therefor, a controller movable
with tlie sound box to apply the brake to
stop the record support at a determinate
point in its movement, means for opex'at-
ing the controller at a predetermined point,

50 and automatically releasing the controller
after it has applied the brake, and auto-
matic means for returning the controller to
normal position.

12. In a sound reproducing machine, the
55 combination with a sound box, a record sup-
port, a motor for moving the record sup-
port, a brake to stop the record support at
a determinate point in its movement, a re-
ciprocal controller movable with the sound

60 box having a free operative portion, means
for operating the controller, latch mecha-
nism for holding the brake away from the
motor, and an operating connection between
the latch mechanism and the controller, the

65 brake being applied when the controller is

operated, and means for returning the con-
troller to normal position before the motor
is stopped.

13. In a sound reproducing machine, the
combination with a motor, a brake therefor, ^q
a record formed with an opening, a con-
troller having one end free and supported
on the record and adapted to be engaged
by the opening in the record, means per-
mitting movement of the controller toward 75
and from the record, means between the con-
troller and the brake for applying the latter
when the opening engages the controller,
and means restoring the controller to nor-
mal position before the motor stops. go

14. In a sound reproducing machine, the
combination Avith a sound box, a record sup-
port, a motor to move the record support,
a brake to stop the record support at a pre-
determined point in its movement, a con- §5
troller movable with the sound box for the
brake, means for operating the controller

at a predetermined point, and means for re-
tarding the motor previous to the applica-
tion of the brake by the controller. go

15. In a sound reproducing machine, the
combination with a sound box, a record sup-
port, a motor to move the record support,
a brake to stop the record support at a pre-
determined point in its movement, a con- 95
troller movable with the sound box having
its ends free, means adapted to contact with
one free end of the controller for operating

it, means in the path of the opposite free
end of the controller for operating the brake 100
when the controller is operated.

IG. In a sound reproducing machine, the
combination with a sound box, a record sup-
port, a motor to move the record support, a
brake to stop the record support at a prede- 105
termined point in its movement, a controller
movable with the sound box, means for oper-
ating the controller, means between the con-
troller and the brake for operating the lat-
ter, said means being separated from but in 110
the path of movement of the controller.

17. In a sound reproducing machine, the
combination with a motor, a brake therefor,
a movable sound conveying horn, means for
supporting the horn, a sound box, a brake 115
controller movable with the horn and adapt-
ed to be moved in unison therewith, means

in the path of the movement of the control-
ler to operate the brake, and means for op-
erating the controller. 120

18. In a sound reproducing machine, the
combination with a motor, a brake, a record
having an opening, a controller cooperating
with the opening, a spring for holding the
controller in normal position, a latch lever, 125
means for transmitting motion to the latch
lever from the controller, a latch on the
brake to cooperate with the latch lever, the
brake being operated automatically when

the controller engages the opening. 130

•^

I',d7^i386

19. In a sound reproducing machine, the
combination with a sound box, a record sup-
port, a motor for moving the record sup-
port, bralce mechanism for stopping the

5 movement of the sound record support at
a determinate point, said brake mechanism
comprising a controller rod mounted to
move with the sound box, a brake having a
latch, a pivoted latch lever, a pivoted lever
10 with v,'hich the controller cooperates, and
a connection between the pivoted lever and
the latch lever.

20. In combination with a sound repro-
ducing machine, of a cutoff comprising a

1-5 stopping mechanism, means controlling the
operation of the same which in part moves
with the reproducer of the machine, me-
chanical means mounted to move with the
record carrier of the machine for operating

20 directly on said controlling means, and
means for automatically retui-ning the con-
trolling means to normal position.

21. The combination with a sound repro-
ducing machine, of a cut-off therefor com-

25 prising in combination, a brake, means for
normally holding it in bralring position, a
catch for holding it in release position, trip-
ping means for the catch mounted to move
with tlie reproducer, and rotative means for

30 engaging the tripping means to actuate it
and release the catch.

22. The combination with a sound repro-
ducing machine including a reproducer, of
a cut-off therefor comprising in combina-

35 tion, a brake, means for normally holding it
in braking position, a catch for holding the
brake in release position, means for operat-
ing the catch mounted to move with the re-
producer, and means cooperating with the

40 rotating record support for engaging the
catcli operating means to release the brake.

23. The combination with a sound repro-
ducing machine, of a cut-off therefor com-
l^rising in combination a brake, yielding

45 means for normally holding the brake in
braking position, a catch for holding the
brake in release position, tripping means
connected to the reproducer for engaging
and tripping the catch, and means cooper-

50 ating with the rotating record support for
moving the tripping means to tripping po-
sition.

24. The combination with a sound repro-
ducing machine, of a cut-off therefor com-

55 prising in combination, a brake, yielding
means for normally holding the brake in
braking position, a catch for holding the
brake in release position, an operating mem-
ber mounted to move with the rotating rec-

60 ord support, and a tripping member mount-
ed to move with the reproducer and pro-
vided with means for engaging the record
support and for releasing the catch.

25. The combination with a sound repro-
65 ducing machine, of a cut-off therefor com-

prising in combination, a brake, yielding
means for normally holding the brake in
braking position, a catch for holding the
brake in release position, an operating mem-
ber mounted to move with the rotating rec- tjQ
ord support, and a tripping member mount-
ed to move with the reproducer and pro-
vided with a device for engaging the record
support and having a part adapted to re-
lease the catch. ^g

26. A talking machine comprising a ro-
tating record support, a reproducer mov-
able relatively thereto, a brake for said sup-
port, means for normally holding said brake

in braking position, a cat<:h for holding said 30
brake in inoperative position, tripping
means for the catch mounted to move with
the reproducer, and means carried by the
rotating record support for engaging the
tripping means to move said tripping means gg
and thereby release the catch.

27. The combination with a phonogTaph
including a movable arm and a record disk
formed with a depression, of a trip mecha-
nism movably carried by the movable arm 90
of the machine and including a body de-
signed to engage the depression in the record
disk, a rod actuated in the movement of the
body under the influence of the record disk,
and a brake mechanism automatically actu- 95
ated by said rod.

28. In a talking machine, the combina-
tion with a movable record, a sound repro-
ducing device adapted to move over said
record, a stop for controlling the movement iqo
of said record, and a stop-controlling mem-
ber, of positively actuated means perma-
nently connected to said stop-controlling
member and controlled by the movement of
said sound-reproducing device for actuating io5
said stop-controlling member.

29. In a talking machine, the combination
with a movable record, a sound-producing
device adapted to move over said' record,

a stop for controlling the movement of said no
record, and a stop-controlling member, of
means for positively actuating said stop-
controlling member, mechanism for operat-
ing said actuating means, and means con-
nected to said sound-reproducing device for 115
controlling said operating means.

30. In a talking machine, the combination,
with a movable record, a sound-reproducing
device adapted to move over said record, a
stop for controlling the movement of said 120
record, and a stop-controlling member, of

a movable bar operatively connected to said
stop-controlling member and adapted to be
actuated simultaneously with said sound-
reproducing device as "the latter moves to- 125
ward the end of the record, and means con-
trolled by the movement of said sound re-
producing device for controlling the move-
ment of said bar.

31. In a talking machine, the combination, 130

1,076,385

with a movable record, an arm movably sup-
ported above said record, a sound reproduc-
ing device carried by said arm and adapted
to move over said record, a stop for con-
5 trolling the movement of said record, and a
stop-controlling member, of means movably
mounted on a fixed part of said machine
for automatically actuating said stop-con-
trolling member, and a finger carried by said
10 arm for conti'oUing the movement of said
actuating member.

32. In a sound reproducing machine, the
combination with a sound conveyer having
a sound box attached to one end, a coupling

15 at the opposite end of the sound conveyer,
said coupling comprising a support pro-
vided with a journal, a beai-ing fitting freely
over the journal and pivoted to the sound
conveyer, and an amplifier communicating

20 with the sound conveyer, whereby said con-
veyer and pivoted member may be freely
removed from said journal and support and
amplifier.

33. In a talking machine, a sound con-
2^ -veyer comprising two members, a hollow

support having an upwardly disposed open
end forming one of said members, a tone
arm having a downwardly disposed open
end cooperating with the open end of said
^^ support, forming the other of said members,
and a pivot carried by one of said members
and rotatively connecting said tone arm to
said support, said arm being freely remov-
able from said support.

34. In a talldng machine, a sound con-
veyer comprising two members, a hollow

35

support having an upwardly disposed open
end forming one of said members, a tone
arm having a downwardly disposed end in
cooperative relation with the upwardly dis- 40
posed end of said support forming the other
of said members, and a pivot carried by one
of said members and rotatively connecting
the same and wholly inclosed by said tone
arm and said support, said tone arm being 45
freely removable from said support.

35. The combination with a hollow sup-
port having an upwardly disposed open end,
of a tone arm having a downwardly dis-
posed end in cooperative relation with said 50
upwardly disposed end, and a pivot carried
by said hollow support and rotatively con-
necting and wholly inclosed by said tone arm
and said support, said tone arm being freely
removable. 55

36. The combination with a hollow sup-
port having an upwardly disposed open end,
of a tone arm having a downwardly dis-
posed end in cooperative relation with said
upwardly disposed end, a pivotal connection 60
to permit vertical and horizontal swing
movement of the tone arm located at the
ends of and entirely inclosed by the hollow
support and tone arm, said tone arm being
freely removable. 65

In testimony whereof I have signed my
name to this specification in the presence of
two subscribing witnesses.

HENEY C. MILLER.
Witnesses :

A. F. Zeh,

F. F. FOLLET.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

Washington, D. C."

H. B. BABSON & A. HAUG.

TALKING MACHINE,
APPLICATION PILED JULY 17, 1909.

1,076,621.

Patented Oct. 21, 1913.

COLUMBIA PLANOORAPH CO., WASHINOTCm. D. C.

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

HENRY BLAKE BABSON, OF CHICAaO, ILLINOIS, AND ANDREW HAUG, OE CALDWELL,
NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNORS, BY MESNE ASSIGNMENTS, TO VICTOR TALKING MA-
CHINE COMPANY, A CORPORATION OE NEW JERSEY.

TALKING-MACHINE.

1,076,621. Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Oct. 31, 1913.

Original application filed March 7, 1905, Serial No. 248,872. Renewed January 25, 1911, Serial No. 604,656.
Divided and this application filed July 17, 1909. Serial No. 508,116.

To all whom it may concern :

Be it known that we, Hj:kry Blake Bab-
SOK and Andrew Haug, citizens of the
United States, residing, respectively, at Chi-
5 cago, in the county of Cook and State of
Illinois, and Caldwell, in the county of Es-
sex, State of New Jersey, have invented cer-
tain new and useful Improvements in Talk-
ing-IMachines, of which the following is a

10 specification.

Our invention relates generally to tallcing
machines and has particular reference to the
mounting of the sound conveying tube con-
necting the reproducer and horn, and this

15 api^lication is a division of application, Se-
rial No. 248,872, filed March 7, 1905, and re-
newed January 25, 1911, bearing Serial No.
604,656.
The sound conveying tube or taper arm,

20 as it is generally known, is orduiarily
mounted to permit free movement of the re-
pi-oducer in planes parallel and at right
angles to the surface of the record. Many
constructions heretofore produced, designed

25 to provide for such movement, have been
found objectionable owing to complication
and the resulting cost of manufacture,
the accuracy of adjustment required and lia-
bility to get out of order, the difficulty in

30 assembling and removing parts, etc.

The present invention is designed to over-
come the objectionable features above point-
ed out, by producing an extremely simple
and effective form of mounting, employing a

36 minimum number of parts of inexpensive
construction, so arranged as to be entirely
concealed from view and capable of being
assembled or taken apart by the average
user of a machine without requiring the aid

40 of a skilled workman or special tools.

A construction embodying our invention
is illustrated in the accompanying draw-
ings. We wish it imderstood, however, that
we do not limit ourselves to the exact form

45 and arrangement of pails shown, as various
changes may be made therein without de-
j)arting from the spii-it and scope of our in-
vention.
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a view in side

50 elevation Avith parts in section, showing our
invention applied to a well known type of
talking machine. Fig. 2 is a sectional view

on the line «-, s^, of Fig. 1, and Fig. 3 is a
similar view on the line s^, s**, of Fig. 1.

Referring now to the drawings, 1 repre- 55
sents a portion of the cabinet in which the
motor or driving mechanism is usually con-
tained, 2 the turn-table connected to be
driven by the motor and serving as a sup-
port for the record 3. Elxtending outAvard 60
from the cabinet, there is a bracket 4, which
terminates in a sleeve like off-set 5, in the up-
per open end of which, the horn 6 is fitted,
in the usual manner. Ai-ranged to coop-
erate with the record 3, there is a reproducer 65
or sound-box 7, from which a sound convey-
ing tube 8, hereinafter termed a taper arm,
leads rearward and terminates in an elbow 9.
A shaped portion 10 of the elbow is fitted in
the lower open end of the bracket sleeve 11 70
and as arranged, presents a bearing surface
tangentially disposed to the bore of the
sleeve, permitting free movement of the ta-
per arm and the reproducer carried thereby,
in planes parallel and at right angles to the 75
surface of the record.

The arm is supported in suspended rela-
tion in the bracket sleeve by means of a cen-
trally disposed pin 12, depending from a
spider 13, which may be removable or cast 80
in part with the sleeve, as desired. The pin
is provided at its lower end with a rounded
or spherical head 14 and projects upward
through a slot 15, forme<:l in a cross bar 16
of the elbow and at its upper end, is threaded 85
for engagement with a nut 17. Interposed
between the spider 13 and the cross bar 16,
there is a helical spring 18 which encircles
the pin and serves to hold the parts against
play, rattling, etc. 90

A spring catch, such as is shown at 19 is
usually employed and coacts with the arm
to yieldingly maintain the reproducer in an
elevated position, above and clear of the
record. 95

The principle of operation as Avell as the
many important advantages of our inven-
tion will be apparent from the foregoing de-
scription.

Having, therefore, described our inven- 100
tion, we claim :

1. In a talking machine, the combination
of a bracket formed in part as a tube and
provided with an interior shoulder, a sound

1,076,621

conveyer arranged as a continuation of said
tube, and a fixed member mounted on said
shoulder and supporting said sound con-
xejer to permit movement of said conveyer,
5 in different planes about said fixed member
as a center.

2. In a talking machine, the combination
of a horn, a bracket provided with a tubular
portion having an interior shoulder and

10 forming a continuation of the horn, a soimd
conveyer extending from the tubular por-
tion of said bracket, and a fixed member
mounted on said shoulder and supporting
the sound conveyer in suspended relation,

15 to permit movement of said conveyer in
different planes about said fixed member
as a center.

3. In a talking machine, the combination
of a tubular bracket provided with an in-

20 terior shoulder, a sound conveyer cooperat-
ing with the said tubular bracket and form-
ing a continuation thereof, and internal
means mounted on said shoulder connecting
said tubular bracket and sound conveyer in

25 operative relation, said means being fixed
with respect to said tubular portion and
permitting movement of said sound con-
veyer in different planes.

4. In a talking machine, the combination
30 of a horn, a bracket supporting the horn, a

sound conveying tube extending from the
bracket and terminating in a reproducer,
and a centrally disposed pin depending from
the bracket and supporting the tube in a
35 manner to permit movement thereof in
planes at right angles to each other.

5. In a talking machine, the combination
of a horn, a bracket supporting the horn, a
sound conveyer extending from the bracket

40 and terminating in a reproducer, a pin de-
pending from the bracket and about the de-
pending portion of which the sound conveyer
has movement in planes at right angles to
each other, and a spring co-acting with the

45 pin.

6. In a talking machine, the combination
of a horn, a bracket supporting the horn, a
sound conveyer extending from the bracket
and terminating in a reproducer, a pin de-

50 pending from the bracket and provided with
a terminal enlargement on which the sound
conveyer is supported free to move in planes
at right angles to each other, and a spring
cooperating with the pin.

55 7. In a talking machine, the combination
of a horn, a bracket provided with a tu-
bular portion interiorly shouldered, a re-
movable member supported on the shoulder
and secured in position by the horn, and a

60 sound conveyer suspended from said remov-
able member.

8. In a talking machine, the combination
of a horn, a bracket provided with a tu-

bular portion counter-bored to form an in-
terior shoulder, a spider supported on the 65
shoulder and held in position by the horn,
and a sound conveyer suspended from a de-
pending projection of the spider.

9. In a talking machine, the combination

of a bracket having a tubular portion, a 70
sound conveyer arranged as a continuation
of said tubular portion, and a support for
said sound conveyer mounted within said
tubular portion and operatively connected
to the adjacent end of said conveyer at a 75
point spaced from the sides of said tubular
portion and said conveyer, and axially with
respect thereto to permit movement of said
conveyer about said support in different
planes. 80

10. In a talking machine, the combination
of a bracket having a tubular portion, a
sound conveyer arranged as a continuation
of said tubular portion, a sound conveyer
support moimted within said tubular por- 85
tion and having a portion located centrally

of said tubular portion and said conveyer
and spaced apart from the sides thereof to
hold said conveyer in suspended relation
with respect to said tubular portion and to 90
permit movement of said conveyer about
said support in different planes.

11. In a talking machine the combination
of a horn, a bracket provided with a tu-
bular portion, and a spider supported in 95
said tubular portion and secured thereto,
and provided with a depending projection
and a sound conveyer suspended from said
projection to move in planes at right angles

to each other. 100

12. In a talking machine, the combination
of a bracket provided with a tubular por-
tion, a tapering sound conveyer arranged as
a continuation of said tubular portion, with
the large end of said conveyer adjacent to, 105
and communicating with, the tubular por-
tion of said bracket, and means arranged in
said tubular portion and projecting sub-
stantially axially thereof upon which the
larger end of said tubular portion is hung no
in suspended relation to said means to per-
mit of movement in different planes.

13. In a talking machine, the combination
of a tone-arm, supporting means therefor
wholly inclosed by the arm, a ball carried 115
by the suppoi-t serving as a bearing on
which the arm is freely movable, and means
utilizing the support to limit the up and
down movement of the arm to planes inter-
secting the vertical turning axis thereof. 120

14. In a talking machine, a tone-arm con-
sisting of two sections, one fixed and the
other movable, a ball serving as a bearing
for and being wholly inclosed by the mov-
able section, and a pin and slot connection 125
uniting and maintaining the arm sections

1,076,631

8

10

and the bearing alined in operative rela-
tion.

15. In a talking machine, the combination
of a sectional tone-arm, one section thereof
being movable in vertical and horizontal
l^lanes, a ball wholly inclosed by the arm
and arranged to provide an intervening an-
nular passage therein for sound and means
utilizing the ball as a bearing for the mov-
able section of the arm, and supporting
means for the ball, the two last named
means serving to maintain the sections of
the arm in ahnement.

In testimony whereof, I affix ray signa-
ture in the presence of two witnesses.

HENRY BLAKE BABSON.

Witnesses :

GtrsTAvus Babson,

FiuEDK. Babson.
In testimony whereof, I affix my signa-
ture in the presence of two witnesses.

ANDREW HAUG.

Witnesses :

Walter H. Pumphrey,
M. G. Crawford.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

Washington, D. C."

i

1,076,643.

E. PRESZTER.

DISK TALKING MACHINE.

APPLICATION PILED SEPT. 29, 1908,

Patented Oct. 21, 1913.

Fi^.3

WITNESSES

o9^^.

INVENTOR,

Re:z5o Pre:52.ter,

COLUMBIA PLANOGRAPH CO.,

XJNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

BEZSO PBESZTBR, OP BUDAPEST, AXFSTMA-HITNGABnr,
DISK TAIiKING-JffACHINE.

1,076,643. Specification of Letters Patent, Patented Oct. SI, 1913.

Original application filed July 9, 1907, Serial :^o. 382,9C0. Divided and tWs application filed September !J9,

i908. Serial JTo. 455,350.

To all whom it may concern :

Be it known that I, Rezso Preszter, a
subject of the King of Hungary, retiiding at
BiKlape.st, in the Enipiie of Austria-Hun-
5 gary. have invented a new and useful Disk
Talking-Machine; and I do hereby declare
the following to be a full, clear, and exact
description of the same.

The pre.sent applicatio}i is a division of
10 an application. Serial No. 382,9G9, filed by
me July 9, 1907.

The object of this invention is to obviate
the necessity of employing a trumpet with
disk talking machines.
15 It is well known that sound trumpets gen-
erally used alfect the purity of the sound
and make the machine more difficult to lian-
dle and to transport. It was already pro-
posed to cover the trumpet of talking ma-
23 chines or to conduct it through the casing
of the machine. Thereby the trumpet w^as
only disguised, but substantially maintained
so that the sound effect was not improved by
this way. As on the other hand the dimen-
25 sions of the casing should not be increased
too far, the dimensions of the trum))et were
reduced, whereb}' the sound strength w'as
decreased. But as the dimensions of the
trumpet could not be decreased too far, the
30 dimensions of the casing resulted larger,
than the usual casings of talking machines.
My invention does away completely with
the usual trumpets w^ithout increasing the
Usual dimensions of the casing. According
35 to the disclosed embodiments of my invention
the free space of the casing containing the
gear is subdivided by means of resonance
boards in a way to form laterally from the
gear a sound chamber of substantially the
^3 shape of pyramid and to form adjacent
resonance boxes.

The annexed drawing shows as examples
two embodiments of my invention.

Figure 1 is a diagrammatical vertical sec-
^5 tion of the machine according to line C — D
of Fig. 2. Fig. 2 is a horizontal section ac-
cording to line E — F of Fig. 1 and Fig. 3
is a similar section of a modified form.
The sound is guided from the sound box
^^ 9 behind the diaphragm downward at 2
into the free space in the casing 3 through a
pivoted bent tube 1 which extends from the
back of the sound box. In the free space of
the casing are arranged two oblique walls
^^ 4 and 5, forming together with the walls of

the casing a pyraimidal funnel. The remain-
ing free space 8 between the oblique wails
4, 5 and the bottom 3 forms a resonance box,
which increases and mellows the sound ef-
fect. The thickness of the walls 4 and 5 is 60
calculated in a way, that these walls may
form CO - vibrating membranes inci-easing
the vibrations produced by the membrane
of the sound box 9. The walls 4 and 6 are
made of thin wooden boards. Owing to. the 65
wall 4 being arranged laterally of the clock
work 11 and the sound tube 2 being arranged
not in the center of the casing but at the
side, the dimensions of the casing can be
made very small and the visual dimensions 70
of the casing for arranging the sound boards
and the sound chamber need not by any
means be increased.

In order to facilitate the vibration of the
resonance boards it is advisable to adopt for 75
the wall the divided form shown in Fig. 2,
which then constitutes tAvo separate vibrat-
ing diaphragms 4 and 10. The arrangement
of the walls 4 and 10 can be made also in
the manner shown in Fig. 3, in which the 80
sound waves strike the resonance boards 4
and 10 are reflected through the opening 6
outward. The opening 6 for the escape of
the sound is in the above construction situ-
ated in one of the lateral walls of the cas- 85
ing, but could be arranged in the bottom if
desired. This opening may be provided
Avith a slide or the like 7 for the purpose of
damping the sound by means of an adjust-
able closing device. 90

HaAnng described my invention, what I
claim is : —

1. A sound reproducing device compi-is-
ing a motor, a record carrying table oper-
ated thereby, a sound box and tone arm 96
therefor combined with a casing for and to
support said parts and partitioned to form
separate compartments, one of which in-
closes said motor, the other having an in-
clined wall to cooperate with the Avails and 100
partitioning of said casing to form a sound
amjilifier of gradually increasing cross sec-
tional area Avith a sound inlet at its smaller
end in communication with said tone arm,
and a somid exit opening at its larger end, 105
said motor and amplifier compartments be-
ing arranged side by side to obtain a Ioav
height of casing, substantially as and for
the purpose set forth.

2. In a sound producing device, the com- ""lO

0

1,076,643

bination of a hexahedral casing having a
large opening in its front wall and a small
opening near one of its rear upper corners ;
a vertical partition extending obliquely
5 across said casing from near said small
opening to near one side of said large open-
ing; an inclined sounding board extending
across the casing from a point near said
small openmg to the lower side of said large

10 opening, said partition and sounding board
being joined together and to the top and a
side wall respectively whereby is formed a
pyramidal sound funnel with which both of
said openings communicate.

3. In a sound producing device, the com-
bination of a hexahedral casing having a
large opening in its front wall and a small
opening near the upper rear corner; a ver-
tical partition extending obliquely across

20 the casing from near the small opening to
near one side of the large opening; an in-
clined sound board extending across the
casing from near the small opening to the
bottom of the large opening; said partition,

25 sounding board and the adjacent top and
side walls of the casing being joined to form
a pyramidal sound funnel having its small
end in communication with the small open-

15

30

35

ing and its large end joining said large
opening; a tone arm communicating Avith
the small opening ; and a driving gear in the
casing outside of the funnel.

4. In a talking machine, a sound box, a
swinging sound-arm, a rotatable record sup-
port having an upright shaft, a casing, driv-
ing mechanism within said casing for the
rotatable support, a partition substantially
parallel to the rotating shaft of the record
support dividing the casing in a plane sub-
stantially parallel to the plane of the record 4C
support into two chambers, one of said
chambers containing the driving mechanism
and the other chamber forming a sound am-
plifier, said partition being arranged to pro-
vide with the casing said amplifier of grad- 45
ually increasing cross sectional area, com-
municating at its smaller end with the
swinging sound arm and through openings
of the casing with the outer air.

In testimony whereof, I have signed my
name to this specification in the presence of
two subscribing witnesses.

EEZSO PRESZTER.

Witnesses :

EuGENO HaRRANY,

Terenez Benedik.

50

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

Washington, D. C."

I

D. M. BLISS.
VIBRATING RECORD PHONOGRAPH,
APPLIOkTION FILED PEE. 26, 1912.

1,076741.

Patented Oct. 28, 1913.

13

J

1^- __

21
19 Jl 12 10 / .20

^^ 15~^

Mff.^

C

^ , , ,^^ , ^^ /• ,^

-s:r-\.22

eSS

s' ms 3

r

2x

Mg^.2

Mff.3

21 20

24 '^wo<iv\)c<yc

Donald M. BHss

COLUMBIA PLANOQRAPH CO.. WASHINGTON, D. C

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

DONALD M. BLISS, OF ORANGE, NEW JERSEY.
VIBRATING-RECORD PHONOGRAPH.

1,076,741.

Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Oct. 28, 1913.

Application filed February 26, 1912. Serial No. 680,037.

To all whom it may concern :

Be it laioTvn that I, Donald M. Bliss, a
citizen of the Dominion of Canada, resid-
ing in Orange, county of Essex, State of
5 New Jersey, have invented a new and useful
Vibrating-Record Phonograph, of which the
following is a specification.

My invention relates to phonographs by
which sound is reproduced from the vibra-

10 tion of a sound record tablet, as contrasted
to the sound reproduction in the well known
commercial types of phonograph which re-
produce sound by means of a diaphragm
and a sound box.

15 The object of my invention is to make a
practical phonograph without a sound box
or a diaphragm, to simplify the construction
of the various parts, to provide a sound am-
plifying or resonating means to coact with

20 the vibrating record and also to make the
various parts of my phonograph commercial
and efficient.

In all phonographs there are essentially
two possible sources of sound reproduction.

25 The first and commonly used source of sound
reproduction consists of the stylus in con-
nection with the diaphragm, sound box and
horn. The second consists of the record tab-
let itself, which tends to vibrate downward

30 as the stylus tends to vibrate upward. This
second possible source of sound reproduction
from the record tablet, has not been per-
fected or widely used by others, in fact many
devices to quiet it have been tried, probably

35 because the sounds reproduced by vibra-
tions of the record have been of unsatisfac-
tory quality, and also probably because it
has been thought desirable to utilize all of
the relative movement between the stylus

40 and the record tablet to vibrate the dia-
phragm.

In my vibrating record phonograj^h I
have discarded the sound box, the dia-
phragm and the horn, and have accentu-

45 ated the sound reproduced by the record tab-
let by means of a resonating chamber or
amplifying device associated with the rec-
ord tablet. I have also accentuated the vi-
brations in the record tablet by providing a

50 comparativel}'^ inert, rigid attachment be-
tween the stylus and the swinging arm
which carries the stylus, and by mounting
the record resiliently.

Reference is to be had to the accompany-
ing drawings in which a typical vibrating 55
record phonograph is shown.

Figure 1 is a side elevation of my phono-
graph. Fig. 2 is top view of Fig. 1. Fig. 3
is an enlarged view of some of the prin-
cipal parts shown in Fig. 1 and Fig. 2. 60

1, is an ordinary phonograph base such
as is used in the common disk type of phono-
graph or talking machine ; a turntable shaft
2j projects upward from the base and car-
ries a turntable 3, Avhich differs from the 65
common flat turntable in form and also in
that it is made of wood. Turntable 3, has a
flat body 4, and a high upwardly projecting
rim 5. The material and form of the turn-
table 3, cause it to perform the functions 70
of a turntable and to form the bottom and
side of a large and deep, specially designed,
phonograph record tablet resonating cham-
ber. On the upper edge of the rim 5, is a
ring of felt 6, to form an elastic saddle for 75
a disk record 7, Avhich may be preferably a
record having a vertical cut record line. An
extended portion 8, of turntable shaft 2, is
threaded and extends upv^ard through a cen-
ter hole 9, in record 7. Around extended 80
portion 8, of turntable shaft 2, is placed a
felt washer 10, a metal washer 11, and a
thumb nut 12, to hold the record securely 3^et
elastically and resiliently down on the felt
ring 6, and under the felt washer 10. 85

On base 1, is attached a post 13, which is
fitted with a collar 14. The post 13, acts as
a center for the swiveling and radial move-
ment of an arm 15. Arm 15, has a metal strip
portion 16, resting on collar 14. Through 90
metal strip 16, the post 13, extends upward
forming a loose journal or swivel for the arm
15. Metal strip 16, has an upward extension
17, and a slot 18, which loosely embraces
post 13, and is for the purpose of maintain- 95
ing an approximately horizontal position
for arm 15.

The metal strip 16, is rigidly attached to
one end of a wood block 19, near the oppo-
site end of which is a hole 20, filled with lOO
paraffin 21. Beneath this, at the lower face
of the wood block 19, is a recess 22, in which
is attached a cork disk 23, which carries a
stylus 24, which may be of the sapphire or
any approved type. Stylus 24, rests and 105
may run on the record 7. Hole 20, paraffin

^

I,6f6,t4.1

21, and cork 23, are for tlie purpose of cush-
ioning the stylus on extreme hills and val-
leys of the record line. The various mem-
bers of the arm 15, and the stylus, collec-
5 tively, have mass and inertia as compared
with the stylus and the diaphragm of the
common type of phonograph. There is a
comparatively solid attachment between my
stylus 24, and my arm 15, as compared to

10 the freely vibrating attachment between the
arm and the stylus of the common type of
phonogi-aph.

In operation, the record 7, is set on the
turntable 3, a,nd the arm 15, is placed over

15 the record 7, in the indicated position, with
the stylus 24, resting on the record 7. The
turntable 3, naay be set in revolution, and a,s
the turntable 3, and record 7, revolve, the
stylus 24, running on the record 7, causes

20 the record 7, to vibrate and reproduce

sound. The reproduced sound is amplified

by the resonating chamber which is inclosed

by the turntable and the record tablet.

My vibrating record phonograph may be

25 used ^s a recording phonograph by suitable
adaptations, and may be adapted to any
form of record capable of producing sound
vibrations.

The various novel features which I desire

30 to secure by Letters Patent are pointed out
in the claims and may be combined with old
or new phonograph devices.
I claim —

1. In a phonograph, a base, a shaft pro-
35 jecting without the base, a re voluble, wooden

turntable, bowl like in form, mounted on the
shaft, a felt ring on the edge of the turn-
table whereon the outer edge of a disk rec-
ord may be rested, a centering stud in the

40 center of the turntable, a felt washer and
thumb screw for the stud, whereby the disk
record may be centrally held, a post pro-
jecting from the base and a swinging arm,
having inertia, pivoted to the post, a hole

45 L'car the free end of the arm, filled with par-
affin, a recess at the lower face of the arm,
a cork disk fastened therein, and a needle
fastened to the cork disk, adapted to run
on the record and thereby cause the record

50 to vibrate and reproduce sound.

2. In a talking machine, the combination
of a record tablet mounted to vibrate and
reproduce sound, a turntable providing a
resonating space therefor and a stylus

55 adapted to trace the record line, said stylus
designed to set the tablet into vibration to
reproduce the sound recorded thereon.

3. In a talldng machine, a turntable com-
prising a base and rim of resonant material

60 and a sound record tablet supported by said
table and inclosing therewith a relatively
large resonating chamber designed to am-
plify sounds produced by the vibration of
said tablet into said chamber.

65 4. In a talking machine, a turntable com-

prising a base and a rim of resonant mate-
rial and a record seat of soft material sur-
mounting said rim, and a sound record tab-
let supported by said table and inclosing
therewith a relatively large resonating 70
chamber designed to amplify sounds pro-
duced by the vibration of said tablet into
said chamber. ^

5. In a talking machine, a turntable com-
prising a base and a rim of resonant mate- 75
rial adapted to support a record tablet and

to inclose therewith a relatively large reso-
nating chamber designed to amplify sounds
produced by the vibration of a tablet into
said chamber. 80

6. In a talking machine, a turntable com-
prising a base and rim of resonant mate-
rigil and a record seat of soft material sur-
mounting said rim and adapted to support

a sound record tablet, to inclose therewith 85
a relatively large resonating chamber de-
signed to amplify sounds produced by the
vibration of gi record tablet into said
chamber.

7. A phonograph turntable of resonant 90
material consisting of a base provided at its
outer edge with a high rim extending up-
wardly from the base and having a record-
seat at the top of the rim, said base and rim
forming, respectively, the bottom and side 95
of a large and deep resonating chamber.

8. A phonograph turntable of resonant
material consisting of a base provided at
its outer edge with a high rim extending up-
wardly from the base and having a record lOO
seat at the top of the rim, said base and rim
forming, respectively, the bottom and side of

a large and deep resonating chamber, in
combination with means for pressing a rec-
ord tablet down upon said seat. 105

9. In a phonograph, a shaft, a revoluble
wooden turntable, bowl like in form, mount-
ed on tlie shaft, a centering stud in the cen-
ter of the turntable, a record retaining
means for the stud whereby a disk record 110
may be centrally held, a swinging arm hav-
ing inertia, a cork disk fastened thereon
and a needle fastened to the cork disk
adapted to run on a record and thereby
cause the record to vibrate and reproduce 115
sound.

10. A phonograph turntable of resonant
material consisting of a base provided at its
outer edge with a high rim extending up-
wardly from the base and having a record- 120
seat at the top of the rim, said base and rim
forming, respectively, the bottom and side

of a large and deep resonating chamber, a
record retaining means to center and hold
a record down on said seat and an inertia 125
stylus to cause a record to vibrate into said
resonating chamber.

11. A phonograph turntable of resonant
material consisting of a base provided at its
outer edge with a high rim extending up- 130

1,076,741

8

wardly from tlie base and having a record
seat at the top of the rim, said base and rim
torming, respectively, the bottom and side
of a large and deep resonating chamber, a
record retaining means to center and hold
a record down on said seat, a swinging arm,
ii cushion mounted thereon and a stylus at-

tached to the cushion and designed to catise
a record to vibrate into said resonating
chamber.

DONALD M. BLISS.
Witnesses :

E. A. Byrns,
Anthony Thompson.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents eacb, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

Washington, D. C."

1,077,361.

E. S. M. MITCHELL.

ELECTEOGRAPH.

APPLICATION PILED MAE. 13, 1912.

Patented Nov. 4, 1913.

2 SHEETS-SHEET 1.

IV/TNESSES: j^l

INVENTOR.

BY

77^3

ATTORNEY.

COLUMBIA PLANOGRAPH CO., WASHINGTON. D. C.

1,077,361.

K. S. M. MITCHELL.

ELECTROGEAPH.

APPLICATION PILED MAR. 13, 1912.

Patented Nov. 4, 1913.

2 SHEETS-SHEET 2.

IV/TNESSES :

INVENTOR.
/fic/rar</ S. Af. Mifche//. .

ATTORNEY.-

i PLANOORAPII CO., WASMINQTON, n. C.

imiTED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

KICHABD S. M. MITCHELL, OF SYRACUSE, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR, BY DIRECT AND
MESNE ASSIGNMENTS, TO THE TALKING MOVING PICTURE CO., INC., OF SYRACUSE,
NEW YORK, A CORPORATION OF NEW YORK.

ELECTROGRAPH.

1,077,361.

Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Nov. 4, 1913.

Application filed March 13, 1912. Serial No. 683,593.

To all whom it may concern :

Be it known that I, Richard S. M. Mitch-
ell, a citizen of the United States, resid-
ing at SjTacnse, in the county of Onondaga
5 and State of New York, have invented cer-
tain new and ii.seful Improvements in Elec-
trographs, of which the following is a speci-
fication.

This invention relates to improvemtntd in

10 electrograplis, and has for its object to pro-
vide a mechanical device wluch may be op-
erated by any suitable power, the said de-
vice airanged to rotatably support a detach-
able record cylinder adapted for recording

15 impressions effected by a vibrating needle
or stylus.

A further object is to provide a double
screw-feeding mechanism for controlling the
travel of the stylus over the surface of said

20 cylinder.

A further object is to provide a sensitive
resilient adjusting mechanism for regulat-
ing the pre.ssure of the stylus upon the cyl-
inder.

25 A further object is to provide means for
readily and accurately adjusting and set-
ting the stylus for starting the recording
or the reproducing of a record at a precise
point, and for repeatedly starting the record

30 from the same point.

A further object is to provide means for
throwing and holding the stylus out of en-
gagement with the record cylinder, the said
means being controlled by an electromag-

35 net, and wherein by the deenergizing of the
said magnet the stylus reengages the record
cylinder at the point fixed by the said ad-
justment.

A further object is to provide means as-

40 sociated with the stylus for recording elec-
tric fluctuations given to it by an external
current, and also to reproduce in an extra
circuit those fluctuations in facsimile.

A further object is to provide means for

45 receiving at a distance the sounds of voices,
music and the like, and then changing said
sounds into electro-magnetic vibrations
wliich are simultaneously impressed by the
said stylus upon the record cylinder carried

50 by the machine.

A further object is to provide means for
converting the impressions recorded upon
the record cylinder into electro-magnetic
vibrations which cause fluctuations in a se-

ries of electric currents which operate as 55
one current, and which induce in another
circuit identical fluctuations by means of
which the impressions recorded on the rec-
ord cylinder are reconverted into sound
waves corresponding exactly to those re- 60
ceived by the recording means.

The various features and parts of the in-
A'ention will be understood from the detailed
description which follows, and by reference
to the accompanying drawings, which form 65
a part of this specification, and in which — •

Figure 1 is a top plan view of the electro-
graph; showing the transmitter in position
ready for reproducing a record. Fig. 2 is
a rear side elevation; showing the parts in 70
the same position; also showing the start-
ing and adjusting mechanism. Fig. 3 is a
diagrammatic view; showing the primary
and secondary circuits in connection with
the transmitter and receiver. Fig. 4 is a 75
vertical longitudinal section through the re-
ceiver; showing a plain diaphragm and a
horn for amplifying sounds. Fig. 5 is a
front end elevation and part section; show-
ing the receiver having a diaphragm with 80
stylus ; also showing the starting mechanism
held in operative position by a magnet, the
receiver being tilted for breaking the con-
nection between the feeding parts. Fig. 6
is a front end elevation and part section; 85
showing the transmitter in the act of repro-
ducing the vibrations from the record. Fig.
7 is an enlarged detail view ; showing the
interlocking of the starting lever with the
guide sleeve of the carriage. Fig. 8 is an 90
enlarged detail view taken on line 8 — 8 of
Fig. 7. Fig. 9 is a bottom. ])]an view of the
base of the transmitter and receiver. Fig.
10 is an enlarged detail view of one of the
spring electrodes, shown in Fig. C. Fig. 11 9 5
is a reduced sectional view of the transmit-
ter; showing a plain diaphragm, and a horn
for receiving sound waves to be recorded.

In the drawings, the frame of the machine
consists of three independent sections or loo
parts, as 2, 3 and 4, which are spaced apart,
as .shown. These sections support all of the
working and other parts of the machine.
The bottoms of the frame sections are pro-
vided with flanges 5, which preferably rest 105
upon a substantially level base, as C, to
which the said parts may be secured in any
suitable manner.

1,077,361

7 represents a cylinder or drum, upon
which may be telescopically mounted a
record cylinder or roll 8, which may be
secured to the drum by any suitable means,
5 but is preferably held from turning on the
drum, by means of a key 9, which is received
by a corresponding key - way, which is
formed in the inner surface of the tube 8.
The record tube 8 preferably comprises the

10 same composite material as is used in con-
nection with the well-known talking-ma-
chines. The head-end of the drum 7 is pro-
vided with a circumferential flange 10,
which corresponds in depth to the thickness

15 of the cylinder 8.

11 represents a gi-oove or recess formed in
the circumferential surface of the flange 10,
and the said recess is preferably disposed
diametrically opposite the key 9. Under

20 tliis arrangement, every record tube may be
repeatedly applied to the drum 7 in exactly
the same manner.

The head-end of the drum 7 is provided
with a relatively long integral gudgeon or

25 shaft 12, which passes through central bear-
ings 13 of the spaced frame sections 2 and 3.
The bearings 13 are preferably split for
receiving detachable bushings 14, which are
held in place by means of clamping screws

30 15, which pierce depending lugs 16 and 16',
the lug 16 being threaded in the usual man-
ner. The frame sections 2 and 3 are pref-
erably spaced apart a sufficient distance to
support and hold the drum 7 and the record

35 tube in true horizontal position. The drum
7 is held in place and prevented from longi-
tudinal movement or play by a pair of
sheaves 17 and 18, which are formed inte-
grally with concentric hubs 19, the said hubs

40 filling the space between the frame sections
2 and 3, and are secured to the shaft 12 by
means of a set -screw 20.

21 represents a stationary guide shaft or
rod, which pierces arms 22 of the frame sec-

45 tions 3 and 4, and the said shaft is held
rigidly in place by set-screws 23.

24 and 25 represent like worm or screw
shafts, which are disposed above and on each
side of the drum 7. The worm shaft 24 is

50 revolubly mounted in arms 26 of the frame
sections 2, 3 and 4; while the worm 25 is
mounted in bearings arranged in the arms
22 of the said frame sections. The worms
24 and 25 are provided with fine threads —

55 preferably 100 to 200 to the inch — and the
said worms are driven in the same direction,
and at the same speed, by means of sheaves
27 and 28, which are mounted rigidly on
said shafts, between the frame sections 2

60 and 3. The sheave 27 connects with the
sheave 17 by means of a flexible belt 27' ;
the sheave 28 connects with the sheave 18
by a similar belt 28'. All of the said sheaves
are preferably of the same diameter, so that

65 the drum and the two worm shafts may be

turned by the same power synchronously.
The shaft or gudgeon 12 preferably extends
beyond the frame secti^m 2, and carries a
driving sheave 29, by means of which the
drum and worms may be driven by a com- 70
mon power. The sheaves 27 and 28 are
made fast to the worm shafts by set-
screws 30.

The carriage of the machine is mounted
above the drum 7 and the worms 24 and 25, 75
and consists of a metal ring or frame 31,
circular in form, within which a receiver or
transmitter is disposed and carried. At the
rear side, the carriage is supported by the
guide shaft 21, by means of a lug 32, which go
may be integrally formed with the ring 31.
The lug 32 is preferably formed eccentric
relatively to the ring 31, and has a sleeve
33 which is bored out to slidably fit the
shaft 21. One end of the sleeve 33 is cut- 85
away to provide a clutch - tooth 34. The
front side of the carriage is fitted with an
angular bracket 35, which is secured to the
carriage b}^ scrcAvs 35'. The lower arm of
tlie bracKet 35 extends inwardly beneath tne 90

, ring 31, and to its underside is secured a
half nut 36, the free end of which is fasli-

: ioned to fit and engage the threads of the
woi-m 24. The arrangement of the parts 35
and 36 is such that, the forward side of the 95
carriage is supported, while the machine is
in operation, by the worm 24. 37 represents

i a second half nut or chaser, which is se-
cured to the underside of the sleeve 33 at
the rear side of the carriage, by a screw 37'. loO
The nut 37 is inverted, as compared with
the rack 36, so that when the machine is
operated, the nut 37 engages the underside
of the worm 25. The carriage is moved lon-
gitudinally over the drum 7 by the opera- 105
tion of worms 24 and 25. In practice the
worms 24 and 25 and the drum 7 are only
operated in one direction, as indicated by
the arrows in the several views, which causes
the carriage to be moved from the front to 110
the rear end of the machine. To return the
carriage to the head of the machine, which is
always the starting point, the operator may
take hold of the bracket 35 and lift the
frame 31 until the nuts 36 and 37 and the 115
stylus clear the worms and record cylinder,
as shown in Fig. 5. Then by sliding the
parts 32 — 33 on the shaft 21, the carriage
may be readily and quickly brought to the
position shown in Figs. 1 and 2. In this 120
way the connection between the lug 32 and
the shaft 21 serves as a hinge for the car-
riage.

In carrying out the objects of the present
invention, it is important to enable the op- 125
erator to set the machine or carriage, so that
its forward travel will begin at an exact
place or point on the record cylinder 8. To
this end, I provide means for positively ad-
justing the center of the carriage where the 130

1,077,361

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

45

60

65

stylus or needle is located with relation to
the head end of the record tube 8 and the
flange 10 of the drum 7. And I also pro-
vide a positive starting mechanism which
will always bring the stjdus carried by the
carriage to the same starting point on the
record cylinder 8. The starting mechanism
consists of the following parts: 38 repi'e-
sents a depending lever or arm, the upper
end of which is formed with a sleeve 39,
which is journaled on the shaft 21. One
end of the sleeve 39 is cut-away to provide
a clutch-tooth 39', which interlocks with the
tooth 34 of the sleeve 33 (see Figs. 1, 2, 5,
7 and 8). The opposite end of the sleeve 39
bears against arm 22 of the frame section
3. When the carriage 31 and the lever 38
are in the position shown in Figs. 1, 2, 5, 6,
7 and 8, the clutch-teeth 34 and 39' are in-
terlocked, and while in this position, the
carriage may be elevated or lowered by
shifting the lever 38 toward or from" the
drum 7. The carriage may also be swung
on the rod 21 independently of the lever 38,
whenever desired, as indicated by the dotted
lines in Fig. 8. The lower end of the lever
38 is pivoted to a plunger armature 40 of a
magnet 41, by a pin 40', so that the said
lever is allowed a slight lateral movement
or swing, as indicated by a comparison of
Fig. 5 with Fig. 6. To effect the starting
of the carriage from a definite or fixed
point in relation to the drum and the record
cylinder 8, I provide a bolt 42, which pierces
the lever 38 near its lower end. The bolt
42 has a head 42', which is normally held
against the rear side of lever 38 by arm 43
of a bell-crank lever, which is controlled by
a coil spring 44. The spring 44 tends to
hold the bolt 42 in the forwardly extending
position shown in Fig. 6, and the said bolt
is disposed directly in line with the recess
or groove 11 of the flange 10. Just before
the machine is started, the operator should
press the lower end of the lever 38 toward
the drum 7, until the pin 42 is forced back
through said lever and compresses the
spring 44. At the same time the lower arm
45 of the bell crank is tilted uj)wardly and
passes between and engages two contact
clips or springs 46 and 47 carried by the
magnet 41. The clip 46 is connected by a
wire 48 to a battery 49 ; Avhile the clip 47 is
connected to one end 50 of the magnet coil ;
the other end of the said coil being con-
nected with the battery by a wire 51. When
the arm 45 of the bell-crank engages the
clips 46 and 47, it closes the circuit through
the magnet 41, and the latter then draws the
armature 40 inwardly, and holds the arma-
ture and also the lever 38 in the position
shoAvn in Fig. 5. At the time the lever 38
is manipulated, as described, owing to the
interlocking of the clutch 34 — 39', the car-
riage 31 is tilted slightly, as shown in Fig.

5, which breaks the connections between the
feeding parts comprising the nuts 36 and

37, and the worms 24 and 25, and the car-
riage will remain still. While the carriage
and lever 38 are in the position shown in ^q
Fig. 5, the power may be applied to the
pulley or sheave 29 for starting the rotation

of the drum and woi-ms. After the machine
is started, it only requires a partial turn of
the drum 7 to bring the recess 11 around to 75
the point where the bolt 42 is pressing
against the flange 10. When the recess 11
comes opposite the bolt 42, the latter being
under pressure of the spring 44, will shoot
into the recess, thereby allowing spring 44 go
to relax or expand, which in turn will rock
the bell-crank back to the rest or idle posi-
tion shown in Fig. 6, which will break the
electric connection at the clips or switch
46 — 47 and deenei'gize the magnet 41. In-
stantly upon the brealdng of the circuit the
carriage will gravitate by its own weight
from the position shown in Fig. 5 to that
shown in Fig. 6, and at the same time lever

38, owing to the engagement of the clutch-
teeth 34 — 39', will be forced away from the
drum 7. Then, if the machine continues to
operate, by reason of the meshing of the
racks 36 and 37 with the worms 24 and 25,
the carriage will be held in true horizontal
position, and will be moved from the head
toward the tail of the machine, at a rate of
speed governed by the number and fineness
of the threads of the worms. If it is neces-
sary to stop the carriage 31 at any time
before it has traveled the full length of the
drum 7, this may be done by simply manipu-
lating the lever 38 and thereby energizing
the magnet 41. The power should be shut
off at the same time that the lever 38 is
operated, so as to pi-event the automatic
starting of the carriage, as described.

The electric and associated parts carried
by the machine will now be described.

In the present device, the impressions or
record which are recorded on the cylinder
8, are made in the first instance by a stylus
or needle 53, which is carried by a spider or
holder 54, which is soldered or otherwise
permanently attached to the underside of a
diaphragm or disk 55, and which consti-
tutes the vibrating parts of a receiver 56.
The receiver 56 consists of a solid cap or
top 57, and a base 58, having a fourway
slotted opening 59 through which the spider 120
54 depends. Both the cap 57 and bottom 58
are preferably made ot hard rubber, al-
though fiber or any other suitable insulat-
ing or nonconducting material may be used
for the purpose. The diaphragm 55 is dis-
posed between the top 57 and the base 58,
as best seen in Fig. 5. A series of bolts 56'
clamp and hold the sections 57 and 58 to-
gether. The diaphragm 55 is vibrated by
the fluctuations of an electric current which ^^-^

85

90

95

100

105

110

115

125

1^077,361

passes through a, series of magnets, a, 6, c
and 6?, which connect to and depend from a
steel or irou ring GO, which is rigidly sup-
ported in a chamber 61 of the cap 57, by a
5 series of screws 62. The lower poles of the
said magnets approach within a small frac-
tion of an inch of the upper surface of the
diaphragm 55. The magnets <z, &> c and d
are preferably series wound, so that they

^9 together form a single circuit, the opposite
terminals of which connect with binding-
posts 63 and 64, which are mounted on top
of the cap 57. When the diaphragm 55 is
placed in ojierative position in the receiver,

15 the spider 54 and also the stylus 53 project
slightly below the bottom part 58, so that
when the half nuts 36 and 37 engage the
worms 24 and 25, the point of the stylus 53
will be in engagement with the top surface

20 of the record cylinder 8 (see Fig. 6). When
the receiver 56 is employed for recording
the vibrations on a blank record, the said
receiver is placed within the circular car-
riage frame 31. The rear side of the re-

25 ceiver being secured, by one of the bolts 56'
to an inwardly projecting part 65, which is
pivoted or hinged to the bottom side of the
frame 31 by a pin 65'. The forAvard or op-
posite side of the receiver is adjustably sup-

SO ported in the frame 31 by means of a bolt
or rod 66, which passes through the top and
bottom sections of the receiver and then
upwardly through one arm of the bracket
35 and a coil spring 67, and the said spring
is held in place and given the desired ten-
sion by means of a thumb-nut 67'. The
spring 67 imparts a slight resilience or flexi-
bility to the forward side of the receiver
and permits of a fine adjustment of the
stylus or needle 53 relative to the surface
of the record cylinder 8. The electric cur-
rent which energizes the magnets «., &, c
and d is supplied by a pair of wires 72 and
73, which form parts of a secondary alter-

4§ nating circuit which will later be described.

Before a new record is made the operator

should inake a mark, as 68, on the record

cylinder 8, opposite the recess or groove 11

in the flange 10 of the drum, the said mark

SO is to indicate the point where the stylus 53
shall begin the record, as indicated by the
threads in Figs. 1 and 2. After he has
made the mark 68, he should then adjust the
carriage 31, so as to bring the point of the

55 stylus to said mark. To adjust the carriage
31 and receiver 56, I provide a lug 69 on the
sleeve 33, through which a screw 69' is
threaded, the said screw being locked and
held in any desired position by means of

60 jam-nuts 70. I next provide a similar lug
71 on the sleeve 39 of lever 38. The inner
end of screw 69' engages the lug 71, which
serves as a stop for limiting the retiirn
movement of the carriage toward the head

65 of the machine. By the use of the screw

S&

40

69', the carriage may be adjusted for setting

I the stylus exactly on the mark 68, or in any

' other position desired. At the time the

record is made on the cylinder 8, there are

j no somad waves received by the diaphragm

55, and no sounds uttered at or near the
receiver 56, can enter the receiver or have

I any effect whatever upon the diaphragm 53.
Hence, no matter what sounds or noises
may be made in the vicinity of the receiver

56, no record or impression will be made
upon the record cylinder 8. So far as the
recording and transmitting of the record on
the part 8 is concerned, the machine is en-
tirely silent. At the time the records are
made, the sounds of voices, music or other
noises are made at a distance from the ma-
chine. These are received by a specially
constructed transmitter to which a horn is
attached. Whatever impressions are made
on the record are effected entirely by elec-
tromagnetic vibrations, produced by the
fluctuations in the electric currents or cir-
cuits, which ai'e received through the wires
72 and 73, and transmitted by the magnets
a, 6, c and d to the diaphragm 55 and then
to the stylus 53, which frictionally engages
the cylinder 8, and indents or otherwise
forms impressions which correspond to said
vibrations.

Fig. 6 illustrates a transmitter employed
for reproducing the vibrations or impres-
sions recorded on the roll 8, which will now
be described: Assuming that a record has
already been made on the roll 8, as indi-
cated by the threads 8' in Figs, 1 and 2, and
that the reproduction thereof is to be ef-
fected, I place within the circular fi'ame 31
of the carriage a transmitter 75, which com-
prises a solid back or cap 76 and a base 77.
Both of these parts are preferably made of
an insulating material, such as hard rubber,
fiber and the like. The parts 76 and 77 are
circular, as shown. The top 76 is prefer-
ably hollow for providing a relatively large
chamber 78, while the bottom 77 is provided
with a shallow recess or depression 79, and
a four-way slotted opening 80. Between
the two sections of the transmitter is dis-
posed a relatively large circular disk or dia-
phragm 81, which may be made of steel,
wood or composition, so long as it is suffi-
ciently metalicized to serve as an electro-
magnetic conductor. The diaphragm 81
rests upon a narroAv felt or like ring 82,
which is disposed beneath its edges. The
said diaphragm is preferably held in place
upon the felt, under the requisite amount of
pressure, by a series of springs 83, which
also serve as electrodes, and these are dis-
posed at intervals around the top side of the
diaphragm 81. The springs 83 are held in
place and given more or less tension as de-
sired, by means of a series of bolts 84 and
nuts 84', the upper ends of the bolts 84

70

75

80

90

95

100

105

110

115

120

125

130

1,077,36X

serving as binding posts. To the underside
of the diaphragm 81 is secured a four-arm
spider 85, similar to the part Si of the re-
ceiver, the outer ends of said arms being
5 soldered to the diaphragm. The spider or
part 85 is disposed in and substantially
closes th.e slots 59 of the base 77, and may be
made out of any suitable sheet metal, but I
prefer to employ steel f Ji- the purpose. So

10 represents a stylus or needle which is con-
nected to the spider 85 in an}^ suitable man-
ner. The stylus 86 is preferably similar to
those employed on phonographs for repro-
ducing the "records. The spider 85 and

15 stylus 86 preferably project slightly below
the base 77, in position to readily engage the
record cylinder 8, when the carriage is in
the operative position shown in Figs. 1, 2
and 6. Upon the diaphragm 81 is mounted

20 a series of hard rubber cups 87, each of
which is glued or otherwise rigidly fastened
to diaphragm 81, and the interior of said
cups are filled with granulated carbon 88,
which rests upon the top surface of the dia-

25 phragm. The carbon 88 is subjected to a
suitable pressure, b,y means of a series of
screws or bolts 89, which are carried by the
top 76, the lower ends of the screws being
fitted with concave cone-shaped electrodes

30 90, which are arranged to exert an even
pressure upon the carbon in the lateral and
downward directions. The upper ends of
the bolts 89 comprise binding-posts and
these are fitted with adjusting nuts 89' and

35 thumb-nuts 91, between which wires 92, 93,
94 and 95 are connected. 96 represents a
wire which connects in series with the bind-
ing-posts 84 of the springs 83. The four
wires first nnined comprise separate primary

40 circuits having a common return through
wire 96 to the batteries which are controlled
by the transmitter 75. The transmitter 75
is disposed in the carriage 31, in exactly the
same manner as the receiver 56, the rear

45 side of the transmitter being secured to the
hinge member 65, which is pivoted to the
carriage by a pin 65'. The forward side of
the transmitter is adjustably suppoi'ted in
the carriage frame 31 by a vertically ar-

50 ranged bolt or rod 66, which passes through
the rubber parts 76 and 77 and then extends
upwardly and passes through one arm of a
bracket 35. The rod 66 is fitted with a coil
spring 67, the lower end of which rests upon

55 the bracket 35, while its upper end is en-
gaged by a thumb-nut 67', by means of
which any desired tension may be given to
the said spring for raising or lowering the
transmitter relative to the record roll 8 and

60 also the carriage.

The circuits employed in connection with
the receiver 56 and transmitter 75 will now
be described.

Referring to Fig. 3 the primary circuits

85 which are controlled by the transmitter 75

consist of the four dii-ect wires, 92, 93, 94
and 95, which pass in the form of a cable 97
to a box 98, in which is disposed a series of
coils, illustrated diagrammatically at 99.
Each of the four wires last referred to pass ^q
around the coils in a separate windings, as
indicated, and then througli batteries 92',
93', 94' and 95' respectively. From the
batteries, these four wires lead to and con-
nect with a common return wire, which is 75
the wire 96, and which connects in series the
binding-posts 84. Under this arrangement,
each of the electrodes 89 is supplied Avith a
direct current through its own primary cir-
cuit, while the electrodes 83 — 84 are con- go
nected with the common return wire 96.
No matter whether the transmitter 75 is em-
ployed for transmitting the sounds to the
receiver 56 for recording the corresponding
electro-magnetic vibrations on a blank rec- §5
ord cylinder, or whether it is employed for
picking up the vibrations from the record
and transmitting them to the receiver which
reconverts the vibrations into sounds which
are reproduced through a hoi'n, as 100, the 90
transmitter 75 is always directly connected
to the primary circuits, as described. On
the other hand, the receiver 56 is always
connected with the secondary circuit, which
consists of the wires 72 and 73, which as de- 95
scribed, pass around the magnets a, 5, c and
d by means of a series winding, then to the
binding-posts 63 and 64, thence to the four
coils 101. where the windings are arranged
in parallel. The electro-motive-force in- 100
duced in the secondary coils 101, is prefer-
ably higher than the primary electro-motive-
force, although this may be varied to suit
conditions.

Fig. 4 represents the receiver 56, when the 105
electric parts are employed, (as illustrated
in Fig. 3,) for reproducing a record of the
vibrations which had previously been pre-
pared, as described. The receiver shown in
Fig. 4, differs from the receiver shown in 110
Fig. 5 in that the diaphragm 53 has been
substituted by a plain diaphragm 102, which
is disposed between the rubber cap 56 and a
modified base 103, which is provided with a
neck 104 for receiving and supporting the 115
amplifying horn 100. The base 103 is pro-
vided with a clear concentric opening 105
which affords unobstructed communication
with the diaphragm 102.

Under the construction and arrangement 120
of the electric circuits, as herein shown and
described, both the receiving: and the repro-
ducing of the sounds may be effected at any
reasonable or desired distance from the elec-
trograph machine, by simplv lengthening or 125
shortenina: the wires 72 and 73 of the sec-
ondary circuit. On the other hand, to make
a new record, the transmitter 75 (see Fig.
11) is provided with a plain diaphragm 106,
and a modified base 107 is substituted for the 130

e

1,077,391

base 77 to which the horn 108 may be con-
nected. When so modified the transmitter
will receive the sounds of voices, music and
the like and convert them into electro-mao-
5 netic vibrations, causing fluctuations which
will be induced in the secondary circuit, and
by means of the receiver 56 and the stylus
53 corresponding impressions will be re-
corded on the cylinder 8.

10 The diaphragm 55 of the receiver 56, and
the diaphragm 81 of the transmitter 75, are
intended to be of larger diameter and also
of considerably heavier gage than the dia-
phragms of the common telephone receivers

15 and transmitters. The purpose of these
modifications is to prevent, as far as possible
the vibration of the diaphragms directly by
any sound waves whatever. In the present
invention the dianhragm 55 is only intended

20 to be vibrated by the ekctro-magnetic fluc-
tuations in the current which act upon mag-
nets G, &, c and d. The diaphragm 81 is
only intended to be vibrated by the vibra-
tions or pulsations it receives tJirough the

25 contact of the stylus 86 with the record cyl-
inder 8.

At the time a new record is made, tlie
waves of the sounds of voices, music and the
like, are carried by a horn, as 108, to a plain

30 diaphragm, as 106 Avhich is placed in the
transmitter 75, for the purpose. These
waves cause the diaphragm to vibrate, and
the vibrations in turn cause an increase and
decrease of the pressure between the fine

35 particles of the carbon 88, which will corre-
spondingly increase and decrease the resist-
ance in the said carbon, thereby simultane-
ously increasing and decreasing the current
in the separate circuits of the electrodes 90,

40 causing the said circuits to fluctviate syn-
chronously with the A'ibrations of the dia-
phragm. The fluctuations of these currents
in the primary coils 09 induce like fluctua-
tions in the secondarv coils 101, and are car-

45 ried by the wires 72 — 73 to the magnets a,
5, c and (f of the receiver 56, setting up mag-
netic fluctuations therein, which act upon the
diaphragm armature 55, setting up in it vi-
brations, which are then recorded upon a

50 suitable blank record, like 8. To reproduce
the said record, the order of the electric
p^rts is reversed. The transmitter 75 is
mounted in the carriage 81. and it is fitted
with the diaphragm 81, having the stylus 86.

^5 The stylus 86, when brought into contact
with the record cylinder 8, picks up the im-
pressions which were recorded thereon, and
imparts them to the diaphragm 81, setting
up therein vibrations or pulsations. The

60 said vibrations or pulsations correspond-
ingly increase and decrease the pressure
upon the granulated carbon 88 confined be-
tween said diaphragm and the cone-shaped
electrodes 90. The increase and decrease of

the pressure between the fine particles of the
carbon will correspondingly increase and
decrease the resistance in the said carbon,
thereby simultaneously increasing and de-
creasing the current in the separate circuits
92, 93, 94 and 95 which connect with the
electrodes 90, causing them to fluctuate syn-
chronously with the fluctuations or impres-
sions recorded on the cylinder 8. These
electric fluctuations will ibhen be set up in
secondary coils 101, bringing about in the
magnets a, &, c and d of the receiver 56 si-
multaneously fluctuations of the magnetic
circuit, which will set up in the plain dia-
phragm 102 of the receiver vibrations cor-
responding exactly to the vibrations set up
in the diaphragm 81 of the transmitter, and
the soimd waves resulting therefrom will
correspond absolutely to those received by
the transmitter of the recording instrument
and will be rendered .audible bv the horn 100.

It is obvious that two or more receivers
and horns may be connected to the electro-
graph, for reproducing records at as many
different p.oints simultaneously, and that
some changes and modifications may be
made in the parts of the device, within the
scope defined by the appended claims, with-
out departing from the spirit of the inven-
tion.

Having thus described my in-^'ention, what
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Let-
ters Patent, is —

1. The combination of a frame, a rota-
table drum supported by said frame, said
drum having a circiimferential groove and
ada,ptecl to support a record, a carriage re-
ciprocable in said frame above said drum, a
transmitter supported by said carriage and
having a stylus adapted to engage said rec-
ord, a rocking lever carried by said frame,
means for interlocking said lever with said
carriage, said lever capable of being rocked
by hand for tilting said carriage and trans-
mitter away from the record and drum, for
stopping the playing of the record, a mag-
net, said magnet having an armature con-
nected to said lever adapted when said mag-
net is energized to hold said carriage in the
tilted position, and a pin carried Tdv said
lever adapted to enter the groove of said
drum for deenergizing said magnet for al-
lowing said carriage to gravitate toward
said drum.

2. In combination, a rotatable drum adapt-
ed to carry a cylindrical record, a carriage
mounted above said drum, means for moving
said carriage from the head toward the tail
of the drum, a rocking lever adapted to tilt
said carriage away from the record cylinder,
an electro-magnet adapted for holding said
lever and said carriage in the tilted posi-
tion, means carried by said drum, and means
carried by said lever adapted to effect the

65

70

75

80

85

90

95

100

110

115

120

12{

1,077,361

deenergizing of said magnet for allowing
said carriage to gravitate to the starting
position. ••/;;.'

3. In combination, a rotatable drum hav-
5 ing a circumferential recess, said drum

adapted to carry and operate a record, a car-
riage mounted above and adapted to travel
along said drum, a rocking lever adapted to
lift said carriage away from said drum, a re-

10 ciprocating pin carried by said lever, a
magnet to hold said carriage in the
elevated position until said reciprocat-
ing pin engages the recess in said drum,
and means^ controlled by said recipro-

15 eating pin for effecting the starting of said
carriage at a fixed point on the record rela-
tive to the recess in said drum.

4. In combination, a frame, a rotatable
drum supported by said frame, said drum

20 having a circumferential notch, a carriage
disposed above said drum, said carriage
supporting a transmitter having a stylus
adapted to engage a record carried by said
drum, a lever pivoted in said frame, said

25 lever having a pin adapted to engage the
notch of said drum, said lever capable of
being operated by hand for lifting said car-
riage for breaking the engagement of said
stylus with the record and for brinp-ing said

30 pin into engagement with said drum, a mag-
net for holding said carriage and stylus in

the inoperative position, and means for ro-
tating said drum so as to permit said pin
to enter the notch in said drum for effect-
ing the lowering of the carriage and the 35
engagement of the stylus with the record.

5. In an electrograph, the combination
with a frame and a rotatable drum adapted
to supi30rt a record, said drum having a key
for engaging a key-way in the record, a 40
carriage reciprocably mounted in said
frame, said carriage supporting a transmit-
ter in position to engage the record, a shaft
carried by the frame upon which said car-
riage is slidable, a rocking lever, said lever 45
journaled at one end on said shaft and hav-
ing a clutch-portion adapted to engage a
similar portion of the carriage, whereby
said carriage is lifted away from the record
v/hen said lever is brought toward said 50
drum, an electro-magnet adapted when en-
ergized to temi^orarily hold said lever in
said operated position, and means for deen-
ergizing said magnet for allowing said car-
riage to approach the record for starting 55
the recording or reproducing.

In testimony whereof I affix my signature
in presence of two witnesses.

EICHAED S. M. MITCHELL.

Witnesses :

Harry De "Wallace,
Ethel M. Jones.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

Washington, D. C."

1,077,536.

WITNESSES

c^.%/uaiu.cut/.

L. LUMIERE.

ACOUSTICAL INSTRDMENT.
APPLICATION PILED APE. 20, 19H.

JCtg.J.

J^z^.3.

Patented Nov. 4, 1913.

INVENTOR

BY

/^^

ATTORNEY

COLUMBIA PLANOaRAPH CO., WASHINOTON, t. C

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

LOUIS LUMIERE, OF LYON, FRANCE. ASSIGNOR TO VICTOR TALKING MACHINE
COMPANY, OF CAMDEN, NEW JERSEY, A CORPORATION OF NEW JERSEY.

ACOUSTICAL INSTRUMENT.

1,077,536. Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Nov. 4, 1913.

Original application filed May 18, 1910, Serial No. 561,928. Divided and this application filed April 20,

1911. Serial No. 622.213.

To all whom it may concern :

Be it known that I, Loui.s Ltjmiere, a
citizen of the Eepublic of France, residing at
L3'on, in the Eepublic of France, have in-
5 vented certain new and useful Imi^rovements
in Acoustical Instruments, of which the fol-
lowing is a full, clear, and complete dis-
closure.

This application is a division of a prior

10 ai>plication filed by me Mav 18, 1910, Serial
Xo. 561,928.

This invention relates to improvements in
acoustical instruments such as telephones,
microphones, stethoscopes, talking machines,

15 musical instnnnents, and in general any in-
strument used for the reception or transmis-
sion of sounds.

The invention consists in a certain con-
struction of sound box for such instruments,

20 the details of which will be given below.

The es.sential features of the invention are
an extensible chamber with a stationain' wall,
a movable wall adapted to be reciprocated
toAvard and away from the stationary Avail,

25 and means between the two walls for pre-
venting the escape of air between them but
allowing perfect freedom of the moA^able
Avail to moA'e in unchanged form and to any
extent that may be practically required. Ac-

30 cording to this invention a sound box for
acoustical instruments is obtained compris-
ing a stationar^v wall, having an opening
therein for the passage of the sound waves,
a movable Avail adapted to be reciprocated

35 toAvard and awaj'^ from the stationary wall,
and means between the edges of the movable
wall and the stationar.y wall to prevent the
esca])e of air betAveen them, such means, how-
GA'cr, leaving the movable wall free to move

40 as a whole in substantially unchanged form
to any extent that may practically be re-
ciuired, and offering substantially no resist-
ance to the movement of the movable wall
whatcA-er the position of the latter with

45 regard to tb.e stationary wall, so that the
position and moA-ement of the movable wall
is regulated entirely by the sound waves or
means through which the movable wall is
reciprocated. Further, according to this in-

50 vention the Avhole of one side of the extensi-
ble chamber moves, and not merely the cen-
tral portion thereof, thus producing a more
effective reproduction.

In the accompanying drawings the inven-
tion is illustrated as 'applied to the sound 55
box of a talking machine.

Figure 1 is a sectional elevational view of
one construction of sound box embodying
my iuA-ention; Fig. 2 is an end view of the
movable member shoAvn in Fig. 1 and Fig. 3 60
is an end elevational view of a modified
form of the movable member stiffened by
suitable corrugations.

The sound boxes which are usually em-
ployed in talking machines and many other 65
acoustical instruments are at present con-
structed with a chamber closed upon one side
by means of a thin diaphragm held at its
edges. This diaphragm, which may be of
glass, mica, metal or other suitable material, 70
is set in vibration in the case of talking ma-
chines by means of a suitable transmitting
device connecting it Avith the needle or sap-
phire, which folioAvs the groove in the dislf
or cylinder carrying the phonogram. In 75
this arrangement, certain effects due to the
elasticity of the diaphragm and the forma-
tion of nodal lines render unnatural the
quality of the sound obtained and limit the
jn-actical dimensions of the apparatus. The 80
sound box forming the subject of this inven-
tion does not present these objections, con-
sisting as it does of an exten.siblc chamber
closed upon its two opposite sides by rigid
Avails which can approach or recede from one 85
another. In the form of my iuA^ention illus-
trated in the figures of the drawings, the
rigid Avails are mounted to slide one within
the other, similar to a piston and the space
betAveen the tAvo walls so telescopically 90
mounted is closed by a packing g, of any
suitable material.

Under the action of the stylus following
the phonographic sound line, the said walls
are caused to approach or recede from one 95
another, and these movements produce vari-
ations of the pressure of the air Avithin the
sound box. It is these variations Avhich are
the essential cause of the production of
sound. The interior of the sound box so 100
constructed maj^ be connected to an amplify-
ing horn as in other well known apparatus.

In the figures of the drawings of this ap-
plication is illustrated a construction in
which the rigid sides a and h of the sound 105
box are connected together by means of a

2

1,077,536

packina: g preferably consistina; of a rubber
rinw ada]:)tecl to roll between the c^dmdrical
telesco]>ing surfaces of the two sides a and b.
The side a is stationary, its mass being suffi-
\ cient to give it considerable inertia, relative
to the movable parts of the soiuid box. The
side Z>, on the other Iiand, is A-ery light, and
is connected with the stylus c by means of the
stylus bar c/, which amplifies the movement

10 of the st^'lus. The interior of the soinid box
connects Avith the amplifying horn of the
talking machine through the Ojiening /. The
packing cj is so mounted and arranged as to
be adapted to roll between the cylindrical

15 surfaces of the two sides a and 5, and is made
to lie lightl}^ between the two said telescop-
ing surfaces, so as to be only just in contact
thereAvith and at the same time effect a
complete closure. The friction between the

20 said rubber ring and contacting surfaces is
reduced to a minimum, OAving to the rolling-
action of the rubber ring betAveen the two
surfaces when the moA^able side h moA'es with
resi^ect to the relatively stationary side or

25 wall a. Moreover, the resistance to be OA'er-
come is practicality constant Avhatever the
extent of the movement of the movable wall
h. It is evident that any other system of
movable joint offering no appreciable resist-

30 ance may be employed for attaining the same
desired end.

In order to obtain simultaneously suffi-
cient rigidity and lightness in the movable
side 7>, so that it Avill reciprocate in prac-

36 ticall}^ unchanged form, it is found desir-
able to construct this side of A^ery thin metal
and to render it rigid by stamping it out in
some such form.

In Fig. 3 the side or movable Avail h^ is

40 shown as being stamped ont of sheet metal
Avith radial corrugations /i, in order to
stiffen it, thus providing a relatiA'^ely rigid
movable Avail or section &, so that the en-
tire movement of the upper end of the stylus

45 d Avill be communicated to the movable wall
h and Avill operate to faithfully move the
member h Avithout absorbing any of the said
motion by any yielding or springing of the
A'ertical face of the member h.

50 It is to be noted that Avhile I have illns-
trated the massiA^e side a as substantially
cylindrical in shape, and the movable side 7;,
also cylindrical, it is of course to be under-
stood that the two said parts may be given

55 any suitable shape in cross section so long
as the tAvo Avill properly slide OA^er each
other or moA^e longitudinally of the axis of
the sound box, relatiA-e to each other.

Having thus described my iuA^ention what

60 I desire to protect by Letters Patent of the
United States is:

1. A sound box comprising a stationary
wall, a movable Avail and a solid yielding
annular packing arranged to roll between

6 5 said walls.

2. A sound box for acoustical instrviments
comprising a Avail, a diaphragm telescoping
Avith said Avail, and a packing arranged to
roll between said wall and said diaphragm,
and rotated by the vibration of said dia-
phragm, and free to respond to all vibra-
tions imposed.

3. A sound box for acoustical instruments
comprising a wall and a diaphragm tele-
scoping with said Avall, and a yielding pack-
ing arranged to roll between said wall and
said diaphragm and free to be rotated by
the A'ibration of said diaphragm.

4. A somid box, comprising a cylindrical
stationary wall, a moA^able wall, and a pack-
ing arranged to roll betAveen said Avails, and
maintain a constant diameter.

5. A sound box, comprising a cylindrical
stationary Avail, a movable Avall, and a pack-
ing arranged to roll between said walls, the
movement of the packing being substan-
tially one-half that of the moA^able wall.

6. A sound box, comprising a stationary
wall, a moA'able Avail, and an annular pack-
ing arranged to roll between said walls.

7. A sound box for acoustical instruments,
comprising a wall, a diaphragm embracing
said Avail, and pacldng interposed between
said Avail and diaphragm, free to roll and
permit the entire diaphragm to pulsate uni-
formly.

8. A sound box for acoustical instruments,
having a rigid wall, and a movable dia-
phragm having a flange embracing the edges
of said Avail, and a packing arranged to roll
between said wall and diaphragm, and free
to be rotated by the vibration of said dia-
phragm.

9. A sound box comprising a cylindrical
stationary wall, a diaphragm, and a pacldng
arranged to roll between said wall and said
diaphragm, said diaphragm being compara-
tiA^ely rigid and capable of being vibrated
as a whole in a direction perpendicular to
the plane of the diaphragm.

10. A sound box comprising a stationary
Avail, a moA^able Avail, and a solid annular
packing surrounding one of said AA'alls and
surrounded by the other of said walls and
arranged to roll between said walls.

11. A sound box comprising a stationary
wall, a moA^able wall and a solid annular
packing arranged to roll between said walls.

12. A sound box comprising a stationary
Avail, a moA^able Avail and a solid yielding
packing arranged to roll between said walls.

13. A sound box comprising a cylindrical
wall, a vibratory diaphragm provided with
a cylindrical wall telescoping Avith said first
mentioned wall, and a solid annular pack-
ing arranged to roll between and in contact
with said walls.

14. A sound box comprising a cylindrical
wall, a diaphragm provided with a cylin-
drical Avail, telescoping wdth said first men-

70

75

80

35

90

95

100

105

110

111

120

12f

l!^-T

1,077,536

tioned wall, and a yielding solid annular
packing arranged to roll between and in con-
tact with said walls.

15. A sound box comprising a cylindrical
5 wall, a diaphragm provided with a c^din-
drical wall, the vibration of said diaphragm
causing a relative telescopic movement be-
tween said walls, and a yielding annular
solid packing substantially circular in trans-

10 \erse section between and contacting with
said cylindrical walls.

IG. A sound box comprising, a cylindrical
relatively stationary wall, a comparati\ ely
rigid diai^liragm provided with a marginal

15 cylindrical wall, telescoping with said first
mentioned cylindrical wall, and a yielding
solid annular packing substantially circular
in transverse section arranged to roll be-
tween and in contact with said cvlinclrical

20 vaills.

17. A sound box comprising a compara-
tively stationary member, a movable dia-
phragm provided with a flange telescopi-
cally movable with respect to said stationary

25 member, and attaching means arranged be-
tween said flange and said stationary mem-
ber to permit the vibration telescopically of
said flange witli respect to said stationary
member.

18. A sound box comprising a stationary
Avail, a comparatively rigid movable wail
vibrator}^ as a whole, and solid packing
means arranged to roll between said walls.

19. A sound box comprising a stationary
Avail, a movable Avail, and a solid annular 35
packing arranged to roll betAveen and in
contact Avith said Avails.

20. A sound box comprising a stationary
Avail, a movable comparatively rigid wall,
Adbratory as a Avhole, solid packing means 40
arranged to roll betAveen said walls, and
means to Adbrate said movable wall in ac-
cordance Avith a sound record.

21. A sound box comprising a cylindrical
wall, a diaphragm provided Avith a cylin- 45
drical Avail, the vibration of said diaphragm
being operative to cause said last-named
AAall to vibrate telescopicallv with respect

to said first-named Avail, and a packing be-
tAveen and contacting substantially tan- 50
gentially with said Avails.

22. A sound box comprising a cylindrical
Avail, a diaphragm provided with a cylin-
drical Avail, the vibration of said diaphragm
being operative to cause said last-named 55
Avail to vibrate telescopically with respect to
said first-named Avail, and a packing be-
tAveen and contacting substantially tangen-
tially Avith said Avails, said packing being
circular in cross section. 60

In Avitness Avhereof I haA^e hereunto set
my hand this 27 day of March A. D. 1911.
' LOUIS LUMIERE.
Witnesses :

Gaston Jeanviaux,
Marin Vachons.

Copies of this trade-mark may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the "Commissioner of Patents,

Washington. D, C,"

C. G. CARLSON.

SOUND MODIFYING REPRODUCER FOR PHONOGRAPHS.

APPLICATION riLEB APE. 3, 1912.

1,077,593. Patented Nov. 4, 1 9 1 3.

j'j'

^Witn cooed

o8tj

J*rMi^^-<->-»

QiXXovwt^fit

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

CARL G. CARLSON. OF HAWTHORNE, ILLINOIS.
SOUND-MODIFYING REPRODUCER FOR PHONOGRAPHS.

1,077,593.

Specification of letters Patent. Patented Nov. 4, 1.913.

Application filed April 3, 1912. Serial No. 688,146.

To all whom it may concern :

Be it known that I, Carl G. Carlson, citi-
zen of the United States, residing at Haw-
thorne, in the county of Cook and State of
5 Illinois, have invented certain new and use-
ful Improvements in Sound-Modifying Re-
producers for Phonographs, of which the
following is a specification.
My invention relates to phonographs, and

10 particularly to the sound boxes or repro-
ducers thereof, and the primary object of
my invention is to provide means whereby
the degree of loudness of the sound may be
modified to any desired degree so that the re-

15 production will either be relativel)^ faint or
relatively loud as may be desired.

Other objects will appear in the course of
the following description.
My invention is illustrated in the accom-

20 panying drawings wherein :

Figure 1 is a perspective view of a por-
tion of a phonograph horn with my sound
box applied thereto. Fig. 2 is a diametrical
section of the sound box. Fig. 3 is a face

25 view of the sound box, the diaphragm being
removed and the wall of the sound box being
in section.

Referring to these drawings, 2 designates a
sound box such as is used in connection with

30 disk record machines. This sound box is
circular in form as usual, and is provided
with the usual annular "vvall 3 upon which
the diaphragm 4, which as shown is made
of mica or like substance, is supported in

35 any usual or suitable manner. Attached to
the wall 3 is the bracket 5 supporting the
stylus arm 6 which as usual is turned in-
ward at one end and engaged with the cen-
ter of the diaphragm. The extremity of the

<0 bracket 5 is formed with a socket for the re-
ception of the stylus or needle 7 which is
held in place by means of a set screw 8. I
wish it understood that any suitable means
for holding the stylus arm 6 or the needle

46 may be provided as this construction may
be modified in many ways without depart-
ing from the spirit of the invention.

The sound box 2, which is preferably
made of metal, is provided with a sound-

60 discharging opening designate 9 which is
located, not at the axial center of the sound
box but eccentrically thereto, and extending
from this opening 9 is the tube 10 adapted
to be connected if desired to a horn in the

55 usual manner, or the sound box may be used

without the horn as is usual in cabinet ma-
chines.

Mounted within the sound box and resting
against the inner face thereof is a cut-on
plate designated 11 of less diameter than the 60
box and pivoted at 12 so that it may be ro-
tated in the arc of a circle. This plate 11 is
formed with an opening designated 13 hav-
ing the same size as the opening 9, and as
the plate is moved this opening 13 may be 66
made to more or less register with the open-
ing 9. The rear wall of the box is prefer-
ably provided with a slot 14 through which
passes a pin 15. On the pin is a head 16.
The head IG has screw threaded engagement 70
with the pin 15 so that when the head is
turned home it will bite against the outer
face of the bottom of the sound box and
hold the plate 11 set in any desired posi-
tion. When the head is loosened, however, 75 j
the plate is free to be rotated through an
arc of a circle equal in length to the slot 14.

In the practical use of my invention it
will be seen that if it is desired that only
a relatively faint sound shall issue from the 80 '
sound box, the plate 11 is so turned that
only a very small portion of the opening 9
is uncovered, but that if it is desired that
the full sound shall issue from the sound
box, then the plate 11 is so turned that the 8S '
opening 13 fully registers with the opening
9. It will be obvious that the plate 11 may
be so adjusted as to vary the sound dis-
charge opening from the maximum to the
minimum, or that it may be so shifted as to 00
cut off the opening 9 entirely. Thus the
sound issuing from the sound box may be
of full strength or weakened to any desired
degree. It is further pointed out that by
reason of the fact that the opening 9 is set 95
eccentrically to the center of the box, the
box may be turned relatively to the support
upon which the sound box is mounted so as
to cause the needle 7 to bear with more or
less force upon the face of the record, and 100
so that the needle 7 may be set at any de-
sired inclination to the record. By reason
of this adjustability of the box, a hard nee-
dle may be used without scratching the
record. 106

My improved reproducer may be made to
reproduce sounds to any degree of loudness
or softness as is required and is adapted to
any of the usual forms of phonograph or
gramophone. It is simple in construction 110

8

1,077,698

and extremely simple in operation. The
parts are very few and any one can operate
the device.

What I claim is :
5 A sound box for sound reproducing ma-
chines having a sound dischai'ge opening ec-
centrically set with relation to the box and
arranged to communicate with the sound
tube of the machine, a plate disposed with-

10 in the box, said plate being of a diameter
slightly less than the inner diameter of the
box, a pin extending centrally through said
plate and the rear wall of the box, the termi-
nal of said pin which projects through the

15 rear wall of the box being threaded to re-
ceive jam nuts, the rear wall being provided
with an arcuate slot, a pin supported by the

plate and disposed to extend through said
arcuate slot, said pin remote from tne plate
being threaded, a jam nut mounted on the
threaded portion of the pin, said nut con-
tacting with the outer face of the rear wall
of the box to lock the plate against move-
ment, the plate being provided with an ec-
centrically disposed sound discharge open-
ing arranged to register with the opening in
the rear wall of the box.

In testimonj' whereof I affix my signature
in presence of two witnesses.

GAEL G. CARLSON, [l. s.]

Witnesses :

Thomas A. Ludgen,
G. Israel Petteksson.

20

25

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

Washington, D. C."

p. CATUCOI.

PHONOGRAPH.
APPLICATION PILED NOV. 17, 1910.

1,077,973.

PatentedNov.il, 1913.

3 SHEETS-SHEET 1.

5

JF^.J.

z

--<?X^. /^,

'^HH:l>n<iooco

T%.^^

COLUMBIA PLANOORAPH CO.. WASHINGTON. D. C.

p. CATUCOI.

PHONOGRAPH.
APPLICATION PILED NOV. 17, 1910,

1,077,973.

Patented Nov. 11, 1913.

3 SHEETS-SHEET 2.

COLUMBIA PLANOGRAPM CO., WASHINGTON, D. C.

1,077,973.

p. CATTJGCI.

PHONOGRAPH.

APPLICATIOH FILED NOV. 17, 1910.

Patented Nov. 11, 1913.

8 SHEETS-SHEET 3.

(^-d:^.^ CcU^<^^ 3nv<2.ntoz

^Su-'^^-^/Clttor-MeiZ , //

COLUMBIA PLANOQRAPH CO.. WASHINOTON, D. C.

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

PLINY CATTJCCI, OF NEWARK, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR TO A. F. MEISSELBACH &
BROTHER, OF NEWARK, NEW JERSEY, A CORPORATION OF NEW JERSEY.

PHONOGRAPH.

1,077,973.

Specification of letters Patent. Patented Nov. 11,1 913.

Application filed November 17, 1910. Serial No. 592,818.

To all xclwm It may concern:

Be it known that I, Pltny Catucci, a
citizen of the United States, residing in the
city of Newark, county of Essex, and State
5 of New Jersey, have invented certain new
and useful Improvements in Phonographs,
of wliich the following is a full, clear, and
exact description, such as will enable others
skilled in the ai't to which it pertains to

10 make, construct, and use the same.

The objects of my invention are to make
certain improvements in the details in the
construction of phonographs, and more par-
ticularly, to i)rovide a feed mechanism where-

15 by so-called 2-minute and 4-minute cylinder
records may be reproduced upon the same
instrument, by means of a very simple and
effective change in the transmission gears;
to provide simple and effective means for

20 engaging, disengaging, and shifting the rec-
ord feed; to provide simple and effective
means for starting, stopping, and governing
the speed of the device; and in general, to
improve the construction, in the direction

25 of simplicity and reduction of cost of cjdin-
der phonographs.

In carrying out my invention, I make use
of the structures illustrated in the accom-
panying drawings, or their equivalents.

30 Figure 1 represents a side elevation of the
phonograph, and its containing box with
the amplifying horn and reproducer or
sound box omitted. Fig. 2 is a top plan
view of the same. Fig. 3 is a top plan

35 view of the spring motor with the guard
removed to show the gear trains in
detail. Fig. 4 is an end elevation, partly in
section, of the spring motor. Fig. 5 is a de-
tail plan, partly in section, of the starting,

40 stopping, and governing device. Fig. 6 is
a detail of the record feed train for operat-
ing a two minute record. Fig. 7 is a detail
of the record feed train for operating a
four minute i^ecord. Fig. 8 is an end view

45 of the record feed showing the feed nut in
dotted lines as disengaged from the feed
screw. Fig. 9 is a section on line 9 — 9. Figs.
1 and 2 of gear drive for the record man-
drel. Fig. 10 is an under plan view of the

50 half nut which engages the record feed.
Figs. 11 and 12 represent the sound box and
horn support. Figs. 13 and 14 illustrate
respectively the two minute and four minute
gear trains.

Similar reference nimierals refer to like 55
parts throughout.

In the drawings, 1 represents the contain-
ing case which is provided with a cover 2
upon the under side of which is rigidly se-
cured the base 3 in shch a manner that 60
when said cover 2 is lifted off the case 1 and
inverted, it may rest upon the case with the
operating mechanism exposed as shown in
Fig. 1.

All of the working parts of the machine 65
are mounted upon the base 3 as shown. The
two upright plates 6 and 7 are rigidly se-
cured to the base by the laterally extending
lugs 8 and rigidly connected together by the
sjDreaders 9 located at each corner of the 70
plates. These plates 6 and 7 serve as bear-
ings for the gear train shafts — journal holes
being drillecl through them at the proper
points for the journals of the gear shafts
of said train. 75

The motor spring box 10, its shaft 11,
winding gears 12 and 13, driving gear 14
and associated parts are of the usual type
and need no detailed description. The gear
train 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, and 21, leading 80
from the drive gear to the governor is also
of the usual type and need not be further
described than to say that its purpose is to
]ircgressively increase the speed of the gears
from the motor drive gear 14 to the gov- 85
ernor gear 21 that the latter will run at a
relatively high speed.

The governor consists of the three weights
22 mounted upon the flat springs 23, the lat-
ter being rigidly secured at one end to the 90
fixed collar 24 on the governor shaft 25.
The other ends of the springs 23 are rig-
idly secured to the sliding sleeve or collar
26 on the shaft 25. The sleeve 26 is provid-
ed with a friction disk 27, for cooperation 95
with the regulating friction brake 28 the
latter being secured to the extremity of a
pivoted lever 29 mounted upon the stud 30
as shown in Fig. 5. The opposite end of the
le^•er 29 is provided with a stud 31 which lOO
projects through an aperture in the side
plate 6 where it impinges upon the inner
face of the oscillating cam disk 31', the lat-
ter being centrally pivoted to the side plate
6 at 32. The cam disk 31' is provided with i05
a circular cam face 33 graduated from noth-
ing to a maximum so that in the position
shown in Fig. 4 the cam face will depress

1,077,973

15

2D

25

the lever 29 and its friction bralfe 28 againsi
the inner face of the governor brake disk 27,
and thereby stop the governor and conse-
quently, the motor.

As the disk 31' is rotated in the direction
of the arrow, the pressure u]Don the stud 31
will be relieved and consequently the brake
28 will permit the rotation of the governor
shaft at a speed proportional to the turn-
ing of the disk 31', up to the maximum of
180°. I provide the disk 31' with a radial
arm 34 and pointer 35 and also with the
small handle 36. I may also mark \ipon
the face of the side plate 6 a circular scale
37 for cooperation Avith the pointer 35. In
this manner the tempo and key of a musical
selection may be regulated to suit the musical
taste and judgment of the operator; or the
tempo may be marked upon the record itself
and the pointer 35 set to the corresponding
number u]Don the scale 37.

In the upper edges of the i^lates 6 and 7
is rigidly secured the carrier tube 38 with-
in which is secured the sliding mandrel
shaft 39 carrying at its outer end the over-
hanging record mandrel 40. At the outer
end of the tube 38 is rigidly secured the
mutilated circular plate 41 having the short
spacing studs 42 projecting from its outer

30 side. To these studs 42 is secured the circu-
lar plate 43, both plates being concentric
with the tube 38. Splined u]3on the shaft
39 and located between the plates 41 and
43 is the gear 44 the construction being such

35 that the rotation of the gear 44 will rotate
the shaft 39 and the mandrel 40 and at the
same time, permit the sliding back and forth
of the shaft 39.

Located just beneath the tube 38 is the
record mandrel driving shaft 45 journaled
at one end in the plate 6 and at its other end
in the plate 43. Mounted upon this shaft
45 adjacent to the plate 6 is the gear 46
meshing with the gear 18 of the gear train

45 heretofore referred to, Avhile at the opposite
end of the shaft 45 is the gear 47 meshing
with the splined gear 44 upon the mandrel
shaft 39. It will now be obvious that the
operation of the motor train will rotate the

50 record mandrel and that the speed of such
rotation will be governed by the governing
device in the manner heretofore described.

It now remains to describe the means for
feeding the mandrel with its record laterally

65 to permit cooperation of the record with the
stylus of a stationary sound box — either a
recorder or reproducer.

Tip to a recent date, manufacturers of
phonograph records made only what are

60 known as 2-minute records; ^. e., records re-
quiring only two minutes for their complete
rendition. With the late mechanical refine-
ments, however, the record helices on cy-
lindrical records have been doubled, so as

65 to permit the playing of four-minute rec-

40

ords. This would, ordinarily, require a
separate machine for each kind of record.
My improved feeding device, however, ob-
viates this necessity and by a simple shift-
ing mechanism, I am able to shift, instantly yg
from one feed to the other, and thus permit
the operator to use either the old style 2-
minute record, or the new style 4-minute
record. This is obviously a great advantage,
for the operator may have accumulated a 75
large number of the 2-minute records which
would be useless upon a four-minute ma-
chine. In order to accomplish these ends, I
journal the screw feed shaft 48, at one end
in the ui^ward projection upon the plate 6 gQ
and its other end in the circular plate 43 so
that said feed shaft shall lie parallel Avith
the sliding mandrel shaft 39. This shaft is
threaded for the greater portion of its
length as shown, and has mounted at its end 85
near the plate 6 the broad faced gear 49
which meshes with the larg'er idle gear 50,
the latter being mounted upon the sliding
shaft 51. The gear 50 is located in position
to mesh either Avith a gear 52 on the shaft 90
53 or with a gear 54 on the same shaft with
and adjacent to gear 17, according to
whether the sliding shaft is pushed in or
pulled out. The gear 52 is rigidly mounted
on the shaft 53 and said shaft has also rig- 95
idly mounted thereon the gear 52' which lat-
ter is always in mesh with the gear 16.
The button 51' is secured to the outer end of
the shaft 51 as a means for sliding it back
and forth. 100

The gear 54 is just double the diameter of
the gear 52, so that when the screw feed
shaft 48 is driA^en through the train 16, 52',
52, 50 and 49, it rotates half as fast as
Avhen driA'en through the train 16, 17, 50 and 105
49 resulting in feeding the record mandrel
throiigh its entire travel in four minutes,
whereas by the direct drive through the
train 16, 52', 52, 50 and 49 it completes its
Avhole travel in 2 minutes. 110

In order to connect up the sliding man-
drel shaft 39 with the feed screw 48, I pro-
vide the folloAving structure : The shaft 39
at its end remote from the mandrel; that is,
adjacent to the motor mechanism; has 115
a SAviveled stud 55 projecting through a
longitudinal slot 56 in the carrier tube 38
and from this stud 55 extends the rod 57 par-
allel Avith said tube 38 and guided through
an aperture 58 in the plates 41 and 43, ex- 120
tending some distance into the holloAV of
the mandrel 40. Spaced apart and rigidly
secured to this rod 57 are the tAvo collars
59 and 60, betAveen Avhich is located the
frame 60' pivoted upon the rod 57. This 125
frame 60' is provided Avith an arm 61 car-
rying the Aveights 62 at its outer end and
the half nut 63 SAviveled to its loAver edge
for engagement Avith the feed scrcAv 48.
The arm 61 is provided with a rearAvard 130

i

1,077.973

^0

15

20

25

30

35

40

45

50

55

60

65

extension 64 for engagement with the cai--
rier tube 38 whenever the arm is thrown
back, as shoAvn in the dotted lines in Fig.
8, to disengage the half nut 63 from the
feed screw 48.

As a means for carrying the amplifying
liorn 65 and the sound box 66, Avhich may
be of any desired or preferred type, I mount
the standard 67 upon the base 3 said stand-
ard having U-shaped branch 68 to receive
the sound box while the horn is supported in
the upper end of the standard.

It is to be understood that the U-shaped
branch is hollow as shown in the dotted
lines, so as to afford a passage from the
sound box 66 to the horn 65.

As a means for protecting the motor from
dust, I may provide a sheet metal guard 69
to conform with the general contour of the
plates 6 and 7 arching the same over the
tube 38 as shown at 70, Fig. 4.

Upon the upper side of the guard 69 is
located the pivoted index pointer 71 (Fig.
2) said pointer liaving a bifurcated rear
extension which extends through the aper-
ture 72 and straddles the gear 50 so that
as the latter is shifted to either 2- or 4-
minute position the fact is indicated by the
pointer 71.

The spring box 10 contains a valuable im-
provement in construction. In phono-
graphs, it is common to mount a pair of
springs in tandem upon the main shaft;
i. c'., czie of the springs is connected by its
inner end to the winding shaft and its outer
end to the inside of the flange of the corre-
sponding half spring box; the other spring-
being oppositely directed is connected at its
outer end to the inside of the flange of its
half spring box and its inner end to a sleeve
mounted upon the winding shaft, said sleeve
having rigidly mounted upon it the main
drive gear such as 14. It has been the cus-
tom to fasten the half spring boxes together
by means of a series of straps overlapping
the adjacent flanges of the half boxes, either
riveting such straps or screwing them down
upon the flange. I find this is both unneces-
sary and inconvenient, and my improve-
ment consists in providing one of the half
boxes 75 with a strap 76 riveted down and
overlap]iing the flange of the other half box

77, as shown. The adjacent flange of the
other half box 77 is provided with a hook

78, which, when the two half boxes are
brought together, will engage the strap 76
and since the springs within the box are
ahva;r3 under tension, the hook 78 Avili
always remain in engagement with the strap
76. When it becomes necessary to separate
the half boxes 75 and 77 for the purpose of
repair or otherwise, it is only necessary to
remove the spring box and winding shaft
11, from the side plates 6 and 7, twist the
half boxes in the direction of the arrows

85

when the half box 75 with its sleeve and
the gear 14 will slide free from the shaft.
I have not illustrated the interior arrange-
ments of the springs as it is common with
spring motors where a plurality of springs ^q
in tandem are mounted upon a single wind-
ing shaft. My improvement of the spring
box 10 resides wholly in providing the reacl-
ily detachable means for connecting the half
boxes 75 and 77. In practice, I use two or 75
more of these hooks 76 and 78 upon the half
boxes.

It will be seen that by the construction
illustrated and described, I am able by the
simple insertion of the sliding shaft 51 with 30
its gear 50 meshing alternately with the
gears 52 and 54, both taking their motion
from the gear 16 of the main driving train,
to utilize in the same machine both the old
2-minute records and the new 4-minute rec-
ords; and that by the simple governing
disk 31', I am able to govern the speed of
the motor from " stop " up to the maximum
speed of which the machine is capable. The
simple disengaging and shifting device for 90
the record feed is also a great advantage in
quickly shifting the record for repetition of
a selection or any part thereof.

I claim:

1. In a phonograph, the combination of 95
a jnotor gear train, with a sliding record
driving shaft and a record feeding shaft,
means for detachably comiecting said shafts
together to cause the feeding shaft to feed the
driving shaft in the direction of its axis, a 100
stationary carrier tube in which said driv-
ing shaft is mounted to slide, and means
connected with said motor gear train for
changing the relative speed of said feeding
shaft with respect to said driving shaft. 105

2. In a phoiaograph, the combination with
a motor gear train, a record driving shaft
driven from said gear train, a stationary
carrier tube in which said driving shaft is
mounted to slide, a record feeding shaft ly- no
ing parallel to said driving shaft, a broad
faced gear upon said feeding shaft, a slid-
ing shaft having a gear thereon in con-
stant mesh with said broad faced gear, and
capable of alternately meshing with gears H5
in said train having different rates of ro-
tation.

3. In a phonograph, the combination of a
motor gear train, a record mandrel, a rec-
ord mandrel shaft upon which said mandrel 120
is mounted, a stationary carrier tube in
which said mandrel shaft is longitudinally
slidable, a pair of spaced supporting plates
secured upon the free end of said tube, a
gear located between said plates and splined 125
to said mandrel shaft, and driving connec-
tions between said gear and the motor gear
train.

4. In a phonograph, the combination of a
motor gear train, a longitudinally slidable 130

4

1,077,973

record mandrel shaft dri^'en from an inter-
mediate gear of said train, a stationary car-
rier tube in which said record mandrel shaft
may both rotate and slide, a screw feed
5 shaft capable of being driven from either
one of two gears in said train and a de-
tachable connection between said mandrel
shaft and said feed screw shaft whereby said
mandrel shaft may be longitudinally fed at
10 different relative rates of travel.

5. In a j)honograph, the combination of
a motor gear train with a record driving
shaft and a record feeding shaft, a station-
ary carrier tube in which said driving shaft

]5 is mounted to slide and which supports
one end of said feed shaft, with means for
relatively increasing the rotation of said
feeding shaft with respect to said driving
shaft, and means for governing the rate of

20 rotation of said record driving shaft.

6. In a phonograph, the combination of
a motor gear train with a sliding record
driving shaft and a record feeding shaft,
a stationary carrier tube in which said

25 driving shaft is mounted to slide and which
supports one end of said feeding shaft,
means for cletachably connecting said shafts
together to caxxse the feeding shaft to feed
the driving shaft in the direction of its

20 axis, and means connected with said motor
gear train for changing the relative speed
of said feeding shaft v»'ith respect to said
driving shaft, and means for governing the
rate of rotation of said record driving shaft.

''5 7. In a phonograph, the combination with
a motor gear train, a record driving shaft
driven from said gear train, a record feed-
ing shaft lying parallel to said driving
shaft, a stationary carrier tube in which

^^ said clrivino- shaft is mounted to slide and

which supports one end of said feeding
shaft, a broad faced gear upon said feed-
ing shaft, a sliding shaft having a gear
thereon in constant mesh with said broad
faced gear and capable of alternately mesh- 45
ing with gears in said train having differ-
ent rates of rotation, and means for gov-
erning the rate of rotation of said record
driving shaft.

8. In a phonograph, the combination of 50
a motor gear train, a record mandrel, a
record mandrel shaft upon which said man-
drel is mounted, a stationary carrier tube

in which said mandrel shaft is longitudi-
nally slidable, a pair of spaced supporting 55
plates secured upon the free end of said
tube, a gear located between said plates and
sjolined to said mandrel shaft and driving-
connections between said gear and the mo-
tor gear train, and means for governing the CO
rate of rotation of said record mandrel shaft.

9. In a phonograph, the combination of
a motor gear train, a stationary carrier
tube, a record mandrel shaft longitudinally
slidable in said tube and driven from an in- 65
termediate gear of said train, a screw feed
shaft capable of being driven from either
one of tAvo gears in said train and a de-
tachable connection between said mandrel
shaft and said feed screw shaft whereby 70
said mandrel shaft may be longitudinally
fed at different relative rates of travel, and
means for governing the rate of rotation

of said record mandrel shaft.

This specification signed and witnessed 75
this 16th day of Nov. 1910.

PLINY CATUCCI.
Witnesses :

Louis M. Sanders,
M. L. Sanders.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

Washington, D. C."

T. A. EDISON.

PHONOGRAPHIC RECORDING OR REPRODUCING APPARATUS.
APPLICATION PILED MAE. 16, 1907,

1,078,264.

Patented Nov. 11, 1913.

2 SHEETS-SHEET 1.

J^.J

.j^.Z

mz^

PLANOORAPH CO.. WAShlNOTOhJ. U. C.

T. A. EDISON.

PHONOGRAPHIC RECORDING OR REPRODUCING APPARATOS.

APPLICATION PILED MAR. 16, 1907.

1 078 264. Patented Nov. 11, 1913.

^^.^

2 SHEETS-SHEET 2.

J^^^

^^^.^

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFIC;

THOMAS A. EDISON, OF LLEWELLYN PARK, ORANGE, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR TO NEW
JERSEY PATENT COMPANY, OF WEST ORANGE, NEW JERSEY, A CORPORATION OF
NEW JERSEY.

PHONOGRAPHIC RECORDING OR REPRODUCING APPARATUS.

1,078,264.

Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Nov. 11, 1913.

Application filed March 16, 190?. Serial No. 362,597.

To all whovh it may concern :

Be it known that I, Thojias Alva Edison,
a citizen of the United States, and a resident
of Llewellyn Park, Orange, in the county of
5 Essex and State of New Jersey, have invent-
ed certain new and useful Improvements in
Phonographic Becording or Eeproducing
Apparatus, of which the following is a de-
scription.

10 My invention relates to improvements in
recoi'ding or reproducing apparatus for
phonographs or other talking machines, but
the improvements are particularly directed
to reproducing apparatus.

15 With phonographic reproducing appara-
tus as now made, the diaphragm which is
rigidly clamped at its periphery, comprises
a single disk corrugated so as to be as stiff
as ])ossible, or a series of disks of gradually

20 reduced diameters. With such a diaphragm
the limit of amplitude is comparatively
slight, since in vibrating to one side or the
other of the medial line the diaphragm is
not only flexed but it undergoes stretching

25 and contraction as it recedes from or ap-
proaches the medial line. Fvu'thermore, the
resistance of the diaj^hragm to the vibrating
effect enormously increases as the dia-
phragm is distorted out of its normal plane.

30 For these reasons any attempts to increase
the loudness of phonographic reproduction
by increasing the amplitude have been un-
successful, for the reason that to materially
increase the amplitude of vibration would

35 impose an enormous increase in the wear of
the record surface. Furthermore, I find
that even under existing conditions, "vyhere
floating weights are used that are as heavy
as can be employed without imposing objec-

40 tionable wear ovi. the record, the weight
itself is more or less responsive to the vi-
brations and particularly vibrations repre-
sentative of tones of low pitch, so that th$
weight vibrates under the effect of such

45 tones and correspondingly detracts from the
reproduction obtained from the diaphi-agm
itself. Consequently phonograi^hic repro-
ductions, particularly of a piano, are char-
acterized by a slurring of the bass notes.

50 The object of my invention is to provide
an iraproved i)honographic apparatus, par-
ticularly for reproducing p.U(rposes, in which
the means for setting up vibrations in a

static column of air is susceptible of vibra-
tions of relatively enormous amplitude and 55
wherein the power necessary to effect such
vibrations remains practically constant
throughout the entire movement.

A fiu'ther object is to provide a recording
or reproducing apparatus in Avhich a com- CO
pensating weight may be used of great mass,
so as to be unresponsive to any of the vi-
brations of the record but maintaining the
stylus in correct relation to the surface re-
gardless of'mechanical variations or ecceii- 65
tricities therein, and at the same time the
said weight, notwithstanding its great mass,
will not impose any undue wear on the wax-
like material.

To this end the invention consists, in a 70
broad sense, of employing as a means for
setting up vibrations in a static column of
air a vibrating piston instead of a dia-
phragm, the piston fitting very closely but
not touching the bore of the casing in which 75
it o}Tserates, connected to the stylus so that
the two will move in unison, and combined
with suitable elastic tension devices for
maintaining the stylus in proper engage-
ment with tlie recording surface or the rec- 80
ord as the case may be. Such a vibrating
piston is made as light as possible so as to
reduce momentum and inertia to a mini-
mum, and it is therefore preferably formed
of thin sheet almninum or magnesium (pref- 85
erably the latter) having a depending flange,
with its body formed with concentric corru-
gations and preferably provided with radial
ribs, so as to be as stiff as possible. With
these devices I contemplate using a compen- 90
sating weight of greater mass than is cus-
tomary, which is supported on the record
itself preferably by an anti-friction roller,
and I pivot the stylus lever to this weight in
such position that the stylus will be in line 95
with that part of the weight that bears on
the record, such as the roller referred to, .so
that the desired relation of the stylus and
the weight will be always maintained.

In order that the invention may be bet- lOO
ter understood, attention is directed to the
accompanying drawing forming part of this
si">eci$cation, and in which —

Figui-e 1 is a sectional view of a repro-
ducing apparatus embodying my present im- 105
];M'ovements in their preferi'ed foi^m, and

8

1,078,264

showing the use of a compensating weight; i
Fig. 2 is a bottom view of the same; Fig.
3 is an enlarged detail view showing the
compensating weight and the connection
6 with the stylus lever; Fig. 4 is an enlarged
detail view showing the adjustment for the
tension mechanism; Fig. 5 is a cross sec-
tional view similar to Fig. 1, showing the
apparatus without the compensating weight,

10 as it may. be used if the records are sufR-

ciently true; Fig. 6 is an enlarged view

showing the construction of diaphragm, and

Fig. 7 is a bottom view of the diaphragm.

In all of the above views corresponding

15 parts are represented by the same reference
numerals.

The casing 1 is made preferably of alumi-
num and is supported in any suitable way
with respect to, and is fed longitudinally of,

20 the record 2. The casing 1 is formed with
a bore 3, turned very true and from which
leads the air passage 4, connected to the
usual horn. Working closely within the
bore 3, is a piston 5 formed with a depend-

25 ing flange 6 and preferably also a horizontal
rim 7, and the main portion of said piston
is formed with concentric corrugations as
shown, and preferably with radial ribs 8,
so as to be as stiff as possible. Preferably

30 the piston is made of thin sheet aluminum
or magnesium, while the ribs 8, three or
four in number, are made of the same metal
secured in place by means of shellac or other
appropriate cement. The fit of the piston 5

35 within the bore 3 is very close, say within
.0005 of an inch, so that while the piston is
free to move it does not touch the walls of
the casing.

Secured to the center of the piston 5 is

40 an aluminum or magnesium tube 9, working
in a bearing in the casing 1, as shown and
guided by a bearing in the bridge piece 10
secured to the under side of the casing.
Preferably the holes for the screws by which

45 the bridge 10 is held in place, are larger
than the screws so that after the piston has
been properly centered the bridge may be
secured in place. The lower end of the
tube 9 is formed with a small head 11 to

50 which is secured the upper end of a very
fine steel spring 12, connected, as shown, to
the end of the stylus lever 13. Such a
spring is preferable, but instead thereof an
extremely fine chain may be used, such as

55 is employed in the manufacture of cer-
tain Swiss watches. The outer end of the
stylus lever 13 is curved so that as the lever
moves the piston will be actuated in a
straight line and will not become jammed in

60 its bore. The stylus 14 is connected at the
other end of the stylus lever 13, and the
fulcrum of the stylus lever is preferably
nearer the stylus so that the movement of
the stylus will be amplified at the piston and

65 increased amplitude will thereby be secured.

The stylus lever is preferably formed of
metallic aluminum. At its upper end the
tube 9 is provided with a small head 15
through which extends a pin with which a
spring 16 is connected. The spring 16 is
preferably a small elastic band whose upper
end is connected to the head 17 on an adjust-
ing rod 18. The adjusting rod passes
through the yoke 19 and is preferably
square so as not to turn therein. Nuts 20 __
effect the adjustment of the rod 18. It will
be understood of course that instead of a
rubber spring, any other kind of a spring
may be employed. The spring 16 supports
the piston 6 and imposes an upward tension „-
on the stylus lever 13 to keep the stylus
always in close engagement with the record
surface, and at the same time maintains a
stress on the connections between the piston
and the stylus lever so as to prevent lost gg
motion. Since the piston is free to occupy
any position within the bore 3, it will, by
means of the spring 16, be automatically
brought to the desired medial point on each
side of which it will be vibrated by the vi- qq
brations of the stylus and to an amplified
extent depending obviously upon the le-
verage.

\Yhen the records are sufficiently true for
the purpose and are substantially concentric gg
throughout, the stylus lever 13 as shown in
Fig. 5, may be pivoted on an arm 21, de-
pending from the casing 1, the tension
mechanism always keeping the stylus in en-
gagement with the record, notwithstanding iqq
small variations in the record, but under
ordinary commercial conditions a compen-
sating weight is desirable. This weight 22
is pivoted from an arm 23 depending from
the casing 1 with sufficient lost motion to iqs
permit the stylus to automatically track the
record, and the weight is formed with de-
pending lugs 24 between which the stylus
lever is pivoted. By reason of the fact that
the vibrating piston is susceptible of rela- ixo
tively gi'eat movement within the casing, so
as to occupy a desired medial position in
which it may be drawn by the spring 16, it
is no longer necessary with the improved de-
vice to float the compensating weight and 115
to practically sustain it from the stylus
itself. On the contrary the weight may
rest directly on the record, being supported
by an anti-friction roller 25 arrangecl in line
with the stylus and of sufficient width of 120
face to bridge over a number of the record
grooves, so that no wear will be imposed on
the record, nor will the weight be affected
by the minute vibrations which characterize
the record itself. At the same time any 125
mechanical eccentricities or variations in the
i-ecord as a whole, will cause the compensat-
ing weight to rise and fall carrying the ful-
crum of the stylus lever with the same, and
permitting the stylus to be always main- iso

1,078,264

10

tained in proper engagement with the record
surface, notwithstanding very considerable
variations in the record.

In the present application I shall not spe-
cifically claim the form of device shown in
Fig. 5, as I propose, in a separate applica-
tion, Serial IS'o. 362,596, filed concurrently
herewith, to claim that construction specifi-
cally. Certain of the claims of this case,
however, which may not be limited to the
compensating weight, Avill necessarily in-
clude the form of device shoAvn in Fig. 5.

I do not claim herein broadly the sugges-
tion of a diaphragm unsupported at its edge

15 or, in other words, a vibrating piston oper-
ating to set up vibrations in a static column
of air, because that construction is broadly
disclosed and claimed in my Patent No.
500,281 of June 27, 1893. With my prior

20 patent, hoo-ever, the stylus was maintained
in engagement with the record solely by the
weight of tlie piston and the part-s connected
therewith, and if such piston and connected
parts were made light enough to be readily

25 responsive to the sound vibrations, tlie
proper engagement would not be maintained
between the stylus and the record; while if
made heavy enough to hold the stylus in en-
gagement with the record, the inertia would

30 be so great as to make the device but slightly
responsive to the variations of the record.
For a successful apparatus some independ-
ent elastic tension device is necessary to
maintain the stylus in proper engagement

35 with the record.

Having now described my invention, what
I claim as new therein and desire to secure
by Letters Patent, is as follows:

1. A phonographic recording or reproduc-
40 ing apparatus emplojdng in combination a

casing, a vibrating piston freely mounted in
said casing and adapted to impart sound vi-
brations to the static column of air therein, a
stylus lever connected at one end to said pis-

45 ton, a stylus at the other end of the lever,
and a tension device connected with the pis-
ton for imposing an elastic pressure between
the stylus and the record or recording sur-
face, and for maintaining the connections

50 between the piston and stylus lever under
tension, substantially as and for the purposes
set forth.

2. A phonographic recording or reproduc-
ing apparatus employing in combination a

55 casing, a vibrating piston freely mounted
therein, a stylus lever mounted below the
casing, a connection between the piston and
one end of the stylus lever, a stylus at the
other end of the stylus lever and a tension

60 device above the piston for imposing an up-
wardly acting elastic tension thereon, sub-
stantially as and for the purposes set forth.

3. A plionographic recording or repro-
ducing apparatus employing in combination

65 a casing, a vibrating piston freely mount-

ed therein, a stylus lever mounted below
the casing, a connection between the piston
and one end of the stylus lever, a stylus
at the other end of the stylus lever, a tension
device above the piston for imposing an up- ^q
wardly acting elastic tension thereon, and
means for adjusting the tension device, sub-
stantially as and for the purposes set forth.

4. In a phonographic recording or repro-
ducing apparatus, the combination of a cas- 73
ing, a vibrating piston freely mounted there-
in, a stjdus lever below the casing, a metal
spring connecting the piston with the stylus
le^'er and a tension device above the piston
for exerting an upwardly acting elastic gg
tension thereon, substantially as and for the
purposes set forth.

5. In a phonographic recording or repro-
ducing device, the combination with a cas-
ing, a vibrating piston freely mounted there- gg
in, an elastic tension device above the pis-
ton for exerting upward stress thereon, a
stylus lever having a curved end mounted
below the casing and a connection between
the curved end of the stylus lever and the g^j
piston, substantially as and for the pur-
poses set forth.

6. In a phonographic recording or repro-
ducing ai^paratus, the combination with a
casing, a vibrating piston freely mounted 95
therein and adapted to impart sound vibra-
tions to the static column of air in said cas-
ing, a compensating weight below the cas-
ing, a stylus lever pivoted to the compen-
sating weight, connections between the stylus 100
lever and the piston and means for guiding
the movement of said piston in a straight
line parallel to the bore of the casing in
which it is mounted, and an elastic tension
device for exerting elastic pressure between 105
the stylus and the record or recording sur-
face, substantially'' as and for the purposes

set forth.

7. In a phonographic recording or repro-
ducing aj)paratus, the combination of a no
casing, a vibrating piston freely mounted
therein, a stylus lever below the casing, a
stylus mounted on said lever on one side of
the fulcrum thereof, connections from said
piston to said lever on the other side of the 115
fulcrum, including rigid means and flexible
means, and means for guiding the rigid
means to prevent movement of said piston
other than in a straight line parallel to the
bore of the casing in which it is mounted, 120
substantially as set forth.

8. In a phonographic recording or repro-
ducing device, the combination of a cas-
ing, a vibrating piston freely mounted in
said casing and adapted to impart sound vi- 125
brations to the static column of air in said
casing, a compensating weight pivoted be-
low the casing and arranged to bear upon

the record or recording surface, a stylus
lever pivoted to the compensating weight, 130

1,078,264

connections between the stylus lever and
said piston, and a tension device for impos-
ing an elastic pressure of the stylus on the
record or recording surface, substantially
5 as and for the purposes set forth.

9. In a phonographic recording or repro-
ducing device, the combination of a cas-
ing, a vibrating body, a compensating
weight pivoted beloAv the casing and ar-

10 ranged to bear upon the record or recording
surface, said weight being free to move
with respect to said casing when bearing
upon the record or recording surface, a
stylus lever pivoted to the compensating

15 weight, connections between the stylus lever
and said body, said connections being main-
tained under stress, and a stylus mounted on
the lever and in line with the part of the
compensating weight in engagement with

20 the record or recording surface, substan-
tially as and for the purposes set forth.

10. In a phonographic recording or re-
producing device, the combination of a cas-
ing, a vibrating piston freely mounted in

26 said casing, a compensating weight piv-
oted below the casing and arranged to bear
upon the record or recording surface, a
stylus lever pivoted to the compensating
weight, connections between the stylus lever

30 and said piston, a stylus mounted on the
lever and in line with the part of the com-
pensating weight in engagement with the
record or recording surface, and a tension

device for imposing an elastic pressure of
the stjdus on the record or recording sur-
face, substantially as and for the purposes
set forth.

11. As a new article of manufacture, a
vibrating piston for phonographic record-
ing or reproducing apparatus, made of sheet
metal with a depending peripheral flange
having a rim at the bottom thereof at right
angles to the flange and a corrugated main
portion, substantially as and for the pur-
poses set forth.

12. As a new article of manufacture, a
vibrating piston for phonographic record-
ing or reproducing apparatus, made of sheet
metal having a depending peripheral flange
having a rim at the bottom thereof at right
angles to the flange and radial ribs, substan-
tially as and for the purposes set forth.

13. As a new article of manufacture, a
vibrating piston for phonographic record-
ing or reproducing aj^paratus, made of sheet
metal with a depending peripheral flange
having a rim at the bottom thereof at right
angles to the flange and a corrugated main
portion and provided with radial ribs, sub-
stantially as and for the purposes set foi-th.

This specification signed and witnessed
this 25th day of February 1907.

THOS. A. EDISON.
Witnesses :

Frank L. Dyer,
Frank D. Lewis.

35

40

45

50

55

60

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

Washington, D. C."

1

1,078,265.

T. A. EDISON.

PROCESS OF MAKING PHONOGRAPH RECORDS.
APPLICATION FILED OOT. 14, 1908.

PatentedNov.il, 1913.

COLUMBIA PLANOOBAPH CO., WASHINOTON, U. C.

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

THOMAS A. EDISON, OF LLEWELLYN PARK, ORANGE, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR TO NEW
JERSEY PATENT COMPANY, OF WEST ORANGE, NEW JERSEY, A CORPORATION OF
NEW JERSEY.

PROCESS OF MAKING PHONOGRAPH-RECORDS.

1,0T8,365.

Specification of Letters Patent. Patented NoV. 11, 1913.

Application filed October 14, 1908. Serial No. 457,593.

To all whom it may concern :

Be it known that I, Thomas Alva Edison,
a citizen of tlie United States, and a resident
of Llewellyii Park, Orange, in the county of
5 Essex ami State of New Jersey, have in-
vented certain new and useful Improve-
ments in Processes of Making Plionograph-
Kecords, of which the following is a de-
scription.

10 The wax-like compositions now in common
use for making phonograph records, such,
for example, as that described in Patent
No. 782,375, granted to Jonas W. Ayls-
worth, have qualities which make them

15 specially adaj^ted for this purpose. Such
materials can be readily molded, give an ac-
curate copy of the surface of the mold or
matrix, and after being molded can be
reamed out and trimmed off and otherwise

20 worked with great facility. Phonograph
records can be made from these materials at
low cost, with simple machinery and by very
cheap labor. It is a fact, however, that rec-
ords made froni these wax-like compositions

25 and made as is now the common j^ractice,
with substantially one hundred record
grooves to the inch, after being subjected to
a large number of reproductions on the
phonograph, show signs of wear and the

30 character of the reproduction obtained
therefrom is not so good as at first. Obvi-
ously, such records would be more rapidly
worn if a narrower record groove and a re-
producing stylus of correspondingly de-

35 creased size are made use of. As it is de-
sirable to increase the amount of record on
the surface, it is necessary that such surface
should be hardened. It is desirable, there-
fore, that a record be made which will have

40 a harder and tougher wearing surface and
which will at the same time retain the good
mold able and workable qualities of the rec-
ords made from the wax-like compositions
now used.

45 The object of m}^ invention is to produce
a record of the sort just described, from wax
or wax-like composition, or other easily
molded material, and having a hardened
wearing surface.

50 In the practice of my invention I pref-
erably take a duplicate or original phono-
graph record, which has been made in any
of the usual ways from the usual wax-like
composition, and immerse it in a solution of

55 nitrated cotton in an}^ of the ordinary sol-

vents used for this purpose, as for example,
acetate of amyi, which is commonly made
use of for providing a liquid solution from
which films are made for jjhotographic use.
I may, if desired, add a small percentage of 60
camjihor to the nitrated cotton, thus making
a celluloid collodion solution, but this ma^'^
be dispensed with.

I place the record upon a dipping man-
drel having adjustable extension ends at 65
each end of the record. It is then immersed
in the solution Avhile held vertically; it is
then withdrawn and subjected to a gentle
breeze from a fan — to slightly affect or
harden the surface; it is then immersed a 70
second time and subjected to the air. If the
solution is rather thick, two such dips will
give a sufficient thickness of film over the
record when the latter is dried. Sometimes
it is best to make the solution thinner when 75
three or more dips will be necessary. After
the dips, the mandrel is transferi-ed to a ma-
chine which rotates it in a horizontal posi-
tion until nearly free from solvent, when it
ma}^ be taken off the mandrel and set aside 80
until the whole of the solvent has evapor-
ated, leaving a very hard tough film on the
surface of the record.

It is a remarkable fact, and entirely un-
expected, that although the average depth 85
of the indentations on a record is only half
of one thousandth of an inch and the great-
est depth one thousandth of an inch, yet, if
the thickness of the film of the nitro-cellu-
lose when dry is three thousandths of an 90
inch, a perfect replica of the record under-
neath is produced on the surface of the cel-
hilose above, even to the finest detail, and
what is more strange is that the depth of the
wave is so little affected that the loss in the 95
volume of sound is scarcely noticeable.

Very deep records can be made and the re-
l)roducing balls can be ])ressed with sufficient
force against the cellulose as to cause it to
folloAv the record without injury to it, which lOO
would be impossible if the ball was forced
against the record surface below. Thus, the
^'olume and quality of the sound can be in-
creased, and the sound record can be used
indefinitely without noticeable deteriora- 105
tion.

Other film producing liquids may be used
in place of the nitro-cellulose and its sol-
vents, such as acetyl-cellulose in acetic acid.
If the acetyl-celliilose is used in its usual no

^

1,078,265

solvent — chloroform — the solvent will gen-
erally attack wax, and therefore the origi-
nal record should be made of material which
is not appreciably dissolved by the solvent
5 of the film material. Water soluble film
producing substances can be used, such as
silicate of soda, but in this case the surface
of the record should be capable of beipg
wet evenly, as for instance, by immersing

10 the wax record in weak alcohol and rapidly
drying. This destroys the shiny appearance
of the surface of the record without hurting
the record itself. Upon immersion in sili-
cate of soda, it will adhere evenly, and upon

15 drying will give a hard film. This can be
made harder by immersion in chlorid of cal-
cium to form by double decomposition, cal-
cium silicate. The silicate film is not so de-
sirable as the cellulose film, not having

20 toughness to withstand hard usage, although
very desirable in view of the cheapness of
the material.

The adhesion of the film to the record is
very great as it is shrunk under great ten-

25 sion, and notwithstanding long use of the
reproducing ball, it persists in i^s adhesion
to the contour of the sound record. The
thickness of the film may be governed by
regulating the strength of the solution, a

30 very dilute solution producing a thin film,
as will be understood, and a stronger solu-
tion a thicker film. The film must ob-
vipuslj^ not be thick enough to interfere
with the volume of sound produced by the

^^ record.

It is evident that for cheapening the film,
it may be adulterated with various cheaper
materials soluble in the solvent and which
do not diminish beyond the desirable point.
Attention is hereby directed to the ac-
companying drawing forming part of this

40

specification and illustrating diagrammati-
cally the preferred steps of the process de-
scribed and claimed.

Having now described my invention, 45
what I claim is:

1. The process of imparting a surface
hardening to a phonograph record of wax-
like material having vertical sound undu-
lations on the outer surface thereof, which 50
consists in immersing the record in a solu-
tion of organic material, withdrawing the
same from the solution and partially evap-
orating the solvent therefrom, then again
immersing the same in said solution, with- 55
drawing the same, and completely evaporat-
ing the solvent therefrom to produce on the
record surface thereof a film containing on
its outer surface a replica of the record un-
derneath, substantially as set forth. 60

2. The process of imparting a surface
hardening to a phonograph record of wax-
like material having vertical sound undula-
tions on the outer surface thereof, which
consists in immersing the record in a solu- 65
tion of organic material, withdrawing the
same from the solution and partially evapo-
rating the solvent therefrom, then again
immersing the same in said solution, with-
drawing the same, and rotating the same to 70
completely evaporate the solvent therefrom
and to produce on the record surface there-
of a film containing on its outer surface a
replica of the record underneath, substan-
tially as set forth. 75

This specification signed and witnessed
this 10th day of October 1908.

THOS. A. EDISOK.

Witnesses :

Delos Holden,
Frank D. Lewis.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

Washington, D. C."

T. A. EDISON.

SOUND BOX,

APPLICATION PILED APE. 5, 1911.

1,078,266.

PatentedNov.il, 1913.

1

-^^'^

Mf-^

W/Z/^'Z

w,

J(? J7 ^

7^ //

J^^'^

JO

J^ 71

^

J^.^

W))>>>W^f?g

Y.-XT/fr-r-^p-m:

7^

^ j^

COLUMBIA PLANOGRAPH CO.. WASHINGTON, D. C.

imiTED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

THOMAS A. EDISOJSr, OF LLEWELLYN" PARK, WEST OKANGE, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR
TO NEW JERSEY PATENT COMPANY, OF WEST ORANGE, NEW JERSEY, A CORPORA-
TION OF NEW JERSEY.

SOUND-BOX.

1,078,266.

Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Nov. 11, 1913.

Application filed April 5, 1911. Serial No. 619,012.

To all whom it may concern :

Be it known that I, Tho^ias A. Edison, a
citizen of the United States, and a resident
of Llewellyn Park, West Orange, in the
5 county of Essex and State of New Jersey,
have invented certain new and useful Im-
provements in Sound-Boxes, of which the
following is a specification.
]My invention relates to sound boxes par-

10 ticularly of the type adapted for use in con-
nection with disk records having vertically
undulating grooves, although its use is not
limited to that type, as it may be applied to'
lateral cut records.

15 In order to hold the reproducing stylus
into firm engagement with the record, it has
heretofore been customary to weight the
casing or support for the diaphragm. I
have found that by weighting the dia-

20 phragm and distributing the weight uni-
formly over the same, a better quality of re-
production is obtained than when all the
weight comes to the diaphragm through the
diaphragm support, the strain, in the latter

25 case, being substantially all transmitted to
the diaphragm over a small area above the
reproducing stylus, whereas with my im-
proved construction, a large part of the
strain is distributed uniformly over substan-

30 tially the whole diaphragm.

The principal object of my invention is to
provide an improved diaphi'agm weighted
as described above.
In a general way, my invention resembles

35 that disclosed in Letters Patent of the
United States ISTo. 676,22.5, granted to me on
June 11, 1901, wherein I describe a recorder
provided with a movable weight having in
its lower end a rubber insert which bears

^^ upon the center of the diaphragm to coun-
teract the upward stress exerted upon the
diaphragm by the engagement of the cut-
ting or engraving tool with the record ma-
terial. My present invention, however, re-

^^ fers more x^articularly to reproducers and
is furthermore an improvement on that de-
scribed in the above named patent in that I
distribute the strain over the diaphragm by
weighting the same at a plurality of points

^^ uniformly distributed over the surface
thereof.

Another object of my invention is to pro-
vide a diaphragm rigidly secured to its sup-
port and having a recess for permitting flex-

^^ mg adjacent the periphery of the dia^

phragm so as to permit a free bodily move-
ment of the latter.

Other objects of niy invention will appear
more fully in the following specification and
appended claims. 60

In order that my invention may be more
fully understood, attention is directed to the
accompanying drawing forming a part of
this specification and in which —

Figure 1 is a central vertical section taken 65
on the line 1 — 1 of Fig. 2 of a reproducer
provided with a diaphragm embodying my
invention. Fig. 2 is a bottom j-ylan view
thereof; Fig. 3 is a cross section of a dia-
phragm illu.strating my preferred means of 70
weighing the same; and Figs. 4 and 5 are
similar views of modifications thereof.

In all the views, like parts are designated
by the same refei-ence numerals.

Eef erring to the drawing, the body of the 75
reproducer is formed in any suitable way
as by the flat metallic conical member 1
having secured thereto a hollow neck 2, and
by the flanged annulus 3 and the threaded
ring 4 screwed into the annulus 3 to position ^^
and hold the members as shown.

As shown in Fig. 1, the neck 2 is preferably
secured by a universal joint 2' to the sound
conveying arm of the talking machine; so
that the reproducer has a free up and down ^^
as well as lateral motion and is therefore
capable of readily adjusting itself to the
irregularities of the record. The diaphragm
5 is preferably secured between the horizon-
tal annular flange 6 on the member 3 and the ^^
lower surface of the member 1 and is pref-
erably made of cardboard or other yielding
material ; but my invention is not limited to
a diaphragm formed of such materials. The
stylus arm 8 which is preferably made of ^^
aluminium or any other suitable light mate-
rial is secured to the diaphragm by shellac
or any other suitable cement adjacent the
periphery of the diaphragm, and also sub-
stantially at the center thereof, and sup- ^^^
ports at its inner end a reproducing stylus 9.

In order to weight the diaphragm, I pref-
erably provide the same with a plurality of
symmetrically arranged pockets or recesses
10 in each of which is loosely supported a
lead pellet or other suitable weighting
means 11.

As shown in Fig. 2, the centers of the
pockets or recesses are located in the cit-
cumferences of two coneentric circkeiij ti ^^^

£K

1,078,360

the weights 11 were tightly held in the
pockets 10, the diaphragm would be rigid
and would not vibrate freely ; and I, there-
fore, preferably make the said weights ap-
e preciably smaller than the pockets therefor.
In the modification shown in Fig. 3, 1
have shown the pockets open at the top ; but
as this structure would permit the weight.^
to become displaced if the diaphragm were

20 violently jarred or if it were inverted, as for
exami^le, during shipping, my invention
contemplates the use of a cover 13 of a
cloth, tissue paj)er or other suitable material
for the pockets as is shown in Figs. 4" and 5.

j5 In order to permit a free vibration of the
diaj)hragm as a whole, I provide the same
adjacent its periphery where the flexing
takes place with a circumferential groove or
recess 12, all of the Aveights 11 being located

20 within the space bounded by this groove or
recess. By the provision of this groove or
recess, I am able to employ a stable con-
trollable connection such as that described
above to secure the diaphragm in place and

25 thereby to eliminate the use of gaskets of
rubber or other constantly changing yield-
ing material.

In Fig. 5, I have shown a modification of
my invention as applied to a diaphragm of

30 a hard material as, for example, celluloid.
When such a hard material is used, the
movement of the weights 11 in the pockets
10 prevents proper movement of the dia-
phragm and causes objectionable foreign

35 noises unless some means for absorbing the
latter is provided. Such a means may con-
sist of a lining of cork or other suitable
yielding material for the bottom of the
pockets, as shown at 14 in Fig. 5. Theoreti-

4(1 cally, the weights should stand still when the
diaphragm is vibrating, the entire moAe-
ment being made within the limits of elas-
ticity of the paper or cork; so that the
weights, although having slight movement,

45 do not lose contact Avith the j)aper or cork
to produce a knock resulting in a sound.

While I have shown several preferred em-
bodiments of my inA'ention, I do not wish to
be understood as limiting myself to the samo

50 as my invention may obviously be embodied
in numerous other forms and may be modi-
fied in many ways Avithout departing from
the spirit thereof.

What I claim as neAv and desire to secure

56 'by Letters Patent of the United States is as
follows :

1. A diaphragm for sound boxes having
a plurality of weights uniformly distributed
over the same and loosely supported there-

60 by, substantially as described.

2. A diaphragm for sound boxes j)rovided
Avith a phu'ality of independent Aveighting
pellets uniformly distributed over the same,
substantially as described.

65 3. A diaphragm for sound boxes, having

a plurality of pockets distributed over the
same, and a weight supported in each pocket,
substantiallj^ as described.

4. A diaphragm for sound boxes, having

a plurality of pockets distributed over the 70
same, and a Aveight loosely supported in each
pocket, substantially as described.

5. A diaphragm for sound boxes, having
a plurality of open pockets distributed over
the same, a weight loosely supported in each 75
pocket, and means for covering the pockets,
substantially as described.

6. A diaphragm for sound boxes haAdng
a plurality of pockets each proAdded at its
bottom Avith a lining of yielding material, 80
and a weight loosely supported in each
pocket, substantially as described.

7. A diaphragm for sound boxes having
a plurality of pockets each provided at its
bottom Avith a lining of yielding material, 85
a weight loosely supported in each pocket,
and a covering for the pockets, substantial!}'

as described.

8. A diaphragm for sound boxes having

a plurality of pockets each provided at its 90
bottom Avith a lining of yielding ma-
terial, a weight loosely supported in each
pocket, and a laj'^er of fabric covering the
pockets for preventing displacement of the
Aveights, substantially as described. 95

9. A diaphragm for sound boxes having
an annular portion of reduced cross section
concentric Avith and adjacent to its periph-
ery and proA'ided with a plurality of inde-
pendent weighting pellets uniformly dis- 100
tributed oA'er the same within said annular
portion, substantially as described.

10. A diaphragm for sound boxes having
an annuar portion of reduced cross section
concentric with and adjacent to its peripih- 105
ery and provided with a plurality of weights
uniformly distributed over the same within
said annular portion, said weights being-
unattached to said diaphragm, substantially

as described. HO

11. In a sound box, the combination of a
support, and a diaphragm rigidly secured
thereto at its periphery, the said diaphragm
having an annular portion of reduced cross
section concentric with and adjacent to its H^
periphery and being proAdded with a plu-
rality of weights uniformly distributed over
the same Avithin said annular portion, said
Aveights being unattached to said diaphragm,
substantially as described. 120

12. In a sound box, the combination of a
support, and a diaphragm rigidly secured
thereto at its periphery, the said diaphragm
haAang an annular portion of reduced cross
section concentric thereAvith and being pro- 125
vided with a plurality of independent
Aveighting pellets uniformly distributed over
the same, substantially as described.

13. A diaphragm for sound boxes having a
portion formed of hard material and other ^^^

1,078,266

10

15

portions formed of yielding material and
a plurality of weights loosely supported by
said yielding material, substantially as de-
scribed.

14. A diaphragm for sound boxes having
portions formed of yielding material and a
plurality of weights loosely supported by
said yielding material, substantially as de-
scribed.

15. A diaphragm for sound boxes having
an annular portion of reduced cross section
and provided with weighting means located
entirely within and distributed over the
space bounded by said annular portion, sub-
stantiall}^ as described.

16. A diaphragm for sound boxes having
an annular portion of reduced cross section
and provided with a plurality of weights

loosely supported entirely within the space
bounded by said annular portion, substan- 20
tially as described.

17. In a sound box, the combination of a
support and a diaphragm rigidly secured
thereto at its periphery, said diaphragm
having an annular portion of reduced cross
section concentric with its periphery and
provided with weighting means located en-
tirely within and distributed over the space
bounded by said annular portion, substan-
tially as described.

This specification signed and witnessed
this 3rd day of April, 1911.

THOS. A. EDISON.

Witnesses :

Frederick Bachmann,
Anna E. Klehm.

25

30

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

Washington, D. C."

M. A. POSSONS.

AUTOMATIC STOP MECHANISM FOR GRAMOPHONES.

APPLICATION FILED OCT. 22, 1909.

1,078,460.

Patented Nov. 11, 1913.

T^^.X

ISSVVVVS-^-

'' ■" iiii'lj^lllim BSSS^3SES2Si

JfHv ^

I^/^.^

/?sc0ei?

Tsmm

3 Jj '^^

IV L^. S.

JV-Lff.^1.

/

jxa^^

eltvo«44/to*

O-^l^'-O-trv-i,.^ ,

ClS^^cxXCCi^rvv/^

^ttovtw/^

COUJMBM PtJlNOdBAPH CO., WASMINcrtttN, D. C.

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

MlNARD ARTHUR POSSONS, OF CLEVELAND, OHIO.
AUTOMATIC STOP MECHANISM FOR GRAMOPHONES.

1,078,460.

Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Nov. 11, 1913.

Application filed October 22, 1909. Serial No. 524,021.

To all whom it may concern :

Be it loio^n that I, Minard A. Possons,
a citizen of the United States^ residing at
Cleveland, in the county of Cuj^ahoga and
5 State of Ohio, have invented certain new
and useful Improvements in Automatic
Stop JNIechanism for Gramophones, of which
the following is a specification, reference
being had therein to the accompanying

10 drawing.

My invention relates to improvements in

automatic stop mechanism for gramophones.

The object of my invention is to proA^de

means for automatically lifting the needle

18 from the record and stopping the machine
when the record has been played and per-
tains particularly to an attachment which
can be readily attached to the ordinary re-
producer now in use without changing any

20 part thereof. The only addition to the
gramophone is the placing of a small pro-
jection on the record.

Another object of my invention is to pro-
vide a more simple, cheap and effective de-

25 vice to accomplish the above results.

In the accompanying drawings: Figure 1
is a side elevation of the ordinary reproducer
showing my attachment applied and in the
position when the reproducer is supported

30 by the needle on the record. Fig. 2 is a
similar view showing the projection in the
act of tripping m}^ device and the device
engaging the record and lifting the repro-
ducer from the record. Fig. 3 is a similar

35 view to Fig. 1, showing the reproducer
raised and the needle clear of the record and
having stopped the record, and showing in
dotted lines the reproducer swung around
for inserting a new needle and showing the

40 device automatically setting itself. Fig. 4
is an enlarged perspective view of my im-
proved attachment.

Referring now to the drawings, 1 repre-
sents the ordinary reproducer now in use

45 and having the needle 2, resting or working
upon the record 3, and supporting the same,
while the machine is playing. In machines
of this character Avhen the record has been
played the needle continues to travel on the

50 smooth central portion of the record and the
record or its support is stopped by a hand
operated cam lever. As heretofore stated, it
is the object of my invention to provide
means tripped by a small projection on the

55 record for raising the needle from the rec-
ord and then stopping the rotation of the

record and the same accomplished without
any injury to the record.

My improved means for accomplishing the
above results consist of a plate 4 which is go
of such shape that it can be readily attached
to the side of the reproducer 1 by means of
two screws 5 and 6. The said plate has the
upwardly extending arms 7 and 8 having
outwardly turned ends 9, which bear against 65
the cylindrical portion of the reproducer
and whereby the plate is more securely fas-
tened to the reproducer. The plate 4 is pro-
vided with a downwardly extending arm 10,
which extends into the bifurcated upper end 70

11, of the member 12. The said member is
intermediately pivoted at 12' to the arm and
its lower end is provided with an enlarged
rubber ball-like member 11' which engages
the record, and the i-ubber causing a greater 75
friction on the record as will be hereinafter
more fully described.

Pivoted to the plate 4, by means of the
screw 6, is an arm 13, which extends down-
wardly and has a lower screw-threaded end 80
14, upon which is threaded a nipple 15,
which can be adjusted on the arm. The
nipple is in a position, when the needle 2
is on the record and supporting the repro-
ducer slightly above the record, as clearly 85
shown in Fig. 1. Surrounding the pivot or
screw 6, and carried by the plate 4, is a cir-
cular cam-portion 16, which allows the arm
13 to swing at a slight angle to the member

12, so as to bring it opposite one side of the 90
bifurcated upper end of the member 12.
The arm or trigger 13 intermediate its ends

is provided with a notch or shoulder 17,
into v>diich extends the toothed end 18 of one
side of the bifurcated end of the member 12. 95
The arm 13 when in a vertical position sup-
ports the member 12 in a horizontal position
by means of the notches 17 and toothed
end 18.

The record 2 on the inside of the sound lOO
gi'ooves is provided with the lug 19, which
is preferably formed integi-al with the rec-
ord, but when the device is to be used for
records which were not manufactured for
my device, the lug can be cemented to the 105
record. As shown in the drawings, the
needle 2 is on the outside of the sound box
or reproducer, while my attachment is on
the inside and therefore the arm 13 reaches
the path of the lug 19 before or at approxi- no
mately the same time that the needle reaches
the ends of the sound grooves.

^

1,078,460

The machine as shown in Fig. 1, is play-
ing the record moving in the direction of
the arrow, Fig. 1, and when the reproducer
has been moved inwardly by the engagement
g of the needle with the sound grooves, the
arm 13 is brought in the path of the lug 19.
This moves the ami to the left, as shown in
Fig. 2, which releases the member 12 and
by force of gravity the same drops upon the

j^O I'ecord. By means of the rubber covering
carried thereby the member is moved in a
vertical position lifting the needle from the
record. The lower end of the arm being
square pi'events the member 12 from pass-

l^ ing a vertical position and it is thus held in
said position. The friction of the rubber
of said member caused by the weight of the
reproducer stops the record.

The reproducer turns or revolves in the

20 direction of the arrow, Figs. 1, 2 and 3,
whereby the needle socket may be brought
into a position so that another needle can
be readily inserted. The turning or swing-
ing of the reproducer causes the member 12

25 to assume a vertical position and the arm
13 a horizontal position and the notch and
toothed end of the member 13 are inter-
locked and held in said position. When the
reproducer is swung down to bring the

30 needle on the record, the member 12 is in
a horizontal position and the arm 13 in a
A^ertical position, as shown in Fig. 1.

Having thus described my invention,
what I claim and desire to secure by Let-

85 ters Patent is:

1. The combination with a reproducer
comprising a needle and a record, of means
carried by the reproducer for automatically
frictionally engaging the record and rais-

40 ing the needle and stopping the record.

2. The combination with a reproducer and
a record, means carried by the reproducer
for raising the needle from the record and
stopping the record and a projection car-

45 ried bj'^ the record and adapted to trip said
means.

3. The combination with a reproducer and
a record, means carried by the reproducer
for engaging the record and raising the

50 reproducer and stopping the record, and a
projection carried by the record and adapt-
ed to trip said means.

4. The combination with a reproducer and
a record, means carried by the reproducer

55 for automatically engaging the record and
first raising the needle from the record and
then stopping the rotation of the recot'd.

5. The combination with a reproducer and
a record, a piA^oted membei" carried by the

60 reproducer and normally held in a hori-
zontal position, and a lug carried by the
record and adapted to trip said member to
allow it to drop on the x-ecord and liaise
the needle from the record and stop the

65 machine.

G. The combination with a reproducer and
a record having a lug on the inside of the
sound grooves, a pivoted member carried
by the reproducer and normally held in a
horizontal position, a trigger or arm lock- >jq
iiig said member in the horizontal position
and operated by the lug on the record.

7. Tlie combination with a reproducer and
a record, having a lug on the inside of the
sound grooves, an intermediately pivoted 75
member carried by the sound box, a piv-
oted trigger or arm adapted to engage the
inner end of the member and lock it in its
adjusted position, and said trigger having
its lower end above the record and in the go
path of said lug.

8. The combination of a reproducer and
a disk record, having a lug on the inside
of the sound groove, of an attachment
adapted to be secured to the reproducer and gg
engaged by the lug carried by the record

to automatically raise the needle from the
record and stop it.

9. The combination with a record and re-
producer, a member carried by the repro- 90
ducer, and a ti'igger for releasing said mem-
ber and allowing it to drop upon the record
and raise the needle and stop the record.

10. The combination with a reproducer
and a disk record having a lug on the in- 95
side of the sound groove, of means carried
by the reproducer and released by the lug
for raising the reproducer and stopping the
record, said means being automatically set
when the reproducer is swung aroxmd to 100
bring a new stylus in operative position,
and said means comprising a plate remov-
ably secured to the sound box, a member in-
termediately pivoted to the said plate, a
rubber covering for the lower end of said 105
member, a trigger pivoted to the plate and
having a notch intermediate its fends to
receive the upper end of the member, and

a nipple screwed upon the lower end of the
trigger for varying the length thereof, said no
trigger adapted to lock the member in a
horizontal position.

11. The combination with a reproducer
and a record having a lug on the inside of
the sound groove, an intermediately pivoted 115
member carried by the sound box, a pivoted
trigger or arm adapted to engage the inner
end of said member and lock it in a hori-
zontal position above the record, and said
trigger having its lower end above the rec- 120
ord and in the path of said lug and means
for preventing the intermediately pivoted
member from passing a vertical position.

12. The combination with a reproducer
and a record having a lug on the inside of 125
the sound grooves, a plate secured to the
inner face of the sound box, an intermedi-
ately pivoted member carried by the lower
end of said plate, a pivoted vertically dis-
posed trigger or arm adapted to engage t!he 130

1,078,460

inner end of said member and lock it in a
horizontal position above the record, said
trigger having its lower end above the rec-
ord and in the path of the said lug, and
6 means for preventing the intermediately
pivoted member from passing a vertical po-
sition.

13. The combination with a reproducer
and a record, an intermediately pivoted

10 mem.ber carried by the sound box, a pivoted
trigger or arm adapted to engage the inner
end of said member and lock it in a hori-
zontal position, said trigger having a verti-
cally adjustable lower end, and means car-

15 ried by the record for engaging the trigger
and tripping the intermediately pivoted
member, substantially as shown and de-
scribed.

14. The combination with a reproducer
20 and a record, a plate removably secured to

the reproducer, an intermediately pivoted
member carried by the lower end of said
plate and having a notched inner end, a
pivoted vertically disposed trigger or arm
25 having an offset portion engaging the
notched end of the member to lock it in a
horizontal position above the record, said
trigger having its lower end above the rec-

ord, a lug carried by the record and adapted
to engage the lower end of the trigger, and 30
allow the intermediately pivoted member
to drop down upon the record and raise the
reproducer, and means for preventing said
member from passing a vertical position in
the direction the record swings it. 35

15. The combination with the ordinary re-
producer and record, of an attachment com-
prising a pivoted arm adapted to engage
the record and raise the needle and stop the
record. 40

16. The combination with the ordinary re-
producer and record, of an attachment re-
movably secured to the reproducer, said at-
tachment comprising a pivoted member, a
trigger for holding said member in its 45
raised position, means carried by the record
for operating the trigger to allow the mem-
ber to drop and engage the record for rais-
ing the needle and stopping the record.

In testimony whereof I hereunto aifix my 50
signature in the presence of two witnesses.

MINARD ARTHUR POSSONS.

Witnesses :

Feed. T. Batchelok,
Edward A. Schneider.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

Washington, D. C."

J. H. J. HAINES.

TELE&RAPHONE.

APPLICATION PILED PEB. 3, 1910.

1,079,133.

Patented Nov. 18, 1913.

j^.j:.

^^.z

/^

nrmr

^J.

<S2>

^

COLUMBIA PLANQjQRAPH CO., WASHINGTON, D. C.

imiTED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

JOHN H. J. HAINES, OF NEW YOBK, N. Y.
TELEGRAPHONE.

1,079,133.

SpeetficatifriKvf Letters Patent. Patented Nov. 18, 1913.

Application filed February 3, 1910. Serial No. 541,773.

To all whom it may concern:

Be it known that I, John H. J. Haines,
a citizen of the United States, residing at
the city of New York, in the borough of
5 INfanhattan and State of New York, have
invented certain new and useful Improve-
ments in Telegraphones, of which the fol-
lowing is a full, clear, and exact descrip-
tion.

10 This invention relates to telegraphones
and has special reference to the construc-
tion of the recording and reproducing mag-
net and the record surface cooperating there-
with.

15 Heretofore in all forms of the telegra-
phone known to me, the electro-magnet
through which the voice currents flow has
a pole-piece or pole-pieces in contact with
a single record surface or body; that is to

20 say. if the magnet is a horseshoe magnet,
having both of its poles operative in connec-
tion with the recording surface, said poles
are in contact with different portions of a
single strand of wire or of a single disk, the

25 magnetic impression being left upon the
wire or disk in the space between the two
pole faces, and if the magnet is a single
spool having only one pole in contact with
the record surface, that pole leaves its im-

30 pression at a single spot in said surface.
My invention differs from these former con-
structions in that I use what is in effect a
horseshoe magnet, although a modified form
thereof, with one of its poles resting in con-

35 tact with one steel bod}", being a wire, tape
or disk, while the other pole is in contact
with an entirely separate and distinct steel
hoAj. being also a wire, tape or disk. In
this construction I have found that the rec-

40 ord produced in the two recording bodies
is much stronger than can be obtained with
a single recording body and that the repro-
duction which is made with the same kind
of an electro-magnet is correspondingly

45 louder and clearer.

In the accompanying drawings my inven-
tion is illustrated conventionally.

Figure 1 is a view taken transverse to the
length of the recording bodies, showing the

50 electro-magnet in side elevation. Fig. 2 is

a side view of two disks, showing the elec-
tro-magnet applied thereto in side elevation.
Fig. 3 is a modification.

Referring to the drawing by letter, a
and h respectively indicate two steel bodies, 55
entirely independent of each other and run-
ning side by side at the same speed. As
shown in Fig. 1 these bodies are in the form
of flat tapes, for which may be substituted
round wire. In Fig. 2 the steel bodies are 60
indicated as disks. The motor for these
steel bodies is of any approved construc-
tion which it is not necessary to show
herein.

c indicates the electro-magnet which in 65
general is of the horseshoe type. On each
pole of the magnet is an electro-magnetic
helix c' through which the voice currents
are sent from a suitable transmitter and in
which the reproducing currents are gen- 70
erated in the operation of reproducing.
One pole of the magnet rests in contact with
one of the steel bodies, while the other rests
in contact with the other steel body, so that
said bodies simultaneously receive and give 75
out the same magnetic impression. My ex-
periments have shown that with the steel
recording body split up in this manner,
the record is much stronger than where both
poles of the magnet, or a single pole of the 80
magnet, acts upon a single steel body. The
reason for this phenomenon is not entirely
apparent to me, but the results are un-
doubted.

In the form shown in Fig. 1, the mag- 85
netic surface is a stiff bar, while in the
form shown in Fig. 2 it is largely composed
of a flexible iron wire which may or may
not be attached to a special pole-piece on
which the magnet helix is located. The 90
same results are also obtained by using the
magnet in the form of a straight bar with
a helix on each end, as shown in Fig. 3, in
which case the two steel bodies would stand
at right angles across the respective ends of 95
the bar.

Having described my invention, I claim :

In a telegraphone, a recording medium of
magnetizable material, said medium being
in two separate and distinct recording parts, 100

1,079,123

and means for simultaneously making sub-
stantially identical records upon both of
said parts, said means including an electro-
magnet having a plurality of pole pieces,
one of said pole pieces adapted to cooperate
with one of said parts and the other of said
pole pieces, with the other of said parts.

In witness whereof, I subscribe my signa-
ture, in the presence of two witnesses.

JOHN H. J. HAINES.

Witnesses :

Waldo M. Chapin,
William C. Lang.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

Washington, D. C."

1,079,419.

T. H. MACDONALD.

AUTOMATIC ANNOUNCEMENT GEAPHOPHONE
APPLICATION PILED DEC. 9, 1908

Patented Nov. 25, 1913.

3 SHEETS-SHEET 1.

nCL^ ^ fill,; , ,;• - .

COLUMBIA PLANOQRAPH CO., WASHINOTON. D. C.

1,079,419.

T. H. MACDONALD.

AUTOMATIC ANNOUNCEMENT 6RAPH0PH0NE.

APPLICATION FILED DEO. 9, 1908.

Patented Nov. 25, 1913.

3 SHEETS-SHEET 2.

^6

£S S8

COLUMBIA PLANOGRAPH CO.,

1,079,419.

T, H. MACDOEALD.

AUTOMATIC ANNODNCEMENT GRAPHOPHONE.

APPLICATION PILED DEO. 9, 1908.

Patented Nov. 25, 1913.

3 SHEETS-SHEET 3.

^

^AuLuyi^.

COLUMBIA PLANOORAPM CO.. WASHINGTON, 1

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

THOMAS H. MACDONALD, OF BEIDGEPOET, CONNECTICUT, ASSIGNOR TO AMERICAN
GRAPHOPHONE COMPANY, OF BRIDGEPORT, CONNECTICUT, A CORPORATION OF
WEST VIRGINIA.

AUTOMATIC ANNOUNCEMENT-GRAPHOPHONE.

1,079,419.

Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Nov. 35, 1913.

Application filed December 9, 1908. Serial No. 466,680.

To all ichom-it may concern:

Be it loiown that I, Thomas H. Mac-
DOXALD, a citizen of the United States of
America, and a resident of Bridgeport, Con-
5 necticut, have invented a new and useful Au-
tomatic Announcement-Graphophone, whicli
is fully set forth in the following specifica-
tion.

My invention relates to automaticallj'^ op-

10 erating talking-macliines for uttering a num-
ber of different announcements, the periods
of announcements alternating with intervals
of silence.

Briefl,y stated, my invention consists in

15 the provision of a continuously operating-
driving device from which the sound-record
tablet and the reproducer are automatically
and intermittently operated.

It further consists of the provision of

20 means for automatically restoring the ma-
chine to initial position at the proper time.
More particularl3\ my invention com-
prises the following features: first, a clutch
for connecting and disconnecting the or-

25 dinary graphophone and a continuously ro-
tating driving-pulley; second, gearing or
tlie like and cams, etc., for actuating said
clutch in alternate directions at the proper
inttrval; third, means for adju.sting the

30 last-named devices, whereby the intervals
may be altered; fourth, means for re-
storing the machine to initial position;
fifth, means (operating when the last an-
nouncement of the series has been made) to

35 bring the restoring-mechanism into play;
sixth, other adjusting-means.

My invention consists of the combination
heretofore indicated, and further of certain
details of construction and arrangement of

40 jiarts hereinafter pointed out and claimed.
The invention is applicable to disk ma-
chines so-called but I shall explain it in
connection with the annexed drawings that
illustrate a preferred embodiment applied

45 to a graphophone of the type using cylin-
drical sound-records.

In these drawings, Figure 1 is a partly
broken-away plan view of a graphophone of
ordinary construction having my present

50 invention combined therewith, the same be-
ing shown in position of making the last
announcement of the series; Fig. 2 is a sec-
tion through line 2 — 2 of Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is

a transverse sectional view taken through
the carriage and "speaker" of the grapho- 55
phone ; and Fig. 4 is a longitudinal vertical
section through the left-hand- portion of
Fig. 1, illustrating certain details.

The drawings show the frame of the
machine, comprising the usual end-plates 1 60
and 2; also the main shaft 3 with its man-
di'el 4 carrying an interchangeable record-
cylinder 5; likewise the reproducer-carriage
G with its partial nut 7 engaging the feed-
screw 8; besides indicating suitable trains 65
of gearing connecting shaft 3 with the feed-
screw 8 and with the governor (not shown),
— all as usual. The motor (indicated at 9,
Fig. 2) is supposed to run continuously;
but the main shaft 3 and the other working 70
parts of the graphophone proper remain
stationary except when a clutch is applied
to connect the main shaft with the driving-
pullc}^ 10, which latter is loose on the pro-
truding end of the shaft 3 and driven from 75
the motor, as by a belt. This continuously-
revolving pulley 10 carries on its hub the
])inion 11, which is continuously driving the
train that shifts the clutch referred to, and
from the same train is actuated the mecha- 80
nism for engaging (and disengaging) the
return-screw and graphophone carriage.
The return-screw itself is driven from the
same pinion 11.

2'he clutch. — The left-hand end of the 85
main shaft 3 is hollow, and in it is carried
the stem 12 of the clutch-head 13, the lat-
ter being located bej'^ond the pulley and
having a serrated face to engage counter-
serrations on the adjacent face of the hub of 90
pullej^ 10. On the main shaft 3 is a shift-
collar 14 carrying a transverse pin 15 that
passes through longitudinal slots in the
shaft 3. and engages the stem 12. When
this collar is thrown to the left, the clutch 95
is disengaged, and the graphophone-mecha-
nism remains idle, although the pulley 10
and its train continue to revolve; when col-
lar 14 is shifted to the right, the clutch is
engaged and the driving-pulley operates the 100
graphophone in the usual manner.

Cluteh-sMfting '9nechanism. — The pulley-
pinion 11 drives the speed-reducing train 16,
17, 18; on the shaft of gear 18 is a worm
19 in mesh with worm-gear 20 on thetrans- 105
verse shaft 21 ; and this shaft 21 carries the

Q,

1,079,419

cam-wheels 22 and 23 which control the
shifting of clutch-collar 14. The outer cam,
22, is circumferentially adjustable upon its
shaft. The cams are driven (from the pul-
5 ley 10) in the direction indicated by the ar-
row in Fig. 4. The reduction from the
pulley to this transverse shaft 21 and the
cams, is 400; so that, with the usual repro-
clucing-speed of talking-machines, 160 revo-

10 lutions to the minute, it is evident that these
cams will make a complete revohition once
in two and one-half minutes.

Mounted in suitable bearings below and
parallel with the transverse shaft 21 is a

15 rock-shaft 24; and a yoke 25 fast upon said
rock-shaft engages the annular groove in
the shift-collar 14 ; so that the axial rocking
of rock-shaft 24 swings the yoke from side
to side and results in shifting collar 14 lon-

20 gitudinally upon the main shaft 3, thus
bringing the graphophone into or out of
operation.

A pawl 26 is mounted loosely upon rock
shaft 24, near the rear end thereof lying

25 in the plane of the forward cam 23, so that
its nose can engage the seat shown in the
cam; this pawl is drawn to the left against
the cam, iDy the strong spiral spring 27,
whose other end is connected to a pin driven

30 into the frame; and when the seat of the
cam comes opposite, the nose of the pawl is
forced into it by the spring. Mounted rigidly
on the same rock-shaft, in the plane of the
outer cam 22, is another pawl 28, whose nose

35 can engage in the seat in its cam, and a some-
what weaker spring (mounted similarly to
spring 27) serves to draw this arm to the
i-ight, against its cam 22. A pin 29 on the
rock-shaft 24 engages a shoulder on the

40 hub of this loose pawl 26, so that when the
seat in cam 23 permits the strong spring 27
to draw the loose pawl 26 to the left, the
rock shaft 24 is thereby rocked counter-
clockwise, disengaging its pawl 28 from its

45 cam seat and shifting the collar 14 to the
left, — thus disengaging the clutch 13.

In the drawings the apparatus is shown
as operating just after the clutch has been
thrown into engagement. The two cams 23

50 and 22 have moved their respective pawls
26 and 28 to the right, and thereby have
shifted the clutch-head 13 into engagement,
which operation is performed once every
two and a half minutes as indicated above."

^5 The graphophone will continue to operate
in the well-known manner until, by the
continued revolution of cam 23, its cut-away
portion permits the nose of pawl 26 to be
drawn to the left by its strong spring 27;

^^ this (by means of pin 29) shifts the rock-
shaft 24 to the left, and thereby the shift-
collar 14 is moved to the left and the clutch
becomes disengaged. It remains disengaged
for two minutes and twenty seconds, until

^^ the further revolution of the cams lifts pawl

75

80

26 out of its seat in cam 23 and permits
pawl 28 to drop into its seat in cam 22;
when, as before, follow the ten seconds of
engagement and running of the grapho-
phone. The duration of the running of the ^q
graphophone will be determined by the rela-
tive positions of the seats in the two cams
22 and 23 ; and by circumferentially adjust-
ing the cam 22, the duration of this audible
reproduction can be nicely adjusted.

By the mechanism hereinbefore described,
from the pulley 10 with its pinion 11,
through the reducing train and cams, and tlie
rock-shaft with its pawls and yoke, the clutch
14 is thrown into engagement once every
two and a half minutes ; and by the proper
adjustment of the cam 22, the clutch is
thrown out of engagement at the predeter-
mined interval of (say) about ten seconds
thereafter; and this alternation is repeated 85
continuously until all the announcements
upon the record-cylinder 5 — in practice
twenty-four — have been made. At the end of
this time the carriage 6 is to be restored to
its initial position.

The return. — This may be accomplished
by means of mechanism for disengaging the
graphophone - carriage from the forward
feed-screw and engaging it with the return-
screw, and the return-screw and means for
driving it. Mounted in end-plates 1 and 2,
and at the rear of the machine, is the lon-
gitudinal rock-shaft 30. At the left end
of this shaft is fixed a paAvl 31 ; and a spring
32 (at the other end) tends to turn the rock-
shaft so as to lift the nose of this pawl ; but
the nose of this pawl is held down by the pe-
riphery of revolving disk 33, and can be
raised by the spring only when the seat 34
of the disk is brought opposite the pawl.
Disk 33 is on a shaft that carries worm-
gear 34', in mesh with worm 35 on the
before -mentioned transverse shaft 2i. The
reduction from shaft 21 to disk 33 is twenty-
four so that (shaft 21 revolving once every 110
tAvo and one-half minutes) disk 33 revolves
once every hour, and once every hour spring
32 rocks the rock-shaft 30. Fast on this
shaft 30 are arms 36 — 36, that carry the
longitudinal rod 37 which serves as the 115
guide-rod for the forked rear end of the
rear guide-arm 38 of the carriage 6. When,
once every hour, the rock-shaft is tilted, the
arm 38 is tilted upon the forward guide-rod
39, and the feed-nut 7 is disengaged from 120
feed-screw 8 (and the reproducing- stylus
is lifted from record cylinder 5) ; by the
same movement another partial feed-nut 40
is brought into mesh with the return-screw
41, suitably mounted in end-plates 1 and 2, 125
and driven from the pulley-pinion 11 by an
intermediate gear 42. By the time the car-
riage has been restored to its initial position
at the left of the machine, the further
revolution ol disk 33 will have forced pawl 130

90

95

100

105

1,079,419

31 down, which tilts rock-shaft 30 and low-
ers the guide - rod 37 ; and this lowers the
rear of guide 38, disengaging return-nut
40, and reengaging nut 7 (and the re-
5 producing- stylus).

The pitch of return-screw 41 must be
sufficient to return the carriage before the
expiration of the silence-period (two min-
utes and twenty-seconds) following the last

10 announcement on the end of the cylinder 5,
so that it may stand ready for work when
the cams 22 and 23 next cause the clutch
to engage. -

To prevent any chance of forcing the

15 carriage too far to the left before disk 33
forces down pawl 31, the screw-threads of
return-screw 41 are discontinued, as at 43;
and preferably the screw-shaft 41 is itself
made longitudinally adjustable, to obtain

20 the desired positioning of this point 43. In
end-plate 2 the longitudinally-adjustable
sleeve 44 is held in adjustment by set-screw
45; and the end of screw-shaft 41 is jour-
naled in this sleeve, where it is held from

25 slipping out, as by a screw. In the oppo-
site end-plate 1 is a somewhat similar sleeve
46, carrying the left end of screw-shaft 41,
and held in position by a set-screw. A hub
47 turns loosely on sleeve 46, but is held

30 thereon by a set-screw 48 entering the an-
niilar groove in the end of the sleeve. This
hub is keyed to the shaft 41, and carries
pinion 49 in mesh with gear 42 (that is
driven by the pulley-pinion 11). The re-

Sd turn-screw is adjusted by loosening set-
screw 45. and shifting sleeve 44 with the
shaft 41.

I have described my invention with some
particularity, but only for the sake of clear-

40 ness, since it is not limited to the precise
constructions and arrangements of parts
shown. Changes mav'' be made in these, and
some of the features used to the exclusion
of others, without departing from the spirit

45 of my invention.

Having thus described my invention, I
claim :

1. In a talking machine, the combination
of a main shaft, a continuously moving

50 driving device, a clutch for engaging the
two, and cam mechanism automatically op-
erated at predetermined intervals for clos-
ing and opening said clutch.

2. In a talking machine, the combination
00 of a main shaft, a continuously moving

driving device, a clntch for engaging the
two, cam mechanism automatically operated
at predetermined intervals for closing and
opening said clutch, said cam mechanism be-
60 ing adjustable to vai-y the intervals.

3. In a talking machine, the combination
of a carriage, a main shaft and a continu-
ously moving driving device, of a clutch
foi- engaging the two, and two sets of cam

65 operated mechanisms automatically oper-

ated the one to ojDen said clutch and the other
to close the same at predetermined intervals,
one of said cams being movable relatively
to the other to vary the intervals.

4. In a talking machine, the combination ijq
of a carriage, a main shaft and a continu-
ously moving driving device, of a clutch for
engaging the two, and two sets of cam op-
erated mechanisms automatically operated
the one to open said clutch ancl the other 75
to close the same at predetermined inter-
vals, one of said cams being rotatable rela-
tively to the other to vary the intervals.

5. In a talking machine, the combination

of a carriage, a main shaft and a driving 30
shaft, of a clutch for engaging the two,
cam mechanism automatically operated to
actuate said clutch at predetermined inter-
vals, said cam mechanism being adjustable
to vary said intervals, means for automati- 85
cally returning the carriage to its initial
position at a predetermined time, and means
Avhereby the time of return is adjusted.

6. In a talking machine, the combination

of a carriage, a main shaft and a driving 90
device, a clutch for engaging the two, and
cam mechanism automatically operated for
actuating said clutch at predetermined in-
tervals, said mechanism including means for
varying said intervals. 95

7. In a talking machine, the combination
of a main shaft, and a driving-pulley, of a
clutch for engaging the two, a reducing-
train from said pulley, cams actuated there-
by, and a rock-shaft having paAvls actuated igo
by said cams and carrying a 3^oke actuating
said clutch.

8. In a talking machine, the combination
of a main shaft, and a driving-pulley, of a
clutch for engaging the two, a reducing- 1C5
train from said pulley, two cams actuated
thereby, one of said cams being adjustable,
and a rock-shaft having pawls actuated by
said cams and carrying a yoke actuating
said clutch. no

9. In a talking machine, the combination
of a carriage having a rear ai^m carr3ang a
feed-nut and a return feed-nut, of a return
feed-screw and means for rotating it, a rock-
shaft carrying a guide-rod engaged by said 115
rear arm, means tending to tilt said rock-
shaft for disengaging said feed-nut and en-
gaging said return-nut with said return-
screw, and automatically-operated mecha-
nism for holding said rock-shaft against tilt- 120
ing but permitting it to tilt at a predeter-
mined period, whereby said carriage is re-
turned to its initial position.

10. In a talking machine, the combination

of a carriage having a rear arm carrying a 125
feed-nut and a return feed-nut, of a return
feed-screw and means for rotating it, a rock-
shaft caiTving a guide-rod engaged by said
rear arm, means tending to tilt said rock-
shaft for disengaging said feed-nut and en- 130

1,078,419

reducing-train

actuating

gaging said return-nut with said return-
screw, a cam- wheel engaging a pawl on said
rock-shaft to prevent tilting the latter and
having a cut-away portion to receive the
5 pawl and thereby permit the tilting of said
rock-shaft, and a "
said cam-wheel.

11. In a talking machine, the combination
of a main shaft, carriage, and forward feed-

10 screw, of a driving-pulley, a clutch for en-
gaging said shaft and pulley, a rock-shaft
having pawls and carrying a yoke for shift-
ing said clutch, a reduction-train driven
from said pulley and cams driven thereby in

15 operative relation to said xoawls, another cam
driven from said reduction-train, a return
feed-screw driven from said pulley, and
means controlled by the last-named cam for
disengaging the carriage from the feed-

20 screw and engaging it with the return-
screw.

12. In a talking machine, the combination
of a carriage, a main shaft and a dri\ing
device, a clutch for engaging the two, auto-

25 maticall}^ operated mechanism for actuating
said clutch at predetermined intervals, said
mechanism including means for varying
said intervals, additional automatically
operated mechanism for returning the car-

30 riage to its initial position, and adjusting
means for regulating the time of completing
said return.

13. In a talking machine, the combination
of a record driving shaft, a driving pulley,

35 a clutch for engaging the two, automatically
operating cam mechanism controlling the
starting and stopping of said record driving
shaft, a rock shaft, connections between said
rock shaft and clutch, and comiections be-

40 tween said rock shaft and cam mechanism.

14. In a talking machine, the combination
of a record driving shaft, a driving pulley,
a clutch for engaging the two, cam mecha-
nism driven from said pulley controlling the

45 starting and stopping of said record driving

shaft, a rock shaft, connections between said
rock shaft and clutch, and connections be-
tween said rock shaft and cam mechanism.

15. In a talking m.achine, the combination

of a main shaft, a driving pulley, a clutch 50
for engaging the two, two rotating cams, one
operating to open said clutch and the other
operating to close said clutch, and connec-
tions between said cams and said clutch
whereby said clutch is automatically opened 55
and closed at predetermined intervals.

16. In a talking machine, the combination
of a main shaft, a driving pulley, a clutch
for engaging the two, two rotating cams
one operating to open said clutch and the 60
other operating to close said clutch, a pawl
associated with each of said cams, and con-
nections between said pawls and clutch.

17. In a talking machine, the combination

of a main shaft, a driving pulley, a clutch 65
for engaging the two, two rotating cams one
operating to open said clutch and the other
operating to close said clutch, a rock shaft,
a pawl associated with each cam mounted
on said rock shaft, one of said pawls being 70
fixed to said shaft and the other being loose
thereon, and connections between said rock
shaft and clutch.

18. In a talking machine, the combination

cf a main shaft and a driving pulley, a 75
clutch for engaging the two, two rotating
cams one operating to open said clutch and
the other operating to close said clutch, con-
nections between said cams and said clutch
whereby said clutch is automatically opened 80
and closed at predetermined intervals, one
of said cams being adjustable with relation
to the other to vary said intervals.

In testimony whereof I have signed this
specification in the presence of two subscrib-
ing witnesses.

THOMAS H. MACDONALD.

Witnesses :

A. B. Keough,
L. B. Nicholson.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

Washington, D. C."

1,080,281.

W. H. RAWLES.

TALKING MACHINE.

APPLICATION PILED MAY 15, 1913.

Patented Dec. 2, 1913.

2 SHEETS-SHEET 1.

Ucg.l

'Jfj^

y//////////////////7////////////^///////7////////yyy///.

^jsr^^

J^.^

j^2e

COLUMBIA PLAN03RAPH CO., WASHINOTON. D. C

1,080,231,

W. H. RAWLES.

TALKING MACHINE.
APPLIOATIOH PILED MAY 15, 1913.

Patented Dec. 2, 1913.

2 SHEETS-SHEET 2.

Fig. 3

N^

\2^17

o^

Inventor:

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

WALTER HANSEN" RAWLES, OF LONDON, ENGLAND.
TALKING-MACHINE.

1,080,231.

Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Dec. 2, 1913.

Application filed May 15, 1913. Serial No. 767,830.

To all wliom it may concern:

Be it known that I, Walter Hansen
Ea-wlks, a subject of tha King of England,
residing at London, England, have invented
5 certain new and usefiil Improvements in
Talking-Machines, of which the following
is a specification.

This invention relates to diaphragm car-
riers for talking machines and the like and

10 is especially intended for use in that class
of machine adapted to the immediate repro-
duction of matter recorded. In particular
it is well adapted for use in the machine de-
scribed in United States Patent No. 1027350.

15 The invention has for its objects to im-
]5rove the working of such machine and to
facilitate the general process of recording
and reproduction.

It is known to pi'ovide a diaphragm car-

20 rier upon which reproducing and recording
diaphragms are mounted upon a pivot at
right angles to the plane of the diaphragTns
in order that either may be swung around
into position directly in front of the end

25 of the speaking tube.

The present invention provides in a talk-
ing machine a diaphragm carrier compris-
ing a holder for reproducing and recording
diaphragms so supported as not only to be

80 capable of being turned about an axis par-
allel with the planes of the said diaphragms
to bring either into operative position upon
the record tablet but also to provide a
straight unbroken closed-in passage from

35 the speaking tube to whichever, diaphragm
is in operative position.

The invention also provides for the em-
ployment of a fijie adjustment for the dia-
phragm carrier whereby the recording and

40 the reproducing stylus may be adjusted in
relation to the recording tablet, and for the
amount of adjustment necessary to be auto-
matically indicated.

In the accompanying drawings — Figure

45 1 is a side elevation of a disk machine upon
which a diaphragm carrier according to the
present invention is mounted. Fig. 2 is a
plan of the diaphragm carrier dismounted
from the machine, and Fig. 3 is a corre-

50 spending end elevation.

Like letters of i-eference refer to like parts
throughout the drawings.

Eeferring particularly to Fig. 1 it will
be seen that the diaphragm carrier is mount-

55 ed upon two members A A' of the machine
in order that the recording diaphragm O ,

and the reproducing diaphragm P may be
brought into operative position in relation
to a record disk B borne upon the table C of
the machine. The trumpet or the like of the 60
machine is connected to a speaking tube N
which passes down through the member D
in a direction perpendicular to the record
disk. The member D is slotted to receive a
nut M which screws upon the speaking tube e 5
N and acts as an adjustment for the position
of the diaphragms O and P respectively for
recording and reproducing. The spealdng
tube N is guided by a grub screw M' pass-
ing from the member D and into a slot N' 70
running along the length of N. This tube
N passes downwardly through and ceases
at the periphery of a closed drum N^ so as
to give a smooth imbroken passage. Con-
centric with the drum N^ is a sleeve or holder 75
W fitting over it and so slotted at N* as to
be capable of definitely limited partial ro-
tation in relation to N^. The slot N* is oj)en
at N" to permit of wholesale endwise de-
tachment of the sleeve and diaphragms 80
from the drum. A handle N'' secured to the
sleeve, is also screwed through to the drum
at N^2 in such a way as to hold sleeve and
drum in proper relation. Diaphragm sock-
ets N^ N^ open out of the sleeve N' and, 85
suitably formed as with bayonet joints to
take the diaphragms, contain short rings
N" of such diameter as to maintain the
smoothness of the passage through which
the sounds pass from or to the diaphragm. 90
It may be here remarked that the word
" diaphragm " is intended to apply to the
actual mounting for the diaphragm itself
together with the stylus and the connecting
parts between the stylus and the diaphragm. 95
The diaphragms shown are of well-known
construction and need not be further de-
scribed.

Mounted on the opposite face of the drum
N- to that on which the handle N" is situated, 100
is a bracket N^^ carrying a tube N^* running
parallel to the axis of the tube N. A posi-
tion-indicating rod N^® is mounted to slide
in this tube N^* and is provided with a head
N^" and with a rounded end N^'', which latter 105
is intended to rest upon the record-disk B in
order for the rod N^^ to be positioned by the
disk. The diaphragm carrier has a fixed
pointer N^*, which may be carried by the
tube N in any suitable manner, and the head no
N^" is intended to cooperate with this pointer
to indicate the extent of adjustment re-

Q

1,080,231

10

15

quired to be effected, to the diaphragm car-
rier. The rod N^® is of such a length that,
when the members A, A' and D have been
brought down into position for one or other
of the diaphragms C and P to be in opei^a-
tive position relatively to the disk B, the
head N^" should be opposite the pointer N^^.
If, owing, for example to the disk B being
a little thin the head N^** should be below the
pointer N^^ then in order to position the
diaphragm carrier correctly the nut M must
be rotated to lower the carrier until the
pointer N^® and head N^" are directly oppo-
site each other. The position of the head
■N"^" of the rod jSF^" therefore relatively to the
pointer W^ indicates the extent of adjust-
meint required to be effected to the dia-
phragm carrier. The rod W^ has a lug N^"
to prevent its becoming detached from the

20 tube N^*, and another lug N^" which cooper-
ates with a slot 'N^^ in the tube N^*. By a
slight rotation of the rod N^® when the lug
N"^° is above the slot N-^, the rod may when
desired be held in inoperative position i. e.

25 in such a position that its end "N" cannot
engage the disk B. The slot N^^ allows of
necessary movement of the rod N^^' in the
tube N^*. This position-indicating device
may of course be applied to diaphragm car-

30 riers other than those herein described and
illustrated in the drawings.

In use, — if the operator wishes to change
over from say, recording to reproducing, the
handle N'' is pushed over so that the dia-

35 phragm P now comes into position with the

, bore of the tube N* in register with the end

N' of the tube N where it comes through the

drum N-. It will be seen therefore, that a

straight through passage is maintained for

40 whichever diaphragm is in position.

In order to adjust the position of either
stylus in relation to the record disk the nut
M is merely rotated one way or the other as
the case may be and so raises or lowers the

45 speaking tube N, together with the dia-
phragm carrier. In this way the position
of the parts may be very finely adjusted, the
amount of adjustment being automatically
indicated by the pointer N^® and the head

50 N^'' of the rod N^^ as above described.

What I claim as my invention and desire
to secure by Letters Patent is: —

1. In a machine of the character described,
the combination of a support for a record

55 tablet, a sound conduit, a recording dia-
phragm, a reproducing diaphragm, a holder

for said diaphragms adjustable toward and
from the record tablet support and adapted
to turn about a horizontal axis to position
either diaphragm across the sound conduit
and in direct communication therewith, an
arm extending below said holder and adapt-
ed by contact with the record tablet to indi-
cate when either diaphragm is in operative
position, and a relatively stationary pointer
on the holder cooperating with said arm to
indicate the amount of vertical adjustment
necessary to bring the last mentioned dia-
phragm into operative relation to the tablet.

2. In a machine of the character described,
the combination of a support for a recoi'd
tablet, a sound conduit, a recording dia-
phragm, a reproducing diaphragm, a holder
for said diaphragms adjustable toward and
from the record tablet support and adapted
to turn about a horizontal axis to position
either diaphragm across the sound conduit
and in direct communication therewith, a
sleeve supported at the axis of the holder,
an arm adjustable through said sleeve to
contact with the record tablet, when either
diaphragm is positioned across the sound
conduit, and a relatively stationary pointer
on the diaphragm holder cooperating with
said arm to indicate the required amount of
vertical adjustment necessary to bring the
last mentioned diaphragm into operative re-
lation to the tablet.

3. In a machine of the character described,
the combination of a support for a record
tablet, a sound conduit, a recording dia-
phragm, a reproducing diaphragm, a holder
for said diaphragms adjustable toward and
from the record tablet support and adapted
to turn about a horizontal axis to position
either diaphragm across the sound conduit
and in direct conmiunication therewith, an
arm supported at the axis about which the
diaphragm holder turns and adjustable to
and from the record tablet, and a relatively
stationary pointer on the holder cooperat-
ing with said arm to indicate the amount of
vertical adjustment necessary to position
either diaphragm in operative relation to a
record tablet.

In testimony whereof I have signed my
name to this specification in the presence of
two subscribing witnesses.

WALTER HANSEN RAWLES.

Witnesses :

ChAS. J. GiBLING,

Leslie George Eves.

60

65

70

75

80

85

90

96

100

105

Copies of this pateut may be obtained for five cents each,, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

Washington, D. C."

E, T. CONDON, Je.
DOUBLE POINTED REPRODDCING STYLUS FOR TALKING MACHINES, AND HOLDER THEREFOR,

APPLICATION FILED SEPT. 30, 1912.

Patented Dec. 2, 1913.

1,080,328.

^:6

Ma:4

zo

^^-y^jif

JS

WITNESSES:

INVENTOR

JEdrmj-ff T Condon Jr

BY

///3 ATTORNEY

COLUMBIA PLANOSRAPM CO.. WASHINGTON. D. C.

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

EDWARD T. CONDON, JR., OF NEW YORK, N. Y.

DOUBLE-POINTED REPRODUCING-STYLUS FOR TALKING-MACHINES, AND HOLDER

THERBFOR.

1,080,338.

Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Dec. 3, 1913.

Application filed September 30, 1912. Serial No. 723,012.

To all whom it may concern:

Be it known that I, Edward T. Condon,
Jr., a citizen of the United States, and a
resident of New York, in the county of
5 Xew York and State of New York, have in-
vented certain new .and useful Improve-
ments in Double-Pointed Eeproducing-Styli
for Talking-Machines, and Holders There-
for, of which the following is a specification.

10 The invention relates to a novel reproduc-
ing stylus or phonographic needle as em-
ployed in connection with rotating cylinders
or disks in talking machines, and to a novel
holder therefor.

15 The invention has for its object to provide
a one-piece reversible stylus having oppo-
sitely pointed ends, one of which may be of
different character from the other if desired;
and, it has for a further object to suitably

20 protect the inactive end of such stylus.

The nature of the invention will best be
understood when described in connection
with the accompanying drawings, in
which —

25 Figure 1 is a front elevation of a sound
box, stylus holder, partly in section, and the
stylus held thereby. Fig. 2 is a view of the
underside thereof. Figs. 3 and 4 are respec-
tively a plan and elevation of a guard for

30 the stylus. Figs. 5 and 6 are respectively a

plan and elevation of another form of guard.

Similar characters of reference designate

corresponding parts throughout the several

views.

35 Referring to the drawing, 10 designates
the sound box of a talking machine and to
which is attached in well-known manner
the arm or holder 11 for the stylus 12 em-
ployed in such machines. This arm is hol-

40 low throughout its central portion, which is
designed to receive the stylus 12, the latter
being held therein in well-known manner by
means of a set screw 13.

The stylus ordinarily employed is pointed

45 only at one end which engages the record,
the other being cut off flat and bottoming in
the said arm 11. In making the stylus
pointed at both ends, as shown, the life of
the same is doubled; and, moreover, modi-

50 fications in the tone may be obtained by pro-
viding points of different characteristics.
As shown in Fig. 1, the point 14 is made
more blunt than the point 15 of the repro-

ducing stylus 12, whereby the tones repro-
duced by the former are amplified. 55

In employing a needle of the aforesaid
character, it becomes necessary to adequately
protect the end, which for the time being is
not to engage the record, and which end
bottoms in the arm 11. If no such means 60
were provided, the bottoming point would
generally be damaged and rendered unfit for
use due to scraping of the same on the bot-
tom of the arm in tightening the stylus in
position therein. To obviate this difficulty, 65
a guard piece 16, Figs. 3 and 4, slightly
tapered as shown, may be forced into the
arm 11. This guard piece conforms to the
shape of the central hollow portion of the
said arm and is provided, furthermore, with 70
a slot 17 extending inwardly from one of
the corners thereof and adapted to receive
the pointed and temporarily inactive end of
the stylus 12. The slot tapers slightly from
top to bottom so that the stylus may be 75
firmly bottomed against said guard, which
is, furthermore, provided with a recess 18 in
its underface to accommodate the portion of
the point projecting beyond the depth of
the slot. In this manner, points of different 80
taper may be readily accommodated.

In Figs. 5 and 6, 1 have illustrated a some-
what simpler guard, the same consisting of
a pad 20 of soft or resilient, cushioning ma-
terial such as cork or rubber, adapted to be 85
inserted in the bottom of the arm 11 and
against which the point of the stylus may
be brought.

I claim: —

1. In a talking machine, the combination 90
with a stylus arm having a socket of suffi-
cient depth to properly receive and retain
the shank and inactive end of a double
pointed stylus; of a frictionally held guard
therein for the inactive end of the stylus 95
and into which the same is adapted to pass.

2. The combination with a reproducing
stylus for talking machines, having oppo-
sitely pointed ends ; of a holder therefor, and

a guard in said holder provided with a slot 100
adapted to receive the temporarily inactive
end of the stylus bottoming therein.

3. The combination with a reproducing
stylus for talking machines, having oppo-
sitely pointed ends; of a holder therefor, 105
and a guard at the bottom of said holder

^7/

1,080,328

provided with a slot to receive the tempo-
rarily inactive end of the stylus bottoming
therein, and with a recess in its under face,
whereby styli of various tapers may be ac-
5 commodated.

4. The combination with a reproducing
stylus for talking machines, having oppo-
sitely pointed ends; of a holder therefor,
and a guard in said holder provided with

10 a tapering slot adapted to receive the tempo-
rarily inactive end of the stylus bottoming
therein.

5. The combination with a reproducing

stylus for talking machines, having oppo-
sitely pointed ends; of a holder therefor, 15
and a guard in said holder adapted to em-
brace the temporarily inactive end of the
stylus without contacting with the point
thereof.

Signed at New York, in the county of 20
New York, and State of New York, this
28th day of September A. D. 1912.

EDWARD T. CONDON, Jr.
Witnesses :

Fredk. F. Schuetz,
Louisa E. Simson.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for live cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

"Washington, D. C."

1,080,839.

A. LUCIANO.

PHONOGRAPH REPRODUCER.
APPLICATION PILED SEPT. 18, 1912;

Patented Dec. 9, 1913.

WITNESSES:

BY

INVENTOR

AnORNEY

COLUMBIA PLANOOBAPH CO.. WASHINGTON. D. C.

insriTED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

ACHILLE LUCIANO, OF BLOOMFIELD, NEW JERSEY. ASSIGNOR TO NIGHTINGALE
REPRODUCER CO., OF NEWARK, NEW JERSEY.

PHONOGRAPH-REPRODUCER.

1,080,839.

Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Dec. 9, 1913.

Application filed September 18, 1912. Serral No. 720,950.

To all whom it may concern :

Be it known that I, Aciiille Luciano, a
subject of the King of Italy, residing at
Bloomfield,^ in the county of Essex and
-^ State of New Jersey, have invented certain
new and useful Improvements in Phono-
graph-Reproducers; and I do hei-eby de-
clare the following to be a full, clear, and ex-
act description of the invention, such as will

10 enable others skilled in the art to which it
appertains to make and use the same, refer-
ence being had to the accompanying draw-
ings, and to. figures of reference marked
thereon, which form a part of this specifi-

15 cation.

This invention relates to an improved
gramophone reproducer and is of the type
that is arranged with the sound box verti-
cal to the record and is adapted for use with

20 its stylus projecting in substantially the
same plane as the diaphragm and having its
stylus adapted to be moved transversely by
the groove so as to transmit its vibrations di-
rectly to the diaphragm.

25 T]:e reproducer comprises a sound box in
which the diaphragm is mounted in any
usual manner, the stylus rod being pivoted
by means of a pivotal connection that per-
mits a limited transverse movement at the

30 pivotal point, the stylus rod thus rocking
normally at its pivotal point, but jd elding to
an extent under undue strain in a transverse
direction.

The invention also resides in the stylus

35 Tv-hicli is mounted on the end of the rod, and
which submits successive portions of its pe-
riphery to the groove whereby the groove is
net subjected to undue wear and the fric-
tion is minimized, while the .sound repro-

^■0 duction is not impaired.

The invention is illustrated in the accom-
panying drawing, in which, —

Figure 1 is a front A'iew of my improved
stylus, and Fig. 2 is a vertical section of the

i5 same through the center, the pivotal post
being shown in elevation.

The reproducer comprises a sound box 10,
which is made of any suitable shape, having
the marginal portion 11 provided with a

'^O flange 12. Against the flange are arranged
rubber rings 13 against which is seated the
diaphragm 14, and the rubber. rings 15 in
the rear of the diaphragm at its edge are
held in place by the back plate 16 provided

^5 Avith the usual Idoss 17 for attaching it to the

tube which leads to the horn. Latches 18,
pivoted at 19, are swung to lock the back
plate in position, the rings 13 and 15, which
are resilient, acting to firmly hold, but with
not sufficient enough strength to break the 60
diaphragm, the diaphragm being made of
any of the usual materials employed for this
purpose, such as mica. At the edge of the
sound box is a post 20 on which is arranged
the stylus rod 21 which extends up to the 65
center of the diaphragm, getting thinner and
narrower toward its upper end, as at 22, so
as to give it more flexibility and vibration,
and is provided on its end Avith a boss 23
Avhich rests against the diaphragm. On the 70
rear of the diaphragm is arranged a spider
21 which is preferabl}' made of metal and
has, on its edge, separated feet 25 which
bear on the diaphragm at some little distance
from the boss 23 and on the opposite side. 75
A screw 26 passes through the spider and
into the boss 23 to clamp the parts together
and to clamp the diaphragm betAveen the
boss and the spider.

The stylus rod extends below the post 20 80
and forms an extension 27 provided with a
recess 28 into which fits the shank 29 of
the stylus, being held in place by a set-
screw 30. The stylus is forked at its lower
end 31, and between the arms of the fork 85
is rotatably mounted a stylus wheel 32 which
has its edge 33 pointed or sharpened so as
to enter the groove of the record. At the
outer end of the post 20 is a nut 31. Be-
tween the nut 34 and the stylus rod is a 90
spring 35, and between the stylus rod and
the sound box is a spring 36, these springs
being of about equal tension and holding
the st^dus rod so that it has a slight pivotal
movement, at the same time permitting a 95
yielding movement, to a limited extent, of
the stylus on the post so that undue strain
is taken up by these springs and Avhile the
vibration of the stylus rod is easy, the
springs act to prevent undue tilting of the 100
stylus rod from damaging the diaphragm.

The reproducer is a structure that pro-
vides a free vibration between the stylus and
the diaphragm, the springs permitting the
free vibration, and not diverting the vil)ra- 105
tion to the sound box at its edges, and per-
mitting the vibration of the stylus rod to
transmit, to the center of the stylus, its
maximum force so that a clear reproduction
of the sound is produced. 113

2

1,080,839

10

1')

The stylus wheel 33 travels easily through
the groove, giving a positive and clear re-
production, minimizing the wear on the
groove and on tlie stylus and removing the
scratching which is present in the case of a
non-rotatable stylus.

Having thus described my invention, what
I claim is : — ■

A reproducer having a sound box casing,
a diaphragm arranged in the sound box cas-
ing, a post extending from the edge of the
sound box casing and at right angles to the
diaphragm, a stylus rod secured to the cen-
ter of the diaphragm and extending to em-
brace the post to slide thereon and having

its projecting end proAided with a stylus,
a nut on the outer end of the post, a spring
encircling the post and abutting on the nut
and the stylus rod, and a second spring en-
circling the post and abutting on the stylus 20
rod and the soimd box casing, the springs
alternately acting as fulcrums for the stylus
rod.

In testimony, that I claim the foregoing, I
have hereunto set my hand this 14th day of 25
September, 1912.

ACHILLE LUCIANO.

Witnesses :

Wm. H. Camfield,
M. A. Johnson.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

Washington, D. C."

J. W. OWEN.

STYLUS FOR SOUND EEPEODUCING MACHINES.

APPLICATION FILED JUHE 7, 1913,

1,080,924.

Patented Dec. 9, 1913.

J^^t^.I,

.1%:a

G

/

&

J^yt^.<5.

^

WITNESSES

J^t^.^.

J^t^.a

/c5 -^,^ JS

^^j>

^^ INVENTOR

By

t-'^^^^rjse^s^^^^g^

ATTORNEY

COLUMBIA PLANOORAPH CO.. WASHINGTON, D. C

UI^ITED STATES PATENT OFFIC:

JAMES W. OWEN, OE LANSDOWNE, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOK TO VICTOR TALKING
MACHINE COMPANY, A CORPORATION OE NEW JERSEY.

STYLUS FOR SOUND-REPRODUCING MACHINES.

1,080,924.

Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Dec. 9, 1913.

Application filed June 7. 1913. Serai Wo. 772,225.

To all whom it may concern:

Be it Imown that I, James W. Owen, a
citizen of the United States, residing in
Lansdowne, county of Delaware, and State
5 of Pennsylvania, have invented certain new
and useful Improvements in Stjdi for
Sound-Eepi'oducing Machines, of which the
following is a specification.

My invention relates to styli for sound

10 reproducing machines and particularly to
those stjdi or needles which are adapted to
be used in talking machines to reproduce
sound from commercial sound record tab-
lets.

15 It is customary, in reproducing sound in
a sound reproducing machine from sound
record tablets with the use of an ordinary
steel stylus or needle, to use the steel stylus
but once, and when a steel stylus has once

20 been employed in reproducing sound from a
given tablet, it is usual to throw it away
and to replace it with a new steel stjdus
to reproduce sound from the same or an-
other tablet.

25 After a steel stylus has been used to re-
produce sound from a sound record tablet,
the tip or point of the stylus is always worn
to an appreciable extent and a sharp edge
is generally formed thereon which tends to

30 cut or unduly wear away the walls of the
groove of another tablet, especially when that
groove of the second tablet is not exactly of
the same shape and size in cross-section as
that of the first tablet, and particularly if

35 that worn stylus would be placed at any
other angle or in any other position than
that which it occupied during the reproduc-
tion of sound in the first sound record tab-
let.

40 The object of my invention is to obviate
the necessity of changing the stylus for
each reproduction of sound from a sound
record tablet, and to provide a stylus which
maj' be used to reproduce sound from a

45 large number of different tablets without
substantial injurj^ to the tablets. I have
discovered that when a sound reproducing
stylus is composed of tungsten, that stylus
may be used repeatedly in reproducing

50 sound from different sound record tablets
without the necessity of re-forming the

point of the stylus and without substantial
injury to the walls of the sound groove.

Tungsten is considerably softer than steel,
and, generally speaking, would be expected 55
to exhibit a much greater wear during the
reproduction of sound from a sound record
tablet, due to the abrasive action of the
material of the sound record tablet upon
that portion of the stylus in engagement 60
with the tablet, than would steel. I have
discovered, however, that when a stylus is
made of tungsten and is used in reproducing
sound from a commercial sound record tab-
let, it exhibits peculiar and unexpected 65
properties. Thus, during the first few rev-
olutions of a sound record tablet, the groove
of which is in engagem.ent with a stylus
made of tungsten, a new tungsten stylus
wears more rapidly than does a steel needle 70
of the same size and shape, but aftei that,
the tungsten stylus wears much more slowly
than such a steel stylus does. As a matter
of fact, after the first few revolutions of
the sound record tablet, and the first wear 75
has appeared on the surface of the stylus,
the stylus wears so slowly as to be substan-
tially negligible. The amount of wear
which a tungsten stylus exhibits during the
reproduction of sound from commercial 80
sound records may be more readilj^ under-
stood when it is stated that when a steel
needle is rim only two or three times across
a record, the point of the steel stylus gener-
ally wears down sufficiently to form a shoul- 85
der and will injure the surface of the sound
record groove to such an extent as will often
render the reproduction of sound from the
record very indistinct. A tungsten stylus,
however, may be nm over the same record 90
300 or 400 times before the reproduction be-
gins to get indistinct.

After the tip of a tungsten stylus under
the abrasive action of the material forming
the sound record tablet has worn sufficiently 95
to substantially fit the groove, the wear on
the tip of a tungsten stylus is very slight.
It would appear that after a certain amovmt
of bearing surface between the end of the
stylus and the walls of the sound record lOO
grooA'e has once been obtained, the wear of
the tungsten stylus is exceedingly slow.

a

1,080,924

In the drawings forming a part of this
application and in which the same reference
characters are employed to designate the
same parts throughout the various views,
5 Figure 1 represents the sound box of a
sound reproducing machine provided with a
stylus of tungsten in engagement with a
sound record tablet, the stylus being shown
on an enlarged scale for the sake of clear-

10 ness; Fig. 2 is a greatly enlarged view of
one form of my improved tungsten stjdus;
Fig. 3 is a cross-sectional view through the
tip of the stylus shown in Fig. 2; Figs. 4
and 5 show a modified form of tungsten

16 stylus, in which the tip is elliptical in cross-
section; Fig. 6 is a diagrammatic view in-
dicating a sound record groove, on a greatly
enlarged scale, and a cross-sectional view of
the tips of the two forms of styli shown in

20 Figs. 2 and 4 in the plane of the surface of
the sound record tablet, and Fig. 7 is a fur-
ther modified form of stylus.

The sound box 1 may be of any improved
shape provided with my improved stylus 2,

25 and the tablet 3 ma.y be any standard
commercial sound record tablet, preferably
one in which the record of sound is in the
form of an undulatory groove 4 of substan-
tially even width and depth arranged

SO spirally in the face of a sound record tablet,
the side walls of Avhich groove are parallel
and coQtain undulations corresponding to
sound waves; but this invention is not to be
construed as being limited for use only with

35 this type of record inasmuch as a stylus
formed of tungsten or tungstenic material
may also be used to cooperate during the re-
production of sound with records in which
the undulations are in the bottom of the

40 groove; that is to say, with records com-
monly known as of the " hill and dale " type.
The groove 4 of such a tablet is diagram-
matically indicated in Fig. 6.

The form of stylus shown in Figs. 1, 2 and

45 3, appears to operate very satisfactorily, and
consists of a cylindrical body portion 5 of
substantially the size of an ordinary steel
needle or stylus used in sound reproducing
machines, a conical portion 6, and a tip 7

50 cylindrical in cross-section, and in diameter
slightly less than the distance between the
top edges of the walls of a sound record
groove to avoid forming a shoulder on the
sides of the tip between the worn and un-

55 worn portions. The end 8 of the tip is pref-
erably given the shape of the transverse
cross-section of a sound record groove.

The modification shown in Figs. 4 and 5
differs only from that shown in Figs. 1 to

60 3 in the shape of the tip. In this form or
embodiment of my invention, the tip 9 is
elliptical in cross-section, and in using this
stylus, the longer axis of the ellipse is placed
transverse to the longitudinal axis of the

65 groove 3. For the reasons above stated, the

longitudinal axis of said ellipse should be
slightly less than the distance between the
top edges of the walls of a sound record
groove. This form of stylus may be set at
a lesser angle to the plane of the face of the yg
sound record tablet than possibly may the
stylus shown in Figs. 1 to 3 without bridg-
ing over the finer vibrations in the walls of
the sound record groove.

In Fig. 7 is shown a further modification 75
in which the record engaging tip 10 of
tungsten and the said tungsten tip is rigidly
secured in the end of the conical portion 6'
of the body portion 5' cf the stylus. , t

It will be apparent from the foregoing, go
that the only portion of the stylus which is
in engagement with the sound record groove
is the tip. When this record engaging tip,
after having been used in the reproduction
of sound from a great many records finally 85
does wear clown to the end of the conical
portion 6 or 6', the stylus must either be re-
pointecl by grinding or by any other suit-
able process to form a new tip when the
stylus is made of timgsten throughout, or 90
the record engaging end must be removed
and replaced with a new tip of tungsten, as
in the modification shown in Fig. 7. It must
be borne in mind, however, that it takes a
large number of reproductions from sound 95
records to wear the record engaging tip of
the stylus forming the subject-matter of
this application down to the conical end of
the stylus body, and that after the tip or
record engaging portion of the stjdus has 100
once been shaped by the abrasi^'e action of
the material of the tablet so that it conforms
to the cross-sectional shape of the groove,
the stylus is not substantially abraded by the
material of the tablet during the reproduc- 105
tion of sound from said tablet.

In using a stylus composed of timgsten, I
deem it preferable to set the stylus so that
its axis is as near normal to the surface of
the tablet as possible. There may be some 110
difficulty experienced in trying to use a
tungsten stylus set at precisely an angle of
90° to the plane of the face of the record
tablet. The small dimensions of the tip of
the stylus tend to make the whole stylus 115
chatter or vibrate longitudinally of the
groove when set at an angle absolutely nor-
mal to the plane of the sound record tablet.
Good results m.ay, however, be obtained
when the angle which the stylus makes vvith 120
the surface of the tablet is between 80 and
88° as is indicated in Fig. 1.

As has been above stated, a stylus of tung-
sten appears to very rapidly shape itself to
conform to the walls of a sound record 125
groove and in doing so, there is at first con-
siderably more wear on the needle than that
which is produced upon a steel needle and
consequently, the cross-sectional area of the
portion of the stylus in actual engagement 130

1,080,924

with the walls of the sound record groove
may be considerabh' greater than that of a
steel stylus of the same size. If, therefore,
the stylus were to be set at a considerable
5 angle to the plane of the sound record tab-
let, as for instance, at an angle of 45° the
surface on the end of the stylus in engage-
ment with the walls of the sound record
groove might be considerably elongated in

10 the direction of the groove, as indicated by
the numeral 11 in Fig. 6 of the drawings.
Such an elongated bearing surface might
tend to bridge those portions of the sound
record 3 containing the finer or rapid vibra-

15 tions or undulations 13 and cause the stylus
to rise upwardly out of engagement with
the very bottom of the groove at those points
where the amplitude and frequency of the
vibrations are great. To overcome this

20 tendency, the tip of a stylus may be trans-
versely elliptical in cross-section so that the
bearing surface 12 of the stylus in actual
contact with the side walls of the groove
mnj be as short longitudinally of the groove

26 as possible, thus permitting the stylus to
freely and readily follow even the finest
vibrations in the walls of the sound record
groove.

The quality of the sound reproduced hj

30 the use of a stylus constructed and operated
in the manner indicated and above described,
is substantially the sam.e as that attained
by the use of a steel needle of the same size
and proportions. If there is any substantial

35 difference in the quality of the tone or sound
produced by the use of the styli composed of
tungsten and that composed of steel, that
difference consists mainly in a production of
less scratch or hiss during the reproduction

40 of sound when the tungsten stylus is used
than when steel is employed as a stylus.

A further characteristic or peculiarity
which tungsten exhibits when used as a
stylus for use in connection with the repro-

45 duciion of sound from commercial records
of sound and which I have discovered is,
that instead of wearing the walls of the
groove of the sound record tablet, tungsten
appears to burnish the walls of the groove.

50 The walls of the sound record groove do not
appear to be substantially worn or injured
by reason of the engagement of the tungsten
stylus tlierewith during the reproduction of
sound from the record, but rather appear to

55 be smoothed and burnished.

Inasmuch as one of the chief characteris-
tics of tungsten as a material for styli for
use in connection with sound reproducing
machines is that it rapidly wears imtil its

60 tip conforms to the shape of the walls of the
sonnd record groove and having attained
that shape wears so slowly that it may be
used a very great number of times in repro-
ducing sounds from sound record tablets

65 before the tip is worn away, my invention

contemplates and embraces any material
which exhibits substantialh' the same prop-
erties as does tungsten under like or similar
conditions, and any material which exhibits
these properties or characteristics and yg
which is suitable for a sound reproducing
needle or stylus, is fully within the aim and
scope of my invention.

It is well known that tungsten is a mate-
rial which readily unites or forms alloys with 75
various other metals and imparts to such
alloys certain of the characteristics of tung-
sten. It is also well known that tungsten is
closely allied to and is a member of the same
chemical group as molj^bdenum and ura- go
nium. These metals and alloys including
tungsten may, for the sake of brevity, be
termed tungstenic or tungstic materials.
The use of any of these metals, or the alloys
thereof, is fully contemplated by me and is §5
within the aim and scope of my invention in
so far as such materials or alloys exhibit
characteristics similar to those above pointed
out with respect to tungsten in connection
with the use thereof in styli for sound re- 90
producing instruments. It may also be
stated that a further and an important ad-
vantage which results from the use of a
tungsten stjdus o-^^er a steel needle during
the reproduction of sound from a record, 95
resides in the fact that with a tungsten stylus
the quality of the reproduction of sound
remains clear from the beginning to the end
of the record groove. A steel needle, as or-
dinarily used in reproducing sound, may be- 100
come so worn as to form on the tip of the
stylus a flat surface of considerable extent
longitudinally of the groove, during the re-
production of sound from a long record,
and the long surface so formed is liable to 105
bridge over and across the finer curves in
the walls of the groove. A tungsten stylus,
however, is not subject to such wear. A rela-
tively short bearing surface on the tip of
the tungsten stylus is maintained, and does no
not prevent the stylus from accurately fol-
lowing the said finer vibrations. The result
is that with a tungsten stylus, the quality of
the reproduction of sound obtained at the
finish end of the sound record groove is sub- 115
stantially the same as that obtained at the
beginning.

Having thus described my invention, what
I claim and desire to protect by Letters Pat-
ent of the United States is : 120

1. A stylus for sound reproducing ma-
chines composed of tungstenic material.

2. A stjdus for sound reproducing ma-
chines having a record engaging tip com-
posed of tungstenic material. 125

3. A stylus for sonnd reproducing ma-
chines having a record engaging tip com-
posed of tungsten.

4. A stylus for sound reproducing ma-
chines composed of tungsten. 130

1,080,924

5. A stylus for sound reproducing ma-
chines having a tip substantially elliptical
in transverse cross-section, having an end
adapted to engage and cooperate with a
sound record groove and composed of a
tungstenic material.

6. A stylus for sound reproducing ma-
chines having a record engaging tip or end
composed of tungsten, the greatest diameter

of said tip being slightly less than the dis- 10
tance between the top edges of the side walls
of a sound record groove.

In witness whereof, I have hereunto set
my hand this fourth day of June, 1913.
JAMES W. OAVEN.
Witnesses :

Frank B. Middleton, Jr.,
Charles F. Willard.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

Washington, D. C."

p. CATUCCI.

DIAPHRAGM FOE SOUND BOXES.
APPLICATION PILED MAB. 22, 1911,

1,080,953.

Patented Dec. 9, 1913.

^./

a^^^S^^

Jif.^

^■w.^^'.

^:wi^.

^,^i^^U/l

COLUMBIA PL-ANOGRAPH CO., WASHINOTON, D. C.

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

PLINY CATUCCI, OF NEWARK, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR TO A. E. MEISSELBACH &
BROTHER, A CORPORATION OF NEW JERSEY.

DIAPHRAGM FOR SOUND-BOXES.

1,080,953.

Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Dec. 9, 1913.

Application filed March 22, 1911. Serial No. 616,171.

To all whom it may concern:

Be it known that I, Pliny Catucci, a
citizen of the United States, residing in the
city of Newark, county of Essex, and State
5 of New Jersey, have invented certain new
and useful Improvements in Diapliragms
for Sound-Boxes; and I declare the follow-
ing to be a full, clear, and exact description
of the same, such as will enable others

10 skilled in the art to which it pertains to
make, constriict, and use the same.

My invention relates to diaphragms for
sound boxes used for recording and repro-
duction of sound upon the well-known pho-

15 nograph, and more particularly relates to
the form and structure of the diaphragm
itself. Ordinaiily, such diaphragms are
made of glass, mica, celluloid, a thin sheet
metal, as copper, bronze, etc., or any thin

20 elastic membrane. It has been proposed to
construct these diaphragms with concentric
annular corrugations, or with radial corru-
gations, with the idea that such corrugations
will more I'eadily gather up and respond to

25 certain sound vibrations which a plain disk
is incapable of responding to. From a series
of experiments, I have discovered that by
producing in the face of a metallic disk or
diaphragm, what I have termed a grid for-

30 mation of corrugation, I am able not only
to record but also to reproduce more delicate
sound vibrations than has hitherto been pro-
duced hj the use of any of the special forms
of diaphragms. In some cases, I find that

35 one shape or form of grid corrugation will
respond more readily to certain delicate
sound vibrations than a grid of another
character, while such other grid will respond
to sound vibrations which are apparently too

40 gross for other forms of grid. Again, in
some cases, I find it advisable to distort the
disk from a true plain into a concavo-convex
contour. All of these various forms are
illustrated in the accompanying drawings

45 wherein —

Figure 1 illustrates the face of a dia-
phragm made in accordance with my in-
vention with the rectangular form of grid.
Fig. 2 is a similar view showing a triangu-

50 lar form of grid. Fig. .3 is a similar view
wherein the grid is made up of curved cor-
rugations so as to form the complete figure
into rhombuses. Fig. 4 illustrates in cross-

section, a sound box with a flat disk made in
accordance with my invention. Fig. 5 is 55
a view similar to Fig. 4, but having the
diaphragm concaved outwardly;

Similar reference numerals refer to like
parts on the drawings.

I have shown one form of my invention 60
in Fig. 1 wherein a j^lain disk of metal is
stamped with a punch and die so as to form
a circular rib or corrugation 2. Within this
circular corrugation is located the grid here-
tofore mentioned, said grid being formed by 65
a series of rectangular corrugations 3; that
is, corrugations at right angles to each other
so as to form a plurality of square depres-
sions having plane bottoms in the face of
the disk as clearly shown in this figure. In 70
the center of the disk, thus formed, I leave
a portion 4, of the metal or material plain
so as to form a convenient means for attach-
ing the link-stud, 5, such link-stud being
ordinarily larger than a single one of the 75
square depressions in the face of the disk.
In Fig. 2 the construction is substantially
the same with respect to the disk, and a
circular corrugation 2; but the grid is
formed so as to produce the triangular de- 80
pressions 6, the ribs or corrugations as shown
being at angles of 60 degrees, so as to pre-
sent a surface made up of triangles or trian-
gular depressions with plane bottoms. The
center portion in this case, for the attach- 85
ment of the link-stud 5 is hexagonal.

In Fig. 3 I have shown the grid within
the circular corrugation 2 as being made up
of closely curved ribs or corrugations so as
to produce a series of rhomboidal depres- 90
sions 7 with plane bottoms.

Many other forms of grid could be pro-
duced in the face of the diaphragm, and
within the circular corrugation 2. There-
fore, I do not desire to confine myself to 95
any particular or special form of grid, as
many such forms will readily suggest them-
selves to those skilled in the art.

The forms of diaphragms as above illus-
trated and described in the drawings may 100
readily be secured within the sound box, as
shown in Fig. 4. This sound box consists
of the section 8, having an annular ledge 9,
against which is located a rubber gasket 10
followed by a paper gasket 11, upon which 105
rests the margin of the diaphragm 1. Out-

s

1,080,953

side of the diaphragm is another paper gas-
ket 11 upon which rests the flange 12 of the
retaining ring 13, such ring being lield in
position either by " sweating " or by any
5 convenient fastening device.

The sound box ilhistrated in Fig. 5 is
identical in form and construction witli that
illustrated in Fig. 4 with the single excep-
tion of the shape or contour of the dia-

10 phragm. In this case, the diaphragm is
dished outwardly so as to be slightly con-
cavo-convex. I wish it to be understood
that with this diaphragm dished outwardly,
any one of the forms of grids illustrated in

15 the drawings, or in fact any other form of
grid may be used, and still come within the
scope of my invention, with this understand-
ing, however, that such diaphragm whether
flat, or dished, shall be providecl with a se-

20 ries of closely arranged polygonal depres-
sions so as to give the appearance of a grid.
There appears to be formed Avithin the face
of the disk, a plurality of supplemental dia-
phragms, each of which is especially adapt-

25 ed to the recordation and reproduction of
sounds or vibrations which seem to be too
delicate, to be reproduced by the usual plane
diaphragm. This, I believe may be account-
ed for, in the fact that the bottoms of the

30 several depressions are, in themselves sup-
plemental diaphragms, each capable of in-
dependent vibration, and each capable of
responding to some particular element of a
combination of sounds, such as is ordinarily

35 produced in vocal or instrumental music.
The great number of such small supplemen-
tal or independent detached diaphragms,
therefore, makes it possible to secure a more
perfect reproduction of composite sound

40 than appears to be possible with plane disk
diaphragms or diaphragms wherein the sur-

45

50

55

face is ridged with concentric annular cor-
rugations, or even Avith radial corrugations.
I claim :

1. A diaphragm for sound boxes compris-
ing a disk, having a plurality of sets of in-
tersecting corrugations formed in its face,
said corrugations being so arranged as to
form a large number of comparatively small
supplemental plane diaphragms.

2. A diaphragm for sound boxes, compris-
ing a thin metal disk, having a circular cor-
rugation therein, and a large number of
closely arranged angularly disposed, inter-
secting corrugations within said corruga-
tion, whereby a plurality of supplemental
plane polygonal diaphragms are formed.

3. A sound box for sound recording and
reproducing devices comprising a box body
and a diaphragm secured within said box 60
body, said diaphragm having a large num-
ber of closely arranged angularly disposed,
intersecting corrugations in its face where-
by a plurality of supplemental plane polyg-
onal diaphragms are formed.

4. A diaphragm for sound boxes, compris-
ing a metallic disk having a plurality of sets
of intersecting corrugations formed in its
face, said corrugations being so arranged as
to form a large number of comparatively
small supplemental diaphragms.

6. A cliaphi'agm for sound boxes, compris-
ing a thin" metal disk, having a. circular cor-
rugation therein and a grid formed within
said circular corrugation by a plurality of 75
sets of angularly disposed corrugations
whereby a plurality of small supplemental
plane cliaphragms are formed.

PLINY CATUCCI.
Witnesses :

Louis M. Sanders,
Q. B. Feiedel.

65

70

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

Washington, D. C."

p. CATUCCI.

SOUND BOX.
APPLICATION FILED JUNE 15, 1912.

1,080,954.

Patented Dec. 9, 1913.

2 SHEETS-SHEET 1.

i:ai.UMBIA PLANOCRAPH CO.. WASHINOTON, D. C.

p. CATUGCI.

SOUND BOX.
APPLIOATION PILED JUNE 15, 1912.

1,080,954.

Patented Dec. 9, 1913.

2 SHEETS-SHEET 2.

Attest:

Atty

COLUMBIA PLANOOBAPH CO.. WASHINGTON. D. C.

UNITED STATES PATENi: OFFICE.

PLINY CATUCCI, OF NEWARK, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR TO A. F. MEISSELBACH &
BROTHER, A CORPORATION OF NEW JERSEY.

SOUND-BOX.

1,080,951.

Specification of Letters Patent. Patented DeC. 9, 1913.

Application filed June 15, 1912. Serial No. 703,802.

2b all whom it may concern:

Be it kiumu that 1, Plinv Catucci, a
citizen of the I'nitetl States, residinc; in the
city of Newark, counlj' of Essex, and State
6 of New Jersey, have invented certain new
and useful Improvements in Sound-Boxes,
of wliich the following is a full, clear, and
exact description, such as will enable others
skilled in tlve art to make, construct, and

10 use the same.

My invention relates to that class of sound
boxes for the use in phonographs and talk-
ing machines wherein the disk record is
connnonly used, although it may be used in

15 connection with machines using the cylin-
der record ; it relates more particularly to
the improved form of stylus lever and its
method of attachment to tlie bodj' of the
sound box. and is directed more particularly

20 to the simplification of such parts with a
view to the inii)ro\ ement of the results to be
obtained, as well as the reduction of the
cost of manufacture and quickness and
facility of adjustment.

25 In the accompan3'ing drawings forming a
pai't of this specification, Figure 1 is a
front elevation of the complete sound box.
Fig. 2 is a similar view with clamping ring
and diaphragm removed. Fig. 3 is a side

30 ele\ation of the complete box. Fig. 4 is a
similar view of the box body. Fig. 5 is an
enlarged sectional view on line 5 — 5 of Fig.
1. Fig. G is a side \iew of the stylus lever
detached. F'ig. 7 is a plan view of the stylus

35 le\er blank. Fig. 8 is a plan and Fig. !) is
a side elevation of the clamping washer.
Figs. lO", 10^ 10', I(>", 10«. and 10' are re-
spectively perspecti\e views of the several
parts of the sound box arranged in the or-

40 tier in which the}' are assembled to form the
complete box. Figs. 11 and 12 are respec-
tivel.v right and left side elevations of a
modified form of sound box. Figs. 13 and
14 are sections through the right and left

45 supporting lugs. Fig. 15 is a front eleva-
tion and Fig. 10 is an under plan view of
said modified form.

Similar reference numerals refer to like
parts throughout the specification and draw-

50 ings.

The box body consists of the generally
disk-like member 1, having the rearwardly
projecting tubular integTal thimble or
sleeve 2 by which the box is secured to the

65 sound conveyer tube of the instrument.

and through which the sound waves are
conducted. From the margin of the mem-
ber 1, the C3dindrical fiange 3 projects, in
such manner as to leave an annular ledge
or shoulder 4, within the flange 3 as clearly 60
shown in Fig. 5. From tlie outer side of the
flange 3, there project the two lugs 5, 5, to
which the stylus lever, hereinafter to be
more particularly described, is secured.
The lugs 5, 5, are proA'ided with the screw- 65
threaded apertures 6, 6, to receive the fasten-
ing screws 7, 7. The metal between the lugs
5, 5 is cut away as at 8, in such a manner as
to leave a pair of knife edges or f ulcrums
9, 9, which are ranged in alinement Avith 70
the apertures 6, 6, with the edges of the
fulcrums in the general plane of the outer
face of the lugs 5, 5.

Within the box body and bearing upon its
bottom, is located the metal ring 10, which 75
has a width slightly greater than the depth
of the ledge or shoulder 4, and a diameter
slightly less than the inner diameter of said
ledge or shoulder, so that it may rest loosely
within the box body. Within the ring 10 is 80
located the rubber gasket 11, the diaphragm

12 and the gasket 13 in the order named.
The combined thickness of the gaskets and
diaphragm is slightly greater than the
width of the ring. Next outside of the 85
gasket 13, is located the clamping ring 14,
which has an outside diameter to fit with-
in the flange 3, and of a width to overlap
the gasket 13. Screws 15 extend from the
rear of the disk member 1 and are threaded 90
into the ring 14, and when screwed home
seYve to clamp said ring down upon the
edge of the ring 10 Avith the gaskets 11 and

13 under compression, with the diaphragm

12 between them. The diaphragm 12 has 95
a diameter slightly less than the inside di-
ameter of the ring 10, so that when in place
the edge of the diaphragm is free from
contact with the ring.

The stylus lever U> is formed from untem- 100
pered sheet metal, and first blanked out to
the shape illustrated in Fig. 7. The part be-
tween the lines a, and h, is then doubled
over along the axial line while the part be-
tween the lines h and c is bent into generally 105
tubular form, with the apertured lugs 17,
17. projecting diametrically away from the
body of the lever as shown in Fig. 1. The
small apertured end 18, is gi^en a bend at
right angles to the axis and another rectan- 110

1,080,964

gular bend 19, is formed in the lever so that
when completed the lever is of the form and
nliape as shown in Figs. 1, 5, G, and 10*^.
A^'ithin the tubular end of the lever 16, the
5 socket 20, is secured in any convenient man-
ner as by soldering. This socket has the
axial aperture 21 for the reception of the
stylus needle 22, which latter is held in posi-
tion by the clamping screw 23 as will he

10 readily understood.

When completely formed and in place the
apei-tiires of the lugs 17 register with the
screw threaded apertures (>, 6, of the lugs 5,
T), while the necks 24, 24, of said lugs 17. 17,

15 rest upcn the fulcrums 9, 9, beneath the
clamping washers 2;"). 25, with the cambered
lugy 2(), 2(). of said washers bearing upon
the said necks 24, 24. Screws 7, 7, pass
through the washers 25, 25, lugs 17, 17, and

20 into the threaded apertures 6, 6, of the lugs
5, 5, of the box body. The apertured end
18, of the stylus lever is secured to the cen-
ter of the diaphrag-m 12. by means of the
^crew 27, and nut 28.

25 I have shown the clamping ring 14 split
as at 29. This is for convenience in assem-
bling, for ordinarily the stylus lever and dia-
phragm are first secured together as shoAvn
in Fig. 10*", when the gaskets 11 and 13 with

30 the diaphragm 12 between them may be put
in place within the box body and aftenvard
the split ring 14, slipped into place over the
stylus lever lO, without disturbing the parts
previously in place.

85 While I have shoAvn in the drawings, the
box body with the lugs 5, 5. as integral
therewith, I do not wish to be understood as
confining myself to this form. These, and
other manufacturing details will readily

40 suggest themselves to those skilled in the
art.

Frcnx the above detailed description it
will be seen that the mounting for the stylus
lever upon the edge of the box body makes

45 it ])erfectly rigid in a plane parallel to the
diaphragm, and yet perfectly flexible in a
plane at right angles thereto. The lugs 26.
26, being firmly clamped upon the necks 24,
24. of the stylus lever supporting lugs, and

50 holding them in firm engagement with the
fulcrum edges 9, 9, will prevent any tend-
ency to rattle and at the same time permit
the requisite freedom of movement of the
stylus lever.

55 By making the ring 10 slightly narrower
than the combined thiclmess of the gaskets,
and diaphragm and yet wider than the
depth of the ledge 4, the requisite pressure
uiDon the margin of the diaphragm is pro-

60 vided for; and the diameter of said ring be-
ing less than the inside diameter of the
ledge, the assemblage and adjustment of the
parts is greatly facilitated.

In the modification illustrated in Figs, 11

05 to 16, the lugs 5, 5, are shown with inclined

faces; that is to say the outer face of one of
the lugs is tilted or inclined in one direction
out of the general plane of the flange 3,
wdiile the face of the other lug is tilted or
inclined in the opposite direction, as clearly
shown. In order that the Jugs 17 may fit in
place, they are given a slight twist so as to
lie flat upon the f sices of the lugs 5, 5. The
screws 7, 7, and the washers 25, 25, occupy
the same relative positions as hitherto de-
scribed, except that they are correspond-
ing-ly tilted or inclined. The result of this
modified structure is to give the stylus lever
c(msiderably more rigidity in a plane per-
pendicular to the plane of the diajihragm,
and yet permit it to vibrate under the in-
fluence of the dia])hragm when used as a re-
corder oi- permit it to vibrate under the in-
fluence of the record grco\e when used as a
reproducer. The degree of the inclination
of the faces of the lugs 5, 5, and the twist
of the lugs 17, 17, depends in practice upon
the character of record to be used with the
sound box; for example, within certain lim-
its the maximum inclination is best adapted
for the reproduction of the higher notes and
louder tones, as those produced by the so-
prano or tenor voice or a cornet; while the
minimum inclination is best adapted for
selections wherein loAver notes and softer
tones are predominate. This may be ac-
coimted for by the relative torsional resist-
ances offered by the twisting of the necks
24, 24, of the arms or lugs 17, 17.
I claim,

1. In a sound box, the combination of a
box body, a pair of knife edge fulcrums in-
tegral thereAvith. a stylus lever having a
pair of laterally projecting, torsionally flexi-
ble supporting lugs integral therewith and
clamping washers having cambered lugs
for bearing upon and clamping said flexible
lugs against said knife edge fulcrums,

2. In a sound box, a box bod3% a pair of
knife edge fulcrums upon the edge of said
body, a stylus lever, laterally projecting,
flexible lugs integral with said stylus lever,
and clamping washers having cambered lugs
for bearing upon and clamping said lugs
against said fulcrums to permit torsional 115
flexure of said lugs.

3. In a sound box, a circular box body,
having a flange at its circumference, a pair
of supporting lugs upon said flange, a pair

of knife edge fulcrums upon said lugs, a 120
stylus lever, flexible supporting arms pro-
jecting laterally from and integral with
said lever, and clamping washers having
cambered lugs for bearing upon and clamp-
ing said arms to said supporting lugs 125
against said fulcrums to permit torsional
flexure of said arms.

4. In a sound box, a shallow cup shaped
box body, a pair of supporting lugs integral
with and projecting laterally from said box 130

70

75

80

85

90

95

100

105

110

i,080,964

body, a pair of knife edged fulcrums upon
said lugs, said fulcrums having their edges
in alinement with each other and with the
planes of the faces of said lugs, and a stylus
5 lever secured to said lugs and adapted to
oscillate slightly upon said fulcrums.

5. In a sound box, a shallow cup shaped
box body, having an annular ledge or shoul-
der upon the interior thereof, a ring loosely

10 fitted within said ledge or shoulder, said
ring being of greater width than the height
of said ledge or shoulder, a pair of gaskets
with a diaphragm located therebetween,
said gaskets and diaphragm being located

15 within said ring and a flat clamiDing ring
secured to said ledge or shoulder, said
clamping ring overlapping said loosely fit-
ted ring and gaskets and rigidly clamping
said parts to the box body.

20 0. In a sound box, the combination of a
circular flanged box body having a ledge or
shoulder therein, means for flexibly sup-
porting a stylus lever upon said box bodj'^, a
diaphragm connected to said stylus lever.

25 means for supporting said diaphragm with-
in said box body, comprising a ring sur-
rounding said diaphragm and loosely fitted
into said box body, a gasket upon each face
of said diaphragm within said ring and a

30 clamping ring secured to said ledge or
shoulder, said clamping ring overlapping
said loosely fitted ring and gaskets and rig-
idly clamping said parts to the box body.

7. In a sound box, a cup shaped body and
)5 a diaphragm, means for securing said dia-
phragm to said box body comprising a ring
loosely fitted within said box body and sur-
rounding said diaphragm, annular gaskets
upon each face of the margin of said dia-

40 phragm within said ring, and a flat clamp-
ing i-ing overlapping said first named ring
and gaskets, with means for rigidly securing
said clamping ring to the box body to hold
said loosely fitted ring, gaskets and dia-

4 5 phragm rigidly in place within said box
body.

8. In a sound box, a box body provided
with a circular back plate member having a
peripheral cylindrical flange thereon, an an-

50 nular ledge or shoulder connecting said
flange with said back plate member, a pair
of apertured, supporting lugs upon said
flange, each of said lugs being provided with
a knife edged fulcrum bearing, and each

55 having its edge in alinement with the face
of the lug upon which it is located.

9. In a sound box a circular box body
having a flange at its circumference, a pair
of supporting lugs having oppositely in-

60 clined faces respectively, upon said flange.

a knife edge fulcrum upon each of said lugs,
a stylus lever, flexible supporting arms pro-
jecting laterally from said lever, and means
for clamping said arms to the oppositely in-
clined faces of said lugs and against said 65
fulcrums to permit torsional flexure of said
arms.

10. In a sound box, a shallow cup shaped
box body, a pair of supporting lugs project-
ing laterally from said box body, said lugs 70
having respectively oppositely inclined
faces, a pair of fulcrums upon said lugs,
said fulcrums having V-shaped edges in
the planes of the faces of said lugs, and a
stylus lever secured to said lugs, and adapt- 75
ed to oscillate slightly upon said fulcrums.

11. In a sound box, a circular box body
having an outwardly projecting flange at its
periphery, a pair of supporting lugs upon
the outer side of said flange, said lugs hav- 80
ing respectively oppositely inclined fasten-
ing faces, and V-shaped fulcrums upon said
lugs having their edges in alinement with
the respective inclined faces of said lugs.

12. In a sound box, a stylus lever having 85
laterally projecting apertured supporting
arms integral therewith the faces of said
arms lying in intersecting planes, support-
ing lugs upon said sound box, said lugs hav-
ing oppositely inclined faces and means for 90
securing the apertured supporting arms of
said stylus lever to said supporting lugs.

13. In a sound box, a stylus lever made of
flexible imtempered sheet metal, blanked to
shape, and having laterally projecting aper- 95
tured supporting arms, twisted into inter-
secting planes, supporting lugs upon said
sound box, said lugs having oppositely in-
clined faces and means for securing the ap-
ertured supporting arms of said stylus lever 100
to said supporting lugs.

14r. In a sound box, a circular box body
having an outwardly projecting flange at its
periphery, a pair of supporting lugs upon
the outer side of said flange, said lugs hav- 105
ing respectively oppositely inclined fasten-
ing faces, V-shaped fulcrums upon said lugs,
having their edges in alinement with the
respective inclined faces of said lugs, and a
stylus lever having laterally projecting sup- 110
porting lugs twisted into planes to corre-
spond to the oppositely inclined faces of the
lugs upon the box body.

In testimony whereof I hereunto set my
hand and affix my seal this 14th day of June, 115
1912.

PLINY CATUCCI.

Witnesses :

Louis M. Sanders,
W. B. Waltzinger.

Copiei of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

Washington, D. C."

p. WEBEE.

PHONOGRAPH.

APPLICATION FILED JULY 22, 1909.

1,081,352.

Patented Dec. 16, 1913.

^

21

521

:i2:

2k

(^^/iMr:

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

PETER WEBER, OF ORANGE, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR TO NEW JERSEY PATENT
COMPANY, OF WEST ORANGE, NEW JERSEY, A CORPORATION OP NEW JERSEY.

PHONOGRAPH.

1,081,352.

Specification of Letters Patent. Patented DeC. 16, 1913.

Application filed July 22, 1909. Serial No. 509,061.

To all whom it may concern:

Be it kno.wn that I, Peter Weber, a citi-
zen of the United States, and a resident of
Orange, in the county of Essex and State of
6 New Jersej', have made a certain new and
useful Invention in Phonographs, of which
the following is a description.

My invention relates to phonographs, and
the object thereof is, broadly speaking, the

10 production of a compact and efficient device
for the conveying and dissemination of
sound in the reproduction thereof.

More specifically, I provide a structure
wherein the cover for the phonograph is

16 pivoted, and when in open position may be
supported in such position that a sound con-
veying tube connected with the neck of the
reproducer may deliver the sound waves set
up by the vibration of the reproducer dia-

20 phragm into the interior of the said cover.
The cover is provided in its interior with
sound deflecting means, and means for con-
veving the sound so deflected smoothly to
the open or bottom end of the cover, this

26 sound conveying means within the body of
the cover being of such a character as to
amplify the sound. Preferably, the open
end of" the cover, when the latter is in its
open position, is f orwardly directed, the

80 cover being supported in a position at right
angles to that in which it is placed when the
cover is closed. The sound conveying tube
connected to the reproducer is preferably
supported within the cover and directs the

86 sound waves against the inner side of the
top of the cover whence they are deflected
forwardly with amplification ito the open end
of the cover and thence to the audience. By
this construction, sound conveying and am-

40 plifjdng means of sufficient amplification are
provided in a less space than would be nec-
essary if the sound amplifying horn were all
in one structure, as is common, and a com-
pact structure is thereby attained.

45 Other objects of my invention will appear
in the following specification and appended
claims.

For a more perfect understanding of my
invention, attention is hereby directed to the

60 accomi:)anying drawing forming part of this
specification, and representing an end ele-
vation of a phonograph equipped with my
device, the sound conveying tube and the
cover being shown in section.

55 Referring to the drawing, the sound box 1

of the reproducer is carried by the traveling
arm 2 which slides upon guide rod 3 mount-
ed in bracket 4, which is supported upon bed
plate 5 carried by the supporting cabinet 6,
as is common. The neck 7 of the reproducer 60
is connected by a rubber or other elastic con-
nection 8 to the sound conveying tube 9, the
end of connection 8 fitting over a reduced
diameter at the small end of the sound con-
veying tube 9 to form a flexible or telescop- 65
ing connection thereby. The bracket 10 is
suitably secured preferably to the rear side
of casing 6. Upon this bracket 10 the
bracket 11, to which the cover 12 is rigidly
secured as by screws 13, is pivoted, as shown 70
at 14. The cover 12 is adapted to swing-
through a right angle about pivot 14, the cover
being shown in its closed position in dotted
lines and in its open position by the full
line structure. The outer end of bracket 10 75
carrying pivot rod 14 is provided with a
nose 15 upon which a corresponding lug on
bracket 11 rests when the cover is in open
position, a supporting means for the cover
being thus provided when the cover is moved 80
through approximately 90 degrees from its
closed position. It is, of course, obvious
that if desired, additional supporting means
for the cover when in open position might
be provided. The inside of the top of the 85
cover is provided with a sound deflecting
surface IG against which the sound waves
conveyed by tube 9 are adapted to be di-
rected and smoothly deflected therefrom to
the sound conveying and amplifying surface 90
17 within the cover by which the sound
waves are directed to the open end of the
cover. The surface 17 may be tapered as
shown, or of a bell shape oi- other desired
conformation and extends with its axis in a 95
substantially horizontal position when the
cover 12 is open. The tube 9 is preferably
supported when the cover is in open position,
with the large end thereof inserted within
the open cover, but in spaced relation thereto 100
nnd in position to direct the sound waves
against the surface 16. The tube 9 may be
detachably supported in such position by
any convenient means, as, for example, by
means of the supporting rod 18, which is 105
provided at its upper end with an eye
through which the hook 19 secured to the
upper surface of amplifying tube 17 is
passed. Member 18 is shown in the drawing
as extending through the hollow semi- HO

d

1,081,352

spherical lug 20 secured to the upper side of
tube 9, member 18 having a ball 21 formed
on its lower end and retained within member
20. By this means, a ball and socket or uni-
5 versal mounting for the tube 9 is provided.
The link 18 also permits translatory move-
ment of the tube 9 ; so that the sound box 1
is permitted to move in a straight line, as is
common in phonographs of the Edison type.

10 Deflecting surface 16 on the inner side of the
cover may be of any desired conformation
for smoothly guiding the sound waves to the
mouth of the cover Avithout loss of the same.
As shown in the drawing, this surface pref-

16 erably consists of smooth and similar curves

extending from a central elevated apex 22

opposite the axis of tube 9 and delivering

sound waves therefrom to the surface 17.

Having now described my invention, what

20 I claim and desire to protect by Letters Pat-
ent is as follows:

1. In a phonograph, the combination of a
movable reproducer, a pivoted cover for the
same, the interior of which forms a deflector

25 and sound amplifier, a tube connected to the
I'eproducer and suspended within the cover
with its open end opposite the center of the
deflector when the cover is open, the sus-
pending means permitting the tube to par-

30 take of the motion of the reproducer, sub-
stantially as described.

2. In a sound reproducing apparatus, the
combination with a reproducer, of a cover
therefor movable into open and closed jDOsi-

35 tions with respect to the same, means for
supporting said cover in open position, said
cover being provided in the interior thereof
v/ith sound deflecting and amplifying means,
and a sound conveyer in communication with

40 said reproducer and adapted to extend into
said cover through the exit of said sound de-
flecting and amplifying means when the
cover is in open position, substantially as de-
scribed.

45 3. In a sound reproducing apparatus, the
combination with a reproducer, of a pivoted
cover therefor movable into open ancl closed
positions v.'ith respect to the same, means
for supporting said cover in open ]30sition,

50 said cover being provided in the interior
thereof with sound deflecting and amplifj'^-
ing means, ancl a sound conveyer in commu-
nication with said reproducer and adapted
tc extend into said cover through the exit of

55 said sound deflecting and amplifying means
when the cover is in open position, substan-
tially as described.

4. In a sound reproducing machine, the
combination Avith a reproducer and a sup-

60 port for the same, of a cover for the repro-
ducer, a bracket mounted upon the side of
the support, a hinged connection between
said bracket and cover, constructed to sup-
port said cover in open position at an angle

65 to its closed position, said cover being pro-

vided Avith a sound amplifier in the interior
thereof, and means for conveying and di-
recting sound from said reproducer to said
nmplifier, said means comprising a sound
coiiveying tube connected at one end to the 70
rei^roducer and having its other end di-
rected at the center of the amplifier when
the cover is open, ancl means within said
cover for supporting said tube, said last
ramed means permitting movement of the 75
tube relatiA'ely to said cover, substantially as
fiescribed.

5. In a sound reproducing machine, the
combination Avith a reproducer and a sup-
port for the same, of a movable cover for g^
the reproducer, the interior of which is pro-
vided Avith a deflector and sound amplifier,
said deflector having iuAvardly tapered sides,
the inner surfaces of which terminate in a
central elevated apex, a connection between g^
said cover and support, said connection be-
ing constructed to support said cover with
tlie axis of said amplifier in a substantially
horizontal plane, and means for conveying
and directing sound from said reproducer to 9^
said deflector, said means comprising a
sound conveying tube connected at one end

to the reproducer and having its other end
directed at the center of the deflector when
the cover is open, substantially as described. ^^

6. In a sound reproducing apparatus, the
combination Avith a reproducer, of a hollow
cover therefor movable into open and closed
positions with respect to the same, said cover
having an open bottom, and a sound con- j^^j
veyer in communication with said repro-
ducer and adapted to communicate with said
cover through the bottom thereof when the
cover is in open position, said conveyer being
in spaced relation with respect to said cover 105
Avhen in operative position with respect
thereto, and said cover having deflecting and
conveying means for discharging sound
AvaA'es from said conA^eyer through the bot-
tom of the cover, substantially as described, hq

7. In a somid reproducing apparatus, the
combination Avith a reproducer, of a pivoted
b.olloAv cover therefor movable into open
imd closed positions Avith respect to the same,
said coA'er haAdng an open bottom, and a ^g
sound conveyer in communication Avith said
reproducer and adapted to communicate
^vith said cover through the bottom thereof
Avhen the cover is in open position, said con-
veyer being in spaced relation Avith respect 120
to said cover Avhen in operative position with
respect thereto, and said cover having de-
flecting and conveying means for discharg-
ing sound waves from said conveyer through

the boiiom of the coA'er, substantially as de- 125
scribed.

8. In a sound reproducing apparatus, the
combination Avith a reproducer, of a hollow
sound deflecting coA^er therefor moA^able into
open and closed positions with respect to the 130

1,081,362

a

same, said cover having an open bottom, and
a sound conveyer in communication with
said reproducer, and means for detachably
suspending said conveyer from said cover
with its exit portion extending into said
cover in spaced relation to the walls thereof
when said cover is in open position, substan-
tially as described.

9. In a sound reproducing apparatus, the
combination with a reproducer, of a cover
therefor movable into open and closed posi-
tions with xespect to the same, said cover
having a sound deflecting inner surface, a
sound conveyer in communication with said

reproducer, and means for suspending said 15
conveyer within said cover with its exit end
directed toward said sound deflecting sur-
face when the cover is in open position, said
means permitting translatory movement of
said conveyer with respect to said cover, sub- 20
stantiall}' as described.

This specification signed and witnessed
this 21st day of July, 1909.

PETEE WEBER.

Witnesses :

Dyer Smith,
Anna R. Klehm.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

Washington, D. C."

1,081,374.

F. L. DYER.

PHONOGRAPH,
APPLICATION PILED JULY 22, 1909,

Patented Dec. 16, 1913.

2 SHEETS-SHEET 1.

^•^

COI.U.MniA PLANOr.RAl')) CO.. WASHIXOTON. U. C.

1,081,374.

F. L. DYER.

PHONOGRAPH.
APPLICATION PILED JULY 22, 1909.

Patented Dec. 16, 1913.

2 SHEETS-SHEXT 2.

Fl^.Z

^ne:^Mf:

COLL.MBIA PLANOGkAPH CO..'

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

FRANK L. DYER, OF MONTCLAIR, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR TO NEW JERSEY PATENT
COMPANY, OF WEST ORANGE. NEW JEESEY, A CORPORATION OF NEW JERSEY.

PHONOGRAPH.

1,081,374.

Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Dec. 16, 1913.

Application filed July 22, 1909. Serial No. 509,039.

2\) all whont, it may concern :

Be it known that I, Frank L. Dykr, n
citizen of the United States, and a resident
of Moiitclair. in the county of Essex and
5 State of Xew Jeivey. ha\e made a certain
new and useful Invention in Phonographs.
of which the foHowinff is a descrijition.

My invention rehites to phonographs, and
the chief object thereof is to provide a pho-

10 nograph reproducer Avhereby cylindrical
sound records of different diameters may
readily be brought into adjusted position to
be engaged by a reproducer stylus.

When it is desired to bring a c_vlindrical

15 sound record of an external diameter differ-
ent from that of a record for the reproduc-
tion of which the phonograph is adjusted
into engagement with the re])roducing
stylus, the desii'ed end may be encompassed

20 either by movement of the phonograph
mandrel or recorel - carrying support into
proper jjosition for the co-action of the rec-
ord carried thereby with the reproducer
stylus, or, the phonograph mandrel lieing

25 stationary, the position of the i^producer
may be adjusted so that the stylus carried
thereby is brought into o])erative relation to
the new^ record. In a comjianion applica-
tion Serial No. 509.040 filed on even date

30 herewith. I disclose means operating by the
last named principle, the mandrel having
no movement toward and away from the re-
producer, while the latter is carried by a
sound conveying tube pivoted at such a

35 point that the reproducer stylus may be
brought into operative relation with records
of ditfei'ent diameters by pivotal movement
of this tube. In the jn-esent application, the
i-eproducer is held in fixed position, Avhile

4 0 the adjustment for different sizes of records
is obtained by movement of the phonograph
mandrel towarel and away from the repro-
ducer.

Having this object in mind, my inven-

4 5 rion consists in the construction of parts and
combinations of elements necessary or de-
sirable for the carrying out of the desired
objects, all of which are more particularly
described and pointed out in the following

50 specification and appended claims.

Attention is hereby directed to the accom-
panying drawings forming part of this
specification, and in which —

Figure 1 represents an end elevation of a

phonogTaph embodying my invention, the 55
inclosing cabinet being shown in section;
and Fig. 2 represents a top plan view of the
same, a record of large diameter being
shown in cross section.

The same reference numerals are em- 60
ployed in both figures to denote correspond-
ing parts.

Referring to the drawings, the driving
shaft 1 carries pulley 2 which is driven from
the motor by means of a belt in the well 65
known fashion. While it is obvions that
within the spirit of my invention the pro.-
gressive feed of the rei:)roducer relative to
the record may be obtained either by move-
ment of the reproducer past the axially im- 70
movable record, or by axial moA^ement of
the record ])ast a stationary reproducer, I
have illustrated in the drawings a form in
which the repi-oducer is stationary, the feed
being obtained by axial movement of the 75
record. To encompass this result the phono-
graph mandrel, its sujjporting means, the
feed screw, and the means for rotating the
mandi-el and feed screw are carried by the
traveling carriage 3 which is slidably 80
mounted upon guide rods 4. 5 supported in
brackets 6. 7 rising from bed plate 8. Mo-
tor 9 is supported from the under side of
bed plate 8 in any convenient manner, a
spring suspension 10. as illustrated in the 85
drawings, being preferable. Reproducer 11,
winch is provided with the usual dia-
phragm, stylus, and other necessary parts,
is supported upon the end of sonncl convey-
ing and amplifying tube 12, reproducer 11 90
preferably being supjiorted in a vertical po-
sition, the end of tube 12 being connected
wdth the neck of the reproducer. Prefer-
ably, the tube 12 extends rearwardly from
reproducer 11. thence* downwardly through 95
the cover 13 of the cabinet 14. and thence
forwardly Avithin the said cabinet beneath
motor 9 to its mouth within the front mem-
ber of cabinet 14.

Bed plate 8 of the phonograph is mount- lOO
ed for movement toward and away from
reproducer 11. This result is preferably
attained by the employment of rollers 15
Avhich are mounted on studs 16 within open-
ing; in the top 13 of cabinet 14. The ma- 105
chine is adapted to operate upon records of
different diameters, as the large record 17
illustrated in full lines in Fig. 1 of the

d

1,081,374

(Irti wings, and the small record 18 illus-
trnted in dolled linos in said figure. As
illustrated, the parts are in proper position
for the operation of the reproducer stylus
5 upon the large record 17. In this position,
bed plate 8 has been moved forwardly, as
illustrated in Fig. 1 of the drawings, until
lugs 19 carried by bed-plate 8 have con-
tacted adjustable stop screws 20 carried by

10 bigs 21 upon the top 13 of the cabinet.
^Vhen it is desired to operate upon a small
record as 18, which has been substituted for
the large record, the bed-plate 8 is moved
rearwardly upon rollers 15 until lugs 22

15 upon the rear of plate 8 contact adjusting
screws 23 mounted in brackets 24 upon the
top 13 of the cabinet. The bed-plate 8 may
be retained, if desired, in either adjusted
position by any convenient retaining means.

20 It is obvious that the construction will be
equivalent if movable bed-plate 8 were
given a vertical movement of adjxistment
instead of one in a horizontal plane, the re-
}n-oducer 11 then being supported horizon-

25 tally above the axis of the mandrel. Such
a construction will be seen by considering
the left hand side of Fig. 1 of the drawings
to be tlie bottom, the amplifying or mouth
])oi'ti()n 25 of sound conveyer 12 in this

30 case, of course, being bent through an angle
of 00 degrees from its position shown in the
drawings, so that the sound would be de-
livered through the front wall of the cabi-
net instead of through the bottom. In such

35 a construction, retaining means for securing
movable carriage 8 in its adjusted positions
Avould be necessary.

As illustrated in the drawings, reproducer
11 is provided with a weight or stylus sup-

40 ])oi-t 26, the spring 27 being relied upon to
hold the st^dus (not shown) in operative
position relative to the record. In the
construction of the movably adjustable car-
riage in which the reproducer is directly

45 above the axis of the mandrel, a floating

weight could be employed without the aid

of a spring, gravity being sufficient to keep

the stylus in operative relation to the record.

As illustrated in the drawings, the man-

50 drel 28 is fixedly mounted iipon sleeve 29
which is supported rotatably within the
standards of traveling carriage 3 mounted
upon giiide rods 4, 5. Driving shaft 1 ex-
tends within slee^ e 29. which sleeve is pro-

55 A'ided internall}^ with a key way Avhich is
engaged by the key 30 upon the end of
shaft 1. Feed screw 31 is carried by trav-
eling carriage 3 and co-acts with feed nut
32 which is carried by the usual spring sup-

60 port 33, the latter being mounted upon le-
ver 34 pivotally mounted at 35 carried by
bracket 36 rising from the adjustable plate
8. The chain of gears 37, 38, 39 connect
sleeve 29 with the shaft of feed screw 31,

rotation of pulley 2 thus resulting in the 65
rotation of the mandrel and the feed screw
and the consequent progression of carriage
3 axially of the mandrel, feed screAv 31 ro-
tating within stationary nut 32. As the
traveling carriage progresses, the sleeve 29 70
nioA'es along dri\ing shaft 1, Avhich extends
farther and farther Avithin the bore of man-
drel 28. It is, of course, obAdous that in
[)lace of this cojistruction I might equally
Avell employ a construction such as that 7 5
illustrated in the application of Frank D.
LeAvis, Serial No. 473,536, for improve-
ments in phonographs, filed January 21,
1909. In such a construction, the driving
shaft is firndy fixed to the rotating mandrel 80
and advances therewith, the shaft being
provided with a key way in Avhich a set
screAv or equivalent deidce in the driving
pulley engages, the pulley being held
against axial movement. 85

Tlie mandrel 28 is adapted for the recep-
ti(m of a record of small size, such as that
illustrated at 18. When it is desired to
operate upon a record of large size, as illus-
trated at 17, it is necessary to place a false 90
mandrel of larger diameter upon mandrel
28. Sucli a false mandrel is shoAvn at 40.
JNIandrel 40 is provided Avith an inner tube
]Dreferably of spring metal 41, Avhich may be
elastically supjK^rted ujwn mandrel 28. At 95
its inner end mandrel 40 may be provided
Avith a short similar tube 42 mou.nted upon
the inner end of mandrel 28. It is obvious
that, if desired, tubes 41 and 42 might be
replaced by a single tube. It will be noticed 100
that sleeve 29 extends beyond the outer end
of mandrel 28 a suitable distance so that
the key 30 upon the end of driving shaft 1
may be ]Drovided Avith a driving key way
throughout the entire traA^el of a record of 105
large size.

Suitable means may be jDrovided for re-
moving feed nut 32 from operative engage-
ment Avith feed screw 31 when it is desired
to change the record. As illustrated in the 110
draAvings, I haA^e mounted feed nut 32 upon
IcA^er 34 which may be provided Avith a suit-
able end as 43 for manipulating the same,
although other suitable means may be ens-
ployed for this purpose. It is to be noted 115
that as motor 9 is carried by the adjustable
bed-plate 8 upon which the pulley 2 is also
sni^ported, the distance between the centers
on the motor shaft and the dnving shaft re-
mains constant. 120

Having now described my inA-ention, Avhat
I claim and desire to protect by Letters Pat-
ent is as follows:

1. In a phonograph, the combination of a
reproducer, means for rotatably supporting 125
cylindrical sound records, a support for said
means, said support being movable toAvard
and away from said reproducer to bring cj''-

1,081,374

liiidrical sound records of different external
diameters in operative relation to said re-
protliicer, and means carried by said support
for producing a relative feedino- movement
5 between said rei)rodncer and said first
named means, substantially as described.

2. In a phonoj>Taph, the combination of a
movable bed |)lale. means carried thereby
for supporting' cylindrical sound records.

10 and a reproducer adapted to operate ujion
recoi'ds carried by said means, said bed plate
bein<>' movable toward and away from said
repi'cdncer to brina; Civlindrical records of
different external diameters in operative

15 relation to said reproducer, substantially as
described.

3. In a ])h('nooTai)h, the combination with
a reproducer and a stationary support
therefor, of a bed-plate movable toward and

20 away from said reproducer, a traveling- car-
ria<>e carried by said movable bed-plate, a
supi^ort for cylindrical sound records car-
ried bv said travelino- carriaoe, and mounted
with its axis at rip-ht angles to the direction

25 of movement of said movable bed-plate,
whereby cylindrical records of different ex-
ternal diameters may be brouoht into opera-
tive relation to said reproducer upon move-
ment of said bed i^late toward and away

30 fron) said repi'oducer, and means for pro-
gressing said traveling carriage axially of
said mandrel, substantially as describecl.

4. In a phonograph, the combination with
a rei)roducer mounted in an approximately

35 vertical plane and a stationary sound con-
veyer supi)orting .said reproducer and con-
nected to the neck thereof, of a movable
bed-plate mounted to move in a horizontal
jilane toward and away from said repro-

40 ducer, a mandrel for carrying c.vlindrical
sound records supi^orted by said bed-i^lnte
with its axis at right angles to the direction
of movement of the latter whereby cylin-
drical sound records of different external

45 diameters may be brought into operative re-
lation to said reproducer u]Mm the movement
of said bed plate toward and away from said
reproducer, and means for rotating said
mandrel and feeding it past the reproducer.

50 substantially as described.

o. In a phonograph, the combination with
a reproducer and a stationary support
therefor, of a bed-plate movable toward and
away from said reproducer, a traveling car-

55 i-iage carried by said moval)le bed-plate, a
mandrel for supporting cylindrical sound
records can-ied by said traveling carriage,
and mounted with its axis at right angles to
the direction of movement of said bed-plate

60 whereby cylindrical records of different ex-
ternal diameters may be brought in opera-
tive relation to said reproducei' upon the
movement of said bed plate toward and
away from said reproducer, rotating feed

meafis carried by said traveling carriage, 65
stationary feed means coacting with said ro-
tating means, and means carried by said
movable bed-])late for rotating said mandrel
and said rotating feed means, substantially
as described. 70

f). In a ph(mograph, the combination of a
movable bed plate, moans carried thereby
for suppoi'ting cylindrical sound records, a
I'cpi'oducer adapted to operate upon records
carried by said means, said bed plate being 75
movable toward and away from said repro-
ducer to bring cylindrical records of differ-
ent external diameters in operative relation
to said reproducer, and motor means carried
by said bed plate for rotating said first 80
named means, substantially as described.

7. In a phonograph, the combination mth
a reproducer and a stationary support there-
for, of a bed-plate movable toward and
av.'ay from said reproducer, a traveling car- 85
riage carried by said movable bed-plate, u
record carrying mandrel carried by said
tl•a^■eling carriage, mounted with its axis at
ric'ht angles to the direction of movement

of saitl movable bed-plate, a motor carried 90
by said movable bed-plate, and means op-
erated thereby for rotating said mandrel and
|)r()gressing said traveling carriage axially
of said mandi'el, substantially as described.

8. In a ])honograph, tlie combination with 95
a reproducer and a stationary support there-
for, of a movable bed-plate, and rotatable
means carried thereby for supporting in-
terchangeably cylindrical sound records of
different diameters, said bed-plate being lOO
movable toward and away from said repro-
ducer to bring records of different diameters
in.to operative relation thereto, substantially

as described.

0. In a phonogra])h, the combination with 105
a reproducer, of an adjustable bed-plate,
means carried thereby for supi^orting inter-
changeably cylindrical sound records of
different diameters, said becl-plate being ad-
justable in a direction at right angles to 110
the axis of the supported record to bring
records of different diameters into o])erative
relation to the reproducer, and means for
rotating the supported record and obtaining
a progressive feed between the record and 115
reproducer axial Iv of the record, substan-
tially as described.

10. In a ]:)honograph, the combination of
a reproducer, means for rotatably support-
ing cylindrical soimd records, a support foj- 120
said means, said support being movable to-
Avard and aAvay from said reproducer to
bring cylindrical records of different ex-
ternal diameters in operative relation with
said repr(;ducer, and complete driving 125
means carried by said support for rotating
said first named means, substantially as de-
scribed.

1,081,374

11. Ill a phonograph, the combination of
a reproducer, means for rotatably support-
ing cylindrical sonnd records, a support for
said means, said support being movable to-
5 Avard and away from said reproducer to
brhig cylindrical records of different ex-
ternal diameters in operative relation with
said reproducer, complete driving means
carried by said support for rotating said
]0 first named means, and means also carried

by said support for producing a relative
feeding movement between said reproducer
and said first named means, substantially as
described.

This specification signed and witnessed
this 9 day of July 1909.

FRANK L. DYER.
Witnesses :

Dyer Smith,
An Is A R. Klehm.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents

Washington, D. C."

C. S. BUTLER.
TONE CLARIFYING ATTACHMENT FOR SODND REPRODUCING OR TRANSMITTING INSTRUMENTS.

APPLICATION PILED AUG. 8, 1913.

1,081,719.

Patented Dec. 16, 1913.

J".

y

>3e

^w- ^.

Sf

.-^T

UMOIA PLANOGRAPH CO., WASHINGTON, D. C.

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

CORA STETSON BUTLER, OF CLEVELAND, OHIO.

TONE-CLARIFYING ATTACHMENT FOR SOUND REPRODUCING OR TRANSMITTING

INSTRUMENTS.

1,081,719.

Specification of letters Patent. Patented DeC. 16, 1913.

Application filed August 8, 1913. Serial No. 783,682.

To all whom it may concern:

Be it known that I, Coba Stetson Butlek,
a citizen of the United States, residing at
Cleveland, in the county of Cuyahoga and
5 State of Ohio, have invented a certain new
and useful Improvement in Tone-Clarify-
ing Attachments for Sound Eeproducing or
Transmitting Instruments, of which the fol-
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description,

10 reference being had to the accompanying
drawings.

This invention relates generally to tone
clarifying devices for use with sound pro-
ducing instruments or machines, and has

15 particular reference to a device of this char-
acter which is adapted to be employed with-
in the sound reproducers of prevailing types
of gramophones, telephones, and other such
machines or instruments and is capable of

20 being applied thereto as an attachment with-
out the necessity of making any change or
modification in the sound reproducer.

The objects of my invention are to pro-
vide as an attachment for the sound repro-

25 ducei'S of gramophones, telephones, and
other sound reproducing machines or instru-
ments, a tone clarifying device which may
be quickly and conveniently applied to ex-
isting t}' pes of sound reproducers ; which

30 controls the vibrations of the diaphragm,
preventing its acting too violently and con-
tinuously and thereby eliminating the fluc-

, tuation or echoing effect of the tone which
is usually present in the operation of the

35 aforesaid machines or instruments; which
is very durable; and which is simple and
economical of production.

It is commonly known that, accompany-
ing tones reproduced by machines or instru-

40 ments of the above class, there is an unpleas-
ant grating or rasping sound which de-
tracts materially from musical reproduc-
tions, and, in the case of the reproduction of
speech, results in a confusion of inarticulate

45 sounds, and this very displeasing quality is
most noticeable in tones of high pitch. In
fact it appears to increase in direct propor-
tion to the rise in pitch, which would .seem
to prove that, as the vibrations of the dia-

50 phragm become more rapid and the sound i
waves produced thereby shorter, following I
each other in more rapid succession, there j
becomas an agitated condition of air and j
sound waves within the sound reproducer.

55 In other words, the principal sound waves |

seem to be surmounted by smaller sound
waves or false vibrations or fluctuations, the
resulting effect of which is nothing more
than a noise. It would seem to follow
from this that if certain means w^ere intro-,.60
duced in the sound reproducer which would
obviate this confusion by keeping under con-
trol the diaphragm and consequently the
sound waves directly resulting from the vi-
brations thereof and which, at the same time, 65
Avould interfere in no way with the delicate
operation of the diaphragm, some, if not all
of the disagreeable qualities which are inci-
dent to such instruments would be elimi-
nated. 70

Whether the abo^'e theory is correct or
not, I have found by experiments that, by
placing within the sound reproducers be-
tween the diaphragm and the parallel wall
of the casing, a device comprising a plu- 75
rality of properly arranged disks of various
sizes and materials (as will hereinafter be
described in detail) the reproduction of the
tones are cleared of all impurities resulting
from the false vibrations or fluctuations of 80
the diaphragm, and the effect is practically
the same in richness and clearness as the
original production. To this end I provide
the device set forth in the annexed claims
and illustrated in the accompanying draw- 85
ing forming a part hereof, wherein—

Figure 1 is a central vertical section
through a sound box of a gramophone hav-
ing a device of my invention applied there-
to; Fig. 2 is a sectional detail of a telephone 90
receiver, illustrating the manner in which
my device is used with such instruments;
and Fig. 3 is a perspective of the various
elements which constitute the device, sepa-
rated in order to show their relative sizes 95
and positions. ,

In Fig. 1 of the drawing 1 represents the
casing of a sound box which may be that of
any ordinary gramophone. This casing
con.sists generally of an annular wall 2 and 100
a circular wall 3, from the central portion
of which extends a hollow boss 4 whereby
the sound box may be secured to the sup-
porting member of the gramophone and
which provides means of attachment for a W^
horn or other sound transmitter. Fitting
within the angle between the walls 2 and 3
of the ca.sing is the usual rubber annulns 5
having a channel 6 within which is .securely
held the periphery of the diaphragm 7, and ilO

1,081,719

the annulus 5 is firmly held in position by a
metallic ring 8, the body portion of which is
substantially semi-circular in cross section
and which has a peripheral lip 9 extending
g therefrom and occupying a groove within
the wall 2. This ring is split and is made of
spring metal which permits it to be con-
tracted for the purpose of attachment and
detachment. To the center of the dia-

10 phragm 7 is secured the end of the vibrating
lever 10 which is pivoted at 11 between ears
12 projecting from the casing. The lever
terminates at its lower end in a head 13
which is provided with the usual socket for

15 the reception of the stylus or needle which
may be held in place by the set screw 14.
Occupying the space between the inner snr
face of the diaphragm 7 and the adjacent
parallel wall 3 of the casing is my tone

20 clarifying device (indicated generally at A)
the edge of which is clamped within the
channel 6 along side the periphery of the
diaphragm.

The ciarifjnng device is composed of 4

26 disks which are indicated in the drawing at
15, 16, 17, and 18. The disks are all pro-
vided with central apparatus 19 of uniform
size and preferably greater in diameter than
the opening 20 in the Avail 3 of the sound

SO box. The outer diameters of the disks 15
and 16 are equal and are substantially the
same as that of the diaphragm 7, while the
outer diameter of the disks 17 and 18 are
somewhat less. The aggregate thickness of

85 the disks is something less than the distance
between the inner surface of the diaphragm
2 and the wall 3. The outer edges of the
disks 15 and 16 are preferably cemented to-
gether, either continuously or at points about

40 the circumference and between the adjacent
surfaces of these disks are interposed the
smaller disks 17 and 18. It will be seen
from this that the outer disks provide a cas-
ing within which the disks 17 and 18 float,

45 so to speak, and such a construction greatly
facilitates the handling of the device when
removed from the sound reproducer, al-
though they may be held at one point only,
by cement, the device operating equally as

50 well in either event. The difference (just
noted above) in the aggregate thickness of
the disks and the depth of the cavity which
they occupy permits of the presence of air
between the various disks, and between the

55 surfaces of the outer disks and the adjacent
surfaces of the wall 3 and the diaphragm
7, and this air acts as a cushion in the op-
eration of the instrument to control the vi-
brations of the diaphragm ; and, f urther-

60 more, it seems to have a subduing and
smoothing effect upon the sound waves.

Going into, detail more as to the nature of
the various elements of the clarifier, it will
be stated that the disks 15 and 16 are com-

65 posed of the purest rubber gum obtainable,

which has applied to one of its surfaces a
thin metal coating. This metal coating is
affixed to the gum by distributing evenly
thereover any suitable adhesive solution con-
taining finely divided metal, and, after the >jq
mixture has partially set, by subjecting the
whole to heat of a sufficient degree to cause a
partial vulcanization of the rubber and the
metal. The metal coated surfaces of the
disks are placed to the outside where they 75
contact with the diaphragm and the wall 3
of the casing, and between the inner surfaces
of these disks are located the smaller disks
17 and 18 as hereinbefore described. The
former of these disks is made of paper of a gQ
quality similar to that used by draftsmen
and known to the trade as " detail " paper
and the latter, of a material composed pref-
erably of three parts nitro cellulose and one
part camphor, although other materials pos- g^
sessing substantially the same characteristics
as the above may be used in place thereof,
if desired.

As nearly as I can determine, the rubber
disks and the air cushion (which is effected 90
in the manner previously set forth) act to
sustain the tone and keep down the super-
fluous or artificial vibrations or fluctuations
which seem to occur in the principal sound
waves because of the agitated condition of 95
the air within the sound reproducer and be-
cause of a too violent or continuous vibra-
tion of the diaphragm. I am convinced by
my experiments, however, that those sound
waves which produce the desirable tones, joo
and just referred to as the principal sound
waves, are not disturbed or effected in any
manner b}^ the rubber disks or by the air
cushion, and I wish it to be understood that
the device has no softening or muffling effect nos
upon such tones. To the contrary, the com-
position disk and the paper disk seem to co-
operate in taking up the vibrations of the
diaphragm and accentuating the tones re-
sultant therefrom. The metal coatings of no
the rubber disks avoid their having anv
damping effect upon the diaphragm or wall
of the casing.

A telephone receiver is shown in Fig. 2 of
the drawing, to which is applied one of my 115
clarifying devices where it is illustrated as
haAang its edge clamped between the annu-
lar bead 21, which projects from the inner
face or wall of the cap 22, and the periphery
of the diaphragm 23 Avhich bears upon the 120
outer end of the case 24. The case has an
externally threaded portion 25 for the ap-
plication of the cap 22.

The operation of the device in connection
Avith the telephone receiver is identical to 125
its operation in connection with the sound
box- of the gramophone, and it is obvious
that the same is true if the clarifvingclevice
be used in connection with the transmitter
of a telephone; and I wish it to be under- ig©

i^08i,7ie

stockd that, in spirit, my ioivention embraces
the use of my clarifying device in any sound
reproducing or transmitting machine or in-
strument where the equivalents of the ele-
5 ments comprising the soiuid reproducers
aboA^e set forth, are present.

Having thus described my invention, what
I claim is: —

1. The combination, with the diaphragm
10 ttf a sound reproducing or transmitting in-
strument, of a device of the character set
forth Avhich is adapted to be supported
against the diaphragm, said device compris-
ing a pair of soft rubber disks, and a pair of

15 disks of a diameter less than the diameter
of the rubber disks and composed of resili-
ent material, the latter disks being inter-
posed between the rubber disks, the svirface
of the rubber disks adjacent the diaphragm

20 being metal coated, and all of the disks hav-
ing central apertures.

2. The combination, with the diaphragm
of a sound reproducing or transmitting in-
strument, of a device of the character set

25 forth which is adapted to be supported
against the diaphragm, said device compris-
ing a pair of soft rubber disks having their
edges connected and their outer surfaces
metal coated, and a pair of disks of resilient

30 material and of a diameter less than the di-
ameter of the rubber disks interposed be-
tween the rubber disks, and all of the disks
having central apertures.

3. The combination, with the diaphragm
35 of a sound reproducing or transmitting in-
strument, of a device of the character set
forth which is adapted to be supported
against the diaphragm, said device compris-
ing a pair of soft rubber disks having their

•".0 outer surfaces metal coated and their edges
connected, and a hard, resilient disk of a
diameter less than the diameter of the rub-
ber disks interposed between the former
disks, and all of said disks having central

45 apertiu'es.

4. The combination, with a sound repro-
ducing or transmitting instrument having a
diaphragm and a wall spaced from the dia-
phragm and substantially parallel thereto,

50 of a device of the character set forth which
is adapted to be inserted between the dia-
phragm and the wall, said device compris-
ing a pair of soft rubber disks having their
outer surfaces metal coated, and a disk of

55 hard, resilient material of a diameter less
than the diameter of the rubber disks inter-
posed between the former disks, all of said
disks having central apertures and the ag-
gi'egate thickness of the disks being less

60 than the distance between the diaphragm
and the wall for the purpose specified.

.). The combination, with a soimd repro-
ducing or transmitting instrument having
a diaphragm and a wall spaced from the

<5 diaphragm and substantially parallel there-

to, of a device of the character set forth
which is adapted to be inserted between the
diaphragm and the wall, said device com-
prising a pair of rubber disks having their
outer 3urfaK?es metal coated and their edges ^q
connected, and a pair of disks one of which
is hard and both of which are of resilient
material and of a diameter less than the di-
aimeter of the rubber disks interposed be-
tAveen the rubber disks, each of the disks yj
having a central aperture and the aggregate
thickness of the disks being less than the
distance between the diaphragm and the
wall for the purpose specified.

G. The combiuiation, with a "sound repro- 30
diiicitng ©r transmitting instrument having a
diaphragm and a wall spaced from and sub-
stantially parallel tO' the diaphragm, of a
device of the character set forth which is
adapted to be inserted between the dia- gg
plu'agm and the wall, said device comprising
a i^air of rubber disks having their outer
surfaces metal coated, and a pair of disks
one of which is hard and both of which are
of resilient material and of a diameter less 90
than the diameter of the rubber disks inter-
posed between the rubber disks, each of the
disks having a central aperture and the ag-
gregate thickness of the disks being less than
tiie distance between the diaphragm and the 95
wall for the purpose specified.

7. The combination, with the diaphragm
of a souuvi reproducing or transmitting in-
strument, of a device of the character set
forth which is adapted to be supported 100
against the diaphragm, said device compris-
ing a pair of soft, pliable disks having
hardened outer surfaces, and a hard, resili-
ent disk of a diameter less than the diameter

of the former disks interposed between said 105
disks, all of said disks having central
aj^ertures.

8. The combination, with the diaphragm
of a sound reproducing or transmitting in-
strument, of a dcA^ce of the character set no
forth which is adapted to be supported
against the diaphragm, said device com-
prising a pair of soft, pliable disks having
hardened outer surfaces, and a pair of disks,
one of which is hard and both of which are ng
of resilient material and of a diameter less
than the diameter of the former disks and
interposed between said former disks, and

all of the disks having central apertures.

9. The combination, with the diaphragm 120
of a sound reproducing or transmitting in-
strument, of a device of the character set
forth which is adapted to be suppoi'ted
against the diaphragm, said device compris-
ing a pair of soft, pliable disks having har- 125
dened outer surfaces and having their edges
connected, and a hard, resilient disk of a
diameter less than the diameter of the former
disks interposed betAveen said disks, and all

of the disks having central apertures. isc

1,081,719

10. The combination, with the diaphragm
of a sound reproducing or transmitting in-
strument, of a device of the character set
forth which is adapted to be supported

5 against the diaphragm, said device com-
prising a pair of soft, pliable disks having
hardened outer surfaces and their edges
connected, and a pair of disks interposed
between the former disks, one of which is
10 hard and both of which are of resilient
material, all of said disks having central
apertures.

11. The combination, with the diaphragm
of a sound reproducing or transmitting in-

15 strument, of a device of the character set
forth which is adapted to be supported
against the diaphragm, said device compris-
ing a pair of soft, pliable disks having har-

dened outer surfaces, and a hard, resilient
disk interposed between the former disks. 20

12. The combination, with the diaphragm
of a sound reproducing or transmitting in-
strument, of a device of the character set
forth which is adapted to be supported
against the diaphragm, said device compris- 25
ing a pair of soft, pliable disks having har-
dened outer surfaces, and a pair of disks of
resilient material interposed between the
former disks.

In testimony whereof, I hereunto affix my 30
signature in the presence of two witnesses.

CORA STETSON BUTLEE.

Witnesses :

Been NAN B. West,
Emil, Gruenfeldt.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

Washington, D. C."

1,082,709.

J. SCHUMACHER.

BLANK FOR TALKING MACHINE RECORDS.

APPLICATION FILED APK. 11, 1903.

Patented Dec. 30, 1913.

cl^^-^

_Z7

c^^

c::^^*^^

J2?

^27

r^ztr

ZG^tS^<^/

z:y^j/.s

tj^ c

-^

^

_Jj7^fjGZt/:or'.'

<z/;z^f:t^7'/Z^f/,

COLUMBIA PU^NOORAPH CO., WASHINOTON, D. C.

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

JOHN SCHTJMACHEIl, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR TO JOSEPH SANDERS.
BLANK FOR TALKING-MACHINE RECORDS.

1,083,709.

Specification of Letters Patent. Patented DeC. 30, 1913.

Application filed April 11. 1903. Serial No. 152,191.

To all whom, it may concern :

Be it known that I, John Schum.\cii!:i?. n
citizen of the United States, residing at
Chicago, in the county of Cook and State of
5 Illinois, haA'e invented certain new and use-
ful Improvements in Blanks for Talking-
^Machine Eecords, of which the following is
a specification.
The present invention relates more par-

10 ticularly to a blank for that class of records
that are made and put upon the market in
completed condition, ready for use on talk-
ing machines used principally for amuse-
ment. Such records are usually made on

15 flat circular disks or blanks and these blanks
are usually made of a composition of
which shellac is the principal ingredient.
They are heavy and expensive, and they
break easily when subjected to a sharp,

20 sudden impact. Shellac is usually used
but other plastics such as guttapercha,
wax and materials of a similar nature are
available and may be used in some cases with
perfect satisfaction. So far as the present

25 invention is concerned, I regard all suitable
plastics as equivalents and hence the term
shellac as herein used is to be construed as
including said equivalents.

The objects of the present invention are

30 to provide a record blank which is less ex-
pensive, of less weight, and less liable to
breakage than blanks made wholly of
shellac or of a composition of which shellac
is the principal ingredient, or of other

35 plastic material.

To these ends I make the blank of a body
or core of some flexible porous material —
such, for example as card-board or blotting
paper — and I coat this body or core on one

40 or both of its faces with a plastic material,
such as shellac or a composition containing
shellac, which is adapted to receive and re-
tain impression. The helical groove of the
record is only an almost infinitesimal frac-

45 tion of an inch in depth and in order to
meet the requirements in this respect it is
only necessarj' that the coating be of suffi-
cient depth to receive the groove. In ordi-
nary cases fifteen one-thousandths of an inch

50 will suffice. I desire to have it understood
however, that the invention is not limited to
the material of which the coating is made,
nor to the depth of the coating.

In practice I prefer to use a core or body

55 of blotting paper which possesses the ad-
vantages of the necessary lightness, flexi-

bility, and porosity besides which it is in-
exj^ensive. Preferabl}^ this core or body is
first sized. As a size I pi'efer to use a mix-
ture of flour, glue and water in about the
proportions of one pound of flour to one
ounce of glue and water necessary for mix-
ing as follows: To the flour is added cold
Avater, stirring it meanwhile, until the mass
reaches the consistency of. say, book -binders'
pa.ste. Boiling water to the quantity of say
one and one-half gallons, more or less, is
then added, stirring the mass meanwhile,
until the mass becomes .semitransparent and
resembles laundry starch both in appearance
and in consistency. To this — at any desired
slage — is added the glue, after the latter has
been dissolved in a sufficient quantity of
water to bring it to a liquid state. This size
i> preferably laid onto the porous body (and
preferably on only one side thereof) by
means of a brush, although it may be applied
by immersing the body in the size. In either
event the size penetrates the body to a
greater or less depth. Usually more or less
of it passes completely through the bodj'-,
leaving the greater and thicker portion as a
surface coating and filler which, to a greater
or less extent, fills and stops up the pores or
interstices of the body. The body is then
dried either artificially or by exposure to the
atmosphere. When this size, or filler is
thoroughly dried the sized body is treated
with a coating of shellac or a composition
containing shellac, or other plastic compo-
sition. If shellac or a composition contain-
ing shellac is used it is thinned by the addi-
tion of alcohol until it is of such consistencv
that it may be easily applied with a brush
or, if desired, the sized body may be im-
mersed in a bath of it. It is preferable how-
ever, to apply it Avith a brush because ordi-
narily it will be necessary and desirable to
apply it to only one face of the core or body.
When thus applied to only one face, the core
may be placed on a flat table or the like with
the unshellacked side downward and allowed
to remain until the shellac hardens and in
this position the disk will dry flat and true,
whereas if the disk be immersed it will be
necessary to suspend it or stand it on edge,
and in this condition it may warp so as to
require subsequent treatment to make it true-
In either case notwithstanding the sizing the
shellac will penetrate the body or core to
such a distance that the one will be firmly
and securely anchored to the other, so that

60

S5

70

75

80

85

90

95

100

105

110

1,082,709

7

they cannot cleave apart. Ordinarily, if the
shellac is of the proper consistency, one coat
or layer will be sufficient, but if it is found
necessary to do so more than one coat may be
5 applied.

It is ijot intended that the sizing shall
wholly prevent the shellac from penetrating
file porous core or body but simply that i^
shall limit the quantity that the body ab-

10 sorbs. Without any sizing it would be nec-
essary to apply repeated coats of shellac un-
til the limit of saturation of the porous
body is reached, and this would be objec-
tionable because of both the weight arid the

15 cost. With a size such as described the shellac
will penetrate the porous body more or less
and is preferably made to penetrate com-
pletely through it because it then forms a
bond which binds the fibers of the body to-

20 gether and reduces its flexibility. It does
not make it absolutely rigid, and it would
not be desirable to do so, a certain degree of
flexibilit}^ being desirable because it ren-
ders it less frangible and therefore less lia-

25 ble to break.

In its completed condition the blank is a
normally flat disk of sufficient rigidity to
maintain or substantially maintain its nor-
mal shape in ordinary handling. That is

30 to say it ma}- be handled precisely as the
above described blanks or records at pres-
ent in use are handled and if held at one
side and in horizontal position it will not
bend appreciably under its own weight. At

35 the same time it does not have the rigidity
and therefore it does not have the frangibil-
ity of the records of commerce.

In the accompanying drawing, which is
made a part of this specification : Figure 1

40 is a face view of a record blank embodying
the invention, portions of the size and
plastic coating being broken away. Fig. 2
is a transverse section thereof. Fig. 3 is a
section of a fragment thereof, thickness be-

45 ing exaggei-ated. Fig. 4 is an exaggerated
section of a fragTnent of a blank of different
form embodying some features of the in-
vention.

A represents the body or core of porous,

50 flexible material such as blotting paper,
card-board or the like.

B is the size which coats one or both
faces of the body or core and penetrates it
more or less.

55 C is the coating of shellac or a composi-
tion containing shellac (say shellac and lamp
black) or other plastic composition and
providing the surface for receiving the rec-
ord. It penetrates the sizing and also the

60 body or core, to a greater or less extent so
that in completed condition the blank con-
sists of a homogeneous, center, made up of
paper fibefpsize and shellac, and a surface
coating of shellac.

65 Although it is desirable, still it is not

necessary to size the body and in Fig. 4 I
have shown a fragment of a blank in which
the plastic coating is applied directly to
the body, and to both faces thereof. In or-
der to still further prevent the record
from bending too freely, and compelling it
to lie flat when in use, it may be embossed
as shown in Figs. 1, 2 and 3, Avhere D rep-
resents an embossed bead near the edge of
the blank and E a circular, centrally located
raised portion. This embossing may be
done by the same operation that impresses
the record upon the blank. The upper and
lower faces of the embossed features are par-
allel and their sides slope or flare so that a
number of records may be nested together.

What I claim as neAv and desire to secure
by Letters Patent is:

1. A sound record tablet blank comprising
a base of fibrous material, ji surface of sound
record receiving material capabie'of soften-
ing under the action of heat to receive the
imi^ress of a sound record matrix and resist-
ant when cold to the action of a pointed
stylus, and a sizing in the base permeable
thr ou ghpu t the base to the surfacing ma-
terial. """^

2. A sound record tablet blank comprising
a base of fibrous material, soimd record
receiving material applied thereto, and a
sizing in said base pervious to said record
material.

3. A sound record tablet blank consisting
of a bas'e of fibrous material permeated by
a sizing "and^ by a record material sufficiently
Kar^SPto practically resist the action of a
pointed stylus, and a surface layer of the
same record materiaFupOn said base.

IT A sound record tablet consisting of ,ai_

7C

75

80

85

95

100

base of fibrous material containing both a
sizing and thermoplastic record receiving
material which latter is sufficiently hard
when cold to practically resist the action of
a pointed stylus, and a layer of such record
receiving material qn the surface of the
tablet with a sound record groove impressed
therein.

5. A thermoplastic sound record tablet
blank having
understructure

a formed fibrous base or
containing shellac as the

105

110

115

shellac as
thermoplastic element, and a surface coating
richer in shellac than the body portion.

6. A sound record tablet composed of a
fibrous base having a coating of thermo-
plastic record material of sufficient hard-
ness when cold to normall^^ resist the action
of a pointed stylus, said tablet being in the
form of a disk of uniform thickness
throughout the area reserved for the impress
of a sound record groove, and having a
sound record groove impressed in said area
with the body of the tablet embossed both
exterior and interior to said record groove
receiving area.

7. A sound record tablet containing ther- ISO

120

126

1,082,709

moplastic material on its record receiving
face, and having a fibi'ous base also contain-
ing thermoplastic material, the said tablet
having a sound record groove impressed in
5 the surface and the body of the tablet being
embossed adjacent to the record groove re-
ceiving area.

S. A sound record tablet blank comprising
a formed base of fibrous material, a sizing
10 of flour and glue applied thereto, and pene-
trating said fibrous base, and a thermo-
plastic record recei\4ng coating applied to
the sized biise.

9. A sound record tablet blank having a
15 pervious sized fibrous understructure, and a

record receiving material on said under-
structure and penetrating the interstices
thereof, said record receiving material hav-
ing thermoplastic qualities due to the pres-
20 ence of shellac.

10. A sound record tablet having a ther-
moplastic record receiving surface and a
pervious sized fibrous carrier therefor hav-
ing its interstices penetrated by the surface

25 material, the thermoplasticity of said ma-
terial being due to the presence of shellac.

11. A sound record tablet having a ther-

moplastic record receiving surface and a
fibi'ous carrier therefor containing a sizing
and also having its interstices penetrated by 30
the said record receiving material, the said
record receiving material impai^ting ther-
moplasticity to the base or carrier.

12. A sound record tablet comprising a
formed fibrous base with a shellac composi- 35
tion forming a sound record receiving sur-
face and also penetrating the interstices of
the base and binding the fibers thereof to-
gether.

13. As a new article of manufacture, a 40
normally flat record blank of sufficient rigid-
ity to substantially maintain its shape in
ordinary handling, said blank having a
homogeneous core or center made up of a
porous body of fibrous material and a bond 45
permeating said body, and a surface coating

of plastic gramophone material permeating
the core, said surface coating being adapted
to receive and retain impressions, substan-
tially as described.

JOHN SCHUMACHEE.
Witnesses :

Seth Bibbs,
L. M. Hopkins.

Copies of tUs patent may be obtained for five cents each, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents,

Washin^on, D. C."

W. W. ZACKEY.

SODND BOX ARM FOR TALKING MACHINES.
APPLICATION PILED OCT. 12, 1912.

1,083,045.

Patented Dec. 30, 1913.

^^■^-

INVENTOR

(^C^.^s^^^/C^-

AIIUKNbr&

COLUMBIA PLANOORAPM CO., WASHINOTON, D. C.

UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.

WILLIAM W. ZACKEY, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR OP FORTY-NINE
ONE-HUNDREDTHS TO CHARLES B. HEWITT, OF BURLINGTON, NEW JERSEY.

SOUND-BOX ARM FOR TALKING-MACHINES.

1,083,045.

Specification of letters Patent. Patented DeC. 30, 1913.

Application filed October 12, 1912. Serial No. 725,447.

To all whom it may concern :

Be it known that I, William W. Zackey,
a citizen of the United States, and residing
in the city and county of Philadelphia,
5 State of Pennsylvania, have invented a new
and useful Sound -Box Arm for Talking-
Machines, of which the following is a speci-
fication.

This invention relates to improvements in

10 talking machines and more particularly to
the sound amplifying devices and has for
an object to provide an amplifying arm and
horn which are capable of transmitting and
reproducing the sound with a minimum of

15 variation from the original.

It has for a further object to provide a
novel means of eliminating the scratching
and scraping noises which are produced by
movements of the sound arm caused by vi-

20 brations of the sound record or irregulari-
ties in its surface. To this end I have de-
vised a construction wherein the amplifying
arm is maintained substantially in equilib-
rium, or floating condition, above the record

25 but is so adjusted and arranged as to per-
mit an extremely sensitive action of the nee-
dle with respect to the record.

It further consists of other novel features
of construction all as will be hereinafter

30 fully set forth.

For the purpose of illustrating my inven-
tion, I have shown in the accompanying
drawings a preferred embodiment which is
at present preferred by me, since the same

35 has been found in practice to give satisfac-
tory and reliable results, although it is to be
understood that the various instrumentali-
ties of which my invention consists can be
variously arranged and organized and that

40 my invention is not limited to the precise ar-
rangement and organization of these in-
strumentalities as herein shown and de-
scribed.

Figure 1 represents a side elevation of a

45 sound reproducing device, embodying my
invention, the same being shown partly in
section. Fig. 2 represents an enlarged sec-
tion of a portion of the device. Fig. 3 rep-
resents a section on line x — x. of Fig. 2.

60 Fig. 4 represents a perspective of the sup-
porting device for the sound arm. Fig. 5

represents a section of a portion of the
same. Fig. 6 represents a section of a por-
tion of the sound arm showing its connec-
tion to the sound box. Fig, 7 represents a 55
section of a modified form of the device.

Similar numerals of reference indicate
corresponding parts in the figiires.

Referring to the drawings: — 1 designates
the sound horn or amplifying device by 60
means of which the sound waves are trans-
mitted from the reproducing mechanism
and, in the present instance, this horn is sup-
ported on a cross bar 2, or the like, forming
a part of the box or receptacle within which 65
or upon which the mechanism is mounted.

3 designates the sound arm which carries
on one end thereof a sound box 4 of any
well known construction, carr5'ing the cus-
tomary needle 5, for contact with a record. 70
In the present instance, I have provided a
horn tapering or flaring outwardly from the
sound box 4, and in order to obtain the de-
sired result in the quality and the volume
of the reproduction, I have preferred and 75
have found in practice that an arm which is
apjiroximately elliptical in cross section is
of the most desirable contour for the desired
result.

Attention is directed to the configuration 80
of the horn and arm since a cross section
taken at any point in the length of these
members will show two substantially par-
allel surfaces which are joined by curved
side surfaces and this construction, as has 85
been found, causes a variation in the sound
waves tending to eliminate any scratching
or metallic sounds not forming a component
part of the reproduced sound.

It will be noted that the smaller end of 90
the arm 3 is joined directly to the sound box
4, and therefore the sound waves are con-
ducted substantially directly from the re-
producing diaphragm to the interior of the
arm 3, there being but a slight turn or bend 95
as shown at 6, upon one portion of the arm.
This construction has the effect of mate*
rially reducing the reaction of the sound
waves incident to a tortuous channel and
the confusion of one sound wave with an- 100
other is substantially eliminated.

In order to provide for the proper move-

1,083,045

ment of the arm 3 with respect to the record,
I have devised a construction wherein the
said arm is substantially balanced or main-
tained in equilibrium so that any mb-s^ement
5 or movements which it may have due to
irregularities in the record or otherwise are
not reflected in the reproduced sounds in
the form of scratching or scraping sound
waves which mar or break up the quality

IQ of the sound reproduced. In carrying out
this embodiment of my invention, I have
preferred to reversely bend or curve the
sound arm 3, to form substantially a U-
shaped portion and bring the delivery end

X5 thereof within the horn 1 in which posi-
tion it is supported upon a mechanism giv-
ing substantially the effect of a universal
joint. This mechanism embodies a knife
edge 7, fixedly carried bj^ the arm 3 in any

20 well known manner and adapted normally
to seat within a beveled slot 8, formed in
the head 9 of a stud 10. It will be noted,
however, that the slot 8 preferably does not
extend the full width of the head 9, so that

26 a seat is formed which will prevent side or
lateral moA^ement of the knife edge 7. The
head 9 of the stud 10 is also cut away on
one side to form an angular face 11, which
gives sufficient clearance on that side to

30 allow the arm 3 to swing on the laiife edge
7, as a pivot, while swinging movement of
the arm from one side to the other is per-
mitted by mounting the stud 10 for rotation
within a sleeve 12, the latter being suitably

35 fixed to the horn support 2. In order that
vertical adjustment of the arm 3 may be
made if desired, I preferably thread the stud
10 and employ a pair of nuts 13 located on
opposite sides of the support 2, with re-

4Q spect to each other, and the action and op-
eration will be readily apparent.

14 designates a lug or projection fixed to
the arm 3, adjacent which and secured to
the horn 1 is a spring catch 15, the latter

45 being adapted at certain times to engage
the lug 14, and thus lock the arm 3 in raised
or inoperative position as shown in dotted
lines, of Fig. 1. Attention is particularly
directed to the cross sectional configuration

60 of both the arm 3 and horn 1, as thereby the
sound is conveyed continuously and Avithout
interruption from the time it leaves the
sound box until discharged from the horn
1, whereby the full sound quality is pre-

55 served ancl a substantially perfect reproduc-
tion thereof attained.

In Fig. 7 I have shown another form of
pivotal connection for the arm 3 to the
support 2, in which the head 9 of the stud

60 10 is provided with a transverse annular
channel IG adapted to receive the pivot head
17 which is of the proper contour to permit
the desired rocking movement. It will be
noted that the pivotal support for the de-

65 livery end of the arm is located at such a

point that the vertical line passing there-
through will also pass through the center
of gravity of the arm.

It will noAv be apparent that I have de-
^ised a complete unitar}^ structure simple in ^q
construction and effective in operation for
reproducing in a jDerfect manner the sound-
waves deliA^ered from the sound box. It
will further be seen that, having once ad-
justed the arm 3 with respect to the record, .^g
there will be substantially no tendency to
distort the sound arm and whatever pres-
sure is transmitted from the record due to
irregularities or the like, is at once taken
up by the swing of the arm on its pivot. gQ

Having thus described my invention,
what I claim as new and desire to secure by
Letters Patent, is:

1. In a talking machine, the combination

of a support, a tapered horn carried thereby, gg
an amplifying arm having a reversely
curved portion, a stud rotatably mounted in
said support haAdng a transverse channel
therein, a pivot carried upon the under side
of the upper termmal of said arm and seat- qq
ing in said channel, and a soimd box carried
by the lower terminal of said arm, said
upper terminal extending a suitable distance
within said horn and freely movable therein.

2. In a talking machine, the combination 95
of a support, an amplifying arm having a
reversely curved portion, one terminal there-
of being in a horizontal plane above the
horizontal plane of the other terminal, a
sound box carried by the lower terminal of ^qo
said arm, a tapered horn stationarily sup-
ported and operatively positioned with re-
spect to the upper terminal of said arm, and
means carried by the said support and co-
acting with said arm at a point adjacent the 2.05
upper terminal of said arm to movably sup-
port said arm, said point being located in a
vertical line passing through the center of
gravity of said arm, whereby said arm is
movable and is balanced in operative posi- hq
tion.

3. In a tallring machine, the combination
of a support, a tapered horn carried there-
by, an amplifying arm having a reversely
curA'ed portion, a stud rotatably mounted in 115
said support haA-ing a transverse channel
therein, a piA^ot carried upon the under side

of the upper terminal of said arm and seat-
ing in said channel, the curve of said arm
extending rearwardly of said pivot to form 120
a counterbalance for the lower terminal of
said arm, which extends forwarclly of said
pivot, and a sound box carried by the lower
terminal of said arm, said upper terminal
being situated at a suitable point with re- 125
spect to said horn and being freely movable
with respect thereto.

4. In a talking machine, an amplifying
device comprising a tubular arm having a
pair of opi^osed flat side walls and opposed 139

1,083,048

concave walls, said walls outwardly diverg-
ing, a sound box communicating with the
end of said arm, and a horn suitably sup-
ported having opposed fiat walls and op-
posed concave walls, the opposite end of
said arm being operatively mounted with
respect to said horn with the flat walls of
each and the concave walls of each in jux-

taposed position forming a continuation
thereof whereby the sound conduit is formed 10
without corners and is uniform in cross sec-
tion throughout its extent.

WILLIAM W. ZACKEY.
Witnesses :

RoBEKT M. Barr,
C. D. McVay.

Copies of this patent may be obtained for five cents eacli, by addressing the " Commissioner of Patents.

Washington, S. C."

)NiAN~INSTITUTION'^ NOIiniliSNrNVINOSHimS S3 I M Vd 8 n~LI B RAR I ES*^SMITHS0NIAN~1NSTITU1

^ N^^DT^

^ilWS*^S^!avyan^LIBRARIEs"sMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOIiniliSNI NVIN0SHimS*^S3 I d Vd

DNIAN"'lNSTITUTI0N'"N0IinillSNrNVIN0SHilWS~S3IHVaan LI B RAR I ES~ SMITHSONIAN INSTIT
r- z„f~\, Z r- Z~

Hims S3iyviJan ljbraries Smithsonian institution NoiiniiiSNi nvinoshiims S3iyvy

CO

iV O
DNIAN^INSTITUTION '^M0linillSNI_NVIN0SHilWs'^S3iyvaan\lBRARIES smithsonian_institui

_ -J z

HiiMs^ssiavaan libraries smithsonian^institution NoiiniiiSNi nvinoshiiws ssiavi

ONIAN~INSTITUTION*^ NOIiniliSNrNVINOSHimS S3 I dVa 8 n~LI B RAR I Es]^SMITHSONIAN INSTITI

CO '^i

Hiiws'^s3 1 ava a n"" LI B RAR i es'^smithsonian_institution NoiiniiiSNi_NviNosHiiws'^S3 1 av

IONIAN INSTITUTION NOIinillSNI^NVINOSHilWS S3iavaan LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN^INSTITU

2 </) ^* E t/j ± t/)

;Hiiws"'s3iavaan~'-'^'''^'"^^ Smithsonian institution NoiiniiiSNi NViN0SHiiws^S3iavi

i w 2r ^ > z OT — z

ONIAN institution '^oiiniiiSNi_NviNOSHiiws S3 1 ava 8 n_LI B R AR I ES smithsonian_institu

1

fei^^

ij^^

"OON

a:

^ m^'

_ W £ tn \. 2:

— t/> ± ' o> '^. £ CO ^

illSNI NVINOSHilWS S3iyvaan LfBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOIinillSNI NVINOSI

2 w z .... w 2 - w "^

3> ^>^..t.j.^^

</) ^ (/} -z CO ' -z. v>

\RIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOIiniliSNI NVINOSHilWS S3iyvyan LIBRARIES SMITHSC

<n — in — t/> ~ '"

iliSNI~'NVIN0SHJ.IlNs'^S3l bVyail'^LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN~'lNSTITUTION^NOIinillSNIl"'NVINOSI-
_r-N,z I- Z r- Z r- ^

^RIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOIiniliSNI NVINOSHilWS SHiyVyaiT LIBRARIES SMITHSC

C/> y . tn zr m 7- -. C/)

iliSNI_NVIN0SHims'^S3iyvyan^LIBRARIEs'^SMITHS0NIAN^INSTITUTI0N'^'^0'J-niliSNI_NVIN0SF

^RIES^SMITHSONIAN^INSTITUTION NOIiniliSNI~'NVINOSHimS S3 I y Vy 8 ll'^LI B RAR I ES SMITHSC
£ w ? t/, ^. ? — m 5

iiiSNi NviNOSHims S3iyvyan libraries Smithsonian institution NoiiniiiSNi NViNOSf

Z W Z ... CO Z V,- w z

5*

W 2 to * 2 -.^;i_-' 5 * 2 (O

\RIES SMITHS0NIAN_INSTITUTI0N NOIiniliSNI NVINOSHilWS SSiyvyail LIBRARIES SMITHSC

W ^ £0 — </J — {/,

iiiSNi NviN0SHims^S3iyvyan libraries Smithsonian institution NoiiniiiSNi~'NViNOSH

'^'- Z r- Z '"Z ■"•

W — (/J 2 j^ ». j^

R I ES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOIiniliSNI ~NVINOSHilWS SSiyvyaiT LIBRARIES SMITHSC

- Z > CO Z CO Z ■ '"

CO

z
o
to

•^ooNo«->NVINOSHillNS S3 I y Vy a n^LI B RAR I ES^SMITHSONIAN^INSTITUTION ^NOIiniliSNI^NVINOSH

r^-K -K a V f^ ^ — ^ 5 to - to 5 ■-

3lr^^

^